Engine Maintenance Manual

RELEASED FOR THE EXCLUSIVE USE BY: AIRCRAFT TECHNICAL PUBLISHERS
Honeywell International Inc.

111 S. 34th Street
Phoenix, Arizona 85034-2802
U.S.A.
CAGE: 99193
Telephone: (800) 601-3099 (Toll Free U.S.A./Canada)
Telephone: (602) 365-3099 (International Direct)
Telephone: 00-800-601-30999 (EMEA Toll Free)
Telephone: 420-234-625-500 (EMEA Direct)
Web site: www.myaerospace.com
Engine Maintenance Manual
Turboprop Aircraft Engine

Part Number Model CAGE
3103870-1 TPE331-12UA-701G 99193
3103870-3, -4, -8, TPE331-12UAR-701G 99193
-9
3103870-6, -7, -11, TPE331-12UHR-701G 99193
-12
This document contains technical data and is subject to U.S. export regulations. These commodities, technology, or software
were exported from the United States in accordance with the export administration regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S.
law is prohibited.
ECCN: 9E991, NLR Eligible.
Page T-1
UP495246
Publication Number 72-01-36, Revision 6 Initial 31 Jan 1990

Revised 31 Jan 2012
© Honeywell International Inc. Do not copy without express permission of Honeywell.
ENGINE MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Honeywell – Confidential
THIS DOCUMENT AND ALL INFORMATION AND EXPRESSION CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE PROPERTY OF HONEYWELL
INTERNATIONAL INC., ARE PROVIDED IN CONFIDENCE, AND MAY BE USED BY PERSONS REQUIRED BY FEDERAL AVIATION
REGULATION PART 21.50 TO COMPLY WITH ANY OF THE TERMS OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH ABOVE,
NO PERSON MAY, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, USE, DUPLICATE OR DISCLOSE THIS INFORMATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT
THE PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL INC.
Honeywell Materials License Agreement

The documents and information contained herein ("the Materials") are the proprietary data of Honeywell International Inc. and Honeywell
Intellectual Properties Inc. (collectively "Honeywell"). These Materials are provided for the exclusive use of Honeywell Service Centers;
Honeywell-authorized repair facilities; operators of Honeywell aerospace products subject to an applicable product support agreement, their
wholly owned-subsidiaries or a formally designated third party service provider; and direct recipients of Materials from Honeywell’s Aerospace
Technical Publication Distribution. The terms and conditions of this License Agreement govern your use of these Materials, except to the
extent that any terms and conditions of another applicable agreement with Honeywell regarding the operation, maintenance, or repair of
Honeywell aerospace products conflict with the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, in which case the terms and conditions of
the other agreement will govern. However, this License Agreement will govern in the event of a conflict between its terms and conditions
and those of a purchase order or acknowledgement.
1. License Grant – If you are a party to an applicable product support agreement, a Honeywell Service Center agreement, or an authorized
repair facility agreement, Honeywell hereby grants you a limited, non-exclusive license to use these Materials to operate, maintain, or repair
Honeywell aerospace products only in accordance with that agreement.
If you are a direct recipient of these Materials from Honeywell’s Aerospace Technical Publication Distribution and are not a party to an
agreement related to the operation, maintenance or repair of Honeywell aerospace products, Honeywell hereby grants you a limited,
non-exclusive license to use these Materials to maintain or repair the subject Honeywell aerospace products only at the facility to which
these Materials have been shipped ("the Licensed Facility"). Transfer of the Materials to another facility owned by you is permitted only if
the original Licensed Facility retains no copies of the Materials and you provide prior written notice to Honeywell.
2. Rights In Materials – Honeywell retains all rights in these Materials and in any copies thereof that are not expressly granted to you, including
all rights in patents, copyrights, trademarks, and trade secrets. No license to use any Honeywell trademarks or patents is granted under this
License Agreement.
3. Confidentiality – You acknowledge that these Materials contain information that is confidential and proprietary to Honeywell. You agree
to take all reasonable efforts to maintain the confidentiality of these Materials.
4. Assignment And Transfer – This License Agreement may be assigned to a formally designated service designee or transferred to a
subsequent owner or operator of an aircraft containing the subject Honeywell aerospace products. However, the recipient of any such
assignment or transfer must assume all of your obligations under this License Agreement. No assignment or transfer shall relieve any party
of any obligation that such party then has hereunder.
5. Copies of Materials – Unless you have the express written permission of Honeywell, you may not make or permit making of copies of the
Materials. Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may make copies of only portions of the Material for your internal use. You agree to return the
Materials and any copies thereof to Honeywell upon the request of Honeywell.
6. Term – This License Agreement is effective until terminated as set forth herein. This License Agreement will terminate immediately, without
notice from Honeywell, if you fail to comply with any provision of this License Agreement or will terminate simultaneously with the termination
or expiration of your applicable product support agreement, authorized repair facility agreement, or your formal designation as a third party
service provider. Upon termination of this License Agreement, you will return these Materials to Honeywell without retaining any copies and
will have one of your authorized officers certify that all Materials have been returned with no copies retained.
7. Remedies – Honeywell reserves the right to pursue all available remedies and damages resulting from a breach of this License Agreement.
8. Limitation of Liability – Honeywell does not make any representation regarding the use or sufficiency of the Materials. THERE ARE NO
OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
(i) WARRANTIES ARISING FROM COURSE OF PERFORMANCE, DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE, WHICH ARE HEREBY EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMED, OR (ii) WARRANTIES AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN
IF HONEYWELL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF ANY SUCH INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT WILL HONEYWELL BE LIABLE FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SPECIAL DAMAGES, INDIRECT DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF
REVENUES, OR LOSS OF USE, EVEN IF INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS WILL APPLY REGARDLESS OF WHETHER LIABILITY ARISES FROM
BREACH OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO NEGLIGENCE), BY OPERATION OF LAW, OR
OTHERWISE.
9. Controlling Law – This License shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of New York without regard to
the conflicts of laws provisions thereof. This license sets forth the entire agreement between you and Honeywell and may only be modified
by a writing duly executed by the duly authorized representatives of the parties.
UP495246
Page T-2
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
SAFETY ADVISORY
WARNING: BEFORE THE MATERIALS CALLED OUT IN THIS PUBLICATION ARE USED, KNOW THE HANDLING, STORAGE AND
DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER. FAILURE TO OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS’
OR SUPPLIERS’ RECOMMENDATIONS CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DISEASE.
This publication describes physical and chemical processes which can make it necessary to use chemicals, solvents, paints, and other
commercially available materials. The user of this publication must get the Material Safety Data Sheets (OSHA Form 174 or equivalent) from
the manufacturers or suppliers of the materials to be used. The user must know the manufacturer/supplier data and obey the procedures,
recommendations, warnings and cautions set forth for the safe use, handling, storage, and disposal of the materials.
WARRANTY/LIABILITY ADVISORY
WARNING: HONEYWELL ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY HONEYWELL EQUIPMENT WHICH IS NOT MAINTAINED AND/OR
REPAIRED IN ACCORDANCE WITH HONEYWELL’S PUBLISHED INSTRUCTIONS AND/OR HONEYWELL’S FAA/SFAR 36 REPAIR
AUTHORIZATION. NEITHER DOES HONEYWELL ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
FABRICATED BY COMPANIES OTHER THAN HONEYWELL.
WARNING: INCORRECTLY REPAIRED COMPONENTS CAN AFFECT AIRWORTHINESS OR DECREASE THE LIFE OF THE
COMPONENTS. INCORRECTLY FABRICATED SPECIAL TOOLING OR TEST EQUIPMENT CAN RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT
COMPONENTS OR GIVE UNSATISFACTORY RESULTS.
Copyright - Notice
Copyright 1990, 2012 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.

Honeywell is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc.
All other marks are owned by their respective companies.
FAA APPROVED
UP495246
Page T-3
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION
TO HOLDERS OF TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE REPORT NO. 72-01-36 ISSUED FOR USE IN SUPPORT
OF THE FOLLOWING:
Table TI-1 shows the applicable engines.
Table TI-1. Applicable Engines
Engine PN Engine Model No. Aircraft Application

3103870-1 TPE331-12UA-701G Metro III
3103870-3,-4,-8,-9 TPE331-12UAR-701G Metro III/23
3103870-6,-7,-11,-12 TPE331-12UHR-701G Metro 23
Table TI-2 shows the revision history of this EMM.
Table TI-2. Revision History
Revision No. Revision Date

0 31 January 1990
1 15 March 1991
2 10 August 1992
3 11 September 1998
4 29 October 1999
5 10 July 2005
6 31 January 2012
This revision is a full replacement. All changed pages have a new date, as identified in the List of Effective Pages.
Revision bars identify the changed data. See Transmittal information for history of revisions to this EMM.
Remove and discard all pages of the manual and replace them with the attached pages. Write the revision
number, revision date, and replacement date on the Record of Revisions page.
Remove and discard all Temporary Revision pages in this manual. Write the date you remove the Temporary
Revision from the manual on the Record of Temporary Revisions page.
Revision bars mark the technical data that changed in this revision; those changes are described in the Table
of Highlights. Editorial changes are not marked with a revision bar.
The table of highlights tells users what has changed as a result of the revision. The table consists of three
columns.
The Task/Page column identifies the blocks of changed information, such as a task, subtask, graphic, or parts
list, and the page on which that block starts. The block of information often includes the JEMTOSS code. Revision
marks, when provided, identify the location of the change within the block.
The Description of Change column tells about the change or changes within each block. The description of
change is often preceded by a paragraph or figure reference that applies to the block of information.
The Effectivity column tells the user the part number(s) to which the block of information applies. The default
value for this column is "All." "All" means that the block applies to all parts.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TI-1
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table of Highlights
Task/Page Description of Change Effectivity
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Manual was divided into chapters, sections, and All
subjects in accordance with ATA iSpec 2200.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Added metric conversions to all U.S. All

measurements.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Converted AA to microinches. All
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Updated style and format of entire manual to meet All
current Honeywell XML EM template.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Updated special tools, fixtures, and equipment to All

meet current Honeywell standards. Updated
consumable materials and CAGE codes to meet
current Honeywell standards.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed terminology, corrected typographical All

errors, and repagination.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed all brackets [ ] to parentheses ( ). All
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed all instances of the word “ensure”, All

“insure”, and variants, to “make sure”.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed all instances of “trouble shooting”, All

“trouble shoot”, and variants, to “fault isolation”.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed all instances of “volts dc”, “vdc”, and All
variants, to “VDC”.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION The use of “+/-” for range values has been All
removed and the actual range has been added,
where possible.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed “…in accordance with…” to “. Refer to…”. All
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed “…as follows.” to “…as follows:”. All
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed “Manufacturers’” to “Manufacturer’s”. All
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed “MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS” All

to “MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET”.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed all Honeywell addresses for the return All
of parts for exchange, investigation or repair to:
Honeywell International Inc., Distribution Center,
1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ
85034-3440.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TI-2
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table of Highlights (Cont)
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed all Special Tools, Fixtures, and All

Equipment and Consumables Tables to 3-columns,
and placed at the beginning of each section.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Deleted DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION section. All

Information incorporated into SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION section.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Deleted TROUBLESHOOTING section. Information All

incorporated into FAULT ISOLATION section.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Deleted REMOVAL/INSTALLATION section. All

Information incorporated into REMOVAL and
INSTALLATION sections.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Deleted ADJUSTMENT/TEST section. Information All

incorporated into TESTING section.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Deleted CLEANING/PAINTING section. Information All

incorporated into CLEANING and REPAIR
sections.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Deleted APPROVED REPAIRS section. All

Information incorporated into REPAIR section.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Hyperlinks have been added in place of references. All
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Some tables have been incorporated into graphics All
to create a form for measurements.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Added hot parts Warning where needed. All
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Added Job Close-up paragraph into every section. All
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Added standard Warnings, Cautions and Notes to All

the beginning of each section.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Notes moved to follow specific task being referred All
to. (With the exception of Notes specific to the
entire task.)
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Updated callouts, footnotes, and item All

nomenclatures in key for figures and text.
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Added general torque Note to precede all torquing All
procedures.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TI-3
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Figures have been duplicated in new or split All

sections. As needed, titles have been changed to
reflect the section they are in (i.e. Removal,
Installation, etc.).
TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Temporary Revisions 72-190 thru 72-193, 72-199 All

thru 72-205, 72-207 thru 72-237, 72-239, 72-240,
and 73-11 thru 73-15 have been incorporated into
this manual.
SERVICE BULLETIN LIST Revised Service Bulletin list to include: All

TPE331-72-0476R30, TPE331-72-0840R1,
TPE331-72-0941R5, TPE331-72-2014R1,
TPE331-72-2016R5, TPE331-72-2064R1,
TPE331-72-2065, TPE331-72-2080R1,
TPE331-72-2127, TPE331-72-2128R1,
TPE331-72-2129R1, TPE331-72-2131R1,
TPE331-72-2134, TPE331-72-2137R1,
TPE331-72-2148, TPE331-72-2178,
TPE331-73-0230R1, TPE331-A73-0254R2,
TPE331-73-0274, TPE331-73-0275,
TPE331-73-0278, TPE331-75-0009R2.
INTRODUCTION Added JEMTOSS information. All
INTRODUCTION Added paragraph 1.C. Observance of Manual All

Instructions.
INTRODUCTION Added paragraph 1.D. Units of Measure. All
INTRODUCTION Changed title of paragraph 1.E. All
INTRODUCTION Added paragraph 1.F. Page Number Block All

Explanation.
INTRODUCTION Added paragraph 1.G. Application of Jet Engine All

Maintenance Task Oriented Support System
(JEMTOSS).
INTRODUCTION Added paragraph 2. Customer Support Center All
INTRODUCTION Added paragraph 3. References. All
Subtask 70-00-00-200-006-A01 Redefined FPI requirements. All
Subtask 70-00-00-430-004-A01 Updated Table 10005: Standard Torque Values All

for Flared Tubing and Hose Fittings Not Used with
Conical Seals to current torque values.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TI-4
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Subtask 72-00-00-810-004-A01 Revised Figure 1053 to add low torque to All

Procedure 42 per TR 72-200.
Subtask 72-00-00-020-004-A01 Deleted beta tube removal Caution from Step 1 All
per TR 72-209.
Subtask 72-00-00-020-004-A01 Added Warning and Note to NTS checks for faulty All
valve per TR 72-209.
Subtask 72-00-00-100-017-A01 Deleted last sentence from cleaning method All

number 6 Note to strip and apply new finish.
Pageblock 72-00-00-8000 Addendum 601 deleted. All
Pageblock 72-00-00-8000 Addendum 602 incorporated into Life-limited All

component section.
Subtask 72-00-00-200-006-A01 Revised Step 2.D.(2)(h). Added Note and revised All
inspection procedure per TR 72-190.
Subtask 72-00-00-200-010-A01 Added Step 2.H.(2)(d)5 and Note to clarify oil jet All
inspection requirements per TR 72-191.
Subtask 72-00-00-200-010-A01 Revised gearbox inspection per TR 72-192. All
Subtask 72-00-00-200-019-A01 Deleted NTS system ground check from Step All
2.Q.(7) per TR 72-218.
Subtask 72-00-00-200-030-A01 Added Step 2.AA inspect combustion case All

assembly (combustion case assembly installed on
engine) procedure per TR 72-239.
Subtask 72-00-00-200-029-A01 Life-limited component and TBO/CAM information All

incorporated into Inspection from Addendum 602.
Subtask 72-00-00-200-030-A01 Life-limited component and TBO/CAM information All

incorporated into Inspection from Addendum 602.
Subtask 72-00-00-550-004-A01 Updated humidity indicator plug specifications. All
Subtask 72-00-00-550-007-A01 Added Steps 2.E.(8) and (9) to replace referenced All
steps.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TI-5
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Subtask 72-00-00-700-002-A01 Added the following tools to Table 13001 per TR All
72-213: PN 284689-1-1, geartrain lock, PN
284689-2-1, geartrain lock, pressure gage, 0 to
100 PSIG (0 to 690 kPa), pressure gage, 0 to 250
PSIG (0 to 1,724 kPa), sling, weight (13 pounds
(5.90 kg)), weight (18 pounds (8.16 kg)), weight
(26 pounds (11.79 kg)), and weight (38 pounds
(17.24 kg)).
Subtask 72-00-00-700-004-A01 Replaced Table 13003 per TR 72-211. All
Subtask 72-00-00-700-004-A01 Replaced Table 13004 per TR 72-212. All
Subtask 72-00-00-700-004-A01 Replaced NTS Test graphic per TR 72-215. All
Subtask 72-00-00-700-005-A01 Updated Table 13009 to change operating All

temperature to 55°C (130°F) per TR 72-205.
Subtask 72-00-00-700-008-A01 Deleted NTS Lockout Check and PG Reset Check All
and added Step 2.F. Manual Feather Valve Test
Prior To Engine Start per TR 72-235.
Subtask 72-00-00-700-009-A01 Deleted NTS lockout check and PG reset check All
per TR 72-229. (Replaces TR 72-204).
Subtask 72-00-00-700-009-A01 Redefined NTS checks per TR 72-230. All
Subtask 72-00-00-700-010-A01 Redefined NTS Trip System Check per TR 72–214. All
Subtask 72-00-00-700-035-A01 Redefined fuel manifold/nozzle test requirements All

and Figure 13009 (Data Sheet) per TR 72-193.
Subtask 72-00-00-700-051-A01 Updated Note to change SIL-149 to SB All

TPE331-72-2127.
Subtask 72-00-00-700-054-A01 Redefined NTS requirement for repaired engines All

per TR 72-217.
Subtask 72-00-00-700-054-A01 Added Steps 2.AZ.(2) and (3) to redefine NTS tests All
to check for faulty NTS valve per TR 72-237.
Subtask 72-10-02-420-004-A01 Revised CAUTION and NTS check requirement All

per TR 72-219.
Subtask 72-10-02-700-004-A01 Added CAUTION and revised NTS check All

requirement per TR 72-220.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TI-6
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Subject 72-10-03 Incorporated TR72-240 to update PG Assembly All

procedures and add procedures for return spring.

per TR 72-221.
Subtask 72-10-04-420-004-A01 Redefined Removal of NTS Orifice Assembly and All

updated Figure and related parts list with parts
specified in SB TPE331-72-2160 per TR 72-238.
Subtask 72-10-04-420-004-A01 Redefined assembly procedures in accordance All

with part specified in SB TPE331-72-2160 per TR
72-238.
Subtask 72-10-04-420-004-A01 Updated cleaning parts list per TR 72-238. All
Subtask 72-10-04-420-004-A01 Redefined inspection procedures in accordance All

with part specified in SB TPE331-72-2160 per TR
72-238.

per TR 72-238.
Subtask 72-10-05-420-004-A01 Revised Caution and NTS check requirement, and All
added Note per TR 72-224.
Subtask 72-10-05-300-004-A01 Added Caution and revised NTS check requirement All
per TR 72-232.
per TR 72-231.
per TR 72-233.
per TR 72-234.
per TR 72-234.
Subtask 72-10-07-420-004-A01 Revised Caution and NTS check requirement per All
TR 72-225.
TR 72-226.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TI-7
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
per TR 72-227.
TR 72-228.
Subtask 72-30-04-420-004-A01 Revised Sheet 3 of Figure 4016 to update G All

dimension per TR 72-207.
Subtask 72-30-04-300-007-A01 Revised procedures when incorrect curvic coupling All

gasket has been installed. Used
procedure/requirements found in Section 72-50-07
to standardize action requirements.
Subtask 72-40-01-200-004-A01 Revised procedures for combution case (plenum) All

inspection/check per SB TPE331-72-2178.
Subtask 72-50-05-300-004-A01 Corrected temperature for heat treat. All
Subtask 72-50-06-420-005-A01 Added dash number and updated G dimension per All
TR 72-208.
Subtask 72-50-07-200-009-A01 Redefined blade inspection requirements per TR All

72-199.
Subtask 73-10-05-700-004-A01 Revised special tools and consumables required All

per TR 73-15.
Subtask 73-10-05-700-004-A01 Redefined fuel side pressure and leakage test and All
related setup graphic per TR 73-15.
Subtask 73-10-05-700-005-A01 Redefined oil side pressure and leakage test and All
related setup graphic.
Subtask 73-10-08-020-004-A01 Revised graphic to show PRI only solenoid valve All
flow direction per TR 73-13.
Subtask 73-10-08-020-004-A01 Redefined removal procedure of PRI only solenoid All

valve per TR 73-14.
Subtask 73-10-08-420-004-A01 Redefined installation procedure PRI only solenoid All

valve per TR 73-14.
Subtask 73-21-06-020-004-A01 Revised graphic to show fittings and packings per All
TR 73-11.
Subtask 73-21-06-020-004-A01 Redefined removal procedure of fuel pump and All

related fittings per TR 73-12.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TI-8
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Pageblock 73-21-06-4000 Redefined installation procedure of fuel pump and All

related fittings per TR 73-12.
Pageblock 75-10-02-9000 Deleted procedure to paint anti-ice shield All

assembly.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TI-9
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TEMPORARY REVISION NO. 72-241

TO HOLDERS OF TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE ENGINE MAINTENANCE MANUAL 72-01-36,
REVISION 6, DATED 31 JAN 2012. THIS TR IS ALSO APPLICABLE TO THE CD-ROM TPE331-
12/UA/UAR/UHR-701G_H AND THE CD-ROM TPE331-12UA/UAR/UHR-701G_L.
WARNING: READ EACH PAGE CAREFULLY. PUT THE PAGE INTO THE APPLICABLE SECTION AS
SHOWN. THIS TEMPORARY REVISION CAN CONTAIN PAGES THAT REFER TO
DIFFERENT SECTIONS OF THIS CHAPTER. MAKE SURE THAT THE TEMPORARY
REVISION IS CORRECTLY ADDED INTO THE MANUAL. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THESE
INSTRUCTIONS, THERE IS A RISK THE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE WILL NOT BE
DONE CORRECTLY.
INSERT THIS PAGE AS THE FIRST PAGE OF THE MANUAL.
Temporary
Revision Applicable Chapter/Section/Subject
Number Number, Page Number
72-241 72-10-17, INSTALLATION, 4002
72-10-17, INSPECTION/CHECK, 8003
72-30-04, INSTALLATION, 4031
THIS DOCUMENT AND ALL INFORMATION AND EXPRESSION CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE
PROPERTY OF HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL INC., ARE PROVIDED IN CONFIDENCE, AND MAY BE
USED BY PERSONS REQUIRED BY FEDERAL AVIATION REGULATION PART 21.50 TO COMPLY
WITH ANY OF THE TERMS OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH ABOVE, NO
PERSON MAY, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, USE, DUPLICATE OR DISCLOSE THIS INFORMATION FOR
ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL
INC.
Copyright - Notice
Copyright 2015 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 4
72-01-36 19 Oct 2015

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

HELLTO HOLDERS OF TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE ENGINE MAINTENANCE MANUAL 72-01-36,
REVISION 6, DATED 31 JAN 2012. THIS TR IS ALSO APPLICABLE TO THE CD-ROM TPE331-
12/UA/UAR/UHR-701G_H AND THE CD-ROM TPE331-12UA/UAR/UHR-701G_L.
WARNING: READ EACH PAGE CAREFULLY. PUT THE PAGE INTO THE APPLICABLE SECTION AS
SHOWN. THIS TEMPORARY REVISION CAN CONTAIN PAGES THAT REFER TO
DIFFERENT SECTIONS OF THIS CHAPTER. MAKE SURE THAT THE TEMPORARY
REVISION IS CORRECTLY ADDED INTO THE MANUAL. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THESE
INSTRUCTIONS, THERE IS A RISK THE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE WILL NOT BE
DONE CORRECTLY.
INSERT THIS PAGE AS THE FIRST PAGE OF THE MANUAL.
Temporary
Revision Applicable Chapter/Section/Subject
Number Number, Page Number
76-1 76-10-01, TESTING, 13003
THIS DOCUMENT AND ALL INFORMATION AND EXPRESSION CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE
PROPERTY OF HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL INC., ARE PROVIDED IN CONFIDENCE, AND MAY BE
USED BY PERSONS REQUIRED BY FEDERAL AVIATION REGULATION PART 21.50 TO COMPLY
WITH ANY OF THE TERMS OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH ABOVE, NO
PERSON MAY, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, USE, DUPLICATE OR DISCLOSE THIS INFORMATION FOR
ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL
INC.
Copyright - Notice
Copyright 2015 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 2
72-01-36 16 Nov 2015


TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
RECORD OF REVISIONS
For each revision, write the revision number, revision date, date put in the manual, and your initials in the applicable
column.
NOTE: Refer to the Revision History in the TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION section for revision data.
Revision Revision Date Put In Revision Revision Date Put In

Number Date Manual By Number Date Manual By
6 1/31/2012 2/10/2012 ATP/RLL
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page RR-1
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS
Instructions on each page of a temporary revision tell you where to put the pages in your manual. Remove the
temporary revision pages only when discard instructions are given. For each temporary revision, put the applicable
data in the record columns on this page.
Definition of Status column: TR may be active, cancelled, or incorporated. If TR is incorporated list the revision
number. For example enter: INC Rev 7. If TR is replaced by another TR then put "Cancelled". For example:
Cancelled by TR NN-NN. "Active" is entered by the holder of manual.
Date
Temporary Removed
Revision Date Put In From
Number Status Page Number Issue Date Manual By Manual By
72-190 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 607 Feb 03/06
72-191 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 608 Feb 03/06
72-192 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 609 Feb 03/06
72-193 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 549 Feb 03/06
72-199 INC Rev 6 72-50-07, 247 Jan 20/06
72-200 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 182 Jun 23/06
72-201 Cancelled by 72-00-00, 502A Dec 07/06

TR 72-211
72-202 Cancelled by 72-00-00, 502B Dec 07/06

TR 72-212
72-203 Cancelled by 72-00-00, 511 Dec 07/06

TR 72-235
72-204 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 512 Dec 07/06
72-205 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 504 Feb 28/07
72-207 INC Rev 6 72-30-04, 298.29 Jun 08/07
72-208 INC Rev 6 72-50-06, 219 Jun 08/07
72-209 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 401 Dec 02/08
72-210 INC Rev 6 72-Contents, 2 Dec 02/08
72-211 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 502A Dec 02/08
72-212 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 502B Dec 02/08
72-213 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 510 Dec 02/08
72-214 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 513 Dec 02/08

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page RTR-1
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS (Cont)

Date
Temporary Removed
72-215 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 552 Dec 02/08
72-216 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 555 Dec 02/08
72-217 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 598.66 Dec 02/08
72-218 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 660 Dec 02/08
72-219 INC Rev 6 72-10-02, 204 Dec 02/08
72-220 INC Rev 6 72-10-02, 207 Dec 02/08
72-221 INC Rev 6 72-10-03, 205 Dec 02/08
72-222 Cancelled by 72-10-04, 203 Dec 02/08

TR 72-238
72-223 Cancelled by 72-10-04, 204 Dec 02/08

TR 72-238
72-224 INC Rev 6 72-10-05, 203 Dec 02/08
72-225 INC Rev 6 72-10-07, 203 Dec 02/08
72-226 INC Rev 6 72-10-09, 227 Dec 02/08
72-227 INC Rev 6 72-10-12, 214 Dec 02/08
72-228 INC Rev 6 72-10-13, 223 Dec 02/08
72-229 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 512 Dec 02/08
72-230 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 512A Dec 02/08
72-231 INC Rev 6 72-10-05, 204 Dec 02/08
72-232 INC Rev 6 72-10-05, 211 Dec 02/08
72-233 INC Rev 6 72-10-06, 204 Dec 02/08
72-234 INC Rev 6 72-10-06, 208 Dec 02/08
72-235 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 511 Dec 02/08
72-236 INC Rev 6 72-Contents, 1 Dec 02/08
72-237 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 598.67 Dec 02/08
72-238 INC Rev 6 72-10-04, 201 Apr 01/10
72-239 INC Rev 6 72-00-00, 690 Jan 31/12

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page RTR-2
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS (Cont)

Date
Temporary Removed
72-240 INC Rev 6 72-10-03, 201 Jan 31/12
73-11 INC Rev 6 73-21-06, 202 May 21/07
73-12 INC Rev 6 73-21-06, 203 May 21/07
73-13 INC Rev 6 73-10-08, 202 May 21/07
73-14 INC Rev 6 73-10-08, 203 May 31/07
73-15 INC Rev 6 73-10-05, 204 Aug 29/07
72-241 Active 72-10-17, 4002 and 8003 OCT 19, 2015 OCT 28, 2015 ATP/RLL
72-30-04, 4031
76-1 Active 76-10-01, 13003 NOV 16, 2015 NOV 23, 2015 ATP/RLL
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page RTR-3
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
SERVICE BULLETIN LIST

Service Bulletin/ Date Put in
Revision Number Title Manual Status
TPE331-72-0475, ENGINE – Time Between Overhaul (TBO) Intervals Sept 11/98 Incorp
Rev 14 (INACTIVE FOR FURTHER ACCOMPLISHMENT)
TPE331-72-0476, ENGINE – Service Life Limits of Critical Life Limited Nov 15/10 Incorp
Rev 30 Components, and Periodic Maintenance Schedules
TPE331-72-0573, ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION – No Effect No Effect
Rev 2 Authorization for Installation of Reworked Torque Ring
Support Assembly
TPE331-72-0582, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION − Replace Transition Liner No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Assembly
TPE331-72-0606, ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION – Aug 10/92 Incorp
Rev 1 Authorization to Install Spur and Helical Gear Assembly, Part
No. 3107037-X
Rev 1 Replace Compressor Bearing Carrier, Part No. 3103335-2
with 3103335-6
Rev 1 Replace Propeller Shaft, Part No. 3102572-1 with Part No.
3102572-2 to Aid in Removal of Propeller Pitch Control
Rev 1 Replace Accessory Gear Assembly, Part No. 3103601-2, -4
with Part No. 3103601-6
TPE331-72-0652 ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION – No Effect No Effect
Accessory Drive Housing Loose Stud Repair
TPE331-72-0658, ENGINE – CONVERSION – Convert Engine, Part No. No Effect No Effect
Rev 2 3103870-1 (TPE331-12UA-701G) to Part No. 3103870-2
(TPE331-12UAR-701G) (Cancelled)
TPE331-A72-0666, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace Second Stage No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Turbine Wheel Assembly, Part No. 3103276-8 with Part No.
3103276-12
TPE331-72-0669 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace First Stage No Effect No Effect
Turbine Shroud Segment
TPE331-72-0682, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace Second Stage No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Turbine Wheel Assembly, Part No. 3103276-12 with Second
Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly, Part No. 3103896-4
TPE331-A72-0683, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace Second Stage No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Turbine Wheel Assembly, Part No. 3103276-8 with Second
Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly, Part No. 3103896-4
TPE331-A72-0685, ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION – No Effect No Effect
Rev 4 Inspect Propeller Governor Assembly
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page SBL-1
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
SERVICE BULLETIN LIST (Cont)

TPE331-72-0700, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace Roller Bearing No Effect No Effect
Rev 3 (Turbine), Part No. 3101092-1 with Part No. 3101092-2
(INACTIVE FOR FURTHER ACCOMPLISHMENT)
Replace Propeller Governor Assembly, Part No. 897410-4/
-7 with Part No. 897410-8/ -9
Replace Nozzle Assembly, Part No. 3102566-1 with Part
No. 3102566-3
TPE331-72-0703 ENGINE – Incorporation of New Engine Log Book No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Modification Kit, Part No. 3107051-1/ -2
TPE331-72-0709, ENGINE – Install Non-Asbestos Gaskets No Effect No Effect
Rev 5
TPE331-72-0713 ENGINE – COMPRESSOR SECTION – Authorization to No Effect No Effect
Install Second Stage Compressor Impeller, Part No.
3103254-3
Rev 1 Replace/Rework Coupling, Part No. 3102580-1 with Part
No. 3107065-3
Install Coupling, Part No. 3102580-3
TPE331-72-0719, ENGINE – COMPRESSOR SECTION – Authorization to No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Install First Stage Compressor Impeller, Part No. 3103252-3
TPE331-72-0720 ENGINE – COMBUSTION SECTION – Replace Transition No Effect No Effect
Liner Assembly, Part No. 3103264-1 with Part No. 3103264-2
Turbine Rotor Assembly, Part No. 3103278-4 with Part No.
3103897-2
Replace Torque Shaft Assembly, Part No. 3103741-1 with
Part No. 3103741-2
Rev 2 Replace Propeller Governor Assembly
TPE331-72-0729, ENGINE – COMBUSTION SECTION – Replace Combustion No Effect No Effect
Rev 2 Chamber, Part No. 3103215-3 or 3103892-4 with Part No.
3107053-1
Replace Splined Adapter, Part No. 3103193-2 with Part No.
3103828-1
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page SBL-2
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Replace Nozzle Assembly, Part No. 3102566-3 with Part
No. 3102566-4
Replace Oil Transfer Tube, Part No. 3103887-1 with Part
No. 3103933-1
TPE331-72-0740, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace/Rework Rear Oct 29/99 Incorp
Rev 1 Engine Mount, Part No. 3102061-1 (INACTIVE FOR
FURTHER ACCOMPLISHMENT)
Install Gearshaft Assembly, Part No. 3107036-2/ -9
TPE331-72-0751 ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION − Aug 10/92 Incorp
Replace Spring Washer, Part No. 3104286-10/ -11/ -13 with
Notched Spacer, Part No. 3103941-1
TPE331-72-0752 ENGINE – CONVERSION – Convert Engine Model Aug 10/92 Incorp
TPE331-12UA-701G to Engine Model TPE331-12UAR-701G
Replace Torque Ring Support Assembly
TPE331-72-0761 ENGINE – COMBUSTION SECTION – Replace Combustion Aug 10/92 Incorp
Chamber, Part No. 3103215-3 with Part No. 3103892-4
Rev 1 Install Insert and Packing in Threaded Oil Port
TPE331-72-0766, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace/Rework First No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Stage Turbine Nozzle Assembly
TPE331-72-0767 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace/Rework First No Effect No Effect
Stage Turbine Nozzle Assembly
Install Coupling, Part No. 3102580-3
TPE331-72-0773, ENGINE – Inspection/Overhaul Requirements For Converting No Effect No Effect
Rev 2 from 7000 Hour CAM or TBO Maintenance Intervals to
Non-Commercial or Agricultural Operation Maintenance
Intervals (Cancelled)
TPE331-72-0774, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace Aft Curvic Aug 10/92 Incorp
Rev 1 Coupling, Part No. 3103526-2 with Part No. 3103906-1
TPE331-72-0779, ENGINE – CONVERSION – Convert Engine, Part No. Aug 10/92 Incorp
Rev 2 3103870-3 to Part No. 3103870-4
TPE331-72-0780 ENGINE – COMPONENTS – Component Part Listing to No Effect No Effect
Support New Engine Configuration
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page SBL-3
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

TPE331-72-0781 ENGINE – COMPRESSOR SECTION – Rework Power Aug 10/92 Incorp
Group Assembly to Increase First and Second Stage Impeller
Clearances
TPE331-72-0782, ENGINE – COMPRESSOR SECTION – Replace Deswirl No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Assembly, Part No. 3103316-1 with Part No. 3103316-2
Replace Bearing Retainer Assembly, Part No. 3103336-1
TPE331-72-0787 ENGINE – COMPONENTS – Component Parts Listing to No Effect No Effect
Support New Engine Configuration
TPE331-72-0788 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Install Second Stage No Effect No Effect
Turbine Rotor Assembly, Part No. 3103927-1/ -2 and Second
Stage Turbine Nozzle Assembly, Part No. 3103283-6 or
3103783-6/ -8
Rev 1 Distribution of Woodward Service Bulletin No. 33589 Which
Provides a New Speeder Spring and Reset Piston
Rev 1 Replace Propeller Governor Assembly, Part No. 897410-10/
-11/ -13 with Part No. 897410-15/ -16/ -17
TPE331-72-0797 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Inspect Turbine Scavenge No Effect No Effect
Pump Assembly, Part No. 865046-All
TPE331-72-0802 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace Retainer (Turbine No Effect No Effect
Bearing) Part No. 3101091-2 with Part No. 3103969-1
Turbine Shroud Segment
TPE331-72-0804 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION − Inspect Second Stage No Effect No Effect
Turbine Wheel Assembly, Part No. 3103276-12 or
3103896-4/ -6 For Blade Movement
TPE331-72-0806 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace Third Stage No Effect No Effect
Turbine Nozzle, Part No. 3103285-9/ -13 with Part No.
3103285-14
Rev 1 Replace Bearing (Compressor), Part No. 3103333-3 with
Part No. 3103333-6
TPE331-72-0815 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Install First Stage Turbine No Effect No Effect
Rotor Assembly, Part No. 3107073-1 as an Alternate Part
for 3103897-3
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page SBL-4
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

TPE331-72-0816 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Re-blade and Reidentify No Effect No Effect
First Stage Turbine Rotor Assemblies, Part No. 3103278-4/
-5 and 3103897-2
TPE331-72-0818 ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION − Aug 10/92 Incorp
Replace/Rework Torque Load Assembly, Part No. 3102309-1
TPE331-72-0824 ENGINE – Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection Procedure No Effect No Effect
TPE331-72-0828 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace Inner Baffle, Part No Effect No Effect
No. 3103298-1/ -2 with Part No. 3103298-3
TPE331-72-0831, ENGINE – Continuous Airworthiness Maintenance Operation No Effect No Effect
Rev 5 (INACTIVE FOR FURTHER ACCOMPLISHMENT)
TPE331-72-0840, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace First Stage No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Turbine Rotor Assembly and Rotating Air Seal and Coupling
Assembly
TPE331-72-0842 ENGINE – CONVERSION – Convert Engine, Part No. No Effect No Effect
3103870-3 to Part No. 3103870-4
TPE331-72-0844, ENGINE – COMPRESSOR SECTION – Replace First Stage No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Impeller Shroud Part No. 3103253-4 with Part No. 3103253-5
TPE331-72-0854 ENGINE – COMPRESSOR – Installation of Second Stage No Effect No Effect
Impeller with Improved Surface Finished (Part No.
3103254-2)
TPE331-A72-0857 ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION – No Effect No Effect
Inspect and/or Replace Gasket (Propeller Pitch Control),
Part No. 865664-4 with Part No. 865664-5
Rev 1 3103870-3 to Part No. 3103870-4
TPE331-72-0863, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace Oil Inlet Tube No Effect No Effect
Rev 2 Gasket, Part No. 865095-5 with 865095-6
Rev 2 Replace Propeller Governor (Drive) Spur Gear, Part No.
867883-1 with 867883-2
TPE331-72-0865, ENGINE – COMPRESSOR SECTION – Reidentify Second No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Stage Impeller, Part No. 3103254-3 to 3103254-2
Rev 1 3103870-3, -4 to Engine, Part No. 3103870-6, -7
Rev 1 Replace Coupling (Propshaft), Part No. 3102580-1, -2, -3 or
3107065-3 with Part No. 3102580-4 or 3107092-3
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page SBL-5
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

TPE331-72-0880 ENGINE – Remove Restrictor (Bleed Port), Part No. No Effect No Effect
865706-6 and Gasket, Part No. 896115-1, -3
TPE331-72-0886 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace Second Stage No Effect No Effect
Turbine Nozzle, Part No. 3103783-8 with Part No. 3103783-9
TPE331-72-0887, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace Gasket (Turbine No Effect No Effect
Rev 2 Scavenge Pump), Part No. 865091-4 with Part No. 865091-5
(Inactive for further accomplishment)
TPE331-72-0888 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace Gasket (Turbine No Effect No Effect
Bearing Support), Part No. 865792-3 with Part No. 865792-4
TPE331-72-0894 ENGINE – COMPRESSOR SECTION – Replace Second No Effect No Effect
Stage Diffuser Vane Assembly, Part No. 3103323-2 with
Part No. 3103323-3
TPE331-72-0897 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION − Replace Inner Baffle, Part No Effect No Effect
No. 3103298-1, -2, -3 with Part No. 3108039-1
TPE331-72-0907 ENGINE – COMPRESSOR SECTION − Replace Second No Effect No Effect
Stage Compressor Impeller, Part No. 3103254-2, -3 with
Part No. 3103254-4
TPE331-72-0912, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION − Replace/Rework First No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly, Part No. 3103897-4 with
Part No. 3103897-8
TPE331-72-0914 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION − Authorization to Install No Effect No Effect
Transition Liner, Part No. 3101524-5 as Alternate Part for
3101524-6
TPE331-72-0916 ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION − No Effect No Effect
Calibrated Torque Ring Kit, Part No. 3107100-1, -2, -3, -4
TPE331-72-0922 ENGINE – Authorization for Use of MS21279-XX and No Effect No Effect
MS9556-XX Bolts (of Equal Length) as Interchangeable
Parts
Inspect and Reidentify Tube Assembly (Gearbox Oil
Scavenge)
TPE331-72-0929 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace Second Stage No Effect No Effect
Turbine Rotor Assembly, Part No. 3103927-1 with Part No.
3103927-7 or Replace Part No. 3103927-2 with Part No.
3103927-5
Replace Propeller Pitch Control Body Assembly (Matched
Set), Part No. 897024-1 with Part No. 897024-2
TPE331-72-0935 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace Nut (Turbine Main No Effect No Effect
Shaft), Part No. 3103713-1 with Part No. 3108066-1
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page SBL-6
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

TPE331-72-0936, ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION – Sept 11/98 Incorp
Rev 1 Replace Accessory Shaft Seal (Plain Encased), Part No.
358276 or 896081-1 with Part No. 3108056-1
TPE331-72-0941, ENGINE – Dynamometer Test Stand Performance Test No Effect No Effect
Rev 5 Points (INACTIVE FOR FURTHER ACCOMPLISHMENT)
Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly, Part No. 3103897-4 with
Part No. 3103897-10 or 3107105-2
TPE331-72-0946 ENGINE – CONVERSION – Convert Engine, Part No. Sept 11/98 Incorp
3103870-1 to Part No. 3103870-7
TPE331-72-0948 ENGINE – Authorization to Install Drain Valve, Part No. No Effect No Effect
868889-3 as an Alternate Part for Part No. 868889-1
TPE331-72-0950 ENGINE – To Inform Operators that Fittings with Ring Seals No Effect No Effect
May Be Installed as Alternates to Specified Existing Fittings
Authorization to Install Lock Washer, Part No. 3103425-3,
as an Alternate Part for Lock Washer, Part No. 3103425-2
Rev 1 Replace Oil Pressure Pump Assembly, Part No. 867165-19
TPE331-72-0957 ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION – July 10/05 Incorp
Delete Washer, Part No. MS9185-09 Located at Propeller
Shaft Bearing Outer Race
Rev 1 Replace Identified Packings in Propeller Pitch Control
Assembly
Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly, Part No. 3103897-4 with
Part No. 3107105-4
TPE331-72-0962 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace (Turbine Oct 29/99 Incorp
Scavenge) Oil Pump Gasket, Part No. 865091-2/ -4/ -5 with
Part No. 3108138-5
TPE331-72-0964 ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT ASSEMBLY No Effect No Effect
− Replace (Diaphragm) Gasket, Part No. 868204-1 or
3103750-1 with Part No. 3103750-3
– Replace (Nose Cone) Gasket, Part No. 868944-3/ -5 or
3103751-1 with Part No. 3103751-5
– Replace/Rework Propeller Pitch Control Assembly
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page SBL-7
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

TPE331-72-0982, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION − Replace Oil Scavenge Sept 11/98 Incorp
Rev 1 Pump Assembly (Turbine), Part No. 865046-1 thru -6/ -8 thru
-12, with Part No. 3108026-1
TPE331-72-0984, ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION – Oct 29/99 Incorp
Rev 3 Replace Stationary Oil Seal, Part No. 3101160-7, Rotor, Part
No. 3103692-2, and Spacer, Part No. 3105108-2, with
Compressor Bellows Seal, Part No. 3108024-1, and Rotating
Oil Seal, Part No. 3108192-1
TPE331-72-0985, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Check Rear Engine Mount, No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Part No. 3102061-1, for Correct Dimension
TPE331-72-0987 ENGINE – Oil Serviceability Check for “On-Condition” Oil No Effect No Effect
Change Interval
Install First Stage Compressor Impeller, Part No. 3107097-1
Stage Turbine Nozzle Assembly
Authorization to Install (Diaphragm) Gasket, Part No.
3103750-4, as an Alternate Part for Gasket, Part No.
868204-1 or 3103750-1/ -3
TPE331-A72-0997, ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION – Sept 11/98 Incorp
Rev 2 Replace Accessory Gear Assembly, Part No. 3103601-6,
and (Compressor) Bearing Retainer Assembly, Part No.
3103903-1 with Accessory Gear Assembly, Part No.
3103977-3
TPE331-72-0999, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace/Rework First No Effect No Effect
Rev 2 Stage Turbine Nozzle Assembly
TPE331-72-2000, ENGINE – Replace (P3) Gasket, Part No. 896115-1/ -2/ -3 Oct 29/99 Incorp
Rev 3 with Gasket, Part No. 3108196-1
TPE331-72-2002, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace Inner Baffle, Part Sept 11/98 Incorp
Rev 1 No. 3108039-1 with Part No. 3108039-2
TPE331-72-2003, ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION – Oct 29/99 Incorp
Rev 2 Install Rotating Oil Seal, Part No. 3108192-1, and
Compressor Bellows Seal, Part No. 3108024-2
TPE331-72-2004 ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION – Sept 11/98 Incorp
Authorization to Install Nonmetallic Washer, Part No.
S9014V58015, at Starter/Generator Pad
TPE331-72-2005 ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION − Sept 11/98 Incorp
Authorization to Install Nonmetallic Washer, Part No.
S9014V59015, at Accessory Drive Pad
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page SBL-8
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Rev 2 Authorization to Install Accessory Drive Housing Assembly
with Revised Oil Drain Feature (INACTIVE FOR FURTHER
ACCOMPLISHMENT)
Rev 1 Replace Spur and Helical Gear Assembly or Gearshaft
Assembly, Part No. 3107037-9/ -10, with Gearshaft
Assembly, Part No. 3107122-1/ -3 or Part No. 3108222-1
TPE331-72-2014, ENGINE – COMBUSTION SECTION – Replace Combustion No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Chamber Case Assembly (Plenum), Part No. 3101668-6/
-12/ -15/ -19, with Part No. 3101668-20/ -21/ -22
Rev 5 Replace Accessory Drive Housing Assemblies to Incorporate
Improved Internal Oil Drains at Starter/Generator and
Accessory Drive Pads
Rev 1 Authorization to Use Identified Accessory Drive Housing
Assemblies as Interchangeable Alternate Parts (INACTIVE
FOR FURTHER ACCOMPLISHMENT)
TPE331-72-2029 ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Inspect (Turbine Scavenge) No Effect No Effect
Oil Pump Gasket, Part No. 3108138-5, for Missing Coating
TPE331-72-2030, ENGINE – COMPRESSOR SECTION – Replace Interstage No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Seal Assembly Support, Part No. 3103308-2, and Seal
Assembly, Part No. 3103309-2, with Interstage Seal
Assembly Support, Part No. 3103308-4, and Seal Assembly,
Part No. 3103309-6
TPE331-A72-2035 ENGINE – One Time Oil Filter Resample No Effect No Effect
TPE331-72-2037 ENGINE – Replace Bleed Port Cover, Part No. 694532, with No Effect No Effect
Bleed Port Cover, Part No. 694532-1
TPE331-72-2040, ENGINE – CONVERSION – Convert Engines by Replacing No Effect No Effect
Rev 2 the Power Group Assembly
TPE331-72-2054, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Replace Turbine Roller No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Bearing, Part No. 3101092-1/ -2, with Part No. 3108098-1
TPE331-72-2056 ENGINE – Inspection/Overhaul Requirements for Converting No Effect No Effect
from 7000 Hour CAM or TBO Maintenance Intervals to 5000
Hour TBO Maintenance Intervals
Accomplish a “One-Time” Inspection of Retainer Plate, Part
No. 3102776-2
TPE331-72-2061 ENGINE – Curvic Coupling Face Runout High Point Markings No Effect No Effect
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page SBL-9
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Rev 2 Replace Sun and Bull Gear Assembly or Gearshaft
Assembly, Part No. 3107037-9/ -10, or Part No. 3107122-1/
-3, or Part No. 3108222-1, with Gearshaft Assembly, Part
No. 3107162-1, or Part No. 3108294-1 (INACTIVE FOR
Rev 1 “One-Time” Overhaul of High Speed Pinion Gearshaft
Assembly or Gearshaft Assembly, Part No. 3107036-1/ -2/
-6/ -9 Removed From Engines Which are in Prior Compliance
with Service Bulletin TPE331-A72-2011 (INACTIVE FOR
Authorization to Install Spur (Pinion) Gearshaft, Part No.
310174-4 as an Alternate for Part No. 3101741-2
Install Alternate Part Number First Stage Impellers
TPE331-72-2074, ENGINE – TURBINE SECTION – Install (Turbine) Oil No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Scavenge Pump Assembly, Part No. 3107163-1 or
3108282-2 or 3108346-1
Rev 1 Replace the Gearshaft Assembly (Sun and Bull Gear), Part
No. 3107162-1 with a Gearshaft Assembly (Sun and Bull
Gear), Part No. 3108294-1 (INACTIVE FOR FURTHER
ACCOMPLISHMENT)
“One-Time” Overhaul of High Speed Pinion Gearshaft
Assembly or Gearshaft Assembly, Part No. 3107036-1/ -2/
-6/ -9 Removed From Engines Which are in Prior Compliance
with Service Bulletin TPE331-A72-2011 or Which Have Spur
Gearshaft (Bull Gear), Part No. 3107161-1 Installed
Replace (Diaphragm) Gasket, Part No. 868204-1 or
3103750-1/ -3/ -4, with Gasket, Part No. 3103750-5
Rev 1 Replace Gearshaft (Sun and Bull Gear) Assembly, Part No.
3107037-9/ -10, 3107122-1, 3107162-1, 3108222-1, or
3108294-1 with Part No. 3108294-1
Replace Oil Pressure Pump Assembly, Part No. 867165-19
or 3103217-2 or 3103217-3 with Part No. 3103217-4
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page SBL-10
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

TPE331-72-2101 ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION – July 10/05 Incorp
Authorization to Install Planetary Bearing Shouldered Pins,
Part No. 896169-2, as Alternate Parts
TPE331-72-2109, ENGINE – COMBUSTION SECTION – Replace Combustion July 10/05 Incorp
Rev 3 Chamber Assembly, Part No. 3103215-3, 3103892-4,
3107053-1, 3107173-1, 3107174-1, 3107188-1, 3108322-3,
or 3108322-5, with Combustion Chamber Assembly, Part
No. 3107173-1, 3107174-1, 3107188-1, or 3108322-5
Replace Insulating Gasket, Part No. 866303-3 or 866303-4,
with Insulating Gasket, Part No. 3108303-1
TPE331-A72-2114 ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION – July 10/05 Incorp
Replace Gearshaft (Sun and Bull Gear) Assembly, Part No.
3107037-9/ -10, 3107122-1, 3107162-1, 3108222-1, or
3108294-1 with Part No. 3108384-1
TPE331-72-2127 ENGINE – Propstand and Dynamometer (without Bellmouth No Effect No Effect
Measured Airflow) Recompensation/Performance Testing
Programs
TPE331-72-2128, ENGINE – Dynamometer (With Bellmouth Measured Airflow) No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Performance Testing Program, Part No. 3000087-3
Rev 1 Inspect and Perform Oil Filter and Soap Analysis for High
Speed Pinion Bearings, Part No. 3101500-1, 3107183-1,
3107184-1, and 3108412-1
TPE331-A72-2131 ENGINE – SERVICE LIFE – Service Life Limits of Critical Dec 10/84 Incorp
Life Limited Components – Special Use Operation – Partial
Cycle Counting
TPE331-72-2134 ENGINE – Dynamometer (With Bellmouth Measured Airflow) No Effect No Effect
Performance Testing Program, Part No. 3000091-1
Rev 1 Authorize Interchangeability of Bolts in Intermediate Housing
and Gear Assembly, Part Number 3102593-2/ -4/ -6 thru -9/
-11/ -12 and Part Number 3107191-1 thru -6/ -8
Install Negative Torque Sensing (NTS) Valve Assembly, PN
70100012-1
TPE331-72-2160 ENGINE – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION – Jan 31/12 Incorp
Replace Negative Torque Sensing (NTS) Restrictor
Assembly, PN 896421-4, With PN 3108552-1
TPE331-72-2178 ENGINE - COMBUSTION SECTION - Inspect Combustion May 3/11 Incorp
Case Assembly
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page SBL-11
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

TPE331-73-0146, ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – CONTROLLING – Replace No Effect No Effect
Rev 3 Fuel Filter to Prevent Contamination of Engine Fuel System
TPE331-73-0176, ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROLLING – CONTROLLING – No Effect No Effect
Rev 2 Distribution of Woodward Service Bulletin No. WG64039
Which Provides Inspection Procedures
TPE331-73-0177 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – DISTRIBUTION – No Effect No Effect
Distribution of GFSD Service Bulletin 394230-73-0177 Which
Provides for Replacement of Ball Valve within Fuel Solenoid
Valve
TPE331-73-0182 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – CONTROLLING – No Effect No Effect
Distribution of Woodward Service Bulletin No. WG6404
Which Provides a New Bypass Valve Bearing
TPE331-73-0188 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – DISTRIBUTION – Replace No Effect No Effect
Fuel Manifold Assembly, Part No. 3102469-1/ -2
TPE331-73-0189 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – DISTRIBUTION – Replace Aug 10/92 Incorp
Tube Assemblies, Part No. 3102125-1 and 894568-1 With
Part No. 3102125-2 and 894568-2
TPE331-A73-0190, ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – DISTRIBUTION – No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Accomplish Fuel Manifold Leak Check
TPE331-73-0191, ENGINE – FUEL – Fuel Control Unit Maximum Power No Effect No Effect
Rev 2 Adjustment
Actuating Arm (Fuel Shutoff Valve), Part No. 858906-1 with
Part No. 897757-1
TPE331-73-0197 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – CONTROLLING – Replace Aug 10/92 Incorp
Bolt, Part No. MS9489-04 with Part No. MS9489-06 and Add
Washer, Part No. S8157N281-125
TPE331-A73-0198, ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – DISTRIBUTION – Replace No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Specified Fuel Manifold Assembly, Part No. 3102469-2
TPE331-A73-0203, ENGINE – FUEL AND CONTROL – Distribution of Woodward No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Service Bulletin No. WG64042 Which Provides a New
Diaphragm
TPE331-73-0207 ENGINE – FUEL AND CONTROL – Distribution of Woodward No Effect No Effect
Service Bulletin No. WG64043 Which Provides a New
Diaphragm
TPE331-73-0208, ENGINE – ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – Replace Fuel No Effect No Effect
Rev 2 Shutoff Valve, Part No. 394230-4-1 with Part No. 394230-9-1
TPE331-73-0209, ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – Replace Torque Limiter No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Bypass Valve Bracket, Part No. 3102132-1 with Part No.
3102132-2
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page SBL-12
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Authorization to Install Reworked Fuel Nozzle Body, Part
No. 3107090-1/ -2/ -3
Replace/Rework Actuating Arm (Fuel Shutoff Valve), Part
No. 897757-1 with Part No. 897757-2
TPE331-73-0217, ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – CONTROLLING – No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Distribution of Woodward Service Bulletin No. WG64044
Which Provides an Improved PS3 Sensor and Bypass Valve
Assembly (INACTIVE FOR FURTHER ACCOMPLISHMENT)
TPE331-A73-0226 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – CONTROLLING – No Effect No Effect
Distribution of Woodward Service Bulletin No. WG64050
Which Provides Instructions for Fuel Control Drive Shaft
Spline Inspection
Rev 2 Fuel Control Assembly, Part No. 897561-X, with Part No.
897770-X or Replace Part No. 897375-X with Part No.
897780-X
Rev 1 Fuel Control Assembly
TPE331-73-0229, ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – CONTROLLING – No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Authorization to Install Fuel Control Assembly, Part No.
897780-16, as an Alternative Part for Part No. 897375-27
or 897780-1 or 897780-25
TPE331-73-0230, ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – DISTRIBUTION – Jan 31/12 Incorp
Rev 1 Authorization to use Alternate Methods for Fuel Nozzle Bolt
Retention
Rev 1 Screws and Washers Securing TT2 Sensor to Fuel Control
TPE331-73-0235 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – CONTROLLING – Replace No Effect No Effect
Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor Fittings
Distribution of Woodward Governor Company Service Bulletin
No. WG64052 Which Provides Instructions for Returning
Identified Fuel Control Assemblies for Rework
TPE331-73-0247 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – CONTROLLING – Remove No Effect No Effect
Identification Plate, Part No. 869926-1, and Relocate
Identification Plate, Part No. S9861-15
TPE331-73-0251 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – CONTROLLING – Apply No Effect No Effect
Part Number and Serial Number to Body of Fuel Pump
Assembly
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page SBL-13
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Distribution of Woodward Governor Company Service Bulletin
No. WG64084 Which Provides Instructions for Returning
Identified Fuel Control Units for Replacement of Bellcrank
TPE331-A73-0254, ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – CONTROLLING – Replace No Effect No Effect
Rev 2 the Fuel Control Assembly to Get Better Protection Against
Engine Overspeed
TPE331-73-0255, ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL − CONTROLLING − Inspect No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Fuel Pump Body Assembly, Part No. 869899-1 and 869913-1
Interchangeability of Fuel Heater Assemblies
Pin, Part No. 869893-1 with Part No. 869893-2, in Centrifugal
Fuel Pump Assembly
Impeller and Rotor Blade Assembly, Part No. 869894-2 with
Part No. 3105882-1, in Centrifugal Fuel Pump Assembly
TPE331-73-0268 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – DISTRIBUTION – Inspect No Effect No Effect
Primary Only and Fuel Enrichment Solenoid Valves, Part
No. 692545-13/ -14, for Fuel Leaks
Primary Only Solenoid Valve, Part No. 692545-10,
692545-11, or 692545-14 with Part No. 3108448-2
TPE331-73-0275 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – DISTRIBUTION – Remove No Effect No Effect
From Service APU Fuel Nozzle Packing, Part No. 3830351-1,
Installed in TPE331 Engines
TPE331-73-0278 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – Authorization to use Fuel No Effect No Effect
Thermal Stabilizers and Concentration Levels in All
Authorized Fuels
TPE331-74-0010 IGNITION – SWITCHING – Replace Auto-Ignition Switch, No Effect No Effect
Part No. 3105746-2 with Part No. 3105746-3
TPE331-75-0009, AIR – ENGINE ANTI-ICING VALVE – Replace Anti-Icing No Effect No Effect
Rev 2 Valve, Part No. 319980-6-1 with Part No. 319980-13-1;
Rework Anti-Icing Valve, Part No. 319980-6-1 to Part No.
319980-13-1
TPE331-75-0010 AIR – ENGINE ANTI-ICING VALVE – Replace Anti-Icing Sept 11/98 Incorp
Valve Mounting Brackets and Hardware
TPE331-75-0011 AIR – ENGINE ANTI-ICING – Replace Tube Assembly, Part No Effect No Effect
No. 3103079-1 with Part No. 3108018-1
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page SBL-14
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

TPE331-75-0013, AIR – ENGINE ANTI-ICING – Replace Anti-Icing Shield No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Assembly, Part No. 896298-6 with Part No. 896298-17
TPE331-75-0015 AIR – ENGINE ANTI-ICING – Replace Anti-Icing Shield No Effect No Effect
Assembly, Part No. 896298-8 with Part No. 896298-19
TPE331-A75-0018, AIR – ENGINE ANTI-ICING – Remove Specified Anti-Ice No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Valves, Part No. 319980-6-1 and 319980-13-1 From Service
TPE331-75-0021 AIR – ENGINE ANTI-ICING – Replace Tube Assembly, Part No Effect No Effect
No. 894382-2 with Part No. 894382-5
TPE331-76-0024, ENGINE CONTROLS – POWER CONTROL – Replace Sept 11/98 Incorp
Rev 3 Torque Signal Conditioner, Part No. 3102476-1/ -2 with Part
No. 3102476-6
TPE331-76-0033 ENGINE CONTROLS – POWER CONTROL – Replace No Effect No Effect
Single Red Line (SRL) Controller, Part No. 2118600-7 with
Part No. 2118600-8
TPE331-76-0038 ENGINE CONTROLS – POWER CONTROL – Inspect Shaft No Effect No Effect
Assembly, Part No. 893086-1
Propeller Governor Inner Shaft Assembly, Part No. 893086-1,
with Propeller Governor Inner Shaft Assembly, Part No.
893086-2
Propeller Governor Inner Shaft Assembly, Part No. 893086-1/
-2, with Propeller Governor Inner Shaft Assembly, Part No.
893086-3
TPE331-77-0050, ENGINE INDICATING – POWER – Replace NTS System No Effect No Effect
Rev 2 Plumbing and Fitting
TPE331-77-0054 ENGINE INDICATING – TEMPERATURE – Relocate Aug 10/92 Incorp
Thermocouple Cable Assembly, Part No. 897469-1/ -7
TPE331-77-0055, ENGINE INDICATING − TEMPERATURE − Replace No Effect No Effect
Rev 2 Thermocouple Assembly, Part No. 897469-1 with Part No.
897469-7
TPE331-77-0056 ENGINE INDICATING – TEMPERATURE – Rework and No Effect No Effect
Reidentify Thermocouple Cable Assembly, Part No.
897469-1/ -4
TPE331-77-0057, ENGINE INDICATING – TEMPERATURE – Install Clamps Sept 11/98 Incorp
Rev 1 on Temperature Sensor, Part No. 3102557-1
TPE331-77-0058, ENGINE INDICATING – TEMPERATURE – Replace EGT No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Temperature Sensor, Part No. 3102557-1 with 3103920-1
TPE331-77-0063 ENGINE INDICATING – TEMPERATURE – New Maximum No Effect No Effect
Temperature Compensation Values for Specified Engines
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page SBL-15
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

TPE331-77-0065, ENGINE – INDICATING – Replace Compensating Resistor No Effect No Effect
Rev 2 (Negative Compensation), Part No. 897205-2 with Part No.
897205-3
TPE331-77-0066 ENGINE – INDICATING – Replace Compensating Resistor No Effect No Effect
(Bi-Polar), Part No. 897476-4 with Part No. 897476-8
TPE331-77-0067 ENGINE INDICATING – TEMPERATURE – New Maximum No Effect No Effect
Temperature Compensation Values for Specified Factory
Dyno-Tested Engines
TPE331-A77-0072 ENGINE INDICATING – POWER – Replace Tube Sept 11/98 Incorp
Assemblies (NTS Lockout), (Propeller Governor Reset), (Oil
Supply)
TPE331-77-0074 ENGINE INDICATING – TEMPERATURE – Accomplish No Effect No Effect
“One-Time” Inspection of Temperature Sensor (EGT Rake)
TPE331-77-0078 ENGINE INDICATING – POWER – Replace Pressure Switch No Effect No Effect
(Beta), Part No. 897542-8 with Part No. 897542-7
TPE331-77-0080 ENGINE INDICATING – POWER – Replace Tube Assembly, No Effect No Effect
Part No. 3102411-1 or 3105340-1 with Part No. 3108122-1
TPE331-77-0084, ENGINE INDICATING − POWER − Inspect, and if No Effect No Effect
Rev 1 Necessary, Replace Damper Assembly, Part No. 894758-1
and 894758-4
TPE331-79-0014, OIL – DISTRIBUTION – Replace Oil Filter Element No Effect No Effect
Rev 4
TPE331-79-0029, OIL – INDICATING – Replace Magnetic Plug Assembly (Chip Oct 29/99 Incorp
Rev 4 Detector), Part No. 893742-1 with Valve, Part No. 3103972-1
and Detector, Part No. 3103971-1 or -2
TPE331-A79-0034, OIL – DISTRIBUTION – Decreased Time Interval Between No Effect No Effect
Rev 4 Spectrometric Oil (and Filter) Analysis Program (SOAP)
Sampling
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page SBL-16
31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Subheading and Page Date Subheading and Page Date
Title SBL-14 31 Jan 2012

T-1 31 Jan 2012 SBL-15 31 Jan 2012
T-2 31 Jan 2012 SBL-16 31 Jan 2012
T-3 31 Jan 2012 List of Effective Pages
T-4 31 Jan 2012 LEP-1 31 Jan 2012
Transmittal Information LEP-2 31 Jan 2012
TI-1 31 Jan 2012 Table of Contents
TI-2 31 Jan 2012 TC-1 31 Jan 2012
TI-3 31 Jan 2012 TC-2 31 Jan 2012
TI-4 31 Jan 2012 Introduction
TI-5 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-1 31 Jan 2012
TI-6 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-2 31 Jan 2012
TI-7 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-3 31 Jan 2012
TI-8 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-4 31 Jan 2012
TI-9 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-5 31 Jan 2012
TI-10 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-6 31 Jan 2012
Record of Revisions INTRO-7 31 Jan 2012
RR-1 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-8 31 Jan 2012
RR-2 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-9 31 Jan 2012
Record of Temporary INTRO-10 31 Jan 2012
Revisions INTRO-11 31 Jan 2012
RTR-1 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-12 31 Jan 2012
RTR-2 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-13 31 Jan 2012
RTR-3 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-14 31 Jan 2012
RTR-4 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-15 31 Jan 2012
Service Bulletin List INTRO-16 31 Jan 2012
SBL-1 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-17 31 Jan 2012
SBL-2 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-18 31 Jan 2012
SBL-3 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-19 31 Jan 2012
SBL-4 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-20 31 Jan 2012
SBL-5 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-21 31 Jan 2012
SBL-6 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-22 31 Jan 2012
SBL-7 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-23 31 Jan 2012
SBL-8 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-24 31 Jan 2012
SBL-9 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-25 31 Jan 2012
SBL-10 31 Jan 2012 INTRO-26 31 Jan 2012
SBL-11 31 Jan 2012
SBL-12 31 Jan 2012
SBL-13 31 Jan 2012
* indicates pages changed or added data

F indicates a right foldout
L indicates a left foldout
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-1
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF SECTIONS
Title Page
INTRODUCTION
1. How to Use Maintenance Manual............................................................................. INTRO-1
A. General............................................................................................................. INTRO-1
B. Engine Identification System............................................................................ INTRO-2
C. Observance of Manual Instructions.................................................................. INTRO-2
D. Vendor Codes and Part Numbers.................................................................... INTRO-2
E. Units of Measure.............................................................................................. INTRO-2
F. Chapter/Section/Subject Explanation............................................................... INTRO-3
G. Page Number Block Explanation...................................................................... INTRO-4
H. Application of JEMTOSS.................................................................................. INTRO-5
2. Customer Support..................................................................................................... INTRO-15
A. Honeywell Aerospace Online Technical Publications Web Site....................... INTRO-15
B. Global Customer Care Center.......................................................................... INTRO-15
3. References................................................................................................................ INTRO-15
A. Honeywell/Vendor Publications........................................................................ INTRO-15
B. Other Publications............................................................................................ INTRO-17
4. Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................... INTRO-17
A. General............................................................................................................. INTRO-17
5. Microfiche.................................................................................................................. INTRO-22
A. General............................................................................................................. INTRO-22
B. Revision Service............................................................................................... INTRO-23
C. Temporary Revision Service............................................................................ INTRO-23
D. Equipment........................................................................................................ INTRO-23
E. How to Use Microfiche..................................................................................... INTRO-23
F. Manuals Provided on Microfiche...................................................................... INTRO-24
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-1
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
INTRODUCTION
1. How to Use Maintenance Manual

A. General
(1) This publication gives maintenance instructions for the engines shown on the title page.
(2) Refer to Table INTRO-1 for effectivity code data.
(a) Maintenance procedures within this publication pertain to specific engine models,
applications, or service bulletins. When maintenance procedures need to be identified for
a specific engine application, an identifier will be placed at the beginning of the procedure.
The identifier will be enclosed in parentheses.
(b) Effectivity codes listed which are separated by a comma “(AA, AC)” mean any intervening
codes do not apply. For example, a paragraph beginning with “(Codes AA, AC)” is applicable
for Codes AA and AC and is not applicable for Code AB. Effectivity codes listed which are
separated by a dash (AA-AC) mean all intervening codes do apply. For example, a
paragraph beginning with “(Codes AA-AC)” is applicable for Codes AA, AB, and AC.
(c) When no codes are noted the information applies to all listed engine models.
(d) Each engine model number is assigned an effectivity code as specified in Table INTRO-1.
CAUTION: PARTS MANUFACTURED UNDER LICENSE BY HINDUSTAN AERONAUTICS,
LIMITED OF INDIA (HAL) ARE IDENTIFIED BY AN "H" IN FRONT OF THE
HONEYWELL PART NUMBER. SUCH PARTS ARE NOT BUILT UNDER AN
FAA-APPROVED PRODUCTION QUALITY SYSTEM, AND THEREFORE ARE
NOT APPROVED FOR INSTALLATION IN FAA TYPE CERTIFICATED ENGINES.
Table INTRO-1. Effectivity Code List
Engine Model No. Engine PN Effectivity Code

TPE331-12UA-701G 3103870-1 AA
TPE331-12UAR-701G 3103870-3 BA
TPE331-12UAR-701G 3103870-4 CA
TPE331-12UHR-701G 3103870-6 BC
TPE331-12UHR-701G 3103870-7 CC
TPE331-12UAR-701G 3103870-8 BB
TPE331-12UAR-701G 3103870-9 CB
TPE331-12UHR-701G 3103870-11 BD
TPE331-12UHR-701G 3103870-12 CD
(3) Standard maintenance procedures that technicians must know are not given in this manual.
(4) This publication is written in agreement with the ATA Specification.
(5) Refer to the Special Tools, Fixtures, and Equipment and Consumables tables in each section
before the start of maintenance or repair procedures.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-1
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(6) Warnings, cautions, and notes in this manual give the data that follows:
• A WARNING gives a condition or tells personnel what part of an operation or
maintenance procedure, which if not obeyed, can cause injury or death
• A CAUTION gives a condition or tells personnel what part of an operation or
maintenance procedure, which if not obeyed, can cause damage to the equipment
• A NOTE gives data, not commands. The NOTE helps personnel when they do
the related instruction.
(7) Warnings and cautions go before the applicable paragraph or step. Notes follow the applicable
paragraph or step.
B. Engine Identification System

(1) Each engine is provided with a nameplate for identification of the engine. Information supplied
on the engine nameplate includes model number, part number, and serial number. The model
number defines significant features and specification ratings. The part number defines a group
of specific configurations. All engines with the same part number are interchangeable. The part
number is supplemented by a series number, and if applicable, change numbers to define a
specific configuration. A series number is assigned at each manufacture or overhaul to identify
product improvement changes incorporated beyond the initially manufactured configuration.
Individual changes incorporated which are not within the series grouping are identified separately
by change numbers. Changes represented by series and change numbers are product
improvements and do not affect interchangeability of the engine. Refer to the engine log book
for changes incorporated since engine production which are not separately identified on the
nameplate.
(2) Each assembly of the engine which is a complete unit has a separate nameplate carrying part
number, serial number, and product improvement change information. Any assembly is
interchangeable with assemblies having the same part number.
C. Observance of Manual Instructions

(1) The procedures used must be consistent with standard shop practices and be carefully examined
to make sure that all safety, efficiency, and operation procedures of the unit are obeyed.
(2) All personnel who operate equipment and do maintenance specified in this manual must know
and obey the safety precautions.
D. Vendor Codes and Part Numbers

(1) The inclusion of vendor codes and part numbers in this publication must not be construed as
an authorization of the vendor, pursuant to FAA regulations, to ship directly to the user. Neither
must it be construed as a certification by Honeywell that parts shipped by vendors directly to
users will conform to the type design or that such parts are airworthy or safe for installation.
E. Units of Measure
(1) Measurements, weights, temperatures, dimensions, and other values are expressed in the USMS
followed by the appropriate SI metric units in parentheses. Some standard tools or parts such
as drills, taps, bolts, nuts, etc. do not have an equivalent.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-2
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
F. Chapter/Section/Subject Explanation
(1) In accordance with ATA iSpec 2200, this manual is divided into chapters, sections, and subjects
by a numbering system which consists of a three element number separated by dashes:
(a) First and second digits – System/Chapter (Assigned by specification)
(b) Third and fourth digits – Sub-System/Section (Assigned by specification)
(c) Fifth and sixth digits – Unit/Subject (Assigned by manufacturer)
(d) The following example illustrates and describes use of each element of the number (Typical
Chapter – Section – Subject Number – 73-10-01):
1 73- This number designates a major system. Chapter 73 is “Engine Fuel and Control”.
2 -10- This number designates a section or sub-system breakdown of material in Chapter
73. In this example: “Distribution”.
3 -01- This number designates a specific component or unit of a section. In this case,
-01 represents “Fuel Manifold and Splash Shields Installation”.
(2) The complexity and volume of material contained in the maintenance manual dictates the need
for breaking the subjects within manual chapters down into reasonably small topics for ready
reference and ease of revision.
(3) Maintenance procedures for components and systems are located in various chapters and
sections within the manual as outlined in the following list. (See Air Transportation Association
iSpec 2200 for a complete listing of all Chapter/Section numbers.)
Chapter 70 − Standard Practices − Engine
Chapter 72 − Engine
72-00-XX General
72-10-XX Reduction Gear and Shaft Section
72-30-XX Compressor Section
72-40-XX Combustion Section
72-50-XX Turbine Section
Chapter 73 − Engine Fuel and Control

73-00-XX General
73-10-XX Distribution
73-20-XX Controlling
73-22-XX Torque/Temperature Limiting
Chapter 74 − Ignition
74-00-XX General
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-3
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
74-10-XX Electrical Power Supply
74-30-XX Switching
Chapter 75 − Air
75-00-XX General
75-10-XX Engine Anti-Ice (Air)
Chapter 76 − Engine Controls

76-10-XX Power Control
Chapter 77 − Engine Indicating

77-10-XX Power (Engine Indicating)
77-20-XX Temperature (Engine Indicating)
Chapter 79 − Oil
79-00-XX General
79-30-XX Indicating
Chapter 82 − Water Injection

82-20-XX Water Injection Manifold Assembly
(4) Index tab sheets are used to subdivide this publication for ease in locating specific information.
Yellow tab sheets are used to index the introduction and each separate chapter. White tab sheets
are used to subdivide Chapter 72. A table of contents follows each yellow and white tab to list
significant material and location within the tabbed section.
G. Page Number Block Explanation

(1) The data in this manual is divided into sections. A standard page number block system is used.
Page number blocks are shown in Table INTRO-2.
Table INTRO-2. Page Number Blocks
Section Page Number Block

System Description 1
Fault Isolation 1000
Special Procedures 2000
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-4
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table INTRO-2. Page Number Blocks (Cont)
Section Page Number Block

Removal 3000
Installation 4000
Disassembly 5000
Cleaning 6000
Unassigned 7000
Inspection/Check 8000
Repair 9000
Assembly 10000
Servicing 11000
Storage 12000
Testing 13000
H. Application of JEMTOSS
(1) In accordance with the ATA iSpec 2200, this publication uses a Jet Engine Maintenance Task
Numbering System which make the maintenance procedures in this manual compatible with an
automated shop environment.
(2) The system uses standard and unique number combinations to identify maintenance tasks and
subtasks.
(3) The JEMTOSS structure is the logical approach to organizing maintenance tasks and subtasks.
The JEMTOSS numbering system includes the ATA Chapter-Section-Subject number as well
as a function code and unique identifiers. The purpose of incorporating the JEMTOSS numbering
system is to provide a means for the automated sorting, retrieval, and management of digitized
data.
(4) Section and Sub-section Numbering System
(a) All procedures in this publication have TASK and SUBTASK numbers at key data retrieval
points. The numbers provide the following:
• Identification of the hardware (parts or parts) primary to the TASK
• Identification of the maintenance function applied to the part or parts
• A unique identifier for a set of instructions (known as TASK or SUBTASK)
• Identification of alternate methods and configuration differences that change the
procedure applied to the TASK
• Identification of airline changes to a TASK or SUBTASK.
(5) Components of Task and Subtask Number

(a) The numbering system is an expansion of the ATA three-element numbering system. The
number has seven elements. The first five elements are necessary for each TASK or
SUBTASK. The sixth and seventh elements are applied only when necessary. Refer to
Figure INTRO-1.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-5
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(b) Elements 1, 2, and 3 identify the ATA Chapter-Section-Subject number of the page block.
(c) Element 4 defines the maintenance function being performed. This element is a three
position element. The third position is zero filled when further definition is not required. If
required, the manufacturer will use the numbers 1 through 9 or letters A through Z, excluding
the letters I and O. Refer to Table INTRO-3.
(d) Element 5 provides a unique identification for each TASK or SUBTASK number which is
similarly numbered through the first four elements.
• TASKS are numbered from 801 through 999
• SUBTASKS are numbered from 001 through 800.
(e) Element 6 is a three position alphanumeric element used for identification of differences
in configurations, methods or techniques, variations of standard practice applications, etc.
(f) Element 7 provides coding of those tasks or subtasks that have been changed by the
customer (e.g., those tasks or subtasks accomplished by an outside repair source).
Figure INTRO-1. (Sheet 1 of 1) JEMTOSS Code Positions (GRAPHIC

00-00-00-99B-001-A01)
Table INTRO-3. JEMTOSS Function Code Definitions
Code Function Definition

000 REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY
010 Removal Removal of the engine/component from a
workstand, transport dolly, test stand, etc.,
or aircraft.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-6
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table INTRO-3. JEMTOSS Function Code Definitions (Cont)

020 Remove Modular Sections This is the first echelon of disassembly which
consists of sectionalization of the unit/engine
into primary modular sections. Modular
sections are identified by the third element
of the ATA number when removed from the
unit/engine.
030 Disassemble Modular Sections This is the second echelon of disassembly
which consists of disassembly of the modular
sections into subassemblies after removal
from the unit/engine. Modular section
designations appear in the second element
of the ATA number for this echelon of
disassembly.
040 Disassemble Subassemblies This is the third echelon of engine
disassembly which consists of disassembly
of subassemblies to the piece part level. The
subassemblies are identified by the third
element of the ATA number.
050 Remove Accessory/Power Plant Components This consists of removing individual
accessory/power plant components from
either installed or uninstalled engines.
100 CLEANING
110 Chemical Removal of surface deposits from a part by
use of a chemical cleaning agent. After being
dissolved, the deposit is washed or rinsed
away after a soaking period. Also includes
chemical power flushing.
120 Abrasive Removal of surface deposits from a part by
wet or dry particle impingement.
130 Ultrasonic Removal of surface deposits and entrapped
material by use of high frequency sound
waves to produce cavitation at the surface
of the part. Cleaning is performed in a liquid
bath that transmits the sound energy and
keeps the removed material in suspension.
140 Mechanical Removal of surface deposits from a part by
use of a brush, felt bob, sandpaper, or other
hand or mechanical action.
150 Unassigned
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-7
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

160 Miscellaneous Removal of deposits from parts with
compressed air, miscellaneous hand
cleaning, and various combinations of
cleaning procedures.
170 Foam/Water Wash Removal or post emulsified fluorescent
penetrant via an agitated water wash,
automatic spray rinse, or an aqueous
remover aerated to produce a foam.
180 Testing of Solutions Test used to assist in identifying certain
materials by electro-mechanically
determining the presence or absence of
known constituents.
190 Unassigned
200 INSPECTION
210 Check A thorough visual examination of
components, accessories, subsystems, and
piece parts to detect structural failure,
deterioration or damage: and to determine
the need for corrective action. For example:
exterior surfaces, electronic circuit cards,
gears, control systems, linkages,
accessories, components, tubing, wiring and
connections, safety wiring, fasteners, clamps,
etc., are inspected to verify proper condition
and acceptability for continued service.
220 Visual/Dimensional A comparison of the dimensions and material
conditions of parts, subassemblies, and
assemblies with the specifications contained
in technical manuals and/or blueprints, to
detect deviations from established standard
and limits and determine the acceptability
for continued service, repair, or need to
discard the item. A visual/dimensional
function code is also required to verify that
proper corrective maintenance has been
accomplished. Although some of these tasks
may not require measurements, a complete
spectrum of tasks/sub tasks requires a
variety of measuring equipment to determine
runout, concentricity, flatness, parallelism,
hardness, thickness, clarity, dimensions, etc.
230 Penetrant Fluorescent penetrant inspection to detect
surface cracks.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-8
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

240 Magnetic Magnetic particle inspection to detect surface
cracks in magnetic materials.
250 Eddy Current Inspection for subsurface cracks, porosity,
inclusions, or other nonhomogeneous
material structure by use of high frequency
electromagnetic wave equipment. Parts are
scanned and compared to similar parts or
test specimens having known material
defects.
260 X-Ray Inspection for subsurface cracks, porosity,
material structure by use of x-ray techniques.
270 Ultrasonic Inspection for subsurface cracks, porosity,
material structure by use of contact pulse
echo ultrasonic techniques.
280 Special Any special inspection to determine the
integrity of a part for continued operation
In-Service or qualitative analysis.
290 Unassigned
300 REPAIR
310 Welding and Brazing The joining of pieces by welding (fusion,
resistance, spot, electron beam, plasma arc),
brazing (furnace, torch, induction), or
soldering. This category includes hard facing.
320 Machining The process of obtaining a desired shape or
finish by grinding, turning, boring, reaming,
broaching, milling, drilling, lapping, honing,
sizing, polishing, buffing, cutting, forming,
stamping, blanking, etc.
330 Stripping and Plating Removing or applying a metallic coating on
a surface by mechanical, chemical, or
electrical means. Plating of chromium,
cadmium, tin, etc., to build up the size of a
part or provide surface protection. Includes
masking or waxing prior to the process.
340 Plasma and Flame Spraying The application of a protective coating to a
part by feeding a powder into an ionized gas
stream. Flame spraying uses a fuel oxygen
flame to melt and propel metal onto parts to
build up the size or provide surface
protection.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-9
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

350 Miscellaneous Repairs Repairing parts by hand (cutting, drilling,
polishing, grinding, lapping, riveting,
blending, routing, fitting, burring, planishing,
sanding, sawing, recambering, drilling,
tapping, heating, chilling) and including
miscellaneous disassembly and assembly
required.
355 Miscellaneous Component Repairs Detailed instructions for the repair of the
components identified as repairable within
the engine MM and contain unique
procedures to accomplish the repair.
360 Bonding and Molding/Sealing Joining and curing of parts with an adhesive
or fusible material (including silicone,
fiberglass, glues).
370 Heat Treating Controlled heating and cooling of a material
to obtain the desired physical property
(includes annealing, tempering, quenching,
stress relieving, solution heat treat, etc.).
380 Surface Treating Treating the surface of a part by painting,
varnishing, aluminizing, Teflon coating, zinc
chromate priming, tumble finishing, shot
peening, etc. Baking and masking processes
are included.
390 Machine Riveting and Flaring Joining of parts by riveting and flaring the
rivet.
400 INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY

410 Install Installation of the unit/engine onto a
workstand, transport dolly, test stand, or
aircraft.
420 Install Modular Sections The third echelon of assembly consisting of
assembly of the modular assemblies into a
complete unit/engine assembly. The modular
sections are identified by the third element
of the ATA number.
430 Assemble Modular Sections The second echelon of assembly consisting
of assembling subassemblies into modular
sections. The modular section is identified
by the second element of the ATA number.
440 Assemble Subassemblies The first echelon of assembly consisting of
assembling piece parts into subassemblies.
The subassemblies are identified by the third
element of the ATA number.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-10
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

450 Install/Close Items Removed/Opened for Access Installation or closing of access plates,
closing of ports, installation of components,
tubing or any item which was removed or
opened in order to provide access to perform
the task.
500 MATERIAL HANDLING

510 Shipping The movement of any part, subassembly,
assembly, or component from the time it is
packaged until it reaches its destination.
520 Receiving The receipt activity for any incoming part,
subassembly, assembly, or component.
530 Packing Installing parts, subassemblies, assemblies,
or components into shipping containers.
540 Unpacking Removing parts, subassemblies, assemblies,
or components from shipping containers.
550 Storage Safekeeping of parts, subassemblies,
assemblies, or components until required for
use.
560 Marshaling/Positioning Marshaling is collection of parts,
subassemblies, and accessories prior to
release for assembly. Positioning is
movement from one fixed state to another.
570 Engine Ferry/Pod Maintenance Necessary preparations before and after
transporting an engine by aircraft ferry
method.
580 Unassigned
590 Unassigned
600 SERVICING/PRESERVING/LUBRICATING
610 Servicing Action required to sustain a unit or system
in proper operating status including priming
with applicable fluids prior to use.
620 Preserving Preparation of a unit, part, assembly, etc.,
for safekeeping from decomposition or
deterioration. Includes preparation for
storage (applying a preservative layer,
desiccants, etc.).
630 Depreserving Removing preservatives, desiccants, etc.,
from a unit, part, assembly, etc., prior to
installation or operation.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-11
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

640 Lubricating Applying oil, grease, dry-film, or silicon
lubricants on moving parts to reduce friction
or cool the item.
650 Unassigned
660 Unassigned
670 Unassigned
680 Unassigned
690 Unassigned
700 TESTING/CHECKING
710 Oil Flow Measuring the flow of oil through
components or compartments under specific
conditions.
720 Air Flow Measuring the flow of air through
components or compartments under specific
conditions.
730 Fuel Flow Function checks and flow measurements
through the part or system being tested.
740 Water Flow Function checks and flow measurements
through the part or system being tested.
750 Electrical/Return to Service Functional tests (manual or ATE) of the
system or component as well as
measurement of electrical or electronic
parameters designed to determine whether
the item can be returned to service. May
include fault isolation procedures for
components that require close correlation
between test results and fault indications.
760 Engine Operation of an engine to establish systems
function or operation under specific
conditions to measure performance.
770 Accessory/Bite Testing of an accessory to make sure for
proper operation or function.
780 Pressure Check Testing to establish the ability of a normally
pressurized component or system to operate
properly.
790 Leak Check Determine the ability of a component or
system to operate without leaking.
800 MISCELLANEOUS
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-12
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

810 Fault Isolation Operation of an engine at constant thrust
level or identical EPR to locate the prime
suspect deficient system: operating an
improperly functioning system or component
to locate the cause; or performing a series
of checks to isolate a failed part or
component.
820 Adjusting/Aligning/Calibrating Making a physical correction to make sure
of proper placement or operation of a system
or component.
830 Rigging Hooking-up, arranging, or adjusting a
component or accessory linkage for proper
operation.
840 Service Bulletin Incorporation Performing the work specified in the service
bulletin. Provides for identification of
modification tasks at the task level with
subtasks recognizing any functional changes
(chemical, visual/dimensional, cleaning,
machining, etc.) necessary to incorporate
the service bulletin.
850 Part No. Change/Re-identification Change of PN, application of PN by transfer,
engrave repair number, etc.
860 Unassigned
870 Description and Operation Electrical and mechanical description of the
unit or component. Includes leading
particulars, descriptions, limitations,
specifications, and theory of operation.
880 Approved Vendor Processes Includes processes that may be proprietary
and controlled by a particular manufacturer,
or by non-proprietary and approved for
application by conforming vendors.
890 Airline Maintenance Program (Customer Use)
900 Unassigned
910 Special Equipment Maintenance Identification of tasks to maintain special
support equipment.
920 Standard Equipment Maintenance Identification of tasks to maintain standard
support equipment.
930 Tool Fabrication Includes fabricating any tool for which
procedures to use are included in the
manual.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-13
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

940 Special Tools, Equip, and Consumables Listing Listing of all special tools, standard
equipment, special equipment, and
consumables required to perform
maintenance on the unit or component.
94A Consumables
94B Special Tools/Non Std Tools
94C Fixtures/Test Equipment
94D Standard Tools
950 Illustrated Parts List (Detailed Parts List) Section of IPL/IPC that contains parts
description and identification in top-down
break down sequence.
960 Illustrated Parts List (Equipment Designation Section of IPL/IPC that contains equipment
Index) designators cross-referenced to detailed
parts list.
970 Illustrated Parts List (Numerical Index) Section of IPL/IPC that contains an
alphanumeric listing of all parts in the unit
cross-referenced to the detailed parts list.
980 Illustrated Parts List (Alternate Vendor Index) Optional section of IPL/IPC that contains an
alphanumeric listing of all parts in the unit
that have more than one vendor source.
990 Illustrations, Tables, Front Matter, Etc.
99A Tables
99B Illustrations
99C Front Matter Pageblock (TASK Level JEMTOSS)
Front Matter Task (Collection of Subtask
JEMTOSS)
99D Access
99E References
99F General/Introduction
99G Graphic, Illustration, General Unique number series for general
instructions.
99M Materials and Compounds Unique number series.
99T Special Tools and Equipment Unique number series of tables in special
tools and equipment.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-14
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Customer Support
A. Honeywell Aerospace Online Technical Publications Web Site
(1) Go to the Honeywell Online Technical Publications Web site at http://portal.honeywell.com
/wps/portal/aero/
• To download or see publications online
• To order a publication
• To tell Honeywell of a possible data error in a publication.
B. Global Customer Care Center

(1) If you do not have access to the Honeywell Technical Publications Web site, or if you need to
speak to personnel about non-Technical Publication matters, the Honeywell Global Customer
Care Center gives 24/7 customer service to Air Transport & Regional, Business & General
Aviation, and Defense & Space customers around the globe.
• Telephone: 800-601-3099 (U.S.A.)
• Telephone: 602-365-3099 (International)
• Telephone: 00-800-601-30999 (EMEA Toll Free)
• Telephone: 420-234-625-500 (EMEA Direct).
3. References
A. Honeywell/Vendor Publications
(1) The publication title or model number, part number, publication number, and type of publications
applicable to the unit are shown in Table INTRO-4 and Table INTRO-5.
NOTE: The IPC listed in Table INTRO-4 is not FAA approved. Any reference to IPC
throughout this manual must not be construed as FAA approval of the referenced
IPC.
Table INTRO-4. Applicable Engine Publications List
Model No. Engine PN Publication No. Type

TPE331-12UA-701G 3103870-X 72-01-34 IPC
TPE331-12UAR-701G
TPE331-12UHR-701G
TPE331-12UA-701G 3103870-X 72-01-37 OH
TPE331-12UAR-701G
TPE331-12UHR-701G
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-15
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table INTRO-4. Applicable Engine Publications List (Cont)
Model No. Engine PN Publication No. Type

TPE331-12UA-701G 3103870-X 72-IR-15 IRM
TPE331-12UAR-701G
TPE331-12UHR-701G
Table INTRO-5. Applicable Component Publications List
Publication Title PN Publication No. Type

Solenoid Shutoff Valve (Fuel 3101396-X 24-09-45 OH/IPL
Manifold Purge System)
Torque and Temperature Limiter 949596-X 3-2188 OSI
Controller
Propeller Governor Assembly 897410-X 33170
1 OH/IPL
Fuel Control Assembly 897375-X 40068B

1 OH/IPL
Solenoid Shutoff Valve (PRI 692545-X 49-30-67 OH/IPL

Only)
Oil Pressure Pump Assembly 3103217-X 72-10-01 OH/IPL
Accessory Gear Assembly 3103977-X 72-10-06 OH/IPL
3103601-X
Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly 865930-X 72-12-02 OH/IPL
(Gearcase)
Torque Load Assembly 3108014-X 72-12-08 OH/IPL
3102309-X
Propeller Pitch Control 895481-X 72-13-12 OH/IPL
Feathering Valve Assembly 3102892-X 72-13-14 OH/IPL
(Turbine)
(Turbine)
(Turbine)
(Turbine)
(Turbine)
Fuel Shutoff Valve 394230-X 73-10-06 OH/IPL
Flow Divider Valve Assembly 394408-X 73-10-17 OH/IPL
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-16
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table INTRO-5. Applicable Component Publications List (Cont)
Publication Title PN Publication No. Type

Fuel Nozzle Assembly 3103235-X 73-10-19 OH/IPL
Oil/Fuel Heater 158570-X 73-10-40 CMM/IPL
Fuel Regulator Assembly 894441-X 73-21-14 OH/IPL
Fuel Pump Assembly 897400-X 73-21-19 OH/IPL
Torque Limiter Assembly 897457-X 73-22-01 OH/IPL
Ignition Exciter 3070378-4 74-10-38 CMM/IPL
Solenoid Shutoff Valve (Air 319980-X 75-10-01 OH/IPL
Anti-Ice)
Solenoid Valve (Oil Vent Valve) 319974-X 79-20-06 OH/IPL
Pressure Regulating Valve (Oil) 3101802-X 79-20-08 OH/IPL
Main Fuel Control 897801-X W660183
1 CMM/IPL
Main Fuel Control 897801-X W660255

1 CMM/IPL
NOTES:
1. For applicable publication, refer to Woodward Governor Co, 5001 N Second St, Rockford, IL 61125-7001.
B. Other Publications
(1) These publications are standard references:
• The United States GPO Style Manual 2000 (available at
http://www.gpoaccess.gov/stylemanual/browse.html)
• IEEE Std 260, Standard Letter Symbols for Units of Measurement (available from the
American National Standards Institute, New York, NY)
• ASME Y14.38, Abbreviations for Use on Drawings and in Text (available from the
American National Standards Institute, New York, NY)
• ANSI/IEEE Std 91, Graphic Symbols for Logic Functions (available from the American
National Standards Institute, New York, NY)
• H4/H8 CAGE Codes (available at http://www.dlis.dla.mil/cage_welcome.asp)
• IEEE 315/ANSI Y32.2, Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics Diagrams
(available from the American National Standards Institute, New York, NY)
4. Acronyms and Abbreviations

A. General
(1) The abbreviations are used in agreement with ASME Y14.38.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-17
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Acronyms and non-standard abbreviations used in this publication are shown in Table INTRO-6.
Table INTRO-6. List of Acronyms and Abbreviations
Term Full Term

µm Micrometer
AC Alternating Current
AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Mfg Association
AFM Aircraft Flight Manual
AMM Aircraft Maintenance Manual
amp Ampere
AMS Aerospace Material Specification
ANG Angle
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APR Automatic Performance Reserve
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
ATA Air Transport Association
ATE Automatic Test Equipment
CAGE Commercial and Government Entity
CAM Continuous Airworthiness Maintenance
cc/hr Cubic Centimeter Per Hour
cc/min Cubic Centimeter Per Minute
cc Cubic Centimeter
C Celsius
CCW Counterclockwise
CMM/IPL Component Maintenance Manual with Illustrated Parts List
CW Clockwise
DC Direct Current
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-18
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table INTRO-6. List of Acronyms and Abbreviations (Cont)
Term Full Term

DERB Damaged Engine Review Board
DIA Diameter
DIM. Dimension
DSC Data Sheet, Customer
EGT Exhaust Gas Temperature
EPR Engine Pressure Ratio
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
F Fahrenheit
FOD Foreign Object Damage
FPI Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection
ft-lb Foot-Pounds
GEM Ground Equipment Manual
g Gram
GPH Gallons Per Hour
GPM Gallons Per Minute
GPO Government Printing Office
HP High Pressure
hr Hour
Hz Hertz
ID Inside Diameter
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
inHg Inches of Mercury
in-lb Inch-Pounds
in² Square Inch
IPC Illustrated Parts Catalog

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-19
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Term Full Term

IPL Illustrated Parts List
IPS Inch Per Second
IRM Inspection and Repair Manual
JEMTOSS Jet Engine Maintenance Task Oriented Support System
kg Kilogram
kPa Kilopascal
L/hr Liter Per Hour
L/min Liter Per Minute
LE Leading Edge
L Liter
LMM Light Maintenance Manual
MFV Manual Fuel Valve
MIN Minimum
min Minute
mL Milliliter
m Meter
mmHg Millimeters of Mercury
MM Maintenance Manual
mm Millimeter
mm² Square Millimeter
MOW Measurement Over Wires
MPI Magnetic Particle Inspection
mV Millivolts
NAS National Aerospace Standard
NBS National Bureau of Standards

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-20
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Term Full Term

Nm Newton Meter
NTS Negative Torque Sensor
OAT Outside Air Temperature
OD Outside Diameter
OH/IPL Overhaul Manual with Illustrated Parts List
OH Overhaul Manual
OSFG Overspeed Fuel Governor
P3 Compressor Discharge Pressure
PG Propeller Governor
PKP Purple-K Powder
PLA Power Lever Angle
PN Part Number
PPC Propeller Pitch Control
PPH Pounds Per Hour
PPM Pounds Per Minute
PRI Primary
PS3 Compressor Discharge Static Pressure
PS5 Exhaust Static Pressure
PSIG Pounds Per Square Inch Gage
PSI Pounds Per Square Inch
PT2 Total Inlet Pressure
PTS Positive Torque Sensor
QAD Quick Attach/Detach
RAD Radius
RMS Root Mean Squared

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-21
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Term Full Term

RPM Revolutions Per Minute
RPR Restricted Performance Reserve
SB Service Bulletin
SFE Start Fuel Enrichment
SG Specific Gravity
SHP Shaft Horse Power
SI International System of Units
SIL Service Information Letter
SOAP Spectrometric Oil Analysis Program
SRL Single Red Line
TBC Thermal Barrier Coating
TBO Time Between Overhaul
TE Trailing Edge
TIR Total Indicator Reading
TT2 Total Inlet Air Temperature
TT4 Total Turbine Inlet Temperature
USFG Underspeed Fuel Governor
USMS United States Measurement System
VDC Volts Direct Current
Wf Fuel Flow
5. Microfiche
A. General
(1) Honeywell technical publications are furnished in microfiche form. As with most changes, this
change will require some adjustments by the users of the publications. The many advantages
of microfiche will outweigh inconveniences encountered during the initial transition from the
printed publication to the microfiche form. Although a few problems are expected for those
inexperienced with microfiche, acceptance of the microfiche form is important to its successful
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-22
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
use. A few points are emphasized in the following paragraphs which should smooth the initial
transition to the use of Honeywell microfiche publications.
B. Revision Service
(1) Microfiche will vastly reduce the time required to maintain the technical library. The time
consuming task of inserting new revision pages into a printed publication is not required with
microfiche, since each revision to a microfiche publication is complete with itself – the entire
publication is refilmed. Whenever a revision to a publication is received, all of the old microfiche
sheets of the publication are replaced. A printed page is included with each microfiche package
which identifies the contents.
C. Temporary Revision Service

(1) To make sure of timely distribution of Temporary Revision to a microfiche publication, only the
individual sheets affected by the change are replaced when a Temporary Revision is issued.
The user receives a printed page describing the Highlights of the changes included on each
microfiche sheet issued with a Temporary Revision.
D. Equipment
(1) A microfiche reader or reader/printer is required in the use of microfiche publications. To obtain
a single full size page from a microfiche sheet, a microfiche printer is required. For users not
already using microfiche publications, this requires a new piece of equipment.
(2) (Readers and Reader/Printers) All Honeywell microfiche is produced at a 24:1 ratio of reduction.
This requires that a lens with a corresponding 24:1 ratio be used in the reader and reader/printer.
The number and variety of readers and reader/printers available throughout the industry is quite
large. Most are either equipped with a 24:1 lens or may have one installed. Power requirements,
methods of holding the microfiche sheet, projection technique, and any special controls available
vary substantially from model to model. The proper reduction ratio (24:1) lens, however, is
necessary for use with microfiche.
(3) (Filing and Storing Systems) Many different products are marketed for the filing and storing of
microfiche. Inexpensive holder panels are available which can be kept in a three-ring binder.
Each side of a panel provides several filing slots. When a single microfiche sheet is filed in each
slot, the title blocks of all sheets are visible to provide easy handling, indexing, and access.
E. How to Use Microfiche

(1) (The Microfiche Sheet) Each microfiche sheet carries a title block at the top of the sheet for
identification, and 98 frames (seven rows of 14 frames each). The 98 frames are filmed pages
of the publication. At the beginning of primary sections, “eyeball” indicators are provided to
subdivide the contents of the publications. Refer to Figure INTRO-2.
(2) (Microfiche Title Block) The title block at the top of each microfiche sheet identifies the equipment
covered by the publication, the publication type (IPC, MM, etc.), the report number of the
publication, the contents of the individual microfiche sheet, the revision number and date of the
publication, the date of microfiche sheet, and a sequence number for the microfiche sheet in
the package (FICHE NO. XX). Each sheet has an individual sequence number. The first sheet
of the microfiche publication carries a terminal sheet number to notify the user of the total number
of microfiche sheets in the package (FICHE NO. 1 OF 10, for example).
(3) (List of Effective Microfiche) The first text frame of the first sheet of a microfiche publication
contains a list of effective microfiche. The List of Effective Microfiche lists each microfiche sheet
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-23
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
by sequence number and provides the current microfiche sheet date. Reference to this list allows
the user to verify that the microfiche publication is complete and current.
(4) (Microfiche “Eyeball” Indicators) Special titles are filed within the microfiche sheet to subdivide
the contents of the publication. Each title frame occupies the space for a printed page and carries
a title large enough to be read without the aid of a microfiche reader. The title frames are referred
to as “eyeball” indicators because only the user’s unaided eye is required to read the frame. The
microfiche sheets include eyeball indicators at the same locations as plastic tabs are included
in the printed publications to identify the start of primary sections. A table of contents is included
at the beginning of each primary section of the publication to specify the detailed contents of
the section. When a section of the publication starts on one microfiche sheet and carries over
to a subsequent sheet, an eyeball indicator is used on the first frame of the subsequent sheet
to indicate a continuation.
F. Manuals Provided on Microfiche

(1) Microfiche is provided on the IPC and LMM for your information and convenience.
(2) Microfiche copies of the IPC and/or the LMM will be provided at a nominal charge upon request.
These publications may be obtained by contacting Honeywell International Inc., Technical Data
Distribution, M/S 64-01/2101-201, P.O. Box 52170, Phoenix, AZ 85072-2170.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-24
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure INTRO-2. (Sheet 1 of 1) Typical Honeywell Microfiche Publication (GRAPHIC 00-00-00-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page INTRO-25
72-01-36 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
List of Effective Pages 8015 31 Jan 2012

LEP-1 31 Jan 2012 8016 31 Jan 2012
LEP-2 31 Jan 2012 STANDARD
Table of Contents PRACTICES – REPAIR
TC-1 31 Jan 2012 9001 31 Jan 2012
TC-2 31 Jan 2012 9002 31 Jan 2012
70-00-00 9003 31 Jan 2012
STANDARD 9004 31 Jan 2012
PRACTICES – SYSTEM STANDARD
DESCRIPTION PRACTICES – ASSEMBLY
1 31 Jan 2012 10001 31 Jan 2012
2 31 Jan 2012 10002 31 Jan 2012
PRACTICES–DISASSEMBLY 10004 31 Jan 2012
5001 31 Jan 2012 10005 31 Jan 2012
5002 31 Jan 2012 10006 31 Jan 2012
5003 31 Jan 2012 10007 31 Jan 2012
5004 31 Jan 2012 10008 31 Jan 2012
PRACTICES – CLEANING 10010 31 Jan 2012
6001 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012
STANDARD
PRACTICES–INSPECTION/
CHECK
8001 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012
8003 31 Jan 2012
8004 31 Jan 2012
8005 31 Jan 2012
8006 31 Jan 2012
8007 31 Jan 2012
8008 31 Jan 2012
8009 31 Jan 2012
8010 31 Jan 2012
8011 31 Jan 2012
8012 31 Jan 2012
8013 31 Jan 2012
8014 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-1
70-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER – 70
Title Page
CHAPTER 70 – ENGINE
Section 70-00 – 70-00-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 70-00-00 – STANDARD PRACTICES............................................................... 1
STANDARD PRACTICES – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION......................................... 1
STANDARD PRACTICES – DISASSEMBLY........................................................ 5001
STANDARD PRACTICES – CLEANING............................................................... 6001
STANDARD PRACTICES – INSPECTION/CHECK.............................................. 8001
STANDARD PRACTICES – REPAIR.................................................................... 9001
STANDARD PRACTICES – ASSEMBLY.............................................................. 10001
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-1
70-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
STANDARD PRACTICES – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. Standard Practices (TASK 70-00-00-870-801-A01)
A. General (Subtask 70-00-00-870-001-A01)
(1) The standard practices and general maintenance instructions presented in this chapter are
recommended by the engine manufacturer. Frequent reference must be made to this chapter
by personnel engaged in maintenance procedures outlined in this publication.
NOTE: The application of general maintenance practices introduced in this MM are on the
same guidelines as FAA Manual AC65-9, Airframe and Powerplant Mechanics General
Handbook. For those maintenance practices not covered in this MM, use FAA Manual
AC65-9, Airframe and Powerplant Mechanics General Handbook.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

ALL Page 1
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
STANDARD PRACTICES – DISASSEMBLY
1. Planning Data (TASK 70-00-00-030-801-A01)
A. Reason for the Job (Subtask 70-00-00-030-001-A01)
(1) Use these procedures as standard practices to disassemble the engine.
B. Job Setup Data (Subtask 70-00-00-030-002-A01)
(1) Refer to Table 5001 for the specified special tools, fixtures, and equipment in this section.
(2) You can use equivalent alternatives for the special tools, fixtures, equipment, and consumable
materials, unless specified differently. The user must find equivalent alternatives.
(3) Refer to H4/H8 CAGE Codes (available at http://www.dlis.dla.mil/cage_welcome.asp) for
manufacturer’s address.
Table 5001. Special Tools, Fixtures, and Equipment
Number Description Source
cellulose-tipped hammer commercially available
fiber mallet commercially available
rubber mallet commercially available
vise with Micarta jaws commercially available
WARNING: BEFORE YOU USE A MATERIAL, REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER’S MATERIAL

SAFETY DATA SHEET. SOME MATERIALS CAN BE DANGEROUS.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE MATERIALS THAT ARE NOT EQUIVALENT TO HONEYWELL

SPECIFIED MATERIALS. MATERIALS THAT ARE NOT EQUIVALENT CAN CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT AND CAN MAKE THE WARRANTY NOT
APPLICABLE.
CAUTION: ANY SUBSTITUTES USED FOR LISTED VERITHIN NO. 753, SILVER PENCIL,
VIOLET, NO. 127 1/2, INDUSTRIAL MARKING INK, OR YELLOW NO. 170T, CHINA
MARKER MUST CONTAIN NO CARBON.
(4) Refer to Table 5002 for the specified consumable materials in this section.
NOTE: Refer to SERVICING (PGBLK 72-00-00-11000) for Honeywell-approved engine oils
and engine fuels.
Table 5002. Consumables
engine oil commercially available
plastic sheeting commercially available
Verithin No. 753 silver pencil CAGE: 34147

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY DISASSEMBLY
ALL Page 5001
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 5002. Consumables (Cont)
Violet, No. 127 1/2 industrial marking ink (alternative CAGE: 96379
for silver pencil)
Yellow No. 170T China marker (alternative for silver CAGE: 34147
pencil)
2. Procedure (TASK 70-00-00-030-802-A01)
A. Job Setup (Subtask 70-00-00-030-003-A01)
(1) Obey the precautions.
B. Standard Disassembly Procedures (Subtask 70-00-00-030-004-A01)
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT TEE OR FITTINGS ARE HELD SECURELY WHEN REMOVING CAPS
AND TUBE ASSEMBLIES. IF TEE OR FITTINGS ARE NOT SECURED, UNDUE STRESS,
BENDING, AND POSSIBLE CRACKS IN ATTACHING PARTS MAY RESULT.
(1) Observe the following general procedures throughout disassembly or removal operations:
(a) Place each part removed from the engine on a clean workbench in the order of disassembly,
in preparation for cleaning and inspection. Keep hardware and small parts together in trays
to prevent parts from being mislaid.
(b) Provide proper covering or support to protect shafts, gears, studs, and any projecting part
from being bent, scratched, or otherwise damaged.
(c) Do not use steel or lead hammers directly on the assemblies or their parts. Use a
cellulose-tipped hammer, fiber mallet, or rubber mallet. Do not clamp parts directly in the
steel jaws of a bench vise. Use a vise with Micarta jaws or equivalent.
(d) Spray steel parts with clean, approved engine oil after disassembly. Cover all parts with
plastic sheeting or suitable plastic closures unless cleaning and inspection are to be
accomplished immediately.
(e) Do not disassemble tube assemblies, hose assemblies, riveted assemblies, staked or
press-fit parts (except seals and bearings), remove nameplates, modification plates,
lubrication plates, decals, studs or their lockrings and thread inserts, unless specifically
required in the text or necessary for replacement of a part. If disassembly or removal is
necessary, proceed in a manner consistent with good shop practice.
(f) Always seal ports, bores, and passages. Cover large openings with plastic sheeting. Cap
open tube ends. If the engine is to be left for even a short period in a partially disassembled
state, cover or cap all openings.
(g) During various stages of disassembly, examine all parts and assemblies for signs of scoring,
burning, or other defects. Note physical conditions which will not be apparent after cleaning.
Tag involved parts before they are cleaned and laid out for detailed inspection.
(h) Note and record number and thickness of all shims or shim washers removed from the
various components of the engine for reference at reassembly.
(i) Record manner of lockwiring for duplication at reassembly.
UP495246
ALL Page 5002
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: NO SCRIBE MARKS ARE ALLOWED ON ROTATING PARTS.
(j) Use Verithin No. 753, silver pencil or Violet, No. 127 1/2, industrial marking ink or Yellow
No. 170T, China marker for indexing housings and shafts where required during
disassembly.
(k) Whenever components with knife-edge (labyrinth) seals are removed from engine, use
care to prevent any handling damage such as dents, nicks, or bends on knife-edges.
(2) Retain assembly part number when replacing multiple piece parts. When a part to be replaced
is marked with assembly part number in addition to the individual piece part number, make sure
that the replacement part is identified with the assembly part number.
C. Job Close-up (Subtask 70-00-00-030-005-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 5003
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
STANDARD PRACTICES – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures as standard practices to clean the engine.

Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable


APPLICABLE.
isobutyl alcohol commercially available
isopropyl alcohol (TT-I-735) commercially available
2. Procedure (TASK 70-00-00-100-802-A01)
B. Cleaning Instructions for Fire Extinguisher Agents (Subtask 70-00-00-100-004-A01)
(1) Refer to Table 6003 for fire extinguisher agent cleaning instructions.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY CLEANING
ALL Page 6001
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 6003. Fire Extinguisher Agent Cleaning Instructions
Extinguisher Material Chemical Compound Corrective Action

Animal protein Not applicable Flush with water or steam clean to
remove residue.
Carbon dioxide CO2 No residue, no cleaning required.
Detergent foam Not applicable Flush with water or steam clean to
remove residue.
WARNING: DO NOT USE ALCOHOL NEAR OPEN FLAME OR ON HOT SURFACES. USE ONLY WITH
ADEQUATE VENTILATION, INHALATION OF VAPORS CAN CAUSE DROWSINESS. STORE
ALCOHOL IN APPROVED CONTAINERS.
WARNING: COMPRESSED AIR USED FOR CLEANING CAN CREATE AIRBORNE PARTICLES THAT
MAY ENTER THE EYES. EYE PROTECTION REQUIRED. AIR PRESSURE MUST NOT
EXCEED 30 PSIG (207 KPA).
CAUTION: UNDER CERTAIN CONDITIONS DRY CHEMICAL AGENT (PKP) AND HALON 1011 CAN
COMBINE WITH MOISTURE, WHICH CAN CAUSE SEVERE CORROSION DAMAGE TO
ENGINE PARTS. ENGINES EXPOSED TO PKP AND HALON 1011 WILL BE CLEANED AS
SOON AS POSSIBLE.
CAUTION: ALCOHOL CAN BE VERY CORROSIVE WHEN LEFT ON MAGNESIUM PARTS FOR
EXTENDED LENGTHS OF TIME. MAGNESIUM PARTS SHOULD BE STEAM CLEANED AS
SOON AS POSSIBLE, AFTER THE ALCOHOL RINSE, TO PREVENT CORROSION DAMAGE.
Dry chemical (PKP) Potassium bicarbonate with silicone Use compressed air or vacuum tool,
(methyl polysidoxane) to prevent remove as much powder as
moisture absorption possible. Remove residue with a
mixture of 60% isopropyl alcohol and
40% isobutyl alcohol. Steam clean
parts.
Halon 1011 Bromo chloromethane CH2BrCl Halon 1011 is not water soluble.
Remove residue using a mixture of
60% isopropyl alcohol and 40%
isobutyl alcohol. Steam clean parts.
Halon 1211 Bromochloro difluromethane Halon 1211 has no residue. No
CF2ClBr cleaning required.
Halon 1301 Bromo trifluromethane CBrF3 Halon 1301 has no residue. No
cleaning required.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
STANDARD PRACTICES – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures as standard practices to inspect the engine.
ball plug gage stylus scriber CAGE: 96577

(alternate for diameter stylus
scriber)
diameter stylus scriber CAGE: 57342


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
fine abrasive stone commercially available
soft-plastic fiber-bristled brush commercially available
white Arkansas polishing stone CAGE: 06565
MIL-PRF-680 solvent commercially available

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY INSPECTION/CHECK
ALL Page 8001
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 1630-210 suede brush Los Angeles Brush Co., 2137 E.

37th St., Los Angeles, CA
90058-1416
PN ST70AL0512 soft rubberized abrasive (Brightboy) CAGE: 08659
2. Procedure (TASK 70-00-00-200-802-A01)
B. Bearing Handling Procedures (Subtask 70-00-00-200-004-A01)
CAUTION: HANDLING OF BEARING COMPONENTS MUST BE MINIMIZED. WHEN HANDLING

BEARINGS PERSONNEL MUST WEAR EITHER SYNTHETIC RUBBER GLOVES OR
NYLON MESH GLOVES, WITH POLYETHYLENE PALMS AND FINGERS. IN CASE NONE
OF THE ABOVE ARE AVAILABLE, CLEAN COTTON GLOVES MUST BE WORN.
NOTE: Functional surfaces of bearings must be visually checked under suitable lighting at
ten-power magnification. Visual check may be supplemented by hand tracing with a
precision diameter stylus scriber to determine the acceptability of observed surface defects.
Refer to Table 8003.
(1) Submerge bearings in container of clean, approved engine oil until inspection to minimize
contamination.
(2) Prior to inspection, clean bearing components. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
(3) After inspection of bearings coat with clean, approved engine oil and store in a sealed bag until
installation.
Table 8003. Inspection Criteria for Acceptance of Bearing Component (Rings and Rolling Elements)
Defects
Stylus Tip Radius to be Used on

Functional Surfaces Maximum Defect Size Allowable
Description Rolling Rolling Rolling Non-Functional Rolling Rolling Rolling
1 Element Element Element Surfaces Element Element Element
of Defect
Diameter up Diameter Diameter Diameter Diameter Diameter
to 0.500 inch over 0.500 over 1.00 up to 0.500 over 0.500 over 1.00
(12.70 mm) inch (12.70 inch (25.4 inch (12.70 inch (12.70 inch (25.4
mm) but less mm) mm) mm) but mm)
than 1.00 less than
inch (25.4 1.00 inch
mm) (25.4 mm)
True 0.040 inch 0.080 inch 0.120 inch Refer to Dents. 0.015 inch 0.025 inch 0.035 inch
brinelling (1.02 mm) (2.03 mm) (3.05 mm) (0.38 mm) (0.64 mm) (0.89 mm)
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 8003. Inspection Criteria for Acceptance of Bearing Component (Rings and Rolling Elements) Defects
(Cont)

of Defect
than 1.00 less than
mm) (25.4 mm)
False 0.040 inch 0.080 inch 0.120 inch Not applicable Not Not Not
brinelling (1.02 mm) (2.03 mm) (3.05 mm) applicable applicable applicable
Corrosion 0.040 inch 0.080 inch 0.120 inch None Not Not Not
and rust (1.02 mm) (2.03 mm) (3.05 mm) Acceptable applicable applicable applicable
Pits 0.040 inch 0.080 inch 0.120 inch 0.060 inch 0.010 inch 0.014 inch 0.018 inch
(1.02 mm) (2.03 mm) (3.05 mm) (1.52 mm) (0.25 mm) (0.36 mm) (0.46 mm)
maximum
dimension
Pits in a 0.040 inch 0.080 inch 0.120 inch Maximum Maximum of Maximum of Maximum
0.250 inch (1.02 mm) (2.03 mm) (3.05 mm) number of 5. 3 at 0.010 3 at 0.014 of 3 at
(6.35 mm) 0.030 inch inch (0.25 inch (0.36 0.018 inch
diameter (0.76 mm) in mm) mm) (0.46 mm)
circle greatest
dimension
Nicks and 0.040 inch 0.080 inch 0.120 inch 0.125 inch 0.025 inch 0.030 inch 0.035 inch
dents (1.02 mm) (2.03 mm) (3.05 mm) (3.18 mm) in (0.64 mm) (0.76 mm) (0.89 mm)
greatest
dimension
Scoring 0.040 inch 0.080 inch 0.120 inch Acceptable Maximum Maximum Maximum
(1.02 mm) (2.03 mm) (3.05 mm) depth of depth of depth of
0.002 inch 0.002 inch 0.002 inch
(0.05 mm) (0.05 mm) (0.05 mm)
Scratches 0.040 inch 0.080 inch 0.120 inch Refer to roller Maximum Maximum Maximum
and scuffs – (1.02 mm) (2.03 mm) (3.05 mm) end wear. depth of depth of depth of
Rollers axial axial axial 0.002 inch 0.002 inch 0.002 inch
(0.05 mm) (0.05 mm) (0.05 mm)
0.080 inch 0.120 inch 0.160 inch
(2.03 mm) (3.05 mm) (4.06 mm)
circumferential circumferential circumferential
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 8003. Inspection Criteria for Acceptance of Bearing Component (Rings and Rolling Elements) Defects
(Cont)

of Defect
than 1.00 less than
mm) (25.4 mm)
Scratches 0.040 inch 0.080 inch 0.120 inch Not applicable Maximum Maximum Maximum
and scuffs – (1.02 mm) (2.03 mm) (3.05 mm) depth of depth of depth of
Balls and 0.002 inch 0.002 inch 0.002 inch
Single scratches may not extend more than
outer races (0.05 mm) (0.05 mm) (0.05 mm)
one-half way around the circumference or
multiple scratches may not cross or extend
more than one quarter the way around
circumference.
Scratches 0.040 inch 0.080 inch 0.120 inch Acceptable - 0.500 inch (12.7 mm) maximum -
and scuffs – (1.02 mm) (2.03 mm) (3.05 mm) raised metal circumferential length on raceway or
Rings must be stoned one-half width of raceway or 0.002 inch
flush with (0.05 mm) maximum depth
surface
Surface slag None None None 0.125 inch None None None
inclusions acceptable acceptable acceptable (3.18 mm) acceptable acceptable acceptable
greatest
dimension and
does not
extend onto a
functional
surface
Galling Not Not applicable Not applicable Rejectable if Not Not Not
applicable felt with a applicable applicable applicable
0.160 inch
(4.06 mm)
stylus
NOTES:
1. All defects are acceptable unless felt with the designated stylus or are greater in dimension than the maximum
size allowable.
C. Inspect Bearing Components (Subtask 70-00-00-200-005-A01)
(1) Prior to inspection, clean bearing components. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8004
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Place bearings in a covered container or plastic bag while awaiting inspection to minimize
contamination.
(3) Functional surfaces of bearings include:
(a) Total raceway width of straight-through (non-flanged) races of roller bearings.
(b) Load paths on flanged raceways of roller bearings.
(c) Roller OD load path.
(d) Roller corner radius to end face intersection. Refer to Figure 8001.
(e) Roller bearing raceway guide flange inner surface.
(f) Cage pilot land surface.
(g) Balls and ball bearing outer raceway.
(h) Ball bearing loaded raceway half for split inner rings.
(4) When a diameter stylus scriber is used it must have a tip radius as specified in Table 8003. The
diameter stylus scriber must be held perpendicular to the surface being examined and the only
pressure exerted should be the weight of the diameter stylus scriber. Surface blemishes of
acceptable bearings must not exceed the requirements of Table 8003.
NOTE: Table 8003 specifies diameter stylus scriber tip radius. If using ball plug gage stylus
scriber, ball diameter must be equal to twice the radius specified in Table 8003. The
diameter stylus scriber tip surface finish must be 4 microinches (0.1 µm) or better.
(5) Bearings that exhibit surface conditions that exceed the limits of Table 8003, or other damage
that renders them inoperable are to be rejected for reuse. Bearings that have surface conditions
no worse than those shown in Figure 8001 are identified as acceptable and may be reused.
(6) Components (races, rollers, cage, etc) of each bearing should be separated from components
of other bearings. Each reassembled bearing must contain only original components and be
oriented at reassembly the same as at disassembly.
(7) Definitions and limits:
(a) Arced. Round pit-shaped cavity in a surface from which metal has been removed by an
electrical arc, causing a temper change (softer) in the metal around the pit-shaped cavity.
Arced condition is cause for rejection.
(b) Brinelling (True). True brinelling is plastic flow of metal characterized by smooth, shiny
bottomed indentations in raceways and rolling elements usually equally spaced
corresponding to rolling element spacing. Refer to Table 8003 for limits.
(c) Brinelling (False). False brinelling is characterized by surface marks or blemishes on balls,
rollers or raceways that normally have a polished or satin finish appearance. This is usually
caused by continuous non-rotational vibrations. Refer to Table 8003 for limits.
(d) Burnishing. Burnishing is a mechanical smoothing of a surface, sometimes resulting in
discoloration around the contact area. This is not accompanied by wear. Refer to roller
end wear and cage defects sections.
(e) Burrs. Refer to raised metal.
(f) Cracks. Cracks are separations, fissures, or ruptures characterized by sharp edges and/or
sharp changes in direction. Cracks are cause for rejection on functional or non-functional
surfaces.
UP495246
ALL Page 8005
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(g) Corrosion. Corrosion on surface areas is characterized by a broken, pitted, or discolored

appearance. Corroded surface areas will exhibit an orange peel appearance. Refer to
Table 8003 for limits.
(h) Dents. Dents are slight depressions or hollows on the surface made by mechanical injury
to the material such as blows or pressure caused by hard objects contacting the finished
surface. They are usually bright bottomed and irregular in shape. Refer to Table 8003 for
limits.
(i) Fractures. Refer to cracks.
(j) Fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is fast oxidation of the surfaces. It is characterized
by rusty appearing surfaces ranging from black (well bonded) to a fairly bright reddish-brown
(often loosely bonded or even free particles). Fretting corrosion is acceptable on
non-functional surfaces.
(k) Galling. Galling is a more severe condition of fretting corrosion where there is a significant
transfer of material between surfaces due to welding and breakaway of particles. It is
caused by excessive sliding between two poorly lubricated surfaces which are forced into
contact with each other by high pressure. Refer to Table 8003 for limits.
(l) Heat discoloration. Heat discoloration of bearing surfaces ranges from light straw to blue
or purple. Purple or blue discoloration which still exists after the bearing is cleaned will be
cause for rejection.
(m) Nicks. Refer to dents.
(n) Pits. Pits are small, irregular-shaped cavities in a surface from which material has been
removed by corrosive action such as chemical or electrolytic attack. Refer to Table 8003
for limits.
(o) Raised metal. Raised metal not specifically covered by description or illustration is not
acceptable.
(p) Roller end wear. Roller end wear may appear as circular scratches burnishing, scuffing,
frosting, or pitting. The roller end inspection criteria is based on the DN value of the bearing
where D is the bore (inner diameter of inner race) in millimeters and N is the speed of the
rotating ring. For example: a 40 mm bore bearing with rotating inner ring speed of 20,000
RPM equals 800,000 DN. If the DN value is greater than 700,000, the following guidelines
must be followed.
1 Roller ends which exhibit wear of 0.0001 inch (0.0025 mm) or more measured from
the unworn surface using a 0.015-inch (0.38 mm) diameter stylus scriber are cause
for rejection. Exceptions to this criteria are:
a Wear on the center portion of the roller end caused by debris between cage
and roller is acceptable.
b Roller end patterns which are eccentric irrespective of wear depth are cause
for rejection.
c Excessive pitting conditions are cause for rejection.
d Excessive scuffing patterns are cause for rejection.
e Other roller end patterns are subject to the above criteria.
2 For bearings with a DN value of less than 700,000, all criteria are the same as for
bearings with DN above 700,000 except that the wear limit is 0.0002 inch (0.0051
mm).
UP495246
ALL Page 8006
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
3 Cage defects which are cause for rejection include the following:
a Flaking, peeling, and blistering of silverplate.
b Grossly uneven wear of silverplate on pilot surface.
c Cage pocket wear that has worn through silverplate. Marginal cases that should
be considered as cause for rejection when specified in inspection instructions
of applicable chapter/section/subject for a particular bearing.
d Cracked cages are not acceptable.
e Bent or broken cages are not acceptable.
f Purple to black discoloration is acceptable on bearing cages unless silverplated
surfaces show evidence of heavy chemical attack, i.e., pitting, surface roughness
or exposed base metal.
(q) Rust. Refer to corrosion.
(r) Scratches and scuffs. Scratches and scuffs are narrow, shallow linear abrasions caused
by movement of sharp objects or particles across a surface. These penetrate the original
surface of bearing components. Refer to Table 8003 for limits.
(s) Scoring. Scoring is deep, multiple scratches caused by sliding at the rolling contact surface
in the presence of foreign particles usually found on ball, roller and raceway surfaces.
Refer to Table 8003 for limits.
(t) Skidding. Skidding is excessive slipping between balls or rollers and raceways. Skidding
is evidenced on roller bearings by a burnished or frosted ring around the rollers and/or
raceways, on ball bearings by a speckled wear pattern or by a burnished or frosted ring
on balls and by burnished or irregular frosted or smeared areas on the inner race. Skidding
is cause for rejection.
(u) Spalling. Spalling is exhibited by irregular-shaped cavities of flaked-out metal from a raceway
or rolling element surface with jagged bottoms caused by rolling contact fatigue. Spalling
is cause for rejection.
(v) Stains. Stains are surface discolorations which range from black to dark reddish-brown in
color. Surface areas which are stained will exhibit an intact, non-pitted, unbroken
appearance. Stains are acceptable on all surfaces.
(w) Surface slag inclusions. Surface slag inclusions are foreign materials embedded in the
metal. These occasionally appear as dark spots or lines following bearing operation. Refer
to Table 8003 for limits.
(x) Varnishing. Varnishing is the breakdown of a lubricant because of temperature which
results in a harmless surface discoloration which can be recognized by its light brown to
black appearance. Varnishing is acceptable on all surfaces,
(8) Dimensionally check bearings as follows:
(a) Dimensions must be measured as per AFBMA (Anti-Friction Bearing Mfg Association,
Suite 700,1101 Connecticut Avenue NW, Washington, DC 20036) Standards, Section 4,
“Ball and Roller Bearing Standard Gaging Practices”.
(b) Dimensions must meet the requirements in applicable manual for the engine and bearing
in question except when specific deviations are allowed in this publication.
UP495246
ALL Page 8007
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) Dimensional inspections are included for critical wear areas. However, if visual inspection
shows no indication of wear or damage, dimensional requirements must be left to the
judgment of the inspection personnel.
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Bearing Roller Functional Surface (GRAPHIC 70-00-00-99B-001-A01)
D. FPI Procedure (Subtask 70-00-00-200-006-A01)
NOTE: Personnel performing FPI must be certified in accordance with NAS410, EN4179, or with
an equivalent industry standard.
NOTE: Accept/reject criteria will be as specified in the applicable component section of the manual.
NOTE: If area to be inspected is painted, all paint must be removed prior to performing this
procedure.
(1) Make sure that the part is free of oil, carbon, or other contaminants. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK
70-00-00-6000) for the applicable part.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE MAGNESIUM CLEANING SOLUTIONS ON COMPONENTS
CONTAINING ALUMINUM.
CAUTION: WHEN SWABBING TITANIUM PARTS, USE A NON-CHLORINATED SOLVENT

SOLUTION.
CAUTION: SOLVENT IS TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE IN WELL-VENTILATED AREA. AVOID

BREATHING FUMES OR CONTACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO
PHYSICAL HEALTH. KEEP AWAY FROM FLAME TO AVOID FIRE HAZARD.
(2) FPIs must be performed using the Specifications ASTM E 1417 or Aeronautical Material
Specification 2647 which detail the minimum requirements for such inspections. Refer to the
component part number section of the manual for specific instructions and/or acceptance criteria.
Inspection to a higher sensitivity level than specified is acceptable provided the process yields
a satisfactory indication to background contrast. Type II and Type III process must not be used
on engine components.
UP495246
ALL Page 8008
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Unless otherwise specified in the components section of the manual, perform FPI examination
of critical components with Type I, Method D, Sensitivity Level 4 process. Penetrant dwell time
must be 30 minutes minimum. Developer is required. Use dry developer except where another
form is specified.
(a) Critical components are defined as any part which by design experiences rotary motion
when in operation (examples are blades, disks, wheels, rotors, impellers, seal plates,
spacers, couplings, tie bolts, shafts, and gears, etc).
(b) Localized spot inspection, where specified, is an exception where Method C may be
substituted for Method D.
(4) Unless otherwise specified in the component part number section of the manual, perform FPI
examination of other than critical components with a Type I, Method A or D, Sensitivity Level 3
process. Penetrant dwell time must be 30 minutes minimum. Developer is required. Use dry
developer except where another form is specified.
(5) Components must be cleaned after FPI to remove penetrant and other examination residues
and preserved to prevent rust or corrosion. Refer to the cleaning section for the applicable part.
NOTE: To prevent corrosion attack, magnesium alloy parts must be baked and oiled within
4 hours after completion of penetrant inspection.
E. MPI Procedure (Subtask 70-00-00-200-007-A01)
NOTE: Inspection personnel must be approved to do the magnetic inspection.

(1) Make sure that the part is free of oil, carbon, or other contaminants. Refer to the cleaning section
for the applicable part.
(2) Use the procedures in ASTM E 1444 to do the MPI.
(3) After the last inspection, clean the magnetic particles from the part, then apply clean, approved
engine oil or rust preventive lubricant to part to prevent rust or corrosion.
F. Inspection of Tubes, Hoses, and Fittings (Subtask 70-00-00-200-008-A01)
NOTE: These paragraphs contain general instructions for cleaning, inspecting, and repairing tubes,
hoses, and fittings.
(1) Clean tubes, hoses, and fittings as follows:
(a) Cover openings to prevent entry of dirt and other foreign material.
WARNING: SOLVENT IS TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE IN WELL-VENTILATED AREA.
AVOID BREATHING FUMES OR CONTACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENT
DAMAGE TO PHYSICAL HEALTH. KEEP AWAY FROM FLAME TO AVOID
FIRE HAZARD.
(b) Wipe exterior with cloth soaked with MIL-PRF-680, solvent.

FIRE HAZARD.
(c) If internal passages require cleaning, thoroughly clean exterior first, then flush interior of
tube or hose in both directions with MIL-PRF-680, solvent.
UP495246
ALL Page 8009
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
WARNING: USE EYE PROTECTION. COMPRESSED AIR CAN CAUSE LOOSE

PARTICLES THAT CAN GET IN YOUR EYES AND CAUSE INJURY.
(d) Dry interior and exterior of hoses or tubes using low pressure, dry, filtered compressed air.
(e) Cover opening immediately after drying.
(2) Inspect tubes, hoses, and fittings as follows:
(a) Table 8004 provides usable limits and maximum repairable limits of tubes, hoses, and
fittings.
Table 8004. Inspection of Tubes, Hoses, and Fittings
Maximum
Inspect Usable Limits Repairable Limits Corrective Action
Inspect tubes for splits None allowed. Not repairable. Replace tube.
and cracks.
Inspect tubes for Any number, 0.005 inch (0.13 Same as usable Remove high metal and blend to
nicks, scratches, mm) deep, with no high metal. limits, with high metal. adjacent contour, using a fine
gouges, wear, and abrasive stone. Replace tube if
chafing on non-fuel blending has been previously
carrying tubes. done in same area.
Inspect tubes for Not usable if depth of defect Not repairable. Replace tube.
nicks, scratches, can be measured.
gouges, wear, and
chafing on fuel
carrying tubes.
Inspect tubes for Dented area not over 20% of Not repairable. Replace tube.
dents. Refer to Figure tube OD on straight or curved
8002. section having a radius over
twice the tube OD (Figure
8002, View A). On a sharply
bent radius, not over 10% of
tube OD may be dented
(Figure 8002, View B).
Inspect tubes for OD not less than 75% of Not repairable. Replace tube.
flattened area. Refer original OD (Figure 8002, View
to the table in Figure C).
8002.
Inspect tubes for nicks Up to 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) Not repairable. Replace tube.
and scratches on deep on bottom, 0.016 inch
packing grooves. (0.41 mm) deep on wall of
groove with no sharp edges.
Inspect teflon tubes None allowed. Not repairable. Replace part.
for erosion (black
spots).
UP495246
ALL Page 8010
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 8004. Inspection of Tubes, Hoses, and Fittings (Cont)
Maximum
Inspect teflon coating Wear through coating to parent Not repairable. Replace part.
on metal tubes for material is not acceptable.
wear.
Inspect flanges for Flat within 0.005 inch (0.13 Up to 25% of original Rework to usable limit by lapping
flatness of mating mm). Place on flat surface or flange thickness can stoning or machining (if possible).
surface. against flange and insert 0.005 be removed to meet
inch (0.13 mm) thickness usable limit.
(feeler) gage.
Inspect flanges for None allowed. Not repairable. Replace tube.
cracks.
Inspect hoses for Not allowed. Not repairable. Replace hose.
kinks and buckling.
Inspect hoses for None allowed. Not repairable. Replace hose.
frayed and broken
wire braid.
Inspect hex coupling Any number as long as wrench Not repairable. Replace part.
nuts for damaged can be used.
corners.
Inspect hex coupling None allowed. Not repairable. Replace part.
nuts for cracks.
Inspect hex coupling Any number, with no high Any number, with high Blend high metal.
nuts for nicks and metal. metal.
burrs.
Inspect hex coupling One-half of one thread (total) Same as usable Chase threads using a bottoming
nuts for damaged with no high metal. limits, with high metal. tap.
threads.
Inspect male fittings Any number if the defect does Same as usable fine abrasive stoneCarefully blend
for nicks, dents, not extend in the axial direction limits, with high metal. sealing surfaces maintaining the
scratches, ridges, and across more than one-half the original contour, using a fine
pits on sealing sealing surface. No high metal abrasive stone.
surfaces. allowed.
Inspect male fittings Total length of defect no more Same as usable Blend high metal, using a die, fine
for nicks, dents, than one-half of one thread limits, with high metal. file or equivalent.
scratches, gouges, length with no high metal.
burrs, and stripped
threads.
Inspect male fittings Any number, 0.005 inch (0.13 Same as usable Blend high metal to adjacent
for nicks, dents, mm) deep, with no high metal. limits, with high metal. contour using a fine abrasive
scratches, and stone.
gouges on remaining
surfaces of fittings.
UP495246
ALL Page 8011
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 8004. Inspection of Tubes, Hoses, and Fittings (Cont)
Maximum
Inspect male fittings None allowed. Not repairable. Replace assembly.
for cracks.
Inspect female fittings Any number if the defect does Same as usable Blend high metal to usable limits.
for nicks, dents, not extend in the axial direction limits, with high metal.
scratches, ridges, and across more than one-half the
pits on sealing sealing surface.
surfaces.
(3) Repair of Tubes

(a) Blend minor defects using fine abrasive stone, fine file, or abrasive cloth for blending.
(b) Blend tube around curved surface. The finished blend will be as close as possible to the
original finish of the tube.
UP495246
ALL Page 8012
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Dented and Flattened Tubes, Usable Limits (GRAPHIC 70-00-00-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8013
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Dimensional Limits for Figure 8002 (Sheet 1 of 1)
View C
View B View A
Minimum Unflattened
Tube OD Dent Allowed Dent Allowed Dimension Allowed
Inches Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Inches (mm)
1/4 1/32 (0.79) 3/64 (1.19) 3/16 (4.76)
5/16 1/32 (0.79) 1/16 (1.59) 15/64 (5.95)
3/8 3/64 (1.19) 5/64 (1.98) 9/32 (7.14)
5/8 1/16 (1.59) 1/8 (3.18) 15/32 (11.91)
3/4 5/64 (1.98) 5/32 (3.97) 9/16 (14.29)
1.0 AND OVER 3/32 (2.38) 3/16 (4.76) 3/4 (19.05)
G. Perform Visual Check of Curvic Couplings (Subtask 70-00-00-200-009-A01)
WARNING: SOLVENT IS TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE IN WELL-VENTILATED AREA. AVOID

BREATHING FUMES OR CONTACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO PHYSICAL
HEALTH. KEEP AWAY FROM FLAME TO AVOID FIRE HAZARD.
(1) Always make sure that curvic couplings to be mated are clean, free of oil, dirt, and any other
foreign matter, and no damage exists. Brush teeth with PN 1630-210, suede brush and wash
with MIL-PRF-680, solvent.
(2) Make sure that curvic coupling teeth have no nicks, burrs, and scoring. No repair is permitted
on curvic tooth mating faces. Repair damage to curvic tooth edges shown as dark lines in Figure
8003. Components with damaged curvic tooth mating faces may be returned to manufacturer
for possible repair.
(a) Remove high spots of damage by polishing with a white Arkansas polishing stone of suitable
size and shape.
(b) Break sharp edges.
(c) Polish teeth using PN ST70AL0512, soft rubberized abrasive or PN ST70AL0801, soft
rubberized abrasive.
(3) Visually inspect curvic coupling OD for radial rub damage. Light rubs are acceptable. Heavy
rubs sufficient to smear metal and cause blue discoloration are not acceptable.
UP495246
ALL Page 8014
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Curvic Tooth Repair (GRAPHIC 70-00-00-99B-003-A01)
H. Handling Procedures for Curvic Couplings (Subtask 70-00-00-200-010-A01)

(1) Always make sure that curvic couplings to be mated are clean, free of oil, dirt, and any other
foreign matter, and no damage exists. Brush teeth with PN 1630-210, suede brush and wash
with MIL-PRF-680, solvent. Make sure that curvic coupling teeth have no nicks, burrs, and
scoring. Immediately before mating curvic couplings, brush curvic coupling teeth with soft-plastic
fiber-bristled brush to make sure of cleanliness.
(2) Never mate curvic couplings together except for required maintenance operations. To preclude
damage, always cover unmated curvic coupling with protective cap or cover.
I. Job Close-up (Subtask 70-00-00-200-011-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8015
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
STANDARD PRACTICES – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures as standard practices to repair the engine.
Keensert installation tool CAGE: 29372
easy-out (tool kit, used to remove commercially available

various sizes of studs and inserts)
insert installing tool (Heli-Coil) CAGE: 1D1Q0
PN 831005-1 fuel nozzle refinishing kit (used to CAGE: 06848

hand finish imperfection from
conical surface of primary or
secondary fitting on fuel nozzle)


APPLICABLE.
PN 535K020 base (primer, green epoxy-amine) CAGE: 92108
PN 930K097 activator (primer) CAGE: 92108

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 70-00-00-300-802-A01)
B. Replaceable Components (Subtask 70-00-00-300-004-A01)
(1) Replace the following components in addition to the replaceable components outlined in other
chapters:
(a) Replace all plumbing, tubing, fittings, brackets, grommets, and common hardware if required.
(b) Replace packings removed during maintenance with new packings. Manufacturer
recommends replacing gaskets removed during maintenance with new gaskets.
(2) Replace damaged Keensert studs and inserts.
(a) Cut off stud just above mounting surface to expose pilot hole for removal drill.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW DRILL TO TOUCH HOUSING OR DAMAGE MAY RESULT.
(b) Drill out stud or insert until only a thin shell remains.
(c) Bend locking keys inward and break them off.
(d) Remove stud or insert with an ”easy-out” tool.
FIRE HAZARD.
(e) Clean components using MIL-PRF-680, solvent to remove all traces of grease or oil. Cleaner
must be allowed to evaporate.
(f) Apply a thin even coat of green epoxy-amine primer prepared by mixing PN 535K020,
base and PN 930K097, activator, to threaded hole. Application of green epoxy-amine
primer must be uniform and neat in appearance without bare spots or runs.
1 Blind holes must be coated to cover adjacent walls with green epoxy-amine primer.
Bottom of hole need not be covered.
2 Allow primer to dry 2 or 3 minutes before installing stud or insert.
3 Through holes in components must be coated to cover all internal surfaces through
to adjacent painted surfaces.
(g) While primer is still soft, install stud or insert as follows:
1 Install stud into threaded hole until step is 0.010 to 0.030 inch (0.25 to 0.76 mm)
below machined surface. Make sure that locking keyways are aligned 45 to 135
degrees from previously installed locking key position.
2 Install insert 3/4 to 1 1/2 turns below surface of countersink, using insert installing
tool.
3 Drive in locking keys using hammer and Keensert installation tool.
4 Surfaces adjacent to locking device of stud or insert must be touched up by wiping
on a thin even coat of green epoxy-amine primer prepared, by mixing PN 535K020,
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
base and PN 930K097, activator, to seal scratches and insulate dissimilar metal
surface.
5 Apply a thin even coat of green epoxy-amine primer to area around stud or insert to
seal all surfaces.
WARNING: USE APPROPRIATE CLOTHING AND PROTECTIVE GEAR TO PREVENT
INJURY TO BODY AND HANDS FROM CONTACT WITH HOT PARTS.
(h) Allow primer to cure 4 to 6 hours at room temperature or for 1 hr at 180 to 275°F (82 to
135°C) prior to assembly usage.
C. Fuel Nozzle Conical Sealing Surface Repair (Size 4 Fitting) (Subtask 70-00-00-300-006-A01)
CAUTION: USING FORCE WHEN REPAIRING NOZZLE CONICAL SEALING SURFACES WILL
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO PN 831005-1, FUEL NOZZLE REFINISHING KIT
COMPONENTS AND FUEL NOZZLE.
(1) Select PN 832008-2 medium grit stone from PN 831005-1, fuel nozzle refinishing kit.
(2) Apply oil from PN 831005-1, fuel nozzle refinishing kit to cone of nozzle.
(3) Insert center dowel of stone in center of nozzle fitting.
NOTE: If fuel nozzle inlet port is damaged to the extent that the center dowel cannot be
inserted, fuel nozzle is not repairable.
(4) Apply moderate pressure while rotating stone to remove defect.

(5) Select PN 832008-1 fine grit stone from PN 831005-1, fuel nozzle refinishing kit and insert center
dowel of stone in center of nozzle fitting.
(6) Apply moderate pressure while rotating stone to remove defect and to attain smooth final finish.
(7) Clean oil and loose grit from nozzle surface and kit components.
D. Job Close-up (Subtask 70-00-00-300-007-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
STANDARD PRACTICES – ASSEMBLY
(1) Use these procedures as standard practices to assemble the engine.
materials. The user must find equivalent alternatives.



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
acetone cleaner (ASTM D329) commercially available
engine fuel commercially available
lint-free cloth (CCC-C-46) commercially available
plastic sheeting commercially available

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY ASSEMBLY
ALL Page 10001
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Never-Seez NG-165 pure nickel thread compound CAGE: 5W425

(MIL-PRF-907)
Santovac 5 lubricant CAGE: 1DDL9
Santovac OS-124 lubricant CAGE: 1DDL9
for silver pencil)
pencil)
2. Procedure (TASK 70-00-00-430-802-A01)
B. Standard Assembly Procedures (Subtask 70-00-00-430-004-A01)
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT TEE OR FITTINGS ARE HELD SECURELY WHEN INSTALLING CAPS
AND TUBE ASSEMBLIES. IF TEE OR FITTINGS ARE NOT SECURED, UNDUE STRESS,
BENDING, AND POSSIBLE CRACKS IN ATTACHING PARTS MAY RESULT.
NOTE: When bolts, screws, nuts, or male plumbing fittings are installed on or aft of the compressor
housing forward flange, all threaded surfaces (except first two threads of male plumbing
fittings) must be coated with Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound unless
otherwise specified.
NOTE: Lightly coat new packings with clean, approved engine oil, Santovac OS-124, lubricant,
or Santovac 5, lubricant, prior to installation unless otherwise specified.
(1) Perform reassembly procedures with careful attention to details outlined in this publication.
Highest standard of precision engine shop procedures must be observed throughout reassembly.
Observe the following general procedures at reassembly:
(a) Exercise extreme care to prevent dirt, dust, or foreign particles from entering the engine.
If any foreign particle is dropped into the engine during maintenance, stop work until foreign
particle is located and removed, even if this may cause considerable disassembly.
(b) For added protection to the engine, cover large openings with plastic sheeting. Cap open
tube ends. If the engine is to be left for even a short period in a partially disassembled
state, cover or cap all openings.
(c) If any parts were coated with corrosion-preventive compound, remove all traces of
compound and any accumulated foreign matter. Be sure all parts are thoroughly clean
before assembly. Wipe all parts and surfaces with a clean lint-free cloth.
UP495246
ALL Page 10002
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
WARNING: CLEANING AGENTS ARE TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE IN

WELL-VENTILATED AREA. AVOID BREATHING FUMES OR CONTACT WITH
SKIN TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO PHYSICAL HEALTH. KEEP AWAY FROM
FLAME TO AVOID FIRE HAZARD.
CAUTION: NO SCRIBE MARKS ARE ALLOWED ON ROTATING PARTS.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE CHLORINATED SOLVENTS AS CLEANING AGENTS ON

TITANIUM COMPONENTS.
(d) Remove Verithin No. 753, silver pencil, Violet, No. 127 1/2, industrial marking ink, or Yellow
No. 170T, China marker markings from rotating group and stationary components aft of
compressor housing using acetone cleaner.
(e) When special measurements for shimming or fitting are made on parts or on assembled
parts prior to their installation in the next higher assembly, tag these parts as measured
components of the higher assembly and keep with that assembly. If replacement of a
measured component is required, repeat all measurements which include that part, using
the new part.
(f) Lightly coat new packings and gaskets used in the engine fuel system with clean engine
fuel, Santovac OS-124, lubricant, or Santovac 5, lubricant prior to installation, and lightly
coat new packings and gaskets used in the engine oil system with clean, approved engine
oil, Santovac OS-124, lubricant, or Santovac 5, lubricant prior to installation.
(g) Coat threaded male plumbing fittings, located forward of aft flange of compressor housing,
lightly with clean, approved engine oil before assembly. Unless otherwise specified, coat
threaded male plumbing fittings, located aft of compressor housing, lightly with Never-Seez
NG-165, pure nickel thread compound before assembly.
(h) Unless otherwise specified, lightly coat oil-wetted parts (gears, shafts, bearings, etc) with
clean, approved engine oil before assembly.
(i) Whenever non-standard torque values are required for individual parts, the parts are
identified and the torque requirements are listed in the applicable chapter/section/subject
covering the part. These specified torque values do not include frictional torques developed
by self-locking devices or “run-down” resistance. The frictional resistance or “run-down”
torque must be added to the specified torque. Torque tolerances are not provided for nuts
and bolts since this tolerance is assumed to be the nominal tolerance of a properly calibrated
torque wrench. Where two torque values are included, the lower value must be used when
torque is applied to the nut and the bolt is held stationary. When torque is applied to the
bolt and the nut is held stationary, the higher value must be used. When torque values are
not specified, conform to standard shop practice or sources such as FAA Manual AC65-9,
Airframe and Powerplant Mechanics General Handbook.
(j) Follow general guidelines listed in Table 10003 and Table 10004 for tightening small
fasteners.
Table 10003. Tightening Small Fasteners
Torque (in-lb (Nm))

Thread Size Aluminum Fastener Cres Fastener
6 5 (0.6) 10 (1.1)
UP495246
ALL Page 10003
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 10003. Tightening Small Fasteners (Cont)
Torque (in-lb (Nm))

Thread Size Aluminum Fastener Cres Fastener
8 10 (1.1) 20 (2.2)
10 15 (1.7) 35 (4.0)
1/4 45 (5.1) 75 (8.5)
5/16 80 (9.0) 160 (18.1)
3/8 140 (15.8) 275 (31.1)
Table 10004. Tightening Small Fasteners
Thread Size Approximate Rotation After Run-down

6-32 45 degrees
8-32 60 degrees
10-24 40 degrees
1/4-20 40 degrees
5/16-18 40 degrees
3/8-24 60 degrees
NOTE: Fasteners installed through elastic boundaries (sealed by means of a diaphragm

or similar elastomeric gasket) must be tightened uniformly to effect a
pressure-tight seal.
NOTE: Fasteners installed through essentially inelastic boundaries will first be tightened
to remove visible clearance between parts. During this initial tightening of the
fastener, the “run-down” resistance must be noted on the last rotation just before
establishment of a tensile preload in the fastener. The fastener must then be
given a steady additional tightening movement by the wrench to produce a final
torque, that is approximately equal to the “run-down” torque plus the values
shown in Table 10003 for the respective thread size. This procedure will produce
+/-35 percent accuracy which is adequate for all items not listed under torque
values below. As a further assistance, Table 10004 gives general guidelines
for obtaining the final torque.
(k) Unless otherwise specified, flared tubing and hose fittings must be torqued as specified in
Table 10005.
Table 10005. Standard Torque Values for Flared Tubing and Hose Fittings Not Used With Conical Seals
Tube Dash No. Aluminum Parts (in-lb (Nm)) All Steel Parts (in-lb (Nm))
2 50 to 60 (5.6 to 6.8) 60 to 75 (6.8 to 8.5)
3 95 to 105 (10.7 to 11.9) 110 to 130 (12.4 to 14.7)
4 135 to 145 (18.6 to 21.5) 165 to 190 (18.6 to 21.5)
UP495246
ALL Page 10004
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 10005. Standard Torque Values for Flared Tubing and Hose Fittings Not Used With Conical Seals
(Cont)
Tube Dash No. Aluminum Parts (in-lb (Nm)) All Steel Parts (in-lb (Nm))
5 170 to 190 (19.2 to 21.5) 225 to 250 (25.4 to 28.2)
6 210 to 235 (23.7 to 26.6) 300 to 335 (33.9 to 37.8)
8 370 to 420 (41.8 to 47.5) 575 to 625 (65.0 to 70.6)
10 450 to 515 (50.8 to 58.2) 700 to 825 (79.1 to 93.2)
12 580 to 660 (65.5 to 74.6) 960 to 1,100 (108.5 to 124.3)
16 900 to 1,000 (101.7 to 113.0) 1,350 to 1,500 (152.5 to 169.5)
20 1,100 to 1,220 (124.3 to 137.8) 1,600 to 1,800 (180.8 to 203.4)
24 1,150 to 1,300 (129.9 to 146.9) 2,000 to 2,300 (226.0 to 260.0)
32 2,160 to 2,400 (244.0 to 271.2) 3,200 to 3,500 (361.6 to 395.4)
CAUTION: PROPER INSTALLATION OF CONICAL SEALS DESCRIBED IN THE

FOLLOWING STEP IS ESSENTIAL TO AVOID FLOW RESTRICTION OR
SUBSEQUENT LEAKAGE. CONICAL SEALS ARE TO BE USED ONLY ONCE
AND MUST BE REPLACED AT EACH DISASSEMBLY OF PLUMBING. MAKE
SURE THAT PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED CONICAL SEAL IS REMOVED FROM
PLUMBING FITTING BEFORE INSTALLING NEW CONICAL SEAL.
CAUTION: ANYTIME A CONNECTION (WITH A CONICAL SEAL INSTALLED) BETWEEN

FUEL MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLY IS LOOSENED,
CONICAL SEAL MUST BE REPLACED.
CAUTION: INSTALLATION OF CONICAL SEAL BETWEEN FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE

ASSEMBLY REQUIRES A MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLY FLOW
CHECK. REFER TO TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000), OR TESTING (PGBLK
73-10-09-13000).
(l) Unless otherwise specified, flared tubing fittings when used with conical seals must be
torqued to values in Table 10006. When conical seals are used, install conical seals and
tighten fittings as follows:
NOTE: Conical seals may be used at any flared tubing fitting of appropriate size in fuel
and oil systems as a repair to correct leakage at the option of the user.
NOTE: Standard torque values for flared tubing fittings utilizing conical seals are listed
in Table 10006.
1 Select proper conical seal part number for tube assembly being installed. Refer to
Table 10006.
2 Lubricate conical seal and threads of plumbing fitting with clean, approved engine
oil.
UP495246
ALL Page 10005
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: DO NOT INSTALL CONICAL SEAL INTO TUBE NUTS. SEAL MUST BE
INSTALLED ON MALE FITTING ONLY.
3 Install conical seal onto male flare portion of plumbing fitting. Flats on conical seal
are designed to provide proper positioning of seal onto plumbing fitting to prevent
cocking of seal that could cause flow restriction.
4 Thread tube nut onto plumbing fitting several turns with fingers until joint is snug. If
tube nut cannot be tightened snugly with fingers, disassemble and correct problem
to prevent assembly damage to conical seal.
CAUTION: USE CARE NOT TO TIGHTEN TUBE NUTS MORE THAN SPECIFIED TO
AVOID DAMAGING SEAL. DO NOT LOOSEN TUBE NUT AFTER INITIAL
TORQUE APPLICATION WITHOUT REPLACING CONICAL SEAL.
CAUTION: CONICAL SEAL IS SUBJECT TO COLD CREEP; THEREFORE A DOUBLE

TIGHTENING PROCEDURE IS REQUIRED.
5 Tighten tube nuts as follows:

a Torque tube nuts as specified in Table 10006. Torque values are higher than
torque values for tube nuts without conical seals installed.
b Allow 5 minutes elapsed time for cold creep to occur.
c Recheck torque on tube nuts and, if required, further torque as specified in Table
10006.
Table 10006. Standard Torque Values for Flared Tubing Fittings Used With Conical Seals
Torque (in-lb (Nm))

Tube Dash No. Conical Seal PN All Steel Parts
3 PN 651-525-9003 or AS4824N03 110 to 130 (12.4 to 14.7)
4 PN 651-525-9004 or AS4824N04 165 to 190 (18.6 to 21.5)
5 PN 651-525-9005 or AS4824N05 225 to 250 (25.4 to 28.2)
6 PN 651-525-9006 or AS4824N06 300 to 335 (33.9 to 37.8)
8 PN 651-525-9008 or AS4824N08 575 to 625 (65.0 to 70.6)
(m) Minimum running torque values have been established for several sizes of bolts and
self-locking female threads. Bolts and inserts with running torques less than the below
minimums must be replaced.
Table 10007. Minimum Running Torque Values
Bolt/Insert Size Minimum Running Torque (in-lb (Nm))

8-32 4 (0.5)
10-32 6 (0.7)
1/4-20 6 (0.7)
1/4-28 6 (0.7)
UP495246
ALL Page 10006
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(n) Any extension used with a torque wrench to provide access, or any special tool, providing
an offset causes a difference in indicated and actual torque. The actual torque applied in
this condition may be calculated as follows:
R = (T x L) ÷ (L + E)
Where:
R = Indicated torque on torque wrench
T = Actual torque
L = Effective length of torque wrench lever arm. Refer to Figure 10001.
E = Effective length of offset. Refer to Figure 10001.
(2) Do not use petroleum-based solvents or lubricants to clean or lubricate electrical connectors.
Oily film and dirt residue left by evaporated solvents and lubricants can cause carbon tracks,
arcing, and shorting.
Figure 10001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Determining Effective Length of Torque Wrench and Extension (GRAPHIC
70-00-00-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 10007
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
C. Ring Seal Fittings (Subtask 70-00-00-430-005-A01)
CAUTION: FITTINGS THAT CONTAIN RING SEALS MUST ALWAYS BE CORRECTLY TORQUED.
FITTINGS THAT ARE ONLY HAND TIGHT MAY PASS THE INITIAL LEAK CHECK, BUT
WILL LEAK AT A LATER TIME.
(1) Two different types of fittings are used interchangeably on the engine. One type uses no seal
unless there is a leak at the fitting, and then you install a metal conical seal to repair the leak.
The other type is the ring seal fitting and it requires a Teflon ring seal at all times. The Teflon
ring seals may be reused until they are no longer serviceable. Refer to Figure 10002.
Figure 10002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Plumbing Fittings (GRAPHIC 70-00-00-99B-002-A01)
D. Other Standard Practices (Subtask 70-00-00-430-006-A01)
(1) The double-twist method of safety wiring is the most common method used. The single-wire
method may also be used in electrical systems and in places that are difficult to reach. When
UP495246
ALL Page 10008
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
securing closely spaced bolts, the number that can be secured by a 24-inch (610 mm) length
of wire is the maximum number in a series.
(2) Standard practices which are considered common throughout industry, such as riveting, welding,
lockwiring, etc, are not included in this publication.
E. Job Close-up (Subtask 70-00-00-430-007-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 10009
70-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
List of Effective Pages 72-00-00

LEP-1 31 Jan 2012 GENERAL – SYSTEM
LEP-2 31 Jan 2012 DESCRIPTION
LEP-3 31 Jan 2012 1 31 Jan 2012
LEP-4 31 Jan 2012 2 31 Jan 2012
LEP-5 31 Jan 2012 3 31 Jan 2012
LEP-6 31 Jan 2012 4 31 Jan 2012
LEP-7 31 Jan 2012 5 31 Jan 2012
LEP-8 31 Jan 2012 6 31 Jan 2012
LEP-9 31 Jan 2012 7 31 Jan 2012
LEP-10 31 Jan 2012 8 31 Jan 2012
LEP-11 31 Jan 2012 F 9/10 31 Jan 2012
LEP-12 31 Jan 2012 11 31 Jan 2012
LEP-13 31 Jan 2012 12 31 Jan 2012
LEP-14 31 Jan 2012 13 31 Jan 2012
LEP-15 31 Jan 2012 14 31 Jan 2012
LEP-16 31 Jan 2012 F 15/16 31 Jan 2012
LEP-17 31 Jan 2012 F 17/18 31 Jan 2012
LEP-18 31 Jan 2012 F 19/20 31 Jan 2012
LEP-19 31 Jan 2012 21 31 Jan 2012
LEP-20 31 Jan 2012 22 31 Jan 2012
LEP-21 31 Jan 2012 23 31 Jan 2012
LEP-22 31 Jan 2012 24 31 Jan 2012
LEP-23 31 Jan 2012 F 25/26 31 Jan 2012
LEP-24 31 Jan 2012 F 27/28 31 Jan 2012
LEP-25 31 Jan 2012 29 31 Jan 2012
LEP-26 31 Jan 2012 30 31 Jan 2012
LEP-27 31 Jan 2012 F 31/32 31 Jan 2012
LEP-28 31 Jan 2012 F 33/34 31 Jan 2012
Table of Contents 35 31 Jan 2012
TC-1 31 Jan 2012 36 31 Jan 2012
TC-2 31 Jan 2012 37 31 Jan 2012
TC-3 31 Jan 2012 38 31 Jan 2012
TC-4 31 Jan 2012 39 31 Jan 2012
TC-5 31 Jan 2012 40 31 Jan 2012
TC-6 31 Jan 2012 F 41/42 31 Jan 2012
TC-7 31 Jan 2012 43 31 Jan 2012
TC-8 31 Jan 2012 44 31 Jan 2012
45 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-1
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Cont)
46 31 Jan 2012 1036 31 Jan 2012

TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT 1037 31 Jan 2012
ENGINE – FAULT 1038 31 Jan 2012
ISOLATION 1039 31 Jan 2012
1001 31 Jan 2012 1040 31 Jan 2012
1002 31 Jan 2012 1041 31 Jan 2012
1003 31 Jan 2012 1042 31 Jan 2012
1004 31 Jan 2012 1043 31 Jan 2012
1005 31 Jan 2012 1044 31 Jan 2012
1006 31 Jan 2012 1045 31 Jan 2012
1007 31 Jan 2012 1046 31 Jan 2012
1008 31 Jan 2012 1047 31 Jan 2012
1009 31 Jan 2012 1048 31 Jan 2012
1010 31 Jan 2012 1049 31 Jan 2012
1011 31 Jan 2012 1050 31 Jan 2012
1012 31 Jan 2012 1051 31 Jan 2012
1013 31 Jan 2012 1052 31 Jan 2012
1014 31 Jan 2012 1053 31 Jan 2012
1015 31 Jan 2012 1054 31 Jan 2012
1016 31 Jan 2012 1055 31 Jan 2012
1017 31 Jan 2012 1056 31 Jan 2012
1018 31 Jan 2012 1057 31 Jan 2012
1019 31 Jan 2012 1058 31 Jan 2012
1020 31 Jan 2012 1059 31 Jan 2012
1021 31 Jan 2012 1060 31 Jan 2012
1022 31 Jan 2012 1061 31 Jan 2012
1023 31 Jan 2012 1062 31 Jan 2012
1024 31 Jan 2012 1063 31 Jan 2012
1025 31 Jan 2012 1064 31 Jan 2012
1026 31 Jan 2012 1065 31 Jan 2012
1027 31 Jan 2012 1066 31 Jan 2012
1028 31 Jan 2012 1067 31 Jan 2012
1029 31 Jan 2012 1068 31 Jan 2012
1030 31 Jan 2012 1069 31 Jan 2012
1031 31 Jan 2012 1070 31 Jan 2012
1032 31 Jan 2012 1071 31 Jan 2012
1033 31 Jan 2012 1072 31 Jan 2012
1034 31 Jan 2012 1073 31 Jan 2012
1035 31 Jan 2012 1074 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-2
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1075 31 Jan 2012 1114 31 Jan 2012

1076 31 Jan 2012 1115 31 Jan 2012
1077 31 Jan 2012 1116 31 Jan 2012
1078 31 Jan 2012 1117 31 Jan 2012
1079 31 Jan 2012 1118 31 Jan 2012
1080 31 Jan 2012 1119 31 Jan 2012
1081 31 Jan 2012 1120 31 Jan 2012
1082 31 Jan 2012 1121 31 Jan 2012
1083 31 Jan 2012 1122 31 Jan 2012
1084 31 Jan 2012 1123 31 Jan 2012
1085 31 Jan 2012 1124 31 Jan 2012
1086 31 Jan 2012 1125 31 Jan 2012
1087 31 Jan 2012 1126 31 Jan 2012
1088 31 Jan 2012 1127 31 Jan 2012
1089 31 Jan 2012 1128 31 Jan 2012
1090 31 Jan 2012 1129 31 Jan 2012
1091 31 Jan 2012 1130 31 Jan 2012
1092 31 Jan 2012 1131 31 Jan 2012
1093 31 Jan 2012 1132 31 Jan 2012
1094 31 Jan 2012 1133 31 Jan 2012
1095 31 Jan 2012 1134 31 Jan 2012
1096 31 Jan 2012 1135 31 Jan 2012
1097 31 Jan 2012 1136 31 Jan 2012
1098 31 Jan 2012 1137 31 Jan 2012
1099 31 Jan 2012 1138 31 Jan 2012
1100 31 Jan 2012 1139 31 Jan 2012
1101 31 Jan 2012 1140 31 Jan 2012
1102 31 Jan 2012 TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT
1103 31 Jan 2012 ENGINE – REMOVAL
1104 31 Jan 2012 3001 31 Jan 2012
1105 31 Jan 2012 3002 31 Jan 2012
1106 31 Jan 2012 3003 31 Jan 2012
1107 31 Jan 2012 3004 31 Jan 2012
1109 31 Jan 2012 ENGINE – INSTALLATION
1110 31 Jan 2012 4001 31 Jan 2012
1111 31 Jan 2012 4002 31 Jan 2012
1112 31 Jan 2012 4003 31 Jan 2012
1113 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-3
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
4005 31 Jan 2012 8015 31 Jan 2012

4006 31 Jan 2012 8016 31 Jan 2012
ENGINE – CLEANING 8018 31 Jan 2012
6001 31 Jan 2012 8019 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 8020 31 Jan 2012
6003 31 Jan 2012 8021 31 Jan 2012
6004 31 Jan 2012 8022 31 Jan 2012
6005 31 Jan 2012 8023 31 Jan 2012
6006 31 Jan 2012 8024 31 Jan 2012
6007 31 Jan 2012 8025 31 Jan 2012
6008 31 Jan 2012 8026 31 Jan 2012
6009 31 Jan 2012 8027 31 Jan 2012
6010 31 Jan 2012 8028 31 Jan 2012
6011 31 Jan 2012 8029 31 Jan 2012
6012 31 Jan 2012 8030 31 Jan 2012
6013 31 Jan 2012 8031 31 Jan 2012
6014 31 Jan 2012 8032 31 Jan 2012
6015 31 Jan 2012 8033 31 Jan 2012
6016 31 Jan 2012 8034 31 Jan 2012
6017 31 Jan 2012 8035 31 Jan 2012
6018 31 Jan 2012 8036 31 Jan 2012
ENGINE – INSPECTION/ 8038 31 Jan 2012
CHECK 8039 31 Jan 2012
8001 31 Jan 2012 8040 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 8041 31 Jan 2012
8003 31 Jan 2012 8042 31 Jan 2012
8004 31 Jan 2012 8043 31 Jan 2012
8005 31 Jan 2012 8044 31 Jan 2012
8006 31 Jan 2012 8045 31 Jan 2012
8007 31 Jan 2012 8046 31 Jan 2012
8008 31 Jan 2012 8047 31 Jan 2012
8009 31 Jan 2012 8048 31 Jan 2012
8010 31 Jan 2012 8049 31 Jan 2012
8011 31 Jan 2012 8050 31 Jan 2012
8012 31 Jan 2012 8051 31 Jan 2012
8013 31 Jan 2012 8052 31 Jan 2012
8014 31 Jan 2012 8053 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-4
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

8055 31 Jan 2012 ENGINE – TESTING
8056 31 Jan 2012 13001 31 Jan 2012
8057 31 Jan 2012 13002 31 Jan 2012
8058 31 Jan 2012 13003 31 Jan 2012
8059 31 Jan 2012 13004 31 Jan 2012
8060 31 Jan 2012 13005 31 Jan 2012
8061 31 Jan 2012 13006 31 Jan 2012
8062 31 Jan 2012 13007 31 Jan 2012
ENGINE – REPAIR 13009 31 Jan 2012
9001 31 Jan 2012 13010 31 Jan 2012
9002 31 Jan 2012 13011 31 Jan 2012
9003 31 Jan 2012 13012 31 Jan 2012
9004 31 Jan 2012 13013 31 Jan 2012
ENGINE – SERVICING 13015 31 Jan 2012
11001 31 Jan 2012 13016 31 Jan 2012
11002 31 Jan 2012 13017 31 Jan 2012
11003 31 Jan 2012 13018 31 Jan 2012
11004 31 Jan 2012 13019 31 Jan 2012
11005 31 Jan 2012 13020 31 Jan 2012
11006 31 Jan 2012 13021 31 Jan 2012
11007 31 Jan 2012 13022 31 Jan 2012
11008 31 Jan 2012 13023 31 Jan 2012
ENGINE – STORAGE 13025 31 Jan 2012
12001 31 Jan 2012 13026 31 Jan 2012
12002 31 Jan 2012 13027 31 Jan 2012
12003 31 Jan 2012 13028 31 Jan 2012
12004 31 Jan 2012 13029 31 Jan 2012
12005 31 Jan 2012 13030 31 Jan 2012
12006 31 Jan 2012 13031 31 Jan 2012
12007 31 Jan 2012 13032 31 Jan 2012
12008 31 Jan 2012 13033 31 Jan 2012
12009 31 Jan 2012 13034 31 Jan 2012
12010 31 Jan 2012 13035 31 Jan 2012
13036 31 Jan 2012
F 13037/13038 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-5
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
F 13039/13040 31 Jan 2012 13081 31 Jan 2012

F 13041/13042 31 Jan 2012 13082 31 Jan 2012
13043 31 Jan 2012 13083 31 Jan 2012
13044 31 Jan 2012 13084 31 Jan 2012
13045 31 Jan 2012 13085 31 Jan 2012
13046 31 Jan 2012 13086 31 Jan 2012
13047 31 Jan 2012 13087 31 Jan 2012
13048 31 Jan 2012 13088 31 Jan 2012
13049 31 Jan 2012 13089 31 Jan 2012
13050 31 Jan 2012 13090 31 Jan 2012
13051 31 Jan 2012 13091 31 Jan 2012
13052 31 Jan 2012 13092 31 Jan 2012
13053 31 Jan 2012 13093 31 Jan 2012
13054 31 Jan 2012 13094 31 Jan 2012
13055 31 Jan 2012 13095 31 Jan 2012
13056 31 Jan 2012 13096 31 Jan 2012
13057 31 Jan 2012 13097 31 Jan 2012
13058 31 Jan 2012 13098 31 Jan 2012
F 13059/13060 31 Jan 2012 13099 31 Jan 2012
13061 31 Jan 2012 13100 31 Jan 2012
13062 31 Jan 2012 F 13101/13102 31 Jan 2012
13063 31 Jan 2012 13103 31 Jan 2012
13064 31 Jan 2012 13104 31 Jan 2012
13065 31 Jan 2012 F 13105/13106 31 Jan 2012
13066 31 Jan 2012 13107 31 Jan 2012
13067 31 Jan 2012 13108 31 Jan 2012
13068 31 Jan 2012 13109 31 Jan 2012
13069 31 Jan 2012 13110 31 Jan 2012
13070 31 Jan 2012 13111 31 Jan 2012
13071 31 Jan 2012 13112 31 Jan 2012
13072 31 Jan 2012 13113 31 Jan 2012
13073 31 Jan 2012 13114 31 Jan 2012
13074 31 Jan 2012 13115 31 Jan 2012
13075 31 Jan 2012 13116 31 Jan 2012
13076 31 Jan 2012 13117 31 Jan 2012
13077 31 Jan 2012 13118 31 Jan 2012
13078 31 Jan 2012 13119 31 Jan 2012
13079 31 Jan 2012 13120 31 Jan 2012
13080 31 Jan 2012 13121 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-6
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
13122 31 Jan 2012 13163 31 Jan 2012

13123 31 Jan 2012 13164 31 Jan 2012
13124 31 Jan 2012 13165 31 Jan 2012
13125 31 Jan 2012 13166 31 Jan 2012
13126 31 Jan 2012 F 13167/13168 31 Jan 2012
F 13127/13128 31 Jan 2012 F 13169/13170 31 Jan 2012
13129 31 Jan 2012 13171 31 Jan 2012
13130 31 Jan 2012 13172 31 Jan 2012
F 13131/13132 31 Jan 2012 13173 31 Jan 2012
13133 31 Jan 2012 13174 31 Jan 2012
13134 31 Jan 2012 13175 31 Jan 2012
13135 31 Jan 2012 13176 31 Jan 2012
13136 31 Jan 2012 13177 31 Jan 2012
13137 31 Jan 2012 13178 31 Jan 2012
13138 31 Jan 2012 13179 31 Jan 2012
13139 31 Jan 2012 13180 31 Jan 2012
13140 31 Jan 2012 13181 31 Jan 2012
13141 31 Jan 2012 13182 31 Jan 2012
13142 31 Jan 2012 13183 31 Jan 2012
13143 31 Jan 2012 13184 31 Jan 2012
13144 31 Jan 2012 13185 31 Jan 2012
13145 31 Jan 2012 13186 31 Jan 2012
13146 31 Jan 2012 13187 31 Jan 2012
13147 31 Jan 2012 13188 31 Jan 2012
13148 31 Jan 2012 13189 31 Jan 2012
13149 31 Jan 2012 13190 31 Jan 2012
13150 31 Jan 2012 13191 31 Jan 2012
13151 31 Jan 2012 13192 31 Jan 2012
13152 31 Jan 2012 13193 31 Jan 2012
13153 31 Jan 2012 13194 31 Jan 2012
13154 31 Jan 2012 13195 31 Jan 2012
13155 31 Jan 2012 13196 31 Jan 2012
13156 31 Jan 2012 72-00-01
13157 31 Jan 2012 SHIPPING AND
13158 31 Jan 2012 IDENTIFICATION
13159 31 Jan 2012 PLATES – SYSTEM
13160 31 Jan 2012 DESCRIPTION
13161 31 Jan 2012 1 31 Jan 2012
13162 31 Jan 2012 2 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-7
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
SHIPPING AND EXTRACTION PAD

IDENTIFICATION COVERS – REMOVAL
PLATES – REMOVAL 3001 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 3002 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012 3003 31 Jan 2012
3003 31 Jan 2012 3004 31 Jan 2012
3004 31 Jan 2012 ENGINE DRAIN VALVES,
SHIPPING AND PLUGS, AND BLEED AIR
IDENTIFICATION EXTRACTION PAD
PLATES – INSTALLATION COVERS – INSTALLATION
4001 31 Jan 2012 4001 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012 4002 31 Jan 2012
4003 31 Jan 2012 4003 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012
SHIPPING AND ENGINE DRAIN VALVES,
IDENTIFICATION PLUGS, AND BLEED AIR
PLATES – CLEANING EXTRACTION PAD
6001 31 Jan 2012 COVERS – CLEANING
6002 31 Jan 2012 6001 31 Jan 2012
6003 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
6004 31 Jan 2012 6003 31 Jan 2012
SHIPPING AND 6004 31 Jan 2012
IDENTIFICATION ENGINE DRAIN VALVES,
PLATES – INSPECTION/ PLUGS, AND BLEED AIR
CHECK EXTRACTION PAD
8001 31 Jan 2012 COVERS – INSPECTION/
8002 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
72-00-05 8001 31 Jan 2012
ENGINE DRAIN VALVES, 8002 31 Jan 2012
PLUGS, AND BLEED AIR 8003 31 Jan 2012
EXTRACTION PAD 8004 31 Jan 2012
COVERS – SYSTEM 8005 31 Jan 2012
DESCRIPTION 8006 31 Jan 2012
1 31 Jan 2012 72-10-00
2 31 Jan 2012 REDUCTION GEAR AND
ENGINE DRAIN VALVES, SHAFT
PLUGS, AND BLEED AIR SECTION – SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
1 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-8
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2 31 Jan 2012 PPC

3 31 Jan 2012 ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
4 31 Jan 2012 6001 31 Jan 2012
72-10-01 6002 31 Jan 2012
BETA TUBE 6003 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL 6004 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 PPC
3002 31 Jan 2012 ASSEMBLY– INSPECTION/
3003 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
3004 31 Jan 2012 8001 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLY–INSTALLATION 8003 31 Jan 2012
4001 31 Jan 2012 8004 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012 8005 31 Jan 2012
4003 31 Jan 2012 8006 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012 PPC
BETA TUBE ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
ASSEMBLY – CLEANING 9001 31 Jan 2012
6001 31 Jan 2012 9002 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 9003 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLY– INSPECTION/ 9005 31 Jan 2012
CHECK 9006 31 Jan 2012
8001 31 Jan 2012 PPC
8002 31 Jan 2012 ASSEMBLY – TESTING
72-10-02 13001 31 Jan 2012
PPC 13002 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL 72-10-03
3001 31 Jan 2012 PG
3002 31 Jan 2012 ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
3003 31 Jan 2012 3001 31 Jan 2012
3004 31 Jan 2012 3002 31 Jan 2012
PPC 3003 31 Jan 2012
4001 31 Jan 2012 PG
4002 31 Jan 2012 ASSEMBLY–INSTALLATION
4003 31 Jan 2012 4001 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012 4002 31 Jan 2012
4003 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-9
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
4004 31 Jan 2012 NTS ORIFICE

PG ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
6001 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 6003 31 Jan 2012
PG 6004 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLY– INSPECTION/ NTS ORIFICE
CHECK ASSEMBLY– INSPECTION/
8001 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
8002 31 Jan 2012 8001 31 Jan 2012
8003 31 Jan 2012 8002 31 Jan 2012
8004 31 Jan 2012 8003 31 Jan 2012
PG ASSEMBLY – REPAIR 8004 31 Jan 2012
9001 31 Jan 2012 NTS ORIFICE
9003 31 Jan 2012 13001 31 Jan 2012
9004 31 Jan 2012 13002 31 Jan 2012
9005 31 Jan 2012 72-10-05
9006 31 Jan 2012 TORQUE LOAD
9008 31 Jan 2012 3001 31 Jan 2012
9009 31 Jan 2012 3002 31 Jan 2012
9010 31 Jan 2012 3003 31 Jan 2012
9011 31 Jan 2012 3004 31 Jan 2012
72-10-04 ASSEMBLY–INSTALLATION
NTS ORIFICE 4001 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 4003 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012
NTS ORIFICE 6001 31 Jan 2012
4001 31 Jan 2012 6003 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012 6004 31 Jan 2012
4003 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-10
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TORQUE LOAD NTS VALVE AND

ASSEMBLY– INSPECTION/ HOUSING
CHECK ASSEMBLY– INSPECTION/
8001 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
8002 31 Jan 2012 8001 31 Jan 2012
TORQUE LOAD 8002 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLY – REPAIR 8003 31 Jan 2012
9001 31 Jan 2012 8004 31 Jan 2012
9002 31 Jan 2012 NTS VALVE AND
9003 31 Jan 2012 HOUSING
9005 31 Jan 2012 13001 31 Jan 2012
9006 31 Jan 2012 13002 31 Jan 2012
TORQUE LOAD 13003 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLY – TESTING 13004 31 Jan 2012
13001 31 Jan 2012 13005 31 Jan 2012
13002 31 Jan 2012 13006 31 Jan 2012
13003 31 Jan 2012 72-10-07
13004 31 Jan 2012 PROPELLER
72-10-06 FEATHERING VALVE
NTS VALVE AND ASSEMBLY AND OIL
HOUSING TRANSFER
ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL TUBE – REMOVAL
3001 31 Jan 2012 3001 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012 3002 31 Jan 2012
3003 31 Jan 2012 PROPELLER
3004 31 Jan 2012 FEATHERING VALVE
NTS VALVE AND ASSEMBLY AND OIL
HOUSING TRANSFER
ASSEMBLY–INSTALLATION TUBE – INSTALLATION
4001 31 Jan 2012 4001 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012 4002 31 Jan 2012
4003 31 Jan 2012 4003 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012
NTS VALVE AND PROPELLER
HOUSING FEATHERING VALVE
ASSEMBLY – CLEANING ASSEMBLY AND OIL
6001 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-11
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TRANSFER SHAFT OIL

TUBE – CLEANING SEALS – INSPECTION/
6001 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
6002 31 Jan 2012 8001 31 Jan 2012
PROPELLER 8002 31 Jan 2012
FEATHERING VALVE 72-10-09
ASSEMBLY AND OIL NOSE CONE
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
TUBE – INSPECTION/ 3001 31 Jan 2012
CHECK 3002 31 Jan 2012
8001 31 Jan 2012 3003 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 3004 31 Jan 2012
8003 31 Jan 2012 NOSE CONE
72-10-08 4001 31 Jan 2012
SHAFT OIL 4002 31 Jan 2012
SEALS – REMOVAL 4003 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012 4005 31 Jan 2012
3003 31 Jan 2012 4006 31 Jan 2012
3004 31 Jan 2012 4007 31 Jan 2012
SHAFT OIL 4008 31 Jan 2012
SEALS – INSTALLATION NOSE CONE
4001 31 Jan 2012 ASSEMBLY–DISASSEMBLY
4002 31 Jan 2012 5001 31 Jan 2012
4003 31 Jan 2012 5002 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012 5003 31 Jan 2012
4005 31 Jan 2012 5004 31 Jan 2012
4006 31 Jan 2012 5005 31 Jan 2012
4007 31 Jan 2012 5006 31 Jan 2012
4008 31 Jan 2012 NOSE CONE
SHAFT OIL ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
SEALS – CLEANING 6001 31 Jan 2012
6001 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 6003 31 Jan 2012
6003 31 Jan 2012 6004 31 Jan 2012
6004 31 Jan 2012 6005 31 Jan 2012
6006 31 Jan 2012
6007 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-12
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
6008 31 Jan 2012 72-10-10

NOSE CONE OIL TRANSFER
ASSEMBLY– INSPECTION/ TUBES – REMOVAL
CHECK 3001 31 Jan 2012
8001 31 Jan 2012 3002 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 3003 31 Jan 2012
8003 31 Jan 2012 3004 31 Jan 2012
8004 31 Jan 2012 OIL TRANSFER
8005 31 Jan 2012 TUBES – INSTALLATION
8006 31 Jan 2012 4001 31 Jan 2012
8007 31 Jan 2012 4002 31 Jan 2012
8008 31 Jan 2012 4003 31 Jan 2012
NOSE CONE 4004 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLY – REPAIR OIL TRANSFER
9001 31 Jan 2012 TUBES – CLEANING
9002 31 Jan 2012 6001 31 Jan 2012
NOSE CONE 6002 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLY – ASSEMBLY 6003 31 Jan 2012
10001 31 Jan 2012 6004 31 Jan 2012
10002 31 Jan 2012 OIL TRANSFER
10003 31 Jan 2012 TUBES – INSPECTION/
10004 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
10005 31 Jan 2012 8001 31 Jan 2012
10006 31 Jan 2012 8002 31 Jan 2012
10007 31 Jan 2012 72-10-12
10008 31 Jan 2012 PLANET CARRIER AND
10009 31 Jan 2012 GEAR
10011 31 Jan 2012 3001 31 Jan 2012
10012 31 Jan 2012 3002 31 Jan 2012
10013 31 Jan 2012 3003 31 Jan 2012
10014 31 Jan 2012 3004 31 Jan 2012
10015 31 Jan 2012 3005 31 Jan 2012
10016 31 Jan 2012 3006 31 Jan 2012
10018 31 Jan 2012 GEAR
ASSEMBLY–INSTALLATION
4001 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-13
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

4004 31 Jan 2012 GEAR
4005 31 Jan 2012 ASSEMBLY – ASSEMBLY
4006 31 Jan 2012 10001 31 Jan 2012
4007 31 Jan 2012 10002 31 Jan 2012
4008 31 Jan 2012 10003 31 Jan 2012
4009 31 Jan 2012 10004 31 Jan 2012
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR
GEAR ASSEMBLY – TESTING
ASSEMBLY–DISASSEMBLY 13001 31 Jan 2012
5001 31 Jan 2012 13002 31 Jan 2012
5002 31 Jan 2012 72-10-13
5003 31 Jan 2012 INTERMEDIATE
5004 31 Jan 2012 HOUSING AND GEAR
PLANET CARRIER AND ASSEMBLY
GEAR (DIAPHRAGM) – REMOVAL
6001 31 Jan 2012 3002 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 3003 31 Jan 2012
6003 31 Jan 2012 3004 31 Jan 2012
6006 31 Jan 2012 ASSEMBLY
PLANET CARRIER AND (DIAPHRAGM)–INSTALLATION
GEAR 4001 31 Jan 2012
CHECK 4003 31 Jan 2012
8001 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 4005 31 Jan 2012
8003 31 Jan 2012 4006 31 Jan 2012
8007 31 Jan 2012 (DIAPHRAGM)–DISASSEMBLY
8008 31 Jan 2012 5001 31 Jan 2012
8009 31 Jan 2012 5002 31 Jan 2012
8010 31 Jan 2012 5003 31 Jan 2012
5004 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-14
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5005 31 Jan 2012 8013 31 Jan 2012

5006 31 Jan 2012 8014 31 Jan 2012
5007 31 Jan 2012 8015 31 Jan 2012
5008 31 Jan 2012 8016 31 Jan 2012
5009 31 Jan 2012 8017 31 Jan 2012
5010 31 Jan 2012 8018 31 Jan 2012
5011 31 Jan 2012 8019 31 Jan 2012
5012 31 Jan 2012 8020 31 Jan 2012
INTERMEDIATE ASSEMBLY
HOUSING AND GEAR (DIAPHRAGM) – REPAIR
ASSEMBLY 9001 31 Jan 2012
(DIAPHRAGM)–CLEANING 9002 31 Jan 2012
6001 31 Jan 2012 9003 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 9004 31 Jan 2012
6003 31 Jan 2012 9005 31 Jan 2012
6004 31 Jan 2012 9006 31 Jan 2012
6005 31 Jan 2012 9007 31 Jan 2012
6006 31 Jan 2012 9008 31 Jan 2012
6007 31 Jan 2012 9009 31 Jan 2012
6008 31 Jan 2012 9010 31 Jan 2012
INTERMEDIATE 9011 31 Jan 2012
HOUSING AND GEAR 9012 31 Jan 2012
(DIAPHRAGM)–INSPECTION/ 9014 31 Jan 2012
CHECK 9015 31 Jan 2012
8001 31 Jan 2012 9016 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 9017 31 Jan 2012
8003 31 Jan 2012 9018 31 Jan 2012
8007 31 Jan 2012 (DIAPHRAGM)–ASSEMBLY
8008 31 Jan 2012 10001 31 Jan 2012
8009 31 Jan 2012 10002 31 Jan 2012
8010 31 Jan 2012 10003 31 Jan 2012
8011 31 Jan 2012 10004 31 Jan 2012
8012 31 Jan 2012 10005 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-15
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
10006 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012

10007 31 Jan 2012 4005 31 Jan 2012
10008 31 Jan 2012 4006 31 Jan 2012
10009 31 Jan 2012 TACHOMETER-GENERATOR
10010 31 Jan 2012 GEAR
10012 31 Jan 2012 6001 31 Jan 2012
10013 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
10014 31 Jan 2012 6003 31 Jan 2012
72-10-14 6004 31 Jan 2012
OIL TUBE TACHOMETER-GENERATOR
ASSEMBLY–INSTALLATION GEAR
4002 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
4003 31 Jan 2012 8001 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012 8002 31 Jan 2012
OIL TUBE TACHOMETER-GENERATOR
ASSEMBLY– INSPECTION/ GEAR
CHECK ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
8001 31 Jan 2012 9001 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 9002 31 Jan 2012
OIL TUBE 9003 31 Jan 2012
9001 31 Jan 2012 72-10-17
9002 31 Jan 2012 ACCESSORY GEAR
72-10-15 ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
TACHOMETER-GENERATOR 3001 31 Jan 2012
GEAR 3002 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 3004 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012 ACCESSORY GEAR
3004 31 Jan 2012 4001 31 Jan 2012
TACHOMETER-GENERATOR 4002 31 Jan 2012
GEAR 4003 31 Jan 2012
4001 31 Jan 2012 4005 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012 4006 31 Jan 2012
4003 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-16
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ACCESSORY GEAR OIL PRESSURE PUMP

ASSEMBLY – CLEANING ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER
6001 31 Jan 2012 BEARING – INSPECTION/
6002 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
6003 31 Jan 2012 8001 31 Jan 2012
6004 31 Jan 2012 8002 31 Jan 2012
ACCESSORY GEAR 8003 31 Jan 2012
CHECK OIL PRESSURE PUMP
8001 31 Jan 2012 ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER
8002 31 Jan 2012 BEARING – REPAIR
8003 31 Jan 2012 9001 31 Jan 2012
8004 31 Jan 2012 9002 31 Jan 2012
8005 31 Jan 2012 9003 31 Jan 2012
8006 31 Jan 2012 9004 31 Jan 2012
72-10-18 9005 31 Jan 2012
OIL PRESSURE PUMP 9006 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER 72-10-19
BEARING – REMOVAL COMPRESSOR
3001 31 Jan 2012 BEARING – REMOVAL
3002 31 Jan 2012 3001 31 Jan 2012
3003 31 Jan 2012 3002 31 Jan 2012
3004 31 Jan 2012 3003 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER 3005 31 Jan 2012
BEARING – INSTALLATION 3006 31 Jan 2012
4001 31 Jan 2012 COMPRESSOR
4002 31 Jan 2012 BEARING – INSTALLATION
4003 31 Jan 2012 4001 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012 4002 31 Jan 2012
4005 31 Jan 2012 4003 31 Jan 2012
4006 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER 4006 31 Jan 2012
BEARING – CLEANING 4007 31 Jan 2012
6001 31 Jan 2012 4008 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 4009 31 Jan 2012
6003 31 Jan 2012 4010 31 Jan 2012
6004 31 Jan 2012 4011 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-17
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
4012 31 Jan 2012 4005 31 Jan 2012

4013 31 Jan 2012 4006 31 Jan 2012
4014 31 Jan 2012 4007 31 Jan 2012
4015 31 Jan 2012 4008 31 Jan 2012
4016 31 Jan 2012 4009 31 Jan 2012
4017 31 Jan 2012 4010 31 Jan 2012
4018 31 Jan 2012 4011 31 Jan 2012
COMPRESSOR 4012 31 Jan 2012
BEARING – CLEANING 4013 31 Jan 2012
6001 31 Jan 2012 4014 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 4015 31 Jan 2012
6003 31 Jan 2012 4016 31 Jan 2012
6004 31 Jan 2012 ACCESSORY DRIVE
COMPRESSOR HOUSING
BEARING – INSPECTION/ ASSEMBLY– INSPECTION/
CHECK CHECK
8001 31 Jan 2012 8001 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 8002 31 Jan 2012
8003 31 Jan 2012 8003 31 Jan 2012
8004 31 Jan 2012 8004 31 Jan 2012
72-10-20 8005 31 Jan 2012
ACCESSORY DRIVE 8006 31 Jan 2012
HOUSING 8007 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 8009 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012 8010 31 Jan 2012
3003 31 Jan 2012 8011 31 Jan 2012
3004 31 Jan 2012 8012 31 Jan 2012
3005 31 Jan 2012 8013 31 Jan 2012
3006 31 Jan 2012 8014 31 Jan 2012
3007 31 Jan 2012 8015 31 Jan 2012
3008 31 Jan 2012 8016 31 Jan 2012
ACCESSORY DRIVE ACCESSORY DRIVE
HOUSING HOUSING
ASSEMBLY–INSTALLATION ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
4001 31 Jan 2012 9001 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012 9002 31 Jan 2012
4003 31 Jan 2012 9003 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012 9004 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-18
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
9005 31 Jan 2012 COMPRESSOR GROUP

9007 31 Jan 2012 4001 31 Jan 2012
9008 31 Jan 2012 4002 31 Jan 2012
72-30-00 4003 31 Jan 2012
COMPRESSOR 4004 31 Jan 2012
SECTION – SYSTEM 4005 31 Jan 2012
1 31 Jan 2012 4007 31 Jan 2012
2 31 Jan 2012 4008 31 Jan 2012
72-30-01 4009 31 Jan 2012
FIRST STAGE 4010 31 Jan 2012
IMPELLER – INSPECTION/ 4011 31 Jan 2012
CHECK 4012 31 Jan 2012
8001 31 Jan 2012 4013 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 4014 31 Jan 2012
FIRST STAGE 4015 31 Jan 2012
IMPELLER – REPAIR 4016 31 Jan 2012
9001 31 Jan 2012 4017 31 Jan 2012
9002 31 Jan 2012 4018 31 Jan 2012
9003 31 Jan 2012 4019 31 Jan 2012
9004 31 Jan 2012 4020 31 Jan 2012
72-30-04 4021 31 Jan 2012
COMPRESSOR GROUP 4022 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 4024 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012 4025 31 Jan 2012
3003 31 Jan 2012 4026 31 Jan 2012
3004 31 Jan 2012 4027 31 Jan 2012
3005 31 Jan 2012 4028 31 Jan 2012
3006 31 Jan 2012 4029 31 Jan 2012
3007 31 Jan 2012 4030 31 Jan 2012
3008 31 Jan 2012 4031 31 Jan 2012
3009 31 Jan 2012 4032 31 Jan 2012
3010 31 Jan 2012 4033 31 Jan 2012
3011 31 Jan 2012 4034 31 Jan 2012
3012 31 Jan 2012 4035 31 Jan 2012
3013 31 Jan 2012 4036 31 Jan 2012
3014 31 Jan 2012 4037 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-19
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
4038 31 Jan 2012 4077 31 Jan 2012

4039 31 Jan 2012 4078 31 Jan 2012
4040 31 Jan 2012 4079 31 Jan 2012
4041 31 Jan 2012 4080 31 Jan 2012
4042 31 Jan 2012 4081 31 Jan 2012
4043 31 Jan 2012 4082 31 Jan 2012
4044 31 Jan 2012 4083 31 Jan 2012
4045 31 Jan 2012 4084 31 Jan 2012
4046 31 Jan 2012 4085 31 Jan 2012
4047 31 Jan 2012 4086 31 Jan 2012
4048 31 Jan 2012 4087 31 Jan 2012
4049 31 Jan 2012 4088 31 Jan 2012
4050 31 Jan 2012 4089 31 Jan 2012
4051 31 Jan 2012 4090 31 Jan 2012
4052 31 Jan 2012 4091 31 Jan 2012
4053 31 Jan 2012 4092 31 Jan 2012
4054 31 Jan 2012 4093 31 Jan 2012
4055 31 Jan 2012 4094 31 Jan 2012
4056 31 Jan 2012 4095 31 Jan 2012
4057 31 Jan 2012 4096 31 Jan 2012
4058 31 Jan 2012 4097 31 Jan 2012
4059 31 Jan 2012 4098 31 Jan 2012
4060 31 Jan 2012 4099 31 Jan 2012
4061 31 Jan 2012 4100 31 Jan 2012
4064 31 Jan 2012 6001 31 Jan 2012
4065 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
4066 31 Jan 2012 6003 31 Jan 2012
4067 31 Jan 2012 6004 31 Jan 2012
4070 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
4071 31 Jan 2012 8001 31 Jan 2012
4072 31 Jan 2012 8002 31 Jan 2012
4073 31 Jan 2012 8003 31 Jan 2012
4074 31 Jan 2012 8004 31 Jan 2012
4075 31 Jan 2012 8005 31 Jan 2012
4076 31 Jan 2012 8006 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-20
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
8007 31 Jan 2012 9016 31 Jan 2012

8008 31 Jan 2012 9017 31 Jan 2012
8009 31 Jan 2012 9018 31 Jan 2012
8010 31 Jan 2012 9019 31 Jan 2012
8011 31 Jan 2012 9020 31 Jan 2012
8012 31 Jan 2012 9021 31 Jan 2012
8013 31 Jan 2012 9022 31 Jan 2012
8014 31 Jan 2012 72-40-00
8015 31 Jan 2012 COMBUSTION
8016 31 Jan 2012 SECTION – SYSTEM
8018 31 Jan 2012 1 31 Jan 2012
8019 31 Jan 2012 2 31 Jan 2012
8020 31 Jan 2012 72-40-01
8021 31 Jan 2012 COMBUSTION CASE
8022 31 Jan 2012 (PLENUM) AND
8023 31 Jan 2012 COMBUSTION CHAMBER
8025 31 Jan 2012 (LINER) – REMOVAL
8026 31 Jan 2012 3001 31 Jan 2012
8027 31 Jan 2012 3002 31 Jan 2012
8028 31 Jan 2012 3003 31 Jan 2012
COMPRESSOR GROUP 3004 31 Jan 2012
9001 31 Jan 2012 3006 31 Jan 2012
9002 31 Jan 2012 COMBUSTION CASE
9003 31 Jan 2012 (PLENUM) AND
9004 31 Jan 2012 COMBUSTION CHAMBER
9006 31 Jan 2012 (LINER) – INSTALLATION
9007 31 Jan 2012 4001 31 Jan 2012
9008 31 Jan 2012 4002 31 Jan 2012
9009 31 Jan 2012 4003 31 Jan 2012
9010 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012
9011 31 Jan 2012 4005 31 Jan 2012
9012 31 Jan 2012 4006 31 Jan 2012
9013 31 Jan 2012 4007 31 Jan 2012
9014 31 Jan 2012 4008 31 Jan 2012
9015 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-21
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
COMBUSTION CASE 9002 31 Jan 2012

(PLENUM) AND 9003 31 Jan 2012
COMBUSTION CHAMBER 9004 31 Jan 2012
(LINER) – CLEANING 9006 31 Jan 2012
6001 31 Jan 2012 72-50-00
6002 31 Jan 2012 TURBINE
6003 31 Jan 2012 SECTION – SYSTEM
6005 31 Jan 2012 1 31 Jan 2012
6006 31 Jan 2012 2 31 Jan 2012
COMBUSTION CASE 72-50-01
(PLENUM) AND OIL INLET RETAINER
COMBUSTION CHAMBER SHIELD
ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(LINER) – INSPECTION/ 3001 31 Jan 2012
CHECK 3002 31 Jan 2012
8001 31 Jan 2012 OIL INLET RETAINER
8002 31 Jan 2012 SHIELD
8004 31 Jan 2012 4001 31 Jan 2012
8005 31 Jan 2012 4002 31 Jan 2012
8006 31 Jan 2012 4003 31 Jan 2012
8007 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012
8009 31 Jan 2012 SHIELD
8011 31 Jan 2012 6001 31 Jan 2012
8012 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
8014 31 Jan 2012 SHIELD
8016 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
COMBUSTION CASE 8001 31 Jan 2012
(PLENUM) AND 8002 31 Jan 2012
COMBUSTION CHAMBER OIL INLET RETAINER
ASSEMBLY SHIELD
(LINER) – REPAIR ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
9001 31 Jan 2012 9001 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-22
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
9002 31 Jan 2012 OIL INLET TUBE AND OIL

72-50-02 PRESSURE
TAIL CONE – REMOVAL JET – INSPECTION/
3001 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
3002 31 Jan 2012 8001 31 Jan 2012
TAIL 8002 31 Jan 2012
CONE – INSTALLATION 72-50-04
4001 31 Jan 2012 TURBINE SCAVENGE
4002 31 Jan 2012 PUMP ASSEMBLY AND
TAIL CONE – CLEANING SPUR
6001 31 Jan 2012 GEARSHAFT – REMOVAL
6002 31 Jan 2012 3001 31 Jan 2012
TAIL 3002 31 Jan 2012
CONE – INSPECTION/ 3003 31 Jan 2012
CHECK 3004 31 Jan 2012
TAIL CONE – REPAIR SPUR
9001 31 Jan 2012 GEARSHAFT–INSTALLATION
9002 31 Jan 2012 4001 31 Jan 2012
72-50-03 4002 31 Jan 2012
OIL INLET TUBE AND OIL 4003 31 Jan 2012
PRESSURE 4004 31 Jan 2012
JET – REMOVAL 4005 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 4006 31 Jan 2012
OIL INLET TUBE AND OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY AND
PRESSURE SPUR
JET – INSTALLATION GEARSHAFT – CLEANING
4001 31 Jan 2012 6001 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
OIL INLET TUBE AND OIL SPUR
PRESSURE GEARSHAFT–INSPECTION/
JET – CLEANING CHECK
6001 31 Jan 2012 8001 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 8002 31 Jan 2012
8003 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-23
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
8004 31 Jan 2012 EXHAUST DUCT AND

8005 31 Jan 2012 REAR ENGINE
8006 31 Jan 2012 MOUNT – INSPECTION/
8007 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
8008 31 Jan 2012 8001 31 Jan 2012
8009 31 Jan 2012 8002 31 Jan 2012
8010 31 Jan 2012 8003 31 Jan 2012
8011 31 Jan 2012 8004 31 Jan 2012
8012 31 Jan 2012 EXHAUST DUCT AND
8013 31 Jan 2012 REAR ENGINE
8014 31 Jan 2012 MOUNT – REPAIR
8015 31 Jan 2012 9001 31 Jan 2012
8016 31 Jan 2012 9002 31 Jan 2012
8017 31 Jan 2012 9003 31 Jan 2012
8018 31 Jan 2012 9004 31 Jan 2012
TURBINE SCAVENGE 72-50-06
PUMP ASSEMBLY AND BEARING CARRIER
SPUR COMPONENTS AND
GEARSHAFT – REPAIR TURBINE BEARING
9001 31 Jan 2012 SUPPORT – REMOVAL
9002 31 Jan 2012 3001 31 Jan 2012
72-50-05 3002 31 Jan 2012
EXHAUST DUCT AND 3003 31 Jan 2012
REAR ENGINE 3004 31 Jan 2012
MOUNT – REMOVAL 3005 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 3006 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012 3007 31 Jan 2012
MOUNT – INSTALLATION 3010 31 Jan 2012
4001 31 Jan 2012 BEARING CARRIER
4002 31 Jan 2012 COMPONENTS AND
4003 31 Jan 2012 TURBINE BEARING
4004 31 Jan 2012 SUPPORT–INSTALLATION
MOUNT – CLEANING 4003 31 Jan 2012
6001 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 4005 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-24
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
4006 31 Jan 2012 BEARING CARRIER

4007 31 Jan 2012 COMPONENTS AND
4008 31 Jan 2012 TURBINE BEARING
4009 31 Jan 2012 SUPPORT – REPAIR
4010 31 Jan 2012 9001 31 Jan 2012
4011 31 Jan 2012 9002 31 Jan 2012
4012 31 Jan 2012 9003 31 Jan 2012
4013 31 Jan 2012 9004 31 Jan 2012
4014 31 Jan 2012 72-50-07
4015 31 Jan 2012 TURBINE GROUP
4017 31 Jan 2012 3001 31 Jan 2012
4018 31 Jan 2012 3002 31 Jan 2012
4019 31 Jan 2012 3003 31 Jan 2012
4020 31 Jan 2012 3004 31 Jan 2012
4021 31 Jan 2012 3005 31 Jan 2012
4022 31 Jan 2012 3006 31 Jan 2012
4023 31 Jan 2012 3007 31 Jan 2012
4024 31 Jan 2012 3008 31 Jan 2012
BEARING CARRIER TURBINE GROUP
COMPONENTS AND ASSEMBLY–INSTALLATION
TURBINE BEARING 4001 31 Jan 2012
SUPPORT – CLEANING 4002 31 Jan 2012
6001 31 Jan 2012 4003 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012
6003 31 Jan 2012 4005 31 Jan 2012
6004 31 Jan 2012 4006 31 Jan 2012
BEARING CARRIER TURBINE GROUP
COMPONENTS AND ASSEMBLY–DISASSEMBLY
TURBINE BEARING 5001 31 Jan 2012
SUPPORT – INSPECTION/ 5002 31 Jan 2012
CHECK 5003 31 Jan 2012
8001 31 Jan 2012 5004 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 5005 31 Jan 2012
8003 31 Jan 2012 5006 31 Jan 2012
8004 31 Jan 2012 5007 31 Jan 2012
8005 31 Jan 2012 5008 31 Jan 2012
8006 31 Jan 2012 5009 31 Jan 2012
5010 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-25
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5011 31 Jan 2012 8015 31 Jan 2012

5012 31 Jan 2012 8016 31 Jan 2012
5013 31 Jan 2012 8017 31 Jan 2012
5014 31 Jan 2012 8018 31 Jan 2012
5015 31 Jan 2012 8019 31 Jan 2012
5016 31 Jan 2012 8020 31 Jan 2012
5017 31 Jan 2012 8021 31 Jan 2012
5018 31 Jan 2012 8022 31 Jan 2012
TURBINE GROUP 8023 31 Jan 2012
6001 31 Jan 2012 8025 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 8026 31 Jan 2012
6003 31 Jan 2012 8027 31 Jan 2012
6004 31 Jan 2012 8028 31 Jan 2012
6005 31 Jan 2012 8029 31 Jan 2012
6006 31 Jan 2012 8030 31 Jan 2012
6007 31 Jan 2012 8031 31 Jan 2012
6008 31 Jan 2012 8032 31 Jan 2012
6009 31 Jan 2012 8033 31 Jan 2012
6010 31 Jan 2012 8034 31 Jan 2012
6011 31 Jan 2012 8035 31 Jan 2012
6012 31 Jan 2012 8036 31 Jan 2012
CHECK 8039 31 Jan 2012
8001 31 Jan 2012 8040 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 8041 31 Jan 2012
8003 31 Jan 2012 8042 31 Jan 2012
8004 31 Jan 2012 8043 31 Jan 2012
8005 31 Jan 2012 8044 31 Jan 2012
8006 31 Jan 2012 8045 31 Jan 2012
8007 31 Jan 2012 8046 31 Jan 2012
8008 31 Jan 2012 8047 31 Jan 2012
8009 31 Jan 2012 8048 31 Jan 2012
8010 31 Jan 2012 8049 31 Jan 2012
8011 31 Jan 2012 8050 31 Jan 2012
8012 31 Jan 2012 8051 31 Jan 2012
8013 31 Jan 2012 8052 31 Jan 2012
8014 31 Jan 2012 8053 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-26
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
8054 31 Jan 2012 9031 31 Jan 2012

8055 31 Jan 2012 9032 31 Jan 2012
8056 31 Jan 2012 9033 31 Jan 2012
8057 31 Jan 2012 9034 31 Jan 2012
8058 31 Jan 2012 9035 31 Jan 2012
8059 31 Jan 2012 9036 31 Jan 2012
8060 31 Jan 2012 9037 31 Jan 2012
9001 31 Jan 2012 9040 31 Jan 2012
9002 31 Jan 2012 9041 31 Jan 2012
9003 31 Jan 2012 9042 31 Jan 2012
9004 31 Jan 2012 9043 31 Jan 2012
9005 31 Jan 2012 9044 31 Jan 2012
9006 31 Jan 2012 TURBINE GROUP
9007 31 Jan 2012 ASSEMBLY – ASSEMBLY
9008 31 Jan 2012 10001 31 Jan 2012
9009 31 Jan 2012 10002 31 Jan 2012
9010 31 Jan 2012 10003 31 Jan 2012
9011 31 Jan 2012 10004 31 Jan 2012
9012 31 Jan 2012 10005 31 Jan 2012
9013 31 Jan 2012 10006 31 Jan 2012
9014 31 Jan 2012 10007 31 Jan 2012
9015 31 Jan 2012 10008 31 Jan 2012
9016 31 Jan 2012 10009 31 Jan 2012
9017 31 Jan 2012 10010 31 Jan 2012
9018 31 Jan 2012 10011 31 Jan 2012
9019 31 Jan 2012 10012 31 Jan 2012
9020 31 Jan 2012 10013 31 Jan 2012
9021 31 Jan 2012 10014 31 Jan 2012
9022 31 Jan 2012 10015 31 Jan 2012
9023 31 Jan 2012 10016 31 Jan 2012
9024 31 Jan 2012 10017 31 Jan 2012
9025 31 Jan 2012 10018 31 Jan 2012
9026 31 Jan 2012 10019 31 Jan 2012
9027 31 Jan 2012 10020 31 Jan 2012
9028 31 Jan 2012 4008 31 Jan 2012
9029 31 Jan 2012
9030 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-27
72-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER – 72
Title Page
CHAPTER 72 – ENGINE
Section 72-00 – 72-00-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 72-00-00 – GENERAL....................................................................................... 1
GENERAL – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.................................................................. 1
Subject 72-00-00 – TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE................................................ 1001
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – FAULT ISOLATION................................... 1001
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – REMOVAL................................................. 3001
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – INSTALLATION......................................... 4001
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – CLEANING................................................ 6001
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – INSPECTION/CHECK............................... 8001
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – REPAIR..................................................... 9001
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – SERVICING............................................... 11001
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – STORAGE................................................. 12001
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – TESTING................................................... 13001
Subject 72-00-01 – SHIPPING AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES.................................. 1
SHIPPING AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION............ 1
SHIPPING AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES – REMOVAL................................... 3001
SHIPPING AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES – INSTALLATION........................... 4001
SHIPPING AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES – CLEANING.................................. 6001
SHIPPING AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES – INSPECTION/CHECK................. 8001
Subject 72-00-05 – ENGINE DRAIN VALVES, PLUGS, AND BLEED AIR EXTRACTION 1
PAD COVERS................................................................................................................
ENGINE DRAIN VALVES, PLUGS, AND BLEED AIR EXTRACTION PAD 1
COVERS – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION....................................................................
COVERS – REMOVAL..........................................................................................
COVERS – INSTALLATION..................................................................................
COVERS – CLEANING..........................................................................................
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-1
72-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont)

CHAPTER – 72 (Cont)
Title Page
COVERS – INSPECTION/CHECK........................................................................
Section 72-10 – 72-10-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 72-10-00 – REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION................................. 1
REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION............ 1
Subject 72-10-01 – BETA TUBE ASSEMBLY................................................................ 3001
BETA TUBE ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL................................................................. 3001
BETA TUBE ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION......................................................... 4001
BETA TUBE ASSEMBLY – CLEANING................................................................ 6001
BETA TUBE ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK............................................... 8001
Subject 72-10-02 – PPC ASSEMBLY............................................................................. 3001
PPC ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL.............................................................................. 3001
PPC ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION...................................................................... 4001
PPC ASSEMBLY – CLEANING............................................................................. 6001
PPC ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK............................................................ 8001
PPC ASSEMBLY – REPAIR.................................................................................. 9001
PPC ASSEMBLY – TESTING................................................................................ 13001
Subject 72-10-03 – PG ASSEMBLY............................................................................... 3001
PG ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL................................................................................ 3001
PG ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION........................................................................ 4001
PG ASSEMBLY – CLEANING............................................................................... 6001
PG ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK.............................................................. 8001
PG ASSEMBLY – REPAIR.................................................................................... 9001
Subject 72-10-04 – NTS ORIFICE ASSEMBLY............................................................. 3001
NTS ORIFICE ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL.............................................................. 3001
NTS ORIFICE ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION...................................................... 4001
NTS ORIFICE ASSEMBLY – CLEANING............................................................. 6001
NTS ORIFICE ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK............................................ 8001
NTS ORIFICE ASSEMBLY – TESTING................................................................ 13001
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-2
72-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Title Page
Subject 72-10-05 – TORQUE LOAD ASSEMBLY.......................................................... 3001

TORQUE LOAD ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL........................................................... 3001
TORQUE LOAD ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION................................................... 4001
TORQUE LOAD ASSEMBLY – CLEANING.......................................................... 6001
TORQUE LOAD ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK......................................... 8001
TORQUE LOAD ASSEMBLY – REPAIR............................................................... 9001
TORQUE LOAD ASSEMBLY – TESTING............................................................. 13001
Subject 72-10-06 – NTS VALVE AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY...................................... 3001
NTS VALVE AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL....................................... 3001
NTS VALVE AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION............................... 4001
NTS VALVE AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY – CLEANING...................................... 6001
NTS VALVE AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK..................... 8001
NTS VALVE AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY – TESTING......................................... 13001
Subject 72-10-07 – PROPELLER FEATHERING VALVE ASSEMBLY AND OIL 3001
TRANSFER TUBE..........................................................................................................
PROPELLER FEATHERING VALVE ASSEMBLY AND OIL TRANSFER 3001
TUBE – REMOVAL................................................................................................
TUBE – INSTALLATION........................................................................................
TUBE – CLEANING...............................................................................................
TUBE – INSPECTION/CHECK..............................................................................
Subject 72-10-08 – SHAFT OIL SEALS......................................................................... 3001
SHAFT OIL SEALS – REMOVAL.......................................................................... 3001
SHAFT OIL SEALS – INSTALLATION.................................................................. 4001
SHAFT OIL SEALS – CLEANING.......................................................................... 6001
SHAFT OIL SEALS – INSPECTION/CHECK........................................................ 8001
Subject 72-10-09 – NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY.............................................................. 3001
NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL............................................................... 3001
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-3
72-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Title Page
NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION....................................................... 4001

NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY – DISASSEMBLY........................................................ 5001
NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY – CLEANING............................................................... 6001
NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK............................................. 8001
NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY – REPAIR.................................................................... 9001
NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY – ASSEMBLY.............................................................. 10001
Subject 72-10-10 – OIL TRANSFER TUBES................................................................. 3001
OIL TRANSFER TUBES – REMOVAL.................................................................. 3001
OIL TRANSFER TUBES – INSTALLATION.......................................................... 4001
OIL TRANSFER TUBES – CLEANING.................................................................. 6001
OIL TRANSFER TUBES – INSPECTION/CHECK................................................ 8001
Subject 72-10-12 – PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY................................. 3001
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL.................................. 3001
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION.......................... 4001
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY – DISASSEMBLY.......................... 5001
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY – CLEANING................................. 6001
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK................ 8001
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY – ASSEMBLY................................ 10001
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY – TESTING.................................... 13001
Subject 72-10-13 – INTERMEDIATE HOUSING AND GEAR ASSEMBLY 3001
(DIAPHRAGM)...............................................................................................................
INTERMEDIATE HOUSING AND GEAR ASSEMBLY 3001
(DIAPHRAGM) – REMOVAL.................................................................................
(DIAPHRAGM) – INSTALLATION.........................................................................
(DIAPHRAGM) – DISASSEMBLY..........................................................................
(DIAPHRAGM) – CLEANING.................................................................................
(DIAPHRAGM) – INSPECTION/CHECK...............................................................
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-4
72-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Title Page
INTERMEDIATE HOUSING AND GEAR ASSEMBLY (DIAPHRAGM) – REPAIR..... 9001

(DIAPHRAGM) – ASSEMBLY................................................................................
Subject 72-10-14 – OIL TUBE ASSEMBLY.................................................................... 4001
OIL TUBE ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION............................................................. 4001
OIL TUBE ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK................................................... 8001
OIL TUBE ASSEMBLY – REPAIR......................................................................... 9001
Subject 72-10-15 – TACHOMETER-GENERATOR GEAR ASSEMBLY....................... 3001
TACHOMETER-GENERATOR GEAR ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL......................... 3001
TACHOMETER-GENERATOR GEAR ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION................. 4001
TACHOMETER-GENERATOR GEAR ASSEMBLY – CLEANING........................ 6001
TACHOMETER-GENERATOR GEAR ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK....... 8001
TACHOMETER-GENERATOR GEAR ASSEMBLY – REPAIR............................. 9001
Subject 72-10-17 – ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY.................................................. 3001
ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL................................................... 3001
ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION........................................... 4001
ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY – CLEANING.................................................. 6001
ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK................................. 8001
Subject 72-10-18 – OIL PRESSURE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER BEARING..... 3001
OIL PRESSURE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER BEARING – REMOVAL...... 3001
OIL PRESSURE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER 4001
BEARING – INSTALLATION.................................................................................
OIL PRESSURE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER BEARING – CLEANING..... 6001
OIL PRESSURE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER 8001
BEARING – INSPECTION/CHECK.......................................................................
OIL PRESSURE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER BEARING – REPAIR.......... 9001
Subject 72-10-19 – COMPRESSOR BEARING............................................................. 3001
COMPRESSOR BEARING – REMOVAL.............................................................. 3001
COMPRESSOR BEARING – INSTALLATION...................................................... 4001
COMPRESSOR BEARING – CLEANING............................................................. 6001
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-5
72-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Title Page
COMPRESSOR BEARING – INSPECTION/CHECK............................................ 8001

Subject 72-10-20 – ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY............................... 3001
ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL................................. 3001
ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION......................... 4001
ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK............... 8001
ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY – REPAIR..................................... 9001
Section 72-30 – 72-30-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 72-30-00 – COMPRESSOR SECTION............................................................. 1
COMPRESSOR SECTION – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION........................................ 1
Subject 72-30-01 – FIRST STAGE IMPELLER.............................................................. 8001
FIRST STAGE IMPELLER – INSPECTION/CHECK............................................. 8001
FIRST STAGE IMPELLER – REPAIR................................................................... 9001
Subject 72-30-04 – COMPRESSOR GROUP ASSEMBLY............................................ 3001
COMPRESSOR GROUP ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL............................................. 3001
COMPRESSOR GROUP ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION..................................... 4001
COMPRESSOR GROUP ASSEMBLY – CLEANING............................................ 6001
COMPRESSOR GROUP ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK........................... 8001
COMPRESSOR GROUP ASSEMBLY – REPAIR................................................. 9001
Section 72-40 – 72-40-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 72-40-00 – COMBUSTION SECTION............................................................... 1
COMBUSTION SECTION – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION......................................... 1
Subject 72-40-01 – COMBUSTION CASE (PLENUM) AND COMBUSTION CHAMBER 3001
ASSEMBLY (LINER)......................................................................................................
COMBUSTION CASE (PLENUM) AND COMBUSTION CHAMBER ASSEMBLY 3001
(LINER) – REMOVAL.............................................................................................
(LINER) – INSTALLATION.....................................................................................
(LINER) – CLEANING............................................................................................
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-6
72-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Title Page

(LINER) – INSPECTION/CHECK...........................................................................
(LINER) – REPAIR.................................................................................................
Section 72-50 – 72-50-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 72-50-00 – TURBINE SECTION........................................................................ 1
TURBINE SECTION – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.................................................. 1
Subject 72-50-01 – OIL INLET RETAINER SHIELD ASSEMBLY.................................. 3001
OIL INLET RETAINER SHIELD ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL................................... 3001
OIL INLET RETAINER SHIELD ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION........................... 4001
OIL INLET RETAINER SHIELD ASSEMBLY – CLEANING.................................. 6001
OIL INLET RETAINER SHIELD ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK................. 8001
OIL INLET RETAINER SHIELD ASSEMBLY – REPAIR....................................... 9001
Subject 72-50-02 – TAIL CONE..................................................................................... 3001
TAIL CONE – REMOVAL....................................................................................... 3001
TAIL CONE – INSTALLATION............................................................................... 4001
TAIL CONE – CLEANING...................................................................................... 6001
TAIL CONE – INSPECTION/CHECK..................................................................... 8001
TAIL CONE – REPAIR........................................................................................... 9001
Subject 72-50-03 – OIL INLET TUBE AND OIL PRESSURE JET................................. 3001
OIL INLET TUBE AND OIL PRESSURE JET – REMOVAL.................................. 3001
OIL INLET TUBE AND OIL PRESSURE JET – INSTALLATION.......................... 4001
OIL INLET TUBE AND OIL PRESSURE JET – CLEANING................................. 6001
OIL INLET TUBE AND OIL PRESSURE JET – INSPECTION/CHECK................ 8001
Subject 72-50-04 – TURBINE SCAVENGE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND SPUR 3001
GEARSHAFT..................................................................................................................
TURBINE SCAVENGE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND SPUR 3001
GEARSHAFT – REMOVAL....................................................................................
GEARSHAFT – INSTALLATION............................................................................
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-7
72-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Title Page

GEARSHAFT – CLEANING...................................................................................
GEARSHAFT – INSPECTION/CHECK..................................................................
TURBINE SCAVENGE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND SPUR GEARSHAFT – REPAIR..... 9001
Subject 72-50-05 – EXHAUST DUCT AND REAR ENGINE MOUNT............................ 3001
EXHAUST DUCT AND REAR ENGINE MOUNT – REMOVAL............................. 3001
EXHAUST DUCT AND REAR ENGINE MOUNT – INSTALLATION..................... 4001
EXHAUST DUCT AND REAR ENGINE MOUNT – CLEANING............................ 6001
EXHAUST DUCT AND REAR ENGINE MOUNT – INSPECTION/CHECK........... 8001
EXHAUST DUCT AND REAR ENGINE MOUNT – REPAIR................................. 9001
Subject 72-50-06 – BEARING CARRIER COMPONENTS AND TURBINE BEARING 3001
SUPPORT......................................................................................................................
BEARING CARRIER COMPONENTS AND TURBINE BEARING 3001
SUPPORT – REMOVAL........................................................................................
SUPPORT – INSTALLATION................................................................................
SUPPORT – CLEANING.......................................................................................
SUPPORT – INSPECTION/CHECK......................................................................
SUPPORT – REPAIR............................................................................................
Subject 72-50-07 – TURBINE GROUP ASSEMBLY...................................................... 3001
TURBINE GROUP ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL....................................................... 3001
TURBINE GROUP ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION............................................... 4001
TURBINE GROUP ASSEMBLY – DISASSEMBLY............................................... 5001
TURBINE GROUP ASSEMBLY – CLEANING...................................................... 6001
TURBINE GROUP ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK..................................... 8001
TURBINE GROUP ASSEMBLY – REPAIR........................................................... 9001
TURBINE GROUP ASSEMBLY – ASSEMBLY..................................................... 10001
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-8
72-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
GENERAL – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. Description (TASK 72-00-00-870-801-A01)
(1) The turboprop aircraft engine is a lightweight fixed-shaft engine designed to provide primary
power for fixed wing aircraft. Refer to Figure 1. The primary divisions of the basic engine are
the reduction gear and shaft, compressor, and turbine sections. Engine accessories and
components of power management, fuel, oil, air, ignition, electrical, and temperature indicating
systems required for engine operation are mounted on the accessory drive house assembly,
along the side of the engine body.
(2) The output drive for the aircraft propeller is provided by the geartrain in the intermediate housing
and gear assembly which is driven by the engine main rotating group. The engine main rotating
group is made up of the compressor impellers, turbine rotors, and shouldered (main) shaft. The
compressor impellers and turbine rotors are joined and indexed by curvic (special face) couplings
which are held together on the main shaft.
(3) The matched bearing and shaft set (high speed pinion), in the reduction gear and shaft assembly,
is driven by the main shaft coupling at the forward end of the main shaft.
(4) The fuel control gear drive train is driven by the accessory gear assembly which is also driven
by the engine drive shaft. Refer to Figure 2. Leading particulars of the engine are listed in Table
1.
Table 1. Leading Particulars
Engine type Single-shaft turboprop engine with integral gearbox

Compressor Two-stage centrifugal
Turbine Three-stage axial
Combustion chamber Single annular
Engine dry weight (complete engine) 405 pounds (184 kg) maximum
Length of engine (nominal) 44 inches (1,118 mm)
Width of engine (nominal) 22 inches (559 mm)
Height of engine (nominal) 29.7 inches (754 mm)
Propeller shaft speed at turbine speed of 41,730 RPM 1,591 RPM (100%)
(100%)
Absolute altitude 35,000 feet (10,668 m)
Starting altitude Sea level to 20,000 feet (6,096 m)
Ambient air temperature (operation) 130°F (55°C) maximum
1 -40 to 130°F (-40 to 55°C)
Ambient air temperature (starting )
Engine oil consumption 0.020 GPH (0.08 L/hr) maximum (1 quart (0.95 L) per
12.5 hours of operation)
Electrical power for starter 28 VDC, 600 amp (1,000 amp momentary)
UP495246

ALL Page 1
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 1. Leading Particulars (Cont)
Propeller shaft rotation (looking forward) CCW

Propeller shaft gear ratio 0.0382
Propeller mounting Flanged
Approved fuel and oil types Refer to AFM
NOTES:
1. Exception: Lowest permissible temperature must be that at which the fuel viscosity is 12 centistokes.
UP495246

ALL Page 2
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 1. (Sheet 1 of 1) Simplified Cross Sectional View of Engine (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-001-A01)

UP495246

ALL Page 3
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 2. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Control Gear Drive Train (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-002-A01)

UP495246

ALL Page 4
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Reduction Gear and Shaft Section (Subtask 72-00-00-870-002-A01)
(1) Nose Cone Assembly

(a) The nose cone assembly is located on the forward end of the engine below the inlet air
duct. Refer to Figure 3. The nose cone assembly consists of the output housing, propeller
shaft components, and NTS system components. The propeller shaft, powered through
the reduction gear system, transfers engine power to the aircraft propeller.
(2) Intermediate Housing and Gear Assembly
(a) The intermediate housing and gear assembly is mounted on the forward side of the
accessory drive housing. The intermediate housing and gear assembly is comprised of
the gearbox housing, matched bearing and shaft set (high speed pinion), planetary gear
assembly, propeller shaft main geartrain, and the gearcase oil scavenge pump assembly.
The high speed pinion gearshaft set is driven by the main shaft and in turn drives the
propeller shaft main geartrain. The planetary gear assembly provides reduction gearing
between the main geartrain and the propeller shaft. The gearcase oil scavenge pump
assembly scavenges oil from the bottom of the gearcase for recirculation by the oil pressure
pump.
UP495246

ALL Page 5
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3. (Sheet 1 of 1) Cross Sectional View of Reduction Gear and Shaft Section Less Accessories
(GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-003-A01)
UP495246

ALL Page 6
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
C. Power Group Assembly (Subtask 72-00-00-870-003-A01)
NOTE: The power group assembly consists of a compressor section and turbine section.
(1) The Compressor Section
(a) The compressor section consists of the first stage impeller, interstage duct, and second
stage impeller. Refer to Figure 4. Inlet air enters the compressor section through the inlet
air duct located at the top of the accessory drive housing assembly. The compressor first
stage impeller compresses and forces the inlet air through the interstage duct assembly
(crossover duct) to the second stage impeller. Air is further compressed by the second
stage impeller and is discharged into the combustion section.
(2) Turbine Section
(a) The turbine section contains three axial-flow turbine rotors, three stator assemblies, and
the combustion area. Refer to Figure 5.
(b) Gases from the combustion section flow through the stators and rotors and exhaust to
atmosphere through the exhaust pipe assembly and around the tail cone. Some compressor
air is directed against the turbine rotors for cooling. The turbine section provides power
through the reduction gear and shaft section to drive the propeller.
(c) The combustion area consists of the combustion chamber assembly and the transition
liner, which is entirely enclosed in the combustion case (plenum).
1 The combustion chamber case provides a plenum for compressed air keeping the
outer surfaces of the engine relatively cool. The rear of the combustion chamber case
provides a register for the turbine bearing support and for mounting the fuel nozzle
and manifold assemblies.
2 The compressed air supplied from the compressor section flows into a single reverse
flow annular combustion chamber assembly that encloses the turbine section. Within
the combustion chamber, atomized fuel supplied by the fuel nozzle and manifold
assembly of the fuel system is mixed with the compressed air. The primary fuel
nozzles are used for starting. The secondary fuel nozzles are used in conjunction
with the primary nozzles for all other phases of operation. During starting and initial
acceleration, the fuel-air mixture is ignited by two igniter plugs of the ignition system.
After ignition cutout, combustion is self-sustaining. The resultant combustion gases
are directed to the three-stage axial turbine by the transition liner assembly.
UP495246

ALL Page 7
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4. (Sheet 1 of 1) Cross Sectional View of Compressor Section Less Accessories (GRAPHIC
72-00-00-99B-004-A01)
UP495246

ALL Page 8
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
Figure 5. (Sheet 1 of 1) Cross Sectional View of Turbine Section Less Accessories (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-005-A01)

All Page 9/10
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
D. Engine Control System (Subtask 72-00-00-870-004-A01)
The major components of the engine control system are the engine fuel control assembly,
the PG assembly, and the PPC, plus the interconnecting mechanical linkage that coordinate
the control functions. Refer to Figure 6. These interrelated engine controls are rigged to
provide two basic modes of operation: the beta-mode and the propeller-governing mode.
Beta-mode operation provides for pilot control of propeller blade angle and selection of
engine speed. The fuel control unit automatically meters fuel flow to supply engine power
required by propeller load. Beta-mode operation is normally utilized at reduced aircraft
speeds for reverse-pitch braking on the runway and for ground operation.
Propeller-governing mode operation provides for pilot control of engine power and selection
of the engine speed governing point. The PG controls the propeller blade angle position
to absorb the pilot-selected power setting while maintaining constant engine speed.
Propeller-governing mode operation is utilized for all airborne operations.
(1) Fuel Control Assembly
(a) General
1 The fuel control assembly is composed of an HP fuel pump and fuel boost pump
assembly and fuel control unit. These components are stacked together as a single
assembly on a four-stud drive pad, located in the lower left-hand position at the rear
of the reduction gear section. The fuel control unit meters the fuel, supplied by the
boost and HP fuel pumps, to the engine combustion chamber. The fuel control unit
is composed of three major fuel devices: an USFG, an OSFG, and MFV. Fuel-flow
range is established by two basic limiting devices.
a A maximum fuel flow schedule functionally controlled by mechanical means
and P3 and compensated for compressor inlet temperature and pressure
variance.
b A minimum fuel flow schedule functionally controlled by mechanical means and
P3. A fuel trim manual adjustment is externally located on the fuel control unit
to provide compensation for different fuel types. Figure 7 illustrates typical fuel
system installations.
(b) USFG
1 The USFG, a droop-type speed control is functional in a beta-mode operation. The
engine speed selection is pilot-control within limits. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK
72-00-00-13000). Should engine speed attempt to decrease beyond the selected
setting, the USFG increases the fuel flow to oppose any speed decrease.
2 The minimum speed setting provides a minimum engine speed during ground
operation for reduced noise level. The maximum speed setting provides greater power
during reverse-pitch braking operation.
3 The flyweight-type USFG, gear-driven by the fuel control unit drive shaft, positions
the fuel main metering valve through mechanical linkage to control fuel flow.
Variable-speed selection is accomplished by controlling the speeder-spring loading
that opposes the speed-sensing flyweight action. The speed lever shaft, which
positions the speeder-spring loading mechanism, protrudes from the fuel control unit.
Mechanical linkage connects the USFG shaft to the PG assembly speed-control shaft
and, coordinated into a single cockpit control, provides for pilot control of the USFG
speed-setting during beta-mode and pilot control of the propeller-governing mode.
The USFG is set at least 3 percent below the PG assembly setting to prevent
UP495246

ALL Page 11
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
governing interference between the two speed-control governors. The linkage from
the USFG to the cockpit control is airframe-furnished.
(c) Power Lever Controlled Metering Valve
1 The MFV shaft position meters fuel flow to control engine power at all engine speeds
during beta-mode and during propeller-governing mode.
2 At a fuel flow sufficient to drive the engine speed above the USFG setting, the PG
assembly establishes a constant-engine-speed operation by automatically increasing
propeller-blade pitch angle. Additional fuel flow provides additional power at a constant
engine speed (propeller-governing mode). PG mode for speed setting can be
established by pilot control of the speed lever.
3 The MFV shaft (power lever shaft) controls the main metering valve position and
protrudes from the fuel control unit. Mechanical linkage connects the power lever
shaft to the PPC cam shaft and, coordinated into a single cockpit control, provides
for pilot control of the propeller-blade pitch angle during beta-mode of operation.
4 The linkage from the PPC to the cockpit control is airframe-furnished.
(d) OSFG
1 The flyweight-type OSFG is a safety device to control engine speed at approximately
103 percent in the event of PG assembly malfunction. Excess engine speed produces
OSFG flyweight action, which reduces fuel flow to oppose any engine speed increase.
(2) Fuel By-Pass Valve (Torque/Temperature Limiting)
(a) The fuel by-pass valve (torque/temperature limiter) by-passes metered fuel back to the
inlet of the fuel pump assembly to reduce fuel flow to the engine upon receipt of an electrical
signal from the torque/temperature limiter controller. The fuel by-pass valve consists of a
motor with two coils wound in parallel and an armature plate valve.
(b) The over-torque/temperature signal to the motor will position the plate valve to permit fuel
to by-pass directly back to the inlet of the fuel pump assembly thus reducing fuel flow to
the engine and controlling temperature to the predetermined set point.
(3) Torque/Temperature Limiter Controller
(a) The torque/temperature limiter controller is an electronic assembly remotely located in the
airframe. Its function is to supply a current to the motor in the fuel by-pass valve when an
over-torque/temperature condition exists. The torque/temperature limiter controller receives
compensated EGT input from the SRL automatic start controller, and a torque signal from
the torque signal conditioner. When the torque or EGT input exceeds the preset value
established by the torque/temperature limiter controller, a current is generated which
activates the motor in the fuel by-pass valve. The fuel by-pass valve then by-passes fuel
back to the inlet of the fuel pump assembly thus reducing fuel flow to the engine.
(4) SRL Automatic Start Controller
(a) The SRL/Auto-Start system consists of an electronic controller which receives electrical
input signals representing airspeed and ambient pressure, engine inlet temperature, engine
rotor speed and EGT and calculates a single corrected EGT output signal (EGT indicated)
based on EGT/turbine inlet temperature relationships as established by engine performance
calculations. This function is effective for all engine operation above 80 percent engine
speed. The SRL circuitry deactivates the EGT correction function for engine operation
below 80 percent speed. The SRL controller, as a separate feature, incorporates 10, 60,
and 80 percent speed switches to provide signals for EGT-limited fuel enrichment, provisions
UP495246

ALL Page 12
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
for automatic starting, energize and de-energize the ignition unit, control of fuel shutoff
valve, and the starter-generator as functions of engine RPM.
(5) PG Assembly
(a) The PG assembly is mounted in the upper right-hand position at the rear of the reduction
gear section. The PG assembly provides a constant engine speed during the
propeller-governing mode of operation. The gear-driven PG assembly is composed of an
integral gear-type pump, metering valve, and flyweight governor. Engine lubricating oil is
internally directed to the PG assembly oil pump inlet. The pressure pump boosts the oil
pressure sufficiently to position the propeller blade angle in propeller-governing mode. The
oil flow is metered by the metering valve and controlled by flyweight governor action in
response to engine speed change. The oil flow is metered so as to maintain pressure in
the pitch control and propeller, setting the blade angle required to maintain the speed
setting. The PG contains a speed sensing monopole which furnishes the speed signal to
the SRL controller. The PG assembly speed setting shaft is connected to the USFG shaft
on the fuel control unit by mechanical linkage. The PG assembly provides for
propeller-governing mode of operation at a choice of engine speed settings. Pilot control
of the cockpit speed lever determines the amount of preload on the governor speeder
spring, which loads the flyweights. The hydraulic reset function acts to increase the governor
set point during reverse operation to facilitate reverse mode transition. During the beta-mode
of engine operation the PG assembly is not governing and supplies high pressure oil via
the PPC to the engine propeller control components.
(6) Torque Signal Conditioner
(a) The torque signal conditioner is remotely located in the airframe. It provides an excitation
voltage to the strain gage bridge and amplifies the mV signal from the strain gage bridge
to a usable level. This signal is sent to the cockpit torque readout gage and to the
torque/temperature limiter controller.
(7) PPC
(a) The PPC is mounted at the rear of the reduction gear section on the propeller shaft
centerline. The PPC is composed of a ported sleeve, which is positioned by a cam. The
control end of the beta tube (which also has oil-supply ports) rides inside the ported sleeve.
(b) The positioning cam-control shaft is connected to the main metering valve power-lever
shaft by mechanical linkage. During propeller-governing mode, the PPC serves no basic
function other than oil passage and housing for the beta tube. In beta-mode (underspeed
governing), the PPC provides for pilot control of propeller blade pitch angle. Pilot control
is accomplished by manually positioning the PPC cam. The beta tube oil supply holes are
then aligned with the ported sleeve so that the pressure supplied to the propeller balances
the propeller piston spring. Additional minimum drag protection is available in the event of
NTS system malfunction. The operator's manual instructs the operator to move the power
lever on the dead engine to the full forward position. This action positions the PPC follower
sleeve to hold the propeller to the highest possible blade angle (resulting in lowest drag)
under the conditions of not having normal NTS protection. The redundant safety feature
is called the beta follow-up system. Refer to Figure 8.
(8) Beta Tube
(a) The propeller oil-transfer (beta) tube extends aft from a threaded adjustable connection in
the propeller dome, through the engine propeller shaft, and into the PPC. The tube portion,
housed within the PPC ported sleeve has oil supply ports through which PG discharge oil
is supplied to the propeller dome. During beta-mode, the beta tube and the PPC jointly
control the oil pressure to the propeller dome to position the blade pitch angle. During
UP495246

ALL Page 13
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
propeller-governing mode, the beta tube performs no control function (due to the ported
sleeve position) and serves only as an oil passage.
UP495246

ALL Page 14
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6. (Sheet 1 of 1) Simplified Power Management and Torque Sensing Diagram (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-006-A01)
UP495246

All Page 15/16
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
Figure 7. (Sheet 1 of 4) Engine Fuel System Schematic (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-007-A01)

All Page 17/18
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246

All Page 19/20
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 21
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 22
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8. (Sheet 1 of 1) Beta Follow-Up Control Functions (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-008-A01)

UP495246

ALL Page 23
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
E. NTS System (Subtask 72-00-00-870-005-A01)
(1) The NTS system is composed of the following components:

• Torque Load Assembly (Three required)
• NTS Valve
• Torque Ring Gear Assembly
• Feathering Valve
• Refer to Figure 9 and Figure 10.
(2) The function of the NTS system is to limit the torque the engine can absorb from the propeller
during windmilling and thereby prevent high propeller drag conditions. The NTS system will
automatically move the propeller blades toward their feathered position (should the engine
suddenly lose power while in flight), and precisely modulate the propeller-blade pitch angle
during a propeller-windmilled engine air-start.
(3) The torque load assemblies and NTS valve are assembled on the nose cone housing. The
torque load assemblies preload the torque ring gear, taking up spline backlash. When the
propeller applies negative torque to the engine, the ring gear movement trips the hydraulic NTS
valve to closed position. The resulting increase in oil pressure actuates the feathering valve.
(4) The propeller feathering valve is hydraulically actuated by the NTS valve. The feathering valve
is externally mounted on the rear of the reduction gear section to provide a connection for a
manual control. In response to the NTS valve, the feathering valve blocks the high pressure
oil-flow to the pitch control, and simultaneously relieves high pressure oil in the propeller dome,
which allows the spring-loaded propeller blades to move toward a feathered position. The engine
manual fuel shutoff valve must be rotated to its closed position immediately prior to manual
actuation of the feathering valve. This function is performed by a cockpit control. Releasing the
actuating pull on the spring-loaded feathering valve allows it to return to its normal operating
position.
UP495246

ALL Page 24
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
Figure 9. (Sheet 1 of 1) NTS Schematic (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-009-A01)

All Page 25/26
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
Figure 10. (Sheet 1 of 1) NTS and PTS Diagram (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-010-A01)

All Page 27/28
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
F. PTS System (Subtask 72-00-00-870-006-A01)
(1) The PTS system consists of a torque transducer, located inside the gearbox, and an external
signal conditioner. The torque transducer is a redundant strain-gage system, consisting of two
independent bridges, each with eight active strain gages. Refer to Figure 11 and Figure 12. The
gages are mounted on the torque ring/ring-gear support. The torque transducer generates a mV
signal proportional to engine torque. The airframe-mounted signal conditioner provides excitation
to the strain-gage bridge and amplifies the signal from it to obtain 5 VDC at zero engine torque
and zero VDC at 100 percent engine torque.
UP495246

ALL Page 29
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
Figure 11. (Sheet 1 of 1) NTS Schematic (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-011-A01)

All Page 31/32
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
Figure 12. (Sheet 1 of 1) NTS and PTS Diagram (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-012-A01)

All Page 33/34
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
G. Electrical System (Subtask 72-00-00-870-007-A01)
NOTE: The details of customer-furnished electrical system component installation in the aircraft
depend on the particular aircraft.
(1) The electrical system includes engine and aircraft-mounted components. Certain components
are optional or customer-furnished equipment. Refer to Figure 13. The electrical system provides
for required electrical starting and control operations as well as providing for operation of
electrically actuated engine-mounted electrical system components include an ignition system,
fuel solenoid valve, inlet anti-icing valve, start fuel regulator valve, oil vent solenoid valve, and
magnetic drain plug. Optional or customer-furnished engine-mounted electrical system
components may include a starter-generator, tachometer-generator, and PPC (beta) pressure
switch.
(2) A lube oil temperature bulb is provided for oil temperature indication. A torque/temperature limiter
system, including an engine-mounted torque/temperature limiter by-pass valve and remotely
located transducer and controller, is incorporated.
UP495246

ALL Page 35
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13. (Sheet 1 of 1) Simplified Electrical Components Diagram (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-013-A01)

UP495246

ALL Page 36
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
H. Ignition System (Subtask 72-00-00-870-008-A01)
(1) During engine starting, ignition of the fuel-air mixture within the combustion chamber assembly
is accomplished by the ignition system. The ignition unit is energized by 24 VDC through a speed
switch, located in SRL controller, at the appropriate engine RPM and delivers high voltage pulses
to the igniter plugs through the ignition leads. The igniter plugs produce igniting sparks to start
combustion. The system is de-energized by the speed switch when engine RPM reaches a value
that indicates combustion has become self-sustaining.
I. Anti-Icing System (Subtask 72-00-00-870-009-A01)
(1) The inlet anti-icing valve is mounted on the upper right side of the compressor housing. Refer
to Figure 14. It is a normally-closed poppet-type valve actuated by a separate switch. Plumbing
lines connect the valve's ports to the compressor air discharge tap on the turbine plenum and
to the inlet anti-icing shield. When the anti-icing valve is open, it permits flow of hot compressed
air to be directed to the anti-icing shield to prevent icing in the engine inlet. A customer connection
is provided from which hot compressed air may also be directed to other parts of the aircraft to
prevent icing.
UP495246

ALL Page 37
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 14. (Sheet 1 of 1) Simplified Anti-Icing System Diagram (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-014-A01)

UP495246

ALL Page 38
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
J. Turbine Temperature Indicating System (EGT) (Subtask 72-00-00-870-010-A01)
(1) The thermocouple harness consists of eight Chromel-Alumel thermocouple probes positioned
radially around the engine at the third-stage turbine discharge. The probes are electrically
connected integrally such that an average output signal is obtained that is representative of the
EGT. The thermocouple harness provides a mV output signal that is consistent with the
temperature versus mV relationship defined by NBS Monograph 125 for Type K thermocouples
(Chromel-Alumel). The thermocouple harness output signal is supplied to the EGT compensator.
(2) The engine is equipped with an EGT compensator which biases the raw thermocouple signal
to match a specified engine EGT with a specific rated engine performance. This correction is
applied so that each individual engine will register the same temperature at the engine
specification rating point. This compensated EGT signal (EGT compensated) is the signal
received by the SRL controller.
K. Oil System (Subtask 72-00-00-870-011-A01)
(1) The lubrication system includes an internal pressure pump and three internal scavenge pumps.
Refer to Figure 15. The pressure pump provides jet and mist lubrication of engine bearings and
gears. The scavenge pumps, two in the reduction gear section (in a single housing) and one in
the turbine section, return lubricating oil to the oil cooling system, oil tank assembly, and oil-to-fuel
heat exchanger for fuel filter anti-icing. An oil vent valve unloads the oil pumps (gearbox scavenge
and pressure) during starting. The lubrication system also supplies actuating oil to the propeller
control system and to the torque sensing components. The system also includes an oil
temperature bulb and magnetic drain plug for indication of oil temperature and the presence of
magnetic particles in the oil.
UP495246

ALL Page 39
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 15. (Sheet 1 of 1) Simplified Lubricating Oil System Diagram (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-015-A01)
UP495246

All Page 41/42
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
L. Components and Accessories (Subtask 72-00-00-870-012-A01)
(1) All of the engine components and accessories are mounted in the reduction gear and shaft
section area except the temperature sensor assembly, primary and secondary fuel manifold and
nozzle assemblies, turbine plenum drain valves, fuel flow divider, fuel shutoff valve, igniter plugs
and ignition leads, which are mounted in the combustion and turbine sections. The oil pressure
and scavenge pumps, and torque sensor assembly are installed internally in the reduction gear
and shaft section. The PG, PPC, fuel control assembly, oil filter, NTS orifice assembly, feathering
valve assembly, and customer-furnished starter-generator and tachometer-generator, are installed
on mounting pads on the outside rear face of the input housing assembly. The ignition unit, fuel
solenoid valve, and inlet anti-icing valve are installed on the input housing assembly and
compressor housing assembly. The oil filter by-pass valve and oil pressure regulator valve
assembly are installed in bosses on the upper left side of the input housing assembly. The oil
vent valve is located on the lower front face of the input housing assembly. The inlet temperature
sensor is located in the inlet air duct on the upper left side of the input housing assembly. Fuel
flow divider is mounted on the compressor housing flanges.
M. Accessory Mounting Provisions (Subtask 72-00-00-870-013-A01)
(1) The accessory pad mounts are shown in Figure 16.

UP495246

ALL Page 43
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 16. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Mounting Pads (Typical) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-016-A01)

UP495246

ALL Page 44
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
N. Directional References (Subtask 72-00-00-870-014-A01)
CAUTION: ROTATE PROPELLER ONLY IN NORMAL DIRECTION OF ROTATION.

(1) Directional references to front and rear, right and left, top and bottom and CW and CCW are
made facing the turbine discharge duct with the engine in a horizontal position and the air inlet
up.
(2) The direction of rotation of the propeller shaft is CCW.
O. Engine Mounting Provisions (Subtask 72-00-00-870-015-A01)
(1) Five mounting pads are provided on the engine to satisfy various mounting requirements. Two
pads are located at the top and bottom of the rear of the plenum assembly. Two other pads are
located on the right and left sides of the back face of the reduction gear section. One pad is
located at the top center of the rear face of the reduction gear section.
P. Shipping Container Information (Subtask 72-00-00-870-016-A01)
(1) This container (PN PST110) is an ATA300 type reusable shipping container constructed of wood
and cardboard. Refer to Table 2. A flexible foam form is placed into the container and the engine
is nested in this form. The oil flow metal tube (beta tube) is encased in styrofoam and a cylindrical
fiber container and nested with the engine. Another flexible foam form is then placed over the
engine and beta tube. The shipping container is closed and secured with two straps.
Table 2. ATA300 Type Reusable Shipping Container, PN PST110
Length 56 inches (1,422 mm)

Height 41 inches (1,041 mm)
Width 31 inches (787 mm)
Weight (approximate) (engine Included) 500 pounds (227 kg)
UP495246

ALL Page 45
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – FAULT ISOLATION
(1) Use these procedures for the fault isolation of the engine.
pressure gage, 0 to 1,000 PSIG (0 commercially available

to 6,895 kPa) (+/-2 percent
accuracy)
pressure gage, 0 to 250 PSIG (0 to commercially available

1,724 kPa) (+/-2 percent accuracy)


vacuum gage, 0 to 10 PSIG (0 to commercially available

69 kPa) (+/-2 percent accuracy)
PN 294562-1 SRL tester (means of testing the CAGE: 06848

SRL controller and associated
engine interface components while
mounted in the aircraft)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY FAULT ISOLATION

ALL Page 1001
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-00-810-802-A01)
B. General (Subtask 72-00-00-810-004-A01)
CAUTION: FOR THOSE FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURES REQUIRING MANUAL ROTATION

OF PROPELLER, ONLY ROTATE PROPELLER IN NORMAL DIRECTION OF
ROTATION.
(1) Fault Isolation Procedures.

NOTE: To satisfy high quality operational standards, and make sure of the accuracy of
readings obtained during the test and calibration of the equipment, it is recommended
that all instrumentation and gages to be used be checked on a periodic basis against
instrumentation and gages of known accuracy.
(a) The following procedures provide information for isolating and eliminating faults which may
occur during normal operation of the engine while installed on the aircraft.
(b) Fault isolation information is supplied in two sets of charts. The first chart provides an index
by dividing normal operation of the engine into categories: pre-start (Figure 1001), ground
start (Figure 1002), air start (Figure 1003), operation and engine check (Figure 1004),
cruise (Figure 1005), landing (Figure 1006), reverse thrust (Figure 1007), after landing
(Figure 1008), shutdown (Figure 1009), torque and temperature limiting system, SRL
controller without use of PN 294562-1, SRL tester or PN 294562-2, SRL tester and SRL
controller with use of PN 294562-1, SRL tester or PN 294562-2, SRL tester. The subsequent
figures provide the fault isolation procedures referenced in Figure 1001 through Figure
1009: pre-start (Figure 1010 and Figure 1011), ground start (Figure 1012 through Figure
1026), air start (Figure 1027, Figure 1028, and Figure 1029) operation and engine check
(Figure 1030 through Figure 1054), cruise (Figure 1055 through Figure 1058), landing
(Figure 1059 through Figure 1064), reverse thrust (Figure 1065 through Figure 1068), after
landing (Figure 1069 and Figure 1070), shutdown (Figure 1071 through Figure 1073),
torque and temperature limiting system (Figure 1074 through Figure 1078), SRL controller
without use of PN 294562-1, SRL tester or PN 294562-2, SRL tester (Figure 1079 through
Figure 1084) and SRL controller with use of PN 294562-1, SRL tester or PN 294562-2,
UP495246

ALL Page 1002
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
SRL tester (Figure 1085 through Figure 1089). The chart for each category lists possible
fault symptoms which may occur during operation and lists a specific fault isolation
procedure contained in the second set of charts for each set of symptoms. The second set
of charts provide fault isolation procedures in tree form to isolate the malfunctioning part
or component. The tree format is used by performing the checks specified and then
proceeding along the applicable path (OK or NOT OK) to the next check or instruction until
the fault is isolated and eliminated.
(c) The second set of charts include references to certain test points. These are illustrated
immediately following the fault isolation charts in Figure 1091, Figure 1092, and Figure
1093.
(2) Fault Isolation Tips.
(a) Values provided in the fault isolation charts are as representative as possible. However,
the AFM and AMM are to be used as a basis for operating, adjusting and evaluating the
performance of the engine installed on the aircraft.
(b) Before taking corrective action indicated by the fault isolation procedures, make sure that
the instruments used to obtain indications are checked for accuracy.
(c) Engines bearing the same part number, though similar in characteristics, are not identical.
This, coupled with tolerable error in the torque, RPM, and temperature indicators, often
causes differences in instrument readings between normal, healthy engines. Engine
performance should be monitored for daily changes and trends as compared with original
installed torque, fuel flow, and EGT values. Cockpit readings obtained on each flight will
aid greatly in monitoring engine performance.
(d) The fault isolation procedures are based on the symptoms which the engine displays to
the operator, as well as procedures of the AFM for starting and operating the engine. There
is no deliberate duplication of faults presented - that is, a fault which would become apparent
when the engine is being started would not be covered in later operating modes. Simple
and easily diagnosed faults such as loose connections or incorrect control settings are not
covered.
(e) Table 1003 provides specific maximum allowable fuel or oil leakages from engine
components as an aid to determining component serviceability.
NOTE: As the majority of engine installations indicate fuel flow in PPH, this unit of
measurement is used in the following procedures.
Table 1003. Fluid Leakage Limits
Location and type Maximum Allowable Limits

Fuel pump assembly drive pad (fuel) 5.0 cc/hr
Fuel pump assembly drive pad (oil) 0.5 cc/hr (approx 8 drops per hr)
Hydraulic pump drive pad (oil) 0.5 cc/hr (approx 8 drops per hr)
Accessory, tachometer-generator, or starter-generator 0.5 cc/hr (approx 8 drops per hr)
shaft seal (oil)
Fuel pressure regulator drain connection (fuel) 1.0 cc/min
Fuel control assembly drain (fuel) 1.0 cc/min
Propeller shaft seal (oil) 0.5 cc/hr (approx 8 drops per hr)
UP495246

ALL Page 1003
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 1003. Fluid Leakage Limits (Cont)
Location and type Maximum Allowable Limits

Compressor seal (oil) (as viewed at air inlet) (static leak 1.0 cc/min (approx 15 drops per min)
only)
Turbine seal (oil) (check leakage during operation by 1.0 cc/min (approx 15 drops per min)
monitoring oil consumption of engine. Consumption
must not exceed 1 quart (0.95 L) per 12.5 hours
operation. Engine must not emit smoke to indicate
excessive leakage during operation.)
Diaphragm/nose cone gaskets (static leaks) 0.14 cc/min (approx 2 drops per min)
Figure 1001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Pre-Start (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-001-A01)
Key for Figure 1001 (Sheet 1 of 1)
1. Refer to Figure 1010. 2. Refer to Figure 1011.

UP495246

ALL Page 1004
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 1002. (Sheet 1 of 2) Ground Start (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-002-A01)

UP495246

ALL Page 1005
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

4. Refer to Figure 1015.
UP495246

ALL Page 1006
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 1002. (Sheet 2 of 2) Ground Start (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-002-A01)

UP495246

ALL Page 1007
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Figure 1003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Air Start (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-003-A01)

2. Refer to AFM. 4. Refer to Figure 1029.
UP495246

ALL Page 1008
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 1004. (Sheet 1 of 4) Operation and Engine Check (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-004-A01)

UP495246

ALL Page 1009
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1010
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1011
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1012
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1013
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)


UP495246

ALL Page 1014
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 1005. (Sheet 1 of 1) Cruise (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-005-A01)

UP495246

ALL Page 1015
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 1006. (Sheet 1 of 1) Landing (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-006-A01)

UP495246

ALL Page 1016
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 1007. (Sheet 1 of 1) Reverse Thrust (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-007-A01)

UP495246

ALL Page 1017
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 1008. (Sheet 1 of 1) After Landing (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-008-A01)
1. Refer to Figure 1068. 4. Refer to Figure 1079 through Figure 1084.

2. Refer to Figure 1069. 5. Refer to Figure 1085 through Figure 1089.
3. Refer to Figure 1074 through Figure 1078.
UP495246

ALL Page 1018
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 1009. (Sheet 1 of 1) Shutdown (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-009-A01)

UP495246

ALL Page 1019
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 1010. (Sheet 1 of 3) Procedure 1 (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-010-A01)

UP495246

ALL Page 1020
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to AMM. 2. Use pressure gage, 0 to 300 PSIG (0 to

2,068 kPa).
UP495246

ALL Page 1021
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1022
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to 72-10-07. 3. Refer to 72-10-02.

2. Refer to 72-10-04. 4. Refer to AMM.
UP495246

ALL Page 1023
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1024
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to 72-10-03. 3. Refer to 72-10-13.

2. Refer to 72-10-02.

UP495246

ALL Page 1025
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1026
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to AMM. 2. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK

72-00-00-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1027
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1028
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to AMM. 2. Refer to Figure 1010.

UP495246

ALL Page 1029
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1030
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to AMM. 3. Refer to 73-21-06.

UP495246

ALL Page 1031
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to Figure 1091. 5. Refer to 73-21-06.

2. Refer to 73-10-06. 6. Refer to 73-21-04.
UP495246

ALL Page 1032
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Key for Figure 1014 (Sheet 2 of 2) (Cont)
3. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 7. Refer to 73-21-05.

72-00-00-13000).
4. Refer to 73-10-09.

2. Refer to 74-10-01.
UP495246

ALL Page 1033
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to AMM. 3. Refer to Figure 1014 and Figure 1015.

2. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK
72-00-00-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1034
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Use pressure gage, 0 to 1,000 PSIG (0 to 4. Refer to 73-21-06.

6,895 kPa).
UP495246

ALL Page 1035
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Refer to AFM. 5. Refer to 73-21-05.

72-00-00-13000).
1. Refer to 73-10-07.
UP495246

ALL Page 1036
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to AFM. 2. Refer to AMM.

UP495246

ALL Page 1037
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1038
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK

72-00-00-8000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1039
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1040
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to AFM. 3. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK

72-00-00-8000).
2. Refer to AMM
UP495246

ALL Page 1041
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1042
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to Figure 1091. 4. Use pressure gage, 0 to 1,000 PSIG (0 to

6,895 kPa).
2. Refer to 73-22-01. 5. Refer to 73-21-06.
3. Refer to 73-20-01.
UP495246

ALL Page 1043
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1044
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

73-21-05-13000).
72-00-00-13000).
1. Refer to 73-21-04. 3. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK

73-21-05-13000).
73-21-05-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1045
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1046
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1047
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

72-00-00-13000).
73-21-05-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1048
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1049
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to AFM. 3. Refer to Table 13031.

72-00-00-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1050
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1051
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 3. Refer to Figure 1091.

72-00-00-8000).
2. Refer to AMM.
UP495246

ALL Page 1052
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1053
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to Figure 1092. 3. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK

72-00-00-8000).
2. Refer to 73-10-07.

UP495246

ALL Page 1054
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1055
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to AMM. 2. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK

72-00-00-8000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1056
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1057
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to 72-30-01. 5. Refer to Figure 1091.

3. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 7. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK
72-00-00-8000). 73-21-05-13000).
4. Use pressure gage, 0 to 1,000 PSIG (0 to
6,895 kPa).
UP495246

ALL Page 1058
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1059
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to AMM. 2. Use pressure gage, 0 to 300 PSIG (0 to

2,068 kPa).
UP495246

ALL Page 1060
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1061
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to 77-10-02. 2. Refer to 72-10-02.

UP495246

ALL Page 1062
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1063
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

72-00-00-8000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1064
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1065
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to 73-10-06. 4. Refer to 72-10-05.

2. Refer to 76-10-01. 5. Refer to 72-10-12.
3. Refer to 72-10-07. 6. Refer to 72-10-06.
1. Refer to AMM. 2 Refer to 77-20-03.

UP495246

ALL Page 1066
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1067
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Use pressure gage, 0 to 300 PSIG (0 to 5. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK

2,068 kPa). 72-00-00-8000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1068
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1069
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to 79-20-05. 3. Refer to 79-20-06.


UP495246

ALL Page 1070
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Use pressure gage, 0 to 300 PSIG (0 to 3. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK

2,068 kPa). 72-00-00-13000).
2. Refer to 79-20-05. 4. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-00-00-8000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1071
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to SERVICING (PGBLK 3. Refer to 72-10-18.

72-00-00-11000).
2. Refer to AMM.

UP495246

ALL Page 1072
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1073
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

72-00-00-13000).
1. Refer to Paragraph 2.C. Certificated Engine 3. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK

Operating Limitations (Subtask 73-21-05-13000).
72-00-00-700-005-A01).
72-00-00-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1074
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 2. Refer to AMM.

73-21-05-13000).
1. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 3. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK

76-10-01-13000). 72-00-00-13000).
2. Refer to AMM.
UP495246

ALL Page 1075
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 2. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK

76-10-01-13000). 72-00-00-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1076
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 1041. (Sheet 1 of 1) Procedure 31A (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-041-A01)
1. Refer to 73-20-01. 4. Refer to 73-10-09.

73-10-07-13000).
3. Refer to AMM.
UP495246

ALL Page 1077
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

76-10-01-8000).
72-10-01-8000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1078
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1079
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

2. Use pressure gage, 0 to 600 PSIG (0 to 5. Refer to 72-10-03.
4,137 kPa).
72-00-00-13000).

UP495246

ALL Page 1080
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

77-10-02-13000).
2. Use pressure gage, 0 to 600 PSIG (0 to 5. Refer to Figure 1010.
4,137 kPa).
UP495246

ALL Page 1081
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 3. Use pressure gage, 0 to 600 PSIG (0 to

72-00-00-13000). 4,137 kPa).
76-10-01-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1082
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1083
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

4,137 kPa).
UP495246

ALL Page 1084
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 1048. (Sheet 1 of 1) Procedure 37A (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-048-A01)

UP495246

ALL Page 1085
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 3. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK

72-10-04-6000). 72-00-00-13000).
2. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 4. Refer to 72-10-03.
72-10-04-8000).

76-10-01-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1086
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

72-10-12-13000).
72-00-00-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1087
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1088
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

72-10-12-13000).
72-00-00-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1089
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1090
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

72-00-00-8000).
2. Refer to SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (PGBLK 4. Refer to AMM.
75-10-00-1).

72-00-00-13000).
2. Refer to 77-20-03.
UP495246

ALL Page 1091
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1092
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

72-00-00-13000).
73-21-05-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1093
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1094
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 5. Use pressure gage, 0 to 250 PSIG (0 to

73-21-05-13000). 1,724 kPa).
3. Refer to 73-10-09. 7. Refer to 73-21-06.
4. Use pressure gage, 0 to 1,000 PSIG (0 to
6,895 kPa).
UP495246

ALL Page 1095
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1096
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Use pressure gage, 0 to 1,000 PSIG (0 to 3. Refer to 73-10-07.

6,895 kPa).
1. Refer to 77-10-02.

77-20-03-8000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1097
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1098
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to AMM. 3 Refer to TESTING (PGBLK

72-00-00-13000).
2 Refer to 76-10-01.
UP495246

ALL Page 1099
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1100
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

2. Refer to 75-10-02.
1. Refer to AMM. 2. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 73-10-07-9000).
1. Refer to AFM. 3. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK

72-00-00-13000).
2. Refer to AMM.
UP495246

ALL Page 1101
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

76-10-01-8000).
2. Refer to AMM.
UP495246

ALL Page 1102
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

72-00-00-13000).
2. Refer to AMM.

76-10-01-8000).
2. Refer to AMM.
UP495246

ALL Page 1103
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

72-00-00-13000).
2. Refer to AMM.
UP495246

ALL Page 1104
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 3. Refer to Figure 1091.

72-00-00-13000).
4,137 kPa).
UP495246

ALL Page 1105
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1106
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to 77-10-02. 3. Refer to 72-10-03.

2. Refer to 72-10-01. 4. Refer to 72-10-02.
UP495246

ALL Page 1107
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1108
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

72-00-00-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1109
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1110
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

72-00-00-13000).
3. Refer to 76-10-01.

UP495246

ALL Page 1111
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to 72-10-09.
UP495246

ALL Page 1112
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1113
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to AFM. 4. Refer to Figure 1091.

2. Refer to Figure 1034. 5. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-00-00-8000).
3. Use vacuum gage, 0 to 10 PSIG (0 to 69 6. Refer to AMM.
kPa).
1. Refer to AFM. 2. Refer to AMM

UP495246

ALL Page 1114
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 2. Refer to AMM

72-00-00-8000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1115
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to AFM. 2. Refer to Figure 1070 (PROCEDURE 59).
1. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 2. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK

73-10-06-8000). 72-00-00-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1116
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to 73-22-01. 2. Refer to 76-10-09.
1. Refer to AMM. 3. Refer to .73-22-01.

2. Refer to 76-10-09.
UP495246

ALL Page 1117
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1118
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to 76-10-09. 3. Refer to 73-22-01.

2. Refer to 72-10-03.

UP495246

ALL Page 1119
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

72-00-00-13000).
1. Refer to 76-10-09.
UP495246

ALL Page 1120
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1121
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to Figure 1013 through Figure 1017. 3. Refer to 72-10-03.

UP495246

ALL Page 1122
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1123
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to Figure 1030. 3. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-03-9000).

UP495246

ALL Page 1124
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1125
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

72-00-00-13000).
2. Refer to AMM. 5. Refer to and 76-10-07.
3. Refer to 76-10-04.
UP495246

ALL Page 1126
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1127
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

2. Refer to 76-10-09. 4. Refer to 73-22-01.
UP495246

ALL Page 1128
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1129
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to AMM. 3. Refer to Paragraph 2.C. Certificated Engine

Operating Limitations (Subtask
72-00-00-700-005-A01).
2. Refer to or 73-22-01. 4. Refer to 76-10-09.
73-22-01

72-00-00-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1130
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

72-00-00-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1131
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 2. Refer to Figure 1013.

72-00-00-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1132
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1133
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

72-00-00-13000).

72-00-00-13000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1134
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246

ALL Page 1135
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 3. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK

79-30-01-3000). 72-00-00-13000).
72-00-00-8000).
UP495246

ALL Page 1136
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 1091. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fault Isolation Test Points (Typical) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-091-A01)
UP495246

ALL Page 1137
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 1092. (Sheet 1 of 1) Flow Divider Fault Isolation Test Points (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-092-A01)
UP495246

ALL Page 1138
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 1093. (Sheet 1 of 1) PG Reset System Test Points (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-093-A01)

UP495246

ALL Page 1139
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246

ALL Page 1140
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the engine.
manufacturer's address.
PN 284203-1-1 maintenance stand adapter (used CAGE: 06848

to bolt to each side of engine to
mount engine on maintenance
stand (2 required))
PN 284357-1-1 TPE hoist adapter assembly (used CAGE: 06848

to mount on propeller shaft to
provide a hoisting mount for lifting
operation)
PN 284493-1-1 engine maintenance stand (used to CAGE: 06848

support engine during transportation
and maintenance)
PN 284557-1-1 small block (set of 2) gearcase CAGE: 06848

stand maintenance adapter (used
to mount engine on maintenance
stand)
PN 284688-1-1 propshaft anti-rotation plate CAGE: 06848

assembly (used to prevent entire
engine from rotating when lifting
engine with PN 284357-1-1 hoisting
adapter)
PN 289247-1 adapter assembly (used to support CAGE: 06848

aft end of engine when installed in
stand using PN 284557-1-1
adapter)
PN 831118-2 engine transportation cart (used to CAGE: 06848

transport engine)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
WARNING: BEFORE YOU USE A MATERIAL, REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER'S MATERIAL


APPLICABLE.
greaseproof barrier material commercially available

(MIL-PRF-121)
vapor-proof barrier material commercially available

(MIL-PRF-131, Type I, Class III)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-00-020-802-A01)
B. Removal of Engine From Shipping Container (Subtask 72-00-00-020-004-A01)
WARNING: HONEYWELL DOES NOT RECOMMEND THAT AN NTS SYSTEM CHECK BY FLIGHT
CHECK BE PERFORMED ON ENGINES INTENDED FOR USE IN SINGLE ENGINE
AIRCRAFT INSTALLATIONS. ALL OTHER NTS CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. REFER TO
TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
CAUTION: WHEN REMOVING ENGINE FROM AIRCRAFT, TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE OIL FLOW
METAL TUBE ASSEMBLY (BETA TUBE), ALWAYS REMOVE THE BETA TUBE PRIOR
TO PROPELLER REMOVAL.
NOTE: Replacement of engine installed on aircraft will require checks of the NTS system. Refer
to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures and Table 13004, Required NTS Checks, Check
B.
NOTE: If maintenance procedures require removal of the engine from the aircraft, consult the
AMM for necessary removal and installation procedures.
(1) Remove engine from cardboard shipping container as follows:
(a) Remove plastic shipping bands securing cover of shipping container, then remove top
flexible foam form and beta tube assembly shipping case.
(b) Check humidity indicators on vapor-proof barrier material (one indicator is located inside
vapor-proof barrier material and must be checked after vapor-proof barrier material is
opened). If either indicates excessive humidity, engine must be immediately removed and
inspected for corrosion. If engine was received from a Honeywell facility, notify the shipping
facility of the discrepancy.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: ONCE THE VAPOR-PROOF BARRIER MATERIAL HAS BEEN OPENED THE
ENGINE MUST NOT BE STORED IN THE CARDBOARD SHIPPING
CONTAINER UNLESS INSTALLATION OF ENGINE INTO CARDBOARD
SHIPPING CONTAINER IS STRICTLY FOLLOWED.
(c) Open vapor-proof barrier material and remove greaseproof barrier material to provide
access to the propeller shaft.
NOTE: Once the vapor-proof barrier material has been opened, engine must be
installed, depreserved, and operated within 60 days.
NOTE: Use care when removing vapor-proof barrier material and greaseproof barrier
material as these materials may be reused if undamaged. The vapor-proof
barrier material contains sufficient material to allow for resealing.
(d) Install PN 284357-1-1, TPE hoist adapter assembly on propeller shaft flange and secure.
Attach an overhead hoist of suitable capacity to adapter, and lift engine from bottom flexible
foam form.
(e) Rotate engine to inlet up position. Install PN 284688-1-1, propshaft anti-rotation plate
assembly with slot in PN 284357-1-1, TPE hoist adapter assembly and secure plate to
engine intake.
(f) Complete removal of vapor-proof barrier material from around engine.
(g) Install two PN 284557-1-1, small block (set of 2) gearcase stand maintenance adapter on
engine side mounts and install engine onto PN 284493-1-1, engine maintenance stand or
install engine on PN 831118-2, engine transportation cart.
(h) Position engine, as required, to facilitate maintenance, then support aft end of engine with
PN 289247-1, adapter assembly attached to plenum assembly.
(i) Remove PN 284357-1-1, TPE hoist adapter assembly and PN 284688-1-1, propshaft
anti-rotation plate assembly.
(j) For depreservation procedure, refer to STORAGE (PGBLK 72-00-00-12000).
C. Removal of Engine From Maintenance Stand (Subtask 72-00-00-020-005-A01)
(1) Install PN 284688-1-1, propshaft anti-rotation plate assembly on air inlet of input housing.
(2) Install PN 284357-1-1, TPE hoist adapter assembly on propeller shaft flange and secure. Attach
a hoist of suitable capacity (approximately 600 pounds (272 kg)) to adapter and remove engine
from PN 284493-1-1, engine maintenance stand.
(3) Remove PN 289247-1, adapter assembly from aft end of engine.
(4) Remove PN 284557-1-1, small block (set of 2) gearcase stand maintenance adapter or PN
284203-1-1, maintenance stand adapter from engine side mounts.
D. Component Disassembly (Subtask 72-00-00-020-006-A01)
(1) Whenever removing and disassembling engine components, always note the number and
thickness of washers used for shimming and note manner and placement of any lockwire as an
aid to re-assembly.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install engine.
Metric Model HS-B sealer CAGE: 3V104

stand (2 required))
PN 284357-1-1 TPE hoist adapter assembly (used CAGE: 06848

to mount on propeller shaft to
provide a hoisting mount for lifting
operation)

and maintenance)
PN 284557-1-1 small block (set of 2) gearcase CAGE: 06848

stand maintenance adapter (used
to mount engine on maintenance
stand)
PN 284688-1-1 propshaft anti-rotation plate CAGE: 06848

assembly (used to prevent entire
engine from rotating when lifting
engine with PN 284357-1-1 hoisting
adapter)
PN 289247-1 adapter assembly (used to support CAGE: 06848

aft end of engine when installed in
stand using PN 284557-1-1
adapter)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY INSTALLATION
ALL Page 4001
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)


APPLICABLE.
desiccant (MIL-D-3464, Type I) commercially available

(MIL-PRF-121)

PN MX-56789 humidity indicator card CAGE: 08992
PN TA356-40 humidity indicator plug (SAE CAGE: 08992

AS26860)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-00-420-802-A01)
B. Installation of Engine Into Shipping Container (Subtask 72-00-00-420-004-A01)
NOTE: Make sure that engine has been preserved and engine preparation for shipment has been
accomplished. Refer to STORAGE (PGBLK 72-00-00-12000).
(1) Install engine into cardboard shipping container as follows:
(a) Install bottom flexible foam form in bottom of shipping container.
(b) Position vapor-proof barrier material in bottom of foam form with opening upward to receive
engine.
NOTE: If previously used vapor-proof barrier material is being reused, it should be
inspected for leaks, punctures, or tears. If damaged, discard, and use new
vapor-proof barrier material.
(c) Drape a 10-foot (3 m) by 3-foot (1 m) sheet of greaseproof barrier material (lengthwise)

across the vapor-proof barrier material opening and open cardboard container. Drape a
6-foot (2 m) by 3-foot (1 m) sheet of greaseproof barrier material crosswise over the 10-foot
(3 m) sheet.
(d) Attach PN 284357-1-1, TPE hoist adapter assembly to engine output shaft. Connect a
hoist of suitable capacity to adapter. Lift engine with hoist.
NOTE: Engine weight is approximately 400 pounds (181 kg).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(e) Position engine over greaseproof barrier material. Rotate engine to inlet down and lower
approximately one-half way into cardboard container.
NOTE: Engine is installed in container with air inlet down.
(f) Pull both sheets of greaseproof barrier material up and around engine and tape into place.
The 10-foot (3 m) length sheet must be split at the one end to fit around propeller shaft.
The engine, with the exception of the propeller shaft, should be completely shrouded with
greaseproof barrier material to prevent any bare metal contact with vapor-proof barrier
material.
(g) Pull vapor-proof barrier material snugly up against engine and lower engine, properly
positioned, into foam form.
(h) Remove PN 284357-1-1, TPE hoist adapter assembly from engine output shaft.
(i) Position and tape a smaller piece of greaseproof barrier material to cover the propeller
shaft.
(j) Place four 1-pound (0.45 kg) bags of fresh desiccant around engine between greaseproof
barrier material and vapor-proof barrier material.
(k) Cut a 1-inch (25.4 mm) diameter hole in vapor-proof barrier material (to be visible from top
of engine) and install a PN TA356-40, humidity indicator plug with glass window facing
outward. (If vapor-proof barrier material is being reused, use existing 1-inch (25.4 mm)
hole to install plug.)
(l) Tape a PN MX-56789, humidity indicator card to greaseproof barrier material on top of
engine.
NOTE: Remove humidity indicator card from its plastic container prior to use.

(m) Close and seal vapor-proof barrier material using Metric Model HS-B, sealer.
NOTE: Sealer must be set at 250°F (121°C) or at temperature recommended by
vapor-proof barrier material manufacturer.
(n) Cut off an approximately 2-inch (51 mm) corner of sealed vapor-proof barrier material and
insert vacuum hose. Evacuate air from vapor-proof barrier material until it is pulled tightly
against engine.
(o) While holding vapor-proof barrier material opening closed to prevent inflow of air, remove
vacuum hose and seal opening.
(p) Place beta tube in its protective case and position it and other loose components with
engine log book in cavities provided in foam form.
CAUTION: CARDBOARD SHIPPING CONTAINERS SHOULD BE STORED IN A DRY
AREA. CONTAINERS AND FOAM FORMS WHICH HAVE BEEN STORED
OUTDOORS OR IN A DAMP AREA MUST NOT BE REUSED.
(q) Position top of foam form over engine, close cardboard container, tape flaps in closed
position, and install shipping bands.
NOTE: This step may be omitted for engines destined for extended storage in cardboard
containers. This will facilitate easy access for compliance of periodic humidity
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
indicator inspection. For stored engine inspection requirements, refer to

STORAGE (PGBLK 72-00-00-12000). Inspection requirements are applicable
to factory-packaged as well as repackaged engines.
C. Installation of Engine In Maintenance Stand (Subtask 72-00-00-420-005-A01)
CAUTION: TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY ENGINE

MOUNT PADS, DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN ENGINE MOUNT BOLTS OR USE BOLTS
OF EXCESSIVE LENGTH WHICH MAY BOTTOM IN BLIND HOLES.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT ALIGNMENT PINS ON ADAPTERS ARE INSTALLED ON PN

284493-1-1, ENGINE MAINTENANCE STAND ADAPTER BEFORE INSTALLING
ADAPTERS ON ENGINE.
(1) Install engine in PN 284493-1-1, engine maintenance stand using PN 284557-1-1, small block
(set of 2) gearcase stand maintenance adapter or PN 284203-1-1, maintenance stand adapter
to adapt engine to stand. Remove PN 284357-1-1, TPE hoist adapter assembly and PN
284688-1-1, propshaft anti-rotation plate assembly if used.
(2) Position engine, as required, to facilitate work to be performed, then support aft end of engine
with PN 289247-1, adapter assembly attached to aft end of engine.
D. Preparation of Engine Prior to Installation on Aircraft (Subtask 72-00-00-420-006-A01)
(1) Perform pre-installation inspection as follows:

NOTE: Pre-installation inspection is of a general nature and is performed primarily to
determine that engine received from the factory or from overhaul has suffered no
shipping or handling damage.
(a) Check engines for any sign of mishandling or obvious physical damage. Check that lines
are secure and free of dents.
(b) Check to determine that all components, instruments and controls are included.
CAUTION: PACKINGS AND GASKETS PROVIDED UNDER SHIPPING PLATES AND COVERS
ARE USED FOR SHIPPING AND STORAGE PURPOSES ONLY. THESE PACKINGS
AND GASKETS ARE NOT APPROVED FOR USE DURING ON-WING OR OFF-WING
ENGINE OPERATION.
(2) Perform the following procedures prior to installation:

(a) Remove shipping caps.
(b) Remove shipping cover plates and pads.
(c) Check for tag to determine if engine has been preserved. If engine has been preserved,
proper depreservation procedures must be performed after engine installation. Refer to
STORAGE (PGBLK 72-00-00-12000).
(d) Make log book entries if applicable.
E. Preparation of Engine for Shipment (Subtask 72-00-00-550-015-A01)
NOTE: Refer to abbreviated IPC and engine IPC for parts that remain with airframe and engine.
(1) General maintenance procedures to be performed prior to returning engine to Honeywell or
Honeywell-authorized service facility are listed below.
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Oil tank and gearcase − drain oil tank and gearcase fluid
(b) Scavenge oil outlet port − disconnect aircraft plumbing from scavenge oil outlet port. Do
not remove fitting. Cover fitting with plastic cap.
(c) Fuel inlet port − disconnect aircraft plumbing from fuel inlet port. Remove adapter fitting.
Plug port with plastic plug.
(d) Oil pressure gage connection − disconnect aircraft plumbing from oil pressure gage
connection. Do not remove fitting. Cover fitting with plastic cap.
(e) Oil temperature bulb − disconnect aircraft lead from oil temperature bulb. Do not remove
bulb. Protect threads with plastic cap.
(f) Oil cooler return port − disconnect aircraft plumbing from oil cooler return port. Do not
remove fitting. Cover fitting with plastic cap.
(g) (Engine with engine-mounted oil tank) Overboard vent − disconnect aircraft plumbing from
overboard vent port. Do not remove fitting. Cover fitting with plastic cap.
(h) (Engine with engine-mounted oil tank) Unfeathering pump supply connection − disconnect
aircraft plumbing from unfeathering pump supply connection. Do not remove fitting. Cover
fitting with plastic cap.
(i) Compressor and turbine drains − disconnect aircraft plumbing from compressor and turbine
drains. Drain residual fluids. Cover fittings with plastic caps.
(j) Oil vent valve − disconnect aircraft lead from oil vent valve. Protect connector with plastic
cap.
(k) Inlet temperature sensor − disconnect aircraft lead from inlet temperature sensor. Do not
remove sensor. Protect threads with plastic cap.
(l) (Airframe-mounted fuel manifold purge system) Flow divider − disconnect aircraft plumbing
at flow divider. Remove fitting. Plug port with plastic plug.
(m) Starter-generator – remove starter-generator and QAD.
(n) Hydraulic pump − if applicable, remove hydraulic pump.
(o) Feathering valve − disconnect aircraft linkage and associated brackets and mechanism
from MFV. Do not remove MFV or clevis eye from engine.
(p) PPC/power lever input − disconnect aircraft cables and associated linkage from PPC/power
lever input. Do not remove arm or rod to fuel control.
(q) Tachometer-generator − remove tachometer-generator.
(r) Aircraft fuel flow transmitter − remove aircraft fuel flow transmitter and install dummy flow
section.
(s) Manual fuel shutoff valve − disconnect aircraft linkage from manual fuel shutoff valve. Do
not remove lever.
(t) Anti-ice valve − disconnect aircraft lead from anti-ice valve. Cover connector with plastic
cap.
(u) Customer optional anti-ice connection − if applicable, disconnect aircraft plumbing and
cover port with metal cap.
(v) Temperature compensator − disconnect aircraft lead from temperature compensator. Cover
connector with plastic cap.
UP495246
ALL Page 4005
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(w) Beta/NTS switches − disconnect aircraft leads from beta/NTS switches. Cover with plastic
caps.
(x) Unfeathering pump connection − disconnect aircraft plumbing from unfeathering pump
connection (beta block). Do not remove fitting. Cover fitting with plastic cap.
(y) Ignition unit − disconnect aircraft lead from ignition unit. Cover connector with plastic cap.
(z) PG − disconnect aircraft lead from PG.
(aa) Compressor discharge bleed ports − disconnect aircraft plumbing from compressor
discharge bleed ports (typical two places). Make sure that compressor discharge bleed
ports restrictor is installed and cover connections.
(ab) Solenoid valves − remove aircraft harness from various other solenoid valves. Cover
connectors with plastic caps.
(ac) Inlet, tailpipe, propeller shaft − after removal of aircraft equipment from respective areas
and removal of engine from airframe, cover inlet, tailpipe, and propeller shaft to prevent
possible damage and contamination.
(2) Inspect Engine to Verify the Following Prior to Installing Engine into Shipping Container:
(a) All engine-mounted hardware is properly secured to engine.
(b) All aircraft-associated hardware is removed from engine. Refer to abbreviated IPC and
AMM.
(c) All open ports are properly covered or plugged.
(d) All engine-related loose items are properly packaged and secure in engine container.
(e) If engine is damaged or partially disassembled, annotate condition and attach to engine.
(f) Make log book entries and make sure that engine records are shipped with engine.
(g) Pack beta tube in its specified container and ship with engine.
(h) Install engine into shipping container. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-00-00-4000).
F. Job Close-up (Subtask 72-00-00-420-007-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4006
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the engine.
oven (ventilated, capable of 950°F commercially available

(510°C))


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
MEK (methyl-ethyl-ketone ASTM commercially available

D740)
calcium sulfate commercially available
chromic acid (A-A-55827) commercially available
de-ionized water commercially available
distilled water commercially available

UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
glass beads (Screen No. 100-230, CAGE: 04UX7

130 grit, Class IV, Size AF or AG)
nitric acid (A-A-59105) commercially available
sodium dichromate (A-A-59123) commercially available
stiff-plastic fiber-bristled brush commercially available
120 grit aluminum oxide CAGE: 3U875
120 grit sand (MIL-A-22262) commercially available
240 grit sandpaper commercially available
CRC 3-36 corrosion-preventive compound CAGE: 023V4

(MIL-PRF-81309, Type III)
Daraclean 282 aqueous cleaning solution CAGE: 9Y340
Dow 1 magnesium touch-up solution CAGE: 5D028

(Touch-up solution (Dow 1) may be
mixed from commercially available
chemicals (sodium dichromate and
nitric acid))
Dow 19 magnesium touch-up solution Honeywell International Inc.,

(Touch-up solution (Dow 19) may Materials Lab, 1944 E. Sky Harbor
be mixed from commercially Circle, Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440
available chemicals (chromic acid
(flake) and calcium sulfate))
Formula 815GD emulsion degreasing solvent CAGE: 94058
Iridite No. 14-2 powder (MIL-DTL-81706) CAGE: 1FK56
MIL-I-25135 penetrant oil commercially available
MIL-PRF-6085 lubricating oil commercially available
Oakite 34 de-oxidizer CAGE: 44389
Ridoline 909 alkaline cleaner CAGE: 1N6B3
Supertech ST-A corrosion-preventive compound Roly International, P.O. Box 5103,

(MIL-PRF-16173, Type III, alternate Ventura, CA 93003
for CRC 3-36)
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TT-C-490 alkaline cleaning solution commercially available
2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-00-100-802-A01)
B. General Cleaning Instructions (Subtask 72-00-00-100-004-A01)
WARNING: CLEANING MUST BE PERFORMED IN A CLEAN, WELL-VENTILATED AREA. RUBBER

GLOVES AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING MUST BE WORN. EXTINGUISHERS AND VAT
OR TANK COVERS MUST BE ON HAND IN CASE OF FIRE.
(1) Cleaning procedures for individual parts must be consistent with good shop practices and the
following procedures. Correct and thorough cleaning for all parts is important to the successful
inspection, repair, and satisfactory operation after repair.
WARNING: ACETONE (ASTM D329) CONTAINER MUST BE KEPT CLOSED AND AWAY FROM
HEAT, SPARKS, AND OPEN FLAME. USE WITH ADEQUATE VENTILATION. AVOID
PROLONGED BREATHING OF VAPORS. AVOID PROLONGED OR REPEATED
CONTACT WITH SKIN.
(2) All metallic parts must be cleaned to remove oil, grease, rust stains and soiled areas. Flange
areas, register diameters, and sealing surfaces must be cleaned of oil, gaskets and sealing
compounds, if present. Remove adherent gasket or sealing compound residues using acetone
cleaner and a soft-plastic fiber-bristled brush or stiff-plastic fiber-bristled brush. Clean bolt hole
threads using a proper size bottom tap to remove compound accumulation.
(3) Clean painted parts but do not remove old paint if paint is still serviceable.
(4) Corrosion products wherever they appear must be removed and the base metal treated to prevent
further corrosion before reassembly.
(5) Steel and 400 series stainless steel parts require the application of CRC 3-36,
corrosion-preventive compound after cleaning to prevent rust and corrosion.
CAUTION: AN ASSEMBLY MUST NOT BE CLEANED IN A SOLUTION THAT IS DETRIMENTAL
TO ONE OF THE PARTS IN THE ASSEMBLY.
(6) Clean dissimilar materials as follows:

(a) Analyze assemblies that combine dissimilar materials carefully and determine types of
materials.
(b) Clean assemblies containing brass, bronze, steel, and cadmium using methods applicable
to the base metal involved. Assemblies containing these materials are not affected by
chromic acid or hydrofluoric acid.
(c) Clean assemblies containing synthetic materials using methods that are nondestructive to
the material.
(7) Place parts in clean plastic bags or equivalent containers after cleaning, for protection from
contaminants. Ports and orifices must be capped, plugged, or sealed.
UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
C. Preparation of Alkaline Cleaner (Ridoline 909) Solution (Subtask 72-00-00-100-005-A01)
WARNING: THE FOLLOWING SOLUTIONS ARE HAZARDOUS. AVOID INHALATION OF

FUMES, DUST, OR MIST. AVOID CONTACT WITH SKIN. AFTER PREPARATION,
WASH HANDS AND FACE THOROUGHLY.
(1) Dissolve 4 to 6 ounces (113 to 170 g) of Ridoline 909, alkaline cleaner in 1 gallon (3.8 L) of
distilled water or de-ionized water.
NOTE: Use either distilled water or de-ionized water for preparation of solutions.
WARNING: USE APPROPRIATE CLOTHING AND PROTECTIVE GEAR TO PREVENT INJURY

TO BODY AND HANDS FROM CONTACT WITH HOT PARTS.
(2) Maintain solution at applicable temperature below in an air-agitated tank.

(a) For ferrous metals use 150 to 200°F (65 to 93°C).
(b) For non-ferrous metals use 130 to 170°F (54 to 76°C).
D. Preparation of Aluminum Touch-Up Solution (Subtask 72-00-00-100-006-A01)

WARNING: TOUCH-UP SOLUTION IS AN ACID. USE CAUTION TO PREVENT CONTACT WITH

SKIN. IF POWDER OR MIXED SOLUTION COMES IN CONTACT WITH SKIN, FLUSH
OFF IMMEDIATELY WITH WATER. INHALATION OF DUST FROM THE POWDERS
OR VAPORS FROM THE SOLUTION MUST BE AVOIDED. SWABS, ETC,
SATURATED WITH SOLUTION, CONSTITUTE FIRE HAZARDS IF ALLOWED TO
DRY. IMMEDIATELY AFTER USE, RINSE THOROUGHLY IN TAP WATER.
(1) Dissolve 1 ounce (28 g) of Iridite No. 14-2, powder for 1 quart (0.9 L) of distilled water or
de-ionized water.
NOTE: Prepare aluminum touch-up in small batches. Use only freshly prepared solutions.
WARNING: NITRIC ACID AND SODIUM DICHROMATE ARE TOXIC AND CORROSIVE
MATERIALS WHICH CAN CAUSE SEVERE BURNS AND POSSIBLE LUNG
DAMAGE. AVOID BREATHING FUMES OR CONTACT WITH SKIN. WHEN
HANDLING, USE ACID-RESISTANT GLOVES, APRON, AND FACE SHIELD IN A
WELL-VENTILATED AREA. WHEN MIXING SOLUTIONS, DO NOT ADD WATER
OR SOLUTION TO NITRIC ACID; ALWAYS ADD NITRIC ACID TO WATER OR
SOLUTION.
(2) Maintain pH of 0.9 to 1.1 using nitric acidnitric acid.

(3) Maintain solution at 70 to 80°F (21 to 27°C).
(4) Allow solution to stand at least 2 hours before use.
UP495246
ALL Page 6004
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
E. Preparation of Chromic Nitric Pickle Solution (Subtask 72-00-00-100-007-A01)

SOLUTION.
(1) Add 12.0 to 13.5 ounces (340 to 382 g) of chromic acid and 1.0 to 1.4 pints (0.47 to 0.66 L) of
nitric acid with enough distilled water or de-ionized water to make 1 gallon (3.8 L) of solution.
F. Preparation of Aluminum De-oxidizer Solution (Subtask 72-00-00-100-008-A01)

(1) Dissolve 8 to 16 ounces (226 to 454 g) of Oakite 34, de-oxidizer in 1 gallon (3.8 L) of distilled
water or de-ionized water.
(2) Maintain solution at 65 to 95°F (18 to 35°C) in an air-agitated tank.
G. Preparation of Rust-Stripper Solution (Subtask 72-00-00-100-009-A01)

WARNING: EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN PREPARING RUST STRIPPER SOLUTION.

USE OF A RESPIRATOR IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED. MIXING MAY PRODUCE
TEMPERATURES EXCEEDING THE BOILING POINT OF THE SOLUTION.
(1) Dissolve 2 to 4 pounds (0.91 to 1.81 kg) of TT-C-490, alkaline cleaning solution in 1 gallon (3.8
L) of distilled water or de-ionized water.

(2) Maintain solution at 160 to 200°F (71 to 93°C) in an air-agitated tank.

UP495246
ALL Page 6005
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
H. Preparation of Magnesium Touch-Up Solution (Dow 1) (Subtask 72-00-00-100-010-A01)

SOLUTION.
CAUTION: DOW 1, MAGNESIUM TOUCH-UP SOLUTION MUST NOT BE ALLOWED TO

CONTACT ANODIC TREATED SURFACES. A RAPID DETERIORATION OF THE
COATING WILL OCCUR.
(1) Mix 1.5 pounds (0.68 kg) of sodium dichromate and 1.5 pints (0.71 L) of nitric acid with enough
distilled water or de-ionized water to make a gallon (3.8 L) of solution.
NOTE: Use either distilled water or de-ionized water for preparation of the following solutions.
(2) Allow solution to stand for 1 to 2 minutes.
I. Preparation of Magnesium Touch-Up Solution (Dow 19) (Subtask 72-00-00-100-011-A01)

(1) Mix 1.3 ounces (36.85 g) of chromic acid and 1 ounce (28.35 g) of calcium sulfate with enough
water to make 1 gallon (3.8 L) of solution.
(2) Stir vigorously for at least 15 minutes to make sure the solution is saturated with calcium sulfate.
J. Cleaning Method 1 (Subtask 72-00-00-100-012-A01)
CAUTION: THE SPECIFIC CLEANING METHODS OUTLINED MUST BE FOLLOWED. THE VARIOUS
SOLUTIONS AND MATERIALS SPECIFIED IN THE CLEANING METHODS CAN BE USED
ONLY ON THE PARTS AND MATERIALS INDICATED. FAILURE TO USE THE PROPER
CLEANING METHOD MAY RESULT IN IRREPARABLE DAMAGE TO THE PART BEING
CLEANED.
WARNING: SPRAY VAPORS ARE TOXIC AND MUST NOT BE INHALED. OBSERVE ALL FIRE
PRECAUTIONS.
(1) Degrease parts using petroleum solvent as follows:

UP495246
ALL Page 6006
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

FIRE HAZARD.
(a) Place MIL-PRF-680, solvent in dip tank or use a spray in a positive outside-ventilated spray
booth.
(b) Dip, soak, agitate, or spray parts to be cleaned until oil and grease have been removed.
CAUTION: DO NOT SCRAPE, SCRUB, OR USE A BRUSH WHEN CLEANING CARBON
SEALS; CRACKS, GROOVES, AND CHIPPING WILL OCCUR CAUSING THE
CARBON SEAL TO BE UNSERVICEABLE.
(c) Remove caked grease or soft carbon deposits using a stiff-plastic fiber-bristled brush.
K. Cleaning Method 2 (Subtask 72-00-00-100-013-A01)
CLEANED.
NOTE: Paragraph 2.J. Cleaning Method 1 (Subtask 72-00-00-100-012-A01) may be accomplished
prior to performing this procedure.
(1) Use immersion cleaning procedure to remove grease from parts as follows:
WARNING: DARACLEAN 282, AQUEOUS CLEANING SOLUTION OR FORMULA 815GD,
EMULSION DEGREASING SOLVENT AT 100 PERCENT CONCENTRATION
IS AN EYE IRRITANT; WEAR EYE PROTECTION WHEN MIXING CLEANING
SOLUTION.
(a) Mix Daraclean 282, aqueous cleaning solution or Formula 815GD, emulsion degreasing
solvent with tap water in a dip tank to a concentration of 8 to 12 percent.
(b) Maintain temperature of cleaning solution at 140 to 160°F (60 to 71°C).

CAUTION: DO NOT IMMERSE PARTS IN SOLUTION FOR MORE THAN 30 MINUTES,
THIS INCLUDES RE-CLEANING.
(c) Dip, soak, or agitate parts to be cleaned. Agitation is recommended process for best results.
Propeller mixing or solution spraying under the solution level are preferred methods of
agitation. Do not immerse parts in solution for more than 30 minutes, this includes
recleaning.
NOTE: If a parts washer is used in this step, use of Formula 815GD, emulsion
degreasing solvent is not recommended. Excess foaming action will occur.
(d) Rinse parts using hot tap water. If required, perform a soap and water scrub using a
stiff-plastic fiber-bristled brush to remove any excess grease or oil residue, then rinse parts
using hot tap water.
UP495246
ALL Page 6007
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(e) Dry the parts with low pressure compressed air (20 PSIG (137.9 kPa)). Make sure that no
entrapment of solution is present after drying.
L. Cleaning Method 3 (Subtask 72-00-00-100-014-A01)
CLEANED.
CAUTION: DO NOT CLEAN MAGNESIUM COMPONENTS USING GLASS BEAD PEENING.
(1) Clean parts using glass bead peening as follows:
NOTE: Do not glass bead peen curvic couplings until FPI or MPI has been performed.
Maximum pressure of 20 PSIG (138 kPa) must be used on titanium couplings.
Maximum pressure of 40 PSIG (276 kPa) must be used on all other coupling materials.
Do not use glass bead cleaning for removing paint and/or corrosion from magnesium
parts. Use abrasive blast method on magnesium components.
(a) Clean hard carbon, paint, corrosion, and scale from parts by peening with glass beads.
FIRE HAZARD.
(b) Clean parts with MIL-PRF-680, solvent to remove oil and grease contamination.
(c) Mask any surfaces that could be damaged by peening.
NOTE: Glass bead peening equipment must be cleaned and recharged with new beads
after each 24-hr period of operation.
CAUTION: REGULATE AIR PRESSURE TO KEEP EROSION OF BASE METAL TO A

MINIMUM. KEEP NOZZLE IN MOTION TO PREVENT BLAST FROM DWELLING
ON ONE SPOT.
(d) Peen corroded areas with glass beads until corrosion products are removed.
(e) Rinse surface free of glass beads. Dry part in oven at 205 to 235°F (96 to 112°C) for 1 hr.
UP495246
ALL Page 6008
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
M. Cleaning Method 4 (Subtask 72-00-00-100-015-A01)
CLEANED.
(1) Clean parts using abrasive blasting method as follows:
NOTE: Do not abrasive blast part until FPI or MPI has been performed.
(a) Clean hard carbon, lead deposits, corrosion and scale from parts by abrasive blasting
using a standard sandblast cabinet and 120 grit, sand or 120 grit, aluminum oxide.
FIRE HAZARD.
(b) Clean parts with MIL-PRF-680, solvent to remove oil and grease contamination.
(c) Mask any surfaces that could be damaged by abrasive blasting.
CAUTION: REGULATE AIR PRESSURE TO KEEP EROSION OF BASE METAL TO A
MINIMUM. KEEP NOZZLE IN MOTION TO PREVENT BLAST FROM DWELLING
ON ONE SPOT.
(d) Set blasting equipment air pressure at 15 to 30 PSIG (103.4 to 206.8 kPa), then subject
parts to abrasive blasting. Reduce air pressure, as required, to control action on base
metal.
N. Cleaning Method 5 (Subtask 72-00-00-100-016-A01)
CLEANED.
(1) Clean non-corroded aluminum parts as follows:
FIRE HAZARD.
(a) Clean surfaces with MIL-PRF-680, solvent to remove oil and grease contamination.
(b) Immerse parts in Ridoline 909, alkaline cleaner solution for 2 to 10 minutes minimum.
Scrub surface with a soft-plastic fiber-bristled brush to remove surface contamination. If
old gaskets or sealing compound are present, carefully lift softened gaskets with a knife
blade and scrape surface clean.
UP495246
ALL Page 6009
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(c) Rinse parts with water at 80 to 110°F (27 to 43°C). Use low pressure air (20 PSIG (137.9
kPa) maximum) to dry part.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW PARTS TO REMAIN IN CONTACT WITH DE-OXIDIZING
SOLUTION LONGER THAN 3 MINUTES OR CHEMICAL ETCHING WILL
OCCUR.
(d) Treat bare areas with de-oxidizing solution for 1 to 3 minutes.

(e) Rinse parts with water at 80 to 110°F (27 to 43°C). Use low pressure air (20 PSIG (137.9
(f) Coat treated areas with aluminum touch-up solution. Allow area to remain wet for 15 to 30
seconds.
NOTE: Maintain the pH of the aluminum touch-up solution at 0.9 to 1.0 by adding
chromic acid or nitric acid to the solution.


(g) Rinse parts with water at 80 to 110°F (27 to 43°C). Blow off excess water with low pressure
air (20 PSIG (137.9 kPa) maximum), then dry in oven at a temperature not to exceed 160°F
(71°C).
(h) Store parts in dry place away from corrosive fumes.
O. Cleaning Method 6 (Subtask 72-00-00-100-017-A01)
CLEANED.
CAUTION: CORROSION MAY BE CAUSE FOR REJECTION OR REPAIR OF A PART. WHENEVER
CORROSION APPEARS TO BE BEYOND SURFACE FINISH, REFER TO APPLICABLE
INSPECTION/CHECK AND/OR REPAIR.
(1) Clean corroded aluminum parts as follows:
UP495246
ALL Page 6010
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

FIRE HAZARD.
(b) Immerse parts in Ridoline 909, alkaline cleaner solution for 2 to 10 minutes minimum.
Scrub surface with a stiff-plastic fiber-bristled brush to remove surface contamination. If
old gaskets or sealing compound are present, carefully lift softened gaskets with a knife
blade and scrape surface clean.
(c) Rinse parts with water at 80 to 110°F (27 to 43°C). Use low pressure air (20 PSIG (137.9
(d) Treat corroded areas with chromic-nitric pickle solution until corrosion is removed.
NOTE: If parts are hard anodized and chromic-nitric pickle solution is used to remove
heavy corrosion, softening of the finish will result.
(e) Rinse parts with water at 80 to 110°F (27 to 43°C). Use low pressure air (20 PSIG (137.9
(f) Coat bare areas with aluminum touch-up solution. Allow area to remain wet for 15 to 30
seconds.
(g) Rinse parts with water at 80 to 110°F (27 to 43°C). Blow off excess water with low pressure
air (20 PSIG (137.9 kPa) maximum), then dry in oven at a temperature not to exceed 160°F
(71°C).
(h) Store parts in dry place away from corrosive fumes.
P. Cleaning Method 7 (Subtask 72-00-00-100-018-A01)
CLEANED.
(1) Clean non-corroded magnesium parts as follows:
FIRE HAZARD.
(b) Immerse parts in Ridoline 909, alkaline cleaner solution and brush surfaces with a
soft-plastic fiber-bristled brush to remove contaminants. Allow parts to soak for 2 to 10
minutes if flange surfaces have gaskets or sealing compounds stuck to flanges. When
softened, carefully lift gaskets with knife blade and scrape surface until clean.
(c) Rinse parts in warm tap water at 80 to 110°F (27 to 43°C).
UP495246
ALL Page 6011
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(d) Brush Dow 19, magnesium touch-up solution onto any bare metal areas. Keep surfaces
wet for 1 to 2 minutes, then rinse with clean tap water.
(e) Dry parts in oven at 175 to 225°F (79 to 107°C) for 1 hr.
Q. Cleaning Method 8 (Subtask 72-00-00-100-019-A01)
CLEANED.
CAUTION: CORROSION MAY BE CAUSE FOR REJECTION OR REPAIR OF A PART. WHENEVER
CORROSION APPEARS TO BE BEYOND SURFACE FINISH, REFER TO APPLICABLE
INSPECTION/CHECK AND/OR REPAIR.
(1) Clean corroded magnesium parts as follows:
FIRE HAZARD.
(b) Immerse parts in Ridoline 909, alkaline cleaner solution for 10 to 15 minutes. Scrub surfaces
with a stiff-plastic fiber-bristled brush to remove any loose contaminants. If old gaskets or
sealing compounds are stuck to flange areas, carefully lift the softened materials with a
steel blade and scrape surface until clean.
(c) Rinse parts in warm tap water at 80 to 110°F (27 to 43°C).
(d) Air-dry to remove excess water from part, then place in oven at 175 to 225°F (79 to 107°C)
for 1 hr to complete drying.
NOTE: All traces of moisture must be removed within 2 hours to prevent corrosion.
(e) Using good shop practices, remove any obviously loose paint to expose the base
magnesium material.
CAUTION: USE EXTREME CARE NOT TO GOUGE SURFACE OF NON-CORRODED
BASE METAL WHEN PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING STEPS.
(f) Remove all corrosion as follows:

1 Hand scrape to remove corrosion, using good shop practices.
2 Perform final clean-up of corroded areas using a clean stainless steel brush.
3 Check depth of removed material at all areas of corrosion removal. If depth exceeds
0.010 inch (0.25 mm) at any location, inspect housing(s) for serviceability. Refer to
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-09-8000), INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
UP495246
ALL Page 6012
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
72-10-13-8000), INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-20-8000), as applicable.

Inspect only the limits and dimensions applicable for the areas in which depth of
corrosion damage is 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) or more.
4 Feather edges of paint by lightly sanding, using 240 grit, sandpaper.
FIRE HAZARD.
WARNING: ACETONE (ASTM D329) CONTAINER MUST BE KEPT CLOSED AND AWAY
FROM HEAT, SPARKS, AND OPEN FLAME. USE WITH ADEQUATE
VENTILATION. AVOID PROLONGED BREATHING OF VAPORS. AVOID
PROLONGED OR REPEATED CONTACT WITH SKIN.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE MAGNESIUM CLEANING SOLUTIONS ON COMPONENTS

CONTAINING ALUMINUM PARTS.
(g) Clean area by wiping with a lint-free cloth saturated with MIL-PRF-680, solvent, MEK, or
acetone cleaner.
(h) Inspect surface for presence of oil using a black light. A bright, bluish-white colored
fluorescence usually indicates oil or grease contamination. If presence of oil is indicated,
repeat the previous step.
(i) Apply Dow 1, magnesium touch-up solution to corroded areas as follows:
1 Using cotton swab, work solution into corroded area until all visible reaction/gassing
stops.
2 Wipe clean, using clean, lint-free cloth.
(j) Apply Dow 19, magnesium touch-up solution to treated areas as follows:
1 Using a clean cotton swab, apply solution to corroded areas.
2 Allow solution to stand on surface for 5 minutes minimum, then thoroughly wipe dry
in preparation for primer coat, using a clean, lint-free cloth. Use heat gun if necessary
to make sure that all moisture has been removed from the treated area prior to
applying the primer coat.
R. Cleaning Method 9 (Subtask 72-00-00-100-020-A01)
CLEANED.
(1) Clean plain steel and stainless steel parts as follows:
UP495246
ALL Page 6013
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

FIRE HAZARD.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove heat discoloration.
CAUTION: EXTREME DAMAGE CAN OCCUR TO NON-STEEL PARTS IF CLEANED WITH

RUST STRIPPER SOLUTION. IN ADDITION, STEEL PARTS WHICH HAVE
BEEN REPAIRED FOR DIMENSIONAL RESTORATION USING SOME METAL
SPRAY PROCESSES CAN INCUR DAMAGE TO THE METAL SPRAY IF
SUBSEQUENTLY CLEANED IN RUST STRIPPER SOLUTION. MAKE SURE
THAT CRITICAL DIMENSIONAL AND VISUAL INSPECTIONS ARE COMPLETED
AFTER IMMERSION IN RUST STRIPPER. STEEL PARTS WHICH ARE KNOWN
TO HAVE HAD METAL SPRAY REPAIR MAY BE CLEANED USING
MIL-PRF-680, SOLVENT.
(b) Immerse in TT-C-490, alkaline cleaning solution for 10 to 20 minutes. The solution must
remove rust, loosen scale, dissolve varnish deposits, and soften organic compounds.
CAUTION: DO NOT DAMAGE HIGHLY FINISHED SURFACES. USE ONLY STIFF-PLASTIC
FIBER-BRISTLED BRUSH ON SUCH AREAS.
(c) After soak in solution, remove parts, rinse, and scrub surfaces with stiff-plastic fiber-bristled
brush or glass bead peen to remove carbon and scale.
NOTE: Do not glass bead peen parts until FPI or MPI has been performed.

(d) Rinse thoroughly in clean tap water at 80 to 110°F (27 to 43°C). Dry parts by blowing with
clean compressed air until free of moisture.
(e) Preserve steel parts after cleaning. Low alloy steel parts that will be subjected to MPI within
8 hours may be left dry until inspected. Place in clean container.
(f) Low alloy steel parts that will be subjected to MPI but will be held longer than 8 hours prior
to inspection must be coated with MIL-I-25135, penetrant oil. Place in clean container.
(g) Low alloy steel parts not subject to inspection and those that have completed inspection
must be placed in a solution of CRC 3-36, corrosion-preventive compound or Supertech
ST-A, corrosion-preventive compound for 3 to 5 minutes. Place in clean container and
store away from moisture and corrosive fumes.
(h) Stainless steel and heat-resistant alloy parts, must be kept dry and boxed for protection
from physical damage.
(i) Stainless steel of the 400 series must be placed in a solution of CRC 3-36,
corrosion-preventive compound or Supertech ST-A, corrosion-preventive compound for 3
to 5 minutes. Place in clean container.
UP495246
ALL Page 6014
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
S. Cleaning Method 10 (Subtask 72-00-00-100-021-A01)
CLEANED.
(1) Clean titanium parts as follows:
FIRE HAZARD.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE CHLORINATED SOLVENTS TO CLEAN TITANIUM PARTS. HIGH

TEMPERATURE OPERATION OF TITANIUM PARTS, AFTER CONTACT WITH
CHLORINATED CHEMICALS, CAN CAUSE PART FAILURE DUE TO EROSION
AND CRACKS.
(b) Immerse parts in Ridoline 909, alkaline cleaner solution at temperature of 160 to 180°F
(71 to 82°C) for 3 to 5 minutes minimum. Scrub surface with a stiff-plastic fiber-bristled
brush to remove surface contamination. If old gaskets or sealing compound are present,
carefully lift softened gaskets with a knife blade and scrape surface clean.

(c) Rinse parts in fresh running water. Use compressed air to remove excess water, then dry
in oven at 160 to 250°F (71 to 121°C) for 1 hr.
(d) Store parts in dry place.
T. Cleaning Method 11 (Subtask 72-00-00-100-022-A01)
CLEANED.
(1) Clean electrical component parts as follows:
UP495246
ALL Page 6015
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

FIRE HAZARD.
(a) Wipe with clean, lint-free cloth dipped in MIL-PRF-680, solvent.

FIRE HAZARD.
(b) Clean electrical connectors with dry soft-plastic fiber-bristled brush and remove oily type
substance with cotton swab dipped in MIL-PRF-680, solvent.
U. Cleaning Method 12 (Subtask 72-00-00-100-023-A01)
CLEANED.
(1) Clean fittings and plumbing as follows:
FIRE HAZARD.
(a) Spray tubes and fittings externally and internally with MIL-PRF-680, solvent in an
outside-ventilated spray booth.
(b) Dry parts with dry, filtered compressed air.

(c) Insert protective plugs and caps in each end of plumbing and fittings.
V. Perform Special Cleaning Instructions for Specific Components (Subtask 72-00-00-100-024-A01)
CLEANED.
(1) Clean bearings.
NOTE: During cleaning do not permit high rotational speeds of bearings as damage can
result. Slow rotational speeds are permissible.
CAUTION: HANDLING OF BEARING COMPONENTS MUST BE MINIMIZED. REFER TO

INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000) FOR HANDLING PROCEDURES.
(a) Demagnetize bearings so that residual magnetism does not exceed 5 gauss.
UP495246
ALL Page 6016
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

FIRE HAZARD.
(b) Dip, soak, or agitate bearings in MIL-PRF-680, solvent until oil and grease have been
removed.
(c) Allow bearings to drain dry.
(d) Coat bearings with clean, approved engine oil following inspection if bearings are to be
reused immediately.
(e) If bearings are not to be reused immediately, coat bearings with MIL-PRF-6085, lubricating
oil, individually seat bearings in plastic bag, and store in dry, cool area. Do not store in
area cooled by evaporative cooler. Do not store near electrical equipment to preclude
possibility of magnetizing bearings.
(2) Clean fire extinguisher agents from components. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 70-00-00-6000).
W. Job Close-up (Subtask 72-00-00-100-027-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6017
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the engine.
balls - 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) dia commercially available

(used to inspect stub shaft, PN
3499-058 external splines)
balls - 0.084 inch (2.13 mm) dia commercially available

(used to inspect fuel control drive
(quill) shaft external splines)
PN 297292-1 spline plug gage (used to check CAGE: 06848

splines in fuel pump, component of
PN 298187-1)
PN 298177-1 torque wrench splined adapter CAGE: 06848

(used to check fuel pump drive
running torque)
PN WT-128851 pins (0.050 inch (1.27 mm) dia, Woodward Governor Company,
used to inspect stub shaft, PN Aircraft Controls Group, P.O. Box
3499-058 external splines) 405, Rockton, IL 61072-0405
PN WT-128906 pins (0.084 inch (2.13 mm) dia, Woodward Governor Company,
used to inspect fuel control drive Aircraft Controls Group, P.O. Box
(quill) shaft external splines) 405, Rockton, IL 61072-0405
PN WT-86421 no go gage (used to check internal Woodward Governor Company,

splines of stub shaft, PN 3499-058) Aircraft Controls Group, P.O. Box
405, Rockton, IL 61072-0405
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
Liqui-Moly brand NV thread anti-seize lubricant (MIL-PRF-907) CAGE: 98112

compound
PN 831043-3 SOAP sampling kit CAGE: 06848
VV-P-236 petrolatum commercially available
2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-00-200-802-A01)
B. Removed Components and Parts Inspection Requirements (Subtask 72-00-00-200-004-A01)
NOTE: The application of general maintenance practices introduced in this MM are on the same
guidelines as FAA Manual AC65-9, Airframe and Powerplant Mechanics General Handbook.
For those maintenance practices not covered in this MM, use FAA Manual AC65-9, Airframe
and Powerplant Mechanics General Handbook.
(1) Inspection/checks and procedures provided in this publication are those which can be performed
at field level to aid in determining if a component or part is serviceable. All components or parts
removed from the engine must be given a careful visual inspection for general appearance and
damage. A component or part which shows evidence of damage beyond field level repair
capabilities must be replaced. The damaged component or part should be sent to a
Honeywell-authorized service facility for repair.
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
C. Unscheduled Maintenance (Repair or Modification) Requirements (Subtask

72-00-00-200-005-A01)
(1) A careful visual inspection for general appearance and damage must be accomplished on all
removed components (bearings, seals, etc) and accessible parts of modules, assemblies,
subassemblies, etc.
(2) Disassembly of the engine for the purpose of unscheduled maintenance (repair or modification)
does not require that the inspection/check procedures of this publication be accomplished unless
circumstances preceding the maintenance action or visual inspection of the components involved
dictate that a detailed inspection is prudent.
(3) When disassembly is performed, during unscheduled maintenance to the extent that first or
second or third stage turbine rotors are removed, the rotors must be visually checked for cracks.
No cracks allowed.
(4) When disassembly is performed, during unscheduled maintenance to the extent that first or
second stage impellers are removed, the impeller must be visually checked for cracks. No cracks
allowed.
(5) When the engine is being inspected for an occurrence in which the engine seized under any
power setting or shut down without proper cool down procedures as specified in the AFM, the
fuel nozzles should be removed and flow tested. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-09-3000)
and TESTING (PGBLK 73-10-09-13000).
(6) Main shaft turbine nut must be visually inspected for pitting and other damage anytime it is
accessible during unscheduled maintenance. Replace main shaft turbine nut if pitting or other
damage is evident.
D. Detailed and General Inspection Requirements (Subtask 72-00-00-200-006-A01)
(1) Detailed inspection/check instructions are provided for major components and parts in the section
of this publication where removal of that item is described. In addition to those detailed instructions
the following general inspection instructions must be described:
(a) Visually inspect all welded, brazed, or soldered assemblies for security of joints.
(b) Visually check all external surfaces and components of the entire engine for cracks. No
cracks allowed.
(c) Visually inspect all tubes for kinks, cracks, excessive wear, signs of corrosion and other
damage. Inspect all fittings for broken threads, deterioration and cleanliness.
(d) Inspect oil drained from engine. If excessive metal particles are found or if particles are
magnetic in nature, contact Honeywell Field Service Engineers for disposition.
(e) Check for fuel and oil leaks.
(f) Check drains and vents for restrictions.
(g) Check compressor inlet for foreign material, obstructions, and damage.
(h) Check inlet temperature and pressure sensor for security and evidence of damage.
(i) Check oil level.
(j) Check security of ignition wiring and connections.
(k) Check for oil seal leakage around starter-generator mount, tachometer-generator mount,
aircraft accessory mount, and fuel control assembly mount.
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(l) Check for oil leakage around base of feathering valve assembly and beta pressure switch.
(m) When any disassembly is performed which permits inspection of gears and splined parts,
check for abnormal wear patterns, chipped and broken teeth, enlarged or peened keyways,
scoring, grooving, scuffing, pitting, galling, and other damage. Spline tooth wear must not
exceed 10 percent except in fuel pump assembly drive coupling. For fuel pump assembly
drive coupling inspection and wear limits, refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
73-20-01-8000).
E. General Information (Subtask 72-00-00-200-007-A01)
(1) Perform inspection on components at recommended intervals outlined are in SB TPE331-72-0476.

Inspection intervals should not be exceeded by more than 10 hours.
(2) Upon completion of these inspections (except for pre-flight items) make an engine log book entry
noting engine operating hours.
NOTE: Engine operating hours are defined as any time the engine is operated in flight (liftoff
to touchdown).
F. Periodic Inspection Requirements (Subtask 72-00-00-200-008-A01)
(1) Inspections must be performed at intervals specified in SB TPE331-72-0476.
G. Hot Section Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-009-A01)
NOTE: Inspection of turbine section components may be accomplished at any time, but must be
accomplished at the engine operating hours specified in SB TPE331-72-0476 and following
any engine over-temperature condition. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000),
Certificated Engine Operating Limitations.
(1) Remove following external components to facilitate turbine (hot) section inspection.
(a) Remove ignition leads and igniter plugs. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 74-20-01-3000).
(b) Remove anti-ice valve plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 75-10-01-3000).
(c) Remove PS3 plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-01-3000).
(2) Perform hot section inspection.
(a) Remove, clean, flow test or replace fuel manifold and nozzle assembly. Refer to REMOVAL
(PGBLK 73-10-09-3000), CLEANING (PGBLK 73-10-09-6000), and INSTALLATION
(PGBLK 73-10-09-4000).
NOTE: Preferred method for testing fuel manifold and nozzle assembly is the flow test.
(b) Remove, clean, inspect, repair, and install turbine bearing carrier components and turbine
bearing support. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-06-3000), CLEANING (PGBLK
72-50-06-6000), INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-06-8000), REPAIR (PGBLK
72-50-06-9000), and INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-06-4000).
NOTE: (PN 3101092-1 or PN 3101092-2) Turbine bearing must be discarded after
removal and replaced with a new turbine bearing.
NOTE: (PN 3108098-1) Turbine bearing must be discarded after removal and replaced
with a new turbine bearing in conjunction with an overhaul or major CAM
inspection.
UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) Remove, clean, inspect, repair, and install turbine rotor and stator module. Refer to
REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-07-3000), CLEANING (PGBLK 72-50-07-6000),
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-07-8000), REPAIR (PGBLK 72-50-07-9000), and
INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-07-4000).
(d) Remove, clean, inspect, and install combustion chamber case (turbine plenum) and
combustion chamber. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-40-01-3000), CLEANING (PGBLK
72-40-01-6000), INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-40-01-8000), and INSTALLATION
(PGBLK 72-40-01-4000).
(e) Inspect combustion transition liner. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-30-04-8000).
NOTE: Inspection of combustion transition liner is performed with combustion transition
liner installed in engine. If damage is indicated, combustion transition liner must
be repaired or replaced. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-30-04-3000) and
(f) Inspect seal assembly. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-30-04-8000).

NOTE: Do not remove seal assembly unless it does not meet inspection requirements.
Inspection of seal assembly is performed with seal installed in engine.
(3) Install external components.

(a) Install ignition leads and igniter plugs. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 74-20-01-4000).
(b) Install anti-ice valve plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 75-10-01-4000).
(c) Install PS3 plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-01-4000).
H. Gearbox Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-010-A01)
NOTE: Inspection of gearbox and components may be accomplished at anytime but must be
accomplished at engine operating hours specified in SB TPE331-72-0476.
(1) Disassemble engine as follows to facilitate gearbox inspection. Further disassembly of
components beyond these steps is not required unless components do not meet specified
inspection criteria of gearbox components.
(a) Remove beta tube. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-01-3000).
(b) Remove and disassemble PPC assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-02-3000).
(c) Remove torque load assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-05-3000).
(d) Remove NTS valve and housing assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-06-3000).
(e) Remove shaft oil seals. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-08-3000).
(f) Remove nose cone assembly (output gearbox housing assembly). Remove as an assembly
for gearbox inspection. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-09-3000)
(g) Disassemble, as required, to remove nose cone assembly oil jet. Refer to REMOVAL
(PGBLK 72-10-09-3000).
(h) Remove oil transfer tubes. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-10-3000).
(i) Remove planet carrier and gear assembly. Do not disassemble. Remove as an assembly
for gearbox inspection. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-12-3000).
(j) Remove ring gear assembly and ring gear support assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-12-3000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8005
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(k) Remove intermediate housing and gearbox assembly (diaphragm). Do not disassemble.
Remove as an assembly for gearbox inspection. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-13-3000).
NOTE: (Post SB TPE331-A72-2114) Do not disassemble diaphragm to gain access to
oil jet assembly.
(l) Disassemble only, as required, to remove accessible diaphragm oil jet assemblies. Refer
to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-13-3000).
(m) Remove fuel control drive geartrain. Do not disassemble. Remove as an assembly for
gearbox inspection. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-15-3000).
(n) Remove compressor bearing carrier assembly and components. Refer to REMOVAL
(PGBLK 72-10-19-3000).
(o) Remove accessory gear housing assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-17-3000).
(2) Perform inspection of gearbox components as follows:
(a) Inspect PPC assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 76-10-01-4000).
(b) Inspect torque load assembly arms. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-05-8000).
(c) Inspect shaft oil seals. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-08-8000).
(d) Inspect nose cone assembly (output gearbox housing assembly) as follows:
1 Inspect accessible areas of nose cone housing. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK
(PGBLK 72-10-09-8000).
2 Inspect all accessible splines, gear teeth, gearshafts and shaft threads. Refer to
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-09-8000).
3 Inspect gearshaft and bearing assembly for freedom of rotation. No binding allowed.
4 Visually inspect propshaft guide pins for security and damage. No loose or damaged
pins allowed.
5 Perform FPI on accessed oil jet assemblies. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
70-00-00-8000). No cracks allowed.
NOTE: (Post SB TPE331-A72-2114) Visually inspect accessible areas of oil jet
assembly only.
(e) Inspect oil transfer tubes. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).

(f) Inspect planet carrier and gear assembly as follows:
1 Inspect all accessible splines, gear teeth, strainer elements, and accomplish MOW
verification. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-12-8000).
2 Inspect accessible gearshafts and bearings for freedom of rotation. No binding allowed.
(g) Inspect accessible areas of the ring gear assembly and ring gear support assembly. Refer
to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-12-8000).
(h) Inspect diaphragm assembly (intermediate gearbox housing assembly) as follows:
1 Inspect accessible areas of diaphragm housing. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK
(PGBLK 72-10-13-8000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8006
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2 Inspect all accessible splines, gear teeth, gearshafts, and shaft threads. Refer to
3 Inspect gearshafts and bearings for freedom of rotation. No binding allowed.
4 Perform FPI on accessed oil jet assemblies. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
NOTE: (Post SB TPE331-A72-2114) Visually inspect accessible areas of oil jet
assembly only.
5 Inspect accessible areas of shouldered (main) shaft and tube assembly. Refer to
6 Inspect oil scavenge pump assembly for freedom of rotation.
(i) Inspect fuel control drive geartrain. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-15-8000).
(j) Inspect oil pressure pump assembly and roller bearing. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK
(PGBLK 72-10-18-8000).
(k) Inspect accessory gear housing assembly. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-10-17-8000).
(l) Inspect compressor bearing and carrier assembly components. Refer to
(m) Inspect accessible areas of gearbox housing assembly (accessory drive housing assembly).
Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-20-8000).
(3) If any of the inspection limits are exceeded, refer to applicable chapter/section/subject for
disassembly, inspection, and possible repair.
(4) Reassemble engine. Refer to applicable chapter/section/subject.
(5) Upon completion of gearbox inspection a torque system bridge cross check is required. Refer
to TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
(6) Perform oil (SOAP) analysis within the next 25 flight hours. Refer to Paragraph 2.P. SOAP Check
(Subtask 72-00-00-200-018-A01).
I. Compensating Resistor Temperature Correction Value Check (Subtask 72-00-00-200-011-A01)
(1) Check EGT Indicator temperature reading with power off and with power on while operating
engine at a steady state condition.
(2) Difference between power off and power on readings must approximate temperature
compensation specified on latest engine DSC or in engine log book. If temperature value does
not agree with setting recorded on engine DSC or engine log book, adjust compensating resistor.
Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 77-20-03-13000).
J. Fuel Control/Fuel Pump Integrity Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-012-A01)
NOTE: Refer to ASSEMBLY (PGBLK 70-00-00-10000) for general torque values. Add frictional
drag (run-down) torque of self-locking devices to recommended values.
(1) Inspect fuel control/fuel pump assembly, nuts and bolts to verify torque values and fuel leaks
as follows:
UP495246
ALL Page 8007
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Verify torque values of nuts and bolts used to secure fuel control to fuel pump and fuel
control/fuel pump to accessory drive housing. Torque values must not be less than minimum
inspection torque values specified in Figure 8001 and Figure 8002.
(b) Inspect for fuel leak at HP fuel pump and fuel boost pump joining flanges. Verify torque
values of nuts and bolts used to secure HP fuel pump assembly to fuel boost pump
assembly. Torque values must not be less than minimum inspection torque values specified
in Figure 8002.
(c) Inspect brackets securing fuel control to engine flange. Brackets must not be cracked or
broken.
(d) Inspect fuel pump studs that mount fuel control to fuel pump. No loose studs allowed.
(e) Perform the corrective action shown in Table 8003, as applicable, after inspection.
Table 8003. Fuel Control/Fuel Pump Integrity Inspection
Condition Corrective Action

Torque values exceed the minimum inspection torque Torque nuts and bolts, previously inspected to assembly
values specified in Key for Figure 8001 and Figure torque values specified in Figure 8001 and Figure 8002.
8002. Brackets are serviceable. Fuel pump studs are
not loose. No fuel leakage evident.
Brackets cracked or broken. Remove fuel control/fuel pump assembly. Refer to
REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-20-01-3000). Replace packings
or
as described in the next procedure. Replace bracket if
Minimum inspection torque values are less than required. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-20-01-3000)
1 and INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-20-01-4000). Tighten
specified in Key for Figure 8001.
all previously inspected nuts, bolts, and screws to
or assembly torque values specified in Figure 8001 and
Minimum inspection torque values on three or more Figure 8002. Install fuel control/fuel pump assembly.
1 Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-20-01-4000).
bolts are less than specified in Key for Figure 8001.
or
Evidence of fuel leakage at HP fuel pump and fuel boost
pump joining flanges.
Fuel pump assembly studs are loose. Remove and replace fuel pump assembly. Refer to
REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-21-06-3000) and
INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-21-06-4000). Tighten all
previously inspected nuts, bolts, and screws to
assembly torque values specified in Key for Figure 8001
and Figure 8002, as applicable.
NOTES:
1. If bolts and nuts securing brackets are less than minimum specified torque values and all other fasteners are
greater than minimum specified torque values, tighten all fasteners to assembly torque values specified in Key
for Figure 8001 and Figure 8002. No further action is required.
(2) Replace fuel pump packings.

UP495246
ALL Page 8008
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW BUSHINGS AND SHIMS TO SEPARATE FROM FUEL PUMP
WITHOUT FIRST DETERMINING THEIR PROPER LOCATIONS PRIOR TO
SEPARATION. FUEL PUMP MUST BE REASSEMBLED WITH BUSHINGS AND
SHIMS IN EXACT LOCATIONS PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED. IF PREVIOUS
LOCATION OF BEARINGS AND SHIMS CANNOT BE DETERMINED, FUEL
PUMP MUST BE REPLACED.
(a) Place fuel pump on bench with boost pump down.

NOTE: When separating the HP pump assembly from the boost pump assembly, use
extreme care. Shim location and thickness must be recorded for later assembly.
(b) Remove bolts (5, 15, Figure 8002) and washers (10, 20), separate HP pump from fuel
pump.
(c) Remove packings (55, 60, 80) from pump assembly.
NOTE: If discoloration of bearings or drive shaft journal is observed, replace fuel pump.
(d) Lubricate new packings (55, 60, 80) using petroleum jelly. Install new packings into boost
pump.
(e) Using caution, place HP pump on boost pump and secure with washers (10, 20) and bolts
(5, 15). Torque bolts (5, 15) to 20 to 25 in-lb (2.3 to 2.8 Nm).
(f) Check fuel pump assembly for rotational resistance.
1 Position fuel pump assembly on a suitable bench with the fuel pump drive shaft in
view and support the assembly for inspection.
2 Install PN 298177-1, torque wrench splined adapter into fuel pump female spline
coupling.
3 Attach torsion spring-type torque wrench (0 to 35 in-lb (0 to 4.0 Nm) range) to hex
end of PN 298177-1, torque wrench splined adapter and apply torque in a CW rotation
(facing the fuel pump drive pad) to check running torque. Make a minimum of three
complete turns. Indicated torque must remain constant.
4 If the running torque is less than 18 in-lb (2.0 Nm), reinstall fuel control/pump assembly.
WARNING: SOLVENT IS TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE IN WELL-VENTILATED
AREA. AVOID BREATHING FUMES OR CONTACT WITH SKIN TO
PREVENT DAMAGE TO PHYSICAL HEALTH. KEEP AWAY FROM
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT ADEQUATE LUBRICATION IS APPLIED TO FUEL

PUMP INTERNAL PART DURING PUMP RUN.
5 If running torque is 18 in-lb (2.0 Nm) or more, rotate fuel pump at varying speeds up
to 3,000 RPM for no more than 3 minutes. During fuel pump rotation continually spray
MIL-PRF-680, solvent on fuel pump internal parts. Check running torque.
6 If the running torque continues to be 18 in-lb (2.0 Nm) or more after run-in,
disassemble fuel pump to determine cause. If after disassembly the cause cannot
be determined, and following reassembly the running torque continues to be 18 in-lb
(2.0 Nm) or more, return pump to Honeywell International Inc., Distribution Center,
1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440.
UP495246
ALL Page 8009
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Control and Pump Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-001-A01)
Minimum Inspection
Assembly Torque Values Torque Values in-lb (Nm)
1 1
Reference in-lb (Nm)
5. BOLT 65 (7.3) 50 (5.6)
15. BOLT 65 (7.3) 50 (5.6)
25. NUT 60 (6.8) 45 (5.1)
45. BOLT 80 (9.0) 65 (7.3)
60. NUT 55 (6.2) 35 (4.0)
70. NUT 50 (5.6) 37 (4.2)
85. BOLT 60 (6.8) 45 (5.1)
NOTES:
1. Add frictional (run-down) torque to all torque values.
UP495246
ALL Page 8010
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Pump Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-002-A01)
1 BOLT (PN MS9556-10) 55. PACKING (PN S9413-032)

5.
10. WASHER (PN AN960C10L) 60. PACKING (PN S9412-556)
15. BOLT (PN MS9556-10) 80. PACKING (PN S9413-0180)
20. WASHER (PN AN960C10L)
NOTES:
1. Assembly torque value is 25 to 30 in-lb (2.8 to 3.4 Nm), minimum inspection torque value is 18 in-lb (2.0 Nm).
Add frictional (run-down) torque to torque values.
UP495246
ALL Page 8011
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
K. Emergency Shutdown System Check (Subtask 72-00-00-200-013-A01)
WARNING: PROPER MFV STROKE IS ESSENTIAL FOR SAFETY OF FLIGHT. IMPROPER

ADJUSTMENT MAY RESULT IN INABILITY TO FEATHER THE PROPELLER AND, IF
ACCOMPANIED BY NTS MALFUNCTION, WILL RESULT IN AIRCRAFT CONTROL
DIFFICULTIES.
NOTE: This check must be performed after installation of an engine, installation or disassembly
of MFV, or installation of fuel shutoff valve or fuel shutoff valve actuating arm. Also, after
installation or adjustment to MFV or fuel shutoff valve linkage. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix
of NTS Procedures and Table 13004, Required NTS Checks, Check A.
(1) Operate airframe emergency feather/fuel shutoff systems to determine if engine feathering valves
and fuel shutoff valves have actuated.
(2) Check to make sure that required travel has been met on both valves.
(a) Check feathering valves for minimum extended travel. Minimum extended travel must be
0.30 inch (7.6 mm). Refer to Figure 8003.
(b) Check fuel shutoff valves for required travel from automatic to manual off position. Refer
to Figure 8004.
CAUTION: SERIOUS DAMAGE WILL OCCUR TO ENGINE HOT SECTION IF FUEL
SHUTOFF VALVE AND FEATHERING VALVE DO NOT OPERATE IN PROPER
SEQUENCE.
(c) Make sure that fuel shutoff valve levers move to cutoff position before feathering valves
are actuated.
(3) Return emergency feather/fuel shutoff systems to normal position.
(4) Make sure that linkage pivot points are not obstructed.
(5) Lubricate detent mechanism and linkage, as required.
UP495246
ALL Page 8012
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Extended Position of Feathering Valve (Typical) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-003-A01)
Limit Limit
Reference Inches (mm) Reference Inches (mm)
DIM. A 0.30 (7.6) MINIMUM
UP495246
ALL Page 8013
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Positions of Fuel Shutoff Valve Arm (Typical) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-004-A01)
L. (Pre SB TPE331-72-0818) Torque Load Arm Applied Torque Inspection (Subtask

72-00-00-200-014-A01)
(1) Remove end cap and install allen wrench into torque rod. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-05-3000) and INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-05-4000).
(2) Check applied torque of torque load arm using a dial indicator-type torque wrench. Check applied
torque in direction of propeller rotation.
(3) Applied torque setting for each individual torque load assembly must be 80 to 120 in-lb (9.0 to
13.6 Nm). If applied torque setting is less than 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm), perform the following
requirements:
(a) Remove torque load assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-05-3000).
(b) Inspect torque load arm for wear step. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-10-05-8000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8014
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(4) If applied torque setting is 80 to 120 in-lb (9.0 to 13.6 Nm), remove torque wrench and allen
wrench, and install end cap. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-05-4000).
(5) If applied torque setting is more than 120 in-lb (13.6 Nm), adjust torque load assembly. Refer
M. Fuel Control and Fuel Pump Mating Splines Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-015-A01)
NOTE: Lightly coat new packings with any approved clean engine fuel, Santovac OS-124, lubricant,
or Santovac 5, lubricant prior to installation unless otherwise specified.
(1) Remove the following components to facilitate fuel control and fuel pump mating splines
inspection:
(a) Disconnect controls linkage assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 76-10-01-3000).
(b) Remove inlet temperature and pressure sensor from fuel control unit. Refer to REMOVAL
(PGBLK 73-20-01-3000).
(c) Disconnect tube assemblies from fuel control unit. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
73-10-01-3000).
(d) Remove screw, nuts, and washers securing fuel control unit to fuel pump assembly.
(e) Remove bolt and washers securing fuel control unit to support.
(f) Remove fuel control unit from fuel pump assembly.
(g) Carefully remove packings and shim washers between fuel pump assembly and fuel control
unit. Record number and thickness of shim washers for reference on assembly.
(2) Inspect fuel pump splined shaft as follows:
CAUTION: DAMAGE TO SPLINED SHAFT OR TOOLING MAY OCCUR IF FORCE IS USED
WHEN CHECKING SPLINE WEAR.
(a) Attempt to insert PN 297292-1, spline plug gage into fuel pump splined shaft. Rotate plug
gage and repeat until all splines are checked. Refer to Figure 8005.
(b) If PN 297292-1, spline plug gage can be inserted into any section of fuel pump splined
shaft, splined shaft is worn and fuel pump must be replaced.
(c) If PN 297292-1, spline plug gage cannot be inserted into any section of fuel pump splined
shaft, fuel pump splined shaft is serviceable and fuel pump can be continued in service.
(3) Partially dissemble fuel control assembly to gain access to splined shafts for inspection as
follows:
(a) Position fuel control assembly on its cover, nameplate down.
(b) Remove screws (5, Figure 8006), pilot (10) and shims (15). Remove packing (20) and
discard.
(c) Remove spring (25) from bracket (30). Remove assembled bracket (30) from fuel control
assembly.
(d) Remove lock ring (35), spring assembly (40) and stub shaft (45) from bracket.
(e) Quill shaft (50) should remain in fuel control assembly.
UP495246
ALL Page 8015
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(4) Inspect fuel control assembly drive shaft splines as follows:

(a) Measure stub shaft (45, Figure 8006) splines for wear.
NOTE: Use VV-P-236, petrolatum or equivalent to hold the measuring balls or pins
between spline teeth during inspection.
1 Secure 0.050-inch (1.27 mm) balls - 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) dia or PN WT-128851,
pins between teeth of stub shaft external splines with VV-P-236, petrolatum 180
degrees apart as shown in Figure 8007.
2 Measure Dimension A at three different pairs of splines and record the lowest
measurement on Fuel Control Assembly Drive Shaft Inspection Worksheet, Figure
8008.
NOTE: Make a copy of Fuel Control Assembly Drive Shaft Inspection Worksheet,
Figure 8008, to record data.
3 Replace stub shaft if limits are exceeded as shown on Figure 8007.

4 Attempt to insert PN WT-86421, no go gage into end of stub shaft at three different
pairs of internal splines as shown in Figure 8007. If gage engages into splines, wear
is excessive, replace stub shaft.
(b) Measure quill shaft (50, Figure 8006) splines for wear.
CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO ALLOW MEASURING BALLS OR PINS TO DROP
INTO THE FUEL CONTROL ASSEMBLY.
1 Secure 0.084 inch (2.13 mm) balls - 0.084 inch (2.13 mm) dia or PN WT-128906,
pins between teeth of quill shaft (50) splines with petrolatum 180 degrees apart as
shown in Figure 8009.
NOTE: Use VV-P-236, petrolatum or equivalent to hold the measuring balls or
pins between spline teeth during inspection.
2 Measure Dimension B at three different pairs of splines and record the lowest
measurement on Fuel Control Assembly Drive Shaft Inspection Worksheet copy.
3 Replace fuel control assembly if limits are exceeded as shown on Figure 8009.
(5) Assemble fuel control assembly as follows:
NOTE: If stub shaft requires replacement, installation of drive spline kit PN 8930-107 is
recommended.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE LOCK RING (35) IS PROPERLY INSTALLED ON THE
STUB SHAFT (45).
(a) Secure stub shaft (45, Figure 8006) into bracket assembly (30) using new lock ring (35).
(b) Install the assembled bracket assembly into fuel control assembly over the quill shaft (50)
while rotating the stub shaft (45), to make sure splines mate properly. Make sure the spring
(25) has full travel with no interference.
(c) Install spring (25) down on the assembled bracket (30, 35, 40, 45).
(d) Lubricate new packing (20) with clean, approved engine oil and install it into pilot (10).
UP495246
ALL Page 8016
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(e) Install and secure pilot (10) and shim (15) on fuel control assembly with screws (5). Torque
screws to 25 to 32 in-lb (2.8 to 3.6 Nm).
(6) Install fuel control on fuel pump as follows:
NOTE: Apply Liqui-Moly brand NV thread compound, anti-seize lubricant to threads of bolts
located forward of the aft compressor case flange unless otherwise specified.
(a) Shim fuel control inlet transfer tube as follows:

1 Install fuel control inlet transfer tube in fuel pump assembly. Refer to Figure 8010.
2 Measure Dimension A and determine thickness of washers required to obtain
Dimension A. Dimension A must be 0.200 to 0.215 inch (5.08 to 5.46 mm).
3 Install washers, as required, into fuel pump assembly until Dimension A equals 0.200
to 0.215 inch (5.08 to 5.46 mm).
(b) Install new packings on fuel control inlet transfer tube.
(c) Install fuel control inlet transfer tube.
(d) Align fuel control unit on fuel pump assembly and secure with washers, screw and nuts.
Tighten nuts and screw. Refer to Paragraph 2.C. Install Fuel Control Assembly (Subtask
73-21-05-420-005-A01).
(e) Install support, shimming, as required, from mounting boss on fuel control to surface of
support to avoid bending support. Use sufficient additional washers under head of bolt to
support, to make sure that bolt does not bottom out when installed in fuel control. At least
four threads must engage fuel control body. Tighten bolt. Refer to Paragraph 2.C. Install
Fuel Control Assembly (Subtask 73-21-05-420-005-A01).
(f) Connect controls linkage assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 76-10-01-4000).
(g) Install inlet temperature and pressure sensor to fuel control unit. Refer to INSTALLATION
(PGBLK 73-20-01-4000).
(h) Connect tube assemblies from fuel control unit. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK
73-10-01-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8017
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8005. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Pump Spline Location (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-005-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8018
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8006. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Control Drive Shaft Spline Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-006-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8019
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1 SCREW (2) (PN 1064-416) 1 BRACKET ASSEMBLY (PN 3479-019)

5. 30.
1 PILOT (PN 4623-048) 1 LOCK RING (PN 1017-354)
10. 35.
1 SHIM (PN 3003-413) 1 SPRING ASSEMBLY (PN 3018-101)
15. 40.
1 PACKING (PN 1354-084) 1 STUB SHAFT (PN 3499-058)
20. 45.
1 SPRING (PN 1528-323) 50. QUILL SHAFT
25.
NOTES:
1. Items with part numbers can be purchased through Woodward Governor Co, Aircraft Controls Group, P.O. Box
405, Rockton, IL 61072-0405 (Phone: (815) 624-4400).
UP495246
ALL Page 8020
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8007. (Sheet 1 of 1) Stub Shaft and No Go Gage (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-007-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8021
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.406 (10.31) MINIMUM DIM. B 0.050 (1.27)
UP495246
ALL Page 8022
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8008. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Control Assembly Drive Shaft Inspection Worksheet (GRAPHIC
72-00-00-99B-008-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8023
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8009. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Control Drive (Quill) Shaft (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-009-A01)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.084 (2.13) DIM. B 0.317 (8.05) MINIMUM
UP495246
ALL Page 8024
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8010. (Sheet 1 of 1) Shimming of Fuel Control Inlet Connection (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-010-A01)
N. Accident or Incident Inspection Requirements (Subtask 72-00-00-200-016-A01)
CAUTION: ENGINES INVOLVED IN AN ACCIDENT OR INCIDENT REQUIRE INSPECTIONS THAT

EXCEED NORMAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS.
(1) For inspection requirements of engines involved in an accident or incident, contact Honeywell
Global Customer Care Center.
O. Oil System Contamination Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-017-A01)
NOTE: The following inspection must be performed on engines which have experienced damage
to oil-wetted parts that resulted in contamination of the engine oil system to the extent that
the oil filter by-pass valve indicator has extended and the chip detector was contaminated.
NOTE: While the oil system contamination inspection can be accomplished with the engine on
wing, the time required to accomplish the procedures described herein may be operationally
unacceptable. Therefore, engine removal is recommended and the following procedures
are structured accordingly. If on-wing inspection is desired, please contact your local
Honeywell Field Service Engineer or Honeywell Global Customer Care Center for further
assistance.
(1) Airframe maintenance actions required prior to engine reinstallation.
AVOID BREATHING FUMES OR LONG CONTACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENT
FIRE HAZARD.
(a) The following airframe parts must be thoroughly flushed with MIL-PRF-680, solvent:
1 Airframe oil system tubing. Refer to AMM.
2 Oil temperature control valve. Refer to AMM.
UP495246
ALL Page 8025
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
3 Propeller and dome assembly. Refer to manufacturer's MM.

4 Oil tank assembly. Refer to 79-10-01, AMM.
(b) The aircraft oil cooler must be replaced with a unit which has been verified to be thoroughly
clean. Refer to AMM.
(2) Engine disassembly/inspection requirements.
(a) The following external components must be removed and inspected or replaced as indicated:
1 The engine fuel heater must be replaced with a unit which has been verified to be
thoroughly clean. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-05-3000) and INSTALLATION
(PGBLK 73-10-05-4000).
2 Remove PG assembly and return to a Honeywell-authorized service facility for
overhaul. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-03-3000).
3 Visually inspect PPC components. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
76-10-04-8000). Replace pitch control assembly, if necessary. If original pitch control
assembly is to be reinstalled, clean thoroughly. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK
72-10-02-6000).
4 Remove NTS orifice assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-04-3000).
5 Inspect filters and filter element for contamination. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK
(PGBLK 72-10-04-8000).
AREA. AVOID BREATHING FUMES OR LONG CONTACT WITH SKIN
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO PHYSICAL HEALTH. KEEP AWAY FROM
6 All oil system tubing must be thoroughly flushed with MIL-PRF-680, solvent.
(b) Visually inspect beta tube. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-01-8000). Replace
beta tube if necessary. If original beta tube is to be reinstalled, clean thoroughly. Refer to
CLEANING (PGBLK 72-10-01-6000).
(c) Disassemble engine, as required, to perform the following inspections.
1 Clean and inspect all bearings. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 70-00-00-6000) and
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). Complete disassembly of the
intermediate gearbox housing assembly (diaphragm) will be required to gain access
to all bearings.
2 Perform visual inspection of all gears. If an indication of metal deposits exist, perform
the following:
a Clean gears. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
b Perform MPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). Mating
gears to those that show metal deposits are also subject to MPI.
c If any foreign object has gone between the ring gear and planet gears, remove
and discard the ring gear.
UP495246
ALL Page 8026
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

3 All internal oil passages in the intermediate gearbox (diaphragm) and accessory drive
housing must be pressure flushed with MIL-PRF-680, solvent.
4 Remove gearbox oil scavenge pump. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-13-3000).
Visually inspect inlet and discharge ports for evidence of contamination and check
for freedom of rotation. If there is no evidence of contamination and the pump rotates
freely without binding, no further inspection is required. If not, disassemble, inspect
and repair pump, as required. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-13-9000).
5 Remove oil pressure pump. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-18-3000). Visually
inspect inlet and discharge ports for evidence of contamination and check for freedom
of rotation. If there is no evidence of contamination and the pump rotates freely without
binding, no further inspection is required. If not, disassemble, inspect and repair
pump, as required. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-18-9000).
6 Remove turbine scavenge pump. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-04-3000).
Visually inspect inlet and discharge ports for evidence of contamination and check
for freedom of rotation. If there is no evidence of contamination and the pump rotates
freely without binding, no further inspection is required. If not, disassemble, inspect
and repair pump, as required. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-04-8000).
(d) Reassemble engine as described in this MM.
(e) Install new oil filter element. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 79-20-02-4000).
(f) After reassembly, functionally test engine. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
(3) If subsequent engine operations result in:
(a) Low or fluctuating oil pressure.
(b) Any unusual engine noises or binding during rolldown.
(c) Chip detector cockpit light illuminated and magnetic particles found on chip detector.
(d) Contact a Honeywell Field Service Engineer or Honeywell-authorized service facility for
evaluation of above engine symptoms before operating the engine further.
P. SOAP Check (Subtask 72-00-00-200-018-A01)
NOTE: SOAP has proved to be effective at other than the intervals recommended in diagnosing
engine problems. Therefore, it is recommended an oil sample (with oil filter) be submitted
for analysis when an intermittent or change in engine operating parameter occurs. Example:
fluctuating oil pressure, change in audible noise level, etc.
NOTE: If the oil system is contaminated, inspection is required. Refer to Paragraph 2.O. Oil System
Contamination Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-017-A01).
(1) Inspect engines that have had gearbox repairs after at least 10 but not more than 25 hours
operating time as follows:
UP495246
ALL Page 8027
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: WHEN TAKING OIL SAMPLE FROM ENGINE FOR SOAP CHECK, MAKE SURE
THAT ALL EQUIPMENT USED IS CLEAN AND NOT CONTAMINATED TO
PREVENT OBTAINING FALSE INDICATION OF OIL CONTAMINATION. MAKE
SURE THAT ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE IS HOT. TAKE SAMPLE WITHIN
15 MINUTES AFTER SHUTDOWN.
(a) Siphon an oil sample from the engine tank at the filler cap using plastic tube provided in
PN 831043-3, SOAP sampling kit. Route the plastic tube into the small container provided
in the PN 831043-3, SOAP sampling kit to contain the oil sample.
NOTE: Whenever leakage of fuel into oil system is suspected (odor of fuel detected in
oil or oil level increases), perform fuel heater leak test. Refer to TESTING
(PGBLK 73-10-05-13000).
(b) Remove oil filter from engine. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-02-3000).
(c) Visually inspect oil filter. If an abnormal number of trapped particles is evident, contact a
Honeywell Field Service Engineer for guidance and further instructions.
(d) Place oil filter in container supplied in PN 831043-3, SOAP sampling kit.
(e) Install replacement oil filter on engine. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 79-20-02-4000).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CONTAINERS (SMALL CONTAINER FOR SOAP SAMPLE
AND LARGE CONTAINER FOR OIL FILTER) ARE PROPERLY SEALED TO
PREVENT LEAKAGE DURING SHIPMENT.
(f) Prepare and route PN 831043-3, SOAP sampling kit using the sampling kit instructions.
NOTE: A list of Honeywell-authorized laboratories for oil analysis is given in SIL
P331-97.
Q. Abnormal Load Inputs (Propeller Strike) Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-019-A01)
NOTE: The extent of inspection will vary with the known conditions of the event and evidence
disclosed through the stages inspection.
NOTE: Analysis of the oil filter and any functional test requirements are part of the evaluation and
can affect the final disposition of the engine.
NOTE: Make sure that the source of any irregularity is determined and rectified in the course of
inspection and repair of the engine.
NOTE: Conditions of the event are to be documented and provided by the customer to any facility
accomplishing all or part of the inspection.
NOTE: If damage conditions are observed which are not acknowledged by this MM, contact your
local Field Service Representative or Honeywell Global Customer Care Center for
advisement.
(1) The following are the minimum requirements to be accomplished. However, the procedures to
accomplish an initial evaluation and SOAP inspection are not required if none is the requirement
specified in Table 8004.
(a) Accomplish the inspection as required in Table 8004.
(b) Accomplish an initial evaluation as specified in below.
UP495246
ALL Page 8028
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) Refer to Paragraph 2.C. Unscheduled Maintenance (Repair or Modification) Requirements

(Subtask 72-00-00-200-005-A01).
(d) Document the conditions of the event, related discrepancies found, and any inspection
accomplished.
(e) Accomplish SOAP inspection within 5 to 10 engine operating hours and again at 20 to 30
hours following engine inspection and repair. Refer to Paragraph 2.P. SOAP Check (Subtask
72-00-00-200-018-A01).
Table 8004. Engine Event Condition and Inspection Requirements for Propeller Strike
Condition Requirement
NOTE: To make sure of the continued airworthiness of the engine, the requirements of this inspection were
established to cover a wide variation of different types of abnormal load inputs of possible event conditions.
NOTE: Circumstances of some events may require additional review of the inspection and repair scope. Contact
Honeywell Global Customer Care Center for submission to the DERB.
NOTE: If event conditions result in an engine overspeed condition, perform Paragraph 2.W. Overspeed Inspection
(Subtask 72-00-00-200-025-A01).
NOTE: The drafting of solids in the airstream which result in observable damage to the propeller may also result
in damage to blade LE of the first stage impeller. In such cases the first stage impeller should be inspected.
1. Impact on propeller or propeller spinner by hail, rain, None

sand or ground debris drafted from ground by the air
stream; eg, gravel, nuts, bolts, etc.
2. Bird impact on propeller or propeller spinner or bird Refer to Paragraph 2.T. Bird Ingestion or Bird Impact
ingestion. Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-022-A01).
3. Axial collision of propeller or propeller spinner with Inspection Level 1.
2
vehicles, power carts, aircraft, facility structures, or
other heavy or rigid structures during aircraft towing or
equipment movement.
4. Impact on propeller blade with propeller rotation of 1%
1
RPM or less, resulting in:
4. Propeller damage is repairable without propeller Document the events and accomplish SOAP inspection.
removal from engine.
4. Propeller damage not repairable without propeller Inspection Level 1.
2
5. Impact on propeller blade with propeller rotation above
1% RPM, resulting in:
5. Propeller damage is repairable without propeller Document the events and accomplish SOAP inspection.
5. Propeller damage not repairable without propeller Inspection Level 2.
2
UP495246
ALL Page 8029
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 8004. Engine Event Condition and Inspection Requirements for Propeller Strike (Cont)
Condition Requirement
6. Propeller enters ground snow or water with no observed Inspection Level 2. 2
deceleration. Sprayed or drafted water and snow are
not applicable.
7. Impact on propeller resulting in uncommanded Inspection Level 2 and Level 3.
2 3
deceleration or stoppage of the engine (observed or
suspected).
NOTES:
1. 1 percent RPM is approximately one propeller revolution each 3 seconds.
2. Accomplish disassembly to facilitate Inspection Level 1 and Level 2 requirements and accomplish inspection
requirements for Level 1 and/or Level 2 inspections.
3. Accomplish disassembly to facilitate inspection level 3 requirements and accomplish inspection requirements
for Level 3 inspection.
(2) Accomplish initial evaluation as follows:

NOTE: Fluid leakage (fuel or oil) may be an indication of possible damage and should be
evaluated.
NOTE: Removing engine oil filter and accomplishing SOAP inspection are not required if
propeller was not rotating (static) when propeller strike occurred.
(a) Rotate the propeller by hand, in the normal direction of rotation and evaluate by feeling
resistance and listening for noise.
(b) Binding is not acceptable. Intermittent resistance to rotation or the emission of noise, which
cannot be determined as normal by similarity with other non-distressed engines, is not
acceptable.
(c) Remove chip detector. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-30-01-3000). Inspect for pieces of
metal; other than fine wear.
(d) Remove engine oil filter. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-02-3000). Visually inspect
filter and filter cavity for metal pieces other than fine wear.
(e) Accomplish SOAP check; include any metal pieces found with filter for evaluation. Refer
to Paragraph 2.P. SOAP Check (Subtask 72-00-00-200-018-A01).
(f) Clean all exterior surfaces of engine. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
(g) Visually inspect all accessible surfaces of the input, intermediate, and output housing for
any damage. Evidence of cracks or distortion (other than acceptable/repairable conditions
addressed in INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-09-8000), INSPECTION/CHECK
(PGBLK 72-10-13-8000), and INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-20-8000)) is not
acceptable.
(h) Visually inspect all accessible surfaces of the PG, fuel pump and fuel control for any
damage. Evidence of cracks or distortion is not acceptable.
(i) Visually inspect compressor inlet for indication of rub between the 1st impeller blade contour
and shroud.
UP495246
ALL Page 8030
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(j) Visually inspect turbine exhaust for the following:

1 Damage of the third stage turbine rotor and nozzle.
2 Aluminum deposits on the third stage nozzle vanes, third stage turbine rotor blades
or other surfaces in the exhaust gas path.
(k) If any event-related damage to the compressor or turbine is known or suspected, accomplish
Inspection Level 3.
(3) Accomplish disassembly to facilitate Inspection Level 1 and Level 2 requirements as follows:
NOTE: Clean all removed parts. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
NOTE: During disassembly, visually inspect interior of reduction gear housings and component
surfaces for metal debris. Note findings and retain any debris for evaluation.
NOTE: Unless specified, bearings may be left assembled on gear shafts.
(a) Remove beta tube. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-01-3000).

(b) Remove output gearbox housing assembly (nose cone) and disassemble. Refer to
REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-09-3000).
(c) Remove planet carrier and gear assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-12-3000).
(d) Remove assembled ring gear and support from diaphragm assembly. Refer to REMOVAL
(PGBLK 72-10-12-3000).
(e) Remove intermediate gearbox housing (diaphragm module). Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-13-3000).
(f) Remove accessory gear housing assembly (idler gear assembly). Refer to REMOVAL
(PGBLK 72-10-17-3000).
(g) Install nuts to retain the compressor bearing retainer on the two studs at the 2 and 10
o'clock positions (as viewed inlet up). Torque to the value specified in INSTALLATION
(PGBLK 72-10-19-4000).
NOTE: Do not remove the compressor bearing.
(h) Rotate the propeller by hand, in the normal direction of rotation and evaluate by feeling
NOTE: This check should be accomplished with the engine in the installed orientation,
ie, inlet up or inlet down.
1 Binding is not acceptable.

2 Intermittent resistance to rotation or the emission of noise, which cannot be determined
as normal by similarity with other non-distressed engines, is not acceptable.
3 If any event related damage to the compressor or turbine is known or suspected,
accomplish Inspection Level 3.
(i) If inspection is accomplished with engine installed, access engine mounts to provide full
visual access to each mount region. Refer to Figure 8011.
(j) Disassembly to this point facilitates Inspection Level 1. Subsequent steps in this procedure
are necessary to comply with Inspection Level 2 requirements.
UP495246
ALL Page 8031
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(k) Disassemble planet carrier and gear assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-12-3000).
(l) Remove the high speed pinion, sun and bull gear assembly and scavenge pump assembly
from intermediate gear box housing assembly (diaphragm module). Refer to REMOVAL
(PGBLK 72-10-13-3000).
(m) Disassemble the sun and bull gear assembly. Refer to the Engine OH.
(n) Remove the torque input shaft from the high speed pinion assembly. Refer to the Engine
OH.
(o) Remove gerotors from reduction gear section scavenge pump assembly. Refer to REMOVAL
(PGBLK 72-10-13-3000).
(p) Remove gerotors from oil pressure pump assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-18-3000).
(q) Remove compressor bearing and carrier. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-19-3000).
The seal may be left installed in carrier.
(4) Accomplish inspection requirements for Level 1 and/or 2 inspections as follows:
NOTE: The following inspection requirements are to be applied with the level of disassembly
specified.
NOTE: Prior to inspection, make sure that all removed parts have been cleaned. Refer to
NOTE: A hand-held mirror and light source are to be used to accomplish visual inspection
of indirect surfaces.
(a) Visually inspect accessible surfaces of all components for damage. Crack indications,
broken out pieces, and distortion not identified as normal wear, is not acceptable. Typical
areas of damage are as follows. Refer to Figure 8011 and Figure 8012.
1 Root areas of splines and gears.
2 Interior surfaces adjacent to alignment studs and bushings.
3 Accessory and engine mount stud and/or inserts.
4 The as-cast surfaces of intermediate housing between high speed pinion and sun
and bull gear bearing bores.
5 Compressor bearing strut TE of input housing.
6 Transition region of input housing from accessory mount surface to compressor
housing flange.
(b) Inspect alignment studs and bushings for security by applying firm hand pressure. Movement
of a bushing or stud relative to its base is not acceptable.
(c) Visually inspect all alignment studs and bushings for distortion and evidence of displacement
relative to their base. Visually detectable metal displacement or uneven perimeter in the
housing at the base of an alignment stud or bushing indicates distress even if the detail
appears secure. Refer to Figure 8013 and Figure 8014.
(d) Inspect all removed bearings. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8032
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(e) Inspect all gear and bearing assemblies for freedom of rotation. Binding or intermittent
resistance to rotation is not acceptable.
(f) Dimensionally inspect alignment holes of output and intermediate housing. Refer to
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-09-8000) and INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-10-13-8000).
(g) Dimensionally inspect diameter of torque ring gear support mount alignment holes. If any
mount hole diameter is in excess of 0.4420 inch (11.227 mm), the part is not acceptable.
(h) Inspect propeller shaft as follows:
1 Check Surface H runout. Refer to Figure 8015.
2 If damage is evident or runout requirement is not met, perform MPI on propeller shaft.
(i) Inspect propeller shaft seal stator and rotor. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-10-09-8000).
(j) Inspect labyrinth static seal carrier of input housing. Refer to Figure 8012. Visually detected
separation or misalignment relative to the housing is not acceptable. Movement using firm
hand pressure relative to the housing is not acceptable.
(k) Accomplish Fuel Control/Fuel Pump Integrity Inspection. Refer to Paragraph 2.J. Fuel
Control/Fuel Pump Integrity Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-012-A01).
(l) Inspect controls linkage for freedom of travel to all stops. Binding or indicated changes of
stopping points are not acceptable. Binding or improper rigging may indicate damage in
response to abnormal input. If the cause cannot be determined as unrelated to the event,
then remove PG, fuel pump, fuel control and any other suspect component and functional
test using the component manual. Refer to INTRODUCTION for applicable component
manual.
(m) Conditional requirements are as follows:
NOTE: Conditional requirement of this step apply if accomplishing Inspection Level 1.
If: Cracks are found in any housing, accessory component, gearshaft, or

coupling.
OR
PG, fuel pump, fuel control, exhibit binding or distortion of the mount flange.
OR
Damaged stud which fastens an accessory component or damaged insert at
an engine mount.
OR
Raised metal (indicated with a sharp edge) on intermediate (diaphragm) housing,
at the perimeter of mount surface for planet carrier/ring gear support.
OR
Loose or displaced studs and locating pins at the ring gear/torque ring mount
surface of the intermediate (diaphragm) housing.
Then: Accomplish requirements of Inspection Level 2.
UP495246
ALL Page 8033
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(n) Inspection to this point facilitates Inspection Level 1. Subsequent steps in this procedure
are necessary to comply with Inspection Level 2 requirements.
(o) Perform MPI on high speed pinion torque input shaft. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK
(PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). Visually inspect splines. If wear step in splines is evident,
dimensionally check for magnitude. Wear step greater than 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) is not
acceptable.
(p) Visually inspect internal splines of high speed pinion spur gear. If wear step in splines is
evident, dimensionally check for magnitude. Wear step greater than 0.005 inch (0.13 mm)
is not acceptable.
(q) Perform MPI on sun gear. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). Visually
inspect splines. If wear step in splines is evident, dimensionally check for magnitude. Wear
step greater than 0.006 inch (0.15 mm) is not acceptable.
(r) Perform MPI on bull gear. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). Visually
inspect splines. If wear step in splines is evident, dimensionally check for magnitude. Wear
step greater than 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) is not acceptable.
(s) Perform MPI on propeller shaft coupling. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
70-00-00-8000).
(t) Perform MPI on planet ring gear and plates/bolts which fasten gear to support/torque ring.
(u) Perform MPI on coupling shaft between rotating group and high speed pinion.
(v) Perform MPI splined coupling between oil pressure pump and fuel pump.
(w) Visually inspect compressor seal stator and rotor. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-10-09-8000).
(x) Return the following components to a Honeywell-authorized service facility for functional
test. Refer to their respective component OH or perform TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000)
requirements in applicable section of this MM and operational and functional checks
specified below:
• Torque ring
• PG
• Fuel pump
• Fuel control.
(y) Conditional requirements are as follows:
1 If: No event-related damage is found,
a Then: Discard compressor bearing. Reassemble engine and perform engine
operational and functional checks specified below.
2 If: Cracks are found in any housing, accessory component, gear, shaft, or coupling
3 OR: PG, fuel pump, or fuel control exhibit binding.
a Then: Accomplish the following:
(1) Discard of the following;
Compressor bearing
High speed pinion torque input shaft.
UP495246
ALL Page 8034
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Return the following components to a Honeywell-authorized service facility

for disassembly and inspection. Refer to respective component OH.
Torque ring
PG
Fuel pump
Fuel control.
(3) Remove bearings, all accessory gears and gearshafts, and disassemble
all gears and gearshafts. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-13-3000),
REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-15-3000), and REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-17-3000). Perform MPI on all accessory gears and gearshafts. Refer
(4) Return the following components to a Honeywell-authorized service facility
for removal of paint, etch, and FPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
70-00-00-8000).
Accessory drive housing (gearbox)
Intermediate gearbox housing (diaphragm)
Output gearbox housing (nose cone).
4 If: Any damage is found related to abnormal load inputs other than listed above,
a Then: Discard the following:
Compressor bearing
High speed pinion torque input shaft
5 If: Any damage is found with ring gear retaining plates or bolts.
a Then: Discard retaining plates, nuts, and bolts.
(5) Accomplish disassembly to facilitate inspection level 3 requirements as follows:
(a) Remove first and second stage impellers. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-30-04-8000).
(b) Remove first, second and third stage turbine rotors, and curvic coupling shaft and seal
assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-07-3000).
(6) Accomplish inspection requirements for Level 3 inspection as follows:
(a) Visually inspect first stage impeller for damage. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-30-04-8000) for acceptable limits.
(b) Visually inspect second stage impeller for damage. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
(c) Visually inspect blade tips of first, second and third stage rotors for rub damage. Refer to
(d) Visually inspect second and third stage rotor seal knives for wear and damage. If wear or
damage is evident, refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-07-8000) for acceptable
limits.
(e) Inspect second and third stage nozzle seal assemblies. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK
(PGBLK 72-50-07-8000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8035
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(f) Visually inspect curvic coupling shaft and seal assembly knives for wear and damage. If
wear or damage is evident, refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-07-8000) for
acceptable limits.
(g) Inspect seal assembly. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-30-04-8000).
(h) Inspect turbine air-oil seal. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-06-8000).
(i) Inspect turbine bearing support. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-06-8000).
(7) Reassemble engine and perform the following engine operational and functional checks, and
any requirements specified in applicable section of manual during removal/installation of
components.
(a) Engine leakage check.
(b) Disengage propeller start locks check.
(c) PG reset function and NTS lockout system pressure check.
(d) NTS trip system check.
(e) NTS system check by flight check.
(f) Torque system bridge cross check.
(g) Torque system bridge calibration adjustment.
(h) Flight idle fuel flow check.
(i) Flight idle low speed flat check.
(j) Flight idle low speed check.
(k) Fuel flow acceleration schedule check.
(l) OSFG check.
(m) PG high RPM check.
(n) PG low RPM check.
(o) USFG high RPM check.
(p) USFG low RPM check.
(q) Maximum fuel flow check.
(r) Static reverse power check.
(s) Reverse power symmetry check.
(t) Transition to beta-mode check.
UP495246
ALL Page 8036
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8011. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Drive Housing Mounting Pad Typical Crack Areas (GRAPHIC
72-00-00-99B-011-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8037
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8012. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Drive Housing (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-012-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8038
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8013. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Drive Housing Alignment Studs and Bushings (GRAPHIC
72-00-00-99B-013-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8039
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8014. (Sheet 1 of 1) Intermediate Gearbox Housing (Diaphragm) Assembly Alignment Hole and
Stud Locations (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-014-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8040
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8015. (Sheet 1 of 1) Propeller Shaft (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-015-A01)
R. Lightning Strike Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-020-A01)
NOTE: The following inspection of propeller and engine components must be performed if aircraft
has experienced an actual or suspected lightning strike.
(1) Visually inspect propeller, propeller dome, propeller de-ice boots and spinner for evidence of
pitting and/or arcing.
(2) With cowling removed, visually inspect external engine surfaces, engine mounting structure,
and all electrical connections for evidence of pitting and/or arcing.
NOTE: If no pitting or arcing is found after a suspected lightning strike or a strike on the
aircraft airframe, there is no need to proceed further with this inspection. However,
the following procedure may be accomplished as a precautionary measure.
(a) Perform SOAP Check 10 to 15 engine operating hours following the lightning strike incident.
Refer to Paragraph 2.P. SOAP Check (Subtask 72-00-00-200-018-A01).
(b) Perform a second SOAP Check approximately 50 engine operating hours after the first oil
sample or at an interval recommended by Honeywell Global Customer Care Center to
verify stabilization of wear metal levels in the oil system and oil filter element. Refer to
Paragraph 2.P. SOAP Check (Subtask 72-00-00-200-018-A01).
(3) If evidence of pitting and/or arcing is found in any of the previous steps, accomplish the following
inspection:
(a) Remove nose cone assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-19-3000). Visually
inspect all accessible bearings and gears for evidence of pitting and/or arcing. If pitting
and/or arcing is found, replace affected bearings or gears, as required, and degauss all
other accessible bearings and gears.
NOTE: If pitting and/or arcing is found on sun and bull gear assembly (including outer
races of bearings) or high speed pinion assembly, return diaphragm to a
Honeywell-authorized service facility for repair.
UP495246
ALL Page 8041
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(b) Remove, disassemble, and inspect intermediate gearbox assembly (diaphragm). Refer to
REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-13-3000) and INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-13-8000).
(c) Visually inspect all accessible gears and bearings (including compressor and turbine
bearings) for pitting and/or arcing. Replace affected gears and/or bearings, as required,
and degauss all other accessible gears and bearings.
(d) Replace oil filter element. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-02-3000) and INSTALLATION
(PGBLK 79-20-02-4000).
(4) Reassemble engine, as required. Start and run the engine for 15 minutes and shut down. Remove
oil filter element and perform inspection by carefully spreading the pleated segments and visually
checking for a greater than normal amount of trapped particles. Check for a greater than normal
amount of magnetic particles by passing a magnet inside filter element and observing reaction
of particles on outer surface of filter element. Use care not to damage or mutilate filter element.
If a higher than normal amount of metal particles are found, remove engine and return to a
Honeywell-authorized service facility for repair. If filter element is satisfactory, reinstall filter
element and ground run engine for 1 hr at various intermediate power settings, then shut down
and check oil filter element as in 15-minute engine run above.
(5) If no abnormal amount of additional metal particles are found in oil filter element after 1-hr engine
run in the above procedure, reinstall oil filter element and return engine to service.
(6) Operate engine in normal service to accumulate 9 to 12 additional engine operating hours on
oil filter element. After accumulating this time, submit an oil sample and oil filter element for
SOAP as a means of monitoring the engine condition. Refer to Paragraph 2.P. SOAP Check
(Subtask 72-00-00-200-018-A01).
(7) If subsequent engine operation after return of engine to service results in any of the following
symptoms:
(a) Low or fluctuating oil pressure.
(b) Any unusual engine noise or binding during rolldown.
(c) Chip detector cockpit light illuminated and magnetic particles found on chip detector.
(d) Attempt to determine the cause of symptom. If unable to determine cause, or if oil filter
element is contaminated, contact a Honeywell Field Service Engineer or a
Honeywell-authorized service facility for confirmation of the above engine symptoms before
returning the engine to a Honeywell-authorized service facility for repair.
S. Engine Mounting Pad Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-021-A01)
(1) Inspect engine mounting pads for high loading caused by internal engine malfunction.
NOTE: Internal engine malfunction in the reduction gear and shaft section, compressor
section, or turbine section that could cause unusually high engine mount pad loading
requires the following inspection.
(2) Visually inspect engine mounting pads. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-20-8000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8042
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
T. Bird Ingestion or Bird Impact Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-022-A01)
NOTE: The extent of inspection will vary with the known conditions of the event and evidence
disclosed through the stages of inspection.
NOTE: Analysis of the oil filter and any functional test requirements are part of the evaluation and
can affect the final disposition of the engine.
inspection and repair of the engine.
NOTE: If damage conditions are observed which are not acknowledged by this MM, contact your
local Field Service Representative or contact Honeywell Global Customer Care Center.
(1) The following are the minimum requirements to be accomplished.
(a) Accomplish initial evaluation as specified below.
(b) Refer to Paragraph 2.C. Unscheduled Maintenance (Repair or Modification) Requirements
(Subtask 72-00-00-200-005-A01).
(c) Document the conditions of the event and related discrepancies found.
(d) Accomplish SOAP inspection within 5 to 10 engine operating hours and again at 20 to 30
hours following engine inspection and repair. Refer to Paragraph 2.P. SOAP Check (Subtask
72-00-00-200-018-A01).
(2) Accomplish initial evaluation as follows:
(a) Visually inspect propeller and propeller spinner for evidence of bird matter and other
indications of bird impact.
(b) Visually inspect compressor inlet for indications of bird matter deposits and other indications
of bird impact or bird ingestion.
NOTE: First stage impeller blade distortion or rub between first stage impeller blade
LE and shroud may be an indication of bird ingestion.
(c) If there are indications of bird impact or bird ingestion in the compressor inlet, inspect first
stage impeller and first stage diffuser gas path using a borescope. Check entire
circumference of first stage diffuser vanes when borescoping gas path.
NOTE: Diffuser vane damage and bird matter deposits are usually localized rather than
uniformly distributed.
(d) Inspect first stage impeller for damage. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-30-01-8000).
(e) Visually inspect turbine exhaust path, third stage stator, and third stage turbine rotor for
evidence of bird matter.
NOTE: Bird matter in the turbine exhaust path may be observed as a build up of heavy
carbon or soot particles.
(f) Rotate the propeller by hand, in the normal direction of rotation. Evaluate engine by feeling
1 Binding is not acceptable.
UP495246
ALL Page 8043
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2 Intermittent resistance to rotation or the emission of noise which cannot be determined

normal by similarity with other undistressed engine, is not acceptable.
(g) Remove chip detector. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-30-01-3000). Inspect for pieces of
metal; other than fine wear.
(h) Remove engine oil filter. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-02-3000). Visually inspect
filter and filter cavity for metal pieces; other than fine wear.
NOTE: These oil filter and SOAP evaluations are not required if propeller was not
rotating (static) when bird impact occurred.
(i) Accomplish SOAP check; include any metal pieces found with filter for evaluation. Refer
to Paragraph 2.P. SOAP Check (Subtask 72-00-00-200-018-A01).
(j) If bird ingestion is suspected, perform the following:
1 Remove fuel nozzles. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-09-3000).
2 Remove igniter plugs. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 74-20-01-3000).
3 Visually inspect fuel nozzles for foreign matter. Foreign matter is not acceptable.
NOTE: Foreign matter is usually observed in fuel nozzle shrouds and nozzle tips.
4 Using a borescope, inspect combustor for evidence of foreign matter. Foreign matter
is not acceptable.
NOTE: Foreign matter is usually observed as deposits in combustor wall air holes.
(k) If ingestion of bird matter is indicated, accomplish the following disassembly and inspection
procedures.
(3) Accomplish disassembly to facilitate inspection requirements for bird ingestion.
NOTE: Clean all removed parts. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
NOTE: During disassembly, visually inspect interior of reduction gear housings and component
surfaces for metal debris. Note findings and retain any debris for evaluation.
NOTE: Unless specified, bearings may be left assembled on gear shafts.
(a) Remove output gearbox housing assembly (nose cone). Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-09-3000).
(b) Remove planet carrier and gear assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-12-3000).
(c) Remove assembled ring gear and support from diaphragm assembly. Refer to REMOVAL
(PGBLK 72-10-12-3000).
(d) Remove intermediate gearbox housing (diaphragm module). Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-13-3000).
(e) Disassemble compressor section. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-30-04-3000).
(f) Remove combustion chamber (liner). Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-40-01-3000).
(g) Disassemble turbine section. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-07-3000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8044
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(4) Accomplish inspection requirements for bird ingestion as follows:

NOTE: Prior to inspection, make sure that all removed parts have been cleaned. Refer to
NOTE: A hand-held mirror and light source are to be used to accomplish visual inspection
of indirect surfaces.
(a) Visually inspect accessible surfaces of all components for damage. Crack indications,
broken out pieces, and distortion not identified as normal wear, are not acceptable. Particular
attention should be given to the following:
1 Refer to Figure 8016 and Figure 8017.
2 Root areas of splines and gears.
3 Interior surfaces adjacent to alignment studs and bushings.
4 Accessory and engine mount stud and/or inserts.
5 The as-cast surfaces of intermediate housing between high speed pinion and sun
and bull gear bearing bores.
6 Compressor bearing strut TE of input housing.
7 Transition region of input housing from accessory mount surface to compressor
housing flange.
(b) Inspect alignment studs and bushings for security by applying firm hand pressure. Movement
of a bushing or stud relative to its base is not acceptable.
(c) Visually inspect all alignment studs and bushings for distortion and evidence of displacement
relative to their base. Visually detectable metal displacement or uneven perimeter in the
housing at the base of an alignment stud or bushing indicates distress even if the detail
appears secure. Refer to Figure 8018 and Figure 8019.
(d) Inspect all removed bearings. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(e) Inspect all gear and bearing assemblies for freedom of rotation. Binding or intermittent
resistance to rotation is not acceptable.
(f) Dimensionally inspect alignment holes of output and intermediate housing. Refer to
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-09-8000) and INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-10-13-8000).
(g) Dimensionally inspect diameter of torque ring gear support mount alignment holes. If any
mount hole diameter is in excess of 0.4420 inch (11.227 mm), the part is not acceptable.
(h) Inspect propeller shaft seal stator and rotor. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-10-09-8000).
(i) Inspect labyrinth static seal carrier of input housing. Visually detected separation or
misalignment relative to the housing is not acceptable. Movement using firm hand pressure
relative to the housing is not acceptable.
(j) Discard compressor bearing.
(k) Accomplish fuel control/fuel pump integrity inspection. Refer to Paragraph 2.J. Fuel
Control/Fuel Pump Integrity Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-012-A01).
(l) Inspect controls linkage for freedom of travel to all stops. Binding or indicated changes of
stopping points are not acceptable. Binding or improper rigging may indicate damage in
UP495246
ALL Page 8045
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
response to abnormal input. If the cause cannot be determined as unrelated to the event,
then remove PG, fuel pump, fuel control and any other suspect component and functional
test. Refer to component manual. Refer to INTRODUCTION for applicable manuals.
(m) Conditional requirements are as follows:
1 If: Cracks are found in any housing, accessory component, gear, shaft, or coupling.
2 Then: Accomplish requirements for Inspection Level 2 of Abnormal Load Inputs
(Propeller Strike) Inspection.
(n) Perform MPI on coupling shaft between rotating group and high speed pinion.
(o) Visually inspect compressor seal stator and rotor. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-10-19-8000).
(p) Visually inspect first stage impeller for damage. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
(q) Visually inspect second stage impeller for damage. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
NOTE: Bird matter deposits in compressor gas path can result in a noticeable loss of
engine performance. Clean components to remove bird matter deposits. Refer
to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
(r) Inspect compressor diffuser as follows:

1 Visually inspect diffuser vane LEs for cracks and rolled back appearance. No cracks
allowed.
NOTE: Excessive roll back of compressor diffuser vane LEs can result in a
noticeable loss of engine performance.
2 Visually inspect all accessible areas of compressor diffuser housing for cracks. If
cracks are evident, refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-30-04-8000) for
acceptable limits.
3 Using a borescope, inspect interior of compressor diffuser for bird matter deposits.
CAUTION: BLOCKAGE OF AIR PASSAGES CAUSED BY SOOT AND CARBON DEPOSITS
ON TURBINE SECTION COMPONENTS CAN AFFECT COOLING AND
COMBUSTION CHARACTERISTICS. ABNORMAL THERMAL DISTRESS MAY
RESULT IF BLOCKAGES ARE NOT REMOVED.
(s) Visually inspect all crevices and gas passages of turbine section components for bird matter
deposits. Clean to remove soot and carbon deposits. Refer to applicable
chapter/section/subject.
NOTE: Bird matter will be observed as abnormal soot and carbon deposits on turbine
section components.
(t) Visually inspect blade tips of first, second and third stage rotors for rub damage. Refer to
(u) Visually inspect second and third stage rotor seal knives for wear and damage. If wear or
damage is evident, refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-07-8000) for acceptable
limits.
UP495246
ALL Page 8046
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(v) Inspect second and third stage nozzle seal assemblies. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK
(PGBLK 72-50-07-8000).
(w) Visually inspect curvic coupling shaft and seal assembly knives for wear and damage. If
wear or damage is evident, refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-07-8000) for
acceptable limits.
(x) Inspect seal assembly. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-30-04-8000).
(y) Inspect turbine air-oil seal. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-06-8000).
(z) Inspect turbine bearing support. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-06-8000).
(aa) Visually inspect internal passages of combustion case (plenum) and pressure plumbing
for evidence foreign matter. Clean to remove foreign matter. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK
(PGBLK 72-40-01-8000).
(ab) Visually inspect and test fuel nozzles. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
73-10-09-8000).
(ac) Visually inspect anti-ice shield and passages of anti-ice valve and plumbing for evidence
of foreign matter. Clean to remove foreign matter. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-50-01-8000) and INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-02-8000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8047
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8016. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Drive Housing Mounting Pad Typical Crack Areas (GRAPHIC
72-00-00-99B-016-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8048
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8017. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Drive Housing (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-017-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8049
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8018. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Drive Housing Alignment Studs and Bushings (GRAPHIC
72-00-00-99B-018-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8050
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8019. (Sheet 1 of 1) Intermediate Gearbox Housing (Diaphragm) Assembly Alignment Hole and
Stud Locations (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-019-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8051
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
U. Hot Gas Path Inspection (Borescope Inspection) (Subtask 72-00-00-200-023-A01)
NOTE: This inspection is not to be used instead of existing limits to judge acceptability of parts
for continued service. For continued service limits, refer to appropriate inspection procedures
in INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-40-01-8000) and INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-50-07-8000). Inspection guidelines in this section are applicable to borescope inspection
(engine assembled).
(1) Remove all fuel nozzle bodies from combustor plenum. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
73-10-09-3000).
(2) Using borescope, check combustor and outer transition liner for distress.
(a) Burn(s) through combustor inner and/or outer wall are not acceptable. Minor buckling of
combustor inner and/or outer wall is acceptable. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-40-01-8000). If combustor does not meet inspection criteria, replace or repair.
(b) Combustion transition liner burn-through is not acceptable and burned-through liners must
be replaced. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-40-01-8000).
CAUTION: MISSING MATERIAL (BURN-THROUGH) AT VANE LE OR TE RESULTS IN IMPULSE
(CYCLIC) LOADING OF BLADES.
(3) Visually inspect first stage nozzle segments using a borescope.

(a) Missing sections of vane material are not acceptable.
(b) Missing material resulting in visual exposure of vane core is not acceptable.
(c) Remove first stage nozzle segments which are unacceptable and inspect. Refer to
(4) Visually inspect first stage turbine rotor blades using a borescope.
(a) Object damage is not acceptable.
(b) Missing sections of blade are not acceptable.
(c) If inspection reveals unacceptable blades, remove first stage turbine rotor assembly and
inspect. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-07-8000).
NOTE: Second stage turbine wheel condition cannot be determined by borescope
inspection.
(5) If any of the preceding inspection results are unacceptable, perform fuel manifold and nozzle
flow check. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 73-10-09-8000).
(6) If blade separation or severe FOD is detected in turbine section, inspect for the following. Refer
(a) Inspect for loose compressor bearing carrier mounting studs.
(b) Inspect gearbox housing for cracks and damage in area of compressor bearing carrier
mounting surface.
UP495246
ALL Page 8052
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
V. Engine Over Torque Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-024-A01)
(1) Perform engine over torque inspection as specified in Table 8005.

NOTE: Table 8005 has the engine over torque inspection requirements. For flat rated engine
over torque inspection requirement refer to AMM for airframe/engine installation
inspection requirements.
Table 8005. Engine Over Torque Inspection Requirements
Condition
Torque and (percent over torque) Recommendation
Over Torque Limits at:
3,466 to 3,631 ft-lb (4,699 to 4,923 Nm) Perform SOAP analysis within next 25 flight hours.
(1,050 to 1,100 SHP reference only)
(105% to 110% reference only)
Over 5 minutes
(110% to 112% reference only)
Over 15 seconds
(112% to 114.3% reference only)
Over 5 seconds
(114.3% to 116.8% reference only)
Anytime
3,858 ft-lb (5,231 Nm) Prior to next flight, perform gearbox inspection. Perform
MPI on propeller shaft coupling Refer to
(1,169 SHP reference only)
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). No
(116.9% reference only) cracks allowed.
Anytime
UP495246
ALL Page 8053
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
W. Overspeed Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-025-A01)
CAUTION: THE CAUSE OF THE OVERSPEED SHOULD BE IDENTIFIED PRIOR TO FURTHER

OPERATION. REFER TO FAULT ISOLATION (PGBLK 72-00-00-1000), FOR GUIDANCE.
NOTE: The following are minimum requirements to be accomplished after an overspeed condition
has occurred.
NOTE: If any damage condition is observed which is not acknowledged by this MM, contact your
local Field Service Representative or Honeywell Global Customer Care Center for
advisement.
(1) Remove and replace or repair any component suspected of contributing to the overspeed
condition. Refer to applicable chapter/section/subject for removal procedures.
(a) Remove first, second, and third stage turbine rotors. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-50-07-3000).
NOTE: First stage nozzle assembly may be left assembled in turbine stator housing
unless visual inspection dictates removal is required for a detailed inspection.
(b) Remove rotating air seal and coupling assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-50-07-3000).
(c) Remove first and second stage impellers. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-30-04-3000).
(2) Perform overspeed inspection.
(a) Refer to Paragraph 2.C. Unscheduled Maintenance (Repair or Modification) Requirements
(Subtask 72-00-00-200-005-A01).
(b) Perform FPI on the following components. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
1 First and second stage impellers.
2 First, second, and third stage turbine rotors.
3 Rotating air seal and coupling assembly.
(c) Visually inspect blade tips of turbine rotor assemblies for rubs. Refer to
(d) Visually inspect shrouds of turbine nozzle assemblies for rubs. Refer to
(e) Visually inspect second stage impeller for rubs and other damage. Refer to
(f) Visually inspect compressor housing shroud contour for rubs and other damage. Refer to
(g) Visually inspect first stage impeller for rubs and other damage. Refer to
(h) Visually inspect first stage impeller shroud for rubs and other damage. Refer to
UP495246
ALL Page 8054
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(i) If overspeed was in excess of 108 percent RPM, return the following components to a
Honeywell-authorized service facility for dimensional and eddy current inspection.
1 First, second, and third stage turbine rotor assemblies.
2 First and second stage impellers.
(3) Reassemble engine. Refer to applicable chapter/section/subject.
(4) Accomplish oil and filter analysis (SOAP) inspection within 5 to 10 engine operating hours and
again at 20 to 30 hours following engine inspection and repair. Refer to Paragraph 2.P. SOAP
Check (Subtask 72-00-00-200-018-A01).
X. Second Stage Turbine Rotor Blade Shift Inspection Requirements (Subtask

72-00-00-200-026-A01)
(1) Remove and inspect compressor bearing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-19-3000) and
(2) Remove and inspect accessory gear housing assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-17-3000) and INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-17-8000).
(3) Inspect for loose compressor bearing carrier mounting studs. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK
(PGBLK 72-10-20-8000).
(4) Inspect accessory drive housing for cracks and damage in area of compressor bearing carrier
mounting surface. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-20-8000).
Y. Turbine Over Temperature Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-027-A01)
NOTE: If turbine over temperature occurred during engine start or below ground idle, accomplish
the following procedures.
(1) Determine the actual temperature compensation that the compensating resistor is set. Refer to
TESTING (PGBLK 77-20-03-13000).
(2) Obtain the latest engine DSC and determine the maximum temperature compensation allowed.
(3) Subtract the maximum temperature compensation allowed from actual temperature compensation.
Refer to Table 8006 and Table 8007.
Table 8006. Delta Value Calculation Example 1
Actual temperature compensation = +17°C

Maximum temperature compensation = (–) +10°C (From DSC)
Delta = + 7°C
Table 8007. Delta Value Calculation Example 2
Actual temperature compensation = +11°C

Maximum temperature compensation = (–) -5°C (From DSC)
Delta = +16°C
(4) Calculate the actual turbine over temperature value as shown in Table 8008.
UP495246
ALL Page 8055
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 8008. Turbine Over Temperature Calculation Example
Over temperature value observed = 37°C

Subtract delta value (–) +7°C
Actual turbine over temperature value = 30°C
(5) Determine required action for the actual turbine over temperature value determined. Refer to
TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
NOTE: If turbine over temperature occurred at or above ground idle, continue with the
following step.
(6) If the column (action if exceeded in the EGT Limitations table) in TESTING (PGBLK
72-00-00-13000) specifies a turbine over temperature inspection is required, perform the following.
CAUTION: THE CAUSE OF THE OVER TEMPERATURE MUST BE IDENTIFIED PRIOR
TO FURTHER ENGINE OPERATION.
(a) Determine the cause of the over temperature. Refer to FAULT ISOLATION (PGBLK
72-00-00-1000).
(b) Remove and repair or replace any component suspected of contributing to the
over-temperature condition. Refer to applicable chapter/section/subject for the suspect
component.
(c) For general inspection requirements, refer to Paragraph 2.C. Unscheduled Maintenance
(Repair or Modification) Requirements (Subtask 72-00-00-200-005-A01).
(d) Disassemble turbine group assembly (module), as required, to remove first, second, and
third stage turbine rotors and nozzles. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-07-3000).
CAUTION: METAL DEPOSITS FROM TURBINE SECTION COMPONENTS ON ROTOR
BLADES RESULT IN A LOSS OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES OF THE BLADE.
REUSE OF AFFECTED ROTOR OR BLADE SET IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.
(e) Visually inspect first, second, and third stage turbine rotors as follows:
1 Visually inspect rotor blades for evidence of melting and metal deposits from other
turbine components. Melting or metal deposits from other distressed turbine
components is not acceptable. Discard affected parts.
2 Visually inspect rotor blades for evidence of irregular bends and curling of blade
trailing edges. Irregular bends and curling is not acceptable.
3 Visually inspect first and second stage rotor blades for blistering (separation from
base metal). Blistering is not allowed. Chipping of coating adjacent to blade tip edges
is acceptable.
(f) Visually inspect first, second, and third stage turbine nozzles as follows:
1 Visually inspect turbine nozzle vanes for evidence of melting. Evidence of melting is
not allowed.
2 Visually inspect nozzle blade tip shrouds for rubs. If rubs are evident, refer to
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-07-8000) for acceptable limits.
UP495246
ALL Page 8056
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: MISSING MATERIAL (BURN-THROUGH) AT VANE LE OR TE RESULTS

IN IMPULSE (CYCLIC) LOADING OF BLADES.
3 Visually inspect nozzle vanes for missing material (burn-through). Refer to

(g) Visually inspect outer transition liner, inner transition liner, and combustor skirts for
burn-through and evidence of melting. Burn-through or melting is not acceptable.
(h) Replace parts that do not meet inspection requirements.
Z. Oil Over Temperature Inspection (Subtask 72-00-00-200-028-A01)
NOTE: The extent of the inspection will vary with the known conditions of the event and evidence
disclosed during the inspection.
the inspection and repair of the engine.
NOTE: The following are minimum requirements to be accomplished. If damage conditions are
observed which are not acknowledged by this MM, contact your local Field Service
Representative or Honeywell Global Customer Care Center for advisement.
(1) Refer to Paragraph 2.C. Unscheduled Maintenance (Repair or Modification) Requirements
(Subtask 72-00-00-200-005-A01).
(2) Document the conditions of the event and related discrepancies found.
(3) Accomplish SOAP check within 5 to 10 engine operating hours and again 20 to 30 hours following
engine inspection and repair. Refer to Paragraph 2.P. SOAP Check (Subtask
72-00-00-200-018-A01).
(4) Accomplish disassembly to facilitate inspection requirements if oil over temperature was not
caused from recirculation of exhaust gas in the engine nacelle as follows:
NOTE: Procedure for additional disassembly to facilitate inspection if oil over temperature
that was caused from recirculation of exhaust gas in the engine nacelle follows.
NOTE: During disassembly, visually inspect interior of reduction gear housing and components
for debris. Note findings and retain any debris for evaluation.
NOTE: All screens are to be removed from the oil jets for cleaning purposes.
NOTE: All packings are to be removed and discarded upon access.
(a) Remove and disassemble beta tube. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-01-3000).
(b) Remove and disassemble PPC. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-02-3000).
(c) Remove PG. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-03-3000).
(d) Disassemble PG. Refer to the component OH.
(e) Remove and disassemble torque load assemblies. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-05-3000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8057
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(f) Remove and disassemble NTS valve housing assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-06-3000).
(g) Disassemble NTS valve assembly. Refer to component OH.
(h) Remove feathering valve. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-07-3000).
(i) Disassemble feathering valve. Refer to the component OH.
(j) Remove and disassemble output gearbox housing assembly (nose cone). Refer to
(k) Remove and disassemble planet carrier and gear assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-12-3000).
(l) Remove and disassemble intermediate gearbox housing (diaphragm). Refer to REMOVAL
(PGBLK 72-10-13-3000).
(m) Remove splined adapter from starter gearshaft. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-13-3000).
(n) Remove plug and packings from hydraulic pump gearshaft. Refer to Engine OH.
(o) Remove insert from tachometer-generator gear. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-15-3000).
(p) Disassemble sun and bull gear assembly. Refer to OH.
(q) Remove and disassemble accessory drive housing (gearbox). Refer to
NOTE: If binding between accessory drive housing (gearbox) and the first stage diffuser
(crossover duct) is noted during disassembly, dimensionally inspect diffuser
Diameter E. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-30-04-8000).
(r) Remove and disassemble turbine scavenge pump. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-50-04-3000).
(s) Remove turbine bearing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-06-3000).
(t) Remove and disassemble beta pressure switch housing assembly and plumbing. Refer to
(u) Remove and disassemble fuel heater. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-05-3000).
(v) Remove oil filter. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-02-3000).
(w) Remove turbine bearing oil plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-08-3000).
(x) Disassemble the magnetic drain plug assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
79-30-01-3000).
(y) Clean and flush all removed components. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
(z) Continue disassembly to facilitate inspection requirements if oil over temperature was
caused from recirculation of exhaust gas in the engine nacelle as follows:
NOTE: The remaining procedural steps are required only if oil over temperature was
the result of recirculation of exhaust gas in the engine nacelle.
1 Remove fuel shutoff valve. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-06-3000).

2 Remove flow divider. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-07-3000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8058
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
3 Remove PRI only solenoid valve. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-08-3000).

4 Remove fuel control from fuel pump. Refer to Paragraph 2.C. Remove Fuel Control
Assembly (Subtask 73-21-05-020-005-A01).
5 Remove and disassemble starting fuel flow regulator assembly. Refer to REMOVAL
(PGBLK 73-21-04-3000).
6 Remove ignition unit and ignition leads. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 74-10-01-3000)
and REMOVAL (PGBLK 74-20-01-3000).
7 Remove anti-ice shutoff valve. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 75-10-01-3000).
8 Remove temperature sensor, compensating resistor and thermocouple cable
assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 77-20-03-3000).
9 Clean and flush all removed components. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK
72-00-00-6000).
(5) Accomplish the following steps if oil over temperature was not caused from recirculation of
exhaust gas in the engine nacelle as follows:
NOTE: Disassembly of some components was accomplished to facilitate cleaning and/or
replacement of packings. These components may not be acknowledged with individual
inspection requirements in the following instructions.
NOTE: Replacement of all packings and nonmetallic components in the oil-affected system
are required for potential loss of durability.
NOTE: All oil jet/orifice holes are to be checked to make sure that blockage does not exist.
NOTE: All oil tubes and oil component passages should checked to make sure that blockage
or deposits do not exist that may be released into the oil flow.
(a) Inspect the following bearings. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).

1 Forward propeller shaft thrust bearing.
2 Planetary gear bearings.
3 Bull/sun gear bearings.
4 High speed pinion bearings.
5 Compressor bearing.
6 Turbine bearing.
7 Discard all other bearings not listed.
(b) Return the following components to a Honeywell-authorized service facility for dimensional
inspection, flush out all cored passages and pressure check.
1 Accessory drive housing.
2 Output gearbox housing.
3 Intermediate gearbox housing.
4 PPC housing and cover.
(c) Dimensionally inspect and perform FPI on accessory gear housing assembly. Refer to
component OH, 72-10-06.
UP495246
ALL Page 8059
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(d) Inspect accessory gear and drive idler housing assembly as follows:
1 Perform FPI on housing assembly. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
70-00-00-8000).
2 Dimensionally inspect housing assembly. Refer to IRM, 72-IR-15.
(e) Inspect components of the PG. Refer to component OH.
(f) Inspect and test NTS orifice assembly. Refer to 72-IR-15.
(g) Inspect and test auto-ignition switch. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
74-30-01-8000) and TESTING (PGBLK 74-30-01-13000).
(h) Inspect components of feathering valve. Refer to component OH.
(i) Discard shaft oil seals. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-08-3000).
(j) Discard propeller shaft air-oil seal. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-09-3000).
(k) Return torque ring to a Honeywell-authorized service facility for replacement of bridges
and cable assembly.
(l) Dimensionally inspect inner and outer journal diameters of the bull gear. Refer to 72-IR-15.
(m) Inspect gearcase oil scavenge pump. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-10-13-8000).
(n) Inspect oil pressure pump. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-18-8000).
(o) Discard compressor air-oil seal. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-19-3000).
(p) Inspect inner diameter of oil tube for carbon deposits. Deposits resulting in a visually evident
restriction of the oil path is not acceptable.
(q) Rotate gerotor drive shaft of turbine scavenge pump. Binding or intermittent resistance to
rotation is not acceptable.
(r) Test fuel heater. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 73-10-05-13000).
(s) Inspect and test beta pressure switch. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
(t) Test beta pressure switch restrictor. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 77-10-02-13000).
(u) Inspect and test oil filter by-pass valve. Refer to 72-IR-15.
(v) Inspect and test oil pressure regulator. Refer to component OH, 79-20-08.
(w) Inspect and test oil vent valve. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 79-20-06-8000)
(x) Inspect and test oil temperature bulb. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
(y) Inspect components of magnetic drain plug. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
79-30-01-8000).
(z) If any nonmetallic transfer tube exhibits molten flow or distortion, accomplish the following:
NOTE: If melting or distortion of nonmetallic oil transfer tubes is observed during
inspection, then inspection requirements and the disposition of various
components will vary significantly.
1 Discard the following:

UP495246
ALL Page 8060
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
a Output gearbox housing.

b Intermediate gearbox housing set.
c Accessory gear housing assembly.
d Accessory gear and drive idler housing assembly.
e PPC housing.
f PG assembly.
g Gearbox oil scavenge pump housing and gerotors.
h Oil pressure pump housing and gerotors.
i Oil jets in the output gearbox housing, intermediate gearbox housing and
accessory drive housing.
j Metallic and nonmetallic interior oil transfer tubes.
k Turbine scavenge pump gerotors.
l Oil filter by-pass valve.
m Oil filter cap.
(aa) Return all gears and splined couplings to a Honeywell-authorized service facility for
evaluation.
(6) Accomplish the following steps in addition to the above steps if over temperature of the oil was
the result of recirculation of exhaust gas in the engine nacelle.
(a) Inspect and test starting fuel flow regulator components. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK
(PGBLK 73-21-04-8000).
(b) Inspect and test PRI only solenoid. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 73-10-08-8000).
(c) Inspect and test fuel manifold purge solenoid valve. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
73-10-13-8000).
(d) Test fuel control. Refer to the component OH.
(e) Test fuel pump. Refer to the component OH.
(f) Test fuel pressure regulator assembly. Refer to the component OH.
(g) Inspect and test torque limiter by-pass valve. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
(h) Inspect and test ignition unit. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 74-10-01-8000) and
TESTING (PGBLK 74-10-01-13000).
(i) Inspect and test anti-ice shutoff valve. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
(j) Inspect gasket material of the anti-ice shield. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
75-10-02-8000).
(k) Inspect and test temperature sensor, thermocouple cable and compensating resistor. Refer
to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 77-20-03-8000) and TESTING (PGBLK 77-20-03-13000).
(l) Inspect and test fuel shutoff valve. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 73-10-06-8000)
UP495246
ALL Page 8061
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(m) Inspect components of fuel flow divider. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK

73-10-07-8000).
(n) Inspect insulation of fuel manifolds. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 73-10-09-8000).
AA. Inspect Combustion Case Assembly (Combustion Case Assembly Installed on Engine) (Subtask
72-00-00-200-030-A01)
(1) Do a visual inspection of the exterior surfaces of the combustion case assembly.
(a) Visually examine all accessible areas of the combustion case assembly for cracks or
evidence of combustion air leakage. Perform inspection under strong light and use mirrors
as necessary.
1 Combustion gas leakage may be evident by the presence of any of the following:
• Local soot
• Discoloration and/or oxidation near a suspected crack site
• Heat damage to other engine and/or aircraft components in the vicinity of a
suspected crack site.
2 During visual inspection, specifically examine the following:
• Weld joints at drain bosses, igniter bosses, fuel nozzle bosses P3 boss, and
air bleed pad bosses
• Weld joints between the sheet metal casing and the forward flange and
between the sheet metal casing and the aft dome
• Lateral seam weld which joins the sheet metal casing together
• Weld repairs, if present.
(b) No visually identified cracks allowed.
(2) If a crack is suspected and cannot be verified visually, the site may be checked using a portable
penetrant inspection in accordance with ASTM E 1417 Type I, Method C, Sensitivity Level 3.
(a) This inspection must be performed by personnel qualified and certified in accordance with
NAS 410.
(b) No cracks allowed.
(3) If cracks are determined to be present, replace the combustion case assembly with a serviceable
unit.
AB. Airworthiness References – Life-Limited Components (Subtask 72-00-00-200-029-A01)
(1) For information concerning life-limited components, refer to SB TPE331-72-0476 and SB

TPE331-A72-2131.
AC. TBO/CAM (Subtask 72-00-00-200-030-A01)
(1) TBO inspection interval periods are specified in SB TPE331-72-0476.

(2) CAM inspection interval periods are specified in SB TPE331-72-0476.
AD. Job Close-up (Subtask 72-00-00-200-031-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8062
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the engine.
heat lamp commercially available

(510°C))
portable hot air gun commercially available


APPLICABLE.
NOTE: Refer to AFM for approved engine oil and fuel.
stainless steel wire brush commercially available
PN 535K020 base (primer, green epoxy-amine) CAGE: 92108
PN 930K097 activator (primer) CAGE: 92108
PN A423-66-24670 base (paint, gloss light green CAGE: 71191

epoxy-amine)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN C-1178 activator (paint) CAGE: 71191
aluminum putty (F) resin epoxy resin CAGE: K9038
2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-00-610-002-A01)
B. Repair Minor Corrosion (Subtask 72-00-00-100-025-A01)
(1) Using good shop practices, remove any obvious loose paint to expose the base material.
(2) Remove all corrosion as follows:
CAUTION: USE EXTREME CARE NOT TO GOUGE SURFACE.
(a) Hand scrape to remove corrosion, using good shop practices, then hand brush, using a
clean stainless steel wire brush.
(b) Feather edges of paint by lightly sanding, using 240 grit, sandpaper.
(3) Clean and treat magnesium components. Refer to Paragraph 2.Q. Cleaning Method 8 (Subtask
72-00-00-100-019-A01).
(4) Clean and treat aluminum components. Refer to Paragraph 2.O. Cleaning Method 6 (Subtask
72-00-00-100-017-A01).
C. Repair Treated Area (Subtask 72-00-00-100-026-A01)
(1) Prepare aluminum putty (F) resin, epoxy resin as follows:

(a) Mix by weight 1 part hardener to 9 parts base or mix by volume 1 part hardener to 4 parts
base.
(b) Stir until a uniform mixture without lumps is obtained.
(2) Apply aluminum putty (F) resin, epoxy resin to corroded areas or voids as follows:
(a) Fill corroded areas or voids with aluminum putty (F) resin, epoxy resin and blend to adjacent
surfaces.
(b) Cure aluminum putty (F) resin, epoxy resin for 16 hours at room temperature or oven bake
for 4 hours at 150°F (65°C).
(3) Apply primer and light green paint as follows:
(a) Prepare green epoxy-amine primer as follows:
1 Mix equal parts, by volume, of PN 535K020, base and PN 930K097, activator.
2 Allow to stand 30 to 45 minutes before use.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(b) Using a soft-plastic fiber-bristled brush or airbrush, apply a thin coat of primer (approximately
0.0006 to 0.0012 inch (0.015 to 0.030 mm) thick). Allow primer to dry 30 to 45 minutes.
CAUTION: IF PORTABLE HOT AIR GUN IS USED TO CURE PRIMER, DO NOT EXCEED
200°F (93°C) OR BUBBLING OF THE PRIMER MAY RESULT.
(c) Cure primer using one of the methods in Table 9003.
Table 9003. Primer Curing Methods
Methods Cure
PREFERRED METHOD: Cure primer at 180 to 200°F (82 to 93°C) maximum for 30 to 40 minutes
using a heat lamp(s).
ALTERNATE METHOD: Cure primer at 180 to 200°F (82 to 93°C) maximum for 30 to 40 minutes
using portable hot air gun.
ALTERNATE METHOD: Cure primer by air-drying for 72 hours at 57 to 97°F (14 to 36°C).
(d) Prepare gloss light green epoxy-amine paint by mixing PN A423-66-24670, base and PN
C-1178, activator as follows:
1 Mix equal parts by volume of PN A423-66-24670, base and PN C-1178, activator.
2 Allow to stand 45 minutes prior to use.
(e) Apply gloss light green epoxy-amine paint (approximately 0.0006 to 0.0012 inch (0.015 to
0.030 mm) thick) and allow to air-dry 45 minutes.
CAUTION: IF PORTABLE HOT AIR GUN IS USED TO CURE PAINT, DO NOT EXCEED
200°F (93°C) OR BUBBLING OF THE PAINT MAY RESULT.
(f) Cure gloss light green epoxy-amine paint using one of the methods in Table 9004.
Table 9004. Epoxy-Amine Paint Curing Methods
Methods Cure
PREFERRED METHOD: Cure top coat at 180 to 200°F (82 to 93°C) maximum for 30 to 40
minutes using heat lamp(s).
ALTERNATE METHOD: Cure top coat at 180 to 200°F (82 to 93°C) maximum for 30 to 40
minutes using portable hot air gun.
ALTERNATE METHOD: Cure top coat by air-drying for 72 hours at 57 to 97°F (14 to 36°C).
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – SERVICING
(1) Use these procedures for general servicing the engine.



APPLICABLE.
Aeroshell 17 grease (MIL-G-21164C) Shell Oil Co., Aviation Sales Div.,

P.O. Box 910, Louisiana St.,
Houston, TX 77252-2463
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY SERVICING
ALL Page 11001
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-00-610-802-A01)
CAUTION: USE OF AVIATION GASOLINE OTHER THAN AS SPECIFIED IN THE AFM CAN
RESULT IN FUEL CONTROL/FUEL PUMP MATING SPLINE WEAR. THIS IS DUE
TO THE REDUCED LUBRICATION QUALITIES OF AVIATION GASOLINE AS
COMPARED TO JP-4, JP-5, OR JET-A FUELS. ALSO, THE LEAD CONTENT OF
AVIATION GASOLINE MAY ACCELERATE HOT SECTION DISTRESS IF USED IN
EXCESS OF SPECIFIED LIMITS.

B. Drain Engine Oil (Subtask 72-00-00-610-004-A01)
(1) Drain the engine oil system when the engine is removed, at oil change intervals specified in SB
TPE331-72-0476, and whenever required, as follows:
(a) Position aircraft propeller in feather position to make sure that maximum drainage of control
oil into engine oil sump and oil tank assembly.
NOTE: If possible, oil must be drained while the engine is still warm from operation.
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED DUTY CYCLE FOR

STARTER-GENERATOR.
CAUTION: DE-ENERGIZE IGNITION SYSTEM.
(b) Remove magnetic drain plug (chip detector) from bottom of output housing and drain as
much oil as possible. If magnetic drain plug is inaccessible, engage propeller start lock,
using unfeathering pump. Place feathering valve handle in FEATHER position. Motor
engine approximately 20 seconds to scavenge as much residual oil as possible from the
input housing assembly.
NOTE: Do not exceed 15 percent RPM when motoring engine. If additional motoring
is required, repeat motoring procedure after engine rotation has come to a
complete stop.
NOTE: Disconnect electrical connector from oil vent valve when scavenging oil by
motoring engine.
(c) Remove drain plug from oil tank assembly and allow oil to drain into suitable container.
Check drained oil for contamination which could indicate internal damage to engine.
(d) Drain oil cooler. Refer to AMM.
(e) Remove oil filter element. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-02-3000). Inspect oil filter
element for unusual contamination which could indicate internal damage to engine.
C. Fill Engine Oil System (Subtask 72-00-00-610-005-A01)
(1) Fill the engine oil system at initial installation of the engine, at oil change intervals specified in
SB TPE331-72-0476, and whenever required, as follows:
(a) Install new oil filter element. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 79-20-02-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 11002
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(b) Install drain plugs with new packings or gaskets in oil tank assembly and in bottom of output
housing assembly.
(c) Remove oil tank dipstick and cap assembly from oil tank assembly. For type of oil required,
refer to AFM.
(d) Fill tank with clean, approved engine oil (approximately 7.5 quarts (7.1 L)) until dipstick
indicates FULL.
(e) Install oil tank dipstick and cap assembly.
CAUTION: SHUT DOWN ENGINE IMMEDIATELY IF OIL PRESSURE IS NOT INDICATED
WITHIN 10 SECONDS OF ENGINE START.
(f) Start engine, observing normal start procedures, and operate for at least 5 minutes.
NOTE: Instead of operating engine, propeller may be hand rotated approximately 30
revolutions, to scavenge as much residual oil as possible from nose cone and
gearbox assemblies.
CAUTION: DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT TYPES OR BRANDS OF OILS WHEN ADDING OIL.
(g) Check oil level in oil tank and add clean, approved engine oil if required.
NOTE: Oil level must be checked within 15 minutes of shutdown.
D. Servicing Engine With Different Type Or Brand Of Oil (Subtask 72-00-00-610-006-A01)
(1) Proceed as follows whenever the engine oil system is filled with a different type or brand of oil
than previously used.
(a) Start engine and operate until normal oil temperature is reached.
NOTE: Instead of operating engine, propeller may be hand rotated approximately 30
revolutions, to scavenge as much residual oil as possible from nose cone and
gearbox assemblies.
(b) Shut down engine with propeller start locks disengaged and propeller in feather position.
STARTER-GENERATOR.
CAUTION: DE-ENERGIZE IGNITION SYSTEM.
(c) Remove magnetic drain plug (chip detector) from bottom of output housing and drain as
much oil as possible. If magnetic drain plug is inaccessible, engage propeller start locks
using unfeathering pump. Place feathering valve handle in FEATHER position. Motor
UP495246
ALL Page 11003
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
engine approximately 20 seconds to scavenge as much residual oil as possible from the
input housing assembly.
complete stop.
NOTE: Disconnect electrical connector from oil vent valve when scavenging oil by
motoring engine.
(d) Drain oil from oil tank, oil filter, fuel heater, and all interconnecting lines.
(e) Replace oil filter element. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-02-3000) and INSTALLATION
(PGBLK 79-20-02-4000).
(f) Drain oil cooler. Refer to AMM.
(g) Refill oil system with clean, approved engine oil. For type of oil required, refer to AFM.
(h) Operate engine for approximately 15 minutes and monitor oil pressure and temperature.
If pressure or temperature fluctuates, drain and refill the engine oil system as previously
described.
NOTE: Make sure that propeller is on start locks prior to starting engine.
(i) Make entry in permanent aircraft records to indicate type oil (Type I or Type II) used to
service engine.
E. Lubrication Requirements – Hydraulic Pump Accessory Drive Pad (Subtask

72-00-00-610-007-A01)
(1) Perform lubrication of hydraulic pump accessory drive pad on rear of reduction gear section at
initial installation of accessory.
(2) Lubricate hydraulic pump accessory drive pad with Aeroshell 17, grease.
F. Servicing After Water Ingestion (Subtask 72-00-00-610-008-A01)
(1) Perform engine ground run as follows:

(a) If water has been suspected to have been introduced into the engine, start engine and
operate at ground idle for 10 minutes.
(b) Shut down engine and cover engine inlet and tailpipe, as required, to prevent further water
ingestion.
(2) Remove water from anti-icing shield following engine washing.
(a) To remove water accumulated in anti-icing shield following engine washing, operate engine
and activate the anti-ice valve. Anti-ice valve operation is limited to 10 seconds above 50°F
(10°C).
NOTE: DO NOT OPERATE ANTI-ICING VALVE FOR MORE THAN 10 SECONDS AT
TEMPERATURES ABOVE 50°F (10°C).
G. Fuel Microbiocide Requirements (Subtask 72-00-00-610-009-A01)
(1) Refer to AFM for fuel microbiocide requirements.

UP495246
ALL Page 11004
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
H. Water and Methanol Mixture by Volume (Subtask 72-00-00-610-010-A01)
(1) Figure 11001 and Figure 11002 are percentages of water and methanol mixtures by volume.
These are the mixtures approved by Honeywell. For recommended mixture, refer to AFM.
UP495246
ALL Page 11005
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 11001. (Sheet 1 of 1) SG for Water Methanol Mixes by Volume (68 to 72% Water/28 to 32% Methanol
Mixture) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 11006
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 11002. (Sheet 1 of 1) SG for Water Methanol Mixes by Volume (54 to 62% Water/38 to 46% Methanol
Mixture) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-002-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 11007
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – STORAGE
(1) Use these procedures to store the engine.
Metric Model HS-B sealer CAGE: 3V104
WARNING: BEFORE YOU USE A MATERIAL, REFER TO THE MANUFACTURERS' MATERIAL


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
desiccant (MIL-D-3464, Type I) commercially available

(MIL-PRF-121)

CRC 3-36 corrosion-preventive compound CAGE: 023V4

(MIL-PRF-81309, Type III)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY STORAGE
ALL Page 12001
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN MX-56789 humidity indicator card CAGE: 08992
PN S8145-15 warning tag CAGE: 06848
PN TA356-40 humidity indicator plug (SAE CAGE: 08992

AS26860)
Supertech ST-A corrosion-preventive compound Roly International, P.O. Box 5103,

(MIL-PRF-16173, Type III, alternate Ventura, CA 93003
for CRC 3-36)
Univolt 60 preservative oil CAGE: 0TS34
2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-00-550-802-A01)
CAUTION: USE OF AVIATION GASOLINE OTHER THAN AS SPECIFIED IN THE AFM CAN RESULT
IN FUEL CONTROL/FUEL PUMP MATING SPLINE WEAR. THIS IS DUE TO THE
REDUCED LUBRICATION QUALITIES OF AVIATION GASOLINE AS COMPARED TO
JP-4, JP-5, OR JET-A FUELS. ALSO, THE LEAD CONTENT OF AVIATION GASOLINE
MAY ACCELERATE HOT SECTION DISTRESS IF USED IN EXCESS OF SPECIFIED
LIMITS.
NOTE: Refer to AFM for approved oil and fuel.
(1) Table 12001 and Table 12002 provides a list of tools and consumables required to perform
storage.
C. Depreserve Engine After Installation or When Required (Subtask 72-00-00-550-005-A01)
(1) Remove plugs, caps or covers.

CAUTION: PRIOR TO SERVICING ENGINE WITH OIL, MAKE SURE THAT OIL HAS BEEN
SCAVENGED.
(2) Fill oil tank assembly to operating level with clean, approved engine oil. Refer to SERVICING
(PGBLK 72-00-00-11000).
(3) Provide a source of approved engine fuel and connect to fuel inlet port on fuel control assembly.
(4) Disconnect fuel line between fuel control unit and fuel flow divider valve and connect a line to
drain overboard.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY STORAGE
ALL Page 12002
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

STARTER-GENERATOR.
CAUTION: PRIOR TO MOTORING ENGINE, DE-ENERGIZE IGNITION SYSTEM.
(5) De-energize ignition system, then motor engine with starter-generator until clear fuel flows from
overboard drain line.
NOTE: Do not exceed 15 percent RPM when motoring engine. If additional motoring is
required, repeat motoring procedure after engine rotation has come to a complete
stop.
(6) Stop motoring engine, disconnect overboard drain line, and reconnect fuel line between fuel
flow divider and fuel control assembly.
(7) Start engine, observing normal start procedure.
CAUTION: FUEL-PURGE SYSTEM WILL NOT TOTALLY CHARGE UNLESS A MINIMUM ENGINE
RPM OF 95 PERCENT IS ATTAINED DURING THE OPERATIONAL CYCLE.
(8) Increase engine speed to 95 percent.

NOTE: Prior to engine shutdown, engine speed must be increased to 95 percent to make
sure of adequate charging of the fuel manifold purge system.
(9) Operate for approximately 3 minutes.

(10) Stop engine. When engine has stopped rotating, shut off aircraft fuel supply to engine.
(11) Inspect all lubrication lines and fuel lines and their connection points for any evidence of oil or
fuel leakage, especially at the previously disconnected/connected fuel line.
(12) Remove fuel filter element and inspect. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-21-03-3000) and
(13) Replace or install fuel filter element. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-21-03-4000).
(14) Remove oil filter element and inspect. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-02-3000) and
(15) Replace or install oil filter element. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 79-20-02-4000).
D. Preserve Installed Engine (INACTIVE From 1 To 60 Days) (Subtask 72-00-00-550-006-A01)
(1) At the beginning of the period of idleness, using clean, approved engine oil, the engine must be
operated for a minimum of 10 minutes at or above ground idle low RPM to make sure all internal
engine parts are covered with oil.
NOTE: Operate engine with propeller off start locks.

(3) Reduce engine speed to ground idle, then shut down. Refer to AFM.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY STORAGE
ALL Page 12003
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(4) Allow engine to cool.

(5) Inspect engine to make sure that inlet area is clean and dry.
(6) Cap, plug, or cover engine inlet and exhaust openings. Make sure that these openings remain
adequately sealed during period of idleness to prevent entrance of water or foreign matter.
(7) Engines preserved from 1 to 60 days require no depreservation.
(8) There must be no renewal of the 1 to 60 days preservation.
E. Preserve Installed Engine (Inactive More Than 60 Days) (Subtask 72-00-00-550-007-A01)
(1) At the beginning of the period of idleness, using clean, approved engine oil, the engine must be
operated for a minimum of 10 minutes at or above ground idle low RPM to make sure all internal
engine parts are covered with oil.

(5) Disconnect fuel line between fuel control assembly and fuel flow divider valve and connect a
line to drain overboard.
(6) Disconnect fuel supply line at inlet connection on fuel pump assembly and connect a low pressure
(2 to 5 PSIG (13.8 to 34.5 kPa)) source of filtered (10 micron nominal) oil to the inlet connection.
STARTER-GENERATOR.
(7) De-energize ignition system, then motor engine with starter-generator until the system flows oil
only out of the fuel line.
stop.
(8) Reconnect the fuel line between fuel control assembly and fuel flow divider valve.
(9) Reconnect the fuel supply line at inlet connection on fuel pump assembly.
(11) Cap, plug, or cover engine inlet and exhaust openings. Make sure that these openings remain
adequately sealed during period of idleness to prevent entrance of water or foreign matter.
(12) Once for every 180 days of idleness.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY STORAGE
ALL Page 12004
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Depreserve engine. Refer to Paragraph 2.C. Depreserve Engine After Installation or When
Required (Subtask 72-00-00-550-005-A01).
(b) Preserve engine. Refer to Paragraph 2.E. Preserve Installed Engine (Inactive More Than
60 Days) (Subtask 72-00-00-550-007-A01).
F. Preserve Engine Subsequent to Operating in a Known Corrosive Environment (Engine Operated

Daily) (Subtask 72-00-00-550-008-A01)
WARNING: MOST CORROSION-PREVENTIVE SOLUTIONS ARE FLAMMABLE AND SHOULD

NOT BE USED EXCESSIVELY NOR APPLIED TO A HOT ENGINE. ALLOW ENGINE
TO COOL BEFORE USING PRESERVATIVE MATERIAL ON ANY PART OF THE
ENGINE.

CAUTION: CORROSION-PREVENTIVE MATERIAL MUST NOT BE SPRAYED DIRECTLY ON
THE COMPRESSOR OR INTO THE ENGINE. NO HYDROCARBONS OR OILS MUST
EVER BE INTRODUCED INTO THE COMPRESSOR SECTION. UNCONTROLLED
COMBUSTION COULD BE A POSSIBLE RESULT.
(3) Wipe CRC 3-36, corrosion-preventive compound or Supertech ST-A, corrosion-preventive

compound on engine inlet area with engine static after last flight of the day.
NOTE: Preservative should be applied in quantity sufficient to cover area with a light film.
(4) Install inlet and tailpipe plugs.
G. Preserve Engine Subsequent to Operating in a Known Corrosive Environment (Engine Not

Operated Daily) (Subtask 72-00-00-550-009-A01)
(1) Once a week, engine conditions permitting, run engine for at least 10 minutes at or above ground
idle low RPM.

CAUTION: CORROSION-PREVENTIVE MATERIAL MUST NOT BE SPRAYED DIRECTLY ON
THE COMPRESSOR OR INTO THE ENGINE. NO HYDROCARBONS OR OILS MUST
EVER BE INTRODUCED INTO THE COMPRESSOR SECTION. UNCONTROLLED
COMBUSTION COULD BE A POSSIBLE RESULT.
(4) Wipe CRC 3-36, corrosion-preventive compound or Supertech ST-A, corrosion-preventive

compound on engine inlet area with engine static.
NOTE: Preservative should be sufficient to cover area with a light film.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY STORAGE
ALL Page 12005
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) Install inlet and tailpipe plugs.
H. Preserve Engine During Extreme Wet Conditions (Aircraft Not Sheltered in a Hangar) (Subtask
72-00-00-550-010-A01)
(1) Once a week, engine conditions permitting, run engine for at least 10 minutes at or above ground
idle low RPM.

(4) Preserve engine. Refer to Paragraph 2.F. Preserve Engine Subsequent to Operating in a Known
Corrosive Environment (Engine Operated Daily) (Subtask 72-00-00-550-008-A01).
I. Preserve Engine When Operated in a Salt Atmosphere or Off Runways Treated With Salt
(Subtask 72-00-00-550-011-A01)
(1) Wash engine externally as soon as possible with clean water.

(2) Run engine at or above ground idle low RPM for at least 10 minutes to remove moisture.

(5) Preserve engine. Refer to Paragraph 2.F. Preserve Engine Subsequent to Operating in a Known
Corrosive Environment (Engine Operated Daily) (Subtask 72-00-00-550-008-A01).
(6) Apply CRC 3-36, corrosion-preventive compound or Supertech ST-A, corrosion-preventive
compound on fuel control assembly, controls linkage assembly, and exposed metal parts.
(7) Inspect the gearcase for corrosion and spray with CRC 3-36, corrosion-preventive compound
or Supertech ST-A, corrosion-preventive compound. Extra care and attention is warranted in
areas around studs and inserts.
J. Preserve Removed Engine (Inactive From 1 to 60 Days) (Subtask 72-00-00-550-012-A01)
NOTE: The following steps to be completed as soon as possible after engine shutdown.
(1) Disconnect fuel line between fuel control assembly and fuel flow divider valve and cap off lines.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY STORAGE
ALL Page 12006
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Drain engine lubricating oil, observing applicable procedures given in SERVICING (PGBLK
72-00-00-11000). Allow the engine to stand until all the excess oil has drained.
(3) Dip new oil filter in clean, approved engine oil before installation. Refer to AFM for approved oil.
(4) Install new oil filter element. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-02-3000) and INSTALLATION
(PGBLK 79-20-02-4000).
CAUTION: THE FUEL FILTER ELEMENT, PN 897513-1, IS A NON-CLEANABLE TYPE FILTER
ELEMENT AS IDENTIFIED ON BOTTOM OF FILTER ELEMENT, ALWAYS REPLACE
WITH A NEW FILTER ELEMENT.
CAUTION: THE FUEL FILTER ELEMENT, PN 897692-1, IS APPROVED FOR 50 HOURS OF

OPERATION AND AS AN AIRFRAME FUEL SYSTEM CLEAN-UP COMPONENT.
(5) Saturate new fuel filter element with filtered fuel before installation. Refer to AFM for approved
fuel.
(6) Install new fuel filter element. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-21-03-3000) and INSTALLATION
(PGBLK 73-21-03-4000).
(7) Clean all excess fuel and oil from engine.
(8) Install covers over air intake and exhaust openings.
(9) Install plugs and dust covers on all line openings, wires, and exposed sections.
(10) Tag the engine PN S8145-15, warning tag to indicate that it has been preserved. Indicate that
the fuel system must be preserved with Univolt 60, preservative oil or MIL-PRF-6081, lubricating
oil if storage is likely to exceed 60 days.
K. Preserve Removed Engine (Inactive 60 Days or More) (Subtask 72-00-00-550-013-A01)
NOTE: The following steps to be completed as soon as possible after engine shutdown.
(1) Disconnect fuel line between fuel control assembly and fuel flow divider valve and connect a
line to drain overboard.
(2) Disconnect fuel supply line at inlet connection on fuel control assembly and connect a low
pressure (2 to 5 PSIG (13.8 to 34.5 kPa)) source of filtered (10 micron nominal) Univolt 60,
preservative oil or MIL-PRF-6081, lubricating oil to inlet connector.
STARTER-GENERATOR.
(3) De-energize ignition system, then motor engine with starter-generator until clean oil flows from
overboard drain line.
stop.
(4) Disconnect oil supply line from fuel inlet port on fuel pump assembly and cap inlet port. Allow
residual oil to drain from fuel pump assembly and lines.
(5) Disconnect overboard drain line and reconnect fuel line between fuel flow divider valve and fuel
control assembly.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY STORAGE
ALL Page 12007
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(6) Drain engine lubricating oil, observing applicable procedures given in SERVICING (PGBLK
72-00-00-11000). Allow the engine to stand until all the excess oil has drained.
CAUTION: FUEL FILTER ELEMENT, PN 897513-1, IS A NON-CLEANABLE TYPE FILTER
ELEMENT AS IDENTIFIED ON BOTTOM OF FILTER ELEMENT, REMOVE AND
REPLACE WITH NEW FILTER ELEMENT.

(7) Remove fuel filter element. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-21-03-3000).

(8) Dip new fuel filter element in clean, approved engine oil before installation. Refer to AFM for
approved oil.
(9) Install new fuel filter element. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-21-03-4000).
(10) Remove filter from flow divider valve and inspect. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-07-3000)
and INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 73-10-07-8000).
(11) Dip filter in clean, approved engine oil before installation. Refer to AFM for approved oil.
(12) Clean and reinstall, or replace filter. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 73-10-07-6000) and
(13) Remove and inspect oil filter element. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-02-3000) and
(14) Dip oil filter element in clean, approved engine oil before installation. Refer to AFM for approved
oil.
(15) Install new oil filter element. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 79-20-02-4000).
(16) Wipe all fuel and oil from engine.
(17) Apply CRC 3-36, corrosion-preventive compound or Supertech ST-A, corrosion-preventive
compound on fuel control assembly, controls linkage assembly, gearcase, and exposed metal
parts.
(18) Install covers over air intake and exhaust openings.

(19) Install plugs and dust covers on all line openings, wires, and exposed sections.
(20) Wrap engine in greaseproof barrier material and seal all openings to prevent entrance of foreign
material.
(21) Place engine in vapor-proof barrier material with four bags of desiccant and two PN MX-56789,
humidity indicator card. Install PN TA356-40, humidity indicator plug on vapor-proof barrier
material.
(22) Seal vapor-proof barrier material seam using Metric Model HS-B, sealer.
(23) Cut an opening big enough for vacuum line into vapor-proof barrier material. Insert vacuum line
and evacuate vapor-proof barrier material until snug against engine.
(24) Carefully remove vacuum line to maintain the vacuum. Seal opening in vapor-proof barrier
material using Metric Model HS-B, sealer.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY STORAGE
ALL Page 12008
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(25) Secure PN S8145-15, warning tag to vapor-proof barrier material indicating preservation
procedures have been performed including preservation of fuel system with Univolt 60,
preservative oil or MIL-PRF-6081, lubricating oil.
(26) Check humidity indicator plug every 30 days.
(a) If humidity indicator plug changes from blue to pink, vapor-proof barrier material must be
opened and engine inspected for rust or corrosion.
(b) If rust or corrosion is evident, take appropriate corrective action.
(27) Represerve engine. Refer to the following steps after completing engine inspection.
(a) Wrap engine in greaseproof barrier material and seal all openings to prevent entrance of
foreign material.
(b) Place engine in vapor-proof barrier material with four bags of desiccant and two PN
MX-56789, humidity indicator card. Install PN TA356-40, humidity indicator plug on
vapor-proof barrier material.
(c) Seal vapor-proof barrier material seam using Metric Model HS-B, sealer.
(d) Cut an opening big enough for vacuum line into vapor-proof barrier material. Insert vacuum
line and evacuate vapor-proof barrier material until snug against engine.
(e) Carefully remove vacuum line to maintain the vacuum. Seal opening in vapor-proof barrier
material using Metric Model HS-B, sealer.
(f) Secure PN S8145-15, warning tag to vapor-proof barrier material indicating preservation
procedures have been performed including preservation of fuel system with Univolt 60,
preservative oil or MIL-PRF-6081, lubricating oil.
(28) Engines preserved as stated above must be removed from preservation storage every 2 years.
NOTE: Engines received from Honeywell have been preserved. This preservation should
be adequate under normal conditions for a period of 2 years.
(a) Perform depreservation procedure. Refer to Paragraph 2.C. Depreserve Engine After
Installation or When Required (Subtask 72-00-00-550-005-A01).
(b) Represerve engine. Refer to Paragraph 2.K. Preserve Removed Engine (Inactive 60 Days
or More) (Subtask 72-00-00-550-013-A01).
L. Preservation (Engine Removed From Aircraft) in a Corrosive Environment, Extreme Wet

Conditions, or Salt Atmosphere (Subtask 72-00-00-550-014-A01)
(1) If engine will not be IMMEDIATELY installed, preserve engine. Refer to Paragraph 2.K. Preserve
Removed Engine (Inactive 60 Days or More) (Subtask 72-00-00-550-013-A01).
M. Job Close-up (Subtask 72-00-00-550-017-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY STORAGE
ALL Page 12009
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT ENGINE – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test engine.
Valhalla volt/frequency meter CAGE: 53504
cellulose-tipped hammer commercially available
digital voltmeter (capable of range commercially available

from -1 to +10 VDC with accuracy
of +/-0.005 volts)
high-pass/low-pass filter (required commercially available

frequency range is 110 to 2,000 Hz
with a roll off slope of at least 24
dB/octave characteristic of a 4 pole
filter)
millivoltmeter commercially available

accuracy)

690 kPa) (with +0.1/-0.2 percent
accuracy)



UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13001. Special Tools, Fixtures, and Equipment (Cont)

sling (able to hold up to 120 pounds commercially available

(54 kg) of weights, used to weight
propeller blade during NTS trip
system check)
voltmeter commercially available
water manometer (0 to 100 inches commercially available

H2O delta P)
weight - 13 pounds (5.9 kg) (+/-1 commercially available

pound (+/-0.45 kg), used to weight
system check)

system check)

system check)

system check)

pounds (+/-0.91 kg), used to weight
system check)

system check)
Model 1811F pitot-static tester CAGE: 21844

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13002
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 199KF temperature indicator (8 to 28 VDC, CAGE: 29907

used to indicate fuel temperature
and compressor discharge
temperature (T3), component of PN
296399-1 TPE recompensation
adapter kit)
PN 24661-255 beaker (component of PN 296399-1 CAGE: 06848

recompensation adapter kit which
is used to allow on-wing
recompensation of the EGT system)
PN 283997-3 torquemeter (Load Cell, Lebow CAGE: 06848

(used to obtain torque indication
from propeller shaft), component of
PN 291862-2)
PN 284542-2-1 PT3/TT3 probe assembly (used to CAGE: 06848

sense P3 and compressor
discharge temperature indication
during testing)
PN 284548-1-1 aircraft engine test stand (used to CAGE: 06848

support engine during propeller
testing)
PN 284689-1-1 geartrain lock (used to lock CAGE: 06848

geartrain during positive and
negative torque adjustment)
PN 284689-2-1 geartrain lock (used to lock CAGE: 06848

geartrain when performing NTS trip
check)
PN 285354-1-1 turbine vibration pickup mount (used CAGE: 06848

to provide an oriented base for
attaching a vibration pickup to
monitor engine turbine end during
vibration check)
PN 285374-1-1 gearcase vibration pickup mount CAGE: 06848

(used to provide an oriented base
for attaching a vibration pickup to
monitor engine gearbox during
vibration check)
PN 291862-3 torque test kit (used to establish CAGE: 06848

new raw torque (contains load cell)
(Lebow))
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13003
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 292156-1 digital torque indicator (used to CAGE: 06848

display torque indication from
torquemeter, component of PN
291862-2)
PN 292158-1 electrical cable (used to connect CAGE: 06848

torquemeter and digital torque
indicator, component of PN
291862-2)


PN 294626-11 extended beta tube assembly CAGE: 06848

(consists of beta tube, PN 897659-1
or PN 832733-1 used on McCauley
propeller with load cell (Lebow) that
is 5.68 inches (144.3 mm) in length
and PN 296974-3 load cell spacer,
PN 296974-5 load cell spacer, or
with load cell (Lebow) that is 6.68
inches (169.7 mm) in length and PN
296974-1 load cell spacer)
PN 295471-1 cable assembly (used to connect CAGE: 06848

PN 294562-1 SRL tester to engine)
PN 295471-2 cable assembly (used to connect CAGE: 06848

PN 294562-2 SRL tester to engine)
PN 295839-1 signal amplifier (used to provide CAGE: 06848

pressure and temperature indication
during testing, components of PN
296399-1 TPE recompensation
adapter kit)
PN 295844-1 flowmeter assembly (used to sense CAGE: 06848

fuel flow during testing)
PN 295885-1 depth set tool (used to set depth of CAGE: 06848

PN 284542-2-1 PT3/TT3 probe
assembly)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13004
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 296399-1 recompensation adapter kit (used CAGE: 06848

to obtain raw SG measurement and
fuel temperature)
PN 296399-11 pressure and temperature sensing CAGE: 06848

probe (used to sense compressor
discharge temperature and pressure
during test cell operation)
PN 296399-2 TPE recompensation adapter kit CAGE: 06848

(consists of several items of special
test equipment to allow on-wing
PN 296399-51 T2/Tfuel probe assembly (used to CAGE: 06848

sense engine T2 during testing, and
also to sense fuel temperature when
correcting SG to 60°F (16°C),
components of PN 296399-2 TPE
recompensation adapter kit)
PN 296740-1 recompensation tester assembly CAGE: 06848

(used to provide optional test panel
and related components that can
be used to accomplish EGT
recompensation, components of this
kit that are required for EGT
recompensation can be obtained
individually)
PN 296974-1 load cell spacer (used on propeller CAGE: 06848

inches (169.7 mm) in length)


PN 298430-2 inlet duct (TPE, used to provide CAGE: 06848

uniform airflow)
PN 34629-011 SG float (component of PN CAGE: 06848

296399-1 recompensation adapter
kit which is used to allow on-wing
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13005
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 831368-1 sixteen-probe tailpipe (consists of CAGE: 06848

EGT tailpipe with 16 individual
probes for measuring Tt5
temperature. Also, has capability for
measuring PS5 pressure)
S9413-142 packing (used on torquemeter prior CAGE: 06848

to installing propeller, component of
PN 291862-2)


APPLICABLE.
Glyptal 1201 enamel CAGE: 65313
MS180/Co2 Freon TF trichlorotrifluoroethane solvent CAGE: 3H721

(aerosol)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-00-700-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13006
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: REFER TO PARAGRAPH 2.C. CERTIFICATED ENGINE OPERATING LIMITATIONS

(SUBTASK 72-00-00-700-005-A01). SHUT THE ENGINE DOWN IMMEDIATELY IF
OPERATING LIMITS ARE EXCEEDED, OR IF UNUSUAL ENGINE NOISES,
VIBRATION, SMOKE, OR FIRE ARE EXPERIENCED OR IF FUEL OR OIL LEAKAGE
IS NOTED. DIAGNOSE AND CORRECT ANY MALFUNCTION OR CONDITION
PRIOR TO ATTEMPTING ANOTHER START.
CAUTION: IF INDICATED EGT IS IN EXCESS OF 392°F (200°C), THE ENGINE MAY BE

MOTORED WITHOUT FUEL AND IGNITION UNTIL EITHER 392°F (200°C) OR 15
PERCENT ENGINE RPM IS ATTAINED, AT WHICH TIME A START MAY BE
INITIATED.
CAUTION: IF ENGINE COMBUSTION SECTION CONTAINS EXCESSIVE FUEL OR FUEL

VAPOR, ALLOW AT LEAST 3 MINUTES FOR DRAINING OR CLEARING FUEL
BEFORE ATTEMPTING A RESTART OR MOTOR ENGINE TO CLEAR FUEL. REFER
TO INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED IN APPLICABLE AFM.
CAUTION: UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES ALLOW ENGINE TO EXCEED 106 PERCENT RPM.
CAUTION: THE OPERATOR MUST BE FAMILIAR WITH ALL EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

NOTED IN APPLICABLE AFM, ESPECIALLY THOSE RELATED DIRECTLY TO
GROUND OPERATIONS.
CAUTION: ON INITIAL ENGINE START FOLLOWING INSTALLATION OF FUEL CONTROL

ASSEMBLY, FUEL CONTROL UNIT, OR FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY, BE PREPARED
TO SHUT DOWN ENGINE IF UNCONTROLLABLE ACCELERATION SHOULD
OCCUR DUE TO IMPROPER INSTALLATION.
CAUTION: FUEL-PURGE SYSTEM WILL NOT TOTALLY PURGE UNLESS A MINIMUM OF 95

PERCENT ENGINE RPM IS ATTAINED DURING THE OPERATIONAL CYCLE.
CAUTION: FUEL-PURGE SYSTEM REQUIRES ACTUATION OF THE “STOP” CIRCUIT FOR 5

SECONDS MINIMUM OR UNTIL ENGINE SPEED DECREASES BELOW GROUND
IDLE SPEED. THE ENGINE RPM SHOULD INCREASE WITH ACTUATION OF THE
STOP CIRCUIT AND DECAY WHEN THE MANIFOLD FUEL IS DEPLETED.
ACTUATION OF THE STOP SWITCH FOLLOWING MANUAL SHUTDOWN WILL
RESULT IN FUEL ACCUMULATION IN THE PLENUM. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT
THE ELECTRICAL SHUTDOWN CIRCUITS NOT BE ACTIVATED UNTIL ENGINE
COOLING PRECLUDES COMBUSTION OR IN THE CASE OF INITIAL ENGINE
OPERATION WITH INTENTIONAL MANUAL SHUTDOWNS REQUIRED, THE PURGE
SYSTEM MAY BE DISABLED.
(1) This section includes engine operating information relative to pre-start through shutdown
procedures pursuant to operational checks and adjustments. The NTS procedures and checks
are shown in Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures and Table 13004, Required NTS Checks.
Engine operation limitations are listed in Paragraph 2.C. Certificated Engine Operating Limitations
(Subtask 72-00-00-700-005-A01). The individual procedures can be performed when required
by other sections of this MM if necessary to establish engine operation within the limits specified
by the AFM or when required at periodic intervals as referenced in periodic inspection
requirements. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-00-00-8000). When specific procedures
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13007
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
are required following replacement of an engine component, these procedures are referenced
in the applicable chapter/section/subject covering the component replaced.
NOTE: To satisfy high quality operational standards, and make sure of the accuracy of
readings obtained during the test and calibration of equipment, it is recommended
that all instrumentation and gages to be used, be checked on a periodic basis against
instrumentation and gages of known accuracy.
NOTE: Following any maintenance performed on engine, confirm normal operation by starting
and operating engine. Refer to AFM.
Table 13003. Matrix of NTS Procedures
Action That Requires NTS Check Required NTS Check as Listed in Table 13004
After engine installation. Checks A, B, E, F, H and G or I
After installation of fuel shutoff valve or fuel shutoff valve Checks A and B
actuating arm.
After installation or disassembly of MFV. Checks A, B, and G
After disconnection or adjustment to engine/airframe Checks A and B
rigging.
After PG installation or replacement of PG shaft packing. Checks E, F, and G
After PPC installation. Checks E and G
After installation of the torque load assembly. Check G or I
After installation of the orifice pack. Checks E, F, and G
After installation of the NTS valve. Check G or I
NOTE: The required NTS checks must be performed after each action or combination of
actions listed and anytime they are required by the AFM.
NOTE: Check I includes accomplishment of Checks A, B, and E through H.
NOTE: Check G may be accomplished instead of performing Check I.
NOTE: Honeywell does not recommend that Check I be performed on engines intended for
use in single engine aircraft operations. Perform Check G instead of Check I. All
other NTS checks apply.
Table 13004. Required NTS Checks
Who Can
Check Procedure Name Location Purpose Perform Remarks
A. Emergency INSPECTION/CHECK Verifies proper stroke of Mechanic Requires access
shutdown system (PGBLK 72-00-00-8000) MFV, and rigging of under cowl.
check MFV and fuel shutoff
valve.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13008
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13004. Required NTS Checks (Cont)
Who Can
B. MFV/fuel shutoff Paragraph 2.E. MFV/Fuel Verifies that propeller Mechanic or pilot Static test using
valve test Shutoff Valve Test can be feathered and unfeather pump,
(Subtask that fuel shutoff valve performed in
72-00-00-700-007-A01) opens afterwards as cockpit. Requires
evidenced by gage under cowl.
subsequent successful
ground start.
C. Deleted. This test cannot be performed statically on strain gage torque sensor engines.
D. Deleted. This check is replaced by Check G.
E. PG reset function Paragraph 2.AH. PG Verifies during engine Mechanic Requires
and NTS lockout Reset Function and NTS run that PG oil pump is pressure gage
system pressure Lockout System Pressure providing oil pressure to under cowl during
check Check (Subtask NTS system including engine ground
72-00-00-700-036-A01) PG reset line and that run.
NTS lockout valve opens
to dump PG reset
pressure when power
lever brought below
flight idle.
F. Supplementary Paragraph 2.I. Verifies during engine Mechanic or pilot Performed in
NTS check Supplementary NTS run that PG reset has cockpit.
procedure Check Procedure not occurred (possibly
(Subtask caused by plugged NTS
72-00-00-700-011-A01) orifice) by observing
proper governing at low
PG set point.
G. NTS trip system Paragraph 2.H. NTS Trip Verifies that the torque Mechanic Requires removal
check System Check (Subtask load assemblies and of the
72-00-00-700-010-A01) NTS valve are properly starter-generator
adjusted. and installation of
the geartrain lock.
Also requires
installation of
pressure gages
under cowl and
application of
deadweights to
the propeller
blade.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13009
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13004. Required NTS Checks (Cont)
Who Can
H. Manual Check of Paragraph 2.F. MFV Test Verifies that the feather Mechanic or pilot Performed in
MFV Prior to Prior To Engine Start valve can be manually cockpit.
Engine Start (Subtask opened and closed from
72-00-00-700-008-A01) the cockpit and that the
fuel shutoff valve opens
afterwards as evidenced
by subsequent
successful ground start.
I. NTS System Paragraph 2.G. NTS Verifies proper NTS and Mechanic (A, B, Requires
Check by Flight System Check By Flight airstart characteristics. and E through H), pressure gage
Check Check (Subtask (This check includes pilot (I) under cowl during
72-00-00-700-009-A01) accomplishment of engine ground
Checks A, B, and E run and an inflight
through H.) check by pilot.
C. Certificated Engine Operating Limitations (Subtask 72-00-00-700-005-A01)
CAUTION: SHUT THE ENGINE DOWN IMMEDIATELY IF OPERATING LIMITS ARE EXCEEDED,
OR IF UNUSUAL ENGINE NOISES, VIBRATION, SMOKE OR FIRE ARE
EXPERIENCED, OR IF FUEL OR OIL LEAKAGE IS NOTED. DIAGNOSE AND
CORRECT ANY MALFUNCTION OR ABNORMAL CONDITION PRIOR TO
ATTEMPTING ANOTHER START.
CAUTION: LIMITATIONS CONTAINED IN THIS SECTION REFER TO THE ENGINE ONLY. THE
AMM OR AFM SHOULD BE CONSULTED FOR ADDITIONAL AIRCRAFT-REQUIRED
ENGINE LIMITATIONS. ALL VALUES ARE STEADY STATE EXCEPT AS NOTED.
(1) The following tables list corrective actions required when certificated engine operating limits are
exceeded.
(2) Refer to Table 13005 for engine light-off times.
Table 13005. Light-off Time (From 10 Percent Speed to Light-Off)
Condition Operating Limit Action if Exceeded

1 Approximately 10 seconds. Abort start.
Ground starts
1 Approximately 15 seconds. Abort start.
Air starts
NOTES:
1. From 10 percent RPM to light-off.
(3) Refer to Table 13006 for engine oil pressure limitations.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13010
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13006. Oil Pressure Limitations

1 2 70 to 120 PSIG (483 to 827 kPa) at Shut down as soon as possible.
Oil pressure
normal operating temperature range.
1 2 50 PSIG (345 kPa) minimum above Shut down as soon as possible.
Oil pressure
23,000 feet (7,010 m).
1 2 40 PSIG (276 kPa) minimum at Shut down as soon as possible.
Oil pressure
ground idle.
NOTES:
1. Transients below 40 PSIG (276 kPa) are permissible at ground idle low.
2. Transient oil pressure in excess of 120 PSI (827 kPa) can occur during cold weather starting.
(4) Refer to Table 13007 for engine oil and fuel pressure fluctuation limitations.
Table 13007. Pressure Fluctuations (When Using Direct Reading Gage)

1 +/-5.0 PSIG (+/-34.5 kPa) (At steady Shut down as soon as possible.
Oil
RPM).
1 +/-25.0 PSI (+/-172.4 kPa) (At idle Shut down as soon as possible.
Fuel
2
RPM).
1 +/-5.0 PSI (+/-34.5 kPa) (At takeoff Shut down as soon as possible.
Fuel
2
and cruise RPM).
NOTES:
1. When using direct reading gage.
2. Pressure reading taken between fuel shutoff and fuel flow divider valves.
(5) Refer to Table 13008 for aviation gasoline.
Table 13008. Aviation Gasoline

Use of aviation gasoline Refer to AFM. Accomplish fuel control/fuel pump
mating spline inspection. Refer to
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
73-20-01-8000).
(6) Refer to Table 13009 for ambient temperature range limitations.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13011
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13009. Ambient Temperature Range Limitations

Starting -40 to 130°F (-40 to 55°C) Do not attempt start.
Operation Maximum 130°F (55°C). No Refer to AFM.
minimum limit.
(7) Refer to Table 13010 for Type I oil temperature limitations.

NOTE: Starting the engine at oil temperature as low as -40°F (-40°C) is permitted providing
adequate cranking torque is provided and the fuel viscosity is lower than 12
centistokes. Exceeding ground idle power at low oil temperature is not advisable due
to fuel icing and in the interest of optimum engine and lubricant performance.
NOTE: If the temperature limit for normal continuous operation is exceeded, reduce engine
torque (if possible) to lower oil temperature.
Table 13010. Type I Oil Temperature Limitations, MIL-PRF-7808

1 Below -40°F (-40°C) normal engine Pre-heat engine to obtain minimum
Type I oil
start may not be possible. oil temperature of -40°F (-40°C).
1 -40 to 130°F (-40 to 55°C) Operation
Type I oil
allowed during engine start and
warm-up.
1 130 to 174°F (55 to 79°C) Normal Perform SOAP check prior to next
Type I oil
continuous ground and flight flight if operating above 86% torque
operation. and oil temperature is above 174°F
(79°C).
1 174 to 199°F (79 to 93°C) 5-minute flight operation limit is
Type I oil
Continuous ground operation exceeded, perform SOAP check
allowed if below 86% torque. Flight within 25 flight hours. Operation with
operation allowed for 5 minutes oil temperature between 199 and
when operating at or below 86% 302°F (93 and 150°C) requires a
torque. SOAP check prior to next flight.
1 If 302°F (150°C) or greater Accomplish oil over temperature
Type I oil
inspection prior to next flight. Refer
to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-00-00-8000).
NOTES:
1. Refer to AFM for approved oil.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13012
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(8) Refer to Table 13011 for Type II oil temperature limitations.

NOTE: Starting the engine at oil temperature as low as -40°F (-40°C) is permitted providing
adequate cranking torque is provided and the fuel viscosity is lower than 12
centistokes. Exceeding ground idle power at low oil temperature is not advisable due
to fuel icing and in the interest of optimum engine and lubricant performance.
NOTE: If the temperature limit for normal continuous operation is exceeded, reduce engine
torque (if possible) to lower oil temperature.
Table 13011. Type II Oil Temperature Limitations, MIL-PRF-23699

1 Below -40°F (-40°C) normal engine Pre-heat engine to obtain minimum
Type II oil
start may not be possible. oil temperature of -40°F (-40°C).
1 -40 to 130°F (-40 to 55°C) Operation
Type II oil
allowed during engine start and
warm-up.
1 130 to 230°F (55 to 110°C) Normal Perform SOAP check prior to next
Type II oil
continuous ground and flight flight if operating above 86% torque
operation. and oil temperature is above 230°F
(110°C).
1 230 to 260°F (110 to 127°C) 5-minute flight operation limit is
Type II oil
Continuous ground operation exceeded, perform SOAP check
allowed if below 86% torque. Flight within 25 flight hours.
operation allowed for 5 minutes
when operating at or below 86%
torque.
1 If 260 to 284°F (127 to 140°C). Perform SOAP check within 25 flight
Type II oil
hours if operation is at or below 86%
torque and for 30 seconds or less.
Perform SOAP check prior to next
flight if operation is above 86%
torque or exceeds 30 seconds.
1 If 284 to 302°F (140 to 150°C). Perform SOAP check prior to next
Type II oil
flight.
1 If 302°F (150°C) or greater. Accomplish oil over temperature
Type II oil
inspection prior to next flight. Refer
72-00-00-8000).
NOTES:
1. Refer to AFM for approved oil.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13013
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(9) Refer to Table 13012 for engine EGT limitations.

NOTE: If indicated EGT is in excess of 393°F (200°C) the engine may be motored without
fuel and ignition until either 393°F (200°C) or 15 percent RPM is attained at which
time a start may be initiated.
Table 13012. EGT Limitations

Starting 1,418°F (770°C) Abort start. 1,418 to 1,429°F (770 to
776°C) in excess of 1 second,
conduct a takeoff power check to
determine satisfactory operation; in
excess of 3 seconds or over 1,429°F
(776°C) at anytime, perform turbine
over temperature inspection. Refer
72-00-00-8000).
Ground operation 65 to 80% RPM 1,364°F (740°C) Continuous ground Reduce power.
operation allowed.
Ground operation 65 to 80% RPM 1,364 to 1,382°F (740 to 750°C) If 10 second limit is exceeded,
allowed for 10 seconds. perform turbine over temperature
inspection. Refer to
72-00-00-8000).
Ground operation 65 to 80% RPM 1,382 to 1,418°F (750 to 770°C) If temperature spikes between 1,382
Temperature spikes up to 1,418°F and 1,418°F (750 and 770°C)
(770°C) allowed for a maximum of exceed 2 seconds, perform turbine
2 seconds on transition from over temperature inspection. Refer
compensated EGT to SRL operation. to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
This transition occurs in the RPM 72-00-00-8000).
range of 78 to 82% RPM.
Takeoff and maximum continuous Auto Mode: 1,202°F (650°C) 0 to 45°F (0 to 25°C) overlimit,
at 100% RPM reduce power.
Takeoff and maximum continuous Manual Mode: refer to AFM. 45 to 63°F (25 to 35°C) overlimit for
at 100% RPM 20 seconds, reduce power.
Takeoff and maximum continuous Manual Mode: refer to AFM. In excess of 20 seconds over 45 to
at 100% RPM 63°F (25 to 35°C) conduct power
check to determine satisfactory
performance.
Takeoff and maximum continuous Manual Mode: refer to AFM. 63 to 67°F (35 to 37°C) overlimit for
at 100% RPM 5 seconds, conduct power check.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13014
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13012. EGT Limitations (Cont)

Takeoff and maximum continuous Manual Mode: refer to AFM. In excess of 5 seconds over 63 to
at 100% RPM 67°F (35 to 37°C) or over 67°F
(37°C) overlimit at anytime, perform
turbine over temperature inspection.
Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK
(PGBLK 72-00-00-8000).
(10) Refer to Table 13013 for engine rotor speed limitations.
Table 13013. Rotor Speed Limitations

100.0% Continuous Adjust engine speed lever.
101.0% Continuous Correct to within limits by movement
of engine speed lever. Adjust linkage
and/or PG maximum setting.
101.0 to 101.5% 5 minutes Reduce engine RPM. Record time
in excess of 5 minutes above limit in
engine log book.
101.5 to 105.5% 30 seconds Reduce engine RPM. Record time
in excess of 30 seconds in engine
log book.
105.5 to 106.0% 5 seconds Perform overspeed inspection. Refer
72-00-00-8000).
106.0% Never exceed Perform overspeed inspection. Refer
72-00-00-8000).
(11) Refer to Table 13014 for engine over torque limitations.
Table 13014. Over Torque Limitations

1,050 to 1,100 SHP (3,466 to 3,631 5 minutes Reduce torque within limits and
ft-lb (4,699 to 4,923 Nm)) perform SOAP analysis within next
25 flight hours.
1,100 to 1,120 SHP (3,632 to 3,699 15 seconds Reduce torque within limits and
ft-lb (4924 to 5,015 Nm)) perform SOAP analysis within next
25 flight hours.
1,120 to 1,143 SHP (3,700 to 3,772 5 seconds Reduce torque within limits and
25 flight hours.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13015
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13014. Over Torque Limitations (Cont)

1,143 to 1,168 SHP (3,773 to 3,857 Anytime Reduce torque within limits and
25 flight hours.
1,169 SHP (3,858 ft-lb (5,231 Nm)) Anytime Prior to next flight, perform gearbox
inspection. Magnetic particle inspect
propeller shaft coupling. Refer to
(12) Refer to Table 13015 for windmilling limitations.

NOTE: Reverse rotation of engine is not permitted.
Table 13015. Windmilling Limitations

0 to 5% RPM Continuous Feather propeller or reduce airspeed
to bring within limits.
5 to 10% RPM 30 minutes maximum Feather propeller or reduce airspeed
10 to 18% RPM 5 minutes maximum Feather propeller or reduce airspeed
18 to 28% RPM CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW Feather propeller.
ENGINE TO
WINDMILL
BETWEEN 18 AND
28 PERCENT RPM
EXCEPT FOR
TRANSIENT OF
THIS RANGE
DURING START
AND SHUTDOWN
AS THIS IS A
CRITICAL RPM
RANGE.
28 to 100% RPM 1 minute maximum Feather propeller.
(13) Refer to Table 13016 PG setting limitations.
Table 13016. PG Setting Limitations

Static takeoff setting of PG 99.0 to 101.0% Adjust PG maximum settings prior
to next flight.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13016
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13016. PG Setting Limitations (Cont)

Static minimum setting of PG. 94.0 to 95.0% Adjust PG prior to next flight.
Stabilized in-flight engine RPM with 100.0 to 101.0% 1. Adjust engine speed lever to
speed lever at takeoff position. within limits.
2. Adjust PG prior to next flight.
Minimum in-flight setting 95.5 to 96% 1. Adjust speed lever within limits.
2. Adjust PG prior to next flight.
Static maximum USFG setting with 96.0 to 97.0% Adjust USFG settings prior to next
engine speed lever at takeoff and flight.
power lever set at ground idle.
Static maximum USFG setting with Refer to AMM for limit. Adjust USFG.
engine speed lever at taxi and power
lever set at ground idle.
OSFG setting 104.0 to 105.0% Refer to rotor overspeed limits. Shut
down engine and adjust OSFG to
within limits.
(14) Refer to Table 13017 for engine full reverse limitations.
Table 13017. Full Reverse Limitations

Maximum airspeed Refer to AFM for reverse operational Set power lever at ground idle until
limit. the aircraft has slowed below
reverse operational limit.
Landing minimum static minimum 93.0% RPM. Return power lever to ground idle
position if engine speed drops below
limits.
(15) Refer to Table 13018 for beta light limitations.
Table 13018. Beta Light Limitations

Beta light (at normal operating oil Beta light must be on when Fault isolate as soon as possible for
temperature) operating in the Beta range at low Beta pressure or switch
engine speeds of 85% and above. malfunction.
At speeds below 85%, this is not
required.
(16) Refer to Table 13019 for engine leakage limitations.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13017
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13019. Leakage Limitations

Fuel Refer to FAULT ISOLATION Fault isolate fuel system.
(PGBLK 72-00-00-1000) for
allowable leakage.
Oil Refer to FAULT ISOLATION Fault isolate oil system.
(PGBLK 72-00-00-1000) for
allowable leakage.
(17) Refer to Table 13020 for engine ignition limitations.
Table 13020. Ignition Limitations

Ignition Refer to AFM.
(18) Refer to Table 13021 for additional operating limitations.
Table 13021. Additional Engine Operating Limitations

Sudden stoppage or externally Any deceleration of the engine due Shut down engine. Refer to
induced engine deceleration to impact with any object. INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-00-00-8000).
Cooling prior to shutdown 3 minutes at idle or below 20%
power (high RPM including Descent,
Approach, Landing Roll, and Taxi).
Cooling prior to shutdown If reverse power is used and
exceeds 20% power (stabilized), the
3-minute cooling period commences
at engine power reduction.
Water methanol Refer to AFM for operating limits. Refer to AFM for appropriate action.
D. Engine Operational Checks (Subtask 72-00-00-700-006-A01)
NOTE: The operational procedures for the engine are presented here in a general, non-specific
format for convenient use by maintenance personnel. It is realized that these procedures
will seldom be used directly for installed aircraft-engine operation as the AFM, which deals
with the operation of the aircraft as a system, is normally used for this purpose. The
operational procedures contained in this section are intended for use as a basic guide to
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13018
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
the fundamentals of engine operation and do not supersede information contained in the
AFM and AMM.
NOTE: The operation of various switches and controls is described with reference to a function
performed at the engine and does not reflect a specific installation. Consult the applicable
AFM for cockpit controls configuration and operational procedures.
NOTE: For check requiring engine operation, start and shut down engine. Refer to AFM, unless
NOTE: Oil temperature must be within normal operating temperature range for all operational
checks unless otherwise specified in AMM.
(1) Engine leakage check. Visually check the engine for evidence of fuel and oil leaks. If leakage
is apparent, proceed as follows:
NOTE: Conical seals may be used at any flared tubing fitting of appropriate size in fuel and
oil systems as a repair to correct leakage at the option of the user. Refer to
ASSEMBLY (PGBLK 70-00-00-10000).
(a) Clean all excess fuel, oil, or grease from the exterior of the engine after any known leaks
have been corrected.
(b) Start the engine and accelerate to ground idle speed.
(c) Release start locks and operate engine, as required, to determine if any leaks exist.
(d) Shut down engine and check for evidence of external leakage that may be in excess of
the limits. Refer to FAULT ISOLATION (PGBLK 72-00-00-1000). Correct any out-of-limits
leakage and check again.
E. MFV/Fuel Shutoff Valve Test (Subtask 72-00-00-700-007-A01)
WARNING: PROPER MFV OPERATION IS ESSENTIAL FOR SAFETY OF FLIGHT. THE FOLLOWING
PROCEDURE VERIFIES THAT THE MFV CAN BE MANUALLY OPERATED FROM THE
COCKPIT. IMPROPER OPERATION MAY RESULT IN INABILITY TO FEATHER THE
PROPELLER AND, IF ACCOMPANIED BY NTS MALFUNCTION, WILL RESULT IN
AIRCRAFT CONTROL DIFFICULTIES.
of MFV, or installation of fuel shutoff valve or fuel shutoff valve actuating arm. Also, after
installation or adjustment to MFV or fuel shutoff valve linkage. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix
of NTS Procedures and Table 13004, Required NTS Checks, Check B.
(1) Remove cap at Position B. Refer to Figure 13001. Install a pressure gage, 0 to 500 PSIG (0 to
3,447 kPa).
(2) Engine – Prior to engine start (not running).
(3) Power lever – Flight Idle.
(4) Unfeather pump – Activate.
(5) Verify that the pressure on the test gage is greater than 120 PSI (827 kPa).
(6) MFV – Pull to feather.
(7) Verify that the pressure on the test gage drops below 50 PSI (345 kPa).
(8) MFV – Reset.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13019
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(9) Verify that the pressure on the test gage returns to observed pressure (greater than 120 PSI
(827 kPa)).
(10) Unfeather pump – OFF.
(11) Remove the test gage and install cap.
(12) Perform engine start. Refer to AFM to verify proper fuel shutoff valve operation.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13020
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13001. (Sheet 1 of 1) NTS Test (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13021
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
F. MFV Test Prior To Engine Start (Subtask 72-00-00-700-008-A01)
WARNING: PROPER FEATHER VALVE OPERATION IS ESSENTIAL FOR SAFETY OF FLIGHT.

THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE VERIFIES THAT THE FEATHER VALVE CAN BE
MANUALLY OPERATED FROM THE COCKPIT. IMPROPER OPERATION MAY RESULT
IN INABILITY TO FEATHER THE PROPELLER AND, IF ACCOMPANIED BY NTS
MALFUNCTION, WILL RESULT IN AIRCRAFT CONTROL DIFFICULTIES.
of feather valve, or installation of fuel control or fuel control manual shutoff valve actuating
arm and after installation or adjustment to feather valve or fuel control manual shutoff valve
linkage. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures and Table 13004, Required NTS
Checks, Check H.
(1) Engine – Prior to engine start (not running).
(2) Power Lever – Full reverse.
(3) Unfeather Pump – Activate.
(4) Propeller – Visually observe movement toward reverse pitch.
(5) MFV – Pull to feather while observing propeller.
(6) Propeller – Visually observe return to start locks.
(7) MFV – Reset to normal.
(8) Unfeather Pump – OFF.
G. NTS System Check By Flight Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-009-A01)
WARNING: NEVER RETARD THE POWER LEVER BELOW THE FLIGHT IDLE DETENT IN-FLIGHT.
RETARDING THE POWER LEVER BELOW THE FLIGHT IDLE DETENT IN-FLIGHT MAY
RESULT IN AIRCRAFT CONTROL DIFFICULTIES. REFER TO THE AFM FOR IN-FLIGHT
OPERATIONS.
NOTE: The NTS trip system check may be accomplished instead of performing an NTS system
check by flight check. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures and Table 13004,
Required NTS Checks, Check I.
(1) Perform emergency shutdown system check. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-00-00-8000). This static check verifies proper MFV stroke and rigging of MFV/fuel shutoff
valve. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures and Table 13004, Required NTS Checks,
Check A.
(2) Perform MFV/fuel shutoff valve test. Refer to Paragraph 2.F. MFV Test Prior To Engine Start
(Subtask 72-00-00-700-008-A01), Engine Operational Checks. This static test verifies the
propeller can be feathered and, during a subsequent successful ground start, that the fuel shutoff
valve moves back to the auto position. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures and
Table 13004, Required NTS Checks, Check B.
(3) Perform NTS trip system check. Refer to Paragraph 2.H. NTS Trip System Check (Subtask
72-00-00-700-010-A01), Engine Operational Checks. This verifies that negative torque is properly
sensed and that the MFV actuates. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures and Table
13004, Required NTS Checks, Check G.
(4) Perform PG reset function and NTS lockout system pressure check. Refer to Paragraph 2.AH.
PG Reset Function and NTS Lockout System Pressure Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-036-A01),
Engine Functional Checks. This verifies that the PG is providing oil pressure to the NTS system,
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13022
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
including the PG reset line, and that the NTS lockout valve opens to dump PG reset pressure
when power lever is brought below flight idle. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures
and Table 13004, Required NTS Checks, Check E.
(5) Perform supplementary NTS check procedure. Refer to Paragraph 2.I. Supplementary NTS
Check Procedure (Subtask 72-00-00-700-011-A01), Engine Operational Checks. Verifies during
engine run that the PG reset has not occurred (possibly caused by a plugged NTS orifice) by
observing proper governing at low PG set point. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures
and Table 13004, Required NTS Checks, Check F.
(6) Perform manual check of the MFV prior to engine start. Refer to Paragraph 2.F. MFV Test Prior
To Engine Start (Subtask 72-00-00-700-008-A01), Engine Operational Checks. Verifies that the
MFV can be manually opened and closed from the cockpit. It also verifies, during a subsequent
successful ground start, that the fuel shutoff valve moves back to the auto position. Refer to
Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures and Table 13004, Required NTS Checks, Check H.
WARNING: DO NOT PROCEED TO NEXT STEP UNTIL PRECEDING STEPS ARE CARRIED
OUT SUCCESSFULLY, TO MAKE SURE OF PROPER NTS AND MFV OPERATION
BEFORE FLIGHT. IMPROPER OPERATION OF NTS OR MFV WILL RESULT IN
AIRCRAFT CONTROL DIFFICULTY. AN ADVERSE CONSEQUENCE OF THIS
TEST MAY BE AN INABILITY TO RESTART THE ENGINE, THEREFORE OPERATE
THE AIRCRAFT AT ALTITUDES AND CONDITIONS BEST SUITED FOR
OPERATION WITH AN ENGINE SHUT DOWN.
(7) Fly aircraft at altitudes and conditions best suited for intentional engine shutdown. Refer to AFM.
WARNING: NEVER RETARD THE POWER LEVER BELOW THE FLIGHT IDLE DETENT
IN-FLIGHT. RETARDING THE POWER LEVER BELOW THE FLIGHT IDLE DETENT
IN-FLIGHT MAY RESULT IN AIRCRAFT CONTROL DIFFICULTIES. REFER TO
THE AFM FOR IN-FLIGHT OPERATIONS.
(8) Reduce power on test engine and stabilize engine temperature for 1 minute.
(9) Actuate engine stop switch to close electrical fuel shutoff solenoid.
NOTE: These instructions refer to the engine under test only.
CAUTION: IF AIRCRAFT YAWS EXCESSIVELY, FEATHER PROPELLER.
CAUTION: IF AIRCRAFT CONTINUES TO YAW EXCESSIVELY, SET THE POWER LEVER

FULLY FORWARD (BETA FOLLOW-UP POSITION) TO MINIMIZE PROPELLER
DRAG.
(10) Note time engine RPM decelerates to approximately 35 percent RPM. Feather propeller at
approximately 35 percent RPM or at 1 minute.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW ENGINE TO WINDMILL IN RPM RANGE BETWEEN 18 AND 28
PERCENT.
(11) Engine RPM must decelerate to approximately 35 percent RPM in less than 60 seconds.
(12) Conduct normal air start. Refer to AFM.
(13) If NTS check is not satisfactory, refer to FAULT ISOLATION (PGBLK 72-00-00-1000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13023
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
H. NTS Trip System Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-010-A01)
NOTE: This check may be accomplished instead of performing an NTS system check by flight
check, assuming that the torque load assemblies and NTS valve have been adjusted.
Refer to the applicable maintenance practices during the assembly of the engine
components outlined in the note in Paragraph 2.G. NTS System Check By Flight Check
(Subtask 72-00-00-700-009-A01).
NOTE: This check may be performed to check the engine NTS system with the propeller installed
on engine and the engine removed or installed on airframe. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix
of NTS Procedures and Table 13004, Required NTS Checks, Check G.
NOTE: Make sure gages are located as close to the intended engine fittings as possible in order
to minimize line length and system volume. Excessive line length may result in slow system
response.
WARNING: ONE PURPOSE OF THIS CHECK IS TO VERIFY THAT THE NTS VALVE IS NOT
STICKING. AVOID ABRUPT OR REVERSE MOVEMENT OF THE PROPELLER
DURING THIS CHECK. ABRUPT OR REVERSE MOVEMENT OF THE PROPELLER
MAY TEMPORARILY FREE A STICKING NTS VALVE AND MAY RESULT IN AN
INADEQUATE CHECK FOR THE STICKING CONDITION.
WARNING: NTS VALVES THAT DO NOT COMPLY WITH THIS CHECK MUST BE REPLACED.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO FREE STICKING VALVE COMPONENTS BY USE OF
MECHANICAL FORCE OR BY DISASSEMBLY.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE TEE OR FITTINGS ARE HELD SECURELY WHEN REMOVING OR
INSTALLING CAPS AND TEST LINES. IF TEE OR FITTINGS ARE NOT SECURED,
UNDUE STRESS, BENDING AND POSSIBLE CRACKS IN ATTACHING PARTS MAY
RESULT.
(1) Remove caps at Positions A and B and connect a line with an inline tee between Position A
cross and Position B on housing assembly (beta). Install a pressure gage, 0 to 250 PSIG (0 to
1,724 kPa) to open port of the tee to measure NTS pressure. Refer to Figure 13002.
(2) Disconnect the auto-ignition switch line or cap and connect a pressure gage, 0 to 100 PSIG (0
to 690 kPa) to the NTS valve housing to measure auto-ignition port pressure. Refer to Position
E, Figure 13002.
(3) With the propeller on the locks, position propeller so one blade is parallel (horizontal) with the
ground and such that a weight hung from the propeller blade will be loading the propeller blade
in the direction of normal rotation.
(4) Remove starter-generator and install PN 284689-1-1, geartrain lock or PN 284689-2-1, geartrain
lock to prevent engine rotation.
(5) Set power lever above flight idle (more than 40 degrees).
(6) Position a sling arrangement on the horizontal propeller blade at 30 inches (762 mm) outboard
of the propeller centerline.
NOTE: Make sure that the sling is positioned on propeller blade 30 inches (762 mm) outboard
of the propeller centerline. This location may or may not correspond with the Flight
Idle station location on the propeller being used.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13024
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: IF THE UNFEATHERING PUMP IS OPERATED LONGER THAN 90 SECONDS, THE

ENGINE MUST BE MOTORED OR PROPELLER PULLED THROUGH (60 BLADES)
TO CLEAR OIL FROM THE GEARBOX.
(7) Energize the unfeathering pump and make sure that an NTS pressure of 100 to 140 PSIG (689
to 965 kPa) is indicated on the pressure gage, 0 to 250 PSIG (0 to 1,724 kPa) connected to the
tee between Positions A and B.
(8) Slowly hang a weight - 18 pounds (8.2 kg) and weight - 26 pounds (11.8 kg) to obtain a total
weight of 42 to 44 pounds (19.1 to 20.0 kg) on to the sling arrangement in the normal direction
of propeller rotation.
NOTE: One purpose of this check is to verify that the NTS valve is not sticking. Abrupt or
reverse movement of the propeller during this check may free a sticking NTS valve
and may result in an inadequate check for the sticking condition. Avoid rapid
movements in either direction when applying weights to the propeller. Apply weights
in a smooth and continuous fashion.
(9) Verify that no change in either the NTS and the auto-ignition port pressures occur for at least
10 seconds following application of the weight to the propeller. If changes to NTS and/or
auto-ignition port pressures occur, stop the check, remove weights, and adjust NTS load arm
settings. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-10-05-13000). Repeat this check after adjusting load
arm settings.
(10) Slowly add a weight - 14 pounds (6.4 kg) and weight - 43 pounds (19.5 kg) to obtain a total
weight of 56 to 58 pounds (25.4 to 26.3 kg) on the propeller.
(11) Verify that an NTS Trip occurs as the proper amount of weight is added. An NTS Trip is
characterized by an increase in auto-ignition port pressure of at least 50 PSIG (345 kPa) and a
perceptible drop (more than 10 PSIG (69 kPa)) in NTS pressure. Pressure indications may reset
and cycle following the initial trip actuation. Reset and cycling of pressure indications is allowed.
(12) If the NTS Trip does not occur, immediately add a weight - 38 pounds (17.2 kg) to increase the
total weight on the propeller to 90 to 100 pounds (40.8 to 45.4 kg). If the additional weight results
in an NTS Trip, stop the check, remove weights, and adjust the load arm settings. Refer to
TESTING (PGBLK 72-10-05-13000). Repeat this check after adjusting load arm settings. If an
NTS Trip does not occur, stop the test, remove weights, and replace the NTS valve. Refer to
REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-06-3000) and INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-06-4000). Repeat this
check after replacing the NTS valve.
(13) Remove the weight from the propeller and repeat the following steps two more times. There
must be three successful, consecutive NTS Trip events to comply with this check. Record the
pressure increase observed in auto-ignition port pressure at each trip event in the engine logbook.
(a) Slowly add a weight - 13 pounds (5.9 kg), weight - 18 pounds (8.2 kg) and weight - 26
pounds (11.8 kg) to obtain a total weight of 56 to 58 pounds (25.4 to 26.3 kg) on the
propeller.
(b) Verify that an NTS Trip occurs as the proper amount of weight is added. An NTS Trip is
characterized by an increase in auto-ignition port pressure of at least 50 PSIG (345 kPa)
and a perceptible drop (more than 10 PSIG (69 kPa)) in NTS pressure. Pressure indications
may reset and cycle following the initial trip actuation. Reset and cycling of pressure
indications is allowed.
(14) De-energize the unfeathering pump. Remove test lines and gages. Install caps at Positions A
and B and install cap or line at Position E on the NTS valve housing.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13025
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(15) Remove sling and weights.

(16) Remove PN 284689-1-1, geartrain lock or PN 284689-2-1, geartrain lock and install
starter-generator.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13026
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13027
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
I. Supplementary NTS Check Procedure (Subtask 72-00-00-700-011-A01)
CAUTION: A SYMPTOM OF LOSS OF PG OIL SUPPLY TO THE NTS SYSTEM IS RESETTING OF

THE PG SPEED SET POINT TO A VALUE 5 TO 8 PERCENT RPM ABOVE NORMAL, AT
POWER LEVER POSITIONS ABOVE FLIGHT IDLE.
CAUTION: IF PROPELLER RPM INCREASES ABOVE THE NORMAL PG SETTING, THE NTS
SYSTEM MAY BE INOPERATIVE AND CORRECTIVE ACTION IS WARRANTED. DO NOT
ADJUST THE PG TO SET ENGINE SPEED UNTIL THE NTS SYSTEM IS VALIDATED TO
BE OPERATIVE.
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED LIMITS OF PARAGRAPH 2.C. CERTIFICATED ENGINE OPERATING
LIMITATIONS (SUBTASK 72-00-00-700-005-A01).
NOTE: This check must be performed after installation of an engine or following removal,
installation, disassembly of the gear reduction system, disassembly of MFV, installation
of PG, PG shaft packing, PPC, or NTS orifice pack or torque load assemblies.
NOTE: Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures and Table 13004, Required NTS Checks,
Check F.
(1) Perform normal engine start.
(2) Propeller off the start locks.
(3) Engine speed lever set to low RPM.
(4) Power lever advanced above flight idle to extinguish the beta light (propeller-governing mode).
(5) Propeller RPM should hold at the normal PG low setting (typically 93.5 percent to 96 percent,
depending upon aircraft installation).
J. OSFG Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-012-A01)
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMING THIS CHECK, START ENGINE WITH POWER LEVER AT FLIGHT
IDLE TO MAKE SURE PROPELLER DOES NOT COME OFF START LOCKS. DO NOT
EXCEED LIMITS OF PARAGRAPH 2.C. CERTIFICATED ENGINE OPERATING
CAUTION: WHEN CHECKING OSFG, AN INCREASE IN VIBRATION MAY BE NOTED. THIS IS
NORMAL AS LONG AS VIBRATION IN THE ENGINE NORMAL OPERATING SPEED
RANGE IS SATISFACTORY. TIME OF OPERATION AT OSFG RPM MUST BE HELD TO
A MINIMUM.
NOTE: This check must be made at interval specified in SB TPE331-72-0476, and following any
maintenance work involving disassembly or adjustment of engine or removal or adjustment
of control components. Perform this check whenever air starts are intentionally scheduled.
Start locks are to remain engaged for this phase of check.
(1) Place engine speed lever in high RPM position. Advance power lever slowly toward maximum
position, closely observing engine RPM.
(2) When OSFG setting is reached, engine RPM should not increase with further movement of
power lever.
(3) If OSFG does not control engine RPM as specified in Paragraph 2.C. Certificated Engine
Operating Limitations (Subtask 72-00-00-700-005-A01), check engine tachometer system for
accuracy. If tachometer system checks satisfactorily, adjust OSFG. Refer to Paragraph 2.AM.
Engine Fuel Control Adjustments (Subtask 72-00-00-700-041-A01).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13028
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
K. Flight Idle Fuel Flow Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-013-A01)
NOTE: Perform this with propeller on start locks to eliminate influence of propeller rigging.
NOTE: Make sure that bleed-air is off.
(1) Move engine speed lever to low RPM position and power lever to approximately 1 inch (25.4
mm) above the flight idle detent.
(2) Retard power lever to flight idle detent.
(3) After engine has stabilized, record engine RPM and fuel flow.
(4) Refer to AMM for flight idle RPM setting.
(5) Adjust fuel flow setting. Refer to Paragraph 2.AM. Engine Fuel Control Adjustments (Subtask
72-00-00-700-041-A01).
NOTE: The proper flight idle fuel flow results in a particular rate of descent in flight and a
particular engine RPM on the ground.
(6) The effect of a change to flight idle fuel flow setting must be accompanied by an offsetting
adjustment to maximum power on a two-to-one click relationship. That is, if flight idle fuel flow
is adjusted UP two clicks, maximum power is to be adjusted DOWN four clicks to return maximum
power fuel flow to approximately the same setting.
L. Flight Idle Flat Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-014-A01)
NOTE: Perform flight idle flat check with propeller on start locks to eliminate influence of propeller
rigging.
(1) Move engine speed lever to low RPM position and power lever to approximately 1 inch (25.4
mm) above the flight idle detent.
(3) Slowly advance power lever until fuel flow and EGT starts to increase. Mark power lever position.
(5) Retard power lever slowly aft of flight idle detent until fuel flow and EGT start to decrease. Mark
power lever position.
NOTE: The marks on the power lever quadrant from fuel flow/EGT increase to fuel flow/EGT
decrease should be approximately an equal distance from each side of the flight idle
detent.
(6) Move the power lever back and forth between the two marks, fuel flow and EGT should not
change.
(7) Repeat the above steps on opposite engine.
NOTE: The flight idle flats must be matched.
(8) If a power lever split is evident, refer to FAULT ISOLATION (PGBLK 72-00-00-1000).
M. Disengage Propeller Start Locks (Subtask 72-00-00-700-015-A01)
(1) Move engine speed lever to position specified in AFM.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13029
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) To release propeller start locks, move power lever slowly toward reverse until a definite increase
in torque occurs. Then move power lever forward through ground idle, watching torque decrease
and then increase as power lever is moved toward flight idle.
NOTE: To positively determine that start locks have been disengaged, advance power lever
toward the maximum position until governing RPM is reached, as indicated by
stabilized engine RPM and an increase in fuel flow as power lever is advanced.
N. USFG Reset Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-016-A01)
(1) With propeller off start locks, place engine speed lever at low RPM position.
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED LIMITS OF PARAGRAPH 2.C. CERTIFICATED ENGINE
OPERATING LIMITATIONS (SUBTASK 72-00-00-700-005-A01).
(2) Move power lever to full reverse and observe engine RPM. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK
76-10-01-13000), for prescribed RPM.
(3) If RPM is not within limits, adjust linkage and perform underspeed reset rigging. Refer to TESTING
(PGBLK 76-10-01-13000).
O. USFG Low RPM Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-017-A01)
(1) Move power lever to ground idle. With speed lever at low, engine should stabilize at USFG
minimum RPM. Refer to AMM for prescribed RPM.
(2) If engine RPM does not stabilize within limits, adjust the minimum speed stop on USFG. Refer
to Paragraph 2.AM. Engine Fuel Control Adjustments (Subtask 72-00-00-700-041-A01)
P. USFG High RPM Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-018-A01)
(1) Move engine speed lever to high RPM position. RPM should stabilize within limits specified in
Paragraph 2.C. Certificated Engine Operating Limitations (Subtask 72-00-00-700-005-A01).
(2) If engine RPM does not stabilize at limits specified, adjust maximum speed stop on USFG. Refer
to Paragraph 2.AM. Engine Fuel Control Adjustments (Subtask 72-00-00-700-041-A01).
Q. Flameout Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-019-A01)
(1) Move power lever to ground idle.

(2) Move engine speed lever from high RPM stop to low RPM stop as rapidly as possible. The
engine should not flameout/blowout. If flameout/blowout occurs, refer to FAULT ISOLATION
(PGBLK 72-00-00-1000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13030
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
R. PG Low RPM Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-020-A01)

THE PG SPEED SET POINT TO A VALUE OF 5 TO 8 PERCENT RPM ABOVE NORMAL,
AT POWER LEVER POSITIONS ABOVE FLIGHT IDLE.
BE OPERATIVE.
NOTE: Perform supplementary NTS check procedure following any maintenance during which
the PG or PG shaft packing has been removed, to make sure of proper NTS system
operation.
(1) Move speed lever to high RPM position.

NOTE: Make sure that engine oil temperature is in normal operating range before proceeding
with check.
(2) Move power lever to obtain 40 to 50 percent torque.

(3) Retard speed lever to minimum position and allow RPM to stabilize.
(4) If engine RPM is not within limits specified in Paragraph 2.C. Certificated Engine Operating
Limitations (Subtask 72-00-00-700-005-A01), adjust PG minimum stop. Refer to TESTING
(PGBLK 76-10-01-13000).
S. PG High RPM Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-021-A01)

THE PG SPEED SET POINT TO A VALUE OF 5 TO 8 PERCENT RPM ABOVE NORMAL,
AT POWER LEVER POSITIONS ABOVE FLIGHT IDLE.
BE OPERATIVE.
NOTE: Perform supplementary NTS check procedure following any maintenance during which
the PG or PG shaft packing has been removed, to make sure of proper NTS system
operation.
(1) Move engine speed lever to high RPM position, move the power lever slowly toward maximum
position while observing engine RPM. Note the maximum engine RPM which can be attained
regardless of amount of power lever advancement.
NOTE: Make sure that engine oil temperature is in normal operating range before proceeding
with check.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13031
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) If engine RPM is not within limits specified in Paragraph 2.C. Certificated Engine Operating
Limitations (Subtask 72-00-00-700-005-A01), adjust PG maximum stop. Refer to TESTING
(PGBLK 76-10-01-13000).
T. Maximum Power Fuel Flow Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-022-A01)
NOTE: Operational check of maximum power fuel flow can be accomplished by ground check
and/or flight check. However, a flight check must be performed if the engine is torque
limited during the ground check.
(1) Check flight idle flow prior to checking maximum power fuel flow. Refer to Paragraph 2.K. Flight
Idle Fuel Flow Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-013-A01).
(2) Perform operational check of maximum power fuel flow by ground check as follows:
(a) Turn torque/temperature limiter off and make sure that SRL switch is on.
(b) Move engine speed lever to high RPM.
(c) Advance power lever slowly to maximum power lever position.
NOTE: Do not exceed torque or EGT limits specified in Paragraph 2.C. Certificated
Engine Operating Limitations (Subtask 72-00-00-700-005-A01).
NOTE: When advancing power lever, maximum torque may occur before maximum
EGT due to ambient temperature; flight check may be required for maximum
fuel flow check.
(d) Allow engine to stabilize. Record engine RPM, fuel flow, and EGT.
(e) Observe SRL EGT. If EGT exceeds 1,220°F (660°C), no further adjustment is required.
(f) If 1,220°F (660°C) minimum EGT was not obtained, record maximum EGT and adjust
maximum power 1.2 clicks CW for each 1.8°F (1°C) under 1,220°F (660°C).
Example: If recorded maximum SRL EGT was 1,207°F (653°C), adjust maximum
power eight clicks CW.
(g) No further testing is required following adjustment.
(3) Perform operational check of maximum fuel flow by flight check.
(a) Fly aircraft to convenient altitude above torque limited flat rate altitude. Stabilize in level
flight and check each engine individually.
(b) Set torque/temperature limiter to OFF, bleed air system to OFF, and make sure that SRL
switch is ON.
(c) Establish take-off RPM.
(d) Set 1,202°F (650°C) (EGT) with power lever.
(e) Move power lever to maximum position.
NOTE: Do not exceed torque or EGT limits specified in Paragraph 2.C. Certificated
Engine Operating Limitations (Subtask 72-00-00-700-005-A01).
(f) Observe SRL EGT. If EGT exceeds 1,220°F (660°C), no further adjustment is required.
NOTE: Allow engine to stabilize for 20 seconds.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13032
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(g) If 1,220°F (660°C) minimum EGT was not obtained, record maximum EGT and adjust
maximum power 1.2 clicks CW for each 1.8°F (1°C) under 1,220°F (660°C).
Example: If recorded maximum SRL EGT was 1207°F (653°C), adjust maximum
power eight clicks CW.
(h) No further testing is required following adjustment.
(4) Maximum power adjustment (simulated flight).
(a) Fuel flow at 5,000 feet (1,524 m).
1 Make sure that engine rigging and flight idle setting are correct. Make sure that the
flight idle and maximum power adjustment plugs are in place and secured. Remove
the Pt2 input line to fuel control.
2 Connect fuel control Pt2 port to static port of Model 1811F, pitot-static tester.
3 Set pitot-static tester altimeter setting to indicate field elevation on tester altimeter,
or obtain and set the altimeter setting.
4 Open vent on vacuum side of pitot-static system tester.
5 Perform normal engine start, make sure propeller is off start locks and advance RPM
lever to flight (high) position.
6 Advance power lever to flight idle.
7 Close vent on vacuum side of pitot-static system tester.
8 Close all other valves on vacuum side of pitot-static system tester.
9 Make sure that crossbleed valve is closed.
10 Start vacuum pump and evacuate tank to approximately 20 inHg (508 mmHg) vacuum.
11 Slowly meter vacuum tank to altimeter and fuel control. Establish 5,000-foot (1,524m)
altitude on altimeter. Engine fuel flow and RPM may decrease slightly as the pressure
supplied to the fuel control is reduced.
12 With altimeter on pitot-static tester reading 5,000 feet (1,524 m), slowly advance
power lever to maximum stop. Do not exceed torque or temperature limits.
13 Make sure that engine RPM increases to 100 percent when power lever is advanced
to maximum stop. If not, fault isolate. Refer to FAULT ISOLATION (PGBLK
72-00-00-1000).
14 If the power lever can be advanced to the maximum stop within reaching either torque
or temperature limit and engine RPM increases to 100 percent after advancing power
lever, record OAT (°F), fuel flow (PPH) and EGT (°C).
15 If the power lever cannot be advanced to the stop within reaching either torque or
temperature limit, proceed to the procedure for maximum power adjustment of fuel
flow at 7,000 feet (2,134 m).
16 Slowly cycle the power lever from the maximum stop to flight idle and back. Record
fuel flow (PPH) with the power lever at the maximum stop. Fuel flow should be within
5 PPH of the fuel flow recorded. Repeat, as required, until consistent fuel flow readings
are obtained.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13033
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: PLA MUST BE REDUCED TO FLIGHT IDLE PRIOR TO REDUCING

ALTITUDE TO PREVENT OVER TORQUE OR OVER-TEMPERATURE
CONDITION.
17 Reduce PLA to flight idle.

18 Turn vacuum pump OFF if required and open vacuum vent on pitot-static system
tester until altimeter returns to the initial reading. Perform normal shutdown.
19 Recorded fuel flow values should fall between upper and lower boundaries of Figure
13003, with the ideal setting determined from the middle (solid) line. Adjust fuel flow
if required.
NOTE: The relationship between clicks and fuel flow is approximate. Fuel controls
may require additional, or fewer clicks to achieve the desired increase or
decrease in fuel flow.
a If fuel flow is below the value required, increase the maximum power adjustment
six clicks CW for every 5 PPH below the required fuel flow.
b If fuel flow is above the value required, decrease the maximum power adjustment
six clicks CCW for every 5 PPH above the required fuel flow.
c Upon completion of adjustment, reinstall plug and recheck for required fuel flow
to verify effect of adjustment.
20 Remove test line from fuel control Pt2 port and reinstall line from Pt2 sensor. Reinstall
safety wire where removed.
(b) Fuel flow at 7,000 feet (2,134 m).
1 Slowly meter vacuum tank to altimeter and fuel control. Establish 7,000-foot (2,134-m)
power lever to the maximum stop. Do not exceed torque or temperature limits.
to the maximum stop. If not, fault isolate. Refer to FAULT ISOLATION (PGBLK
72-00-00-1000).
4 If the power lever can be advanced to the maximum stop without reaching either
torque or temperature limit and engine RPM increases to 100 percent after advancing
power lever, record OAT (°F), fuel flow (PPH) and EGT (°C).
5 If the power lever can not be advanced to the stop without reaching either torque or
temperature limit, proceed to the procedure for maximum power adjustment of fuel
flow at 9,000 feet (2,743 m).
are obtained.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13034
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

CONDITION.

8 Turn vacuum pump OFF if required and open vacuum vent on pitot-static system
9 Recorded fuel flow values should fall between the upper and lower boundaries of
Figure 13004. Adjust fuel flow is required.
ten clicks CW for every 8 PPH below the required fuel flow.
ten clicks CCW for every 8 PPH above the required fuel flow.
(c) Fuel flow at 9,000 feet (2,743 m).
1 Slowly meter vacuum tank to altimeter and fuel control. Establish 9,000-foot (2,743-m)
power lever to the maximum stop. Do not exceed torque or temperature limits.
to the maximum stop. If not, fault isolate. Refer to FAULT ISOLATION (PGBLK
72-00-00-1000).
4 If the power lever cannot be advanced to the maximum stop under these conditions
without exceeding torque or temperature limits, the fuel flow is high. Comply with the
following two steps, and decrease the maximum power adjustment at least 1/2 turn
CCW. Perform the procedure for maximum power adjustment of fuel flow at 5,000
feet (1,524 m) and restart the test.
5 If the power lever can be advanced to the maximum stop without reaching either
torque or temperature limit and engine RPM increases to 100 percent after advancing
power lever, record OAT (°F), fuel flow (PPH) and EGT (°C).
are obtained.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13035
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

CONDITION.

8 Turn vacuum pump OFF If required and open vacuum vent of pitot-static system
9 Recorded fuel flow values should fall between the upper and lower boundaries of
Figure 13005. Adjust fuel flow if required.
ten clicks CW for every 7 PPH below the required fuel flow.
ten clicks CCW for every 7 PPH above the required fuel flow.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13036
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
Figure 13003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Control Adjustment (Fuel Flow at 5,000 Feet (1,524 M)) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-003-A01)
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
All Page 13037/13038
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
Figure 13004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Control Adjustment (Fuel Flow at 7,000 Feet (2,133.6 M)) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-004-A01)
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
All Page 13039/13040
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
Figure 13005. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Control Adjustment (Fuel Flow at 9,000 Feet (2,743.2 M)) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-005-A01)
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
All Page 13041/13042
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
U. Transition to Beta-Mode Check (Twin Engine Requirements) (Subtask 72-00-00-700-023-A01)
NOTE: Before performing beta-mode check, refer to Paragraph 2.C. Certificated Engine Operating
Limitations (Subtask 72-00-00-700-005-A01).
(1) Place both engine speed levers in high speed position. Set both power levers to obtain 100
percent engine speed.
(2) Pull both power levers smoothly to ground idle. Both engines must transition together and both
beta lights must illuminate together.
V. Reverse Power Check (Twin Engine Requirements) (Subtask 72-00-00-700-024-A01)
CAUTION: OBSERVE REVERSE POWER LIMITS AS SPECIFIED IN AFM.

(1) Place both engine speed levers in the high speed position. Set both power levers to obtain 100
percent engine speed.
(2) Pull both power levers smoothly into full reverse.
(3) Torque should be symmetrical.
(4) If torque is not symmetrical, check engine control system rigging and propeller blade angle at
flight idle and reverse.
W. Torque and Temperature Limiter Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-025-A01)
(1) Refer to AFM for pre-flight check of torque/temperature limiting system.
X. Inlet Anti-Ice Valve Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-026-A01)
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMING THIS STATIC GROUND CHECK, DO NOT LEAVE ANTI-ICE VALVE
SWITCH IN ON POSITION FOR MORE THAN 10 SECONDS WHEN AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE IS 50°F (10°C) OR ABOVE.
(1) Move engine speed lever to low RPM and power lever to ground idle (position providing minimum
fuel flow), place inlet anti-icing valve switch in the ON position and check that inlet anti-ice valve
indicator light illuminates and EGT increases and torque decreases.
(2) Return anti-icing valve switch to the OFF position. Make sure that light goes out and EGT returns
to normal.
Y. Fuel Manifold Purge System Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-027-A01)
CAUTION: DO NOT PURGE MANIFOLD INTO HOT STATIC ENGINE. ACTUATION OF THE STOP
SWITCH FOLLOWING MANUAL SHUTDOWN WILL RESULT IN FUEL ACCUMULATING
IN THE PLENUM. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE ELECTRICAL SHUTDOWN CIRCUITS
NOT BE ACTIVATED UNTIL ENGINE COOLING PRECLUDES COMBUSTION, OR IN
THE CASE OF INITIAL ENGINE OPERATION WITH INTENTIONAL MANUAL SHUTDOWN
REQUIRED, THE PURGE SYSTEM MAY BE DISABLED.
CAUTION: FUEL PURGE SYSTEM WILL NOT TOTALLY CHARGE UNLESS A MINIMUM ENGINE
(1) Actuate engine “STOP” circuit for 5 seconds minimum or until engine speed decreases below
ground idle speed.
(2) RPM should increase for about 1 second when the stop switch is actuated and then decay when
the manifold fuel is depleted.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13043
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Absence of the momentary speed increase indicates an inoperable purge system.
(4) After engine shutdown, visually check engine for evidence of fuel and oil leaks. Refer to Paragraph
2.D. Engine Operational Checks (Subtask 72-00-00-700-006-A01).
Z. USFG/PG Separation Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-028-A01)
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED LIMITS OF PARAGRAPH 2.C. CERTIFICATED ENGINE OPERATING

NOTE: Make sure that engine oil temperature is in normal operating range before proceeding with
check.
(1) Move speed lever to high RPM position.
(2) Move power lever to obtain 932°F (500°C) (SRL).
(3) Retard speed lever to 96 percent RPM, set friction lock.
(4) Retard power lever to ground idle and record RPM.
(5) Recorded RPM must be a minimum of 2.5 percent RPM less than the RPM obtained while
decreasing the speed lever to 96 percent.
AA. Use of PN 294562-1 SRL Tester or PN 294562-2 SRL Tester (Subtask 72-00-00-700-029-A01)
NOTE: Personnel must be familiar with operating instructions of PN 294562-1, SRL tester or PN
294562-2, SRL tester prior to performing engine functional checks.
NOTE: For functional checks requiring engine operation, start and shut down engine. Refer to
AFM.
NOTE: Oil temperature must be within normal/operating temperature range on engine operation
functional checks unless otherwise specified in AMM.
(1) Controls and functions. Refer to Figure 13006.
NOTE: Table 13022 provides a list of controls and functions on SRL tester.
Table 13022. SRL Control/Indicator Function
Control/Indicator Equipment Designator Function

Digital Volt-Ohmmeter M1 Measures voltage and resistance set up in
tester for bias signals to SRL controller.
CAUTION: TO MEASURE RESISTANCE, DC ON/OFF SWITCH (SW8) MUST BE IN OFF POSITION.
SPEED Frequency Meter M2 Measures engine speed (RPM) and

substitute signals from speed
potentiometer. Measure in Hz.
TEMPERATURE Indicator M3 When SW4 is in Tt5 COMP position,
measures EGT signal from engine and also
substitute signal from T5 potentiometer.
When SW4 is in TSRL position, measures
SRL from SRL controller.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13044
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13022. SRL Control/Indicator Function (Cont)

SPEED Potentiometer R1 Substitutes speed signals to SRL controller.
Signal is measured in Hz at frequency
meter (M2).
T5 COMP Potentiometer R37 When SW1 is in TEST position, substitutes
an EGT temperature to the SRL controller.
Measured in °F.
TT2 POT R32 With SW1 in test position and SW6 in Tt2
position, substitutes an engine compressor
inlet temperature to the SRL controller.
Measured in ohms resistance to equal a
specified temperature (R = 85.09 + 0.1916
Tt2 (°F)).
Delta P/P Potentiometer R31 Substitutes a voltage signal to the SRL
controller representing airspeed and
ambient absolute pressure ((Pt2 –
PS5)/PS5 1 Volt = 0.0536 value of Delta
P/P)
CAUTION light DS6 Flashes when any switch is in TEST
position (up position) or when SW8 is OFF
(SW4 excluded).
SPEED SWITCH Indicating Lights DS3, DS4, DS5 Indicate operation of speed switching
function of the SRL controller (when in
TEST position).
SPR Indicating Light DS2 With SW1 in RUN position, indicates
operation of fuel enrichment solenoid during
engine starting (engine speed between 10
to 60%). In TEST position, gives operation
and indication of enrichment circuits at
setpoint temperature.
MONITOR Light DS1 ON above 80% RPM to indicate calculation
of SRL temperature by the SRL controller.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT SW8 IS IN OFF POSITION WHEN CONNECTING OR DISCONNECTING
SRL CONTROLLER TO TESTER.
DC ON/OFF Switch SW8 Interrupts 28-volt power to SRL controller

and not to the tester. In the OFF position
the CAUTION light is actuated.
TEST/RUN Switch SW1 In RUN position, connects respective
circuits to normal operating condition, while
TEST position opens respective input
signals from engine and supplies substitute
signals which are adjustable from tester
panel using potentiometers. With any switch
in TEST position; CAUTION light will flash.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13045
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13022. SRL Control/Indicator Function (Cont)

EXT/INT Switch SW10 Provides for selection of internal or external
signal to frequency meter M2.
Delta P/P PUSH-OPEN Switches SW2, SW3 When pressed, will open the Delta P/P
signals and will not flash the CAUTION
light.
TEST/H20 AGMT Switch SW9 In the TEST position, supplies 28 VDC to
Pin 23 of computer connector and flashes
CAUTION light. (Not used with 2118600
SRL controllers.)
OPEN/TT2 Switch SW6 In the OPEN position, will open the TT2
circuit to the SRL controller allowing a
jumper resistance to be inserted into Test
Jacks 15 and 16. With switch in TT2
position, the circuit is normal. The
TEST/RUN switch (SW1) will connect the
TT2 switch to either the engine TT2 (RUN)
or to the TT2 potentiometer (TEST).
OPEN/MONOPOLE Switch SW5 Opens monopole circuit to the SRL
controller. The TEST/RUN switch (SW1)
will connect the SRL controller to the engine
monopole (RUN) or to the tester SPEED
potentiometer (TEST).
TSRL/Tt5 COMP Switch SW4 In the Tt5 COMP position, measures the
EGT compensated temperature from the
engine or from the T5 COMP potentiometer.
The TSRL position reads EGT conditioned
temperature from the SRL controller. The
TEST/RUN switch (SW1) selects EGT
compensated from the engine (RUN) or the
Tt5 COMP potentiometer (TEST).
TEST JACKS ENGINE (Black), The TEST JACKS are breakout points and
COMPUTER (Red) the test jack numbers correspond to the
wire numbers in the harness from the
engine to the SRL controller. One group of
test jacks (black) is labeled ENGINE and
the other group of test jacks (red) is labeled
COMPUTER. Refer to GEM, 72-GE-10, for
the relationship of test jack numbers and
input functions monitored by the SRL
controller.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13046
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13023. SRL Controller PN 2118600-X Connector Pin Functions
Tester Corresponding Test Jacks Pin Function

11 A. Monopole signal (+)
12 B. Monopole signal (-)
17 C. Delta P/P (+)
18 D. Delta P/P (-)
15 E. TT2 sensor
16 F. TT2 sensor
13 G. Chromel (compensated) (+)
14 H. Alumel (compensated) (-)
7 J. Chromel (readout to cockpit) (+)
8 K. Alumel (readout to cockpit) (-)
L. Spare
9 M. 10% speed switch swinger (+)
10 N. 10% speed switch pole normally
open (closes at 10% and opens at
60%) (-)
6 P. 80% speed switch pole normally
open (closed between 10 and 80%)
(+)
5 R. 80% speed switch swinger (-)
22 S. 80% speed switch pole normally
closed (open between 10 and 80%)
3 T. 90% speed switch swinger
4 U. 90% speed switch pole normally
closed (open below 90%)
19 V. Start fuel solenoid (SPR) (+)
21 W. Monitor (+28 VDC at 80% speed)
2 X. Power return (-)
20 Y. Chassis ground (DC return) (also
tied to pin 2 inside controller)
23 Z. Water manifold switch
a. Spare
1 b. Power in (+28 VDC)
c. Spare
(a) The SRL tester may be used to monitor:

1 Aircraft voltage
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13047
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2 Speed switch actuation

3 Start enrichment circuit operation
4 PG monopole signal
5 EGT from engine Tt5 circuit
6 SRL calculated by SRL controller
7 TT2 as seen by SRL inlet probe
8 Delta P/P voltage from Delta P/P transducer
9 Operation of SRL calculation circuit.
(b) If SRL controller fails to operate properly, refer to FAULT ISOLATION (PGBLK
72-00-00-1000).
NOTE: Prior to extensive fault isolation, a quick check for extraneous shorts or opens
in the Tt2, Delta P/P, monopole, and Tt5 circuits should be accomplished. All
of these circuits can be monitored at the SRL connector. Refer to Table 13023.
(2) SRL tester checks and set-up procedures.

(a) SRL tester can be used to perform checks of the following systems.
1 Engine RPM – SPEED potentiometer (R1) substitutes engine speed signals to the
SRL controller when engine is not operating (TEST/RUN switch (SW1) in TEST
position).
2 Tt5 (EGT) temperature – Tt5 COMP potentiometer (R37) substitutes an EGT
compensated temperature to the SRL controller when engine is not operating
(TEST/RUN switch (SW1) in TEST position).
3 Speed switching – SPEED switches indicating lights (DS3, DS4, DS5) indicate SRL
controller speed switch operation (TEST/RUN switch (SW1) in TEST position).
4 Tt2 – Tt2 potentiometer (R32) substitutes an engine compressor inlet temperature to
the SRL controller when engine is not operating (TEST/RUN switch (SW1) in TEST
position; OPEN/T2 switch (SW6) in Tt2 position).
5 SFE function – SPR indicating light (DS2) illumination indicates operation of starting
fuel pressure regulator valve to provide fuel enrichment during engine starting
(TEST/RUN switch (SW1) in RUN position). With TEST/RUN switch (SW1) in TEST
position, may be used to indicate SRL enrichment SET POINT.
6 Delta P/P – Delta P/P potentiometer substitutes voltage signal to SRL controller which
represents PT2 and PS5 (TEST/RUN switch (SW1) in TEST position) when engine
is not operating.
(b) Set-up procedures for SRL tester.
NOTE: For installations that have only a 1 amp protection circuit for the SRL controller,
install a jumper wire from an aircraft 28 volt source to ENGINE test jack 1.
1 Select suitable working surface for SRL tester within 15 feet (4.6 m) of SRL controller
to be tested.
2 Place SRL tester on working surface with hinged lid up. Open SRL tester lid and
remove cable assembly from storage compartment of tester.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13048
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
3 Make sure that power is not applied to SRL controller (DC ON/OFF switch (SW8) in
OFF position).
4 Connect PN 295471-2, cable assembly to ENGINE connector on SRL tester panel
and connector that was disconnected from SRL controller.
5 Connect PN 295471-1, cable assembly to CONTROLLER connector on SRL tester
panel and electrical connector on SRL controller.
6 Make sure that all applicable aircraft circuit breakers are ON.
7 Set aircraft battery switch to ON. Set TEST/RUN switch (SW1) to RUN. Set all others
switches down.
8 Set DC ON/OFF switch (SW8) to ON.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13049
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13006. (Sheet 1 of 1) PN 294562-1 SRL Tester or PN 294562-2 SRL Tester (GRAPHIC
72-00-00-99B-006-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13050
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
AB. Speed Switching Functional Check (Engine Not Operating) (Subtask 72-00-00-700-030-A01)
(1) Set-up SRL controller and SRL tester. Refer to set-up procedures for SRL tester.
(2) Set DC ON/OFF switch (SW8) to ON.
(3) Set TEST/RUN switch (SW1) to TEST.
(4) Check speed switching functions as follows:
(a) Adjust SPEED potentiometer (R1) (CW to increase speed) while observing SPEED
frequency meter (M2) and SPEED SWITCH indicating lights (DS3, DS4, DS5).
(b) Table 13024 contains frequency and RPM of speed switch actuation and configuration of
SPEED SWITCHES indicating lights for each speed switch function.
(5) Set DC ON/OFF switch (SW8) to OFF.
(6) If this is final testing, perform the following steps:
(a) Make sure that DC ON/OFF switch (SW8) is in the OFF position.
(b) Set aircraft battery switch to OFF.
(c) Pull SRL controller circuit breakers.
(d) Disconnect SRL tester cables.
(e) Connect SRL controller cables to aircraft engine connection.
Table 13024. Speed Switch Actuation
SPEED SWITCH SPEED FREQUENCY

FUNCTION INDICATING LIGHT ENGINE RPM (PERCENT) INDICATION (Hz)
10 to 60% speed switch ON at 10% RPM 8.5 to 10.5 80 to 99
10 to 60% speed switch OFF at 60% RPM 59 to 61 554 to 573
10 to 80% speed switch ON at 10% RPM 8.5 to 10.5 88 to 99
10 to 80% speed switch OFF at 80% RPM 79 to 81 742 to 761
60% speed switch ON below 60% RPM 0 0
60% speed switch OFF above 60% RPM 89 to 91 835 to 854
AC. SFE Functional Check (Engine Not Operating) (Subtask 72-00-00-700-031-A01)
(1) Set-up SRL controller and SRL tester. Refer to set-up procedures for SRL tester.
(4) Set Tt5 COMP/TSRL switch (SW4) to Tt5 COMP.
(5) Adjust SPEED potentiometer (R1) to read 400 to 500 Hz on SPEED frequency meter (M2).
Adjust Tt5 potentiometer (R37) to read 1,190°F (643°C) on TEMPERATURE indicator (M3).
(6) Slowly increase Tt5 potentiometer (R37) until the SPR light (DS2) extinguishes and remains
extinguished. Cockpit exhaust temperature indicator must read 1,254 to 1,312°F (679 to 711°C).
If correct temperature is not obtained, adjust enrichment adjustment on SRL controller. Refer
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13051
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
to Figure 13007. (Tt5 compensated temperature is adjustable by +/-90°F (+/-50°C) on the SRL
controller.) The temperature set point can be adjusted to match each cockpit instrument.
(7) Readjust Tt5 COMP potentiometer (R37) to read 1,095 to 1,105°F (591 to 596°C) on
TEMPERATURE indicator (M3). Rapidly increase temperature (using Tt5 COMP temperature
potentiometer (R37)) by at least 40°F (22.2°C) but less than 90°F (50°C) by observing
TEMPERATURE indicator (M3). The SPR light (DS2) must go off momentarily and then come
on.
Figure 13007. (Sheet 1 of 1) Automatic Start Fuel Enrichment Adjustment (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-007-A01)
AD. EGT Correction Delta T Functional Check (Engine Not Operating) (Subtask 72-00-00-700-032-A01)
(1) Set-up SRL controller and SRL tester. Refer to the set-up procedures for SRL tester.
(4) Set Delta P/P potentiometer (R31) to zero (full CCW).
(5) Adjust SPEED potentiometer (R1) to read 929 to 949 Hz (100 percent RPM) on SPEED frequency
meter (M2).
NOTE: During period of test, monitor SPEED frequency meter (M2) to make sure that no
errors are introduced due to frequency drifts within the tester.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13052
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(6) Set Tt5 COMP/TSRL switch (SW4) to Tt5 COMP. Adjust Tt5 potentiometer (R37) to read 1,000°F
(537.8°C) on TEMPERATURE indicator (M3).
(7) Set OPEN/Tt2 switch (SW6) to OPEN and connect a 97.6 ohm resistor between test jacks 15
and 16 and proceed as follows:
NOTE: This procedure requires the use of 96.7 ohms resistance. A 96.7 ohm resistor may
be used as described in the preceding step or the 96.7 ohm resistance may be
simulated. The procedure to simulate the resistance is provided in the next step and
is only required if the resistance is simulated. If the 97.6 ohm resistor is used, proceed
to the step to set Tt5 COMP/TSRL switch (SW4) to TSRL.
(a) Adjust Tt2 potentiometer as follows:

1 Set OPEN/Tt2 switch (SW6) to OPEN.
2 Set DC ON/OFF switch (SW8) to OFF.
3 Using digital volt-ohmmeter (M1) on K ohms X 1 scale, measure resistance across
test jacks Tt2 and POT.
4 Resistance must read 97.6 ohms. If resistance is not as specified, adjust Tt2
potentiometer to obtain correct value.
5 Disconnect digital volt-ohmmeter.
6 Set DC ON/OFF switch (SW8) to ON.
7 Set OPEN/Tt2 switch (SW6) to Tt2.
(8) Set Tt5 COMP/TSRL switch (SW4) to TSRL. TEMPERATURE indicator (M3) must read as
follows:
• 1,108 to 1,116°F (598 to 602°C) for SRL PN 2118600-3
• 1,104 to 1,112°F (596 to 600°C) for SRL PN 2118600-7 or -8
• 1,076 to 1,084°F (580 to 584°C) for SRL PN 2118600-10.
(9) Set digital volt-ohmmeter (M1) to DC volts X 10 scale, and connect digital volt-ohmmeter leads
to computer test jacks 17 and 18 (test jack 18 is signal ground).
(10) Adjust Delta P/P potentiometer (R31) until digital volt-ohmmeter (M1) reads 4.0 VDC (0.214
Delta P/P). TEMPERATURE indicator (M3) must read as follows:
• 1,150 to 1,160°F (621 to 627°C) for SRL PN 2118600-3, -7, or -8
• 1,123 to 1,133°F (606 to 612°C) for SRL PN 2118600-10.
(11) Using SPEED potentiometer (R1), reduce speed signal to 910 to 912 Hz (97 percent RPM) as
indicated on SPEED frequency meter (M2). Tt5 indicator must read the following on
TEMPERATURE indicator (M3).
NOTE: For these checks, make sure that Tt5 compensated temperature is maintained at
1,000°F (538°C).
• 1,188 to 1,198°F (642 to 648°C) for SRL PN 2118600-3

• 1,179 to 1,189°F (637 to 643°C) for SRL PN 2118600-10.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13053
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(12) Adjust Delta P/P potentiometer (R31) to read zero VDC as indicated on digital volt-ohmmeter
(M1). Tt5 indicator must read the following on TEMPERATURE indicator (M3).
• 1,139 to 1,147°F (615 to 619°C) for SRL PN 2118600-3
• 1,136 to 1,144°F (613 to 618°C) for SRL PN 2118600-10.
(14) If this is final testing, refer to the following steps:
AE. Engine Start and Acceleration Functional Check (Engine Operating) (Subtask
72-00-00-700-033-A01)
(3) Set TEST/RUN switch (SW1) to RUN.
(4) Start engine.
(5) The SPR indicating light (DS2) must illuminate indicating activation of fuel enrichment solenoid.
(6) At 80 percent RPM, MONITOR indicating light (DS1) must illuminate indicating the SRL controller
is functioning.
(7) Shut down engine.
(b) Set aircraft battery switch to off.
AF. Temperature Delta T Functional Check (Engine Operating at 100 Percent RPM) (Subtask
72-00-00-700-034-A01)
(2) Install jumper plug with resistor (part of SRL tester) into computer Test Jacks 15 and 16. (This
resistor equals a Tt2 of 65°F (18°C), 97.6 ohms.) Set Tt2 switch (SW6) to OPEN.
(4) Set TEST/RUN switch (SW1) to RUN.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13054
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) Start engine.

(6) With engine operating at 99.75 to 100.25 percent RPM, observe the following indications.
(a) Rotate Delta P/P potentiometer (R31) full CCW, Delta P/P output on digital volt-ohmmeter
(M1) should read zero VDC. Connect test leads to Test Jacks 17 (+) and 18 (-). Press
Delta P/P PUSH-OPEN switch (SW2) to eliminate Delta P/P input.
(b) Subtract T5 comp reading from indicated (M3). The Delta T should read 107 to 119°F (42
to 48°C).
(8) Shut down engine.
AG. (Optional) Fuel Manifold and Fuel Nozzle Assemblies Functional Check (Dynamic Pressure
Flow Test) (Subtask 72-00-00-700-035-A01)
(1) Fuel nozzle flow check procedure (Installed).

NOTE: Perform the following check whenever new or cleaned nozzle assemblies are installed
and at interval specified in SB TPE331-72-0476. This check should be performed
whenever engine is fuel-flow limited or when fuel system is found to be contaminated.
NOTE: Aviation kerosene or Jet A type fuels are required for this check.
(a) Install tee fitting and pressure gage, 0 to 1,000 PSIG (0 to 6,895 kPa) in line from flow
divider valve to primary fuel manifold to measure primary fuel manifold pressure (Ppri,
column (4) on Figure 13008, Fuel Flow Calculation Data Sheet.
NOTE: Make a copy of Fuel Flow Calculation Data Sheet to record data.
(b) Install tee fitting and pressure gage, 0 to 500 PSIG (0 to 3,447 kPa) in line from flow divider
valve to secondary fuel manifold to measure secondary fuel manifold pressure (Psec,
column (3) on Fuel Flow Calculation Data Sheet copy).
(c) Install pressure gage, 0 to 200 PSIG (0 to 1,379 kPa) to measure P3 (Pcd, column (2) on
Fuel Flow Calculation Data Sheet copy).
(d) Use aircraft fuel flow meter system to record fuel flow (“Actual” column on Fuel Flow
Calculation Data Sheet copy).
(e) Start engine. Gradually advance power lever to maximum power lever position until fuel
flow meter indicates either 500 PPH or maximum fuel flow within torque or temperature
limits. Allow engine to stabilize within turbine temperature or torque limits.
(f) Record engine fuel flow (“Actual”), P3 (Pcd, column (2)), secondary fuel manifold pressure
(Psec, column (3)), and primary fuel manifold pressure (Ppri, column (4)) values on Fuel
Flow Calculation Data Sheet copy.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13055
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(g) Retard power lever until fuel flowmeter indicates 450 PPH. Allow engine to stabilize. Record
engine fuel flow (“Actual”), P3 (Pcd, column (2)), secondary fuel manifold pressure (Psec,
column (3)), and primary fuel manifold pressure (Ppri, column (4)) values on Fuel Flow
Calculation Data Sheet copy.
(h) Retard power until fuel flowmeter indicates 400 PPH. Allow engine to stabilize. Record
(i) Retard power lever until flowmeter indicates 350 PPH. Allow engine to stabilize. Record
(j) Retard power lever until fuel flowmeter indicates 300 PPH. Allow engine to stabilize. Record
(k) Calculate secondary delta P (fuel manifold pressure drop on Figure 13009) by subtracting
P3 (Pcd, column (2) on Fuel Flow Calculation Data Sheet copy) from secondary fuel
manifold pressure (Psec, column (3) on Fuel Flow Calculation Data Sheet copy) and record
result in column (5) on Fuel Flow Calculation Data Sheet copy.
(l) Repeat the previous procedure for the remaining four readings.
(m) Calculate primary delta P (fuel manifold pressure drop on Figure 13009) by subtracting P3
(Pcd, column (2) on Fuel Flow Calculation Data Sheet copy) from primary fuel manifold
pressure (Ppri, column (4) on Fuel Flow Calculation Data Sheet copy) and record result in
column (6) on Fuel Flow Calculation Data Sheet copy.
(n) Repeat the previous procedure for the remaining four readings.
(o) Plot recorded data on Figure 13009 for both primary and secondary fuel manifold assembly
as follows:
1 Plot five recorded engine fuel flow values (“Actual” column on Fuel Flow Calculation
Data Sheet copy) versus five calculated fuel manifold pressure drop values (columns
(5) or (6) on Fuel Flow Calculation Data Sheet copy) on Figure 13009.
2 Plot five pair of values. Join five resulting data points with smooth curve. If any one
point is grossly off curve, that point value must be rechecked.
3 If resulting curves exceed limit criteria at 350 PPH, remove nozzle and manifold
assemblies and perform Fuel and Nozzle Assemblies Flow Test. Refer to TESTING
(PGBLK 73-10-09-13000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13056
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13008. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Flow Calculation Data Sheet (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-008-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13057
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
Figure 13009. (Sheet 1 of 1) Manifold Flow Check Plot (New or Cleaned Manifold) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-009-A01)
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
All Page 13059/13060
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
AH. PG Reset Function and NTS Lockout System Pressure Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-036-A01)
CAUTION: THE PG RESET FUNCTION AND NTS LOCKOUT SYSTEM PRESSURE CHECK IS
MANDATORY TO MAKE SURE OF PROPER NTS SYSTEM OPERATION.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT TEE OR FITTINGS ARE HELD SECURELY WHEN REMOVING OR
INSTALLING CAPS AND TEST LINES. IF TEE OR FITTINGS ARE NOT SECURED, UNDUE
STRESS, BENDING AND POSSIBLE CRACKS IN ATTACHING PARTS MAY RESULT.
NOTE: This check must be performed after installation of an engine or following removal,
installation, disassembly of the gear reduction system, disassembly of MFV or installation
of PG, PG shaft packing or PPC or NTS orifice pack or torque load assemblies. Refer to
Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures and Table 13004, Required NTS Checks, Check
E.
(1) Remove cap at Position A. Refer to Figure 13010.
(2) Install tube assembly with pressure gage, 0 to 600 PSIG (0 to 4,137 kPa) at Position A.
(3) Start engine. Refer to AFM.
(4) Set the engine RPM lever at maximum and the power lever forward of flight idle. The test gage
must indicate no less than 325 PSIG (2,241 kPa) oil pressure.
NOTE: Oil pressure of 325 PSIG (2,241 kPa) or greater indicates that the NTS lockout valve
port is closed. This in turn traps pressure on the PG reset head.
(5) With the engine speed lever at takeoff, move the power lever back towards reverse. As the
power lever is moved below the 35-degree PLA it opens the NTS lockout valve. The test gage
must indicate no more than 25 PSIG (172 kPa) oil pressure.
NOTE: Oil pressure of 25 PSI (172 kPa) or less indicates that the NTS lockout valve is open.
This in turn releases the oil pressure on the PG reset head. This increases the PG
setting.
(6) Remove tube assembly with test gage.

(7) Install cap at Position A.
(8) If the above pressure requirements are not within limits, refer to FAULT ISOLATION (PGBLK
72-00-00-1000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13061
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13062
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
AI. Seal Break-In Procedure (Subtask 72-00-00-700-037-A01)
NOTE: Accomplish seal break-in on engines that have had knife-edge seal or corresponding seal
components (rub strips) replaced.
(1) Perform five engine starts and operations as follows:
(a) Start engine, accelerate to ground idle, then accelerate to 100 percent engine speed.
NOTE: On the first start only, hold speed at ground idle for 5 minutes prior to
acceleration to 100 percent speed.
(b) Load engine to Tt5 of 900°F (482°C) and operate for 30 seconds.
(c) Unload engine and decelerate to ground idle.
(d) Operate engine at ground idle for 2 minutes, then shut down.
CAUTION: ROTATE ENGINE ONLY IN NORMAL DIRECTION OF ROTATION.
(e) After each operation and shutdown, manually check engine for freedom of rotation.
NOTE: After engine shutdown following first engine operation, wait 1 minute prior to
rotating engine. After second operation, wait 2 minutes, third operation wait 3
minutes, fourth operation wait 4 minutes, and fifth operation wait 5 minutes.
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED STARTER DUTY CYCLE LIMITS.
(2) If the engine is free to rotate after operation and shutdown cycles one through four, immediately
restart the engine and repeat five engine starts and operations as specified above. If engine
does not rotate freely, allow engine to cool until free rotation returns, then continue with break-in
procedure.
AJ. Vibration Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-038-A01)
NOTE: Vibration check must be accomplished on a test cell equipped with vibration test equipment
as specified in the following procedure. The vibration limits are not applicable to on-wing
testing.
(1) Provide a vibration check setup similar to that shown in Figure 13011 as follows:
NOTE: All vibration values are listed without IPS qualifiers.
(a) Install PN 285354-1-1, turbine vibration pickup mount (1) on turbine plenum flange at 1
o'clock (aft looking forward) position so that base of mount is in horizontal position.
(b) Install PN 285374-1-1, gearcase vibration pickup mount (2) on front face of engine housing
and secure.
(c) Install vibration pickup (3) to mounts (1, 2).
(d) Connect vibration meters (5) and high-pass/low-pass filter (4) to each pickup.
(e) Install starter-generator assembly on engine drive pad.
(f) Connect test stand speed indicator to engine tachometer-generator.
(g) Connect test stand torque indicator to torque sensor.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13063
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13025. Maximum Allowable Vibration Limits (Propeller Test Stand)
Operating
Condition Limits (IPS) Action if Exceeded
Gearbox vibration 1.0 Higher gearbox vibration on the propeller test stand is acceptable if the
time above 1.5 does not exceed 5 seconds. If the indicated vibration
exceeds these limits, a vibration analyzer must be used to record velocity
levels. The maximum allowable velocity (IPS) versus frequency (Hz) are
tabulated in Table 13026. If the indicated vibration exceeds these limits,
isolate fault and repair engine.
Turbine vibration 0.6 Higher gearbox vibration on the propeller test stand is acceptable if the
time above 1.5 does not exceed 5 seconds. If the indicated vibration
exceeds these limits, a vibration analyzer must be used to record velocity
levels. The maximum allowable velocity (IPS) versus frequency (Hz) are
tabulated in Table 13026. If the indicated vibration exceeds these limits,
isolate fault and repair engine.
Table 13026. Maximum Allowable Vibration Limits (Propeller Test Stand)
Parameter Final Acceptance Vibration Analyzer Limits (96 to 105% Speed – Steady State)
Frequency (Hz) 110 to 124 125 to 200 201 to 350 351 to 525 526 to 2000
Gearbox velocity 0.22 0.60 0.55 0.69 1.00
(IPS)
Turbine velocity 0.35 0.40 0.28 0.35 0.50
(IPS)
Table 13027. Maximum Allowable Vibration Limits (Dynamometer)
Operating
Condition Limits (IPS) Action if Exceeded
Gearbox vibration 0.70 Maximum gearbox vibration limit is 0.90 at no load, provided vibration
decreases to 0.70 or less when 1,800 to 2,200 in-lb (203.4 to 248.6 Nm)
load is applied. If the indicated vibration exceeds these limits, a vibration
analyzer must be used to record velocity levels. The maximum allowable
velocity (IPS) versus frequency (Hz) are tabulated in Table 13028. If the
indicated vibration exceeds these limits, isolate fault and repair engine.
Turbine vibration 0.35 Maximum gearbox vibration limit is 0.90 at no load, provided vibration
decreases to 0.70 or less when 1,800 to 2,200 in-lb (203.4 to 248.6 Nm)
load is applied. If the indicated vibration exceeds these limits, a vibration
analyzer must be used to record velocity levels. The maximum allowable
velocity (IPS) versus frequency (Hz) are tabulated in Table 13028. If the
indicated vibration exceeds these limits, isolate fault and repair engine.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13064
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13028. Maximum Allowable Vibration Limits (Dynamometer)
Parameter Final Acceptance Vibration Analyzer Limits (96 to 105% Speed – Steady State)
Frequency (Hz) 110 to 124 125 to 200 201 to 350 351 to 525 526 to 2000
Gearbox velocity 0.22 0.60 0.55 0.69 1.00
(IPS)
Turbine velocity 0.35 0.40 0.28 0.35 0.50
(IPS)
CAUTION: EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION TO AVOID HUNG STARTS (IMPROPER ENGINE

ACCELERATION) BY OBSERVING ALL ENGINE OPERATING PARAMETERS. IF
HUNG START IS INDICATED OR TURBINE VIBRATION IS APPROACHING BUT
NOT EXCEEDING 2.0 IPS, ABORT START. IF TURBINE VIBRATIONS EXCEED 2.0
IPS, ISOLATE TROUBLE AND REPAIR ENGINE PRIOR TO STARTING ENGINE
AGAIN.
(2) Start and operate engine. Refer to AMM.

NOTE: The vibration limits listed in Table 13025 through Table 13028 are not applicable to
on-wing testing.
(3) Monitor vibration levels while accelerating to ground idle speed. Perform vibration analyzer test
as shown below, if vibration levels exceed the maximum allowable vibration limits (IPS). Refer
to Table 13025 through Table 13028.
(4) If vibration limits are exceeded at steady-state condition during test, perform vibration analyzer
test as follows:
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED ENGINE TEMPERATURE LIMIT.
(a) Set speed lever to maximum position. Move power lever to obtain 1,591 to 1,599 RPM and
1,900 to 2,100 in-lb (215 to 237 Nm) load.
(b) Start analyzer recorder and slowly move power lever to load engine at a rate of
approximately 0.25 volts torque per second to rated torque of 0.0 volts or 1,200 to 1,204°F
(649 to 651°C) SRL temperature, whichever occurs first.
(c) Stabilize for 15 to 25 seconds.
(d) Slowly retard power lever and unload engine at a rate of approximately 0.25 volts torque
per second to 1,900 to 2,100 in-lb (215 to 237 Nm) load.
(e) Stop analyzer recorder and retard power lever to ground idle and speed lever to minimum
stop.
(f) Review analyzer recording, if vibration exceeds limits, isolate trouble and repair engine.
(Refer to Table 13025 through Table 13028.)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13065
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13011. (Sheet 1 of 1) Vibration Test Setup (Typical) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-011-A01)
1. PN 285354-1-1 TURBINE VIBRATION 4. HIGH-PASS/LOW-PASS FILTER

PICKUP MOUNT
2. PN 285374-1-1 GEARCASE VIBRATION 5. VIBRATION METER
PICKUP MOUNT
3. VIBRATION PICKUP HIGH-PASS
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13066
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
AK. Magnetic Chip Detector Debris Functional Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-039-A01)
CAUTION: STOP THE ENGINE RUN IMMEDIATELY IF THE CHIP DETECTOR LIGHT COMES ON
DURING THE GROUND RUN. THIS WILL PREVENT POSSIBLE DAMAGE TO THE
ENGINE.
(1) If the magnetic chip detector light comes on at any time during the ground run, shut down, remove
and inspect the magnetic chip detector and check the oil filter by-pass valve indicator.
(a) If the by-pass valve indicator is not extended, the magnetic chip detector may be cleaned
and the ground run repeated.
(b) If the by-pass valve indicator is extended, the oil system contamination inspection is
required. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-00-00-8000).
(2) Start the engine. Refer to the AFM.
(3) After the oil temperature is within the normal operating range, run the engine for a minimum of
30 minutes and accomplish the following steps:
(a) Move the speed lever from taxi to flight and back a minimum of three times. Stay at each
position for a minimum of 1 minute.
(b) Move the propeller off the start locks, then put the speed lever at flight and the power lever
at flight idle.
(c) Move the power lever from flight idle to 50 percent torque and back a minimum of three
times. Stay at each position for a minimum of 2 minutes.
(d) With the speed lever at flight, move the power lever from flight idle to reverse and back a
minimum of two times. Stay at reverse each time for a minimum of 5 seconds or until AFM
limits are reached.
(e) With the speed lever at flight, move the power lever from flight idle to 50 percent or more
torque. Stay at this position for a minimum of 10 minutes.
(4) After successful completion of ground run, shut down the engine. Refer to the AFM.
(5) Remove and visually inspect the magnetic chip detector. Clean if required. The ground run may
be repeated at the operator's option, but is not required since debris accumulation was insufficient
to close the magnetic chip detector circuit.
AL. Flight Idle Blade Angle Adjustment (Subtask 72-00-00-700-040-A01)
(1) Adjust flight idle blade angle. Refer to AMM.
AM. Engine Fuel Control Adjustments (Subtask 72-00-00-700-041-A01)
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT POWER LEVER HAS FULL RANGE (0 TO 100 DEGREES) FREEDOM
OF TRAVEL AND NO BINDING EXISTS AFTER ANY ADJUSTMENTS OR SETTINGS IN
THE POWER MANAGEMENT AREA.
NOTE: The fuel control adjustments in the following paragraph are necessary only when indicated
by specific operating parameters or requirements. The adjustment rates in Table 13029
may be used when adjustments are required.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13067
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Fuel control adjustment sequence is in Table 13030. Use of this data may eliminate
excessive readjustments and trial operations.
NOTE: The direction of adjustment screw rotation is always looking at the end of the screw that
accepts the key wrench. Refer to Figure 13012 and Figure 13013 for fuel control adjustment
points.
After making adjustments, perform operational check according to the type of adjustment
made. Also, make an entry in permanent aircraft; record engine time, type, and amount
of adjustment.
A log book entry is required for any adjustment made.
(1) SG adjustment. Refer to Table 13029 and Figure 13012.
(a) Make sure that SG adjustment is properly set for the fuel being used observing the following
instructions.
NOTE: When required, the SG adjustment may be utilized to raise the acceleration
schedule and obtain additional cruise power. This adjustment should be
performed prior to attempting to adjust the acceleration schedule.
1 Determine the type of fuel used on the previous flight.

2 Determine the type of fuel being added. Refer to Table 13031 to determine SG
adjustment required.
Table 13029. Fuel Control Adjustment Rates
1
Figure No. Adjustment Point Adjustment Rate
Figure 13012 SG adjustment
2
Figure 13012 1. SG adjustment of five clicks is equal to One CW click = 4 PPH increase fuel flow
approximately one turn on the maximum power and approximately 14.4°F (8°C) at
adjusting screw. CW movement of SG adjustment cruise.
increases maximum power.
Figure 13012 2. If SG adjustment does not provide enough
adjustment, maximum power adjusting screw may
be used to restore adjustability range.
Figure 13012 USFG minimum stop (low RPM stop) One CW turn = 5.3% speed increase
setting
Figure 13012 USFG maximum stop (high RPM stop) One CW turn = 2.7% speed decrease
setting
Figure 13012 OSFG adjustment One CW turn = 4.5% speed increase
setting
Figure 13013 Acceleration schedule adjustment One CW turn = 60 PPH increase fuel
flow (3/16 turn maximum allowable
adjustment).
Figure 13013 Flight idle fuel flow adjustment
3 One CW turn = 150 PPH increase fuel
flow. (One CW click = 2 PPH increase
fuel flow)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13068
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13029. Fuel Control Adjustment Rates (Cont)
1
Figure No. Adjustment Point Adjustment Rate
Figure 13013 Maximum power adjustment One CW turn = 20 PPH fuel flow
increase (18 clicks = one turn)
NOTES:
1. The adjustment rate is an approximate value and is intended only as a guide for the maintenance technician.
2. SG adjustment may be used as an alternate to adjustment of maximum power adjusting screw. Intermediate
flight idle fuel flow will be affected when SG adjustment is made.
3. A change in flight idle setting will result in corresponding change in maximum power adjustment setting.
(b) Reset SG adjustment, as required, to obtain proper acceleration schedule and cruise
power. A change in SG setting of one click CW, will result in approximately 4 PPH fuel
increase with a corresponding increase in EGT of approximately 14.4°F (8°C) at cruise.
CCW adjustment will decrease fuel flow and EGT a corresponding amount.
Table 13030. Fuel Control Sequence of Adjustment
Adjustment Sequence Procedure Affect on Other Adjustments

1. SG Set to type of fuel being used. Affects maximum power and all
other adjustments (fuel schedules)
except OSFG.
2. Acceleration schedule Adjust to maintain peak EGT start
temperature and start time within
specified limits.
3. USFG low and high – Independent of other adjustments.
4. OSFG Other adjustments to fuel control do Affects flight idle and maximum
not affect OSFG adjustment, once it power if set too low.
is set correctly.
5. Flight idle – Affects maximum power adjustment.
6. Maximum power adjustment Accomplish as last adjustment in No affect on previous adjustments.
adjustment sequence. Affects power lever matching.
Table 13031. SG Adjustment for Changes in Fuel Type
1
From To Fuel Trim Adjustment
Aviation Kerosene (JP-5) Aviation Gasoline CW 6 Clicks
Aviation Kerosene (JP-5) JP-4 CW 3 Clicks
JP-4 Aviation Gasoline CW 3 Clicks
Aviation Gasoline JP-4 CCW 3 Clicks
JP-4 Aviation Kerosene (JP-5) CCW 3 Clicks
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13069
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13031. SG Adjustment for Changes in Fuel Type (Cont)
1
From To Fuel Trim Adjustment
Aviation Gasoline Aviation Kerosene (JP-5) CCW 6 Clicks
NOTES:
1. Adjustments are to be made without consideration of fuel mix percentages.
(2) Acceleration schedule adjustment. Refer to Figure 13013.

NOTE: Fuel control acceleration schedule may be adjusted to increase starting fuel flow
when slow acceleration is encountered due to a lean starting schedule. This is
evidenced by the tendency of the engine to swell or hang at approximately 50 percent
engine speed.
The fuel control acceleration schedule may also be adjusted to decrease starting fuel
flow when high initial peak temperatures are encountered during the engine start.
SG adjustment should be performed before attempting to adjust acceleration schedule.
(a) Prior to adjustment of the acceleration schedule, perform the following:

1 Make sure that aircraft battery power, speed switch, starter, and switching relay
systems are functioning properly.
2 Check the fuel flow divider valve for leakage during the start cycle. This would be
indicated by a steady stream of fuel draining overboard while engine is undergoing
start cycle with fuel manifold purge line disconnected.
3 Inspect condition of packings in fuel pressure regulator. Replace defective packings
as necessary. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-21-04-3000) and INSTALLATION
(PGBLK 73-21-04-4000).
4 Disconnect P3 sensing line from fitting on the turbine plenum. Check fitting for
tightness. Inspect flared end of tube for cracks or other deformities. Apply
approximately 5 to 10 PSIG (34.5 to 68.9 kPa) pressure to the tube noting if leakage
through the fuel control unit bellophram is occurring. Leakage is not allowed.
5 Reconnect P3 sensing line to fitting on the turbine plenum and secure.
(b) Adjust acceleration schedule as follows:
1 Disconnect control rod from the power lever arm assembly on fuel control assembly
by removing pin, nut and washers. Refer to Table 13029 and Figure 13013.
NOTE: Do not remove the power lever arm assembly from the power lever shaft.
2 Remove flight idle access plug assembly (5, Figure 13014).

3 Remove cover assembly (50) from fuel control assembly observing the following
instructions:
a Remove screws (20, 30) and bolts (40) securing cover assembly (50).
b Rotate power lever shaft to minimum position.
c Tap cover loose using a cellulose-tipped hammer.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13070
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
d Remove cover assembly (50) and gasket (55).

NOTE: Rotate cover during removal, after clearing alignment pins, toward
vertical centerline of engine to clear manual fuel cam from internal
linkage.
4 Remove locking screw. Refer to Figure 13013. Turn adjuster to desired position
(3/16-turn maximum). Install locking screw. Turn locking screw until contact is made
with adjuster. Torque locking screw 7 to 9 in-lb (0.8 to 1.0 Nm).
NOTE: Turn adjuster CW to increase fuel flow and CCW to decrease fuel flow.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT MANUAL FUEL CAM FOLLOWER LEVER (INTERNAL
LINKAGE) IS IN SLOT PRIOR TO POSITIONING COVER ONTO FUEL
CONTROL. IF MANUAL FUEL CAM FOLLOWER IS NOT IN SLOT,
OVER-TEMPERATURE CONDITION WILL RESULT ON ENGINE START.
INSTALL NEW COVER GASKET. MAKE SURE THAT GASKET DOES
NOT INTERFERE WITH END OF MANUAL FUEL CAM FOLLOWER
LEVER. DO NOT INSTALL FLIGHT IDLE ACCESS PLUG OR SPRING
UNTIL FUEL CONTROL COVER HAS BEEN INSTALLED.
5 Install cover assembly (50, Figure 13014) on fuel control assembly observing the
following instructions:
a Make sure that power lever shaft is in minimum position. Install cover assembly
(50) and new gasket (55, Figure 13014) on fuel control assembly.
b Secure cover assembly (50) with screws (20, 30) and bolts (40). Torque screws
(20, 30) to 16 to 19 in-lb (1.8 to 2.1 Nm) and bolts (40) to 60 to 75 in-lb (6.8 to
8.5 Nm).
CAUTION: USE CARE WHEN INSTALLING FLIGHT IDLE ACCESS PLUG AND
SPRING TO MAKE SURE THAT SPRING IS LOCATED DIRECTLY
ON TOP OF FLIGHT IDLE ADJUSTMENT AND THAT SPRING IS
NOT CRIMPED OR COCKED.
c Install flight idle access plug and spring (5) and new packing (15). Torque plug
to 25 to 30 in-lb (2.8 to 3.4 Nm).
6 Reconnect control rod to power lever arm assembly by installing washers and nut.
Torque nut to 12 in-lb (1.4 Nm) and install new pin.
7 Upon completion of adjustments, perform operational check according to type of
adjustment made and make entry in permanent aircraft records noting engine time,
type and amount of adjustment accomplished.
(3) USFG low RPM adjustment. Refer to Figure 13012.
(a) If engine RPM does not stabilize within limits specified in Paragraph 2.C. Certificated Engine
Operating Limitations (Subtask 72-00-00-700-005-A01), adjust USFG minimum stop.
Turning adjustment screw one turn CW will increase engine RPM 5.3 percent.
(4) USFG high RPM adjustment. Refer to Figure 13012.
(a) If engine RPM does not stabilize at limits specified in Paragraph 2.C. Certificated Engine
Operating Limitations (Subtask 72-00-00-700-005-A01), adjust USFG maximum stop.
Turning adjustment screw one turn CW will decrease engine speed 2.7 percent.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13071
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(b) Recheck and adjust control linkage between USFG and PG to contact stops simultaneously
following any adjustment of USFG stop. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
76-10-01-8000).
(5) OSFG adjustment. Refer to Figure 13012.
(a) Disconnect control rod from power lever arm assembly on fuel control assembly by removing
pin, nut, and washers.
(b) Remove flight idle access plug assembly (5, Figure 13014).
(c) Remove cover assembly (50) from fuel control assembly observing the following instructions:
NOTE: Set power lever shaft in 100-degree position to aid in removal of cover.
1 Remove screws (20, 30) and bolts (40) securing cover assembly (50).
2 Rotate power lever shaft to minimum position.
3 Tap cover assembly (50) loose using a cellulose-tipped hammer.
4 Remove cover assembly (50) and gasket (55).
NOTE: Rotate cover during removal, after clearing alignment pins, toward vertical
centerline of engine to clear 2D cam from internal linkage.
CAUTION: MINIMUM FLOW ADJUSTMENT AND OSFG ADJUSTMENT ARE LOCATED

IN CLOSE PROXIMITY WITHIN THE FUEL CONTROL AND UTILIZE THE SAME
SIZE ALLEN WRENCH FOR REQUIRED ADJUSTMENTS. REFER TO FIGURE
13015, DETAIL A, TO MAKE SURE OF PROPER SELECTION OF OSFG
ADJUSTMENT.
(d) Using a 5/64-inch swivel tip Allen wrench or equivalent, adjust OSFG, as required. Refer
to Figure 13015.
NOTE: One full CW turn of overspeed adjustment will increase engine speed setting
by 4.5 percent RPM.
(e) Install cover onto fuel control assembly, observing the following instructions:
CONTROL. IF MANUAL FUEL CAM FOLLOWER IS NOT IN SLOT,
OVER-TEMPERATURE CONDITION WILL RESULT ON ENGINE START.
INSTALL NEW COVER GASKET. MAKE SURE THAT GASKET DOES
NOT INTERFERE WITH END OF MANUAL FUEL CAM FOLLOWER
LEVER. DO NOT INSTALL FLIGHT IDLE ACCESS PLUG OR SPRING
UNTIL FUEL CONTROL COVER HAS BEEN INSTALLED.
1 Make sure that power lever shaft is in minimum position. Install cover assembly (50,
Figure 13014) and new gasket (55) on fuel control assembly.
2 Secure cover on fuel control assembly with screws (20, 30) and bolts (40). Torque
screws (20, 30) to 16 to 19 in-lb (1.8 to 2.1 Nm). Torque bolts (40) to 60 to 75 in-lb
(6.8 to 8.5 Nm).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13072
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: USE CARE WHEN INSTALLING FLIGHT IDLE ACCESS PLUG AND
SPRING TO MAKE SURE THAT SPRING IS LOCATED DIRECTLY ON
TOP OF FLIGHT IDLE ADJUSTMENT AND THAT SPRING IS NOT
CRIMPED OR COCKED.
3 Install flight idle access plug assembly (5) and new packing (15). Torque plug assembly
(5) to 25 to 30 in-lb (2.8 to 3.4 Nm).
(f) Reconnect control rod to power lever arm assembly by installing washers and nut. Torque
nut to 12 in-lb (1.4 Nm) and install new pin.
(6) Flight idle fuel flow adjustment. Refer to Figure 13016 and Figure 13014.
NOTE: A change in flight idle fuel flow setting will result in a corresponding change in
maximum fuel flow setting. Maximum fuel flow setting must then be adjusted to original
setting. Maximum fuel flow adjustment will not affect flight idle fuel flow setting.
NOTE: Refer to AMM and AFM for required operational checks after adjustment of flight idle
fuel flow.
(a) Remove flight idle access plug assembly (5, Figure 13014) and packing (15).
CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN LOCKNUT.
(b) For fuel control without flight idle click adjustment, use deep socket to loosen and hold
locknut while adjusting flight idle adjustment screw (75) and to secure locknut after
adjustment is completed. Torque locknut to 10 in-lb (1.1 Nm).
NOTE: CW adjustment of flight idle adjustment screw (75) increases fuel flow. A 1/16
turn of the adjustment screw produces a nominal fuel flow change of 10 PPH.
(c) For fuel controls with flight idle click adjustment, turn flight idle adjustment screw (75)
desired number of clicks.
NOTE: CW adjustment of flight idle adjustment screw (75) increases fuel flow. Each
click produces a nominal fuel flow change of 2 PPH.
(d) Install flight idle access plug assembly (5) and new packing (15). Torque plug assembly
to 25 to 30 in-lb (2.8 to 3.4 Nm).
(e) Adjust both engines to match engine speed within 0.5 percent RPM or less.
(f) Upon completion of adjustments, perform operational checks. Refer to AMM and AFM.
Make entry in permanent aircraft records noting engine time, type, and amount of
adjustment.
CAUTION: RE-INDEXING OF FLIGHT IDLE FUEL FLOW ADJUSTMENT STOP MUST ONLY
BE PERFORMED ONCE TO INCREASE RANGE FOR INCREASED FLIGHT IDLE
FUEL FLOW ADJUSTMENT. PRIOR TO RE-INDEXING, CHECK LOG BOOK TO
DETERMINE IF RE-INDEXING HAS PREVIOUSLY BEEN PERFORMED.
DECREASING FLIGHT IDLE FUEL FLOW ADJUSTMENT MAY BE PERFORMED,
AS REQUIRED.
(7) Re-index flight idle fuel flow adjustment stop (65, Figure 13014).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13073
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Disconnect control rod from power lever arm assembly on fuel control assembly by removing
(b) Remove flight idle access plug assembly (5).
(c) Remove cover assembly (50) from fuel control assembly as follows:
NOTE: Set power lever shaft in 100-degree position to aid in removal of cover assembly.
3 Tap cover assembly (50) loose using a soft faced hammer.
(d) Remove retaining ring (60, Figure 13014) from slot in flight idle adjustment screw (75).
(e) Slide flight idle adjustment stop (65) rearward to remove it from splined flight idle adjustment
screw (75).
(f) Adjust flight idle fuel flow as follows:
1 For fuel control without flight idle click adjustment, use deep socket to loosen and
hold locknut while adjusting flight idle adjustment screw (75) and to secure locknut
after adjustment is completed. Torque locknut to 10 in-lb (1.1 Nm).
NOTE: CW adjustment of flight idle adjustment screw (75) increases fuel flow. A
1/16 turn of the adjustment screw produces a nominal fuel flow change
of 10 PPH.
2 For fuel controls with flight idle click adjustment, turn flight idle adjustment screw (75)
desired number of clicks.
NOTE: CW adjustment of flight idle adjustment screw (75) increases fuel flow.
Each click produces a nominal fuel flow change of 2 PPH.
(g) Carefully install flight idle adjustment stop (65). Make sure that equal adjustment ranges
are available to increase and decrease flight idle flow adjustments.
(h) Reinstall retaining ring (60) in its groove in adjustment screw.
(i) Adjust both engines to match engine speed within 0.5 percent RPM or less.
(j) Upon completion of adjustments, perform operational checks. Refer to AMM and AFM.
Make entry in permanent aircraft records noting engine time, type, and amount of
adjustment.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13074
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CONTROL. IF FUEL CAM FOLLOWER IS NOT IN SLOT, OVER-TEMPERATURE
CONDITION WILL RESULT ON ENGINE START. INSTALL NEW COVER
GASKET. MAKE SURE THAT GASKET DOES NOT INTERFERE WITH END
OF MANUAL FUEL CAM FOLLOWER LEVER. DO NOT INSTALL FLIGHT IDLE
ACCESS PLUG OR SPRING UNTIL FUEL CONTROL COVER HAS BEEN
INSTALLED.
(k) Install cover assembly (50) as follows:

1 Make sure that power lever shaft is in minimum position. Install cover assembly (50)
and new gasket (55) on fuel control assembly.
2 Secure cover assembly (50) on fuel control assembly with screws (20, 30) and bolts
(40). Torque screws (20, 30) to 16 to 19 in-lb (1.8 to 2.1 Nm). Torque bolts (40) to
60 to 75 in-lb (6.8 to 8.5 Nm).
CAUTION: USE CARE WHEN INSTALLING FLIGHT IDLE ACCESS PLUG AND SPRING
TO MAKE SURE THAT SPRING IS LOCATED DIRECTLY ON TOP OF FLIGHT
IDLE ADJUSTMENT AND THAT SPRING IS NOT CRIMPED OR COCKED.
(l) Install flight idle access plug assembly (5, Figure 13014) and new packing (15). Torque
plug to 25 to 30 in-lb (2.8 to 3.4 Nm).
(m) Reconnect control rod to power lever arm assembly by installing washers and nut. Torque
(n) Upon completion of adjustments, perform operational checks as specified in AMM and
AFM. Make entry in permanent aircraft records noting engine time, type, and amount of
adjustment.
CAUTION: COMPLETE FAULT ISOLATION OF ENGINE MUST BE ACCOMPLISHED PRIOR
TO ADJUSTMENT OF MAXIMUM POWER FUEL FLOW TO MAKE SURE THAT THIS
ADJUSTMENT IS ABSOLUTELY REQUIRED. DO NOT ADJUST EXTERNAL STOPS
OF THE POWER LEVER SHAFT.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT OF POWER LEVER IS CHECKED

(0 TO 100 DEGREES) WHENEVER THE MAXIMUM POWER SETTING IS ADJUSTED.
(8) Maximum power fuel flow adjustment.

NOTE: During complete fault isolation of engine (prior to adjustment of maximum power fuel
flow), particular emphasis must be placed on fuel system components that, if
malfunctioning, could restrict fuel flow. Examples of these components are
torque/temperature limiter, fuel shutoff valve, flow divider, damaged plumbing, and
fuel manifold nozzle assemblies. Engine torque and temperature indicating systems
must be thoroughly checked for accuracy. P3 and inlet air temperature/inlet air
pressure sensing systems must be checked for leaks and malfunctions. P3 sensing
system can be checked by disconnecting P3 line from fitting on the turbine plenum.
Check fitting for tightness. Inspect flared end of tube for cracks or other deformities.
Apply approximately 5 to 10 PSIG (34.5 to 68.9 kPa) pressure to the tube noting if
leakage through the fuel control unit bellophram is occurring. Leakage is not allowed.
NOTE: Be careful not to change Allen screw adjustment.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13075
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Remove maximum power access plug (10, Figure 13014) and packing (15) from fuel control
assembly. Refer to Figure 13016.
CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN LOCKNUT.
(b) Use deep socket to loosen and hold locknut while adjusting screw. Secure locknut and
torque to 10 in-lb (1.1 Nm).
NOTE: CW adjustment of maximum power fuel flow adjustment screw increases fuel
flow and EGT. A 1/4 turn of the adjustment screw produces a nominal fuel flow
change of 5 PPH and EGT temperature change of 3.5°C (6.3°F).
NOTE: If required fuel flow change cannot be obtained because adjustment screw has
reached its travel limit, reinstate maximum power fuel flow adjustment range.
(c) Install maximum power access plug (10) and new packing (15). Torque plug to 40 to 60
in-lb (4.5 to 6.8 Nm).
CAUTION: THIS PROCEDURE MUST ONLY BE ACCOMPLISHED AFTER MAXIMUM POWER
FUEL FLOW ADJUSTMENT LIMITS HAVE BEEN REACHED. COMPLETE FAULT
ISOLATION OF ENGINE MUST BE ACCOMPLISHED TO MAKE SURE THAT THE
FOLLOWING PROCEDURE IS ABSOLUTELY REQUIRED.
CAUTION: IN SOME CASES THIS ADJUSTMENT MAY CAUSE POWER LEVERS TO HAVE A
MINOR SPLIT AT ALTITUDE.
(9) Reinstate maximum power fuel flow adjustment range as follows:

NOTE: During fault isolation, particular emphasis must be placed of fuel system components
that, if malfunctioning, could restrict fuel flow. Examples of those components are
torque/temperature limiter, fuel shutoff valve, flow divider, damaged plumbing and
fuel manifold/nozzle assemblies. Engine torque and temperature indicating systems
must be thoroughly checked for accuracy. P3 and inlet air temperature/inlet air
pressure sensing systems must be checked for leaks and malfunctions. P3 sensing
system can be checked by disconnecting P3 line from fitting on the turbine plenum.
Check fitting for tightness. Inspect flared end of tube for cracks or other deformities.
Apply approximately 5 to 10 PSIG (34.5 to 68.9 kPa) pressure to the tube noting if
leakage through the fuel control unit bellophram is occurring. Leakage is not allowed.
NOTE: This adjustment will affect flight idle fuel flow, therefore, operate engine with condition
lever in low position and power lever in flight idle. Record fuel flow and RPM so that
indications can be duplicated after adjustment is completed.
(a) Disconnect control rod from power lever arm assembly at fuel control assembly by removing
(b) Remove flight idle access plug assembly (5, Figure 13014).
(c) Remove cover assembly (50, Figure 13014) from fuel control assembly as follows:
NOTE: Set power lever shaft in 100-degree position to aid in removal of cover assembly.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13076
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

3 Tap cover assembly (50) loose using a soft faced hammer.
(d) Turn maximum power adjustment screw CW until arm just clears cases and cover, or screw
“bottoms”. Then turn maximum power adjustment screw two full turns CCW. Refer to Figure
13017.
NOTE: Note position of maximum power adjustment screw prior to adjustment to aid
in calculation of fuel flow changes between maximum power and T2 bias
adjustments.
NOTE: One full turn of the maximum power adjustment screw changes fuel flow 20
PPH. CW adjustment increases fuel flow, CCW adjustment decreases fuel flow.
Refer to Figure 13017.
(e) Turn T2 bias adjustment screw 1/2 turn CCW.

NOTE: One full turn of T2 bias adjustment screw changes fuel flow approximately 80
PPH. CCW adjustment increases fuel flow, CW adjustment decreases fuel flow.
NOTE: This adjustment should nullify adjustment made previously and effectively regain
maximum power fuel flow adjustment. Further fuel flow adjustment must be
made with maximum power adjustment screw without removing cover.
CONTROL. IF MANUAL FUEL CAM FOLLOWER IS NOT IN SLOT, OVERSPEED
CONDITION WILL RESULT ON ENGINE START. INSTALL SERVICEABLE
COVER GASKET. MAKE SURE THAT GASKET DOES NOT INTERFERE WITH
END OF MANUAL FUEL CAM FOLLOWER LEVER. DO NOT INSTALL FLIGHT
IDLE ACCESS PLUG OR SPRING UNTIL FUEL CONTROL COVER HAS BEEN
INSTALLED.
(f) Install cover assembly (50, Figure 13014) as follows:

1 Make sure that power lever shaft is in minimum position. Install cover assembly (50)
and new gasket (55) on fuel control assembly.
2 Secure cover assembly (50) on fuel control assembly with screws (20, 30) and bolts
(40). Torque screws (20, 30) to 16 to 19 in-lb (1.8 to 2.1 Nm). Torque bolts (40) to
60 to 75 in-lb (6.8 to 8.5 Nm).
CAUTION: USE CARE WHEN INSTALLING FLIGHT IDLE ACCESS PLUG AND SPRING
TO MAKE SURE THAT SPRING IS LOCATED DIRECTLY ON TOP OF FLIGHT
IDLE ADJUSTMENT AND THAT SPRING IS NOT CRIMPED OR COCKED.
(g) Install flight idle access plug assembly (5) and new packing (15). Torque plug assembly
to 25 to 30 in-lb (2.8 to 3.4 Nm).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13077
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(h) Connect control rod to power lever arm assembly by installing washers and nut. Torque
(i) Upon completion of adjustments, perform operational check to determine amount of
additional adjustments to be made.
(j) Adjust flight idle fuel flow to match pre-adjustment operation indications. Refer to the
procedures to adjust flight idle fuel flow.
NOTE: Flight idle adjustment affects maximum power fuel flow.
(k) Adjust maximum power fuel flow, as required. Refer to the procedures to adjust maximum
power fuel flow.
(l) After final operational check, make entry in permanent aircraft records noting engine time,
type, and amount of adjustment.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13078
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13012. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Control Adjustment Points (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-012-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13079
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13013. (Sheet 1 of 1) Acceleration Schedule Adjustment (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-013-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13080
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13014. (Sheet 1 of 1) Flight Idle and Maximum Power Adjustments (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-014-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13081
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. FLIGHT IDLE ACCESS PLUG ASSEMBLY 45. SPACER

10. MAXIMUM POWER ACCESS PLUG 50. COVER ASSEMBLY
15. PACKING 55. GASKET
20. SCREW 60. RETAINING RING
25. WASHER 65. FLIGHT IDLE ADJUSTMENT STOP
30. SCREW 70. DECELERATION BLOCK ASSEMBLY
35. WASHER 75. FLIGHT IDLE ADJUSTMENT SCREW
40. BOLT 80. CONTROL ASSEMBLY
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13082
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13015. (Sheet 1 of 1) Dimension Requirements for OSFG Adjustment Tool (Internal Adjustment)
(GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-015-A01)
Limits Limits
DIM. A 0.040 (1.02) DIM. D 0.100 (2.54)
DIM. B 0.035 (0.89) DIM. E 4.5 (114)
DIM. C 0.020 (0.51)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13083
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13016. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Control Flight Idle and Maximum Power Adjustment Points (GRAPHIC
72-00-00-99B-016-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13084
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13017. (Sheet 1 of 1) Reinstate Maximum Power Fuel Flow Adjustment (T2 Bias) (GRAPHIC
72-00-00-99B-017-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13085
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
AN. Automatic Start Fuel Enrichment Adjustment (Subtask 72-00-00-700-042-A01)
NOTE: Proper operation of automatic start fuel enrichment system can best be observed using
PN 294562-1, SRL tester, however, the following procedure should be used if a tester is
not available.
(1) On the first engine start of the day, start engine using automatic mode. Refer to AFM.
(2) Observe fuel flow and EGT indications below 40 percent engine speed during test.
(3) Fuel flow must indicate an up and down cycle action as the automatic start fuel enrichment adds
fuel to maintain EGT setpoint at 1,274 to 1,292°F (690 to 700°C).
(4) If starting EGT is not controlled at 1,274 to 1,292°F (690 to 700°C), adjust start temperature as
follows:
(a) Remove cover to expose start temperature adjustment screw. Refer to Figure 13018.
(b) Using a small common screwdriver, turn adjustment screw CW to increase start temperature.
NOTE: A full CW turn of the adjustment screw will increase start temperature by 9°F
(5°C).
(c) Install cover over adjustment screw.

(d) Check starting temperature by repeating the entire procedure.
Figure 13018. (Sheet 1 of 1) Automatic Start Fuel Enrichment Adjustment (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-018-A01)
AO. Torque System Bridge Cross Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-043-A01)
NOTE: Torque system bridge cross check is required after completion of any of the following
procedures:
• Gearbox inspection
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13086
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
• Removal and installation of torque ring.
NOTE: Make sure that strain gage resistance check has been performed prior to performing the
torque system bridge cross check. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-10-12-13000).
(1) Torque signal conditioner calibration.
NOTE: Start and run engine to heat the oil, then shut down prior to calibration. The torque
must be calibrated with oil temperature at 149°F (65°C) minimum.
(a) Connect torque sensor output connector to input connector for Bridge 2 (or spare box to
Bridge 2 and the engine's torque signal conditioner to Bridge 1, if patch cable is used) on
torque signal conditioner. Refer to Figure 13019, Figure 13020, and Figure 13021.
NOTE: If a spare conditioner box and suitable patch cables are available, both bridges
may be calibrated simultaneously. A torque signal conditioner from another
engine may be used provided the potentiometer settings for that engine are
reset when the torque signal conditioner is returned. Connect the slave box to
Bridge 2 and the engine's torque signal conditioner to Bridge 1.
(b) Remove top cover(s) from torque signal conditioner.

(c) Connect a digital voltmeter to torque signal conditioner(s) between Test Points TP7 (+)
and TPC (-). Refer to Figure 13020 and Figure 13021.
(d) Connect a wire (to provide a short) between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-).
(e) (Pre SB TPE331-76-0024) Adjust Pot 2 (P2) to read -0.002 to +0.002 volts on digital
voltmeter. Remove wire (short) between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-). Refer to Figure
13020.
(f) (Post SB TPE331-76-0024) Make sure that torque signal conditioner output is -0.002 to
+0.002 volts. Remove wire (short) between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-). Replace torque
signal conditioner if voltage output is not acceptable. Refer to Figure 13021.
(g) Connect digital voltmeter between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-). Adjust Pot 1 (P1) to
obtain value per DSC-9086 (millivolts) for Bridge 2 (and Bridge 1, if simultaneous calibration
is performed). Refer to engine DSC-9086. Refer to Figure 13022.
NOTE: Make a copy of the engine DSC-9086 to record data.
(h) Connect digital voltmeter between Test Points TP7 (+) and TPC (-). Adjust Pot 3 (P3) to
obtain value per DSC-9086 for Bridge 2 (and Bridge 1, if simultaneous calibration is
performed).
(i) Start engine and operate at 100 percent RPM. Record results identified on Figure 13023,
Data Sheet Using or Not Using Spare Signal Conditioner.
NOTE: Make a copy of Data Sheet Using or Not Using Spare Signal Conditioner to
record data.
NOTE: After calibration of Bridge 1 and Bridge 2 on most current DSC-9086, start and
operate engine, compare output of Bridge 1 to the output of Bridge 2. Record
value of the 5 temperature points, as read on either aircraft gages (foot-pounds)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13087
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
or calibration digital voltmeter at Pin 7-C. If bridge output difference is less than
66 ft-lb (89.5 Nm) or 0.10 volt, torque system is satisfactory.
NOTE: Prior to accomplishing the following step, perform engine shutdown and repeat
the following:
1) Connect a wire (to provide a short) between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2
(-).
2) (Pre SB TPE331-76-0024) Adjust Pot 2 (P2) to read -0.002 to +0.002 volts
on digital voltmeter. Remove wire (short) between Test Points TP1 (+)
and TP2 (-). Refer to Figure 13020.
3) (Post SB TPE331-76-0024) Make sure that torque signal conditioner output
is -0.002 to +0.002 volts. Remove wire (short) between Test Points TP1
(+) and TP2 (-). Replace torque signal conditioner if voltage output is not
acceptable. Refer to Figure 13021.
4) Connect digital voltmeter between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-). Adjust
Pot 1 (P1) to obtain value per DSC-9086 (millivolts) for Bridge 2 (and
Bridge 1, if simultaneous calibration is performed). Refer to engine
DSC-9086 copy.
5) Connect digital voltmeter between Test Points TP7 (+) and TPC (-). Adjust
Pot 3 (P3) to obtain value per DSC-9086 for Bridge 2 (and Bridge 1, if
simultaneous calibration is performed).
(j) If spare signal conditioner was not used, then start engine and operate at 100 percent
RPM for Bridge 1 and Bridge 2. Record results identified on the appropriate Data Sheet
Using or Not Using Spare Signal Conditioner copy. With same operating conditions such
as Tt2 +/-1°C, PBAR, plot TSRL versus Bridge output. If conditions are within 66 ft-lb (89.5
Nm) or 0.1 volt, calibration is complete. If conditions are not within limits, perform Paragraph
2.AQ. Preparation of Engine and PN 291862-3 Torque Test Kit Installation (Subtask
72-00-00-700-045-A01) using Lebow.
Figure 13019. (Sheet 1 of 1) Setup Using a Spare Signal Conditioner (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-019-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13088
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13020. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-76-0024) Torque Signal Conditioner (GRAPHIC

72-00-00-99B-020-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13089
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13021. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-76-0024) Torque Signal Conditioner (GRAPHIC

72-00-00-99B-021-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13090
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13022. (Sheet 1 of 1) Engine DSC-9086 (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-022-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13091
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13023. (Sheet 1 of 1) Data Sheet Using or Not Using Spare Signal Conditioner (GRAPHIC
72-00-00-99B-023-A01)
AP. Torque System Calibration Adjustment (Subtask 72-00-00-700-044-A01)
NOTE: If only the torque signal conditioner was replaced, perform this procedure.
NOTE: If engine torque sensor output connector was switched from input connector for Bridge 2
to input connector for Bridge 1 (or vice versa) on torque signal conditioner, perform this
procedure.
NOTE: If the difference between torque system Bridges 1 and 2 is greater than 66 ft-lb (89.4 Nm)
or 0.10 volt, or a torque ring without a current DSC with shutdown voltage values was
installed, proceed to Paragraph 2.AQ. Preparation of Engine and PN 291862-3 Torque
Test Kit Installation (Subtask 72-00-00-700-045-A01).
(1) Calibrate torque signal conditioner after replacement.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13092
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Start engine and operate at ground idle, until oil temperature is 150°F (65°C) minimum.
NOTE: The torque signal conditioner must be calibrated with oil temperature at 150°F
(65°C) minimum.
(b) Shut down engine.

(c) Remove top cover from torque signal conditioner.
(d) Connect bridge to be calibrated.
(e) Connect a voltmeter between torque signal conditioner Test Points TP7 (+) and TPC (-).
Refer to Figure 13024 and Figure 13025.
(f) Connect a wire (to provide a short) between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-).
(g) (Pre SB TPE331-76-0024) Adjust Pot (P2) to read -0.002 to +0.002 volts on the voltmeter.
Remove wire (short) between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-). Refer to Figure 13024.
(h) (Post SB TPE331-76-0024) Make sure that torque signal conditioner output is -0.002 to
(i) Connect a millivoltmeter between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-).
(j) Check the most current engine DSC-9086 for torque signal conditioner calibration negative
millivolts (-mV), and volts for the bridge to be calibrated.
(k) Adjust Pot 1 (P1) to obtain torque signal conditioner negative millivolts (-mV) as recorded
on most current engine DSC-9086 on millivoltmeter installed previously.
(l) Adjust Pot 3 (P3) to obtain voltage recorded on most current engine DSC-9086 between
Test Points TP7 (+) and TPC (-) before oil temperature drops below 150°F (65°C).
(2) Prepare engine and install PN 291862-3, torque test kit as in Paragraph 2.AQ. Preparation of
Engine and PN 291862-3 Torque Test Kit Installation (Subtask 72-00-00-700-045-A01).
NOTE: If individual bridge is to be calibrated separately on torque signal conditioner, proceed
to the following steps.
(3) Torque signal conditioner calibration (individual bridge calibration).

NOTE: Make sure that torque ring resistance check has been performed. Refer to TESTING
(PGBLK 72-10-12-13000), prior to performing this step.
NOTE: The torque system must be calibrated with oil temperature at 150°F (65°C) minimum.
Start and operate engine to heat the oil, shut down prior to calibration.
(a) Remove top cover from torque signal conditioner. Connect torque sensor output connector
to input connector for Bridge 2 on torque signal conditioner.
(b) Connect a digital voltmeter to torque signal conditioner between Test Points TP7 (+) and
TPC (-). Refer to Figure 13024 and Figure 13025.
(c) Connect a wire (to provide a short) between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-).
(d) (Pre SB TPE331-76-0024) Adjust Pot 2 (P2) to read -0.002 to +0.002 volts on digital
voltmeter. Remove wire (short) between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-). Refer to Figure
13024.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13093
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(e) (Post SB TPE331-76-0024) Make sure that torque signal conditioner output is -0.002 to
(f) Connect digital voltmeter to torque signal conditioner between Test Points TP1 (+) and
TP2 (-).
(g) Adjust Pot 1 (P1) to read -25 mV (approximately) on digital voltmeter.
(h) Connect digital voltmeter to torque signal conditioner between Test Points TP7 (+) and
TPC (-).
(i) Adjust Pot 3 (P3) to read approximately +4.25 volts on digital voltmeter.
(j) Start the engine and stabilize at 100 percent engine speed and 28,800 in-lb (2,400 ft-lb)
(3,254 Nm) torque as indicated on PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator.
(k) Cycle the engine, from minimum to maximum, three times with the oil temperature at 65°C
(150°F) minimum.
NOTE: Load and unload engine a minimum of three times prior to taking data for torque
plot.
NOTE: The torque system must be calibrated with the engine running and with the oil
temperature at 150°F (65°C) minimum.
(l) Connect digital voltmeter to torque signal conditioner between Test Points TP7 (+) and
TPC (-).
(m) Load engine to 28,800 in-lb (2,400 ft-lb) (3,254 Nm) torque indicated on PN 292156-1,
digital torque indicator.
(n) Adjust Pot 1 (P1) voltage on torque signal conditioner to read 1.315 to 1.415 volts.
(o) Unload the engine at 100 percent RPM to 6,000 in-lb (500 ft-lb) (677.9 Nm) torque as
indicated on PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator.
(p) Record voltage (V2) indicated on digital voltmeter.
(q) Determine the no-load voltage (V3) as follows:
1 Read voltage (V2), recorded in the previous step, on vertical scale. Move across to
intersect curve. Move down to horizontal scale and record voltage (V3). Refer to
Figure 13026.
2 With the engine loaded to 6,000 in-lb (500 ft-lb) (677.9 Nm) torque adjust Pot 3 (P3)
to the voltage (V3) determined in the previous step.
(r) Load engine to 28,800 in-lb torque (2,400 ft-lb) (3,254 Nm) torque indicated on PN 292156-1,
(s) Adjust Pot 1 (P1) voltage on torque signal conditioner to read 1.315 to 1.415 volts.
(t) Reduce engine load to 6,000 in-lb torque (500 ft-lb) (677.9 Nm) at 100 percent RPM.
Voltage on digital voltmeter should read 4.193 to 4.293 volts. If voltage is not within limits,
repeat the previous three steps until voltage is within limits.
(u) Perform torque plot.
(v) Operate engine at 100 percent and oil temperature at 65°C (150°F) minimum.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13094
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(w) Connect a digital voltmeter to torque signal conditioner between Test Points TP7 (+) and
TPC (-).
(x) Load engine at each of the load points in Table 13032. Set load point torque on digital
indicator of torque test kit and record signal conditioner output voltage for each load point.
Make sure that slope, range, and linearity of curve is acceptable. Refer to Figure 13028.
plot.
NOTE: Take torque plot data with increasing load.
NOTE: Maintain surveillance of engine turbine exhaust temperature during operation

for torque plot. Do not exceed maximum allowable turbine exhaust temperature.
(y) Record voltage on blank engine DSC-9086 copy.
Table 13032. Engine Load Points
Load Points: Torque in-lb (Nm) Torque ft-lb (Nm) Voltage Range
1 5,000 (565) 417 (565) 4.32 to 4.42
2 10,000 (1,130) 833 (1,129) 3.69 to 3.79
3 20,000 (2,260) 1,667 (2,260) 2.43 to 2.53
4 30,000 (3,390) 2,500 (3,390) 1.16 to 1.26
1 39,613 (4,476) 3,301 (4,476) -0.05 to +0.05
5
NOTES:
1. Due to ambient condition Load Point 5 may not be obtainable due to reaching maximum temperature limit.
Record highest reading obtainable.
(z) Shut down engine. With oil temperature at 150°F (65°C) minimum, record voltage between
Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-).
NOTE: The reading will be in negative millivolts (-mV).
(aa) Record mV reading on engine DSC-9086 copy.

(ab) Measure voltage with digital voltmeter leads connected between Test Points TP7 (+) and
TPC (-).
NOTE: The resultant mV and voltage readings are the calibration readings for the
bridge.
(ac) Record voltage reading on engine DSC-9086 copy.

(ad) Switch engine torque sensor output connector from input connector for Bridge 2 to input
connector for Bridge 1 on torque signal conditioner.
(ae) Repeat the above steps for Bridge 1.
(af) Disconnect voltmeter.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13095
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(ag) Apply Glyptal 1201, enamel to adjustment screws.

(ah) Install cover and lockwire screws.
(ai) Remove torque test kit components from engine.
(aj) Install oil flow metal (beta) tube assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-01-4000).
NOTE: If both bridges are to be calibrated simultaneously on torque signal conditioner,
proceed to the following step.
(4) Torque signal conditioner calibration (both bridges calibrated simultaneously).

(a) Connect torque sensor output connector to input connector for Bridge 2 on spare torque
signal conditioner and the engine's torque signal conditioner to Bridge 1.
NOTE: Use a spare torque signal conditioner box and suitable patch cables to calibrate
both bridges simultaneously. A torque signal conditioner from another engine
may be used provided the potentiometer settings for that engine are reset when
the torque signal conditioner is returned. Connect spare torque signal conditioner
box to Bridge 2 and the engine's torque signal conditioner to Bridge 1.
(b) Remove top covers from torque signal conditioner.

(c) Connect a digital voltmeter to both torque signal conditioners between Test Points TP7 (+)
and TPC (-). Refer to Figure 13024 and Figure 13025.
(e) (Pre SB TPE331-76-0024) Adjust Pot 2 (P2) to read -0.002 to +0.002 volts on digital
voltmeter. Remove both wires (short) between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-). Refer to
Figure 13024.
signal conditioner if voltage output was not acceptable. Refer to Figure 13025.
(g) Connect digital voltmeter to torque signal conditioner between Test Points TP1 (+) and
TP2 (-).
(h) Adjust Pot 1 (P1) to read -25 mV (approximately) on digital voltmeter for Bridge 2 and
Bridge 1.
(i) Connect digital voltmeter to torque signal conditioner between Test Points TP1 (+) and
TP2 (-).
(j) Adjust Pot 1 (P1) to read -25 mV (approximately) on digital voltmeter.
(k) Connect digital voltmeter to torque signal conditioner between Test Points TP7 (+) and
TPC (-).
(l) Adjust Pot 3 (P3) to read approximately +4.25 volts on digital voltmeter.
(m) Start the engine and stabilize at 100 percent engine speed and 28,800 in-lb (2,400 ft-lb)
(3,254 Nm) torque as indicated on PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator. Cycle the engine
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13096
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
from minimum to maximum at least three times while the oil temperature at 150°F (65°C)
minimum.
plot.
NOTE: The torque system must be calibrated with the engine running and with the oil
temperature at 150°F (65°C) minimum.
(n) Connect digital voltmeter to torque signal conditioner between Test Points TP7 (+) and
TPC (-).
(o) Load engine to 28,800 in-lb (2,400 ft-lb) (3,254 Nm) torque indicated on PN 292156-1,
(p) Adjust Pot 1 (P1) to read 1.315 to 1.415 volts (V1) on digital voltmeter.
(q) Unload the engine at 100 percent RPM to 6,000 in-lb (500 ft-lb) (677.9 Nm) torque as
indicated on PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator.
(r) Record measured voltage (V2) indicated on digital voltmeter.
(s) Determine the no-load voltage (V3) as follows:
1 Locate voltage (V2), recorded in the previous step, on vertical scale. Refer to Figure
13026.
2 Locate position where measured voltage (V2) intersects curve.
3 Identify calculated voltage (V3) on horizontal scale and record.
4 With the engine loaded to 6,000 in-lb (500 ft-lb) (677.9 Nm) torque adjust Pot 3 (P3)
to the calculated voltage (V3) recorded in the previous step.
(t) Load engine to 28,800 in-lb (2,400 ft-lb) (3,254 Nm) torque. Adjust voltage (P1) on torque
signal conditioner to read 1.386 to 1.486 volts (each bridge).
(u) Reduce engine load to 6,000 in-lb torque (500 ft-lb) (677.9 Nm) at 100 percent RPM.
Voltage on digital voltmeter should read 4.193 to 4.293 volts. If voltage is not within limits,
repeat the following until voltage is within limits.
1 Load engine to 28,800 in-lb (2,400 ft-lb) (3,254 Nm) torque indicated on PN 292156-1,
2 Adjust Pot 1 (P1) to read 1.315 to 1.415 volts (V1) on digital voltmeter.
(v) Perform torque plot.
(w) Operate engine at 100 percent and oil temperature at 150°F (65°C) minimum.
(x) Connect digital voltmeter to torque signal conditioner between Test Points TP7 (+) and
TPC (-).
(y) Load engine at each of the load points in Table 13033. Set load point torque on digital
indicator of torque test kit and record signal conditioner output voltage for each load point.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13097
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Make sure that slope, range, and linearity of curve is acceptable. Refer to most current
copy of DSC-9086.
plot.
NOTE: Take torque plot data with increasing load.
NOTE: Maintain surveillance of engine turbine exhaust temperature during operation

for torque plot. Do not exceed maximum allowable turbine exhaust temperature.
Table 13033. Engine Load Points
Load Points: Torque in-lb (Nm) Torque ft-lb (Nm) Voltage Range
1 5,000 (565) 417 (565) 4.32 to 4.42
2 10,000 (1,130) 833 (1,129) 3.69 to 3.79
3 20,000 (2,260) 1667 (2,260) 2.43 to 2.53
4 30,000 (3,390) 2500 (3,390) 1.16 to 1.26
1 40,405 (4565) 3301 (4476) -0.05 to +0.05
5
NOTES:
1. Due to ambient condition Load Point 5 may not be obtainable due to reaching maximum temperature limit.
Record highest reading obtainable.
(z) Shut down engine. With oil temperature at 150°F (65°C) minimum, record voltage between
Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-).
NOTE: The reading will be in negative millivolts (-mV).
(aa) Record mV reading on engine DSC-9086 copy.

(ab) Measure voltage with digital voltmeter leads connected between Test Points TP7 (+) and
TPC (-).
NOTE: The resultant mV and voltage readings are the calibration readings for the
bridge.
(ac) Record voltage reading on engine DSC-9086 copy.

(ad) Repeat calibration procedure steps for Bridge 1.
(ae) Disconnect voltmeter. If spare torque signal conditioner was removed from another engine,
reset potentiometer to previous settings for that engine. Apply Glyptal 1201, enamel to Pot
1 (P1) and Pot 3 (P3) torque signal conditioner adjustment screws. Install cover and lockwire
screws.
(af) Remove torque test kit components from engine.
(ag) Install oil flow metal (beta) tube assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-01-4000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13098
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13024. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-76-0024) Torque Signal Conditioner (GRAPHIC

72-00-00-99B-024-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13099
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13025. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-76-0024) Torque Signal Conditioner (GRAPHIC

72-00-00-99B-025-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13100
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
Figure 13026. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Sensor Signal Conditioner Calibration (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-026-A01)
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
All Page 13101/13102
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13027. (Sheet 1 of 1) Setup Using a Spare Signal Conditioner (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-027-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13103
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
Figure 13028. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Plotting Form (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-028-A01)
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
All Page 13105/13106
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
AQ. Preparation of Engine and PN 291862-3 Torque Test Kit Installation (Subtask
72-00-00-700-045-A01)
NOTE: If the difference between torque system Bridges 1 and 2 is greater than 66 ft-lb (89.5 Nm)
or 0.10 volt, or a torque ring without a current DSC with shutdown voltage values was
installed, perform the preparation of engine and PN 291862-3, torque test kit installation.
(1) Connect PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator (1, Figure 13029) to a 105 to 125 volt (grounded
power supply), 50 to 60 Hz outlet.
NOTE: Locate PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator so that a temperature range of 50 to
120°F (10 to 49°C) is maintained during test and adjustment procedure. Make sure
that PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator case is grounded through AC power cable
(3-prong plug). Make sure that slip rings of PN 283997-3, torquemeter are clean and
dry by removing slip ring cover and if necessary, spray slip rings with MS180/Co2
Freon TF, trichlorotrifluoroethane solvent. Wipe accessible surfaces clean with lint-free
cloth.
(2) Connect PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator to PN 283997-3, torquemeter (5) using PN
292158-1, electrical cable (2).
(3) Place power switches (located at rear of PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator) to ON.
CAUTION: PROTECT OIL FLOW (BETA) TUBE FROM CORROSION AND POSSIBLE DAMAGE
UNTIL REINSTALLATION. STORE IN STORAGE CASE.
(4) Remove engine propeller spinner, oil flow (beta) tube assembly, and propeller assembly.
(5) Remove existing propeller shaft O-ring and install S9413-142, packing (4).
(6) Remove propeller de-icing brush block assembly if installed.
NOTE: There are two different length load cells (Lebows) requiring different load cell spacers
and beta tubes used with PN 291862-3, torque test kit on McCauley propellers. Table
13034 will determine requirements.
Table 13034. Determine Requirements Using Load Cell, Propeller, Load Cell Spacer and Beta Tube
McCauley Propeller
Load Cell (Lebow) Length (Inches With Load Cell Spacer Part No. Use Beta Tube
(mm))
5.68 (144.3) PN 296974-3, load cell spacer or PN PN 897659-1 or PN 832733-1 1
296974-5, load cell spacer
6.68 (169.7) PN 296974-1, load cell spacer PN 897659-1 or PN 832733-1
1
NOTES:
1. Component of PN 294626-11, extended beta tube assembly.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13107
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(7) Install electrically connected PN 283997-3, torquemeter and load cell spacer, if required, on
propeller shaft. If PN 283997-3, torquemeter fails to bottom against propeller shaft or load cell
spacer flange, remove PN 283997-3, torquemeter. Clean pin holes and pins and reassemble
components. Secure with mount bolts and washers. Only hand-tightened at this time.
NOTE: Prior to installing PN 283997-3, torquemeter to propeller shaft, determine size of load
cell (length in inches), beta tube, and load cell spacer, if required.
NOTE: Carefully fit load cell spacer, if required, and PN 283997-3, torquemeter on propeller
shaft flange. Make sure that aligning pins on shaft flange and pin holes on PN
283997-3, torquemeter and load cell spacer engage and seat fully with hand pressure.
If satisfactory alignment cannot be achieved, return torque test kit to Honeywell
International Inc, Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ
85034-3440.
(8) Adjust PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator as follows:

(a) Set zero on indicator by adjusting coarse and fine balance screws on PN 292156-1, digital
torque indicator face plate.
NOTE: Make sure that PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator and PN 283997-3,
torquemeter have been electrically stabilized for a minimum of 1 hr prior to
setting.
(b) Set propeller rotation switch at (-) (CCW) for left-hand propeller rotation (viewed from rear
of engine).
(c) Depress shunt calibrate switch and adjust coarse and fine span to read calibration positions
as specified in data sheet provided with PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator.
(d) Recheck zero and span by referring the following steps. Repeat steps as necessary until
required calibration is achieved.
1 Set zero on indicator by adjusting coarse and fine balance screws on PN 292156-1,
digital torque indicator face plate.
2 Depress shunt calibrate switch and adjust coarse and fine span to read calibration
positions as specified in data sheet provided with PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator.
CAUTION: FOLLOW OUTLINED PN 283997-3, TORQUEMETER BOLT TORQUE PROCEDURE
OR OUTPUT SIGNAL MAY BE AFFECTED.
(9) Initially torque bolts securing load cell (Lebow) and load cell spacer to propeller shaft flange to
30 ft-lb (40.7 Nm). Refer to Figure 13030. Torque bolts to final value as specified in AMM or
propeller manufacturer's recommendations, following same torque sequence.
(10) Check reading on PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator to determine if a shift of more than +/-300
in-lb (+/-33.9 Nm) occurred. If adjustment is required, loosen and retorque bolts. Refer to the
preceding step to remove side loading of PN 283997-3, torquemeter. If shift is less than +/-300
in-lb (+/-33.9 Nm), rebalance indicator to zero as follows:
(11) Install extended beta tube and propeller as follows:
(a) Set PPC in full reverse position, then install extended beta tube (7, Figure 13029) and
check for freedom of movement in propeller shaft. Remove beta tube.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13108
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: USE CARE WHEN INSTALLING PROPELLER ON PN 283997-3,

TORQUEMETER TO AVOID DAMAGE TO PACKING.
(b) Install S9413-142, packing (6) on piston packing groove of PN 283997-3, torquemeter (5).
Carefully install propeller on PN 283997-3, torquemeter and secure with bolts and washers
furnished with PN 283997-3, torquemeter. Hand tighten bolts.
CAUTION: FOLLOW OUTLINED PN 283997-3, TORQUEMETER BOLT TORQUE
PROCEDURE OR OUTPUT SIGNAL MAY BE AFFECTED.
(c) Initially torque bolts to 30 ft-lb (40.7 Nm) in sequence shown in Figure 13030. Torque bolts
to final value as specified in AMM or propeller manufacturer's recommendations, following
same torque sequence.
(d) Check reading on PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator to determine if a shift occurred in
the zero adjustment. If a shift of more than +/-50 in-lb (+/-5.6 Nm) is noted, loosen bolts,
check alignment and proper fit of alignment pins and pin holes and reinstall propeller. Refer
to the preceding step. If problem persists, change propeller and repeat the preceding step.
NOTE: If satisfactory alignment cannot be achieved, return PN 291862-3, torque test
kit to Honeywell International Inc, Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle,
Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440, for repair.
(e) Set aircraft power lever at flight idle and pin PPC lever so that no movement from this
position takes place during the following procedures.
(f) With propeller in feather position, carefully insert extended beta tube. Refer to Table 13034.
Thread beta tube in and engage threads in propeller.
CAUTION: TO AVOID POSSIBLE DAMAGE OF THE COMPRESSOR AIR-OIL SEAL,
OPERATION OF THE UNFEATHERING PUMP MUST BE LIMITED TO 1 MINUTE
FOR COLD OIL AND 30 SECONDS FOR HOT OIL. AT THE END OF THIS
TIME, MOTOR OR HAND ROTATE PROPELLER IN NORMAL DIRECTION OF
ROTATION TO SCAVENGE OIL FROM THE ACCESSORY HOUSING SUMP.
IF STARTER IS USED, OBSERVE TIME LIMIT IMPOSED BY STARTER
MANUFACTURER.
(g) Operate unfeathering pump and adjust beta tube in until blade is at angle specified in AMM.
NOTE: One CCW turn of beta tube increases blade angle approximately 2.4 degrees.
(h) When propeller blade angle is confirmed, lock the beta tube in position. Remove rig pin
from PPC lever.
(12) Secure short arm of loosely jointed anti-rotation bracket to PN 283997-3, torquemeter using
existing bolt and long arm of bracket to engine case using existing stud and nut and washer
supplied with test kit.
NOTE: Allow clearance between arms of anti-rotation bracket to give slight amount of play
and prevent stress on PN 283997-3, torquemeter.
(13) Make sure that PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator and PN 283997-3, torquemeter have been
electrically stabilized for a minimum of 1 hr.
(14) Recheck PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator calibration as follows:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13109
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
of engine).
(c) Depress shunt calibrate switch and adjust coarse and fine span to read calibration positions
2 Depress shunt calibrate switch and adjust coarse and fine span to read calibration
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13110
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13029. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Test Kit Installation (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-030-A01)
1. PN 292156-1 DIGITAL TORQUE 5. PN 283997-3 TORQUEMETER

INDICATOR
2. PN 292158-1 ELECTRIC CABLE 6. S9413-037 PACKING
3. PN 283973-2 ANTI-ROTATION BRACKET 7. EXTENDED BETA TUBE
4. S9413-142 PACKING
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13111
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13030. (Sheet 1 of 1) PN 283997-3 Torquemeter and Propeller Bolt Torque Sequence (GRAPHIC
72-00-00-99B-031-A01)
AR. (Codes B, C) APR/RPR Compensating Resistor Adjustment (Subtask 72-00-00-700-046-A01)
(1) Adjust APR/RPR compensating resistor (airframe mounted) for the setting in Table 13035.
Table 13035. Compensating Resistor Setting
Nominal Temperature Compensation

Millivolt output
Setting No. (+/-0.020 mV) -°F -°C
14 -0.863 -37 -21
(2) Use Method 2 to adjust APR/RPR compensating resistor. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK
77-20-03-13000).
AS. Maximum Trim Compensation Adjustment (Subtask 72-00-00-700-047-A01)
NOTE: When low engine performance is suspected perform an Aircraft/Power Plant Systems
Verification following the recommendations in SIL P331-116. The engine EGT compensator
may be adjusted within the range of the available maximum trim values at anytime during
the service life of the engine.
NOTE: If additional engine performance evaluation is necessary perform either ground or flight
performance verification in accordance with SIL P331-116 and submit a complete
performance data form to Honeywell International Inc, Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky
Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440. The recompensation procedure is applicable to
operators of engines where performance deterioration is confirmed via ground performance
analysis. Field accomplishment of recompensation procedure, depending on engine
operational history, can result in power restoration via retrimming of EGT to allow the
engine to operate to its thermal rating.
(1) Confirm engine performance deterioration as follows:
(a) Obtain latest DSC for minimum and maximum Tt5 limit. If Tt5 limits are not available on
DSC, contact Product Support Engineering to obtain maximum/minimum Tt5 limits.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13112
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(b) Accomplish engine ground performance analysis and complete a performance data form.
Refer to SIL P331-116.
(c) Submit completed engine performance data form and latest DSC maximum/minimum Tt5
limits to Honeywell International Inc, Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix,
AZ 85034-3440.
NOTE: SIL P331-22 contains a list of Field Service Engineers.
(2) Perform Maximum Trim Compensation Adjustment as follows:

(a) Product Support Engineering will evaluate and analyze engine performance data and
determine amount compensating resistor can be adjusted to restore engine power.
CAUTION: DO NOT ADJUST COMPENSATING RESISTOR BEYOND THE MAXIMUM TT5
LIMIT (MAXIMUM TRIM VALUE) OR TT4 WILL BE EXCEEDED.
(b) Adjust compensating resistor to value determined by Product Support Engineering. Refer
(c) Record adjustment setting in Engine Log Book and DSC.
(d) If engine performance remains low after maximum trim compensation adjustment, contact
Honeywell Global Customer Care Center.
AT. Propeller Test Stand Recompensation Procedures (Recompensating EGT) – Engine

Configuration on Propeller Test Stand (Subtask 72-00-00-700-048-A01)
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ACCOMPLISH ENGINE OPERATION FOR RECOMPENSATING

PURPOSES IF WIND CONDITIONS ARE GUSTING ABOVE 5 KNOTS OR IF WIND IS
ABOVE 10 KNOTS STEADY STATE.
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT RECOMPENSATION OPERATION DURING RAINY WEATHER
CONDITIONS. HIGH MOISTURE CONTENT ADVERSELY AFFECTS LEBOW SLIP RINGS
CAUSING INACCURATE TORQUE READINGS.
NOTE: Maximum trim compensation adjustment must be accomplished before attempting to
perform propeller test stand recompensation. Refer to Paragraph 2.AS. Maximum Trim
Compensation Adjustment (Subtask 72-00-00-700-047-A01).
NOTE: When deteriorating engine performance is suspected, submit a completed performance
data form in accordance with SIL P331-116 to Honeywell International Inc, Distribution
Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440.
NOTE: The following MM procedure is applicable to operators of TPE331-12UA/UAR/UHR engines
where performance deterioration is confirmed via ground performance analysis.
Recompensation, depending on engine operational history, can result in power restoration
via retrimming of the EGT to allow the engine to operate to its thermal rating. The
recompensation procedure will make sure that the maximum turbine inlet temperature is
not exceeded.
NOTE: Propeller test stand recompensation may be completed at any time during the service life
of engine. A recompensation is not required after a hot section inspection when setting
EGT compensating resistor to the values given on the latest engine DSC generated at
new engine production or at overhaul of the engine. If this DSC is unreadable and engine
was recompensated at Phoenix, contact Honeywell Global Customer Care Center for
engine compensation values. A recompensation is required if any one the following
conditions apply:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13113
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
• Replacement of first or second stage impellers

• If compressor was reshimmed
• If current DSC information is not available, new DSC values must be generated after
completion of hot section inspection.
NOTE: Throughout this procedure, any reference to the TPEV1 data reduction program is an
equivalent reference to the TPEV1.05 data reduction program, the current version of
software. Also, any reference to the associated User's Manual 21-8491 is the equivalent
reference to User's Manual 21-8941D, the current version of the user's manual.
NOTE: All tests must be performed between 20 to 120°F (-7 to 49°C) TT2 using engine performance
data reduction program TPEV1 (3 1/2 or 5 1/4 inch diameter floppy disk). Tests performed
at inlet temperature below 59°F (15°C) must use the reduced rotor speeds listed in Table
13038.
(1) Install a calibrated PN 291862-3, torque test kit and propeller.
NOTE: To verify test accuracy of propeller test stand performance test, engine configuration
must be as specified and instrumentation accuracy as specified in Table 13036.
NOTE: Make sure that Lebow calibration is current. Refer to Table 13037.
(2) Install starter-generator.

(3) Remove hydraulic pump.
(4) Install tachometer-generator and speed switch.
(5) Install PN 298430-2, inlet duct.
(6) Install PN 831368-1, sixteen-probe tailpipe.
(7) Install data acquisition system, if available.
Table 13036. Propeller Test Stand Instrumentation Accuracy
Parameter Typical Range Required Accuracy Resultant Maximum Error

Barometric Pressure (Pt2) 26 to 31 inHg (660 to 787 +/-0.25% +/-0.075 inHg (1.91 mmHg)
mmHg)
Compressor Discharge 0 to 300 inHg (0 to 7,620 +/-0.25% +/-0.75 inHg (1.91 mmHg)
Pressure (Pt3) mmHg)
Exhaust Static Pressure 35 inH2O (889 mmH2O) +/-1% +/-0.1 inH2O (+/-2.5 mmH2O)
(PS5) positive to negative
Inlet Temperature (Tt2) 20 to 120°F (-6.6 to 49°C) +/-1 Count (+/-1% Full +/-1°F (+/-0.5°C)
Scale)
Compressor Discharge 200 to 750°F (93 to 399°C) +/-1 Count (+/-0.1% Full +/-2°F (+/-1°C)
Temperature (Tt3) Scale)
EGT (Tt5) 200 to 1200°F (93 to +/-0.2% +/-2°F (+/-1°C)
650°C)
Propeller Speed 0 to 2000 RPM +/-0.25 +/-5 RPM
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13114
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13036. Propeller Test Stand Instrumentation Accuracy (Cont)
Parameter Typical Range Required Accuracy Resultant Maximum Error

Torque (Lebow load cell) 0 to 39,613 in-lb (4,476 +/-0.5% +/-198 in-lbs (+/-22.4 Nm)
Nm)
Fuel Flow (Wf) 0 to 600 PPH +/-0.4% +/-2.5 PPH
AU. Engine Preparation for Testing (Subtask 72-00-00-700-049-A01)
(1) Make sure that all instrument calibrations are current. In addition, items listed in Table 13037
must be calibrated. Refer to calibration interval as indicated.
Table 13037. Calibration Requirements
Item No. Nomenclature Calibration Interval

1 PN 283997-3, torquemeter (Dead After each 10 operations or 6
1.
weight span test) months, whichever occurs first, or if
the instrument has been transported
from one facility to another, it should
be dead weight tested again. Refer
to 72-GE-06 and SIL P331-102.
2. Torque Pressure Gages 1 year
3. Instrumentation in PN 284548-1-1, 6 months
aircraft engine test stand
NOTES:
1. Dead weight test must be conducted on same Lebow, digital torque readout indicator and interconnecting wiring
that will be used in actual engine performance tests. This equipment must not be interchanged later.
Table 13038. Actual Rotor Speed Versus Engine Inlet Temperature
Engine Speed
Tt2 Voltage (Frequency) Engine Turbine Propeller Shaft
Engine Inlet Temperature (Pins 15-16) (PG) Speed Speed
°F °C Volts Hz RPM RPM
59 15 0.8420 938 41,730 1,591
58 14 0.8403 937 41,690 1,589
57 14 0.8386 936 41,649 1,588
56 13 0.8369 935 41,609 1,586
55 13 0.8353 934 41,569 1,585
54 12 0.8336 933 41,528 1,583
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13115
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13038. Actual Rotor Speed Versus Engine Inlet Temperature (Cont)
Engine Speed
53 12 0.8319 933 41,488 1,582
52 11 0.8302 932 41,447 1,580
51 11 0.8286 931 41,407 1,579
50 10 0.8269 930 41,366 1,577
49 9 0.8252 929 41,326 1,576
48 9 0.8236 928 41,285 1,574
47 8 0.8219 927 41,244 1,572
46 8 0.8202 926 41,204 1,571
45 7 0.8185 925 41,163 1,569
44 7 0.8169 924 41,122 1,568
43 6 0.8152 923 41,081 1,566
42 6 0.8135 922 41,040 1,565
41 5 0.8118 922 41,000 1,563
40 4 0.8102 921 40,956 1,561
39 4 0.8085 920 40,918 1,560
38 3 0.8068 919 40,877 1,558
37 3 0.8051 918 40,835 1,557
36 2 0.8035 917 40,794 1,555
35 2 0.8018 916 40,753 1,554
34 1 0.8001 915 40,712 1,552
33 1 0.7985 914 40,671 1,550
32 0 0.7968 913 40,629 1,549
31 -1 0.7951 912 40,588 1,547
30 -1 0.7934 911 40,547 1,546
29 -2 0.7918 910 40,505 1,544
28 -2 0.7901 910 40,469 1,543
27 -3 0.7884 909 40,422 1,541
26 -3 0.7867 908 40,381 1,539
25 -4 0.7851 907 40,339 1,538
24 -4 0.7834 906 40,298 1,536
23 -5 0.7817 905 40,256 1,534
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13116
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Engine Speed
22 -6 0.7800 904 40,214 1,533
21 -6 0.7784 903 40,172 1,531
20 -7 0.7767 902 40,131 1,530
NOTE: Table 13038 presents the actual physical speeds required to produce a corrected
engine speed for establishing standard day engine mass air flows. These engine
speeds should be used for conducting performance calibrations at engine inlet
temperature equal to or less than 59°F (15°C). TT2 voltages and monopole
frequencies can be obtained from PN 294562-1, SRL tester or PN 294562-2, SRL
tester if SRL system is operational on propeller stand.
(2) Set proper depth on PN 284542-2-1, PT3/TT3 probe assembly as follows:

(a) Remove nuts, washers, and cover from bleed air extraction port at 4 or 8 o'clock position,
aft looking forward. Refer to Figure 13031.
(b) Place PN 295885-1, depth set tool over gasket on selected bleed air extraction port and
press pin of PN 295885-1, depth set tool through port hole until it contacts the combustor.
Refer to Figure 13032. Lock the pin with the knurled setscrew and carefully withdraw the
PN 295885-1, depth set tool from the bleed air extraction pad port.
(c) Hold PN 295885-1, depth set tool and set 284542-2-1 Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly on top of
PN 295885-1, depth set tool. Refer to Figure 13033.
(d) Loosen compression fitting and position PN 284542-2-1, PT3/TT3 probe assembly until
probe just contacts the end of depth pin. Refer to Figure 13033.
(e) Set the two probe tip openings (Figure 13034) to point at any corner of the PN 284542-2-1,
PT3/TT3 probe assembly Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly plate while still maintaining probe/pin
contact. Lock the probe in place using the compression fitting. Refer to Figure 13033.
Remove PN 284542-2-1, PT3/TT3 probe assembly from PN 295885-1, depth set tool.
(f) Install PN 284542-2-1, PT3/TT3 probe assembly at the selected bleed air extraction port
so that the openings at the probe tips are pointing to the bleed air extraction port corner
representing forward and down on left side of engine or forward and up on right side of
engine. Secure PN 284542-2-1, PT3/TT3 probe assembly with washers and nuts. Torque
nuts to 20 in-lb (2.3 Nm).
(g) Cap aircraft bleed air extraction port with a blanking plate or with PN 284542-2-1, PT3/TT3
probe assembly, if applicable.
(h) Remove tube assemblies at P1 and P2 (Figure 13031) (tube assembly at P1 is customer
connection) and cap fittings at P1 and P2 with two PN S8495-6C caps or equivalent.
(i) Connect instrumentation cables to PN 284542-2-1, PT3/TT3 probe assembly. Connect
Pt3 pressure line (steel braided) to Pt3 fitting of Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13117
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: CLAMP OR PLUG AMBIENT VENT OR MANOMETER, DURING ENGINE STARTS,

TO PREVENT STARTING TRANSIENT PRESSURES FROM DISCHARGING WATER
FROM MANOMETER. MAKE SURE THAT CLAMP OR PLUG IS REMOVED AND
AMBIENT VENT IS COMPLETELY OPEN PRIOR TO TAKING READINGS DURING
TEST.
(3) Fabricate a water manometer using 1/4-inch OD clear plastic tubing. Manometer must be capable
of measuring 35 inches (889 mm) of water (positive and negative pressures). Refer to Figure
13035 for sample. Install manometer in test cell and connect a pressure line between manometer
and PS5 port (located on sixteen-probe tailpipe).
NOTE: If an accurate inches of water gage cannot be obtained for PS5 measurement, a
water manometer may be fabricated for the following procedure.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT ALL CABLES, LINES, AND ELECTRICAL LEADS ARE
THOROUGHLY SECURED TO PREVENT COMPONENTS FROM CONTACTING
PROPELLER. IF PROPELLER STRIKES COMPONENTS, DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT
AND POSSIBLE INJURY TO PERSONNEL COULD OCCUR.
(4) Connect all other instrumentation cables, lines and electrical leads. Route along suitable support
structures. Tie wrap and tape cables, lines, and leads as necessary to prevent damage during
engine operation.
NOTE: Engine PS5 port should be capped off unless SRL controller is being used to obtain
SRL temperatures.
(5) Make sure of proper compensator setting and operation as follows:

(a) Obtain compensator part number, setting number and temperature offset that is recorded
in engines DSC sheet and/or engine log book.
(b) Obtain part number and setting number that is stamped on compensator installed on engine.
Using number obtained from compensator, temperature offset can be obtained from Table
13043.
(c) Compare the part number, setting number stamped on compensator installed on engine,
and temperature offset with compensator part number, setting number, and temperature
offset taken from the engine records. Compensator part number, setting number and
temperature offset taken from engine records should match those taken from compensator
installed on engine.
(d) Apply power to propeller stand test cell. Record EGT reading and open circuit breaker
which supplies power to compensator. Difference between powered and unpowered
readings must equal temperature offset obtained from engine records within +/-3.6°F
(+/-2°C). If difference is not +/-3.6°F (+/-2°C), adjust, repair or replace EGT compensator
to correct problem.
NOTE: If temperature offset does not meet tolerance requirements, determine if
performance problem was caused by improper compensation. Re-evaluate
need for recompensation.
(e) Reset circuit breaker.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13118
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13031. (Sheet 1 of 1) Bleed Air Extraction Ports and Anti-Ice Line (Typical) (GRAPHIC
72-00-00-99B-032-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13119
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13032. (Sheet 1 of 1) Setting Pin Depth of Depth Set Tool (Typical) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-033-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13120
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13033. (Sheet 1 of 1) Setting Pt3/Tt3 Probe Depth (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-034-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13121
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13034. (Sheet 1 of 1) Pt3/Tt3 Probe Assembly Orientation (Typical) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-035-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13122
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13035. (Sheet 1 of 1) Manometer Fabrication (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-036-A01)
Serviceable Limits
Reference Inches (mm)
DIM. A 0.25 (6.35) OD
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13123
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
AV. Engine Testing Requirements (Subtask 72-00-00-700-050-A01)
NOTE: All engine starts and shutdowns must be accomplished in accordance with standard
operating practices.
NOTE: Check all test equipment installations to make sure that they are capable of measuring
parameters shown on Figure 13036, Performance Data Sheet. Make sure that calibration
of test equipment is current. Refer to Table 13037.
NOTE: Make a copy of the Performance Data Sheet, to record data.
(1) (If applicable.) Adjust PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator as follows:
NOTE: This procedure is required only if PN 283997-3, torquemeter is used instead of engine
strain gage torque sensor. PN 283997-3, torquemeter is required when engine torque
signal output cannot be verified. Refer to Paragraph 2.AO. Torque System Bridge
Cross Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-043-A01).
NOTE: Make sure that PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator and PN 283997-3,
torquemeter have been electrical stabilized for a minimum of 1 hr prior to setting
indicator on zero.
of engine).
(c) Depress shunt, calibrate switch, and adjust coarse and fine span to read calibration positions
2 Depress shunt, calibrate switch, and adjust coarse and fine span to read calibration
(2) Operate engine until oil temperature is at normal operating range. Cycle propeller through reverse
and normal operating ranges several times (for a minimum of 3 minutes) to make sure of adequate
oil flow through propeller controlling system to bring to operating temperature. Note engine speed
frequency when at 100 percent engine speed. Reset PG if frequency is not 934 to 942 Hz (1,585
to 1,597 RPM).
(3) Shut down engine. If engine torque signal conditioner is to be used, make sure that torque
system is calibrated. Refer to Paragraph 2.AO. Torque System Bridge Cross Check (Subtask
72-00-00-700-043-A01). If PN 283997-3, torquemeter is used, check zero point and span
calibration point on PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator. Adjust PG, if required, to meet frequency
requirement.
(4) Obtain torque readings from Lebow PN 292156-1, digital torque indicator used for data reduction.
Record ft-lb values, obtained at each selected target torque on Performance Data Sheet copy.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13124
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) Determine target torque values for Test Points 1 through 7 of Performance Data Sheet copy as
follows:
NOTE: If ambient temperature is above 59°F (15°C), operate engine at 100 percent RPM.
Engine at 100 percent RPM equals 938 Hz. (PG Monopole Frequency). Tolerance
is +/-4 Hz.
NOTE: If ambient temperature is 20°F (-7°C) through 59°F (15°C), operate engine at speeds
relative to ambient. Refer to Table 13038 (+/-4 Hz).
NOTE: The lower heating value of fuel is obtained locally from a chemical lab analysis. This
value is approximately 18,460 BTU/lb and should be checked at least every 3 months
to make sure that accurate engine performance is attained.
(a) Enter Figure 13037 at current ambient temperature (Tt2) and determine the maximum
operating temperature (Tt5).
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED MAXIMUM GEARBOX 5-MINUTE LIMIT OF 3,631 FT-LB
(4,923 NM) TORQUE OR DAMAGE TO ENGINE MAY RESULT.
(b) Operate engine and obtain either the maximum operating temperature (Tt5) or 3,531 to
3,631 ft-lb (4,787 to 4,923 Nm) torque, whichever is reached first. Record engine torque
at this point at Test Point 7.
(c) Calculate the target torque values for Test Points 1 through 6 as follows. Enter the
determined values in the target torque column of Performance Data Sheet copy.
• Test Point 1 = Test Point 7 torque – 1,000 ft-lb (1,356 Nm) (Lebow torque)
• Test Point 2 = Test Point 7 torque – 800 ft-lb (1,085 Nm) (Lebow torque)
• Test Point 3 = Test Point 7 torque – 600 ft-lb (813 Nm) (Lebow torque)
(6) Restart engine and select proper propeller RPM and advance power lever until the propeller
has achieved full governing.
(7) Select target torque for Test Point 1. Let parameters stabilize for a minimum of 7 minutes and
record data in the sequence shown on Performance Data Sheet copy.
(8) Repeat the above step for Test Points 2 through 7. Use Sample Performance Data Sheet, Figure
13038 only as a sample to check data for range, sign and decimal location.
(9) Shut down engine and obtain a raw SG measurement and fuel temperature using PN 24661-255
cylinder, PN 34629-011 SG float or PN 34629-601 SG float (all components of PN 296399-1,
recompensation adapter kit).
(10) Correct fuel SG for deviation from 60°F by using the following equation:
SG (corrected) = SG (measured) + ((Fuel Temp °F − 60°F) X (0.00045))
(11) Enter corrected SG on Performance Data Sheet copy.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13125
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
Figure 13036. (Sheet 1 of 2) Performance Data Sheet (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-037-A01)
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
All Page 13127/13128
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13129
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13037. (Sheet 1 of 1) Raw EGT Performance Curve (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-038-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13130
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
Figure 13038. (Sheet 1 of 2) Sample Performance Data Sheet (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-039-A01)
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
All Page 13131/13132
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
AW. Test Data Reduction (Subtask 72-00-00-700-051-A01)
NOTE: Instructions to obtain Data Reduction Program TPEV1 and user manual are provided in
SB TPE331-72-2127.
NOTE: Data Reduction Program TPEV1 reduces, calculates, plots, and prints out the test results
that give the engine SHP, minimum and maximum compensations, and plots of
computer-generated curves based on the output of test data.
(1) Perform the following validity check.
NOTE: The limit values, given in the following validity check, are a guide for determining
whether data, as reduced on Data Reduction Program TPEV1, is valid. The limits
provided are based on statistical studies of new production engine performance
parameters and known normal drift of these parameters as the engine deteriorates.
NOTE: If test data does not reflect limit stated in validity check, review input parameters from
all data points to make sure that data is correct and was properly entered into
computer. Most common errors are improper decimal point position and/or omitted
signs for minus readings.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13133
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Turbine flow parameter check – Check the turbine flow parameter values, from reduced
data, to make sure they are between the values of 1.569 to 1.749 for at least 5 of the 7
data points. Check the data points that are not within this range for correct data inputs.
(2) Upon completion of test data reduction per Data Reduction Program TPEV1, the computer output
will give minimum and maximum EGT compensation values. The program uses data contained
in the tables shown in Table 13039, based on the SRL controller fitted to the engine, to calculate
EGT compensations and to check whether the engine passes or fails according to the minimum
power requirements. If the engine does not meet the minimum requirements, EGT compensation
values will not be given and a REJECT message will appear on the computer printout. Refer to
user manual for more in-depth explanations.
Table 13039. Performance Acceptance Criteria Tables
Reference Table SRL Controller

Table 13040 (Codes BC, BD, CC, CD) Performance Acceptance
Criteria for Engines with SRL Controller, PN
2118600-10.
Table 13041 (Codes BA, BB, CA, CB) Performance Acceptance
Criteria for Engines with SRL Controller, PN 2118600-6,
-7, or -8.
Table 13042 (Code AA) Performance Acceptance Criteria for Engines
with SRL Controller, PN 2118600-3.
(3) Performance requirements.

(a) (Codes BC, BD, CC, CD) Following unscheduled access for repairs or inspections,
performance requirements (SHP) must be equal to Repair/Continued Time requirements
shown in Table 13040.
(b) (Codes BC, CC) At scheduled HSI intervals, performance requirements must be equal to
Repair/Continued Time requirements shown in Table 13040.
(c) (Codes BD, CD) At scheduled HSI intervals, performance requirements must be equal to
CAM/Overhaul requirements shown in Table 13040.
(d) (Codes BC, BD, CC, CD) At scheduled CAM/Overhaul intervals, performance requirements
must be equal to CAM/Overhaul requirements shown in Table 13040.
(e) (Codes BD, CD) At scheduled HSI intervals, and at scheduled CAM/Overhaul intervals,
the required SHP must be obtained at a T4 limit that is 15°F (-9.4°C) below the Takeoff T4
limit shown in Table 13040.
(f) (Codes BA, BB, CA, CB) Following unscheduled access for repairs or inspections,
performance requirements (SHP) must be equal to Repair/Continued Time requirements
shown in Table 13041.
(g) (Codes BA, CA) At scheduled HSI intervals, performance requirements must be equal to
Repair/Continued Time requirements shown in Table 13041.
(h) (Codes BB, CB) At scheduled HSI intervals, performance requirements must be equal to
CAM/Overhaul requirements shown in Table 13041.
(i) (Codes BA, BB, CA, CB) At scheduled CAM/Overhaul intervals, performance requirements
must be equal to CAM/Overhaul requirements shown in Table 13041.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13134
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(j) (Codes BB, CB) At scheduled HSI intervals, and at scheduled CAM/Overhaul intervals,
the required SHP must be obtained at a T4 limit that is 9°F (5°C) below the Takeoff T4
limit shown in Table 13041.
(k) (Code AA) Following unscheduled access for repairs or inspections, and following a
scheduled HSI interval, performance requirements (SHP) must be equal to Repair/Continued
Time requirements shown in Table 13042. At scheduled CAM/Overhaul intervals,
performance requirements (SHP) must be equal to CAM/Overhaul requirements shown in
Table 13042.
(4) For reserve power operation, all engines must meet the following two requirements:
NOTE: The TPEV1 program performs these reserve power checks automatically in addition
to checking normal takeoff performance against Table 13040, Table 13041, or Table
13042, as applicable. The TPEV1 program displays error messages if performance
is not acceptable. Note that a minimum of five actual test points must be used in the
TPEV1 program to determine whether performance is acceptable.
(a) An additional 5.6 percent SHP above minimum specification SHP is required at an EGT
which is 45°F (25°C) above the EGT at the minimum specification SHP.
(b) At an EGT which is 45°F (25°C) above the EGT at the maximum trim T4 for normal takeoff,
the T4 must not exceed the maximum trim T4 by more than 85°F (47°C).
Table 13040. Propstand Performance Acceptance Criteria for TPE331-12 Engines Equipped with SRL
Controller, PN 2118600-10
Minimum Nominal
Repair/Continued Minimum Compensation
1
T2°F (°C) Time SHP CAM/Overhaul SHP Takeoff T4°F (°C) EGT°F (°C)
20 to 59 (-7 to 15) 1,165 1,208 2,112 (1,156) 1,116 (602)
60 (16) 1,160 1,203 2,113 (1,156) 1,117 (603)
61 (16) 1,157 1,200 2,114 (1,157) 1,118 (603)
62 (17) 1,150 1,193 2,114 (1,157) 1,119 (604)
63 (17) 1,144 1,187 2,114 (1,157) 1,120 (604)
64 (18) 1,140 1,183 2,115 (1,157) 1,120 (604)
65 (18) 1,134 1,177 2,115 (1,157) 1,121 (605)
66 (19) 1,129 1,172 2,116 (1,158) 1,122 (606)
67 (19) 1,125 1,168 2,116 (1,158) 1,123 (606)
68 (20) 1,120 1,163 2,116 (1,158) 1,124 (607)
69 (21) 1,114 1,157 2,117 (1,158) 1,125 (607)
70 (21) 1,110 1,153 2,117 (1,158) 1,126 (608)
71 (22) 1,104 1,147 2,118 (1,159) 1,127 (608)
72 (22) 1,099 1,142 2,118 (1,159) 1,127 (608)
73 (23) 1,094 1,137 2,118 (1,159) 1,128 (609)
74 (23) 1,089 1,132 2,119 (1,159) 1,129 (609)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13135
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Controller, PN 2118600-10 (Cont)
Minimum Nominal
1
75 (24) 1,083 1,126 2,119 (1,159) 1,130 (610)
76 (24) 1,078 1,121 2,120 (1,160) 1,131 (611)
77 (25) 1,074 1,117 2,120 (1,160) 1,132 (611)
78 (26) 1,068 1,111 2,120 (1,160) 1,133 (612)
79 (26) 1,062 1,105 2,121 (1,161) 1,134 (612)
80 (27) 1,057 1,100 2,125 (1,163) 1,135 (613)
81 (27) 1,052 1,095 2,125 (1,163) 1,136 (613)
82 (28) 1,047 1,090 2,125 (1,163) 1,136 (613)
83 (28) 1,041 1,084 2,125 (1,163) 1,136 (613)
84 (29) 1,035 1,078 2,125 (1,163) 1,137 (614)
85 (29) 1,030 1,073 2,125 (1,163) 1,138 (614)
86 (30) 1,025 1,068 2,125 (1,163) 1,139 (615)
87 (31) 1,019 1,062 2,125 (1,163) 1,140 (616)
88 (31) 1,013 1,056 2,125 (1,163) 1,141 (616)
89 (32) 1,008 1,051 2,125 (1,163) 1,142 (617)
90 (32) 1,002 1,045 2,125 (1,163) 1,143 (617)
91 (33) 996 1,039 2,125 (1,163) 1,144 (618)
92 (33) 989 1,032 2,125 (1,163) 1,144 (618)
93 (34) 985 1,028 2,125 (1,163) 1,145 (618)
94 (34) 979 1,022 2,125 (1,163) 1,146 (619)
95 (35) 972 1,015 2,125 (1,163) 1,147 (619)
96 (36) 967 1,010 2,125 (1,163) 1,148 (620)
97 (36) 962 1,005 2,125 (1,163) 1,149 (621)
98 (37) 955 998 2,125 (1,163) 1,150 (621)
99 (378) 949 992 2,125 (1,163) 1,151 (622)
100 (38) 943 986 2,125 (1,163) 1,151 (622)
101 (38) 938 981 2,125 (1,163) 1,152 (622)
102 (39) 933 975 2,125 (1,163) 1,153 (623)
103 (39) 928 969 2,125 (1,163) 1,154 (623)
104 (40) 923 963 2,125 (1,163) 1,155 (624)
105 (41) 918 956 2,125 (1,163) 1,156 (624)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13136
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Minimum Nominal
1
106 (41) 914 951 2,125 (1,163) 1,157 (625)
107 (42) 910 945 2,125 (1,163) 1,158 (626)
108 (42) 905 939 2,125 (1,163) 1,159 (626)
109 (43) 901 934 2,125 (1,163) 1,160 (627)
110 (43) 896 927 2,125 (1,163) 1,161 (627)
111 (44) 891 921 2,125 (1,163) 1,161 (627)
112 (44) 887 916 2,125 (1,163) 1,162 (628)
113 (45) 882 909 2,125 (1,163) 1,163 (628)
114 (46) 877 904 2,125 (1,163) 1,164 (629)
115 (46) 873 900 2,125 (1,163) 1,165 (629)
116 (47) 869 896 2,125 (1,163) 1,166 (630)
117 (47) 865 892 2,125 (1,163) 1,167 (631)
118 (48) 861 888 2,125 (1,163) 1,168 (631)
119 (48) 857 883 2,125 (1,163) 1,168 (631)
120 (49) 853 879 2,125 (1,163) 1,169 (632)
NOTES:
1. Data corrected to sea level, static, uninstalled, conditions (TPEV1 Data Reduction Program).
Controller, PN 2118600-6, -7, or -8
Minimum Nominal
1
20 to 59 (-7 to 15) 1,145 1,160 2,067 (1,131) 1,085 (585)
60 (16) 1,141 1,156 2,068 (1,131) 1,086 (586)
61 (16) 1,138 1,153 2,069 (1,132) 1,087 (586)
62 (17) 1,133 1,148 2,070 (1,132) 1,088 (587)
63 (17) 1,128 1,143 2,071 (1,133) 1,090 (588)
64 (18) 1,124 1,139 2,072 (1,133) 1,091 (588)
65 (18) 1,119 1,134 2,073 (1,134) 1,092 (589)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13137
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Controller, PN 2118600-6, -7, or -8 (Cont)
Minimum Nominal
1
66 (19) 1,114 1,129 2,074 (1,134) 1,093 (589)
67 (19) 1,112 1,127 2,075 (1,135) 1,094 (590)
68 (20) 1,107 1,122 2,076 (1,136) 1,095 (591)
69 (21) 1,102 1,117 2,077 (1,136) 1,096 (591)
70 (21) 1,098 1,113 2,078 (1,137) 1,098 (592)
71 (22) 1,093 1,108 2,079 (1,137) 1,099 (593)
72 (22) 1,089 1,104 2,080 (1,138) 1,100 (593)
73 (23) 1,085 1,100 2,081 (1,138) 1,101 (594)
74 (23) 1,080 1,095 2,082 (1,139) 1,102 (594)
75 (24) 1,075 1,090 2,083 (1,139) 1,103 (595)
76 (24) 1,070 1,085 2,084 (1,140) 1,105 (596)
77 (25) 1,068 1,083 2,085 (1,141) 1,106 (597)
78 (26) 1,062 1,077 2,085 (1,141) 1,107 (597)
79 (26) 1057 1,072 2,086 (1,141) 1,108 (598)
80 (27) 1052 1,067 2,087 (1,142) 1,109 (598)
81 (27) 1049 1,064 2,088 (1,142) 1,110 (599)
82 (28) 1044 1,059 2,089 (1,143) 1,111 (599)
83 (28) 1039 1,054 2,090 (1,143) 1,113 (601)
84 (29) 1034 1,049 2,091 (1,144) 1,114 (601)
85 (29) 1029 1,044 2,092 (1,144) 1,115 (602)
86 (30) 1026 1,041 2,093 (1,145) 1,116 (602)
87 (31) 1020 1,035 2,093 (1,145) 1,117 (603)
88 (31) 1015 1,030 2,094 (1,146) 1,118 (603)
89 (32) 1011 1,026 2,095 (1,146) 1,120 (604)
90 (32) 1006 1,021 2,096 (1,147) 1,121 (605)
91 (33) 1000 1,015 2,096 (1,147) 1,122 (606)
92 (33) 995 1,010 2,097 (1,147) 1,123 (606)
93 (34) 991 1,006 2,098 (1,148) 1,124 (607)
94 (34) 986 1,001 2,098 (1,148) 1,125 (607)
95 (35) 980 995 2,099 (1,148) 1,127 (608)
96 (36) 976 991 2,100 (1,149) 1,128 (609)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13138
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Controller, PN 2118600-6, -7, or -8 (Cont)
Minimum Nominal
1
97 (36) 971 986 2,100 (1,149) 1,129 (609)
98 (37) 965 980 2,101 (1,149) 1,130 (610)
99 (378) 960 975 2,102 (1,150) 1,131 (611)
100 (38) 955 970 2,102 (1,150) 1,132 (611)
101 (38) 951 966 2,103 (1,151) 1,133 (612)
102 (39) 947 962 2,103 (1,151) 1,134 (612)
103 (39) 942 957 2,104 (1,151) 1,136 (613)
104 (40) 936 951 2,105 (1,152) 1,137 (614)
105 (41) 931 946 2,105 (1,152) 1,138 (614)
106 (41) 927 942 2,106 (1,152) 1,139 (615)
107 (42) 923 938 2,106 (1,152) 1,140 (616)
108 (42) 918 933 2,107 (1,153) 1,142 (617)
109 (43) 914 929 2,107 (1,153) 1,143 (617)
110 (43) 909 924 2,108 (1,153) 1,144 (618)
111 (44) 903 918 2,109 (1,154) 1,145 (618)
112 (44) 899 914 2,109 (1,154) 1,146 (619)
113 (45) 894 909 2,110 (1,154) 1,147 (619)
114 (46) 889 904 2,110 (1,154) 1,148 (620)
115 (46) 885 900 2,110 (1,154) 1,150 (621)
116 (47) 881 896 2,111 (1,155) 1,151 (622)
117 (47) 877 892 2,112 (1,156) 1,152 (622)
118 (48) 873 888 2,113 (1,156) 1,153 (623)
119 (48) 868 883 2,113 (1,156) 1,154 (623)
120 (49) 864 879 2,114 (1,157) 1,155 (624)
NOTES:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13139
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Controller, PN 2118600-3
Minimum Nominal
1
20 to 59 (-7 to 15) 1,153 1,153 2,067 (1,131) 1,085 (585)
60 (16) 1,149 1,149 2,068 (1,131) 1,086 (586)
61 (16) 1,146 1,146 2,068 (1,131) 1,087 (586)
62 (17) 1,139 1,139 2,068 (1,131) 1,088 (587)
63 (17) 1,134 1,134 2,069 (1,132) 1,089 (587)
64 (18) 1,130 1,130 2,069 (1,132) 1,089 (587)
65 (18) 1,125 1,125 2,070 (1,132) 1,090 (588)
66 (19) 1,120 1,120 2,070 (1,132) 1,091 (588)
67 (19) 1,117 1,117 2,070 (1,132) 1,092 (589)
68 (20) 1,112 1,112 2,071 (1,133) 1,092 (589)
69 (21) 1,107 1,107 2,071 (1,133) 1,093 (589)
70 (21) 1,103 1,103 2,072 (1,133) 1,094 (590)
71 (22) 1,097 1,097 2,072 (1,133) 1,095 (591)
72 (22) 1,092 1,092 2,072 (1,133) 1,095 (591)
73 (23) 1,088 1,088 2,073 (1,134) 1,096 (591)
74 (23) 1,083 1,083 2,073 (1,134) 1,097 (592)
75 (24) 1,078 1,078 2,073 (1,134) 1,098 (592)
76 (24) 1,073 1,073 2,074 (1,134) 1,099 (593)
77 (25) 1,070 1,070 2,074 (1,134) 1,099 (593)
78 (26) 1,064 1,064 2,075 (1,135) 1,100 (593)
79 (26) 1,059 1,059 2,075 (1,135) 1,101 (594)
80 (27) 1,054 1,054 2,075 (1,135) 1,102 (594)
81 (27) 1,050 1,050 2,076 (1,136) 1,102 (594)
82 (28) 1,045 1,045 2,076 (1,136) 1,103 (595)
83 (28) 1,040 1,040 2,076 (1,136) 1,104 (596)
84 (29) 1,035 1,035 2,077 (1,136) 1,105 (596)
85 (29) 1,030 1,030 2,077 (1,136) 1,106 (597)
86 (30) 1,026 1,026 2,077 (1,136) 1,106 (597)
87 (31) 1,020 1,020 2,077 (1,136) 1,107 (597)
88 (31) 1,015 1,015 2,077 (1,136) 1,108 (598)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13140
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Minimum Nominal
1
89 (32) 1,010 1,010 2,078 (1,137) 1,109 (598)
90 (32) 1,005 1,005 2,078 (1,137) 1,109 (598)
91 (33) 999 999 2,078 (1,137) 1,110 (599)
92 (33) 993 993 2,078 (1,137) 1,111 (599)
93 (34) 989 989 2,078 (1,137) 1,112 (600)
94 (34) 984 984 2,078 (1,137) 1,113 (601)
95 (35) 978 978 2,078 (1,137) 1,113 (601)
96 (36) 973 973 2,078 (1,137) 1,114 (601)
97 (36) 969 969 2,078 (1,137) 1,115 (602)
98 (37) 963 963 2,079 (1,137) 1,116 (602)
99 (378) 957 957 2,079 (1,137) 1,117 (603)
100 (38) 952 952 2,079 (1,137) 1,117 (603)
101 (38) 947 947 2,079 (1,137) 1,118 (603)
102 (39) 942 942 2,079 (1,137) 1,119 (604)
103 (39) 936 936 2,079 (1,137) 1,120 (604)
104 (40) 930 930 2,079 (1,137) 1,120 (604)
105 (41) 925 925 2,079 (1,137) 1,121 (605)
106 (41) 920 920 2,079 (1,137) 1,122 (606)
107 (42) 915 915 2,079 (1,137) 1,123 (606)
108 (42) 909 909 2,079 (1,137) 1,123 (606)
109 (43) 904 904 2,079 (1,137) 1,124 (607)
110 (43) 898 898 2,079 (1,137) 1,125 (607)
111 (44) 893 893 2,079 (1,137) 1,126 (608)
112 (44) 888 888 2,079 (1,137) 1,127 (608)
113 (45) 882 882 2,079 (1,137) 1,127 (608)
114 (46) 877 877 2,079 (1,137) 1,128 (609)
115 (46) 873 873 2,079 (1,137) 1,129 (609)
116 (47) 869 869 2,079 (1,137) 1,130 (610)
117 (47) 865 865 2,079 (1,137) 1,130 (610)
118 (48) 861 861 2,079 (1,137) 1,131 (611)
119 (48) 857 857 2,079 (1,137) 1,132 (611)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13141
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Minimum Nominal
1
120 (49) 853 853 2,079 (1,137) 1,133 (612)
NOTES:
AX. Test Completion (Subtask 72-00-00-700-052-A01)
NOTE: Upon completion of engine recompensation, previous DSC is no longer valid.

(1) Write following statement, in heavy Black Ink, across previous engines and date entry. Refer to
Figure 13039.
“FOR CURRENT DATA REFER TO LATEST DSC.”
DATED__________
(2) Generate a new DSC with data collected during recompensation. Refer to Figure 13040.
(3) Make entry in Engine Log noting recompensation completion date and that the latest data is
also recorded on new DSC.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13142
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13039. (Sheet 1 of 1) Sample DSC (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-040-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13143
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13040. (Sheet 1 of 1) DSC (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-041-A01)
AY. Compensating Resistor Adjustment (Subtask 72-00-00-700-053-A01)
CAUTION: COMPENSATING RESISTOR, PN 897476, IS BIPOLAR. MAKE SURE THAT

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATING POLARITY IS KNOWN.
NOTE: There are two methods of testing compensating resistor:
Method 1 consists of using thermocouple signal generator and digital thermometer.
Method 2 consists of using digital voltmeter, reference junction and external power source.
NOTE: Compensating resistor setting is predetermined for each engine and identified by a setting
number recorded on the engine DSC. Using a new compensation value, find the
corresponding setting number in Table 13043 or Table 13044 to establish correct voltage
output value. If required compensation falls between two setting numbers, use the next
higher (more positive) setting.
Compensating Resistor, PN 897476, is bi-polar compensation. Use Table 13043 for positive
temperature compensations and Table 13044 for negative temperature compensations.
(1) Method 1 – Perform compensating resistor test as follows:
(a) Perform functional check as follows:
1 Remove input and output connectors from engine EGT compensating resistor. Refer
to Figure 13041.
NOTE: Connectors on cable assembly are labeled for easy installation.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13144
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2 Install Connector “A” to compensating resistor input and connect “B” to compensating
resistor output.
3 Install Connector “C” to aircraft harness originally connected to compensating resistor
output.
4 Install Connector “D” to thermocouple signal generator.
5 Install Connector “E” to thermocouple signal generator and Connector “F” to digital
thermometer.
6 Apply aircraft power (28 VDC) to compensating resistor.
7 Turn thermocouple signal generator and digital thermometer power switch to ON
position. Set digital thermometer to Celsius scale.
8 Adjust thermocouple signal generator dial setting value on the digital thermometer
readout display to 100°C.
9 Disconnect input Connector “F” from digital thermometer and install Connector “G”
to digital thermometer, note value.
10 The difference in readout on digital thermometer between the above two procedures
is the compensating resistor setting, for example:
Signal generator dial setting value minus Connector G value equals
compensating resistor setting
100°C – 72°C = +28°C or 100°C – 128°C = -28°C
11 This value should agree with latest engine compensating resistor setting, recorded
on engine DSC or in engine log book within +/-2°C.
12 If temperature value does not agree with setting recorded on engine DSC or engine
log book, refer to the following procedure for compensating resistor adjustment.
13 To check cockpit EGT indicator for accuracy, increase thermocouple signal generator
dial setting to various temperatures and compare digital thermometer readout value
with cockpit EGT indicator. The values should agree with +/-2°C, if not refer FAULT
ISOLATION (PGBLK 72-00-00-1000).
14 Turn electrical power off. Disconnect test equipment and reconnect compensating
resistor to engine EGT thermocouple harness and aircraft harness.
15 Safety wire all connectors, as required.
(b) Perform adjustment of compensating resistor using test setup as follows:
1 Connect compensating resistor into the test setup. Refer to Figure 13041.
2 The compensating resistor is set by removing sealing screw to gain access to setting
adjustment screw.
CAUTION: COMPENSATING RESISTOR, PN 897476, IS BI-POLAR. MAKE SURE
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION POLARITY IS KNOWN.
3 Refer to engine DSC to determine setting number of compensating resistor required

for engine. Refer to Table 13043 and Table 13044 to determine amount of
compensation setting number is to provide.
NOTE: Compensating Resistor, PN 897476, is bi-polar compensation. CW rotation
of setting screw increases setting number plus (+°F (+°C)) and CCW
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13145
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
rotation of setting screw increases setting number minus (-°F (-°C)). Total
range of setting screw to plus or to minus is approximately 12 turns.
CAUTION: USE A PROPER SIZE JEWELERS SCREWDRIVER WHEN ADJUSTING

THE SETTING ADJUSTMENT SCREW.
4 If value of compensation determined does not agree with the compensation required
in the above procedure, adjust setting screw of the compensating resistor. Repeat
the following to obtain the required compensation.
a Install Connector “A” to compensating resistor input and connect “B” to
compensating resistor output.
b Install Connector “C” to aircraft harness originally connected to compensating
resistor output.
c Install Connector “D” to thermocouple signal generator.
d Install Connector “E” to thermocouple signal generator and Connector “F” to
digital thermometer.
e Apply aircraft power (28 VDC) to compensating resistor.
f Turn thermocouple signal generator and digital thermometer power switch to
ON position. Set digital thermometer to Celsius scale.
g Adjust thermocouple signal generator dial setting value on the digital
thermometer readout display to 100°C.
h Disconnect input Connector “F” from digital thermometer and install Connector
“G” to digital thermometer, note value.
i The difference in readout on digital thermometer between the above two
procedures is the compensating resistor setting, for example:
100°C – 72°C = +28°C or 100°C – 128°C = -28°C
j This value should agree with latest engine compensating resistor setting,
recorded on engine DSC or in engine log book within +/-2°C.
6 Recheck the compensation by engine operation.
7 After setting is accomplished lock setting screw with a drop of Glyptal 1201, enamel.
Record setting number in space provided in compensating resistor by means of an
ink stamp or stencil. If compensating resistor is being recalibrated, obliterate existing
number before reidentifying. Replace sealing screw and lockwire.
8 Record compensating resistor setting number in engine log book.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13146
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: COMPENSATING RESISTOR, PN 897476, IS BI-POLAR. MAKE SURE THAT

(2) Perform compensating resistor test using Method 2 as follows:

NOTE: Compensating resistor setting is predetermined for each engine and identified by a
setting number recorded on the engine DSC. Using a new compensation value, find
the corresponding setting number in Table 13043 and Table 13044 to establish correct
voltage output value. If required compensation falls between two setting numbers,
use the next higher (more positive) setting.
(a) Remove compensating resistor.

NOTE: Compensating Resistor, PN 897476, is bi-polar compensation. Refer to Table
13043 or Table 13044.
(b) Connect the compensating resistor into the test setup. Refer to Figure 13042. Note the
reference junction is to provide a minimum temperature difference of the three dissimilar
metals (Chromel-Alumel, Chromel-Copper and Alumel-Copper) connections; and thus, to
minimize generated errors. The connectors inside the junction should occupy a small
volume and the excess space filled with a compound (epoxy) to achieve a constant
temperature. Ideally the reference junction should be submerged in an ice-bath solution.
(c) With 28 VDC power supply turned off, turn on digital voltmeter and record voltage and sign
either (+) or (-) displayed. This voltage is a function of the dissimilar metals.
(d) Turn on DC power supply and make sure the voltage level of the power supply is 27 to 29
volts. The compensating resistor is set by removing the sealing screw to gain access to
the setting adjustment screw.
CAUTION: USE A PROPER SIZE JEWELERS SCREWDRIVER WHEN ADJUSTING THE
SETTING ADJUSTMENT SCREW.
(e) Turn setting screw with the power supply turned on until desired voltage is displayed. To
determine voltage use following algebraic equation:
(VOLTAGE) SETTING + (VOLTAGE) POWER OFF = (VOLTAGE) POWER ON
NOTE: Compensating Resistor, PN 897476, is bi-polar compensation. CW rotation of

setting screw increases setting number plus (+°F (+°C)) and CCW rotation of
setting screw increases setting number minus (-°F (-°C)). Total range of setting
screw to plus or to minus is approximately 12 turns.
(f) Refer to Table 13043 and Table 13044 which correlates setting number and voltage. The
following examples show typical values which may occur when setting the compensating
resistor. Keep in mind that these are examples and there is a tolerance on the setting
voltage:
1 Example A:
• A compensating resistor with a setting number of 19 requires a setting voltage of
1.196 mV. With power off the voltage indicated is 0.020 mV.
• Therefore: VSET + VOFF = VON
• 1.196 + 0.020 = 1.216 mV
• Adjust the setting screw until 1.216 mV is displayed.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13147
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2 Example B:
0.066 mV. With power off the voltage indicated is -0.020 mV.
• 0.066 + (-0.020) = 0.046 mV
(g) After setting is accomplished, lock setting screw with a drop of Glyptal 1201, enamel.
Record setting number in space provided on compensating resistor by means of an ink
stamp or stencil. If compensating resistor is being recalibrated, obliterate existing number
before reidentifying. Replace sealing screw and lockwire.
(h) Record the new minimum and maximum compensation values, compensator setting number
and compensator resistor part number in the engine log book.
(i) Remove and secure all test cables and test equipment.
(j) Install compensating resistor. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 77-20-03-4000).
(k) Remove S8495-6C caps from anti-ice valve tube assembly and install tube assemblies.
(l) Install bleed air covers, washers and nuts. Torque nuts to 20 in-lb (2.3 Nm).
(m) Start engine and perform operational checks (adjust, as required). Refer to TESTING
(PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
(n) Shut down engine.
Table 13043. Bi-Polar Compensating Resistor Output Requirements (Plus +°F (+°C) Settings) (PN 897476)
(Sheet 1 of 2)

Millivolt Output
Setting No. (+/-0.020 mV) +°F +°C
1 0 0 0
2 +0.066 3 2
3 +0.132 6 3
4 +0.199 8 4
5 +0.265 11 6
6 +0.331 14 8
7 +0.398 17 10
8 +0.464 20 11
9 +0.530 23 13
10 +0.597 25 14
11 +0.663 28 16
12 +0.730 31 17
13 +0.796 34 19
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13148
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13043. Bi-Polar Compensating Resistor Output Requirements (Plus +°F (+°C) Settings) (PN 897476)
(Sheet 1 of 2) (Cont)

Millivolt Output
Setting No. (+/-0.020 mV) +°F +°C
14 +0.863 37 21
15 +0.929 39 22
16 +0.996 42 24
17 +1.063 45 25
18 +1.129 48 27
19 +1.196 50 28
20 +1.263 53 30
21 +1.330 56 31
22 +1.396 59 33
23 +1.463 62 35
24 +1.530 65 36
25 +1.597 68 38
26 +1.664 70 39
27 +1.731 73 41
28 +1.798 76 43
29 +1.865 79 44
30 +1.932 82 46
31 +1.999 85 47
32 +2.066 88 49
33 +2.133 90 50
34 +2.200 93 52
35 +2.267 96 54
Table 13044. Compensating Resistor Output Requirements (Minus -°F (-°C) Setting) (PN 897476) (Sheet
2)

Millivolt Output
Setting No. (+/-0.020 mV) -°F -°C
1 0 0 0
52 -0.066 3 2
53 -0.132 6 3
54 -0.199 8 4
55 -0.265 11 6
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13149
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13044. Compensating Resistor Output Requirements (Minus -°F (-°C) Setting) (PN 897476) (Sheet
2) (Cont)

Millivolt Output
Setting No. (+/-0.020 mV) -°F -°C
56 -0.331 14 8
57 -0.398 17 10
58 -0.464 20 11
59 -0.530 23 13
60 -0.597 25 14
61 -0.663 28 16
62 -0.730 31 17
63 -0.796 34 19
64 -0.863 37 21
65 -0.929 39 22
66 -0.996 42 24
67 -1.063 45 25
68 -1.129 48 27
69 -1.196 51 28
70 -1.263 53 30
71 -1.330 56 31
72 -1.396 59 33
73 -1.463 62 35
74 -1.530 65 36
75 -1.597 68 38
76 -1.664 70 39
77 -1.731 73 41
78 -1.798 76 43
79 -1.865 79 44
80 -1.932 82 46
81 -1.999 85 47
82 -2.066 88 49
83 -2.133 90 50
84 -2.200 93 52
85 -2.267 96 54
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13150
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13041. (Sheet 1 of 1) Compensating Resistor Control Assembly Test Setup Using PN 298191-1
Compensating Resistor Tester Kit (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-042-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13151
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13042. (Sheet 1 of 1) Compensating Resistor Test Setup Diagram (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-043-A01)
AZ. Test Requirements for Repaired Engines (Subtask 72-00-00-700-054-A01)
NOTE: The test requirements listed below is a partial listing. Refer to individual component
chapter/section/subject for test requirements when removal/installation is accomplished.
NOTE: The NTS trip system check may be accomplished instead of performing the NTS system
flight and ground checks.
CAUTION: COMPONENTS OF THE NTS SYSTEM THAT ARE REMOVED AND INSTALLED TO
GAIN ACCESS FOR MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR WILL REQUIRE CORRESPONDING
NTS CHECKS. REFER TO TABLE 13003, MATRIX OF NTS PROCEDURES.
(1) Perform the following test requirements, whenever gearbox (diaphragm) and/or torque ring, fuel
control/power management controls are removed, or rotating group is disassembled.
(a) Removal or replacement of gearbox (diaphragm) requires a PG reset function and NTS
lockout system pressure check. Refer to Paragraph 2.AH. PG Reset Function and NTS
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13152
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Lockout System Pressure Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-036-A01). An NTS trip system

check or an NTS system check by flight check is also required. Refer to Paragraph 2.H.
NTS Trip System Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-010-A01) or Paragraph 2.G. NTS System
Check By Flight Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-009-A01).
(b) Removal of torque ring requires a torque system bridge cross check and an NTS trip system
check. Refer to Paragraph 2.AO. Torque System Bridge Cross Check (Subtask
72-00-00-700-043-A01) and Paragraph 2.H. NTS Trip System Check (Subtask
72-00-00-700-010-A01)
(c) Replacement of torque ring requires a torque system calibration adjustment and an NTS
trip system check. Refer to Paragraph 2.AP. Torque System Calibration Adjustment (Subtask
72-00-00-700-044-A01) and Paragraph 2.H. NTS Trip System Check (Subtask
72-00-00-700-010-A01).
(d) Removal or replacement of torque load assemblies and/or NTS valve requires either an
NTS trip system check or an NTS system check by flight check. Refer to Paragraph 2.H.
NTS Trip System Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-010-A01) or Paragraph 2.G. NTS System
Check By Flight Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-009-A01).
(e) Removal of fuel control/power management controls requires control linkage adjustments
and tests. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 76-10-01-13000) and Paragraph 2.AM. Engine Fuel
Control Adjustments (Subtask 72-00-00-700-041-A01).
(f) Disassembling of turbine section requires engine operational tests. Refer to AFM and AMM
if required.
(g) Perform vibration check whenever first stage impeller is replaced or removed from main
shaft, or second stage impeller is replaced, or main shaft is replaced. Refer to Paragraph
2.AJ. Vibration Check (Subtask 72-00-00-700-038-A01).
(2) An engine recompensation is required if any of the following conditions apply:
(a) First or second stage impeller was replaced.
(b) Engine compressor was reshimmed.
(c) If current DSC information is not available, new DSC values must be generated after
(3) After completion of engine operational tests, retorque nose cone, diaphragm, turbine scavenge
oil pump and compressor split line retaining nuts and bolts as specified below.
NOTE: Retorque of nuts or bolts is not required unless the component listed was removed
and reinstalled prior to engine operational testing.
(a) If the nose cone was removed, torque retaining nuts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm). Torque retaining
bolt to 100 in-lb (11.3 Nm).
(b) If the diaphragm was removed, torque retaining nuts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(c) If the accessory drive housing was removed, torque compressor split line retaining bolts
and nuts to 50 in-lb (5.6 Nm).
(d) (Post SB TPE331-72-0962) If turbine scavenge oil pump was removed and installed below
32°F (0°C), retorque turbine scavenge oil pump bolts as follows:
1 Remove tail cone assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-02-3000).
2 Retorque turbine scavenge oil pump bolts. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK
72-50-04-4000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13153
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
3 Reinstall tail cone. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-02-4000).
BA. Field Recompensating Procedures (Recompensating EGT) (On-Wing) – Engine Preparation

for Testing (Subtask 72-00-00-700-055-A01)
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ACCOMPLISH ENGINE OPERATION FOR RECOMPENSATION

PURPOSES IF WIND CONDITIONS ARE GUSTING ABOVE 5 KNOTS OR IF WIND IS
ABOVE 10 KNOTS STEADY STATE.
NOTE: Maximum trim compensation adjustment must be accomplished before attempting to
perform on-wing recompensation. Refer to Paragraph 2.AS. Maximum Trim Compensation
Adjustment (Subtask 72-00-00-700-047-A01).
NOTE: When deteriorating engine performance is suspected, submit a completed performance
data form in accordance with SIL P331-116 to Honeywell International Inc, Distribution
Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440.
NOTE: The following MM procedure is applicable to operators of TPE331-12UA/UAR/UHR engines
where performance deterioration is confirmed via ground performance analysis.
Recompensation, depending on engine operational history, can result in power restoration
via retrimming of the EGT to allow the engine to operate to its thermal rating. The
recompensation procedure makes sure that the maximum turbine inlet temperature is not
exceeded.
NOTE: On-wing recompensation may be completed at anytime during the service life of engine.
A recompensation is not required after a hot section inspection when setting compensating
resistor to the values given on the latest engine DSC generated at new engine production
or at overhaul of the engine. If this DSC is unreadable and engine was recompensated at
Phoenix, contact Honeywell Global Customer Care Center for engine compensation values.
A recompensation is required if the following conditions apply:
• Replacement of first or second stage impellers
• If compressor was reshimmed
• If current DSC information is not available, new DSC values must be generated after
NOTE: Throughout this procedure, any reference to the TPEV1 data reduction program is an
equivalent reference to the TPEV1.05 data reduction program, the current version of the
software. Also, any reference to the associated User's Manual 21-8491 is an equivalent
reference to User's Manual 21-8491D, the current version of the user's manual.
NOTE: Maintenance personnel should make sure that they are thoroughly familiar with the following
procedures and that special tools and equipment are available. Refer to Table 13001 and
Table 13002.
NOTE: All tests will be performed between 20 to 120°F (-7 to 49°C) inlet temperature (Tt1) using
Engine Data Reduction Program TPEV1 (3 1/2- or 5 1/4-inch diameter floppy disk). Tests
performed at inlet temperature below 59°F (15°C) will use the reduced rotor speeds listed
in Table 13046.
(1) Make sure that all instrument calibrations are current. In addition, items listed in Table 13045
must be calibrated. Refer to calibration interval as indicated.
(2) Remove engine cowling. Refer to AMM.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13154
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13045. Calibration Requirements
Item No. Nomenclature Calibration Interval

1 Heise Pressure Gage 1 year
1.
1 Turbine Flowmeter (Fuel) 1 year (if reading is displayed in
2.
PPH, must be calibrated for SG
0.817)
1 Digital Temperature Readout 6 months
3.
4. Torque Pressure Gages 1 year
5. Test Frequency, Voltage Readout Refer to tester manual.
NOTES:
1. Component of PN 296399-1, recompensation adapter kit.
CAUTION: DURING INSTALLATION OF FLOWMETER DO NOT SUBSTITUTE METAL FLOW

TUBE WITH ANY OTHER LINES OR TUBING. TUBE SUPPLIED IN KIT IS
CALIBRATED AND SUBSTITUTION MAY RESULT IN IMPROPER READINGS. DO
NOT INSTALL 90-DEGREE FITTING ON INLET OR OUTLET OF FLOWMETER.
(3) Using flex lines (component of PN 296399-1, recompensation adapter kit), install 295844-1
flowmeter assembly (component of PN 296399-1, recompensation adapter kit) in series with
aircraft flowmeter or at point where aircraft flowmeter was removed. Make sure that flowmeter
is installed in correct direction of flow and in a horizontal plane. Refer to Figure 13043.
NOTE: Make sure that installation of flowmeter is as horizontally level as possible. Insulate
flowmeter installation from vibration and shock with foam rubber or equivalent material.
(4) Set proper depth on PN 284542-2-1, PT3/TT3 probe assembly (component of PN 296399-1,
recompensation adapter kit) as follows:
NOTE: If installing PN 296399-11, pressure and temperature sensing probe (component of
PN 296399-2, TPE recompensation adapter kit), disregard this step and proceed to
next step.
(a) Remove nuts, washers, and cover from bleed air extraction port located at 4 o'clock position
looking from aft forward. Refer to Figure 13044.
(b) Place PN 295885-1, depth set tool (component of PN 296399-1, recompensation adapter
kit) over gasket on selected bleed air extraction port and press depth pin of PN 295885-1,
depth set tool through port hole until it contacts the combustor. Refer to Figure 13045. Lock
the pin with the knurled setscrew and carefully withdraw the PN 295885-1, depth set tool
from the bleed air extraction port.
(c) Hold PN 295885-1, depth set tool and set PN 284542-2-1, PT3/TT3 probe assembly on
top of PN 295885-1, depth set tool. Refer to Figure 13046.
(d) Loosen compression fitting and position PN 284542-2-1, PT3/TT3 probe assembly until
probe just contacts the end of depth pin. Refer to Figure 13046.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13155
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(e) Set the two probe tip openings (Figure 13047) to point at any corner of the PN 284542-2-1,
PT3/TT3 probe assembly plate while still maintaining probe/pin contact. Lock the probe in
place using the compression fitting. Refer to Figure 13046. Remove PN 284542-2-1,
PT3/TT3 probe assembly from PN 295885-1, depth set tool.
(5) Make sure the bleed port gasket is not torn and is installed properly, then install the PN
284542-2-1, PT3/TT3 probe assembly or PN 296399-11, pressure and temperature sensing
probe on the bleed air extraction port at the 4 o'clock position, looking from aft forward. Probe
tip openings should be pointed to the bleed port corner representing forward and up. Secure
Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly with washers and nuts. Torque nuts to 20 in-lb (2.3 Nm).
(6) On opposite bleed air extraction port (8 o'clock position, looking from aft forward), remove aircraft
bleed air line. Install a blanking plate if not already in place. This will make sure there is zero
bleed air during performance testing.
(7) Remove tube assemblies at P1 (customer connection) and P2 and cap fittings at P1 and P2
with two PN S8495-6C or equivalent caps. Refer to Figure 13044.
(8) Place PN 294562-1, SRL tester, 199KF temperature indicator and Heise pressure gage into
aircraft cabin. Refer to Figure 13048.
NOTE: A PN 296740-1, recompensation tester assembly (test panel, Figure 13049) can be
used as a substitute for 199KF temperature indicator for measuring Tfuel, Tt3 and
Tt1 temperatures. The test panel also contains a signal amplifier, as an integral
component, that can be used instead of PN 285839-1 signal amplifier. However, this
procedure is written for use without PN 296740-1, recompensation tester assembly.
(9) Connect instrument cables (components of PN 296399-1, recompensation adapter kit or PN

296399-2, TPE recompensation adapter kit) to PN 284542-2-1, PT3/TT3 probe assembly, or to
PN 296399-11, pressure and temperature sensing probe, and to PN 295844-1, flowmeter
assembly. Connect Pt3 pressure line (steel braided) to Pt3 fitting of Pt3/Tt3 probe assembly.
CAUTION: IF USING A WATER MANOMETER TO MEASURE PS5, CLAMP OR PLUG AMBIENT
VENT DURING ENGINE STARTS, TO PREVENT TRANSIENT STARTING
PRESSURES FROM DISCHARGING WATER FROM MANOMETER. MAKE SURE
THAT CLAMP OR PLUG IS REMOVED AND AMBIENT VENT IS COMPLETELY
OPEN PRIOR TO TAKING READINGS DURING TEST.
(10) Connect steel braided PS5 pressure line (component of PN 296399-1, recompensation adapter
kit) to 601187A-02B PS5 gage (component of PN 296399-1, recompensation adapter kit), or
connect steel braided PS5 pressure line to a water manometer (not a component of PN 296399-1,
recompensation adapter kit or PN 296399-2, TPE recompensation adapter kit), capable of
measuring + or – 35 inches of water (to be fabricated, as required, refer to Figure 13050 for
sample). Locate PS5 gage or water manometer inside aircraft cabin, and connect opposite end
of pressure line to PS5 port located on engine exhaust pipe.
(11) Secure PN 296399-51, T2/Tfuel probe assembly to aircraft front landing gear assembly. Make
sure that probe is mounted on upper portion of landing gear assembly and is level with the
ground. Make sure that probe is not positioned in direct sunlight. If it is not possible to protect
the probe from direct sunlight on the front landing gear assembly, reposition the probe elsewhere
on the aircraft in a suitable, secure location which is protected from direct sunlight.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13156
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT ALL CABLES, LINES, AND ELECTRICAL LEADS ARE
THOROUGHLY SECURED TO PREVENT COMPONENTS FROM CONTACTING
PROPELLER. IF PROPELLER STRIKES COMPONENTS, DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT
AND POSSIBLE INJURY TO PERSONNEL COULD OCCUR.
(12) Route all instrumentation cables, lines, and electrical leads along aircraft LE to and through a
suitable cabin access port. Inside engine nacelle, make sure that cables and electrical leads are
not located in close proximity (within 6 inches (152.4 mm)) of starter-generator, and make sure
that no cables or electrical leads are at risk of being burned or melted during testing. Tie wrap
and tape cables, lines, and leads as necessary to prevent damage during testing.
CAUTION: THE FREQUENCY READOUT SUPPLIED WITH THE SRL TESTER MAY NOT BE
CAPABLE OF READING FUEL FLOW OR MONOPOLE SIGNALS WITHOUT PN
295839-1, SIGNAL AMPLIFIER (COMPONENT OF PN 296399-1, RECOMPENSATION
ADAPTER KIT).
(13) Set up and check SRL tester. Refer to Paragraph 2.AA. Use of PN 294562-1 SRL Tester or PN
294562-2 SRL Tester (Subtask 72-00-00-700-029-A01).
NOTE: A Valhalla volt/frequency meter or equivalent may be used as a substitute for SRL
tester meters.
(14) Attach P3 pressure line to Heise pressure gage. Refer to Figure 13048. Make sure that Heise
pressure gage is zeroed and positioned with gage face vertical.
(15) Install PN 295839-1, signal amplifier to output cable of PN 295844-1, flowmeter assembly.
Connect output of PN 295839-1, signal amplifier to input jack of frequency meter of SRL tester
or Valhalla volt/frequency meter or equivalent substitute volt/frequency meter.
(16) Connect Tt1 cable from PN 296399-51, T2/Tfuel probe assembly to 199KF temperature indicator
and connect Tt3 cable from PN 284542-2-1, PT3/TT3 probe assembly or PN 296399-11, pressure
and temperature sensing probe to 199KF temperature indicator. Since the 199KF temperature
indicator has only two connections available, the fuel temperature cable from the PN 295844-1,
flowmeter assembly must manually trade connections with either the Tt1 or Tt3 cable during
testing. Prior to testing, mark or identify each temperature cable inside aircraft cabin at the 199KF
temperature indicator connections to make sure of proper readings are obtained during testing.
(17) Make sure of proper compensator setting and operation as follows:
NOTE: This step is not required if compensator setting and operation has been verified.
Refer to SIL P331-116.
(a) Obtain part number, setting number and temperature offset that is recorded in engine
records (DSC sheet and/or engine log book).
(b) Obtain part number and setting number stamped on compensator installed on engine.
Using number obtained from compensator, temperature offset can be obtained from Table
13051 or Table 13052.
(c) Compare the part number, setting number stamped on compensator installed on engine,
and temperature offset with compensator part number, setting number, and temperature
offset taken from the engine records. Compensator part number, setting number and
temperature offset taken from engine records should match those taken from compensator
installed on engine
(d) Apply power to aircraft indicating system. Record SRL tester EGT reading and open circuit
breaker which supplies power to compensator. Difference between powered and unpowered
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13157
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
readings must equal temperature offset obtained from engine records within +/-3.6°F (2°C).
If difference is not within +/-3.6°F (2°C), adjust, repair or replace EGT system components
(engine or aircraft components), as required, to correct problem. Refer to . Record
temperature OFFSET (EGT compensation) on Figure 13051 Performance Data Sheet.
NOTE: Make a copy of the Performance Data Sheet to record data.
NOTE: If temperature offset does not meet tolerance requirements, determine if

performance problem was caused by improper compensation. Re-evaluate
need for recompensation.
NOTE: If cockpit indicator is used for compensating resistor check, operate engine to
a stabilized temperature (3 minutes) prior to performing this check.
(e) Reset circuit breaker.

(18) Prior to engine test, install engine cowling. Refer to AMM.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13158
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13043. (Sheet 1 of 1) Flowmeter Assembly Installation (Typical) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-044-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13159
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13044. (Sheet 1 of 1) Bleed Air Extraction Port and Anti-Ice Line (Typical) (GRAPHIC
72-00-00-99B-045-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13160
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13045. (Sheet 1 of 1) Setting Pin Depth of Depth Set Tool (Typical) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-046-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13161
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13046. (Sheet 1 of 1) Setting Pt3/Tt3 Probe Depth (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-047-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13162
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13047. (Sheet 1 of 1) Pt3/Tt3 Probe Assembly Orientation (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-048-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13163
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13048. (Sheet 1 of 1) SRL Tester, Heise Pressure Gage, Signal Amplifier and Temperature Indicator
(Typical) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-049-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13164
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13049. (Sheet 1 of 1) Test Panel (Optional) (Component of PN 296740-1 Recompensation Tester
Assembly) (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-050-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13165
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13050. (Sheet 1 of 1) Manometer Fabrication (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-051-A01)
Serviceable Limits
DIM. A 0.25 (6.35) OD
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13166
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
All Page 13167/13168
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
All Page 13169/13170
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
BB. Engine Testing Requirements (Subtask 72-00-00-700-056-A01)
NOTE: All engine starts and shutdowns must be accomplished to operating requirements. Refer
to AFM.
NOTE: Check all test equipment installations to make sure that they are capable of measuring
parameters shown in Performance Data Sheet copy. Make sure that calibration of test
equipment is current. Refer to Table 13045.
(1) Verify compatibility of cockpit EGT gage to SRL tester as follows:
CAUTION: RECHECK CABLES, LEADS AND LINES ROUTED ALONG AIRCRAFT
NACELLE AND WING TO MAKE SURE THAT THEY ARE SECURE BEFORE
STARTING ENGINE.
(a) Start and operate engine until EGT stabilizes.

(b) Observe EGT indication on SRL tester indicator.
(c) Disconnect cockpit EGT gage and observe EGT indication on SRL tester indicator.
(d) If a change of more than 2°F (1°C) occurs between indications taken in the above two
steps, the cockpit EGT must be disconnected during test operation.
(2) Operate engine until oil temperature is at normal operating range. Note engine speed frequency
when at 100 percent engine speed. Reset PG if frequency is not 934 to 942 Hz.
(3) Shut down engine. Verify torque signal conditioner calibration.
NOTE: The torque signal conditioner calibration must be verified with oil temperature at
150°F (66°C) minimum.
(a) Remove top cover from torque signal conditioner.

(b) Connect bridge being used for cockpit gage torque indication.
(c) Connect a digital voltmeter between Test Points TP7 (+) and TPC (-) on torque signal
conditioner.
(e) (Pre SB TPE331-76-0024) Adjust pot number P2 to read -0.002 to +0.002 volts on the
voltmeter. Remove wire (short) between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-).
+0.002 volts. Remove wire (short) between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-).
(g) Record torque signal conditioner voltage between Test Points TP7 (+) and TPC (-).
(h) Connect a millivoltmeter between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-).
(i) Record negative millivolts (-mV) between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-).
(j) Check the most current engine DSC-9086 for torque signal conditioner calibration negative
millivolts (-mV) and volts for the bridge in use.
(k) Adjust Pot 1 (P1), if required, to obtain torque signal conditioner negative millivolts (-mV),
as recorded on most current engine DSC-9086, before oil temperature drops below 150°F
(66°C).
(l) Adjust Pot 3 (P3), if required, to obtain voltage, as recorded on most current engine
DSC-9086, before oil temperature drops below 150°F (66°C).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13171
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(4) Adjust PG, if required, to meet frequency requirement.

(5) Start engine and select proper engine speed based on inlet temperature (Tt1). Refer to Table
13046.
CAUTION: DO NOT, AT ANY TIME DURING TESTING, EXCEED MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE
TORQUE (100 PERCENT) AND DO NOT EXCEED EGT OF 1,202°F (650°C) ON PN
294562-1, SRL TESTER OR PN 294562-2, SRL TESTER.
(6) Deactivate torque/temperature limiter by pulling aircraft circuit breaker. Operate engine to
maximum torque (100 percent) or to maximum EGT 1202°F (650°C) on PN 294562-1, SRL
tester or PN 294562-2, SRL tester. Let engine parameters stabilize a minimum of 3 minutes.
(7) Record fuel flow, from aircraft gage, on Performance Data Sheet copy in space labeled “target
fuel flow” for Test Point 1. For Test Points 2-7, determine target fuel flow by subtracting 20 PPH
from each previous test point. Enter values on data sheet.
NOTE: Test points are determined based on fuel flow. Test Point 1 corresponds to fuel flow
from the above step. Successive test points are determined in fuel flow decrements
of 20 PPH. Fuel flow is used to set test points to minimize power lever movements
during testing and to make sure of a stabilized condition.
(8) Record ALL engine parameters for Test Point 1 on Performance Data Sheet copy. Make sure
that engine speed is maintained. If Tt1 changes during test, adjust RPM lever as necessary.
Table 13046. Actual Rotor Speed Versus Engine Inlet Temperature
Engine Speed
(Frequency) (Pins Engine Turbine Propeller Shaft
Tt1 Temperature 11-12) Speed Speed
°F °C Hz RPM RPM
59 15 938 41,730 1,591
58 14 937 41,690 1,589
57 14 936 41,649 1,588
56 13 935 41,609 1,586
55 13 934 41,569 1,585
54 12 933 41,528 1,583
53 12 933 41,488 1,582
52 11 932 41,447 1,580
51 11 931 41,407 1,579
50 10 930 41,366 1,577
49 9 929 41,326 1,576
48 9 928 41,285 1,574
47 8 927 41,244 1,572
46 8 926 41,204 1,571
45 7 925 41,163 1,569
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13172
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Engine Speed
(Frequency) (Pins Engine Turbine Propeller Shaft
Tt1 Temperature 11-12) Speed Speed
°F °C Hz RPM RPM
44 7 924 41,122 1,568
43 6 923 41,081 1,566
42 6 922 41,040 1,565
41 5 922 41,000 1,563
40 4 921 40,956 1,561
39 4 920 40,918 1,560
38 3 919 40,877 1,558
37 3 918 40,835 1,557
36 2 917 40,794 1,555
35 2 916 40,753 1,554
34 1 915 40,712 1,552
33 1 914 40,671 1,550
32 0 913 40,629 1,549
31 -1 912 40,588 1,547
30 -1 911 40,547 1,546
29 -2 910 40,505 1,544
28 -2 910 40,469 1,543
27 -3 909 40,422 1,541
26 -3 908 40,381 1,539
25 -4 907 40,339 1,538
24 -4 906 40,298 1,536
23 -5 905 40,256 1,534
22 -6 904 40,214 1,533
21 -6 903 40,172 1,531
20 -7 902 40,131 1,530
NOTE: Table 13046 presents the actual physical speeds corresponding to 100 percent
corrected engine speed to establish standard day engine mass air flows. These
engine speeds should be used when testing at inlet temperatures (Tt1) equal to or
less than 59°F (15°C). The PN 294562-1, SRL tester or PN 294562-2, SRL tester
should be used to establish all engine speeds (+/-4 Hz). If inlet temperature is above
59°F (15°C, then propeller shaft speed should be 100 percent (1,591 RPM), and
engine speed should be 934 to 942 Hz). Verify engine inlet temperature by obtaining
a Tt1 measurement using PN 296399-51, T2/Tfuel probe assembly. Use PN 199KF,
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13173
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
temperature indicator to obtain Tt1 measurement during testing, and refer to Table
13046 to determine proper engine speed for testing.
(9) Reduce power to achieve target fuel flow for Test Point 2, and let engine parameters stabilize
for a minimum of 3 minutes. Record ALL engine parameters for Test Point 2 on Performance
Data Sheet copy. Repeat this step for Test Points 3 through 7.
NOTE: Use Figure 13052 only as a sample to check data for range, sign, and decimal location.
(10) Make sure that aircraft altimeter gage is set to 29.92 inHg and record pressure altitude on
Performance Data Sheet copy, then shut down engine.
(11) Reverify torque signal conditioner calibration as follows:
NOTE: The torque signal conditioner calibration must be verified with oil temperature at
150°F (66°C) minimum.
(a) Repeat the following steps. Do not make any adjustments to Pot 1 (P1) or Pot 3 (P3).
1 Remove top cover from torque signal conditioner.
2 Connect bridge being used for cockpit gage torque indication.
3 Connect a digital voltmeter between Test Points TP7 (+) and TPC (-) on torque signal
conditioner.
4 Connect a wire (to provide a short) between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-).
5 (Pre SB TPE331-76-0024) Adjust pot number P2 to read -0.002 to +0.002 volts on
the voltmeter. Remove wire (short) between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-).
6 (Post SB TPE331-76-0024) Make sure that torque signal conditioner output is -0.002
to +0.002 volts. Remove wire (short) between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-).
7 Record torque signal conditioner voltage between Test Points TP7 (+) and TPC (-).
8 Connect a millivoltmeter between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-).
9 Record negative millivolts (-mV) between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (-).
10 Check the most current engine DSC-9086 for torque signal conditioner calibration
negative millivolts (-mV) and volts for the bridge in use.
(b) If the negative mV recorded between Test Points TP1 (+) and TP2 (−). after the test are
not the same or within +/-0.05 mV of the DSC value or if the voltage recorded between
Test Points TP7 (+) and TPC (−), after the test is not the same or within +/-0.1 volt of the
DSC value, the torque indication system is suspect and the engine recompensation data
is not valid. The torque indication system must be repaired before another recompensation
procedure can be performed.
(12) Use PN 24661-255, beaker and PN 34629-011, SG float (both components of PN 296399-1,
recompensation adapter kit) to obtain fuel sample and measure fuel SG. Use PN 296399-51,
T2/Tfuel probe assembly and 199KF temperature indicator, previously used to measure inlet
temperature (Tt1), to measure the temperature of the fuel (Tfuel). Correct SG reading to 60°F
using the following equation:
SG @ 60°F (corrected) = (Tfuel − 60) x 0.00040125 + SG (measured)
(13) Convert PS5 (in inches of water, recorded from manometer during engine operation) to delta
P/P voltages, using Figure 13053 and pressure altitude. Voltage obtained from Figure 13053
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13174
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
must match delta P/P voltages obtained from Pins 17-18 of SRL tester (recorded in Performance
Data Sheet copy) within +/-0.20 volts. If match is not within +/-0.20 volts, fault isolate delta P/P
transducer for reliability.
NOTE: To verify accuracy of data extracted from Figure 13053, be aware that the vertical
PS5 lines are curved. When plotting data, locate the PS5 value (at top of graph)
obtained during engine operation. Descend down to pressure altitude intersect by
paralleling the nearest descending curved line. Obtain delta P/P voltage by descending
straight down from PS5/pressure altitude intersect to delta P/P voltage line at bottom
of graph.
(14) Compare engine TT2 sensor voltage recorded during testing against Figure 13054, using Tt1
recorded during testing as the independent temperature measurement. TT2 sensor voltage must
match Figure 13054 within the limits specified. If inlet air temperature sensor voltage is outside
limits of Figure 13054, troubleshoot TT2 sensor for reliability.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13175
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13053. (Sheet 1 of 1) Inches of Water Conversion to Voltage (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-052-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13176
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13054. (Sheet 1 of 1) TT2 Sensor Validation Using Engine Inlet Temperature (Tt1) (GRAPHIC
72-00-00-99B-053-A01)
BC. Test Data Reduction (Subtask 72-00-00-700-057-A01)
NOTE: Instructions to obtain Data Reduction Program TPEV1 and user manual are provided in
SB TPE331-72-2127.
NOTE: Data Reduction Program TPEV1 reduces, calculates, plots, and prints out the test results
that give the engine SHP, minimum and maximum compensations, and plots of
computer-generated curves based on the output of test data.
(1) Perform the following validity check:
NOTE: The limit value, given in the following validity check, are a guide for determining
whether data, as reduced on Data Reduction Program TPEV1, is valid. The limits
provided are based on a statistical studies of new production engine performance
parameters and known normal drift of these parameters as the engine deteriorates.
NOTE: If test data do not reflect limit stated in validity check, review input parameters from
all data points to make sure that data are correct and was properly entered into
computer. Most common errors are improper decimal point position and/or omitted
signs for minus readings.
(2) Turbine flow parameter Check – Check the turbine flow parameter values, from reduced data,
to make sure that they are between the values of 1.569 to 1.749 for at least 5 of the 7 data
points. Check the data points that are not within this range for correct data inputs.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13177
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Upon completion of test data reduction, the TPEV1 program determines whether the engine can
be recompensated. The program calculates a post-test maximum EGT compensation and
compares the value against the pre-test maximum EGT compensation. The program uses
recompensation limits contained in the tables shown in Table 13047, which depend on the SRL
controller fitted to the engine, to calculate the post-test maximum EGT compensation.
Table 13047. On-Wing Recompensation Limit Tables
Reference Table SRL Controller

Table 13048 On-Wing Recompensation Limits with SRL Controller,
PN 2118600-10.
PN 2118600-6, -7, or -8.
PN 2118600-3.
(4) If the post-test maximum EGT compensation does not increase on-wing performance margin,
the TPEV1 program displays a message stating that the engine can not be recompensated. In
these cases, the pre-test performance DSC should be maintained for the engine.
(5) If the TPEV1 program determines that on-wing performance margin can be increased, the
post-test maximum EGT compensation is displayed and can be transferred to a new performance
DSC. Once a new DSC has been generated, ground power checks should be performed to
make sure that engine performance is acceptable. Refer to the AFM.
(6) If the difference between pre-test and post-test maximum EGT compensation values is greater
than 20°C (36°F), the TPEV1 program displays a message stating to contact Honeywell Global
Customer Care Center for technical assistance and data review. Recompensation of more than
20°C (36°F) is not typical, but is possible. In cases where this occurs, the data should be reviewed
for potential errors before generating a new performance DSC.
Table 13048. On-Wing Recompensation Limits for TPE331-12 Engines Equipped with SRL Controller, PN
2118600-10
Nominal Compensation EGT°F

1
Tt1°F (°C) Takeoff T4°F (°C) (°C)
20 to 59 (-7 to 15) 2,112 (1,156) 1,116 (602)
60 (16) 2,113 (1,156) 1,117 (603)
61 (16) 2,114 (1,157) 1,118 (603)
62 (17) 2,114 (1,157) 1,119 (604)
63 (17) 2,114 (1,157) 1,120 (604)
64 (18) 2,115 (1,157) 1,120 (604)
65 (18) 2,115 (1,157) 1,121 (605)
66 (19) 2,116 (1,158) 1,122 (606)
67 (19) 2,116 (1,158) 1,123 (606)
68 (20) 2,116 (1,158) 1,124 (607)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13178
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13048. On-Wing Recompensation Limits for TPE331-12 Engines Equipped with SRL Controller,
PN 2118600-10 (Cont)

1
69 (21) 2,117 (1,158) 1,125 (607)
70 (21) 2,117 (1,158) 1,126 (608)
71 (22) 2,118 (1,159) 1,127 (608)
72 (22) 2,118 (1,159) 1,127 (608)
73 (23) 2,118 (1,159) 1,128 (609)
74 (23) 2,119 (1,159) 1,129 (609)
75 (24) 2,119 (1,159) 1,130 (610)
76 (24) 2,120 (1,160) 1,131 (611)
77 (25) 2,120 (1,160) 1,132 (611)
78 (26) 2,120 (1,160) 1,133 (612)
79 (26) 2,121 (1,161) 1,134 (612)
80 (27) 2,125 (1,163) 1,135 (613)
81 (27) 2,125 (1,163) 1,136 (613)
82 (28) 2,125 (1,163) 1,136 (613)
83 (28) 2,125 (1,163) 1,136 (613)
84 (29) 2,125 (1,163) 1,137 (614)
85 (29) 2,125 (1,163) 1,138 (614)
86 (30) 2,125 (1,163) 1,139 (615)
87 (31) 2,125 (1,163) 1,140 (616)
88 (31) 2,125 (1,163) 1,141 (616)
89 (32) 2,125 (1,163) 1,142 (617)
90 (32) 2,125 (1,163) 1,143 (617)
91 (33) 2,125 (1,163) 1,144 (618)
92 (33) 2,125 (1,163) 1,144 (618)
93 (34) 2,125 (1,163) 1,145 (618)
94 (34) 2,125 (1,163) 1,146 (619)
95 (35) 2,125 (1,163) 1,147 (619)
96 (36) 2,125 (1,163) 1,148 (620)
97 (36) 2,125 (1,163) 1,149 (621)
98 (37) 2,125 (1,163) 1,150 (621)
99 (378) 2,125 (1,163) 1,151 (622)
100 (38) 2,125 (1,163) 1,151 (622)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13179
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 2118600-10 (Cont)

1
101 (38) 2,125 (1,163) 1,152 (622)
102 (39) 2,125 (1,163) 1,153 (623)
103 (39) 2,125 (1,163) 1,154 (623)
104 (40) 2,125 (1,163) 1,155 (624)
105 (41) 2,125 (1,163) 1,156 (624)
106 (41) 2,125 (1,163) 1,157 (625)
107 (42) 2,125 (1,163) 1,158 (626)
108 (42) 2,125 (1,163) 1,159 (626)
109 (43) 2,125 (1,163) 1,160 (627)
110 (43) 2,125 (1,163) 1,161 (627)
111 (44) 2,125 (1,163) 1,161 (627)
112 (44) 2,125 (1,163) 1,162 (628)
113 (45) 2,125 (1,163) 1,163 (628)
114 (46) 2,125 (1,163) 1,164 (629)
115 (46) 2,125 (1,163) 1,165 (629)
116 (47) 2,125 (1,163) 1,166 (630)
117 (47) 2,125 (1,163) 1,167 (631)
118 (48) 2,125 (1,163) 1,168 (631)
119 (48) 2,125 (1,163) 1,168 (631)
120 (49) 2,125 (1,163) 1,169 (632)
NOTES:
2118600-6, -7, or -8

1
Tt1 F (°C) Takeoff T4°F (°C) (°C)
20 to 59 (-7 to 15) 2,067 (1,131) 1,085 (585)
60 (16) 2,068 (1,131) 1,086 (586)
61 (16) 2,069 (1,132) 1,087 (586)
62 (17) 2,070 (1,132) 1,088 (587)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13180
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 2118600-6, -7, or -8 (Cont)

1
63 (17) 2,071 (1,133) 1,090 (588)
64 (18) 2,072 (1,133) 1,091 (588)
65 (18) 2,073 (1,134) 1,092 (589)
66 (19) 2,074 (1,134) 1,093 (589)
67 (19) 2,075 (1,135) 1,094 (590)
68 (20) 2,076 (1,136) 1,095 (591)
69 (21) 2,077 (1,136) 1,096 (591)
70 (21) 2,078 (1,137) 1,098 (592)
71 (22) 2,079 (1,137) 1,099 (593)
72 (22) 2,080 (1,138) 1,100 (593)
73 (23) 2,081 (1,138) 1,101 (594)
74 (23) 2,082 (1,139) 1,102 (594)
75 (24) 2,083 (1,139) 1,103 (595)
76 (24) 2,084 (1,140) 1,105 (596)
77 (25) 2,085 (1,141) 1,106 (597)
78 (26) 2,085 (1,141) 1,107 (597)
79 (26) 2,086 (1,141) 1,108 (598)
80 (27) 2,087 (1,142) 1,109 (598)
81 (27) 2,088 (1,142) 1,110 (599)
82 (28) 2,089 (1,143) 1,111 (599)
83 (28) 2,090 (1,143) 1,113 (601)
84 (29) 2,091 (1,144) 1,114 (601)
85 (29) 2,092 (1,144) 1,115 (602)
86 (30) 2,093 (1,145) 1,116 (602)
87 (31) 2,093 (1,145) 1,117 (603)
88 (31) 2,094 (1,146) 1,118 (603)
89 (32) 2,095 (1,146) 1,120 (604)
90 (32) 2,096 (1,147) 1,121 (605)
91 (33) 2,096 (1,147) 1,122 (606)
92 (33) 2,097 (1,147) 1,123 (606)
93 (34) 2,098 (1,148) 1,124 (607)
94 (34) 2,098 (1,148) 1,125 (607)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13181
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 2118600-6, -7, or -8 (Cont)

1
95 (35) 2,099 (1,148) 1,127 (608)
96 (36) 2,100 (1,149) 1,128 (609)
97 (36) 2,100 (1,149) 1,129 (609)
98 (37) 2,101 (1,149) 1,130 (610)
99 (378) 2,102 (1,150) 1,131 (611)
100 (38) 2,102 (1,150) 1,132 (611)
101 (38) 2,103 (1,151) 1,133 (612)
102 (39) 2,103 (1,151) 1,134 (612)
103 (39) 2,104 (1,151) 1,136 (613)
104 (40) 2,105 (1,152) 1,137 (614)
105 (41) 2,105 (1,152) 1,138 (614)
106 (41) 2,106 (1,152) 1,139 (615)
107 (42) 2,106 (1,152) 1,140 (616)
108 (42) 2,107 (1,153) 1,142 (617)
109 (43) 2,107 (1,153) 1,143 (617)
110 (43) 2,108 (1,153) 1,144 (618)
111 (44) 2,109 (1,154) 1,145 (618)
112 (44) 2,109 (1,154) 1,146 (619)
113 (45) 2,110 (1,154) 1,147 (619)
114 (46) 2,110 (1,154) 1,148 (620)
115 (46) 2,110 (1,154) 1,150 (621)
116 (47) 2,111 (1,155) 1,151 (622)
117 (47) 2,112 (1,156) 1,152 (622)
118 (48) 2,113 (1,156) 1,153 (623)
119 (48) 2,113 (1,156) 1,154 (623)
120 (49) 2,114 (1,157) 1,155 (624)
NOTES:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13182
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2118600-3

1
20 to 59 (-7 to 15) 2,067 (1,131) 1,085 (585)
60 (16) 2,068 (1,131) 1,086 (586)
61 (16) 2,068 (1,131) 1,087 (586)
62 (17) 2,068 (1,131) 1,088 (587)
63 (17) 2,069 (1,132) 1,089 (587)
64 (18) 2,069 (1,132) 1,089 (587)
65 (18) 2,070 (1,132) 1,090 (588)
66 (19) 2,070 (1,132) 1,091 (588)
67 (19) 2,070 (1,132) 1,092 (589)
68 (20) 2,071 (1,133) 1,092 (589)
69 (21) 2,071 (1,133) 1,093 (589)
70 (21) 2,072 (1,133) 1,094 (590)
71 (22) 2,072 (1,133) 1,095 (591)
72 (22) 2,072 (1,133) 1,095 (591)
73 (23) 2,073 (1,134) 1,096 (591)
74 (23) 2,073 (1,134) 1,097 (592)
75 (24) 2,073 (1,134) 1,098 (592)
76 (24) 2,074 (1,134) 1,099 (593)
77 (25) 2,074 (1,134) 1,099 (593)
78 (26) 2,075 (1,135) 1,100 (593)
79 (26) 2,075 (1,135) 1,101 (594)
80 (27) 2,075 (1,135) 1,102 (594)
81 (27) 2,076 (1,136) 1,102 (594)
82 (28) 2,076 (1,136) 1,103 (595)
83 (28) 2,076 (1,136) 1,104 (596)
84 (29) 2,077 (1,136) 1,105 (596)
85 (29) 2,077 (1,136) 1,106 (597)
86 (30) 2,077 (1,136) 1,106 (597)
87 (31) 2,077 (1,136) 1,107 (597)
88 (31) 2,077 (1,136) 1,108 (598)
89 (32) 2,078 (1,137) 1,109 (598)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13183
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 2118600-3 (Cont)

1
90 (32) 2,078 (1,137) 1,109 (598)
91 (33) 2,078 (1,137) 1,110 (599)
92 (33) 2,078 (1,137) 1,111 (599)
93 (34) 2,078 (1,137) 1,112 (600)
94 (34) 2,078 (1,137) 1,113 (601)
95 (35) 2,078 (1,137) 1,113 (601)
96 (36) 2,078 (1,137) 1,114 (601)
97 (36) 2,078 (1,137) 1,115 (602)
98 (37) 2,079 (1,137) 1,116 (602)
99 (378) 2,079 (1,137) 1,117 (603)
100 (38) 2,079 (1,137) 1,117 (603)
101 (38) 2,079 (1,137) 1,118 (603)
102 (39) 2,079 (1,137) 1,119 (604)
103 (39) 2,079 (1,137) 1,120 (604)
104 (40) 2,079 (1,137) 1,120 (604)
105 (41) 2,079 (1,137) 1,121 (605)
106 (41) 2,079 (1,137) 1,122 (606)
107 (42) 2,079 (1,137) 1,123 (606)
108 (42) 2,079 (1,137) 1,123 (606)
109 (43) 2,079 (1,137) 1,124 (607)
110 (43) 2,079 (1,137) 1,125 (607)
111 (44) 2,079 (1,137) 1,126 (608)
112 (44) 2,079 (1,137) 1,127 (608)
113 (45) 2,079 (1,137) 1,127 (608)
114 (46) 2,079 (1,137) 1,128 (609)
115 (46) 2,079 (1,137) 1,129 (609)
116 (47) 2,079 (1,137) 1,130 (610)
117 (47) 2,079 (1,137) 1,130 (610)
118 (48) 2,079 (1,137) 1,131 (611)
119 (48) 2,079 (1,137) 1,132 (611)
120 (49) 2,079 (1,137) 1,133 (612)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13184
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NOTES:
BD. Test Completion (Subtask 72-00-00-700-058-A01)
NOTE: Upon successful completion of engine recompensation, previous DSC is no longer valid.
(1) Write the following statement, in heavy Black Ink, across previous engines DSC and date entry.
“FOR CURRENT DATA REFER TO LATEST DSC.”
DATED__________
(2) Generate a new DSC with data collected during recompensation. Refer to Figure 13056.
(3) Make entry in Engine Log noting recompensation completion date and that the latest data is
also recorded on new DSC.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13185
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13055. (Sheet 1 of 1) Sample DSC (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-054-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13186
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13056. (Sheet 1 of 1) DSC (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-055-A01)
BE. Compensating Resistor Adjustment (Subtask 72-00-00-700-059-A01)
NOTE: There are two methods of testing compensating resistor:
Method 1 consists of using thermocouple signal generator and digital thermometer.
Method 2 consists of using digital voltmeter, reference junction, and external power source.
NOTE: Compensating resistor setting is predetermined for each engine and identified by a setting
number recorded on the engine DSC. Using a new compensation value, find the
corresponding setting number in Table 13051 or Table 13052 to establish correct voltage
output value. If required compensation falls between two setting numbers, use the next
higher (more positive) setting.
NOTE: Compensating Resistor, PN 897476, is bi-polar compensation. Use Table 13051 for positive
temperature compensations and Table 13052 for negative temperature compensations.

(a) Perform functional check as follows:
1 Remove input and output connectors from engine EGT compensating resistor. Refer
to Figure 13057.
NOTE: Connectors on cable assembly are labeled for easy installation.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13187
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2 Install Connector “A” to compensator input and connect “B” to compensating resistor
output.
3 Install Connector “C” to aircraft harness originally connected to compensating resistor
output.
4 Install Connector “D” to thermocouple signal generator.
5 Install Connector “E” to thermocouple signal generator and Connector “F” to digital
thermometer.
6 Apply aircraft power (28 VDC) to compensating resistor.
7 Set thermocouple signal generator and digital thermometer power switch to ON. Set
digital thermometer to Celsius scale.
8 Adjust thermocouple signal generator dial setting value on the digital thermometer
readout display to 100°C.
9 Disconnect input Connector “F” from digital thermometer and install Connector “G”
to digital thermometer, note value.
10 The difference in readout on digital thermometer between the above two steps is the
compensating resistor setting, for example:
100°C – 72°C = +28°C or 100°C – 128°C = -28°C
11 This value should agree with latest engine compensating resistor setting, recorded
on engine DSC or in engine log book, within +/-2°C.
12 If temperature value does not agree with setting recorded on engine DSC or engine
log book, refer to following procedure for compensating resistor adjustment.
13 To check cockpit EGT indicator for accuracy, increase thermocouple signal generator
dial setting to various temperatures and compare digital thermometer readout value
with cockpit EGT indicator. The values should agree within +/-2°C, if not refer to
FAULT ISOLATION (PGBLK 72-00-00-1000).
15 Lockwire all connectors, as required.
(b) Perform adjustment of compensating resistor using test setup as follows:
1 Connect compensating resistor into the test setup. Refer to Figure 13057.
CAUTION: COMPENSATING RESISTOR, PN 897476, IS BI-POLAR. MAKE SURE
THAT TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION POLARITY IS KNOWN.
2 The compensating resistor is set by removing sealing screw to gain access to setting
adjustment screw.
3 Refer to engine DSC to determine setting number of compensating resistor required
for engine. Refer to Table 13043 to Table 13044 to determine amount of compensation
setting number is to provide.
NOTE: Compensating Resistor, PN 897476, is bi-polar compensation. CW rotation
of setting screw increases plus (+°C (+°F)) and CCW rotation of setting
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13188
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
screw increases minus (-°C (-°F)). Total range of setting screw to plus or
to minus is approximately 12 turns.
CAUTION: USE A PROPER SIZE JEWELERS SCREWDRIVER WHEN ADJUSTING

THE SETTING ADJUSTMENT SCREW.
4 If value of compensation determined does not agree with the compensation required
in the above step, adjust setting screw of the compensating resistor. Repeat the
following to obtain the required compensation.
a Install Connector “A” to compensating resistor input and connect “B” to
compensating resistor output.
b Install Connector “C” to aircraft harness originally connected to compensating
resistor output.
c Install Connector “D” to thermocouple signal generator.
d Install Connector “E” to thermocouple signal generator and Connector “F” to
digital thermometer.
e Apply aircraft power (28 VDC) to compensating resistor.
f Set thermocouple signal generator and digital thermometer power switch to ON.
Set digital thermometer to Celsius scale.
g Adjust thermocouple signal generator dial setting value on the digital
thermometer readout display to 100°C.
h Disconnect input Connector “F” from digital thermometer and install Connector
“G” to digital thermometer, note value.
i The difference in readout on digital thermometer between the above two steps
is the compensating resistor setting, for example:
100°C – 72°C = +28°C or 100°C – 128°C = -28°C
j This value should agree with latest engine compensating resistor setting,
recorded on engine DSC or in engine log book, within +/-2°C.
6 Recheck the compensation by engine operation.
7 After setting is accomplished lock setting screw with a drop of Glyptal 1201, enamel.
Record setting number in space provided in compensating resistor by means of and
ink stamp or stencil. If compensating resistor is being recalibrated, obliterate existing
number before reidentifying. Replace sealing screw and lockwire.
8 Record compensating resistor setting number in engine log book.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13189
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION POLARITY IS KNOWN.
(a) Remove compensating resistor.

NOTE: Compensating resistor setting is predetermined for each engine and identified
by a setting number recorded on the engine DSC. Using a new compensation
value, find the corresponding setting number in Table 13051 or Table 13052 to
establish correct voltage output value. If required compensation falls between
two setting numbers, use the next higher (more positive) setting.
NOTE: Compensating Resistor, PN 897476, is bi-polar compensation. Use Table 13051

or Table 13052.
(b) Connect compensating resistor into test setup. Refer to Figure 13058. Note the reference
junction is to provide a minimum temperature difference of three dissimilar metals
(Chromel-Alumel, Chromel-Copper, and Alumel-Copper) connection; and thus, to minimize
generated errors. The connectors inside the junction should occupy a small volume and
excess space filled with a compound (epoxy) to achieve a constant temperature. Ideally,
the reference junction should be submerged in an ice-bath solution.
(c) With 28 VDC power supply turned off, turn on digital voltmeter and record voltage and sign
either (+) or (-) displayed. This voltage is a function of the dissimilar metals.
(d) Turn on DC power supply and make sure that voltage level of the power supply is 27 to
29 volts. The compensating resistor is set by removing sealing screw to gain access to
setting adjustment screw.
CAUTION: USE A PROPER SIZE JEWELERS SCREWDRIVER WHEN ADJUSTING THE
SETTING ADJUSTMENT SCREW.
(e) Turn setting screw with the power supply turned on until desired voltage is displayed. To
determine voltage use following algebraic equation:
(VOLTAGE) SETTING + (VOLTAGE) POWER OFF = (VOLTAGE) POWER ON
NOTE: Compensating Resistor, PN 897476, is bi-polar compensation. CW rotation of

setting screw increases plus (+°C (+°F)) and CCW rotation of setting screw
increases minus (-°C (-°F)). Total range of setting screw to plus or to minus is
approximately 12 turns.
(f) Refer to Table 13051 or Table 13052 which correlates setting number and voltage. The
following examples show typical values which may occur when setting the compensating
resistor. Keep in mind that these are examples and there is a tolerance on the setting
voltage:
1 Example A:
1.196 mV. With power off the voltage indicated is 0.020 mV.
• 1.196 + 0.020 = 1.216 mV
2 Example B:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13190
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

0.066 mV. With power off the voltage indicated is -0.020 mV.
• 0.066 + (-0.020) = 0.046 mV
(g) After setting is accomplished, lock setting screw with a drop of Glyptal 1201, enamel.
Record setting number in space provided on compensating resistor by means of an ink
stamp or stencil. If compensating resistor is being recalibrated, obliterate existing number
before reidentifying. Replace sealing screw and lockwire.
(h) Record the new minimum and maximum compensation values, compensating resistor
setting number and compensating resistor part number in the engine log book.
(i) Install compensating resistor. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 77-20-03-4000).
(j) Remove and secure all test cables and test equipment.
(k) Remove PN S8495-6C caps from anti-ice valve tube assembly and install tube assemblies.
(l) Install bleed air covers, washers, and nuts. Torque nuts to 20 in-lb (2.3 Nm).
(m) Install engine cowling. Refer to AMM.
(n) Install electronic controller tester. Set maximum power. Refer to AMM.
Table 13051. (Codes AC, AD, BC, BD) Bi-Polar Compensating Resistor Output Requirements (Plus +°C
(+°F) Settings) (PN 897476) (Sheet 1 of 2)

Millivolt Output
Setting No. (+/-0.020 mV) +°C +° F
1 0 0 0
2 +0.066 2 3
3 +0.132 3 6
4 +0.199 4 8
5 +0.265 6 11
6 +0.331 8 14
7 +0.398 10 17
8 +0.464 11 20
9 +0.530 13 23
10 +0.597 14 25
11 +0.663 16 28
12 +0.730 17 31
13 +0.796 19 34
14 +0.863 21 37
15 +0.929 22 39
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13191
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13051. (Codes AC, AD, BC, BD) Bi-Polar Compensating Resistor Output Requirements (Plus +°C
(+°F) Settings) (PN 897476) (Sheet 1 of 2) (Cont)

Millivolt Output
Setting No. (+/-0.020 mV) +°C +° F
16 +0.996 24 42
17 +1.063 25 45
18 +1.129 27 48
19 +1.196 28 50
20 +1.263 30 53
21 +1.330 31 56
22 +1.396 33 59
23 +1.463 35 62
24 +1.530 36 65
25 +1.597 38 68
26 +1.664 39 70
27 +1.731 41 73
28 +1.798 43 76
29 +1.865 44 79
30 +1.932 46 82
31 +1.999 47 85
32 +2.066 49 88
33 +2.133 50 90
34 +2.200 52 93
35 +2.267 54 96
Table 13052. (Codes AC, AD, BC, BD) Bi-Polar Compensating Resistor Output Requirements (Minus −°C
(−°F) Settings) (PN 897476) (Sheet 2)

Millivolt Output
Setting No. (+/-0.020 mV) −°C −°F
1 0 0 0
52 -0.066 2 3
53 -0.132 3 6
54 -0.199 4 8
55 -0.265 6 11
56 -0.331 8 14
57 -0.398 10 17
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13192
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 13052. (Codes AC, AD, BC, BD) Bi-Polar Compensating Resistor Output Requirements (Minus −°C
(−°F) Settings) (PN 897476) (Sheet 2) (Cont)

Millivolt Output
Setting No. (+/-0.020 mV) −°C −°F
58 -0.464 11 20
59 -0.530 13 23
60 -0.597 14 25
61 -0.663 16 28
62 -0.730 17 31
63 -0.796 19 34
64 -0.863 21 37
65 -0.929 22 39
66 -0.996 24 42
67 -1.063 25 45
68 -1.129 27 48
69 -1.196 28 51
70 -1.263 30 53
71 -1.330 31 56
72 -1.396 33 59
73 -1.463 35 62
74 -1.530 36 65
75 -1.597 38 68
76 -1.664 39 70
77 -1.731 41 73
78 -1.798 43 76
79 -1.865 44 79
80 -1.932 46 82
81 -1.999 47 85
82 -2.066 49 88
83 -2.133 50 90
84 -2.200 52 93
85 -2.267 54 96
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13193
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13057. (Sheet 1 of 1) Compensating Resistor Control Assembly Test Setup Using PN 298191-1
Compensating Resistor Tester Kit (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-056-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13194
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13058. (Sheet 1 of 1) Compensating Resistor Test Setup Diagram (GRAPHIC 72-00-00-99B-057-A01)
BF. Job Close-up (Subtask 72-00-00-700-060-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13195
72-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
SHIPPING AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Shipping and Identification Plates (Subtask 72-00-01-870-001-A01)
CAUTION: PACKINGS AND GASKETS PROVIDED UNDER SHIPPING PLATES AND COVERS
ARE USED FOR SHIPPING AND STORAGE PURPOSES ONLY. THESE PACKINGS
AND GASKETS ARE NOT APPROVED FOR USE DURING ON-WING OR OFF-WING
ENGINE OPERATION.
(1) Shipping plates are provided with the engine to protect against damage or contamination from
foreign objects during shipment. These shipping plates must be retained for future use.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
72-00-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
SHIPPING AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the shipping and identification plates.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-01-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Engine Plates (Subtask 72-00-01-020-004-A01)
CAUTION: PACKINGS AND GASKETS PROVIDED UNDER SHIPPING PLATES AND COVERS ARE
USED FOR SHIPPING AND STORAGE PURPOSES ONLY. THESE PACKINGS AND
GASKETS ARE NOT APPROVED FOR USE DURING ON-WING OR OFF-WING ENGINE
OPERATION.
NOTE: Engine plates are illustrated in Figure 3001 where accessories are normally mounted.
These should be installed whenever accessories are removed.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-00-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Remove screws (5, Figure 3001), washers (10), and identification plate (15).
NOTE: Do not remove trademark (40) or identification plate (15) unless damage is indicated
by inspection.
(2) Remove nuts (20), washers (25), and plate (30).

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-00-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Engine Plates Removal (GRAPHIC 72-00-01-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-00-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. SCREW 25. WASHER

10. WASHER 30. PLATE
15. IDENTIFICATION PLATE 35. GASKET
20. NUT 40. PLATE (TRADEMARK)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
72-00-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
SHIPPING AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the shipping and identification plates.



APPLICABLE.
DC-111 silicone grease CAGE: 71984
2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-01-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-00-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Engine Plates (Subtask 72-00-01-420-004-A01)
CAUTION: ASSEMBLY LUBRICANT MIXED WITH SYNTHETIC ENGINE OIL CAN CAUSE OIL
FOAMING AND OIL JET PLUGGING. USE NO MORE THAN REQUIRED. ALLOW NO
GREASE TO ENTER ENGINE CAVITY.
NOTE: Refer to ASSEMBLY (PGBLK 70-00-00-10000) for recommended general torque values.
Add frictional drag (run-down) torque of self-locking devices to recommended values.
NOTE: Apply a very thin coat of DC-111, silicone grease on gasket (35, Figure 4001) prior to
installation.
NOTE: Engine plates are illustrated in Figure 4001 where accessories are normally mounted.
These should be installed whenever accessories are removed.
(1) Install plate (30, Figure 4001), washers (10), and screws (5). Torque screws (5) to 12 in-lb (1.4
Nm).
(2) Install identification plate (15), washers (25), and nuts (20). Torque nuts (20) to 110 in-lb (12.4
Nm).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-00-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Engine Plates Installation (GRAPHIC 72-00-01-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-00-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. SCREW 25. WASHER

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-00-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
SHIPPING AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the shipping and identification plates.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-01-100-802-A01)
B. Clean Shipping Plates (Subtask 72-00-01-100-004-A01)
(1) Clean plate (30, Figure 6001). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method
5 or 6.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-00-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Engine Plates Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-00-01-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-00-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. SCREW 25. WASHER

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-00-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
SHIPPING AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the shipping and identification plates.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-01-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Shipping Plates (Subtask 72-00-01-200-004-A01)
(1) Inspect for punctures or damage. Replace all damaged parts.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-00-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ENGINE DRAIN VALVES, PLUGS, AND BLEED AIR EXTRACTION PAD

COVERS – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Engine Drain Valves and Drain Plugs (Subtask 72-00-05-870-001-A01)
(1) The plenum drain valve assembly drains excess fuel from the plenum chamber on engine
shutdown. During engine operation the valve is held in the closed position when air pressure
overcomes the spring force on the ball (maximum of 12 PSIG (82.7 kPa)) and opens when air
pressure falls below the spring force on the ball (5 PSIG (34.5 kPa) minimum).
B. Bleed Air Extraction Pads (Subtask 72-00-05-870-002-A01)
(1) Compressor bleed airflow is available for airframe and engine system use (except during starting
cycle), from ground idle to maximum continuous. A total of 10 percent of engine airflow may be
extracted for aircraft purposes.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

COVERS – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the engine drain valves, plugs, and bleed air extraction pad
covers.
PN 287914-1 torque wrench adapter (used to hold CAGE: 06848

plug when torque applied)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-05-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Engine Drain Valves, Plugs, and Bleed Air Extraction Pad Covers (Subtask
72-00-05-020-004-A01)
(1) Remove engine drain valves (15, Figure 3001) and gaskets (20).
(2) Remove plug and bleeders (25) and gaskets (30).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0880) Remove nuts (35), washers (40), bleed port covers (45), gaskets
(50), and restrictors (55).
(4) (Post SB TPE331-72-0880) Remove nuts (35), washers (40), bleed port covers (45), and gaskets
(50).
(5) Remove seal plug (5) using PN 287914-1, torque wrench adapter. Remove drain plug (10).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Engine Drain Valves, Plugs, and Bleed Air Extraction Pad Covers Removal
(GRAPHIC 72-00-05-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. SEAL PLUG 35. NUT

10. DRAIN PLUG 40. WASHER
15. DRAIN VALVE 45. BLEED PORT COVER
20. GASKET 50. GASKET
25. PLUG AND BLEEDER 55. RESTRICTOR
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

COVERS – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the engine drain valves, plugs, and bleed air extraction pad
covers.
PN 287914-1 torque wrench adapter (used to hold CAGE: 06848

plug when torque applied)


APPLICABLE.
Loctite 609 retaining compound (MIL-R-46082, CAGE: 05972

Type I (Green))

(MIL-PRF-907)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-05-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Engine Drain Valves, Plugs, and Bleed Air Extraction Pad Covers (Subtask
72-00-05-420-004-A01)
NOTE: Apply Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound to threads of drain valves and
plugs (except first two threads) prior to installation.
(1) Apply Loctite 609, retaining compound to threads of plugs (5, 10, Figure 4001), except first two
threads. Install seal plug (5) using PN 287914-1, torque wrench adapter. Torque seal plug (5)
to 8 to 12 in-lb (0.9 to 1.4 Nm).
(2) Install drain plug (10) and torque to 8 to 12 in-lb (0.9 to 1.4 Nm).
(3) Install plugs (25) on engine with new gaskets (30). Torque plugs (25) to 65 to 70 in-lb (7.3 to
7.9 Nm).
(4) Install new gaskets (20) on engine drain valves (15).
(5) Install engine drain valves (15) in plenum with arrows on engine drain valves pointing away from
plenum. Torque drain valves (15) to 60 to 65 in-lb (6.8 to 7.3 Nm).
(6) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0880) Install gaskets (50), restrictors (55), and bleed port covers (45).
Secure with washers (40) and nuts (35). Torque nuts (35) to 20 in-lb (2.3 Nm).
(7) (Post SB TPE331-72-0880) Install gaskets (50) and bleed port covers (45). Secure with washers
(40) and nuts (35). Torque nuts (35) to 20 in-lb (2.3 Nm).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Engine Drain Valves, Plugs, and Bleed Air Extraction Pad Covers Installation
(GRAPHIC 72-00-05-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

COVERS – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the engine drain valves, plugs, and bleed air extraction pad
covers.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-05-100-802-A01)
B. Clean Engine Drain Valves (Subtask 72-00-05-100-004-A01)
(1) Clean drain valves (15, Figure 6001). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), general
cleaning instructions.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Engine Drain Valves, Plugs, and Bleed Air Extraction Pad Covers Cleaning
(GRAPHIC 72-00-05-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

COVERS – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the engine drain valves, plugs, and bleed air extraction pad
covers.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-00-05-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Engine Drain Valves (Subtask 72-00-05-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect engine drain valves (5, Figure 8001) for foreign material, stripped, crossed and
peened threads, and other damage. Replace damaged parts.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Engine Drain Valves, Plugs, and Bleed Air Extraction Pad Covers Inspection
(GRAPHIC 72-00-05-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

C. Check Engine Drain Valves (Subtask 72-00-05-200-005-A01)
(1) Valves must be capable of being closed by 2.0 to 5.0 PSIG (13.8 to 34.5 kPa) air pressure
applied to valve in direction of arrow.
(2) Valves must be in open position with no air pressure applied. To make sure that valve is open,
apply slight air pressure in opposite direction of arrow. Air must flow freely through the valve.
(3) Replace valves which fail to close or open properly.
D. Inspect Bleed Port Cover and Restrictor (Subtask 72-00-05-200-006-A01)
(1) Inspect bleed port cover (45, Figure 8002) for nicks, burrs, scratches, and warpage.
(2) Inspect restrictor (55) for nicks, burrs, scratches, and warpage.
(3) Replace parts that do not meet inspection requirements.
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Engine Drain Valves, Plugs, and Bleed Air Extraction Pad Covers Inspection
(GRAPHIC 72-00-05-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8005
72-00-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
REDUCTION GEAR AND SHAFT SECTION – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAUTION: MAINTENANCE PRACTICES SPECIFIED IN THIS CHAPTER/SECTION ASSUME THAT

PROCEDURES WILL BE PERFORMED BY ADEQUATELY TRAINED PERSONNEL.
EXTENSIVE TESTING REQUIRING SPECIAL TOOLS MUST BE PERFORMED WHENEVER
INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX HOUSING IS REMOVED. REFER TO 72-00-00, TESTING
(PGBLK 72-00-00-13000), PRIOR TO PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE REQUIRING
INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX (DIAPHRAGM) REMOVAL. MAKE SURE ALL MATERIALS
AND SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED IN THIS SECTION AND REFERENCED
CHAPTER/SECTIONS ARE AVAILABLE BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY OF THE
FOLLOWING PROCEDURES.
NOTE: Removal and installation procedures are provided to completely disassemble and
reassemble the reduction gear section. Components should be removed only to the extent
required for the maintenance action to be performed.
(1) The reduction gear and shaft section is located in the front of the engine below the air inlet duct
and is enclosed by the input housing, intermediate housing (diaphragm assembly), and nose
cone. The propeller and shaft-driven accessories and components of associated systems are
driven by a series of gears, shafts, and integral parts through the reduction gear section. The
nose cone contains the propeller shaft for mounting the aircraft propeller and couples rotating
torque from reduction gearing of the intermediate gearbox housing to drive the propeller.
B. Oil Flow Metal Tube Assembly (Beta Tube) (Subtask 72-10-00-870-002-A01)
(1) The propeller oil-transfer (beta) tube extends aft from a threaded adjustable connection in the
propeller dome, through the engine propeller shaft and into the PPC. The tube portion, housed
within the PPC ported sleeve, has oil supply ports through which PG discharge oil is supplied
to the propeller dome.
C. PPC Assembly (Subtask 72-10-00-870-003-A01)
(1) The PPC is mounted at the rear of the reduction gear section on the propeller shaft centerline.
During propeller-governing mode, the PPC serves no basic function other than oil passage and
housing for the beta tube. In beta-mode (underspeed governing), the PPC provides for operator
control of propeller blade pitch angle.
D. PG Assembly (Subtask 72-10-00-870-004-A01)
(1) The PG assembly is mounted in the lower right-hand position at the rear of the reduction gear
section. The PG assembly provides a constant engine speed during the propeller-governing
mode of operation.
E. NTS Orifice Assembly (Subtask 72-10-00-870-005-A01)
(1) The NTS orifice assembly, mounted on the rear face of the reduction gear section, houses dual
orifices that regulate and direct PG oil to the NTS system.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
72-10-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
F. Torque Load Assembly (Subtask 72-10-00-870-006-A01)
(1) The three torque load assemblies are mounted on the nose cone housing, spaced approximately
120 degrees apart. The torque load assemblies preload the torque ring gear, taking up spline
backlash. When the propeller applies negative torque to the engine, the torque ring gear
movement trips the hydraulic NTS valve.
G. NTS Valve Assembly (Subtask 72-10-00-870-007-A01)
(1) The NTS valve assembly is mounted on the nose cone housing. The arm of the NTS valve
assembly is placed through a slot in the nose cone housing, in a position where the arm will be
tripped by the torque ring gear when the propeller applies negative torque to the engine. Tripping
of the arm closes the NTS valve inside the NTS and auto-ignition switch. This applies sufficient
oil pressure to trip the feathering valve.
(2) During a negative torque condition, the NTS valve is closed and NTS oil pressure rises. This
increase in oil pressure is sensed by the auto-ignition switch. When the oil pressure rises to 30
PSIG (206.8 kPa), the auto-ignition switch closes providing a voltage path to the ignition unit.
This will automatically provide ignition during an inadvertent engine shutdown.
H. Feathering Valve Assembly (Subtask 72-10-00-870-008-A01)
(1) The propeller feathering valve assembly, mounted on the rear side of the input housing assembly
provides for connection of a customer-furnished control. The valve has normally open ports
through which the propeller positioning control oil passes from the governor to the pitch control.
If manual feathering of the propeller is required, pulling the feather control valve lever moves a
spool valve to close the entry port for control oil from the governor and simultaneously opens a
port for dumping oil. The port to the pitch control remains open, allowing propeller oil to flow
back into the valve and into the oil sump in the reduction gear housing, allowing the propeller
to feather. In addition to the above function, the propeller feathering valve assembly operates
automatically to bring the propeller toward the feathered position if a negative torque is sensed
by the negative torque valve. Negative torque causes a pressure differential to build up across
the spool valve. This pressure moves the spool valve in the same manner as manual feathering.
As soon as the negative torque is removed, the pressure on the spool valve is removed and the
spring-loaded spool valve moves back into normal position.
I. Shaft Oil Seals (Subtask 72-10-00-870-009-A01)
(1) Shaft oil seals are incorporated in the accessory mount pads to prevent oil leakage.
J. Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly (Subtask 72-10-00-870-010-A01)
(1) Planet carrier and gear assembly is mounted on the intermediate gearbox assembly and provides
a means of coupling the propeller shaft to the main shaft rotating group through the intermediate
gearbox geartrain.
K. Oil Pressure Pump Assembly (Subtask 72-10-00-870-011-A01)
(1) The pressure pump assembly is a gerotor-type pump keyed to the shaft of the fuel control unit
drive gear. The gerotor gears are installed in a housing attached to the inside of the fuel control
unit mounting pad on the reduction gear section.
(2) The pump delivers oil from the oil tank through a pressure regulator and a filter into cored
passages and internal plumbing in the reduction gear housing, where the oil is directed to
bearings and gears. An external plumbing line carries lubricating oil to an oil jet in the turbine
UP495246

ALL Page 2
72-10-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
section for lubrication of the rear bearing. Pressurized oil is also provided to the propeller
governing system.
L. Gearcase Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly (Subtask 72-10-00-870-012-A01)
(1) The oil scavenge pump assembly is a gerotor-type pump driven by a splined shaft, which in turn
is driven by internal splines in the fuel control unit drive gear. Gerotor gears for the pump assembly
are installed in a housing attached to the inside of the reduction gear section intermediate housing
assembly.
(2) Lubricating oil, supplied to the bearings and gears (and also pressurized oil supplied to the
propeller governing system), drains into a sump in the bottom of the reduction gear section
housing, where it is picked up by the tubes in the sump and passed through vertical tubes to
the main scavenge pumps. From the scavenge pumps, the oil is directed to the fuel heater, the
aircraft heat exchanger, and the oil tank.
M. Compressor Bearing Carrier Support Assembly (Subtask 72-10-00-870-013-A01)
(1) The compressor bearing carrier support assembly supports the bearing and the air-oil seal and
rotor at the forward end of the main shaft.
N. Nose Cone (Subtask 72-10-00-870-014-A01)
(1) The nose cone transfers engine power to the propeller through the reduction gear system and
propeller shaft.
O. Diaphragm Assembly (Subtask 72-10-00-870-015-A01)
(1) The diaphragm assembly comprises the center section of the gear reduction system. The
geartrain contained within this section is driven by the main shaft. Primary function is reduction
of main shaft speed to a usable level for shaft-driven accessories and the propeller shaft. Initial
speed reduction is attained by action of the matched bearing and shaft set (high speed pinion)
meshed with the spur and helical drive gearshaft (bull gear). The planetary gear system which
is coupled directly to the spur and helical drive gearshaft provides for further reduction of shaft
speed to the propeller.
UP495246

ALL Page 3
72-10-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
BETA TUBE ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the beta tube assembly.
PN 287335-1-1 beta tube wrench (used to install, CAGE: 06848

remove, or adjust metal oil flow
(beta) tube)
PN 868727-1 propeller shaft cover plate (used to CAGE: 06848

provide proper covering for propeller
shaft)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-01-020-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Remove Beta Tube (Subtask 72-10-01-020-004-A01)
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT PROPELLER IS FULLY FEATHERED BEFORE PROCEEDING.

(1) Make sure that propeller is feathered for beta tube removal.
(2) Remove that portion of the spinner and the propeller hub assembly that will afford accessibility
to beta tube. Refer to AMM.
CAUTION: PROTECT BETA TUBE FROM CORROSION AND ANY POSSIBLE DAMAGE UNTIL
REINSTALLATION. IF POSSIBLE, STORE IN SHIPPING CONTAINER.
(3) Carefully remove beta tube (30, Figure 3001) from propeller shaft using PN 287335-1-1, beta
tube wrench.
(4) Remove and discard packings (5, 25).
(5) Remove propeller. Refer to AMM.
(6) Install PN 868727-1, propeller shaft cover plate to protect propeller shaft.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Beta Tube Removal (GRAPHIC 72-10-01-99B-001-A01)
5. PACKING 25. PACKING

15. PIN 30. TUBE (BETA)
20. PLUG
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
BETA TUBE ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the beta tube assembly.
PN 287335-1-1 beta tube wrench (used to install, CAGE: 06848

remove, or adjust metal oil flow
(beta) tube)
PN 868727-1 propeller shaft cover plate (used to CAGE: 06848

provide proper covering for propeller
shaft)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-01-420-802-A01)
B. Install Beta Tube (Subtask 72-10-01-420-004-A01)
NOTE: New packings must be coated with clean, approved engine oil, Santovac 5, lubricant, or
Santovac OS-124, lubricant prior to installation.
(1) Remove PN 868727-1, propeller shaft cover plate installed on propeller shaft.
(2) Install new packings (5, 25, Figure 4001) on beta tube (30).
(3) Make sure that ports on beta tube (30) are free of obstructions.
(4) Make sure that propeller is in feather position.
(5) Install beta tube (30) using PN 287335-1-1, beta tube wrench until approximately half of threaded
section is showing at propeller dome.
(6) Hand actuate the PPC. Check to make sure of full travel to reverse position without drag or
binding.
(7) Upon completion of required maintenance, operate engine. Refer to AFM. Perform applicable
operation checks. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
NOTE: Do not lock position of beta tube with bolt and nut until flight idle blade angle is set.
Refer to AMM.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Beta Tube Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-01-99B-001-A01)

20. PLUG
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
BETA TUBE ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the beta tube assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-01-100-802-A01)
B. Clean Component Parts (Subtask 72-10-01-100-004-A01)
(1) Clean all standard metallic hardware. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean end plug (20, Figure 6001) of beta tube (30). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000),
Cleaning Method 10.
(3) Clean beta tube (30). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method 12.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Beta Tube Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-10-01-99B-001-A01)

20. PLUG
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
BETA TUBE ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the beta tube assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-01-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Beta Tube (Subtask 72-10-01-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect beta tube (30, Figure 8001) for scoring, nicks, scratches, corrosion, and distortion.
(2) Replace beta tube (30) if any scratches are detected on the metering and sealing surfaces.
(3) Replace beta tube (30) if raised material or indentation is detectable by rotating beta tube against
fingernail.
(4) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Beta Tube Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-01-99B-001-A01)

20. PLUG
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PPC ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the PPC assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-02-020-802-A01)
B. Remove PPC Assembly (Subtask 72-10-02-020-004-A01)
(1) Remove beta tube. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-01-3000).

(2) Disconnect PPC assembly plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 77-10-02-3000).
(3) Disconnect PPC linkage at pitch control arm. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 76-10-01-3000).
(4) Rotate PPC shaft lever fully CCW.
(5) Remove bolts (5, 15, Figure 3001), washers (10, 20), and PPC assembly (25).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(6) Remove union (35).

(7) Remove and discard packing (40).
(8) Remove union (45).
(10) If gasket (30) requires replacement, remove tachometer-generator. Refer to AMM.
NOTE: Do not remove gasket unless damage is indicated by inspection.
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) PPC Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 72-10-02-99B-001-A01)
5. BOLT 30. GASKET

10. WASHER 35. UNION
15. BOLT 40. PACKING
25. PROPELLER PITCH CONTROL (PPC) 50. PACKING
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PPC ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the PPC assembly.



APPLICABLE.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-02-420-802-A01)
B. Install PPC (Subtask 72-10-02-420-004-A01)
NOTE: If new PPC is to be installed, rigging plate and pitch control arm from the removed unit
must be installed on the replacement unit. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK
77-10-02-4000).
(1) Install unions (35, 45, Figure 4001) with new packings in PPC. Torque unions (35, 45) to 50 to
55 in-lb (5.6 to 6.2 Nm).
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Rotate PPC shaft fully CCW.

FOAMING AND OIL JET PLUGGING. USE NO MORE THAN REQUIRED. ALLOW
NO GREASE TO ENTER ENGINE CAVITY.
(3) Apply a thin coat of DC-111, silicone grease to gasket (30).

NOTE: Installation of aircraft tachometer-generator with new gasket may not be necessary
if original gasket was judged serviceable when PPC was removed.
(4) Install and secure PPC assembly (25) and gasket (30) with washers (10, 20) and bolts (5, 15).
Torque bolts to 75 in-lb (8.5 Nm).
(5) Install tachometer-generator if gasket (30) was replaced.
(6) Connect PPC assembly plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 77-10-02-4000).
(7) Connect PPC linkage at pitch control arm. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 76-10-01-4000).
(8) Install beta tube. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-01-4000).
CAUTION: FOLLOWING PPC INSTALLATION, A PG RESET FUNCTION AND NTS LOCKOUT
SYSTEM PRESSURE CHECK AND NTS TRIP SYSTEM CHECK ARE MANDATORY
TO MAKE SURE OF PROPER NTS SYSTEM OPERATION.
(9) Perform a PG reset function and NTS lockout system pressure check and NTS trip system check.
Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) PPC Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-02-99B-001-A01)
5. BOLT 30. GASKET

25. PROPELLER PITCH CONTROL (PPC) 50. PACKING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PPC ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the PPC assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-02-100-802-A01)
(1) Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), for cleaning instructions.

NOTE: Reference must be made to Table 6003 for recommended cleaning method.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 6003. Cleaning Methods
Cleaning Methods
Figure No. Item No. Nomenclature 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
All standard metallic hardware X X
Figure 30 Body X X
6001
Figure 31 Bushing X X
6001
Figure 40 Cam assembly X X X X
6001
Figure 45 Sleeve bearing X X
6001
Figure 75 Retainer X X X
6001
Figure 110 Retainer X X X
6001
Figure 115 Valve seat X X
6001
Figure 135 Sleeve X X X
6001
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) PPC Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-10-02-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
10. SCREW 65. SCREW

15. WASHER 70. WASHER
25. COVER 75. RETAINER
30. BODY 80. GASKET
31. BUSHING 85. NONMETALLIC WASHER
33. PACKING 110. RETAINER
35. GASKET 115. VALVE SEAT
40. CAM ASSEMBLY 120. PACKING
45. SLEEVE BEARING 135. SLEEVE
50. PACKING 140. NONMETALLIC WASHER
55. PLUG 150. PACKING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6004
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PPC ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the PPC assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-02-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect PPC Assembly (Subtask 72-10-02-200-004-A01)
NOTE: If PPC assembly was removed because of damage or malfunction, inspect beta tube.
(1) Inspect for security, evidence of oil leaks and other damage. Check for internal binding of PPC
shaft by rotating shaft. Shaft should rotate freely through 0 to 100 degrees minimum. Sleeve
must extend and retract smoothly as shaft is rotated.
(2) If PPC assembly is disassembled for any reason, inspect components for wear as follows:
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Inspect sides of cam assembly track for wear. Wear (Dimension A, Figure 8001) must not
exceed 0.004 inch (0.10 mm) on either side of track.
(b) Inspect roller for wear. Diameter B must be 0.2490 to 0.2495 inch (6.325 to 6.337 mm).
(c) Inspect roller clearance. Dimension C must be 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) minimum all around.
Roller must rotate freely.
(d) Inspect diametrical clearance between pin and roller of PPC sleeve. Measure lateral
movement of roller at several positions to determine maximum diametrical clearance which
must not exceed 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) and must not be less than 0.001 inch (0.02 mm).
(e) Inspect guide of sleeve for cracks, bending, separation of braze and weld, wear, and
freedom of movement. No cracks, visible bending, and separation of braze or weld allowed.
Replace sleeve if requirements are not met.
(f) Inspect entire bearing outside circumference of sleeve bearing (45, Figure 8002) for flat
spots and wear. Minimum OD of bearing must not be less than 1.316 inches (33.43 mm).
(g) Inspect body for excessive wear, foreign materials and other damage.
(h) Replace any part that does not meet the above inspection requirements.
(3) Internal leakage of PPC may be indicated by propeller not unfeathering or not unfeathering
adequately to engage start locks.
(4) Internal leakage and/or binding may be corrected. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-02-9000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) PPC Assembly Wear Limits (GRAPHIC 72-10-02-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.004 (0.10) MAXIMUM DIM. C 0.005 (0.13) MINIMUM
DIA B 0.2490 TO 0.2495 (6.325
TO6.337)
UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8002. (Sheet 1 of 1) PPC Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-02-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8005
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
10. SCREW 65. SCREW

30. BODY 80. GASKET
60. PACKING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8006
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PPC ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the PPC assembly.



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
primer (Grade T, MIL-S-22473) commercially available
Loctite 222 thread locking compound CAGE: 05972
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-02-300-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Correct PPC Assembly Internal Leakage (Subtask 72-10-02-300-004-A01)
(1) Disassemble PPC assembly.
(a) Remove screws (10, Figure 9001), washers (15), and cover (25).
(b) Remove and discard gasket (35).
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000), FOR HANDLING PROCEDURES.
(c) Remove cam assembly (40) and sleeve bearing (45).

(d) Remove screws (65), washers (70), and retainer (75).
(e) Remove and discard gasket (80).
(f) Remove bushing (31).
NOTE: Do not remove bushings from cover or body unless damage is indicated by
inspection.
(g) Remove and discard packings (32, 33).

(h) Remove washer (80).
(i) Remove and discard packing (90).
(j) Remove sleeve (135).
(k) Disassemble sleeve.
NOTE: Do not disassemble sleeve unless damage is indicated by inspection.

1 Heat sleeve (135, Figure 9001) to 212°F (100°C) for 10 minutes to soften Loctite 222,
thread locking compound, so retainer (110) can be removed.
CAUTION: RETAINER AND SLEEVE HAVE LEFT-HAND THREADS.
2 Remove retainer (110) and valve seat (115).

3 Remove and discard packings (120).
4 Replace valve seat if ID exceeds 0.441 inch (11.20 mm).
(l) Remove plug (55).
(m) Remove and discard packing (60).
(n) Remove and discard packing (50).
(o) Remove washer (145).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(p) Remove and discard packing (150).

NOTE: Do not disassemble identification plate unless damage is indicated by inspection.
(2) Assemble PPC assembly as follows:

(a) Coat all internal surfaces of PPC body with clean, approved engine oil.
NOTE: Replace all gaskets, packings, and retainers securing packings. Coat all internal
surfaces of body with clean, approved engine oil.
(b) Coat threads of retainer (110) and mating threads of sleeve with primer.
NOTE: Make sure that threads of retainer and mating threads of sleeve are clean prior
to applying primer.
(c) Assemble sleeve.

CAUTION: APPLY LOCTITE 222, THREAD LOCKING COMPOUND SPARINGLY.
EXCESSIVE USE COULD CAUSE BINDING OF VALVE SEAT (110).
CAUTION: RETAINER (110) AND SLEEVE (135) HAVE LEFT-HAND THREADS.
1 Coat retainer (110) threads with Loctite 222, thread locking compound.
2 Install packing (120), valve seat (115), and retainer (110) in sleeve (135). Torque
retainer to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm).
3 Bake assembled sleeve for 15 to 30 minutes at 250 to 300°F (121 to 149°C).

(d) Check security of retainer (110). Apply a breakaway torque (CW) of 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm).
Reassemble sleeve if movement occurs.
(e) Install packings (150) and washers (145) in body (30).
(f) Install packing (60) and plug (55) in body. Torque plug to 25 in-lb (2.8 Nm).
(g) Install sleeve (135) in body (30).
(h) Install packing (90), gasket (80), washer (85), and retainer (75). Secure with washers (70)
and screws (65). Torque screws to 25 in-lb (2.8 Nm).
(i) Install packing (50) in body (30).
(j) Position sleeve bearing (45) on cam assembly (40) shaft. Insert cam assembly and bearing
in body (30) until sleeve guide is positioned in cam assembly slot.
(k) Install packings (32, 33) on bushing (31) and install in cover.
(l) Install gasket (35) and cover (25). Secure with screws (10) and washers (15). Torque
screws to 25 in-lb (2.8 Nm).
(m) Check PPC operation by rotating shaft assembly to check for freedom of movement. Shaft
must rotate freely with no binding or rough spots. Sleeve assembly must extend and retract
smoothly as shaft assembly is rotated. Torque required to rotate shaft assembly to within
0.010 inch (0.25 mm) of full travel must be 1 to 7 in-lb (0.1 to 0.8 Nm).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) PPC Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 72-10-02-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9004
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
10. SCREW 65. SCREW

30. BODY 80. GASKET
60. PACKING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9005
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PPC ASSEMBLY – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test the PPC assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-02-700-802-A01)
B. Test (Subtask 72-10-02-700-004-A01)
CAUTION: FOLLOWING PPC INSTALLATION, A PG RESET FUNCTION AND NTS LOCKOUT

SYSTEM PRESSURE CHECK AND NTS TRIP SYSTEM CHECK ARE MANDATORY
TO MAKE SURE OF PROPER NTS SYSTEM OPERATION.
(1) Perform a PG reset function and NTS lockout system pressure check and NTS trip system check.
Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13002
72-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PG ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the PG assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-03-020-802-A01)
B. Remove PG Assembly (Subtask 72-10-03-020-004-A01)
NOTE: Before replacing PG assembly, be sure trouble has been isolated to this component. If
new PG assembly is to be installed, rigging must be accomplished. Refer to TESTING
(PGBLK 76-10-01-13000).
(1) Clean area around PG base to avoid introducing contaminates into orifice area under PG.
(2) Disconnect controls linkage between PG assembly and fuel control assembly. Refer to REMOVAL
(PGBLK 76-10-01-3000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Disconnect wiring and plumbing as applicable.

(4) Remove nuts (5, Figure 3001) and washers (10) securing PG assembly (15) to housing.
(5) Remove PG assembly (15) from engine in a straight line to avoid damage.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW CONTAMINANTS TO ENTER GEARBOX PASSAGEWAYS.
(6) Clean PG gasket (20) mating surface of gearbox.

(7) Remove gasket (20) from PG assembly (15).
(8) Remove elbow (30) with packing (35) from PG assembly (15). Discard packing.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) PG Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 72-10-03-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 20. GASKET

10. WASHER 30. ELBOW
15. PG ASSEMBLY 35. PACKING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PG ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the PG assembly.



APPLICABLE.
Braycote 248 corrosion-preventive compound Air BP Lubricants Div., Maple Plaza

(MIL-C-11798, Class 3) II, 1N, 6 Campus Dr., Parsippany,
NJ 07054-4406
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-03-420-802-A01)
B. Install PG Assembly (Subtask 72-10-03-420-004-A01)
CAUTION: THE ORIFICE MUST BE CLEAN TO MAKE SURE OF PROPER NTS SYSTEM OPERATION.
(1) Install elbow (30, Figure 4001) with new packing (35) into PG assembly (15). Torque elbow (30)
to 20 to 25 in-lb (2.2 to 2.8 Nm).
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: PG GASKET (20) FLASHING, REMAINING FROM THE MOLDING PROCESS, COULD
BREAK OFF AFTER INSTALLATION AND PLUG THE NTS ORIFICE.
(2) Visually inspect new PG gasket (20) for defects. Reject new gasket (20) if flashing remains from
the molding process. Flashing is non-uniform gasket material remaining at the mold part line.
CAUTION: ONLY USE CORROSION-PREVENTIVE COMPOUND THAT IS COMPATIBLE WITH
BRAYCOTE 248, CORROSION-PREVENTIVE COMPOUND. WIPE EXCESS
CORROSION-PREVENTIVE COMPOUND FROM PG. AVOID
CORROSION-PREVENTIVE COMPOUND ENTERING ENGINE GEARBOX OIL
PASSAGES.
(3) Apply sufficient Braycote 248, corrosion-preventive compound to entire gasket (20) to make
sure that entire gasket will remain in PG groove during assembly.
(4) Install new gasket (20) on PG assembly (15).
(5) Wipe excess Braycote 248, corrosion-preventive compound from PG and gasket assembly.
(6) Install PG assembly (15) in a straight line to avoid damage and secure with washers (10) and
nuts (5). Torque retaining nuts (5) to 100 in-lb (11.3 Nm).
(7) Connect wiring and plumbing as applicable.
(8) Install lever length adjustment screw and nut on PG assembly shaft. Refer to INSTALLATION
(PGBLK 76-10-01-4000).
(9) Connect controls linkage. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 76-10-01-4000).
(10) Perform PG high and low RPM checks. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
CAUTION: FOLLOWING PG INSTALLATION, SUPPLEMENTARY NTS CHECK PROCEDURE,
PG RESET FUNCTION AND NTS LOCKOUT SYSTEM PRESSURE CHECK, AND
NTS TRIP SYSTEM CHECK ARE MANDATORY TO MAKE SURE OF PROPER NTS
SYSTEM OPERATION.
(11) Perform supplementary NTS check procedure, PG reset function and NTS lockout system
pressure check, and NTS trip system check. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) PG Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-03-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 20. GASKET

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PG ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the PG assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-03-100-802-A01)
B. Clean Parts (Subtask 72-10-03-100-004-A01)
(1) Clean all standard metallic hardware. Refer to Paragraph 2.J. Cleaning Method 1 (Subtask
72-00-00-100-012-A01) or Paragraph 2.K. Cleaning Method 2 (Subtask 72-00-00-100-013-A01).
(2) Clean outside surface of PG (15, Figure 6001). Refer to Paragraph 2.J. Cleaning Method 1
(Subtask 72-00-00-100-012-A01).
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) PG Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-10-03-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 20. GASKET

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PG ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the PG assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-03-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect PG Assembly (Subtask 72-10-03-200-004-A01)
(1) Inspect PG assembly (15, Figure 8001) for security, evidence of oil leakage, and damage. No
damage allowed.
(2) Check PG assembly lever for freedom of movement. Move PG assembly lever against high
speed stop and check that lever returns against low speed stop without assistance when released.
(3) Check high and low speed stops for security.
(4) Inspect elbow (30) for damaged threads and other damage.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) Damaged magnetic pickup may be replaced. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-03-9000).
(6) Damaged return spring assembly hardware may be replaced. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
72-10-03-9000).
(7) Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-03-9000) for replacement of PG shaft packing (35).
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) PG Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-03-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 20. GASKET

15. PROPELLER GOVERNOR ASSEMBLY 35. PACKING
(PG)
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PG ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the PG assembly.
voltmeter commercially available


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
PN 1355-262 PG shaft packing Woodward Governor Co, 5001 N.

Second St., Rockford, IL
61125-7001

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-03-300-802-A01)
B. Remove Magnetic Pickup (Subtask 72-10-03-300-004-A01)
(1) Remove screw (5, Figure 9001), washer (10), and clamp (15) securing lead to PG.
(2) Loosen pickup locknut (20) and magnetic pickup (25). Remove magnetic pickup (25), packing
(30), and pickup locknut (20).
(3) Remove packing (30) and pickup locknut (20) from magnetic pickup (25).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) PG Assembly Repair (Partial Breakdown) (GRAPHIC 72-10-03-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. SCREW 20. PICKUP LOCKNUT

10. WASHER 25. MAGNETIC PICKUP
15. WIRE CLAMP 30. PACKING
C. Install Magnetic Pickup (Subtask 72-10-03-300-005-A01)
(1) Install pickup locknut (20, Figure 9002) and new packing (30) on new magnetic pickup (25).
(2) Install assembled magnetic pickup (25) in PG assembly.
(3) Turn magnetic pickup (25) in until it contacts flyweight head.
(4) Loosen magnetic pickup (25) one-half turn. Torque pickup locknut (20) to 22 to 25 in-lb (2.5 to
2.8 Nm).
(5) Operate engine at 100 percent with no load and with voltmeter check voltage. Voltage must read
4.0 to 5.0 volts peak-to-peak.
NOTE: A voltmeter can be used in place of an oscilloscope to check PG voltage.
NOTE: If voltmeter indicates (volts) peak-to-peak, no correction of reading is required. If

voltmeter indicates (volts) RMS, the voltmeter reading must be multiplied by 2.82885
to obtain corrected peak-to-peak reading.
CAUTION: DO NOT POSITION MAGNETIC PICKUP (25) CLOSER THAN ONE-EIGHTH TURN
FROM FLYWEIGHT HEAD.
(6) If 4 volts minimum cannot be met, loosen pickup locknut (20, Figure 9002) and turn magnetic
pickup (25) in (CW) to increase voltage output.
(7) After each adjustment, torque pickup locknut (20) to 22 to 25 in-lb (2.5 to 2.8 Nm).
(8) Install clamp (15), washer (10), and screw (5). Torque screw to 18 to 22 in-lb (2.0 to 2.5 Nm).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9004
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9002. (Sheet 1 of 1) PG Assembly Repair (Partial Breakdown) (GRAPHIC 72-10-03-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9005
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. SCREW 20. PICKUP LOCKNUT

10. WASHER 25. MAGNETIC PICKUP
15. WIRE CLAMP 30. PACKING
D. Remove PG Return Spring (Subtask 72-10-03-300-006-A01)
(1) Remove lockwire, screws (5, Figure 9003), and washers (10) that attach bracket (15) to PG
cover. Remove return spring assembly from PG and unhook return spring (25) from plate (40).
NOTE: Note bracket (15), return spring (25), and pin (35) orientation as installed prior to
disassembly to make sure hardware is properly assembled upon installation.
(2) Disassemble return spring assembly and visually inspect individual pieces (return spring (25),
bracket (15), pin (35), and washer (30)). No breakage or distortion allowed. Minor wear on
working surfaces is allowed. Replace damaged hardware as required.
CAUTION: WHEN REPLACING PLATE (40) DO NOT REMOVE LEVER (20) FROM PG SPLINED
SHAFT. IF LEVER (20) IS REMOVED AND RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN LEVER (20)
AND PG SPLINED SHAFT IS NOT MAINTAINED, THE PG WILL HAVE TO BE
RETURNED TO A MAINTENANCE FACILITY TO BE RECALIBRATED.
(3) Visually inspect plate (40) while installed on lever (20). No breakage or distortion allowed. Minor
wear on working surfaces is allowed. If required, replace damaged plate (40) as follows:
NOTE: Do not remove plate (40) unless replacement is required.
(a) Remove screw (45) and washer (50). Remove plate (40) from lever (20) and uncouple
return spring (25) from plate (40).
(b) Discard worn or damaged plate (40).
(c) Install new plate (40) by placing open end of return spring (25) through hole in plate (40)
and position plate (40) to be assembled onto lever (20).
(d) Install screw (45) and washer (50) onto plate (40). Secure plate (40) to lever (20) with
screw (45). Torque screw to 18 to 22 in-lb (2.0 to 2.5 Nm).
(e) Secure screw (45) to plate using lockwire. Refer to Figure 9003.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9006
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9003. (Sheet 1 of 1) PG Assembly (Return Spring) (Partial Breakdown) (GRAPHIC

72-10-03-99B-003-A01)
5. SCREW 30. WASHER

10. WASHER 35. PIN
15. BRACKET 40. PLATE
20. LEVER 45. SCREW
25. RETURN SPRING 50. WASHER
E. Install PG Return Spring (If Required) (Subtask 72-10-03-300-007-A01)
(1) Install return spring (25, Figure 9004), washer (30), and pin (35) on bracket (15).
NOTE: Note proper orientation of bracket (15), return spring (25), and pin (35) when
assembling hardware. Refer to Figure 9004.
(2) Install large hooked end of return spring (25) through hole in plate (40). Position return spring
assembly on PG cover. Pin (35) will be retained in place by bracket (15) and PG cover. Secure
return spring assembly with two washers (10) and two screws (5). Torque screws (5) to 18 to
22 in-lb (2.0 to 2.5 Nm).
(3) Lockwire cover screws (5) as shown in bottom view of Figure 9004 using lockwire.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9007
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(4) Make sure lever (20) rotates freely between low and high speed stops. Rotate lever (20) against
the high speed stop and check that lever (20) returns to the low speed stop without assistance
when released. If lever (20) does not return to low speed stop, check for proper return spring
(25) installation. If installed correctly, refer to instructions for replacing PG shaft packing.

72-10-03-99B-004-A01)
5. SCREW 30. WASHER

10. WASHER 35. PIN
20. LEVER 45. SCREW
F. Replace PG Shaft Packing (Subtask 72-10-03-300-006-A01)
(1) Remove return spring (25, Figure 9005), if required.

(2) Loosen lever (20) on PG shaft and carefully slide lever (20) approximately half way off PG shaft.
Do not remove lever (20) at this time.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9008
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Place a reference mark on the PG shaft and PG housing at the split line of lever (20) to make
sure lever (20) is properly positioned when reinstalled. Refer to Figure 9006.
(4) Remove PG lever (20, Figure 9005) from PG shaft.
(5) Rotate PG shaft CCW until packing is exposed. Remove packing using a dental pick or equivalent
tool.
BREATHING FUMES OR LONG CONTACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENT DAMAGE
TO PHYSICAL HEALTH. KEEP AWAY FROM FLAME TO AVOID FIRE HAZARD.
WARNING: USE EYE PROTECTION. COMPRESSED AIR CAN CAUSE LOOSE PARTICLES
THAT CAN GET IN YOUR EYES AND CAUS INJURY.
(6) Clean the PG spline shaft packing bore with MIL-PRF-680, solvent. Use low pressure air to dry
part.
(7) Install new PN 1355-262, PG shaft packing and carefully rotate shaft CW to make sure of proper
installation.
(8) Install lever (20) on PG shaft with reference marks aligned with split line on arm. Refer to Figure
9006.
(9) Adjust lever (20) to allow a 0.050-inch (1.27 mm) gap between housing and arm, when arm is
at high speed stop.
NOTE: If PG lever (20, Figure 9005) has a shoulder, this step is not required.
(10) Install return spring (25), if required.

(11) Operate engine to make sure that PG setting is in compliance with engine functional requirements.
NOTE: If speed settings during the operational check are not within 1.5 percent of original
(pre-assembly) values, PG must be inspected per SB TPE331-A72-0685 or sent to
an authorized overhaul facility for verification of proper speeder spring seating. Do
not attempt to meet this tolerance by repositioning arm on shaft without aligning
reference marks.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9009
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

72-10-03-99B-004-A01)
5. SCREW 30. WASHER

10. WASHER 35. PIN
20. LEVER 45. SCREW
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9010
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9006. (Sheet 1 of 1) PG Assembly (Index Marks) (GRAPHIC 72-10-03-99B-004-A01)
G. Job Close-up (Subtask 72-10-03-300-007-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9011
72-10-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NTS ORIFICE ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the NTS orifice assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-04-020-802-A01)
B. Remove NTS Orifice Assembly (Subtask 72-10-04-020-004-A01)
(1) Remove screws (5, Figure 3001) securing body (20).

(2) Remove body (20) and gasket (35). Discard gasket (35).
NOTE: Do not disassemble body (20).

(4) Install an 8-32 UNC threaded bolt (2 inches (50.8 mm) or longer) into the body (60).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) Pull on bolt to remove body (60) from housing.

NOTE: Do not disassemble body (60).
(6) Remove and discard packings (40).

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-2160) NTS Orifice Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC
72-10-04-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. SCREW 35. GASKET

20. BODY 40. PACKING
25. PACKING 60. BODY
30. PACKING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NTS ORIFICE ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the NTS orifice assembly.



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-04-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. (Post SB TPE331-72-2160) Install NTS Orifice Assembly (Subtask 72-10-04-420-004-A01)
NOTE: Do not assemble engine in the Pre SB TPE331-72-2160 configuration.

NOTE: Refer to ASSEMBLY (PGBLK 70-00-00-10000) for recommended torque values. Add
frictional drag (run-down) torque of self-locking devices to recommended values.
(1) Install new packings (40, Figure 4001) on body (60). Install an 8-32 UNC threaded bolt (2.00
inches (50.8 mm) or longer) into body (60). Using bolt, install body (60) into bore of housing and
seat. Remove bolt.
NOTE: Make sure the correct body (60) part number is installed. The correct body (60) is
tinted gold to serve as a visual reference.
NOTE: Make sure that the body (60) is installed so that the arrow marking on the body (60)
points forward, towards the nose of the engine after installation.
(2) Install new packings (25, 30) on body (20). Position new gasket (35) over body (20) and install
into bore of housing and seat. Install screws (5). Torque screws to a torque value of 15 in-lb (1.7
Nm).
CAUTION: FOLLOWING NTS ORIFICE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION, SUPPLEMENTARY NTS
CHECK PROCEDURE, PG RESET FUNCTION AND NTS LOCKOUT SYSTEM
PRESSURE CHECK, AND NTS TRIP SYSTEM CHECK ARE MANDATORY TO MAKE
SURE OF PROPER NTS SYSTEM OPERATION.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-2160) NTS Orifice Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC
72-10-04-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. SCREW 35. GASKET

30. PACKING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NTS ORIFICE ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the NTS orifice assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-04-100-802-A01)
(1) Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), for general cleaning instructions and description
of cleaning methods specified in Table 6003.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 6003. (Post SB TPE331-72-2160) Cleaning Methods
Cleaning Methods
Figure No. Item No. Nomenclature 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 6001 20 Body X X
Figure 6001 60 Body X X
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-2160) NTS Orifice Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC
72-10-04-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. SCREW 35. GASKET

30. PACKING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6004
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NTS ORIFICE ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the NTS orifice assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-04-200-802-A01)
B. NTS Orifice Assembly (Subtask 72-10-04-200-004-A01)
(1) Inspect NTS orifice assembly for leaks, obvious damage, and for contamination or damage to
the filter element that may affect function.
C. (Post SB TPE331-72-2160) NTS Orifice Assembly (Subtask 72-10-04-200-004-A01)
(1) Refer to Figure 8001.

UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Inspect NTS restrictor assembly for obvious damage.

(3) Using a strong light, visually examine interior of NTS restrictor assembly for contamination or
blockage. Contamination or blockage that cannot be removed by cleaning is not allowed.
NOTE: Do not attempt to dislodge any material from the NTS restrictor assembly with a
probing instrument.
NOTE: Do not disassemble NTS restrictor assembly.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-2160) NTS Orifice Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-10-04-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. SCREW 35. GASKET

30. PACKING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NTS ORIFICE ASSEMBLY – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test the NTS orifice assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-04-700-802-A01)
B. Supplementary NTS check (Subtask 72-10-04-700-004-A01)
CAUTION: FOLLOWING NTS ORIFICE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION, SUPPLEMENTARY NTS

CHECK PROCEDURE, PG RESET FUNCTION AND NTS LOCKOUT SYSTEM
PRESSURE CHECK, AND NTS TRIP SYSTEM CHECK ARE MANDATORY TO MAKE
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13002
72-10-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TORQUE LOAD ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the torque load assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-05-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Torque Load Assembly (Subtask 72-10-05-020-004-A01)
(1) Remove bolts (5, Figure 3001), washers (10), end cap (15), and gasket (20).
(2) Insert Allen wrench in torque rod of torque load assembly (70). Adapt torque wrench and apply
sufficient torque in direction of propeller rotation to unload splined locking ring (25). Maintain
torque and remove splined locking ring.
(3) Remove bolts (30), washers (35), and torque load assembly (70).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) Remove bolts (50), washers (55), and end plug (60).
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Load Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 72-10-05-99B-001-A01)
5. BOLT 45. PACKING

10. WASHER 50. BOLT
15. END CAP 55. WASHER
20. GASKET 60. END PLUG
25. SPLINED LOCKING RING 65. PACKING
30. BOLT 70. TORQUE LOAD HOUSING
35. WASHER
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TORQUE LOAD ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the torque load assembly.



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-05-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Torque Load Assembly (Subtask 72-10-05-420-004-A01)
(1) Install new packing (65, Figure 4001) on end plug (60).
(2) Install end plug in torque load assembly (70). Secure with washers (55) and bolts (50). Torque
bolts to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm).
(3) Install new packing (45) on torque load assembly (70).
(4) Install torque load assembly on nose cone. Secure with washers (35) and bolts (30). Torque
(5) Install gasket (20) and end cap (15). Secure with washers (10) and bolts (5). Torque bolts to 35
in-lb (4.0 Nm).
NOTE: Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-10-05-13000) for procedure to load torque load
assembly prior to installing end cap.
(6) Install NTS orifice assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-04-4000).

(7) Install auto-ignition switch. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 74-30-01-4000).
CAUTION: FOLLOWING TORQUE LOAD ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION, NTS TRIP SYSTEM
CHECK OR NTS SYSTEM CHECK BY FLIGHT CHECK ARE MANDATORY TO MAKE
(8) Perform NTS trip system check or NTS system check by flight check. Refer to Table 13003,
Matrix of NTS Procedures.
NOTE: The NTS trip system check may be accomplished instead of performing the NTS
system check by flight check.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Load Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-05-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 45. PACKING

10. WASHER 50. BOLT
35. WASHER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TORQUE LOAD ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the torque load assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-05-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean torque load assembly. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method
5 or 6.
(3) Clean end plug (60, Figure 6001). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning
Method 5 or 6.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Load Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-10-05-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 45. PACKING

10. WASHER 50. BOLT
35. WASHER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TORQUE LOAD ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the torque load assembly.
ball tip stylus tool - 0.030 inch RAE Bearing Services Inc., 170 E.
radius, 0.060 inch diameter (0.76 Elliott St., P.O. Box 14180, Hartford,
mm radius, 1.52 mm diameter) CT 06114-1517


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-05-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Torque Load Assembly (Subtask 72-10-05-200-004-A01)
(1) Inspect for security and obvious damage.

(2) Inspect torque load arm surface which mates with torque ring for wear step using ball tip stylus
tool - 0.030 inch radius, 0.060 inch diameter (0.76 mm radius, 1.52 mm diameter). Refer to
Figure 8001. If wear is indicated, replace torque load arm. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
72-10-05-9000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Load Arm Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-05-99B-001-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TORQUE LOAD ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the torque load assembly.
rawhide mallet commercially available


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

compound
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-05-300-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Replace Torque Load Arm (Subtask 72-10-05-300-004-A01)
(1) Disassemble torque load assembly as follows:
(a) Remove bolts (5, Figure 9001), washers (10), and end plug (15).
(b) Remove and discard packing (20).
(c) Remove bolts (25), washers (30), end cap (35), gasket (40), and splined locking ring (45).
(d) Loosen nut (50), which secures torque rod (60), several turns. Lightly tap nut with small
rawhide mallet to free torque rod.
(e) Remove nut (50), washer (55), and bearing (85).
(f) Remove torque rod (75) with key (60) and remove torque load arm (75).
(g) Remove and discard packing (65).
(2) Clean torque load assembly components using MIL-PRF-680, solvent.

(3) Inspect torque load assembly components as follows:
(a) Visually inspect components for cracks. No cracks allowed.
(b) Visually inspect splined locking ring (45) for evidence of abnormal wear patterns.
1 Internal spline wear depth must not exceed 0.004 inch (0.10 mm).
2 External spline wear depth must not exceed 0.006 inch (0.15 mm).
(c) Visually inspect torque rod splines (60) for evidences of abnormal wear patterns. Spline
wear must not exceed 0.004 inch (0.10 mm).
(d) Visually inspect housing assembly (110) splines for evidence of abnormal wear patterns.
Spline wear must not exceed 0.007 inch (0.18 mm).
(e) Inspect bearing (85). Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(4) Assemble torque load assembly as follows:
NOTE: Lightly lubricate threads of all nuts and bolts with Liqui-Moly brand NV thread
compound, anti-seize lubricant.
(a) Install new packings (65, 20) on torque rod (60) and end plug (15).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT TORQUE LOAD ARM IS PROPERLY INSTALLED WITH
ANGLE OF ARM POINTED IN DIRECTION SHOWN IN FIGURE 9002. ENGINE
DAMAGE COULD OCCUR IF ARM IS NOT PROPERLY INSTALLED.
(b) Insert torque load arm (75, Figure 9001) and torque rod (60) with key (70) in housing
assembly (110). Rotate torque, as required, to align key with keyway in torque load arm.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) Install bearing (85), washer (55) and nut (50) on torque rod (60). Torque nut to 30 to 40
in-lb (3.4 to 4.5 Nm).
(d) Install end plug (15) and secure with washers (10) and bolts (5). Torque bolts to 40 in-lb
(4.5 Nm).
(e) Install splined locking ring (45) on torque rod (60).
(f) Install end cap (35) and gasket (40) on housing (110). Secure with washers (30) and bolts
(25). Torque bolts to 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm).
NOTE: End cap (35) will be removed and reinstalled during final mating of assembly
to engine.

CHECK OR NTS SYSTEM CHECK BY FLIGHT CHECK ARE MANDATORY TO
MAKE SURE OF PROPER NTS SYSTEM OPERATION.
(g) After installation of the torque load assembly, perform NTS trip system check or NTS
system check by flight check. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures.
NOTE: The NTS trip system check may be accomplished instead of performing the
NTS system check by flight check.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Load Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 72-10-05-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9004
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 50. NUT

15. END PLUG 60. TORQUE ROD
25. BOLT 70. KEY
30. WASHER 75. TORQUE LOAD ARM
35. END CAP 85. BEARING
40. GASKET 100. HOUSING ASSEMBLY
45. SPLINED LOCKING RING
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9005
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Load Arm Repair (GRAPHIC 72-10-05-99B-002-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9006
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TORQUE LOAD ASSEMBLY – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test the torque load assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-05-700-802-A01)
B. Adjust Torque Load Assembly (Subtask 72-10-05-700-004-A01)
(1) Locate splined locking ring (25, Figure 13001) on Allen wrench adapted to torque wrench. Install
Allen wrench in torque rod.
NOTE: The three torque load assemblies must be loaded consecutively.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Set torque load assembly (70) by applying 90 to 110 in-lb (10.2 to 12.4 Nm) torque, in the direction
of propeller shaft rotation.
(3) While maintaining torque on the torque rod, index the splined locking ring (25) until it installs
freely between the torque rod and the splined sleeve.
(4) After setting the three assemblies, check the individual torque settings for each assembly. The
setting for each individual assembly must be 90 to 110 in-lb (10.2 to 12.4 Nm) with the total for
the three assemblies being 280 to 320 in-lb (31.6 to 36.2 Nm).
CHECK OR NTS SYSTEM CHECK BY FLIGHT CHECK ARE MANDATORY TO MAKE
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13002
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Load Assembly Testing (GRAPHIC 72-10-05-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13003
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 45. PACKING

10. WASHER 50. BOLT
35. WASHER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13004
72-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NTS VALVE AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the NTS valve and housing assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-06-020-802-A01)
B. Remove NTS Valve and Housing Assembly (Subtask 72-10-06-020-004-A01)
(1) Remove auto-ignition switch. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 74-30-01-3000).

(2) Loosen hex nut (5, Figure 3001).
(3) Remove NTS valve assembly (10) from housing (55).
(5) Remove plug and bleeder (80) from housing (55).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(7) Remove bolts (25, 30) and housing (55) from nose cone.
(9) Remove pin (40), bushing (45), and arm (50) from housing (55).
NOTE: Do not remove pin, bushing, or arm from housing unless damage is indicated by
inspection.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) NTS Valve and Housing Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 72-10-06-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. HEX NUT 45. BUSHING

10. NTS VALVE ASSEMBLY 50. ARM
15. PACKING 55. HOUSING
30. BOLT 80. PLUG AND BLEEDER
40. PIN 85. PACKING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NTS VALVE AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the NTS valve and housing assembly.
PN 831010-1 NTS valve calibration gage (used CAGE: 06848

during initial adjustment of NTS
valve)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-06-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install NTS Valve and Housing Assembly (Subtask 72-10-06-420-004-A01)
(1) Install arm (50, Figure 4001) in housing (55). Secure with bushing (45) and pin (40).
NOTE: Position housing with valve end pointed in direction of propeller rotation.
(2) Install housing (55) with new packings (60, 65). Secure with bolts (25, 30). Torque bolts to 120
in-lb (13.6 Nm).
(3) Install valve assembly (10) with new packings (15, 20) in housing (55).
(4) Install hex nut (5) on valve assembly, do not tighten hex nut at this time.
(5) Install PN 831010-1, NTS valve calibration gage in boss on bottom of housing (55).
(6) Turn NTS valve (10) in housing (55) while observing PN 831010-1, NTS valve calibration gage.
(7) When indicator on PN 831010-1, NTS valve calibration gage starts to move, continue turning
NTS valve (10) until indicator stops moving. Turn NTS valve two additional turns. Remove gage.
(8) Torque hex nut (5) to 40 to 50 in-lb (4.5 to 5.6 Nm) and lockwire.
(9) Install plug (80) with new packing (85) on housing (55). Torque plug to 25 to 30 in-lb (2.8 to 3.4
Nm).
(10) Install torque load assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-05-4000).
(11) Install auto-ignition switch and plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 74-30-01-4000).
(12) Install all engine components. Refer to Engine MM. Install aircraft components. Refer to AMM.
Complete all adjustments.
CAUTION: FOLLOWING NTS VALVE AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION, NTS
TRIP SYSTEM CHECK OR NTS SYSTEM CHECK BY FLIGHT CHECK ARE
MANDATORY TO MAKE SURE OF PROPER NTS SYSTEM OPERATION.
(a) Perform NTS trip system check or NTS system check by flight check. Refer to Table 13003,
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) NTS Valve and Housing Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-06-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

40. PIN 85. PACKING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NTS VALVE AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the NTS valve and housing assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-06-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean NTS housing assembly. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method
5 or 6.
(3) Clean auto-ignition switch. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method 11.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NTS VALVE AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the NTS valve and housing assembly.


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-06-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect NTS Valve Assembly (Subtask 72-10-06-200-004-A01)
(1) Inspect NTS housing assembly for leaks and damage.

(2) Visually inspect NTS valve arm (50, Figure 8001) load surface for wear. Indications of wear that
can be felt with a ball tip stylus tool - 0.015 inch radius, 0.031 inch diameter (0.38 mm radius,
0.79 mm diameter) are not acceptable. Replace NTS valve arm, or for continued use, NTS valve
arm may be installed as follows:
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Install NTS valve arm with worn load surface rotated 180 degrees from its original position.
NOTE: NTS valve arm may be rotated one time only.
(b) Electrochemically etch the letter R on NTS valve arm to indicate rotation for continued use.
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) NTS Valve and Housing Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-06-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

40. PIN 85. PACKING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NTS VALVE AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test the NTS valve and housing assembly.
depth micrometer commercially available



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-06-700-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Adjustments (Subtask 72-10-06-700-004-A01)
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CROSS OR FITTINGS ARE HELD SECURELY WHEN REMOVING
OR INSTALLING CAPS AND TEST LINES. IF CROSS OR FITTINGS ARE NOT SECURED,
UNDUE STRESS, BENDING, AND POSSIBLE CRACKS IN ATTACHING PARTS MAY
RESULT.
(1) Adjust NTS trip torque.
NOTE: Prior to adjusting NTS trip torque, pull igniter circuit breaker or place the automatic
continuous ignition switch off.
NOTE: Power lever is placed above flight idle position for this test.
(a) Connect a pressure gage, 0 to 200 PSIG (0 to 1,379 kPa) between Positions A and B.
(b) Loosen hex nut on NTS valve assembly, then back out valve assembly (approximately
three turns) until the valve assembly does not engage the NTS valve housing arm.
(c) Turn on aircraft unfeathering pump and observe a rapid pressure fluctuation on the test
gage.
NOTE: If there is no rapid gage fluctuation observed, engage and disengage the NTS
valve assembly and the NTS valve housing arm several times. If no gage
fluctuation is observed, manually actuate the MFV several times.
(d) Slowly screw valve assembly into housing until the rapid pressure fluctuation stops. The
stop in fluctuation indicates initial NTS trip.
(e) Set final NTS trip point.
1 Measure from top of valve assembly to housing with a depth micrometer and record
reading.
2 Turn valve assembly into housing two full turns (0.070 inch (1.78 mm)) of valve
assembly.
3 Remeasure to confirm final trip point setting has been achieved.
(f) Torque hex nut (5, Figure 13002) to 40 to 50 in-lb (4.5 to 5.6 Nm). Lockwire nut.
CAUTION: FOLLOWING NTS VALVE AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY
INSTALLATION/ADJUSTMENT, NTS TRIP SYSTEM CHECK OR NTS SYSTEM
CHECK BY FLIGHT CHECK IS MANDATORY TO MAKE SURE OF PROPER NTS
SYSTEM OPERATION.
Matrix of NTS Procedures. Check and/or adjust as required.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13002
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13001. (Sheet 1 of 1) NTS Trip Test Ports (GRAPHIC 72-10-06-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13003
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13002. (Sheet 1 of 1) NTS Valve and Housing Assembly Testing (GRAPHIC 72-10-06-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13004
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

40. PIN 85. PACKING
C. Testing (Subtask 72-10-06-700-005-A01)
(1) Install all engine components. Refer to Engine MM. Install aircraft components. Refer to AMM.
Complete all adjustments listed above.
CAUTION: FOLLOWING NTS VALVE AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY
INSTALLATION/ADJUSTMENT, NTS TRIP SYSTEM CHECK OR NTS SYSTEM
CHECK BY FLIGHT CHECK IS MANDATORY TO MAKE SURE OF PROPER
NTS SYSTEM OPERATION.
(a) Perform NTS trip system check or NTS system check by flight check. Refer to Table 13003,
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13005
72-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PROPELLER FEATHERING VALVE ASSEMBLY AND OIL TRANSFER TUBE – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the propeller feathering valve assembly and oil transfer tube.
PN 285818-1-1 mechanical puller (used to install or CAGE: 06848

remove oil transfer tube from
feathering valve bore in accessory
drive housing)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-07-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Propeller Feathering Valve Assembly (Subtask 72-10-07-020-004-A01)
(1) Remove attaching bolts (5, Figure 3001) and feathering valve assembly (10).
(3) Using PN 285818-1-1, mechanical puller, remove oil transfer tube (25).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Propeller Feathering Valve Assembly and Oil Transfer Tube Removal (GRAPHIC
72-10-07-99B-001-A01)
5. BOLT 20. PACKING

10. PROPELLER FEATHERING VALVE 25. OIL TRANSFER TUBE
ASSEMBLY
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PROPELLER FEATHERING VALVE ASSEMBLY AND OIL TRANSFER

TUBE – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the propeller feathering valve assembly and oil transfer tube.
PN 285818-1-1 mechanical puller (used to install or CAGE: 06848

remove oil transfer tube from
feathering valve bore in accessory
drive housing)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-07-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Propeller Feathering Valve Assembly and Oil Transfer Tube (Subtask
72-10-07-420-004-A01)
(1) Using PN 285818-1-1, mechanical puller, install oil transfer tube (25, Figure 4001) with new
packings (30).
CAUTION: PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, MAKE SURE THAT PROPELLER FEATHERING VALVE
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE TRAVEL TO FULL EXTENDED POSITION IS WITHIN
LIMITS SPECIFIED IN INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-07-8000). IMPROPER
OPERATION OF FEATHERING VALVE COULD RESULT IF TRAVEL TO FULL
EXTENDED POSITION EXCEEDS 0.040 INCH (1.02 MM).
(2) Install feathering valve assembly (10) with new packings (15, 20). Secure with bolts (5). Torque
bolts to 50 in-lb (5.6 Nm), then loosen and retorque to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm).
(3) Install NTS housing assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-06-4000).
CAUTION: FOLLOWING PROPELLER FEATHERING VALVE INSTALLATION, AN EMERGENCY
SHUTDOWN SYSTEM CHECK, AN MFV/FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE TEST, AND AN
NTS TRIP SYSTEM CHECK ARE MANDATORY TO MAKE SURE OF PROPER NTS
SYSTEM OPERATION.
(4) Perform the following checks. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Propeller Feathering Valve Assembly and Oil Transfer Tube Installation
(GRAPHIC 72-10-07-99B-001-A01)
5. BOLT 20. PACKING

ASSEMBLY
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PROPELLER FEATHERING VALVE ASSEMBLY AND OIL TRANSFER TUBE – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the propeller feathering valve assembly and oil transfer tube.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-07-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean feathering valve assembly (10, Figure 6001). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000),
Cleaning Method 5 or 6.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Propeller Feathering Valve Assembly and Oil Transfer Tube Cleaning (GRAPHIC
72-10-07-99B-001-A01)
5. BOLT 20. PACKING

ASSEMBLY
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PROPELLER FEATHERING VALVE ASSEMBLY AND OIL TRANSFER

TUBE – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the propeller feathering valve assembly and oil transfer tube.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-07-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Propeller Feathering Valve Assembly (Subtask 72-10-07-200-004-A01)
(1) Inspect valve body for damage. Make sure that propeller feathering valve assembly (10, Figure
8001) piston does not bind or stick.
(2) Inspect valve body for leaks.
(3) Dimensionally inspect extended position.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Extend propeller feathering valve spring seat to its maximum travel by pulling on connector
in direction of arrow using 30 to 50 pounds (13.6 to 22.7 kg) of force.
(b) With spring seat restrained in its maximum travel, measure the distance between flange
of spring seat and flange of propeller feathering valve retainer. Refer to Figure 8002.
Measurement should be within 0.40 inch (10.2 mm) maximum.
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Propeller Feathering Valve Assembly and Oil Transfer Tube Inspection
(GRAPHIC 72-10-07-99B-001-A01)
5. BOLT 20. PACKING

ASSEMBLY
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Propeller Feathering Valve Extended Position Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-10-07-99B-002-A01)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.040 (1.02) MAXIMUM
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
SHAFT OIL SEALS – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the shaft oil seals.
PN 285133-2-1 seal puller (used to remove seal CAGE: 06848

from oil pressure pump)
PN 285156-1-1 lip type seal mechanical puller CAGE: 06848

assembly (used to remove seal from
accessory housing or from
tachometer drive gear shaft port)
PN 831041-1 seal installer/remover (used to press CAGE: 06848

starter-generator drive shaft seal in
seal carrier)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-08-020-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Remove Shaft Oil Seals (Subtask 72-10-08-020-004-A01)
(1) Remove bolts (5, Figure 3001), washers (10), seal carrier (15), and accessory shaft seal (20).
(3) (Post SB TPE331-72-2005) Remove nonmetallic washer (27).
(4) Remove bolts (30), washers (35), seal carrier (40), and starter-generator drive shaft seal (45).
(6) Remove spring tension washer (55) and washer (60). Record thickness of washers.
NOTE: Record thickness of washers removed as an aid at installation.
(7) (Post SB TPE331-72-2004) Remove nonmetallic washer (62).

(8) Remove starter-generator shaft seal (45) from seal carrier (40) using PN 831041-1, seal
installer/remover.
(9) Remove tachometer-generator drive shaft seal (70) using PN 285156-1-1, lip type seal mechanical
puller assembly.
(10) Remove oil pressure pump seal (80) using PN 285133-2-1, seal puller.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Shaft Oil Seals Removal (GRAPHIC 72-10-08-99B-001-A01)
5. BOLT 45. STARTER-GENERATOR DRIVE SHAFT

SEAL
10. WASHER 50. PACKING
15. SEAL CARRIER 55. SPRING TENSION WASHER
20. (ACCESSORY SHAFT) SEAL 60. WASHER
27. NONMETALLIC WASHER 70. TACHOMETER-GENERATOR DRIVE
SHAFT SEAL
30. BOLT 75. RING
35. WASHER 80. OIL PRESSURE PUMP SEAL
40. SEAL CARRIER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
SHAFT OIL SEALS – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the shaft oil seals.
PN 285156-1-1 lip type seal mechanical puller CAGE: 06848

assembly (used to remove seal from
accessory housing or from
tachometer drive gear shaft port)
PN 296384-2 seal pilot (used to guide and protect CAGE: 06848

starter-generator drive shaft seal
during installation of seal carrier)


seal during installation)

PN 296385-1 seal pressing driver (used to install CAGE: 06848

accessory shaft seal in carrier)
PN 296387-1 seal installer (used to install seal CAGE: 06848

into oil pressure pump)
PN 296391-1 seal installer (used to install seal CAGE: 06848

into tachometer drive gear shaft
port)
PN 831041-1 seal installer/remover (used to press CAGE: 06848

starter-generator drive shaft seal in
seal carrier)
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
Aeroshell No. 7 grease Shell Oil Co., Aviation Sales Div.,


compound
Loctite 567 liquid thread sealant (white) CAGE: 05972
PL32/H Hylomar jointing compound Marston Bentley Ltd., 9 Naylor St.,

Liverpool L36DS United Kingdom
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-08-420-802-A01)
B. Install Shaft Oil Seals (Subtask 72-10-08-420-004-A01)
NOTE: All new packings must be coated with clean, approved engine oil, Santovac OS-124,
lubricant, or Santovac 5, lubricant prior to installation.
NOTE: Apply Liqui-Moly brand NV thread compound, anti-seize lubricant to threads of bolts, studs,
screws, and nuts unless otherwise specified.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(1) Press new accessory shaft seal (20, Figure 4001) in seal carrier (15) using PN 296385-1, seal
pressing driver.
NOTE: Carrier may be heated to a maximum temperature of 250°F (121°C) to ease installation
of seal into carrier.
NOTE: (Pre SB TPE331-72-0936) Make sure that seal is installed in seal carrier with part
number marking facing towards the outside (away from bearing) of gearbox.
NOTE: (Post SB TPE331-72-0936) Make sure that seal is installed in seal carrier with “Airside”
marking facing towards the outside (away from bearing) of gearbox.
(2) Install new packing (25) on seal carrier (15).

(3) (Post SB TPE331-72-2005) Install nonmetallic washer (27).
(4) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0936) Lightly coat accessory shaft seal lip with Aeroshell No. 7, grease,
then install seal using PN 296384-3, seal pilot. Refer to Figure 4002, Detail A.
(5) (Post SB TPE331-72-0936) Apply a thin coat of clean, approved engine oil to accessory shaft
seal lips, then install seal using PN 296384-3, seal pilot. Refer to Figure 4002, Detail A.
(6) Coat bolt (5, Figure 4001) threads with Loctite 567, liquid thread sealant (white). Secure seal
carrier (15). Torque bolts to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm).
(7) Install starter-generator drive shaft seal as follows:
(a) Install new starter-generator drive shaft seal (45, Figure 4001) in seal carrier (40) using
PN 831041-1, seal installer/remover.
(b) Measure Dimension A and Dimension B. Refer to Figure 4003.
(c) Subtract Dimension B from Dimension A and subtract 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) from result to
obtain required thickness of washers (60, Figure 4001) required to maintain 0.050- to
0.070-inch (1.27- to 1.78 mm) gap for spring tension washer (55).
NOTE: Use same thickness of washers noted at disassembly if old carrier is reinstalled.
(d) (Post SB TPE331-72-2004) Install nonmetallic washer (62).

(e) Install washers (60) determined above. Install spring tension washer (55).
(f) Install new packing (50) on seal carrier (40).
(g) Coat starter-generator drive shaft seal (45) lip and shaft mating surface with clean, approved
engine oil.
NOTE: Starter-generator drive shaft seal and shaft mating surface must be coated with
clean, approved engine oil.
(h) Install seal carrier (40) using PN 296384-8, seal pilot.

(i) Coat bolt (30) threads with Loctite 567, liquid thread sealant (white). Secure seal carrier
(40) with bolts. Torque bolts to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm).
(8) Install tachometer-generator drive shaft seal as follows:
(a) Install ring (75).
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(b) Install new tachometer-generator drive shaft seal (70) using PN 296384-2, seal pilot and
PN 296391-1, seal installer or PN 285156-1-1, lip type seal mechanical puller assembly.
NOTE: Seal lip points forward.
(9) Install oil pressure pump seal as follows:

(a) Coat new oil pressure pump seal (80, Figure 4001) outer surface and oil pressure pump
mating surface with PL32/H, Hylomar jointing compound.
(b) Coat oil pressure pump seal (80) lip and shaft mating surface with Aeroshell No. 7, grease.
NOTE: Oil pressure pump seal lip and shaft mating surface must be coated with
Aeroshell No. 7, grease.
(c) Install oil pressure pump seal (80) using PN 296387-1, seal installer and PN 296384-4,
seal pilot.
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Shaft Oil Seals Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-08-99B-001-A01)

SEAL
SHAFT SEAL
30. BOLT 75. RING
40. SEAL CARRIER
UP495246
ALL Page 4005
72-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Shaft Seal Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-08-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4006
72-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Starter Shaft Seal Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-08-99B-003-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4007
72-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4008
72-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
SHAFT OIL SEALS – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the shaft oil seals.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-08-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean seal carriers (15, 40, Figure 6001). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning
Method 5 or 6.
(3) Clean spring tension washer (55). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning
Method 1 or 2.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(4) Clean retaining ring (75). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method 1 or
2.
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Shaft Oil Seals Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-10-08-99B-001-A01)

SEAL
SHAFT SEAL
30. BOLT 75. RING
40. SEAL CARRIER
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
SHAFT OIL SEALS – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the shaft oil seals.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-08-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Shaft Oil Seals (Subtask 72-10-08-200-004-A01)
(1) Inspect accessory shaft seal carrier (15, Figure 8001) for severe scoring, grooving, and damage
in seal bore.
(2) Inspect starter shaft seal carrier (40) for severe scoring, grooving, and damage in seal bore.
(3) Inspect for oil leakage with parts installed. Refer to FAULT ISOLATION (PGBLK 72-00-00-1000),
for leakage limits.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Shaft Oil Seals Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-08-99B-001-A01)

SEAL
SHAFT SEAL
30. BOLT 75. RING
40. SEAL CARRIER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the nose cone assembly.
PN 284172-1-1 shaft holder assembly (used to hold CAGE: 06848

propeller shaft from turning when
loosening or torquing retaining nut
and to support shaft when removing
bearing)
PN 284197-1-1 bearing retainer (used to bolt on CAGE: 06848

rear of accessory drive housing to
retain propeller shaft roller bearings
when propeller shaft is removed)
PN 284483-1-1 bearing pressing plate (used to CAGE: 06848

remove bearing races from propeller
shaft)
PN 291898-1 torque wrench adapter (used to CAGE: 06848

loosen bearing retaining nut on end
of propeller shaft)


APPLICABLE.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-09-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Nose Cone Assembly (Subtask 72-10-09-020-004-A01)
CAUTION: IF ENGINE IS IN HORIZONTAL POSITION DURING REMOVAL OF OUTPUT GEARBOX

HOUSING ASSEMBLY, USE CARE TO PREVENT MATCHED PLANET GEAR AND
BEARING SET ASSEMBLY FROM DROPPING OUT OF ENGINE.
(1) Remove beta tube assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-01-3000).
(2) Remove PPC. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-02-3000).
(3) Remove auto-ignition switch. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 74-30-01-3000).
(4) Remove torque load assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-05-3000).
(5) Remove NTS housing assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-06-3000).
(6) Remove nose cone and annular ball bearing.
NOTE: To remove nose cone to facilitate other maintenance, accomplish this procedure
only. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-10-3000), for further engine disassembly.
(a) Remove retainer ring (5, Figure 3001), shims (10), spring retainer (40), washer set (45),
bearing retainer (50), and bearing (outer race) (55).
(b) Remove nuts (70), washers (65, 75, 80), and bolt (60) securing nose cone assembly, then
carefully separate nose cone assembly from input housing assembly.
(c) Remove gasket (85) and shaft coupling (90).
(d) Install PN 284197-1-1, bearing retainer at rear of assembled input housing assembly to
retain rollers in bearing outer race.
(e) Install PN 284172-1-1, shaft holder assembly on forward end of propeller shaft to keep
shaft from rotating.
(f) Remove nut (95) from propeller shaft using PN 291898-1, torque wrench adapter, then
remove insert (100).
CAUTION: BEARING INNER AND OUTER RACES ARE MATCHED PARTS. WHEN EITHER
RACE MUST BE REPLACED, REPLACE COMPLETE BEARING AS A UNIT.
(g) Install PN 284483-1-1, bearing pressing plate around propeller shaft behind bearing inner
race. Press spacer (110) and bearing inner races (105, 115) off shaft.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Nose Cone Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 72-10-09-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. RETAINER RING 80. WASHER

10. SHIM 85. GASKET
40. SPRING RETAINER 90. SHAFT COUPLING
45. WASHER SET 95. NUT
50. BEARING RETAINER 100. INSERT
55. BEARING (OUTER RACE) 105. BALL BEARING (INNER RACE)
60. BOLT 110. SPACER
65. WASHER 115. ROLLER BEARING (INNER RACE)
70. NUT 120. NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY
75. WASHER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the nose cone assembly.

PN 284308-1-1 shaft installing sleeve (used to pilot CAGE: 06848

propeller shaft through roller bearing
and to protect ball bearing inner
race)
PN 294913-2 propeller shaft preload gage (used CAGE: 06848

to verify propeller shaft preload
shimming)


APPLICABLE.

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-09-420-802-A01)
B. Install Nose Cone Assembly (Subtask 72-10-09-420-004-A01)

NOTE: Make sure that engine is in horizontal position when installing nose cone.
(1) Place PN 284308-1-1, shaft installing sleeve over aft end of propeller shaft. Carefully remove
nuts securing PN 284197-1-1, bearing retainer on rear of accessory drive gearbox housing but,
do not remove bearing retainer.
FOAMING AND OIL JET PLUGGING. USE NO MORE THAN REQUIRED. ALLOW
NO GREASE TO ENTER ENGINE CAVITY.
(2) Apply a very thin coat of DC-111, silicone grease to gasket (85, Figure 4001) and install on
diaphragm assembly.
(3) Install shaft coupling (90) in planet carrier and gear assembly, make sure that external splines
are engaged.
(4) Install nose cone assembly (120) on diaphragm assembly. As propeller shaft slides through
bearing the PN 284197-1-1, bearing retainer will be pushed out.
(5) Remove retainer. Secure nose cone assembly (120) with nuts (70), washers (65, 75, 80), and
bolt (60). Do not tighten nuts (70) or bolt (60) at this time.
NOTE: Install large diameter washers at bushing locations.
NOTE: When installing nose cone, all installation nuts on the diaphragm assembly should
be loosened then retightened. Torque nuts 180 degrees opposite each other in 20
in-lb (2.3 Nm) increments until required value is reached.
NOTE: Make sure that nose cone gasket does not extend beyond nose cone housing flange.
(6) Remove PN 284308-1-1, shaft installing sleeve.

CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT MATCHED WASHER SET COMPONENTS ARE PROPERLY
ORIENTATED WITH EACH OTHER TO PROVIDE A SPRING WASHER STACK FOR
PROPER TENSION AND CLEARANCES. REFER TO FIGURE 4002.
(7) Install ball bearing outer race (55, Figure 4001), includes balls and separator, in bearing retainer
(50). Make sure that outer race surface marked “THRUST” is toward rear of engine.
NOTE: Aft side of ball bearing outer race is marked “THRUST”.
(8) Place assembled bearing outer race and retainer on propeller shaft.
(9) Place washer set (45) in spring retainer (40).
(10) Install spring retainer (40) on propeller shaft.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(11) Loosen nuts (70) and bolt (60) retaining nose cone and raise nose cone slightly. Install 0.090-inch
(2.29 mm) trial shims and secure with ring. Torque nuts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm) and bolt to 100 in-lb
(11.3 Nm).
NOTE: All installation nuts on the diaphragm assembly should be loosened then retightened.
Torque nuts 180 degrees opposite each other in 20 in-lb (2.3 Nm) increments until
required torque is reached.
(12) Preload propeller shaft as follows:

(a) Rotate engine to horizontal position and install PN 294913-2, propeller shaft preload gage
on studs of nose cone using free-running nuts. Refer to Figure 4003. Zero dial indicator
with probe against aft side of prop shaft flange. Position force gage and zero applied load.
(b) Gradually increase load on propeller shaft by turning knob CW. Record applied force at
point where dial indicator indicates 0.001 movement. Preload must be 75 to 90 pounds
(34.0 to 40.8 kg) with 0.001 reading on dial indicator.
NOTE: Do not exceed 100 pounds (45.4 kg) load force on prop shaft.
(c) If indicated preload is not within limits, remove applied force and add or remove shims (10,
Figure 4001) to obtain proper preload (each 0.001 inch (0.03 mm) of shims
increases/decreases preload approximately 4 pounds (1.8 kg)).
(d) Remove PN 294913-2, propeller shaft preload gage.
(13) Install NTS housing assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-06-4000).
(14) Install torque load assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-05-4000).
(15) Install auto-ignition switch. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 74-30-01-4000).
(16) Install PPC assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-02-4000).
(17) Install beta tube assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-01-4000).
CAUTION: COMPONENTS OF THE NTS SYSTEM THAT ARE REMOVED AND INSTALLED IN
ORDER TO GAIN ACCESS TO THE NOSE CONE WILL REQUIRE CORRESPONDING
NTS CHECKS. REFER TO TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
(18) Perform NTS trip system check. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures.
(19) Perform NTS system check by flight check. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures.
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Nose Cone Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-09-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

10. SHIM 85. GASKET
75. WASHER
UP495246
ALL Page 4005
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Matched Washer Set Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-09-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4006
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Propeller (Output) Shaft Preload Gage Installation (GRAPHIC
72-10-09-99B-003-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4007
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY – DISASSEMBLY
(1) Use these procedures to disassemble the nose cone assembly.
arbor press commercially available

bearing)
PN 284677-2-1 torque wrench adapter (used to CAGE: 06848

loosen propeller shaft locknut on
propeller shaft)
PN 285196-2-1 bearing removing holder (used to CAGE: 06848

remove propeller shaft from
bearing)
PN 285968-2-1 seal removal driver and holder CAGE: 06848

(used to press seal assembly from
propeller shaft seal retainer)
PN 285969-2-1 nose cone bolt holder (used to hold CAGE: 06848

propeller shaft seal retainer bolts
during disassembly and assembly
of retaining nuts)
PN 294965-1 bearing removal holder and driver CAGE: 06848

(used to remove propeller shaft
bearing)
UP495246
ALL Page 5001
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 296263-1 spanner wrench (used to turn CAGE: 06848

propeller shaft seal retainer to
misalign holes in retainer with holes
in nose cone housing so that
retainer can be removed by using
a drift from inside housing)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-09-030-802-A01)
B. Disassemble Nose Cone Assembly (Subtask 72-10-09-030-004-A01)
(1) Remove shaft rigid coupling (20, Figure 5001) and oil jet assembly (45).
(a) Drill out pin (10) from nut (15) and shaft rigid coupling (20).
(b) Remove nut (15) using PN 284677-2-1, torque wrench adapter.
(c) Remove shaft rigid coupling (20) and thrust spacer (25).
(d) Remove bolt (30), washer (32), and oil jet assembly (45) from output gearbox housing.
(e) Remove and discard packing (50).
(f) Remove assembled output gearbox housing from PN 284172-1-1, shaft holder assembly.
(2) Remove propeller shaft.
(a) Place nose cone asssembly on PN 285969-2-1, nose cone bolt holder.
(b) Remove nuts (5, Figure 5002).
(c) Remove assembled output gearbox housing assembly from PN 285969-2-1, nose cone
bolt holder and remove bolts (10) and bearing (35).
(d) Remove and discard packing (15).
UP495246
ALL Page 5002
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(e) Place output gearbox housing assembly in PN 284172-1-1, shaft holder assembly. Using
PN 296263-1, spanner wrench, turn retainer (55) until holes in retainer are misaligned with
holes in output gearbox housing assembly (95).
(f) Using a drift tool, tap retainer (55) until loose. Remove output gearbox housing assembly
from PN 284172-1-1, shaft holder assembly.
(g) Place forward end of shaft in cylinder portion of PN 285196-2-1, bearing removing holder
and position split ring portion of holder between seal stator (45) and seal rotor (50) portions
of seal assembly.
CAUTION: PROTECT END OF PROPELLER SHAFT ASSEMBLY WHEN PERFORMING
THE FOLLOWING STEP.
(h) Press propeller shaft (30) from output gearbox housing assembly using arbor press.
NOTE: Do not remove pin from propeller shaft unless damage is indicated by inspection.
NOTE: Do not remove inserts from housing assembly unless damage is indicated by
inspection.
(i) Remove propeller shaft seal retainer (55) and seal rotor (50) from propeller shaft.
(j) Remove and discard packing (60).
(k) Remove bearing from housing using PN 294965-1, bearing removal holder and driver.
(l) Press seal stator (50) out of propeller shaft seal retainer (55) using a driver and PN
285968-2-1, seal removal driver and holder.
UP495246
ALL Page 5003
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Shaft Coupling and Oil Jet Disassembly (GRAPHIC 72-10-09-99B-001-A01)
10. PIN 32. WASHER

15. NUT 40. SCREEN
20. SHAFT RIGID COUPLING 45. NOZZLE (OIL JET ASSEMBLY)
25. THRUST SPACER 50. PACKING
30. BOLT
UP495246
ALL Page 5004
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Output Gearbox Housing and Propeller Shaft Disassembly (GRAPHIC
72-10-09-99B-002-A01)
5. NUT 55. PROPELLER SHAFT SEAL RETAINER

15. PACKING 70. LABEL
25. PIN 75. SCREW
30. PROPELLER SHAFT 80. WASHER
35. BEARING 85. IDENTIFICATION PLATE
45. SEAL STATOR 95. OUTPUT GEARBOX HOUSING
ASSEMBLY
50. SEAL ROTOR
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 5005
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the nose cone assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-09-100-802-A01)
(1) Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), for cleaning instructions and for description of
cleaning methods specified in Table 6003.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Cleaning Methods
Figure No. Item No. Nomenclature 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Figure 5 Ring X X
6001
Figure 40 Spring retainer X X
6001
Figure 45 Washer set X X
6001
Figure 50 Bearing retainer X
6001
Figure 55
1 Bearing
6001
Figure 95 Nut (round) X X
6001
Figure 105
1 Bearing
6001
Figure 110 Spacer X X
6001
Figure 115
1 Bearing
6001
Figure 5 Pin X
6002
Figure 10 Nut X X
6002
Figure 15 Coupling X
6002
Figure 20 Spacer X
6002
Figure 50 Screen X X
6002
Figure 55 Oil nozzle (jet) X X
6002
Figure 30 Propeller shaft X
6003
Figure 35
1 Bearing
6003
Figure 45 Seal stator X
6003
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 6003. Cleaning Methods (Cont)
Cleaning Methods
Figure No. Item No. Nomenclature 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Figure 50 Seal rotor X
6003
Figure 55 Retainer X
6003
Figure 95 Output gearbox X X
6003 housing
NOTES:
1. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), for special cleaning instructions.
UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Nose Cone Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-10-09-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 6004
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

10. SHIM 85. GASKET
75. WASHER
UP495246
ALL Page 6005
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Shaft Coupling and Oil Jet Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-10-09-99B-002-A01)
10. PIN 32. WASHER

15. NUT 40. SCREEN
30. BOLT
UP495246
ALL Page 6006
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Output Gearbox Housing and Propeller Shaft Cleaning (GRAPHIC
72-10-09-99B-003-A01)

25. PIN 75. SCREW
ASSEMBLY
50. SEAL ROTOR
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6007
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the nose cone assembly.


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-09-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Nose Cone (Subtask 72-10-09-200-004-A01)

(1) Inspect bearings. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Visually inspect gear teeth and/or splines for pitting, chipping, and excessive wear. Visual defects
are acceptable as long as defects cannot be felt using a ball tip stylus tool - 0.015 inch radius,
0.031 inch diameter (0.38 mm radius, 0.79 mm diameter).
(3) Inspect entire nose cone for cracks. No cracks allowed.
(4) Inspect nose cone for loose and damaged inserts. Refer to Figure 8001. Replace inserts which
fail to meet inspection requirements. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(5) Visually inspect nose cone alignment holes elongation. Refer to Figure 8001.
(6) If elongation is indicated, measure diameter of alignment hole. If diameter of any alignment hole
exceeds 0.4418 inch (11.222 mm), return nose cone for evaluation and repair to Honeywell
International Inc., Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440.
(8) Inspect nose cone for corrosion as follows:
(a) Inspect nose cone assembly (Surface B, Figure 8001) for evidence of corrosion. Particular
attention must be given to areas where dissimilar metals contact the magnesium surface.
(b) Inspect ribs for evidence of corrosion. Following removal of corrosion from rib area, minimum
thickness of rib must not be less than Dimension E. Refer to Figure 8001.
(c) Treat corrosion which does not exceed inspection limits. Refer to Figure 8001. Refer to
(d) Inspect areas adjacent to studs and inserts for corrosion. Maximum corrosion depth must
not exceed 0.020 inch (0.51 mm).
(e) If specified limits are exceeded, return output gearbox housing to manufacturer for further
evaluation. Refer to Figure 8001
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Output Gearbox Housing Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-09-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Depth Area
Reference Inches (mm) in² (mm²) Places
SURFACE A EXCEPT 0.060 (1.52) 1/2 (322.6) MAXIMUM 6 MAXIMUM
AREA D
SURFACE B 0.010 (0.25) 6 (3,871) TOTAL AREA -
SURFACE C 0.170 (4.32) 1/2 (322.6) TOTAL AREA -
SURFACE S 0.070 (1.78) 1/2 (322.6) TOTAL AREA 4 MAXIMUM
DIM. E 0.130 INCH (3.30 MM) MINIMUM RIB THICKNESS

DIM. F 0.220 INCH (5.59 MM) MINIMUM FLANGE THICKNESS
AREA D CORROSION 0.08 (2.0) 0.07 (1.8) 0.06 (1.5) 0.05 (1.3) 0.04 (1.0) 0.02 (0.5)
DEPTH (INCHES (MM))
AREA D TOTAL AREA 0.5 (323) 0.6 (387) 0.7 (452) 0.8 (516) 1.0 (645) 2.0 (1,290)
(SQUARE-INCHES (MM²))
C. Inspect Air-Oil Seal Assembly (Subtask 72-10-09-200-005-A01)
CAUTION: HANDLING OF AIR-OIL SEALS (SEAL AND ROTOR) MUST BE MINIMIZED. PERSONNEL
MUST WEAR EITHER SYNTHETIC RUBBER GLOVES OR NYLON MESH GLOVES WITH
POLYETHYLENE PALMS AND FINGERS. IF NONE OF THE ABOVE ARE AVAILABLE,
CLEAN COTTON GLOVES MUST BE WORN. AIR-OIL SEAL (SEAL AND ROTOR) MUST
BE INSTALLED DRY. DO NOT LUBRICATE.
(1) Inspect seal stator as follows:
(a) Visually inspect metal housing for cracks and distortion. No cracks or distortion allowed.
(b) Visually inspect carbon seal for cracks. No cracks allowed. Refer to Figure 8003
(c) Visually inspect carbon sealing surface for discontinuous contact (skipping). No skipping
allowed.
(d) Visually inspect carbon sealing surface for pitting. No pitting allowed.
(e) Press carbon seal in seal housing and check axial float. No binding allowed.
(f) Visually inspect carbon sealing surface for wear, scratches and grooves. No visual defects
that can be felt with a ball tip stylus tool - 0.015 inch radius, 0.031 inch diameter (0.38 mm
radius, 0.79 mm diameter) are allowed.
(g) Visually inspect carbon seal for coking.
1 No coking on carbon sealing surface allowed.
2 No coke buildup on carbon seal inner diameter allowed.
3 Coke buildup on carbon seal outer diameter is allowed if it does not extend beyond
outer diameter (step) of carbon seal.
UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(h) Measure carbon sealing surface height. Minimum allowed seal carbon sealing surface
height is 0.150 inch (3.81 mm). Refer to Figure 8003.
(i) Using 10X magnification, inspect sealing surface and inner and outer diameters of sealing
surface for chipping. Minor chipping of inner and outer diameters is allowed if the minimum
seal surface width is 70 percent or greater of original surface, measured radially.
(j) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
(2) Inspect seal rotor as follows:
(a) Visually inspect seal rotor sealing surface for wear, scratches and grooves. No visual
defects that can be felt with a ball tip stylus tool - 0.015 inch radius, 0.031 inch diameter
(0.38 mm radius, 0.79 mm diameter) are allowed.
(b) Visually inspect rotor sealing surface for chipping. No chipping allowed.
(c) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
UP495246
ALL Page 8005
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Output Gearbox Housing and Propeller Shaft Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-10-09-99B-002-A01)

25. PIN 75. SCREW
ASSEMBLY
50. SEAL ROTOR
UP495246
ALL Page 8006
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Carbon Seal Wear Limits (GRAPHIC 72-10-09-99B-003-A01)
Serviceable Limits
DIM. A 0.150 (3.81) MINIMUM
D. Inspect Oil Jet Assemblies (Subtask 72-10-09-200-006-A01)
(1) Perform FPI on oil jet assembly (45, Figure 8004). Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
(2) Inspect for contamination or distortion that may affect oil flow or spray pattern.
UP495246
ALL Page 8007
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Shaft Coupling and Oil Jet Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-09-99B-004-A01)
10. PIN 32. WASHER

15. NUT 40. SCREEN
30. BOLT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8008
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the nose cone assembly.



APPLICABLE.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-09-300-802-A01)
B. Repair Corrosion Damaged Areas on Nose Cone (Subtask 72-10-09-300-004-A01)
(1) Repair corrosion damaged areas on nose cone. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
C. Replace Loose or Damaged Thread Inserts (Subtask 72-10-09-300-005-A01)
(1) Use long-nosed pliers to remove loose or damaged inserts.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(2) Clean hole from which insert was removed using MIL-PRF-680, solvent and remove corrosion,
if present.
(3) Apply a thin, even coat of primer to threaded area in which new insert is to be installed. Refer
to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
(4) Install new insert flush with surface of housing while primer is still wet. Remove tang, if applicable,
using long-nosed pliers or blunt tool and hammer.
NOTE: Use a modified screwdriver or rod with the correct diameter to fit ID of insert and
slotted to fit over tang of insert to install new insert.
(5) Touch-up lead thread on housing, seal surface scratches, and area adjacent to the insert hole.
Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
NOSE CONE ASSEMBLY – ASSEMBLY
(1) Use these procedures to assemble the nose cone assembly.

bearing)
PN 284191-2-1 bearing driver (used to press CAGE: 06848

bearing on propeller shaft)
PN 284477-1-1 bearing and bushing driver (used to CAGE: 06848

install bearing race on propeller
shaft)
PN 284677-2-1 torque wrench adapter (used to CAGE: 06848

loosen propeller shaft locknut on
propeller shaft)
PN 285748-1-1 stake pin (used to stake pin in nut CAGE: 06848

and coupling)
PN 285969-2-1 nose cone bolt holder (used to hold CAGE: 06848

propeller shaft seal retainer bolts
during disassembly and assembly
of retaining nuts)
PN 285972-2-1 shaft and gear gage (used as a CAGE: 06848

point of measurement to obtain
bottomed-out dimension during
assembly of output gearbox
housing)
UP495246
ALL Page 10001
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 285973-2-1 fixed length gage (used to measure CAGE: 06848

location of shoulder on propeller
shaft to determine proper
installation)
PN 287463-20-1 fixed depth gage (used to check CAGE: 06848

depth of hole drilled between
propeller shaft retaining nut and
coupling)
PN 287463-21-1 fixed depth gage (used to check CAGE: 06848

depth of hole drilled between
propeller shaft retaining nut and
coupling)

loosen bearing retaining nut on end
of propeller shaft)
PN 293689-2 seal holder and driver (used to CAGE: 06848

install seal)
PN 294676-1 drilling holder (used to drill hole for CAGE: 06848

pin in nut and coupling)
PN 294681-1 staking punch adapter (used to CAGE: 06848

stake nut over top of pin)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

UP495246
ALL Page 10002
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

compound
MIL-PRF-23827 grease commercially available
for silver pencil)
pencil)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-09-430-802-A01)
B. Assemble Nose Cone Assembly (Subtask 72-10-09-430-004-A01)

NOTE: Apply Liqui-Moly brand NV thread compound, anti-seize lubricant to threads of bolts, studs,
screws or nuts unless otherwise specified.
(1) Install propeller shaft seal and bearing in output gearbox housing assembly.
CAUTION: HANDLING OF AIR-OIL SEALS (SEAL AND ROTOR) MUST BE MINIMIZED.
PERSONNEL MUST WEAR EITHER SYNTHETIC RUBBER GLOVES OR
NYLON MESH GLOVES WITH POLYETHYLENE PALMS AND FINGERS. IF
NONE OF THE ABOVE ARE AVAILABLE, CLEAN COTTON GLOVES MUST
BE WORN. AIR-OIL SEAL (SEAL AND ROTOR) MUST BE INSTALLED DRY;
DO NOT LUBRICATE.
(a) Assemble propeller shaft seal and propeller shaft seal retainer.
1 Heat propeller shaft seal retainer (55, Figure 10001) in holder, component of PN
293689-2, seal holder and driver, in an oven at 500°F (260°C) for 15 minutes.
UP495246
ALL Page 10003
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

2 While hot, place propeller shaft seal retainer (55) and holder on arbor press.
3 Place seal stator (45, Figure 10002), with seal surface up, on propeller shaft seal
retainer (55).
NOTE: Make sure that seal stator and seal rotor are dry; do not lubricate prior to
installation.
4 Press seal stator (45) in propeller shaft seal retainer (55) using PN 293689-2, seal
holder and driver.
5 Install packing (60, Figure 10001) on propeller shaft seal retainer (55).
6 Place rotor seal (50) flat surface against seal stator (45) seal surface in preparation
for installation.
(b) Install propeller shaft seal in output gearbox housing assembly. Refer to Figure 10003.
1 Heat output gearbox housing assembly (95, Figure 10001) in an oven at 187°F (86°C)
for approximately 10 minutes.
2 Apply light film of MIL-PRF-23827, grease to outer diameter of propeller shaft seal
retainer (55).
3 Install packings (15) on bolts (10).
4 Install bolts (10) in propeller shaft seal retainer (55).
5 Place assembled bolts and retainer on PN 285969-2-1, nose cone bolt holder.
6 While hot, place output gearbox housing assembly (95) on propeller shaft seal retainer
(55). Press firmly in place until retainer bottoms in housing.
CAUTION: IF BEARING MANUFACTURER'S MARKINGS APPEAR ON OUTER FLAT SIDE
OF INNER RACE HALVES, ALIGN MANUFACTURER'S MARKS AND MAKE
TWO SMALL INDEX MARKS, USING VERITHIN NO. 753, SILVER PENCIL,
VIOLET, NO. 127 1/2, INDUSTRIAL MARKING INK, OR YELLOW NO. 170T,
CHINA MARKER ON INNER DIAMETER OF INNER RACE HALVES TO AID IN
MAINTAINING ALIGNMENT DURING INSTALLATION OF BEARING ASSEMBLY.
(c) Install bearing in output gearbox housing assembly.

NOTE: Bearing has a two-piece inner race. Inner race halves must be index marked
for alignment by manufacturer. Location and type of markings may vary with
different manufacturers. Aft side of inner race is marked “Thrust”.
UP495246
ALL Page 10004
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

CAUTION: USE CAUTION TO PREVENT INNER RACE HALVES FROM FALLING

OUT.
1 While output gearbox housing assembly is hot, place bearing (35, Figure 10001),
with large chamfer aft, in output gearbox housing assembly (95) over bolts (10).
2 Make sure that bearing inner race surface marked “Thrust” is toward aft side of output
gearbox housing assembly. Refer to Figure 10003.
3 Press bearing (35, Figure 10001) in output gearbox housing assembly (95). Press
firmly in place until bearing bottoms in housing.
CAUTION: BOLT HEADS MUST BE HELD WHILE TIGHTENING NUTS TO PREVENT
DAMAGE TO OUTPUT GEARBOX HOUSING (USE PN 285969-2-1, NOSE
CONE BOLT HOLDER).
4 Secure bearing (35) with nuts (5). Torque nuts to 100 in-lb (11.3 Nm).
(2) Install oil jet assembly on output gearbox housing.
(a) Install new packing (50, Figure 10004) on oil jet assembly (45). Make sure that screen
element is in place.
(b) Install oil jet assembly (45) on output gearbox housing assembly.
(c) Secure oil jet assembly (55) with bolt (30) and washer (32). Torque bolt to 50 in-lb (5.6
Nm).
(d) Pump clean, approved engine oil in ports to check alignment of oil jet assembly. Make sure
that oil spray pattern hits bearing between bearing races. Refer to Figure 10005.
(3) Install propeller shaft in output gearbox housing assembly.
(a) Place output gearbox housing assembly (95, Figure 10001) on PN 285972-2-1, shaft and
gear gage. Refer to Figure 10006. Use depth micrometer to measure from Point A (top of
bearing) to Point B (top of gage) and record result as Dimension C for later use.
(b) Install PN 285973-2-1, fixed length gage over propeller shaft. Refer to Figure 10007. Place
on work bench in upright position. Use depth micrometer to measure from Point D (top of
gage) to Point E (top of propeller shaft). Record result as Dimension F for later use.
(c) Install and secure propeller shaft on PN 284172-1-1, shaft holder assembly.
UP495246
ALL Page 10005
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(d) Make sure that bearing inner race halves are properly aligned.
NOTE: Apply light film of clean, approved Type I or Type II engine oil to propeller shaft
in area where bearing will be placed.
NOTE: If bearing manufacturer's index markings are located on outer flat sides of inner
race halves and silver pencil index marks were made while installing bearing,
remove silver pencil index marks using acetone cleaner in small amounts only.
NOTE: If bearing manufacturer's index markings are located on inner diameter of inner
race halves, align marks and make a corresponding mark on outer flat side of
upper inner race half using Verithin No. 753, silver pencil, Violet, No. 127 1/2,
industrial marking ink, or Yellow No. 170T, China marker.
(e) Place output gearbox housing and bearing over propeller shaft (30, Figure 10001) so index
mark on bearing is aligned with insert slot on propeller shaft. Using PN 284191-2-1, bearing
driver and an arbor press, press output gearbox housing down on propeller shaft until
metal-to-metal contact is made.
(f) Remove any remaining silver pencil index marks using acetone cleaner.
(g) Place PN 285973-2-1, fixed length gage over propeller shaft. Refer to Figure 10008. Use
a depth micrometer and measure from Point G (top of gage) to Point H (top of propeller
shaft). Record result as Dimension J.
(h) To make sure that propeller shaft is bottomed, subtract Dimension F from Dimension J.
The remainder must equal Dimension C (J − F = C).
NOTE: Dimension F was recorded earlier.
NOTE: Dimension C was recorded earlier.
(i) If equation result is not equal to Dimension C +0.000/−0.002 inch (+0.00/−0.05 mm),
disassemble and assemble until Dimension C is within limits.
(4) Install shaft rigid coupling on propeller shaft.
(a) Install thrust spacer (25, Figure 10004) and shaft rigid coupling (20) on propeller shaft.
Using PN 284191-2-1, bearing driver, press coupling and spacer against ball bearing.
NOTE: Apply light film of clean, approved Type I or Type II engine oil to propeller shaft
prior to installing couplings.
(b) Apply Liqui-Moly brand NV thread compound, anti-seize lubricant to nut (10) face and
threads. Install nut on propeller shaft. Use PN 284677-2-1, torque wrench adapter with
suitable torque wrench and torque nut to 20,600 in-lb (2,327.5 Nm).
UP495246
ALL Page 10006
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) Using existing hole in nut (10) as a guide, drill a 0.0935- to 0.0940-inch (2.375 to 2.388
mm) diameter hole using PN 294676-1, drilling holder, to the depth shown on Figure 10009.
Check hole depth using PN 287463-20-1, fixed depth gage and PN 287463-21-1, fixed
depth gage. Install pin (5, Figure 10004) to bottom of hole and stake using PN 285748-1-1,
stake pin and PN 294681-1, staking punch adapter.
NOTE: If existing hole in propeller shaft nut is elongated, one additional hole may be
drilled 180 degrees opposite existing hole. Refer to Figure 10010 for dimensional
requirement of hole location.
(5) Install bearing inner races on aft end of propeller shaft.

(a) Press roller bearing inner race (115, Figure 10011) on propeller shaft using PN 284477-1-1,
bearing and bushing driver.
(b) Install spacer (110).
(c) Install ball bearing inner race (105), with bearing ball pocket away from spacer, using PN
284477-1-1, bearing and bushing driver.
(d) Place insert (100) in propeller shaft slot and sand small flat to be smooth with outer diameter
of threads.
(e) Apply Liqui-Moly brand NV thread compound, anti-seize lubricant to nut (95) face and
threads. Install nut on propeller shaft. Use PN 291898-1, torque wrench adapter and suitable
torque wrench and torque nut to 1,800 in-lb (203.4 Nm).
UP495246
ALL Page 10007
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Output Gearbox Housing and Propeller Shaft Assembly (GRAPHIC
72-10-09-99B-001-A01)

25. PIN 75. SCREW
ASSEMBLY
50. SEAL ROTOR
UP495246
ALL Page 10008
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Seal Assembly and Retainer Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-10-09-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 10009
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Propeller Shaft Seal Assembly and Bearing Assembly (GRAPHIC
72-10-09-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 10010
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Shaft Coupling and Oil Jet Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-10-09-99B-004-A01)
10. PIN 32. WASHER

15. NUT 40. SCREEN
30. BOLT
UP495246
ALL Page 10011
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10005. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Jet Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-09-99B-005-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 10012
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10006. (Sheet 1 of 1) Measurement of Output Gearbox Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-10-09-99B-006-A01)
Figure 10007. (Sheet 1 of 1) Measurement of Propeller Shaft Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-10-09-99B-007-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 10013
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10008. (Sheet 1 of 1) Measurement of Installed Propeller Shaft Assembly (GRAPHIC

72-10-09-99B-008-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 10014
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10009. (Sheet 1 of 1) Propeller Shaft Nut and Coupling Drilling and Operation (GRAPHIC
72-10-09-99B-009-A01)
Limits
DIM. A 0.76 TO 0.78 (19.3 TO 19.8)
UP495246
ALL Page 10015
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10010. (Sheet 1 of 1) Propeller Shaft Nut Pin Hole Location (GRAPHIC 72-10-09-99B-010-A01)
Limits
DIM. A 1.650 (41.91)
UP495246
ALL Page 10016
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10011. (Sheet 1 of 1) Nose Cone Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-10-09-99B-011-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 10017
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

10. SHIM 85. GASKET
75. WASHER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 10018
72-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL TRANSFER TUBES – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the oil transfer tubes.
PN 285846-1-1 mechanical puller (used to remove CAGE: 06848

oil transfer tube from accessory
drive housing)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-10-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Oil Transfer Tubes (Subtask 72-10-10-020-004-A01)
(1) Remove nose cone assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-09-3000).

(2) Remove oil transfer tubes (5, 30, Figure 3001).
(3) Remove and discard packings (10, 15, 25, 35).
(4) Remove oil transfer tube (20) using PN 285846-1-1, mechanical puller.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-10 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) Remove and discard packings.
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Transfer Tube Removal (GRAPHIC 72-10-10-99B-001-A01)
5. OIL TRANSFER TUBE 25. PACKING

10. PACKING 30. OIL TRANSFER TUBE
20. OIL TRANSFER TUBE
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-10 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-10-10 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL TRANSFER TUBES – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the oil transfer tubes.



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-10-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-10 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Oil Transfer Tubes (Subtask 72-10-10-420-004-A01)
(1) Install new packings (10, 15, 25, 35, Figure 4001) on oil transfer tubes (5, 20, 30).
(2) Assemble tubes (5, 20). Install through diaphragm assembly in accessory drive gearbox housing.
Make sure that smaller oil transfer tube is installed toward output housing.
(3) Install nose cone assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-09-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-10 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Transfer Tube Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-10-99B-001-A01)

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-10 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL TRANSFER TUBES – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the oil transfer tubes.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-10-100-802-A01)
(1) Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), for general cleaning instructions and for description
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-10-10 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Cleaning Methods
Figure 6001 5, 20, 30 Oil transfer tube X
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-10-10 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Transfer Tube Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-10-10-99B-001-A01)

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-10-10 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL TRANSFER TUBES – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the oil transfer tubes.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-10-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Oil Transfer Tubes (Subtask 72-10-10-200-004-A01)
(1) Inspect oil transfer tubes (5, 20, 30, Figure 8001). Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
70-00-00-8000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-10 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Transfer Tube Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-10-99B-001-A01)

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-10 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the planet carrier and gear assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-12-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly Components (Subtask 72-10-12-020-004-A01)
NOTE: If the diaphragm assembly must be removed form the engine, the planet carrier and gear
assembly and diaphragm assembly can be removed as an assembly. Refer to REMOVAL
(PGBLK 72-10-13-3000). If there is no need to remove the diaphragm assembly, the planet
carrier and gear assembly must be removed as follows:
(1) Remove nose cone. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-09-3000).
(2) Remove oil transfer tubes. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-10-3000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Remove assembled planet carrier and gear assembly.

CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT PACKING (75, FIGURE 3001) IS REMOVED. DO NOT ALLOW
PACKING TO FALL IN GEARBOX.
(4) Remove nut (70) from cable assembly connector (65) plug.
(5) Remove connector plug from diaphragm assembly.
(7) Remove bolt (45) and clamp (50) from cable assembly connector (65).
(8) Remove nuts (10). Carefully remove planet gear stop (15) and assembled ring gear and torque
ring assembly (55) with cable assembly connector (65) from diaphragm assembly.
(9) Remove nuts (20), bolts (30), and retaining plates (25, 35).
(10) Separate ring gear (40) and torque ring assembly (55).
(11) Remove diaphragm assembly oil nozzle assemblies.
(a) Remove bolts (5, 30, 60, 90, 120, Figure 3002) and washers (35, 65, 95, 125) securing oil
jets (20, 50, 80, 110, 140).
(b) Remove oil jets (20, 50, 80, 110, 140).
(c) Remove and discard packings (25, 55, 85, 115, 145).
(d) Remove bearing retainer (150).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 72-10-12-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR 40. INTERNAL PLANETARY GEAR (RING

ASSEMBLY GEAR)
10. NUT 45. BOLT
15. PLANET GEAR STOP 50. CLAMP
20. NUT 55. TORQUE RING ASSEMBLY
25. RETAINING PLATE 65. CONNECTOR
30. BOLT 70. NUT
35. RETAINING PLATE 75. PACKING
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Intermediate Housing and Gear Assembly – Oil Jet Assemblies Removal
(GRAPHIC 72-10-12-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3005
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 85. PACKING

15. STRAINER 90. BOLT
20. NOZZLE (OIL JET) 95. WASHER
25. PACKING 105. STRAINER
30. BOLT 110. NOZZLE (OIL JET)
75. STRAINER 150. BEARING RETAINER
80. NOZZLE (OIL JET)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3006
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the planet carrier and gear assembly.
PN 832752-1 torque ring connector installation CAGE: 06848

tool (used to aid in routing electrical
connector into position on
diaphragm)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
Royco HF-825 assembly fluid CAGE: 07950

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-12-420-802-A01)
B. Install Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly Components (Subtask 72-10-12-420-004-A01)
NOTE: Refer to ASSEMBLY (PGBLK 70-00-00-10000) for recommended torque values. Added
(1) Install oil nozzle assemblies.
(a) Install bearing retainer (150, Figure 4001) on diaphragm assembly.
(b) Install new packings (25, 55, 85, 115, 145) on oil jets (20, 50, 80, 110, 140). Install oil jets
on diaphragm assembly. Secure oil jets with bolts (5, 30, 60, 90, 120) and washers (35,
65, 95, 125). Torque bolts to 50 in-lb (5.6 Nm).
(2) Install planet carrier and gear assembly.
(a) Assemble ring gear and torque ring assembly as follows:
1 Place torque ring assembly (60, Figure 4002) on bench with gear side up and electrical
connector (65) at top.
2 Assemble ring gear (40) on torque ring assembly (60). Align relieved splines for bolts
with three orientation windows on the right side of ring gear.
NOTE: When assembling torque ring assembly and ring gear spline relief for bolts
must be aligned and with three orientation windows to the right.
3 Assemble bolts (30) in retaining plate (35). Install plate with bolts so the retaining
plate beveled edge is toward torque ring assembly radius. Refer to Section A-A,
Figure 4002.
NOTE: Retaining plates are installed with beveled edge facing radius of flange.
4 Install retaining plate (25) on bolts (30) so the beveled edge is toward ring gear radius.
Refer to Section A-A, Figure 4002.
5 Install nuts (20), move retaining plates radially outward and torque bolts (30) to 50
in-lb (5.6 Nm).
6 Check radial and circumferential movement as follows:
a Check ring gear for freedom of movement.
b If ring gear does not move, loosen bolts (30) and move retaining plates (25, 35)
radially outward. Torque bolts to 50 in-lb (5.6 Nm).
c Repeat the ring gear check procedure, as required, to achieve ring gear
movement.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT WHEN INSTALLING PLANET GEAR STOP, THAT CUTOUT
IS LOCATED DIRECTLY IN FRONT OF HIGH SPEED PINION.
(b) Install assembled torque ring assembly and ring gear on diaphragm.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) Install planet gear stop (15, Figure 4003). Secure with nuts (10).
1 Torque nuts to 175 in-lb (19.8 Nm), plus run-down torque.
2 Loosen nuts. Torque to 175 in-lb (19.8 Nm), plus run-down torque.
3 Loosen nuts a second time. Torque to a final value of 125 in-lb (14.1 Nm), plus
run-down torque.
(d) Check ring gear for freedom of movement.
(e) Lightly coat packing (75) with Royco HF-825, assembly fluid.
NOTE: Prior to installing electrical connector, check packing seat on back side of
mounting hole to make sure that old packing and other obstructions are removed.
NOTE: Assembly fluid on packing helps it to maintain correct position on electrical

connector as it is drawn through mounting hole.
(f) Carefully install electrical connector (65) in diaphragm. Install packing (75) on connector.
Secure with nut (70).
NOTE: To aid in routing the electrical connector in position on diaphragm, PN 832752-1,
torque ring connector installation tool may be used. Insert tool through diaphragm
assembly connector hole. Push socket pin of tool on connector pin and draw
connector in diaphragm assembly opening. Refer to Figure 4004.
1 Torque nut (70, Figure 4003) to 70 in-lb (7.9 Nm).

2 Loosen nut. Torque nut to 70 in-lb (7.9 Nm).
(g) Install clamp (50) on torque ring assembly electrical cable and secure to diaphragm
assembly with bolt (45). Torque bolt to 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm).
(h) Check ring gear for radial and circumferential movement as follows:
1 Check ring gear for freedom of movement.
2 If ring gear does not move, loosen bolts (30) and move retaining plates (25, 35)
radially outward. Torque bolts to 50 in-lb (5.6 Nm).
3 Repeat the ring gear check procedure, as required, to achieve ring gear movement.
(i) Install planet carrier and gears assembly in internal planetary gear.
NOTE: To prevent planet carrier and gears assembly from inadvertently falling out of
planetary gear, install just prior to installing nose cone.
(j) Install oil tubes. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-10-4000).

(k) If same torque ring assembly is installed, perform torque system bridge cross check. Refer
(l) If a replacement torque ring is installed and current DSC shutdown voltage values are for
the same model engine as the model engine it is installed on, a torque system calibration
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
is not required. Perform torque system bridge cross check and calibrate the torque signal
conditioner using current DSC values. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
NOTE: If current DSC shutdown voltage values are not available or if current DSC
shutdown voltage values are for a torque ring from a different model engine,
torque system must be calibrated.
NOTE: Test resistance of torque ring assembly. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK

72-00-00-13000).
(m) If a new or overhauled torque ring or a replacement torque ring from a different model
engine is installed, torque system must be calibrated. Perform torque ring system bridge
cross check and torque system calibration adjustment. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK
72-00-00-13000).
CAUTION: COMPONENTS OF THE NTS SYSTEM THAT ARE REMOVED AND INSTALLED
IN ORDER TO GAIN ACCESS TO THE TORQUE RING ASSEMBLY AND TO
THE PLANETARY GEAR AND CARRIER ASSEMBLY WILL REQUIRE
CORRESPONDING NTS CHECKS. REFER TO TESTING (PGBLK
72-00-00-13000).
(n) Perform NTS trip system check. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS Procedures.
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Intermediate Housing and Gear Assembly – Oil Jet Assemblies Installation
(GRAPHIC 72-10-12-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4005
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 85. PACKING

UP495246
ALL Page 4006
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Ring Assembly and Ring Gear Assembly (GRAPHIC
72-10-12-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4007
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
20. NUT 40. INTERNAL PLANETARY GEAR

(RING GEAR)
25. RETAINING PLATE 55. TORQUE RING ASSEMBLY
30. BOLT 65. CONNECTOR
35. RETAINING PLATE
UP495246
ALL Page 4008
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-12-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4009
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY GEAR)
10. NUT 45. BOLT
30. BOLT 70. NUT
Figure 4004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fabricate Torque Ring Connector Installation Tool, PN 832752-1 (GRAPHIC
72-10-12-99B-004-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4010
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY – DISASSEMBLY
(1) Use these procedures to disassemble the planet carrier and gear assembly.
PN 287889-1 pin torquing holder (used to hold CAGE: 06848

shouldered pin while torquing or
loosening retainer)
PN 296539-2 planetary pin driver (used to remove CAGE: 06848

pin from planet carrier and gear
assembly)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-12-030-802-A01)
B. Disassemble Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly (Subtask 72-10-12-030-004-A01)
(1) Remove retaining ring (5, Figure 5001) and splined lock (10).
UP495246
ALL Page 5001
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Install planet carrier and gear assembly on PN 287889-1, pin torquing holder and remove bearing
retainer (15) and key (20).
(3) Remove planet carrier and gear assembly from holder, and using PN 296539-2, planetary pin
driver, remove shouldered pin (25).
(4) Remove planet gear and bearing assemblies (matched set) (30) from planet gear carrier (35).
UP495246
ALL Page 5002
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Planet Carrier and Gear Disassembly (GRAPHIC 72-10-12-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 5003
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. RETAINING RING 25. SHOULDERED PIN

10. SPLINED LOCK 30. PLANET GEAR AND BEARING
ASSEMBLY (MATCHED SET)
15. BEARING RETAINER 35. PLANET GEAR CARRIER
20. KEY
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 5004
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the planet carrier and gear assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-12-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean planet carrier and gear assembly (5, Figure 6001). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK
72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method 1 or 2.
(3) Clean jet assembly (20, 50, 80, 110, 140 Figure 6002).
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-10-12-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY GEAR)
10. NUT 45. BOLT
30. BOLT 70. NUT
UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(GRAPHIC 72-10-12-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6004
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 85. PACKING

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6005
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the planet carrier and gear assembly.


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-12-200-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Inspect Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly Components (Subtask 72-10-12-200-004-A01)

(1) Inspect planet carrier and gear assembly (5, Figure 8001) as follows:
NOTE: If carrier or gear and bearing set is damaged, replace damaged components.
NOTE: Make sure that shouldered pins are made of the same material (by weight (if part
number is not legible) or part number dash number).
(a) Visually inspect for cracks. No cracks allowed.

(b) Visually inspect gear teeth for pitting, chipping, and excessive wear. No visual defects that
can be felt using a ball tip stylus tool - 0.015 inch radius, 0.031 inch diameter (0.38 mm
radius, 0.79 mm diameter) are allowed.
(c) Inspect bearings. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(d) Verify MOW dimensions etched on gears match within 0.001 inch (0.02 mm).
(2) Visually inspect ring gear support (55) as follows:
(a) Visually inspect ring gear support for cracks. No cracks allowed.
(b) Visually inspect ring gear support for bolt hole elongation. Bolt hole elongation must not
exceed 0.0005 inch (0.013 mm).
(c) Inspect ring gear support mating surface (face) for wear. Wear must not exceed 0.003 inch
(0.08 mm) in depth.
(d) Inspect ring gear support splines for wear and pitting. If wear exceeds 0.005 inch (0.13
mm) and/or if pitting exceeds 0.010 inch (0.25 mm), replace ring gear support.
(e) Check ring gear support cable assembly as follows:
1 No deterioration and cuts in cable insulation allowed.
2 No bent or broken pins and damaged housing of cable connector allowed.
3 Replacement of torque ring cable assembly can only be accomplished at a
Honeywell-authorized service facility.
(3) Inspect ring gear (40, Figure 8001) as follows:
(b) Visually inspect ring gear teeth (longer teeth) for pitting, chipping, and excessive wear. No
visual defects that can be felt using a ball tip stylus tool - 0.015 inch radius, 0.031 inch
diameter (0.38 mm radius, 0.79 mm diameter) are allowed.
(c) Inspect splines (shorter teeth) for wear as follows:
1 Determine maximum wear depth by comparing maximum wear area on spline with
end where there is no wear. The “no wear” area is normally at extreme aft end of
spline where there is no engagement.
2 Maximum allowable depth of internal spline wear, measured at pitch line of spline
tooth, is 0.010 inch (0.25 mm).
(4) Inspect strainer elements for contamination and damage that may affect function.
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) Inspect oil jet (nozzle) assemblies (20, 50, 80, 110, 140 Figure 8002) as follows:
(a) Perform FPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). No cracks allowed.
(b) Inspect for contamination and distortion that may affect oil flow or spray pattern.
(6) Visually inspect external splines and flats of splined locks (10, Figure 8003) for wear. Replace
splined locks if wear is evident.
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-12-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY GEAR)
10. NUT 45. BOLT
30. BOLT 70. NUT
UP495246
ALL Page 8005
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(GRAPHIC 72-10-12-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8006
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 85. PACKING

UP495246
ALL Page 8007
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-12-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8008
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

20. KEY
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8009
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY – ASSEMBLY
(1) Use these procedures to assemble the planet carrier and gear assembly.
PN 287889-1 pin torquing holder (used to hold CAGE: 06848

shouldered pin while torquing or
loosening retainer)
PN 287890-1 retaining ring installation tool (used CAGE: 06848

to install retaining rings in
shouldered pins in planetary gears)


APPLICABLE.

compound
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-12-430-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 10001
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Assemble Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly (Subtask 72-10-12-430-004-A01)
(1) Place the four planet gear and bearing assemblies (matched set) (30, Figure 10001) in planet
gear carrier (35). Make sure that pins of planet gear and bearing assemblies (matched set) do
not bind against bottom of slots in planet gear carrier. Leave planet gear carrier on bench.
NOTE: Make sure that planet gear and bearing assemblies (matched set) (30) have been
inspected. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-12-8000).
NOTE: Verify MOW dimensions etched on gears match within 0.001 inch (0.02 mm).
CAUTION: SHOULDERED PINS WITH UNLIKE DASH NUMBERS MUST NOT BE INTERMIXED
IN THE SAME PLANET GEAR AND BEARING SET. REPLACE ALL FOUR
SHOULDERED PINS TOGETHER.
(2) Install the four shouldered pins (25) and keys (20) in planet gear carrier, through bearing inner
races. Make sure that pins are down flush and not binding on the lip of planet gear carrier.
(3) Apply Liqui-Moly brand NV thread compound, anti-seize lubricant to face and threads of the four
bearing retainers (15).
(4) Lift side of carrier slightly and install retainers by hand. Snug down finger tight.
CAUTION: VERIFY TORQUE APPLIED TO BEARING RETAINERS IS 1,200 IN-LB (135.6 NM).
(LOOSEN AND RETORQUE THREE TIMES.)
(5) Turn planet gear carrier (35) over and place on PN 287889-1, pin torquing holder. Make sure
that shouldered pins (25) are flush and not riding on lip of carrier. Torque bearing retainers (15)
to 1,200 in-lb (135.6 Nm).
(6) Remove planet gear carrier from holding fixture.
(7) Install splined locks (10) through shouldered pins (25).
(8) If necessary, rotate spline engagement until the square ends of the splined locks fit in bearing
retainers (15) square openings.
(9) Using PN 287890-1, retaining ring installation tool, compress and install internal retaining rings
(5) in shouldered pin (25) grooves to retain splined locks in position.
UP495246
ALL Page 10002
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Planet Carrier and Gear Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-10-12-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 10003
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

20. KEY
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 10004
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY – TESTING
(1) Usem these procedures to test the planet carrier and gear assembly.
Model GR1863-9700 megohmmeter General Radio, 300 Baker St.,

Concord, MA 01742
Simpson Model 260 volt-ohmmeter (capable of indicating CAGE: 55026

continuity and 0 to 300 ohms
resistance with accuracy of +/-2
percent)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-12-700-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Test Resistance of Torque Ring Assembly (Strain Gage) (Subtask 72-10-12-700-004-A01)
(1) Using Simpson Model 260, volt-ohmmeter check strain gage resistance as follows:
NOTE: Pin 1 through 4 are Bridge 1, Pin 7 through 10 are Bridge 2.
(a) Check resistance across Pins 1 and 4. Resistance must be 690 to 720 ohms. Refer to
Figure 13001.
(b) Check resistance across Pins 1 and 2. Resistance must be 515 to 545 ohms.
(c) Check resistance across Pins 2 and 3. Resistance must be 690 to 720 ohms.
(d) Check resistance across Pins 7 and 10. Resistance must be 690 to 720 ohms.
(e) Check resistance across Pins 7 and 8. Resistance must be 515 to 545 ohms.
(f) Check resistance across Pins 8 and 9. Resistance must be 690 to 720 ohms.
(2) Perform an insulation check between Pin 1 and case, Pin 7 and case and between Pin 1 and 7
using a Model GR1863-9700, megohmmeter. The insulation resistance must be equal to or
greater than 1 megohm with 50 VDC applied.
Figure 13001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Strain Gage Resistance Check (GRAPHIC 72-10-12-99B-001-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13002
72-10-12 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
INTERMEDIATE HOUSING AND GEAR ASSEMBLY (DIAPHRAGM) – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the intermediate housing and gear assembly (diaphragm).
PN 284192-1-1 housing puller set ((mechanical) CAGE: 06848

used to separate the intermediate
gearbox housing from the accessory
drive housing or separate
diaphragm from accessory drive
housing)
PN 296764-1 starter shaft mechanical puller (used CAGE: 06848

to remove and install starter drive
gear shaft)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-13-020-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Remove Diaphragm Assembly (Subtask 72-10-13-020-004-A01)

CAUTION: REMOVE PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY BEFORE REMOVING DIAPHRAGM
TO PREVENT PLANET CARRIER AND GEAR ASSEMBLY FROM INADVERTENTLY
FALLING OUT.
NOTE: Starter-generator drive gearshaft splined adapter replacement can be accomplished without
removing diaphragm assembly. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-13-9000).
NOTE: Starter-generator drive gearshaft replacement can be accomplished without removing
diaphragm assembly using PN 296764-1, starter shaft mechanical puller. Refer to REPAIR
(PGBLK 72-10-13-9000).
NOTE: To remove diaphragm assembly to facilitate other maintenance, accomplish this procedure
only. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-15-3000) for further engine disassembly.
(1) Remove planet carrier and gear assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-12-3000).
(2) Remove oil vent valve. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-06-3000).
(3) Remove torque limiter by-pass valve. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-22-01-3000).
(4) Remove magnetic drain plug (chip detector). Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-30-01-3000).
NOTE: Magnetic drain plug (chip detector) may be damaged if accidentally bumped with
diaphragm assembly. Therefore, removal of chip detector is recommended prior to
removal of diaphragm assembly.
(5) Remove nuts (5, 7, Figure 3001) and washers (10) securing diaphragm assembly (40) to engine.
(6) Position PN 284192-1-1, housing puller set lip under diaphragm assembly (40) edge.
(7) Tighten puller jackscrews evenly and remove diaphragm assembly with assembled gearshafts.
(8) Remove gasket (35).
(9) Remove shouldered (main) shaft (25).
(11) Remove tube assembly (15).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Intermediate Housing and Gear Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC
72-10-13-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 30. PACKING

7. NUT 35. GASKET
10. WASHER 40. INTERMEDIATE HOUSING AND GEAR
ASSEMBLY (DIAPHRAGM ASSEMBLY)
15. TUBE ASSEMBLY 50. SCREW
20. PACKING 55. WASHER
25. SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT 60. IDENTIFICATION PLATE
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
INTERMEDIATE HOUSING AND GEAR ASSEMBLY (DIAPHRAGM) – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the intermediate housing and gear assembly (diaphragm).



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-13-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Diaphragm Assembly (Subtask 72-10-13-420-004-A01)
FOAMING AND OIL JET PLUGGING. USE NO MORE THAN REQUIRED. ALLOW NO
GREASE TO ENTER ENGINE CAVITY.
(1) Apply a very thin coat of DC-111, silicone grease on gasket (35, Figure 4001).
(2) Install gasket on accessory drive gearbox housing.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT IS INSTALLED WITH PACKING
GROOVE END INTO OIL PRESSURE PUMP.
(3) Install new packing (30) on shouldered (main) shaft (25). Install shouldered (main) shaft in pump.
(4) Install new packings (20) on tube assembly (15). Install tube assembly in accessory drive gearbox
housing. Install guide pins in tube assembly.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT SPRING WASHER IS INSTALLED IN DIAPHRAGM ASSEMBLY
FUEL CONTROL DRIVE GEARSHAFT BORE PRIOR TO DIAPHRAGM
INSTALLATION. DISLODGED WASHER CAN CAUSE EXTENSIVE DAMAGE.
(5) Install spring washer (50, Figure 4002) in diaphragm assembly fuel control drive gearshaft bore.
Use Royco HF-825, assembly fluid to hold spring washer in place. Refer to INSTALLATION
(PGBLK 72-10-15-4000).
CAUTION: USE EXTREME CARE NOT TO DAMAGE TORQUE RING ASSEMBLY CABLE WHEN
INSTALLING DIAPHRAGM ASSEMBLY TO ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE FORCE WHEN INSTALLING DIAPHRAGM ASSEMBLY.
(6) Carefully install diaphragm assembly (40, Figure 4001) with assembled parts. Ease assembly
in place using guide pins installed in tube assembly as guides through oil vent valve mount pad.
(7) Secure diaphragm assembly (40) with washers (10) and nuts (5, 7). Upon installation of nose
cone, torque nuts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
NOTE: Do not tighten nuts until installation of nose cone housing is completed.
NOTE: Make sure that diaphragm gasket does not extend beyond flange.
(8) Remove guide pins.

(9) Install planet carrier and gear assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-12-4000).
(10) Install torque limiter by-pass valve. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-22-01-4000).
(11) Install oil vent valve. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 79-20-06-4000).
(12) Install magnetic drain plug (chip detector). Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 79-30-01-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: FOLLOWING DIAPHRAGM INSTALLATION, PG RESET FUNCTION AND NTS

LOCKOUT SYSTEM PRESSURE CHECK AND EITHER AN NTS TRIP SYSTEM
CHECK OR AN NTS SYSTEM CHECK BY FLIGHT CHECK ARE MANDATORY TO
MAKE SURE OF PROPER NTS SYSTEM OPERATION.
CAUTION: COMPONENTS OF THE NTS SYSTEM THAT ARE REMOVED AND INSTALLED IN
ORDER TO GAIN ACCESS TO THE DIAPHRAGM ASSEMBLY WILL REQUIRE
CORRESPONDING NTS CHECKS. REFER TO TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
(13) Perform PG reset function and NTS lockout system pressure check and either an NTS trip
system check or an NTS system check by flight check. Refer to Table 13003, Matrix of NTS
Procedures.
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Intermediate Housing and Gear Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC
72-10-13-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 30. PACKING

7. NUT 35. GASKET
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Tachometer-Generator Gear Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC

72-10-13-99B-002-A01)
50. SPRING WASHER 85. BEARING RETAINER NUT

55. ANNULAR BALL BEARING 90. ANNULAR BALL BEARING (MATCHED
SET)
60. PIN 95. SPUR GEAR
65. SLOTTED ROUND NUT 125. RING
70. ANNULAR BALL BEARING 130. INSERT
75. SLEEVE SPACER 135. PIN
80. PIN 140. GEARSHAFT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4005
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
INTERMEDIATE HOUSING AND GEAR ASSEMBLY (DIAPHRAGM) – DISASSEMBLY
(1) Use these procedures to disassemble the intermediate housing and gear assembly (diaphragm).
PN 285812-1-1 bearing pressing holder (used to CAGE: 06848

hold various bearings while
removing or installing gear shafts)
PN 287226-1-1 gear holder (used to hold idler spur CAGE: 06848

gear shaft while removing or
installing bearing retainer, replaces
PN 285774-1-1)
PN 287425-1-1 roller bearing guide (used to retain CAGE: 06848

rollers and cages in diaphragm
when diaphragm halves are
separated)
PN 291140-1 bearing and bushing driver (used to CAGE: 06848

press gear shaft from bearings)

press gear shaft from bearings,
replaces PN 285814-1-1)
UP495246
ALL Page 5001
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)


APPLICABLE.
for silver pencil)
pencil)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-13-030-802-A01)
B. Disassemble Diaphragm Assembly (Subtask 72-10-13-030-004-A01)

(1) Remove hydraulic pump and PG drive gearshafts as follows:
NOTE: Remove hydraulic pump and PG drive gearshaft only to accomplish required
maintenance. If no maintenance is required in the area, proceed to perform the
procedure to remove starter-generator drive and idler gearshaft.
(a) Remove bolts (75, Figure 5001) and washers (80) securing deflector assembly (85).
(b) Remove deflector assembly (85).
(c) Remove bolts (90, 135) and retainers (95, 140) securing assembled bearings and assembled
gearshafts from diaphragm assembly.
(d) Remove assembled gearshafts from diaphragm.
(e) Press bearings from gearshafts using PN 291140-1, bearing and bushing driver and PN
291141-1, bearing and bushing driver and PN 285812-1-1, bearing pressing holder.
(f) Remove pin (110) and seal plug (115).
(g) Remove and discard packing (120).
UP495246
ALL Page 5002
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Remove starter-generator drive and idler gearshaft as follows:

NOTE: Remove starter-generator drive and idler gearshafts only to accomplish required
maintenance. If no maintenance is required in the area, proceed to perform the
procedure to remove accessory gear assembly and spur gear assembly.
(a) Remove bolts (5, Figure 5001) and retainers (10) securing assembled bearings and
assembled gearshafts from diaphragm assembly.
(b) Remove assembled gearshafts from diaphragm assembly.
NOTE: Removal of starter-generator drive gearshaft splined adapter is not required
unless damage or wear is indicated. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-13-9000).
(c) Install idler gearshaft (70) in PN 287226-1-1, gear holder.

(d) Remove bearing retainers (50) with plugs (45).
(e) Remove idler gearshaft (70) from holder.
(f) Remove plugs (45) from retainers (50).
(g) Install PN 285812-1-1, bearing pressing holder on idler gearshaft (70) and remove bearings
(60, 65) using PN 291141-1, bearing and bushing driver.
(h) Remove assembled bearings and starter-generator drive gearshaft (35).
(i) Press bearings (15) from starter-generator drive gearshaft using PN 291141-1, bearing
and bushing driver and PN 285812-1-1, bearing pressing holder.
(3) Remove accessory gear assembly and spur gear assembly as follows:
NOTE: Remove accessory gear assembly only to accomplish required maintenance. If no
maintenance is required in the area, proceed to perform the procedure to remove oil
scavenge pump assembly.
(a) Remove oil transfer tube (5, Figure 5002).

(b) Remove and discard packing (10).
(c) Remove nut (30), washer (35), and nozzle assembly (45).
(d) Remove and discard packings (40, 50).
(e) Remove nuts (15), washers (20), and spur gear assembly (25).
(f) Remove accessory gear assembly (55).
(4) Remove oil scavenge pump assembly as follows:
NOTE: Remove oil scavenge pump assembly only to accomplish required maintenance. If
no maintenance is required in this area, proceed to ASSEMBLY (PGBLK
72-10-13-10000).
(a) Remove bolts (5, 15, Figure 5003), washer (10), and packing with retainer (20).
(b) Remove oil scavenge pump assembly (65).
(c) Remove and discard packings (70, 75).
(d) Remove bolts (35, 55) and nuts (25, 45) securing screen assemblies (40, 60).
(e) Remove screen assemblies.
UP495246
ALL Page 5003
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(f) Remove air transfer tube (80).

(g) Remove and discard packings (85).
(5) Disassemble diaphragm housing assembly as follows:
CAUTION: PRIOR TO SEPARATING DIAPHRAGM HOUSING ASSEMBLY, MARK AN
INDEX LINE USING VERITHIN NO. 753, SILVER PENCIL, VIOLET, NO. 127
1/2, INDUSTRIAL MARKING INK, OR YELLOW NO. 170T, CHINA MARKER
ON OUTER RACE IN RELATION TO HOUSING TO SHOW ASSEMBLY
RELATIONSHIP. MAKE SURE THAT PART IS REINSTALLED IN SAME
RELATIVE POSITION DURING ASSEMBLY. DO NOT MIX OUTER RACES.
(a) Remove bolts (5, 15, Figure 5004) and bearing retainers (10, 20).
(b) Remove retaining ring (75) from aft housing.
(c) Remove bolts (25, 35, 45) and washers (30, 40, 50).
CAUTION: USE EXTREME CARE WHEN SEPARATING DIAPHRAGM HOUSING TO

PREVENT DAMAGE TO HOUSING HALVES. IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO
APPLY HEAT TO HOUSING HALVES AND USE JACKSCREWS TO SEPARATE
DIAPHRAGM HOUSING.
(d) Separate diaphragm housing assembly (95) halves. Apply heat, if necessary with propane
torch. Do not exceed 200°F (93°C). Use four jackscrews to aid in separation of housing
halves. Use extreme care while separating housing assembly to prevent binding and
cracking of housing halves.
NOTE: Diaphragm housings assembly will separate with sun/bull gear assembly retained
in aft half.

(e) Install PN 287425-1-1, roller bearing guide in roller bearings (80) to prevent rollers and
cages from dropping out.
(f) Remove packings (55).
CAUTION: WHEN SUN AND BULL GEAR ASSEMBLY IS REMOVED FROM FORWARD
HOUSING HALF, THE INTERNAL COMPONENTS OF HIGH SPEED PINION
GEAR ASSEMBLY MAY SEPARATE IF NOT SECURED.
(g) Secure high speed pinion gear assembly components by tying gearshaft to high speed
pinion housing, using plastic tie wraps.
(h) (Post SB TPE331-A72-2114) Remove retaining nut (20, Figure 5005) and nozzle assembly
(1).
(i) Remove and discard packing (10).
UP495246
ALL Page 5004
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(j) Remove sun and bull gear assembly (85, Figure 5004) and high speed pinion gear assembly
(90) from forward housing half.
NOTE: Do not disassemble sun and bull gear assembly or high speed pinion gear
assemblies.
(k) Remove bolts (60), lockplates (65), and retainer plates (70).
(l) Remove bearings (80) outer race and rollers from diaphragm housing assembly (95) halves.
UP495246
ALL Page 5005
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Intermediate Housing and Gear Assembly Disassembly (Partial Breakdown)
(Gearshafts) (GRAPHIC 72-10-13-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 5006
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 85. OIL DEFLECTOR

10. RETAINER 90. BOLT
15. BALL BEARING 95. RETAINER
20. SPLINED ADAPTER 100. BALL BEARING
25. RING 110. PIN
30. KEY WASHER 115. SEAL PLUG
35. SPUR (STARTER-GENERATOR DRIVE) 120. PACKING
GEARSHAFT
45. PLUG 125. DRIVE (HYDRAULIC PUMP DRIVE)
GEARSHAFT
50. RETAINER 130. WASHER
60. ROLLER BEARING (INNER RACE) 135. BOLT
70. IDLER SPUR (IDLER) GEARSHAFT 145. BALL BEARING
75. BOLT 150. PROPELLER GOVERNOR SPUR (PG
DRIVE) GEAR
UP495246
ALL Page 5007
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Gear and Drive Idler Housing Assembly Disassembly (GRAPHIC
72-10-13-99B-002-A01)
5. OIL TRANSFER TUBE 35. WASHER

15. NUT 45. NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
25. ACCESSORY GEAR AND DRIVE IDLER 55. ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY
(SPUR GEAR) ASSEMBLY
30. NUT
UP495246
ALL Page 5008
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly Disassembly (GRAPHIC 72-10-13-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 5009
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 55. BOLT

10. WASHER 60. SCREEN ASSEMBLY
15. BOLT 65. OIL SCAVENGE PUMP ASSEMBLY
20. PACKING WITH RETAINER 70. PACKING
25. NUT 75. PACKING
35. BOLT 80. AIR TRANSFER TUBE
40. SCREEN ASSEMBLY 85. PACKING
45. NUT
UP495246
ALL Page 5010
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5004. (Sheet 1 of 1) (POST SB TPE331-A72-2114) Intermediate Housing and Gear Assembly
Disassembly (GRAPHIC 72-10-13-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 5011
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 55. PACKING

10. AFT BEARING RETAINER 60. BOLT
15. BOLT 65. LOCKPLATE
20. FORWARD BEARING RETAINER 70. RETAINER PLATE
25. BOLT 75. RETAINING RING
30. WASHER 80. ROLLER BEARING (OUTER RACE)
35. BOLT 85. (POST SB TPE331-A72-2114) SPUR
AND HELICAL (SUN AND BULL) GEAR
ASSEMBLY
40. WASHER 90. (POST SB TPE331-A72-2114) HIGH
SPEED PINION GEAR ASSEMBLY
45. BOLT 95. INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX HOUSING
(DIAPHRAGM HOUSING ASSEMBLY)
50. WASHER
UP495246
ALL Page 5012
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5005. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-A72-2114) High Speed Pinion Nozzle Assembly Disassembly
(GRAPHIC 72-10-13-99B-005-A01)
1. NOZZLE ASSEMBLY 20. RETAINING NUT

10. PACKING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 5013
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
INTERMEDIATE HOUSING AND GEAR ASSEMBLY (DIAPHRAGM) – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the intermediate housing and gear assembly (diaphragm).



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-13-100-802-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Cleaning Methods
Figure 6001 15 Tube assembly X
Figure 6001 25 Shouldered X
(main) shaft
Figure 6001 40 Diaphragm X X
assembly
Figure 6002 15, 100, 145
1 Ball bearing
Figure 6002 35, 70, 125 Gearshaft X

Figure 6002 50 Retainer X
Figure 6002 60
1 Roller bearing
(inner race)
Figure 6002 65
1 Ball bearing
Figure 6002 85 Oil deflector X X

Figure 6002 115 Seal plug X
Figure 6002 130, 155 Washer X X
Figure 6002 150 Spur gear X
Figure 6003 35 Spur gear X
assembly
Figure 6003 55 Accessory gear X
assembly
Figure 6004 40, 60 Screen assembly X X
Figure 6004 80 Air transfer tube X
NOTES:
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Intermediate Housing and Gear Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC
72-10-13-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 30. PACKING

7. NUT 35. GASKET
UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Intermediate Housing and Gear Assembly Cleaning (Partial Breakdown)
UP495246
ALL Page 6004
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

25. RING 110. PIN
GEARSHAFT
GEARSHAFT
DRIVE) GEAR
UP495246
ALL Page 6005
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Gear and Drive Idler Housing Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC
72-10-13-99B-003-A01)

30. NUT
UP495246
ALL Page 6006
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-10-13-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6007
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 55. BOLT

25. NUT 75. PACKING
45. NUT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6008
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
INTERMEDIATE HOUSING AND GEAR ASSEMBLY (DIAPHRAGM) – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the intermediate housing and gear assembly (diaphragm).


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-13-200-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Inspect Diaphragm Assembly (Subtask 72-10-13-200-004-A01)

(1) Inspect diaphragm assembly for binding of assembled gearing and unusual wear patterns.
Inspect gearshafts for chipped and broken teeth and unusual wear pattern. Replace part that
does not meet inspection requirements.
(2) Inspect diaphragm housing assembly for cracks. No cracks allowed.
(3) Inspect diaphragm housing assembly halves for loose and damaged inserts and studs. Refer
to Figure 8001. Replace inserts or studs. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(4) Visually inspect diaphragm housing assembly alignment holes for elongation. Refer to Figure
8001. If elongation is indicated, measure diameter of alignment hole. If diameter of any alignment
hole exceeds 0.4418 inch (11.222 mm), return diaphragm assembly for evaluation and repair
to Honeywell International Inc., Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ
85034-3440.
(5) Inspect scavenge tube fitting port for damage and stripped threads. Repair damage and replace
insert. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-13-9000).
(6) Inspect forward diaphragm housing assembly half, where ring gear support mates with housing,
for wear. Wear in excess of 0.003-inch (0.08 mm) depth is not allowed.
(7) Inspect diaphragm housing assembly for evidence of corrosion as follows:
(a) Inspect Surface A for evidence of corrosion. Corrosion not in excess of the following limits
is repairable. Refer to Figure 8002.
NOTE: Particular attention must be given to areas where dissimilar metals contact
magnesium surface.
1 Maximum depth must not exceed 0.040 inch (1.02 mm).

2 Maximum area must not exceed 1 square-inch (645.2 mm²) in two places.
(b) Visually check edges (1) for corrosion. Corrosion not in excess of 50 percent of flange
thickness is repairable.
(c) Visually check high speed pinion area (2) for corrosion. Corrosion not in excess of 0.030-inch
(0.76 mm) depth is repairable.
(d) Visually check adjacent to screw and bolt holes (3) for corrosion. Corrosion not in excess
of 0.030-inch (0.76 mm) depth is repairable.
(e) Treat corrosion. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
(f) If limits are exceeded, return diaphragm assembly to manufacturer for evaluation.
(8) Inspect high speed pinion as follows:
(a) Inspect high speed pinion bearings as follows:
1 Remove high speed pinion assembly from diaphragm assembly.
2 Clean high speed pinion bearings. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
3 Inspect bearings. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
4 (Post SB TPE331-A72-2114) Inspect high speed pinion bearing for evidence of wear
(polishing) on thrust collar surface. No wear allowed at collar edge. Refer to Figure
8003.
5 Inspect for evidence of rotation of inner race on gearshaft (ie, bearing inner race loose
on gearshaft). Refer to Figure 8002.
6 Oil bearings with clean, approved engine oil.
7 If bearings do not meet the inspection requirements, return high speed pinion to a
Honeywell-authorized service facility for necessary repair or replacement of bearings.
(b) Inspect high speed pinion gear tooth load surface for defects such as scoring, pitting, and
chipping. No visual defects that can be felt using a ball tip stylus tool - 0.015 inch radius,
0.031 inch diameter (0.38 mm radius, 0.79 mm diameter) are allowed.
(c) If limits are exceeded, return high speed pinion assembly to a Honeywell-authorized service
facility for necessary repair or replacement.
(9) Inspect shouldered (main) shaft and tube assembly as follows:
(a) Inspect shouldered (main) shaft (25, Figure 8004) teeth for scoring, pitting, and chipping.
No visual defects that can be felt using a ball tip stylus tool - 0.015 inch radius, 0.031 inch
(b) Inspect tube assembly (15) for contamination or bends that may affect oil flow.
(d) (Post SB TPE331-A72-2114) Inspect high speed pinion nozzle assembly (1, Figure 8005)
for contamination and distortion that may affect oil flow or spray pattern characteristics.
(10) Inspect hydraulic pump and PG drive gearshaft assemblies as follows:
(a) Inspect gearshafts (70, 125, 150, Figure 8006) for scoring, pitting, and chipping. No visual
defects that can be felt using a ball tip stylus tool - 0.015 inch radius, 0.031 inch diameter
(0.38 mm radius, 0.79 mm diameter) are allowed.
(b) Replace starter-generator drive gearshaft splined adapter (20), if there is any indication of
cracks, wear depth exceeds 0.010 inch (0.25 mm), or deformed. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
72-10-13-9000).
(d) Inspect bearings as follows:
1 Do not remove bearings from gearshaft.
2 Clean bearings and gearshaft assembly. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
3 Inspect bearings. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
4 Inspect for evidence of rotation of inner race on gearshaft (ie, bearing inner race loose
on gearshaft).
5 Oil bearings with clean, approved engine oil.
6 Check for indications of binding or roughness by holding outer race with gearshaft
pointed up and rotating gearshaft. Repeat procedure with gearshaft pointed down.
7 If binding or roughness is indicated, clean bearings and gearshaft assembly and oil
bearings with clean, approved engine oil.
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
8 Replace bearings that do not meet inspection requirements. Refer to DISASSEMBLY

(PGBLK 72-10-13-5000) or ASSEMBLY (PGBLK 72-10-13-10000).
(11) Inspect oil scavenge pump assembly and plumbing as follows:
NOTE: Oil scavenge pump assembly may be disassembled to inspect condition of rotor set
and to inspect pump interior for contamination in the event of oil system contamination.
Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-13-9000).
(a) Inspect oil scavenge pump assembly (65) for cracks or other damage. No cracks allowed.
(b) Inspect tube assemblies. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(c) Inspect screen assemblies for holes or contamination that may affect function.
(d) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
(12) Inspect gearshaft assemblies as follows:
(a) Inspect gearshaft (35, 70, 125, 150, Figure 8006) teeth for scoring, pitting, and chipping.
No visual defects that can be felt using a ball tip stylus tool - 0.015 inch radius, 0.031 inch
(b) Replace starter-generator drive gearshaft splined adapter (20), if internal cracks, wear
depth exceeds 0.010 inch (0.25 mm), or there is deformation. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
72-10-13-9000).
(13) Inspect bearings as follows:
(a) Do not remove bearings from gearshaft.
(b) Clean bearings and gearshaft assembly. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
(d) Inspect for evidence of rotation of inner race on gearshaft (ie, bearing inner race loose on
gearshaft).
(e) Oil bearings with clean, approved engine oil.
(f) Check for indications of binding or roughness by holding outer race with gearshaft pointed
up and rotating gearshaft. Repeat procedure with gearshaft pointed down.
(g) If binding or roughness is indicated, clean bearings and gearshaft assembly and oil bearings
with clean, approved engine oil.
(h) Replace bearings that do not meet inspection requirements. Refer to DISASSEMBLY
(PGBLK 72-10-13-5000) or ASSEMBLY (PGBLK 72-10-13-10000).
(14) Inspect accessory drive idler housing and gear assemblies as follows:
(a) Inspect gear teeth for scoring, pitting, and chipping. No visual defects that can be felt using
a ball tip stylus tool - 0.015 inch radius, 0.031 inch diameter (0.38 mm radius, 0.79 mm
diameter) are allowed. Refer to Figure 8008.
(b) Inspect assembled accessory gear and drive idler housing for binding of gears.
(c) Inspect nozzle assembly (45) as follows:
1 Perform FPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). No cracks
allowed.
UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2 Inspect for contamination and distortion that may affect oil flow or spray pattern.
(d) Inspect oil transfer tube (5). Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(e) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
(15) Inspect sun and bull gear assembly as follows:
(a) Visually inspect gear teeth for corner breakage. Damaged gear teeth may be repaired if
damage does not exceed the following limits. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-13-9000).
1 Corner damage must not extend beyond Dimensions H and J. Refer to Figure 8009.
2 No corner breakage on more than three gear teeth is allowed.
3 No corner breakage on Side A and Side B of same gear tooth is allowed.
4 No corner breakage on two adjacent teeth is allowed.
(b) (Post SB TPE331-A72-2114) Inspect bull gear rim surface for wear. Wear (polishing) of
bull gear rim surface is allowed, provided the wear (polishing) does not extend to edge of
rim. Refer to Figure 8010.
(c) Inspect bull gear tooth load surface for defects such as scoring, pitting, and chipping. Visual
defects on bull gear teeth is acceptable as long as defects cannot be felt using a ball tip
stylus tool - 0.015 inch radius, 0.031 inch diameter (0.38 mm radius, 0.79 mm diameter).
(d) Perform visual inspection of planetary drive end of sun gear teeth for wear. If gear teeth
exhibit surface distress over a localized area, return assembly to a Honeywell-authorized
service facility for involute inspection.
(e) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0606 and PN 3107037-9) Visually inspect mating surfaces of retaining
nut, bearing inner races, sun and bull gear for evidence of fretting. Fretting is indicated by
a brownish discoloration or streaking at mating surfaces. If fretting is indicated, specific
torque value on retaining nut may have been lost, which could cause excessive internal
spline wear between sun and bull gear. Replace or return components to the following for
evaluation.
NOTE: In addition to streaking, indicated in this step, an unusual increase of iron
content, shown in SOAP analysis, may also serve as an indicator of internal
spline wear (between bull and sun gears).
NOTE: (PN 3107037-10) Evidence of brownish discoloration or streaking is allowed

and is not cause to reject sun and bull gear assembly.
1 Return sun and bull gear with bearings to a Honeywell-authorized service facility,
capable of disassembling and inspecting sun and bull gear. Refer to IRM, 72-IR-15.
2 Return planetary bearing and gear sets (four) to a Honeywell-authorized service
facility capable of performing a required involute inspection. Refer to IRM, 72-IR-15.
(16) Inspect bearings as follows:
(a) Do not remove inner race from sun and bull gear assembly.
(b) Clean bearings of sun and bull gear assembly. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
(d) Inspect for evidence of rotation of inner race on gearshaft (ie, bearing inner race loose on
gearshaft).
UP495246
ALL Page 8005
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(e) Oil bearings with clean, approved engine oil.

(f) For bearings that do not meet the inspection requirements, replace or return sun and bull
gear assembly and bearing (matched set) to a Honeywell-authorized service facility.
UP495246
ALL Page 8006
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Intermediate Gearbox (Diaphragm) Housing Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-10-13-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8007
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. INSERT 30. PLUG

10. INSERT 35. PIN
15. STUD 40. INSERT
20. INSERT 100. HOUSING
25. BUSHING
UP495246
ALL Page 8008
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Forward Diaphragm Housing Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-13-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8009
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Reference Limits
SURFACE A AREA 1 SQUARE-INCH (645.2 MM²) MAXIMUM IN TWO PLACES
SURFACE A DEPTH 0.040 INCH (1.02 MM) MAXIMUM
UP495246
ALL Page 8010
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8003. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-A72-2114) Thrust Collar Surface of High Speed Pinion Bearing
Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-13-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8011
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Intermediate Housing and Gear Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-10-13-99B-004-A01)
5. NUT 30. PACKING

7. NUT 35. GASKET
UP495246
ALL Page 8012
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8005. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-A72-2114) High Speed Pinion Nozzle Assembly Inspection
(GRAPHIC 72-10-13-99B-005-A01)

10. PACKING
UP495246
ALL Page 8013
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8006. (Sheet 1 of 1) Intermediate Housing and Gear Assembly Inspection (Partial Breakdown)
UP495246
ALL Page 8014
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

25. RING 110. PIN
GEARSHAFT
GEARSHAFT
DRIVE) GEAR
UP495246
ALL Page 8015
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8007. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-13-99B-007-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8016
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 55. BOLT

25. NUT 75. PACKING
45. NUT
UP495246
ALL Page 8017
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8008. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Gear and Drive Idler Housing Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-10-13-99B-008-A01)

30. NUT
UP495246
ALL Page 8018
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8009. (Sheet 1 of 1) Sun and Bull Gear Assembly Inspection and Rework Limits (GRAPHIC
72-10-13-99B-009-A01)
Limits
DIM. H 0.100 (2.54) MAXIMUM
DIM. J 0.100 (2.54) MAXIMUM
UP495246
ALL Page 8019
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8010. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-A72-2114) Bull Gear Surface Wear Inspection and Limits
(GRAPHIC 72-10-13-99B-010-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8020
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
INTERMEDIATE HOUSING AND GEAR ASSEMBLY (DIAPHRAGM) – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the intermediate housing and gear assembly (diaphragm).
PN 284484-1-1 inspection mounting plate (used to CAGE: 06848

mount gearcase oil scavenge pump
assembly when checking freedom
of rotation)
PN 284602-1-1 spanner wrench (used to check CAGE: 06848

freedom of rotation of gearcase oil
scavenge pump)
PN 296764-1 starter shaft mechanical puller (used CAGE: 06848

to remove and install starter drive
gear shaft)
PN 298062-1 splined adapter puller set (used to CAGE: 06848

remove and install splined adapter
from internal spline of starter drive
gear shaft)
PN 298062-11 installer (component of PN CAGE: 06848

298062-1 puller set)
PN 298062-13 remover (component of PN CAGE: 06848

298062-1 puller set)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
dry-ice (LGA CG-6.9, carbon commercially available

dioxide solid)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-13-300-802-A01)
B. Repair Sun and Bull Gear Teeth (Subtask 72-10-13-300-004-A01)
CAUTION: USE CARE TO AVOID CONTAMINATING SUN AND BULL GEAR ASSEMBLY
COMPONENTS WITH FILINGS DURING REPAIR.
(1) Repair gear teeth corner breakage by blending with a stone. Blend-repair must not exceed the
following limits.
(a) Repair must not exceed dimensions specified in Figure 9001.
(b) No more than three gear teeth may be repaired.
(c) Side A and Side B corner repair of same tooth is not allowed.
(d) Repair of two adjacent teeth is not allowed.
(2) Surface finish must be 63 microinches (1.6 µm) or better after blending.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Sun and Bull Gear Assembly Repair and Rework Limits (GRAPHIC
72-10-13-99B-001-A01)
Limits
DIM. H 0.100 (2.54) MAXIMUM
DIM. J 0.100 (2.54) MAXIMUM
C. Inspect and Repair Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly (Subtask 72-10-13-300-005-A01)
(1) Disassemble oil scavenge pump assembly as follows:
NOTE: Oil scavenge pump assembly may be disassembled to inspect condition of rotor sets,
and to inspect pump interior for contamination in the event of oil system contamination.
NOTE: Keep outlet plate, body assembly, and end assembly together as a matched set.
(a) Remove bolts (5, Figure 9002).

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(b) Separate outlet plate assembly (10) from body assembly (40).
(c) Carefully remove rotor set (15) from end assembly (65) shaft. Remove key (35).
NOTE: Keep rotor set together as a matched set.
(d) Remove body assembly (40) from end assembly (65).

(e) Remove and discard packings (20, 25, 55).
(f) Carefully remove rotor set (45) from end assembly (65) shaft. Remove key (60).
NOTE: Keep rotor set together as a matched set.
(g) Remove bolts (75), washers (80), and tube assembly (85) from body assembly (40).
(h) Remove and discard packings (90).
(2) Inspect matched rotor sets as follows:
(a) Inspect rotor set (15, 45) (gerotor) teeth and pockets for evidence of abnormal or deep
wear patterns. If visual inspection reveals abnormal or deep wear patterns, dimensionally
check parts. Refer to Figure 9003.
(b) Replace as a matched set if inspection requirements are not met.
(3) Inspect oil scavenge pump assembly for contamination and evidence of metal particles as follows:
(a) Clean pump components. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method
2.
(b) Inspect interior of outlet plate assembly (10), body housing (40), and body end assembly
(65), and shaft for scratches and gouges.
1 No gouges allowed.
2 Minor scratches, less than 0.005 inch (0.13 mm), are allowed.
3 Replace oil scavenge pump assembly if inspection requirements are not met.
(4) Assemble oil scavenge pump assembly as follows:
(a) Install key (60). Install rotor set (45) on shaft of body end assembly (65), aligning key.
NOTE: Rotor set (45, Figure 9002) may be assembled without regard to position of
side markings. Lubricate rotor sets with clean, approved engine oil prior to
installation of body assembly.
(b) Install body assembly (40), with new packings (25, 55), over shaft of body end assembly
(65) and rotor set (45), aligning body assembly with body end assembly.
NOTE: Packings must be lubricated with clean, approved engine oil, Santovac OS-124,
(c) Install key (35). Install rotor set (45) on body assembly (65) shaft, aligning key.
NOTE: Rotor set (45) may be assembled without regard to position of side markings.
Lubricate rotor sets with clean, approved engine oil prior to installation in body
assembly.
(d) Install outlet plate assembly (10) with new packing (20), over shaft of body end assembly
(65) in alignment with body assembly (40).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9004
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(e) Mount pump assembly on PN 284484-1-1, inspection mounting plate and secure with four
bolts. Torque bolts to 70 in-lb (7.9 Nm). Install screw (5) and torque to 6 to 10 in-lb (0.7 to
1.1 Nm).
(f) Using PN 284602-1-1, spanner wrench, check pump assembly for freedom of rotation.
(g) If pump rotation is satisfactory, remove pump from PN 284484-1-1, inspection mounting
plate.
(h) If pump rotation is not satisfactory, correct cause of binding. If binding cannot be corrected,
replace pump.
(i) After pump is determined to be satisfactory, install new packings (90) on tube assembly
(85).
(j) Install tube assembly. Secure with bolts (75) and washers (80). Torque bolts to 20 to 25
in-lb (2.3 to 2.8 Nm).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9005
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 72-10-13-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9006
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. SCREW 50. PACKING

10. OUTLET PLATE ASSEMBLY 55. PACKING
15. ROTOR SET 60. KEY
20. PACKING 65. END ASSEMBLY
25. PACKING 75. BOLT
35. KEY 80. WASHER
40. BODY ASSEMBLY 85. TUBE ASSEMBLY
45. ROTOR SET 90. PACKING
Figure 9003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Matched Rotor Set Repair (GRAPHIC 72-10-13-99B-003-A01)
Limits
Reference Inch (mm)
DIA A 2.9970 (76.124) MINIMUM
DIM. D 0.010 (0.25) MAXIMUM
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9007
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
D. Remove and Replace Starter-Generator Drive Gearshaft Splined Adapter Assembly (Subtask
72-10-13-300-006-A01)
CAUTION: USE OF TOOLS TO INSTALL SPLINED ADAPTER OTHER THAN PN 298062-1, SPLINED
ADAPTER PULLER SET MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO BEARINGS AND GEARS.
(1) Remove starter-generator drive gearshaft splined adapter as follows:
NOTE: Splined adapter may be removed or installed with starter-generator drive gearshaft
removed or installed on engine.
(a) Attach PN 298062-13, remover to starter-generator drive gearshaft (35, Figure 9004) by
engaging threaded rod into key washer (30). Refer to Figure 9005.
(b) Hold nut and rotate threaded rod CW to remove splined adapter (20). Remove PN
298062-13, remover from splined adapter.
(c) Remove snap ring (25) and key washer (30) from splined adapter (20). Snap ring and key
washer may be reused during installation.
(2) Install starter drive gearshaft splined adapter assembly.
(a) Assemble key washer (30) to splined adapter (20) and secure with snap ring (25).
(b) Install splined adapter assembly (20) over pilot of PN 298062-11, installer.
(c) Attach PN 298062-11, installer to starter-generator drive gearshaft (35) by engaging threads
in starter-generator drive gearshaft.
(d) Turn flanged nut CW until splined adapter (20) is fully seated in splined bore of
starter-generator drive gearshaft (35).
(e) Remove installer from starter-generator drive gearshaft.
(f) Repair gearshaft splined adapter (20, Figure 9004) as follows:
NOTE: When the splined adapter is worn beyond limits, the following repair may be
accomplished instead of splined adapter replacement.
1 Using procedures to remove starter-generator drive gearshaft splined adapter

described earlier, partially remove the splined adapter until approximately 2/3 of the
adapter is out of the gearshaft (35).
2 Cut off the exposed portion of the splined adapter.
3 Reseat the portion of splined adapter that remained within the starter-generator drive
gearshaft (35) as follows:
a Assemble key washer (30) to splined adapter (20) and secure with snap ring
(25).
b Install splined adapter assembly (20) over pilot of PN 298062-11, installer.
c Attach PN 298062-11, installer to starter-generator drive gearshaft (35) by
engaging threads in starter-generator drive gearshaft.
d Turn flanged nut CW until splined adapter (20) is fully seated in splined bore of
starter-generator drive gearshaft (35).
e Remove installer from starter-generator drive gearshaft.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9008
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
4 Reverse the cutoff portion of the splined adapter and insert in starter-generator drive
gearshaft (35).
5 Hold nut and rotate threaded rod of tool CW to remove splined adapter. Remove PN
298062-13, remover from splined adapter.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9009
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Intermediate Housing and Gear Assembly Repair (Partial Breakdown)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9010
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

25. RING 110. PIN
GEARSHAFT
GEARSHAFT
DRIVE) GEAR
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9011
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9005. (Sheet 1 of 1) Starter-Generator Gearshaft Splined Adapter Repair (GRAPHIC

72-10-13-99B-005-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9012
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
E. Replace Starter-Generator Drive Gearshaft (Subtask 72-10-13-300-007-A01)

CAUTION: SPLINED ADAPTER MUST BE REMOVED PRIOR TO REMOVING STARTER-GENERATOR
DRIVE GEARSHAFT OR DAMAGE TO ADAPTER MAY OCCUR.
(1) Remove starter-generator drive gearshaft as follows:
NOTE: Starter-generator drive gearshaft replacement can be accomplished without removing
diaphragm using PN 296764-1, starter shaft mechanical puller.
(a) Remove starter shaft oil seal. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-08-3000).
(b) Measure Dimension A, Figure 9006, from starter mounting flange to end of starter-generator
drive gearshaft. Record measurement.
NOTE: Measurements taken are to make sure that starter-generator drive gearshaft
has bottomed in inner bearing.
(c) Install and secure expanders, components of PN 296764-1, starter shaft mechanical puller
on rod with extension spring.
NOTE: Make sure that small end of expanders are against knurled expanding knob,
as shown in Figure 9006, when removing starter-generator drive gearshaft.
(d) Insert expanders in starter-generator drive gearshaft. Turn knurled knob until expanders
are tight within starter-generator drive gearshaft.
CAUTION: WHEN REMOVING STARTER-GENERATOR DRIVE GEARSHAFT, CARE
MUST BE TAKEN TO MAKE SURE THAT INNER BEARING DOES NOT FALL
INTO INTERMEDIATE HOUSING. WHEN GEARSHAFT OUTER BEARING HAS
CLEARED MOUNTING FLANGE, VISUALLY CHECK TO DETERMINE IF INNER
BEARING HAS REMAINED ON STARTER-GENERATOR DRIVE GEARSHAFT.
IF THIS HAS OCCURRED, CAREFULLY RESTRAIN INNER BEARING AND
REMOVE INNER BEARING WITH STARTER-GENERATOR DRIVE
GEARSHAFT.
(e) Remove starter-generator drive gearshaft and outer bearing by holding rod end and turning
flanged nut CW.
CAUTION: DAMAGE TO IDLER GEARSHAFT TEETH MAY OCCUR IF FORCE IS USED
WHEN REMOVING STARTER-GENERATOR DRIVE GEARSHAFT. IDLER
GEARSHAFT HAS TWO GEARS; THESE HAVE A DIFFERENT NUMBER OF
TEETH. IF ANY RESISTANCE IS NOTED, SLOWLY ROTATE PROPELLER
SHAFT TO ALIGN STARTER-GENERATOR DRIVE GEARSHAFT TEETH WITH
IDLER AFT GEAR TEETH.
(f) After gearshaft has moved approximately 0.25 inch (6.4 mm), if any resistance is noted,
slowly rotate propeller shaft until gearshaft can be removed without resistance.
(g) Remove starter-generator drive gearshaft from PN 296764-1, starter shaft mechanical
puller.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9013
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(h) Measure Dimension B, Figure 9006, from inner bearing step to splined end of removed
starter-generator drive gearshaft. Record measurement.
(2) If inner bearing was removed during removal of starter-generator drive gearshaft, perform the
following:
(a) Carefully remove bolt and inner bearing retainer through starter gearshaft cavity.
(b) Install inner bearing in bearing cavity and secure with bearing retainer and bolt. Torque
bolt (5, Figure 9007) to 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm).
(3) Install starter-generator drive gearshaft using PN 296764-1, starter shaft mechanical puller as
follows:
(a) Measure Dimension B, Figure 9006, from inner bearing step to splined end of new
starter-generator drive gearshaft. Record measurement.
(b) Make sure that bearing is installed properly on spline end of starter-generator drive
gearshaft.
(c) Remove assembled rods from PN 296764-1, starter shaft mechanical puller base.
(d) Install and secure expanders on rod with extension spring.
(e) Insert expanders into starter-generator drive gearshaft. Turn knurled knob until expanders
are tight in starter-generator drive gearshaft.
(f) Using the assembled rods as a handle, submerge starter drive gearshaft in dry-ice to
1.25-inch (31.8 mm) depth for 30 minutes.
(g) Using the assembled rods as a handle, install starter-generator drive gearshaft.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT IDLER GEARSHAFT TEETH ARE ALIGNED AND IN
PROPER POSITION FOR STARTER-GENERATOR DRIVE GEARSHAFT
ENGAGEMENT.
(h) Remove PN 296764-1, starter shaft mechanical puller.

(i) Compare previous measurements of Dimension B of old and new starter-generator drive
gearshaft.
1 If new gearshaft Dimension B is more than old gearshaft Dimension B, subtract the
difference from original Dimension A measurement.
2 If new gearshaft Dimension B is less than old gearshaft Dimension B, add the
difference from original Dimension A measurement.
(j) Measure Dimension A, Figure 9006, from starter mounting flange to end of starter-generator
drive gearshaft and compare with original Dimension A as corrected in the above step, to
make sure that starter drive gearshaft is bottomed.
(4) If starter-generator drive gearshaft is not fully installed, remove starter-generator drive gearshaft
as described above.
(5) If inner bearing was removed during removal of starter-generator drive gearshaft, carefully
remove bolt and inner bearing retainer through starter gearshaft cavity. Install inner bearing in
bearing cavity and secure with bearing retainer and bolt. Torque bolt (5, Figure 9007) to 35 in-lb
(4.0 Nm).
(6) Install starter shaft oil seal. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-08-4000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9014
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9006. (Sheet 1 of 1) Starter-Generator Drive Gearshaft Repair (GRAPHIC 72-10-13-99B-006-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9015
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9007. (Sheet 1 of 1) Intermediate Housing and Gear Assembly Repair (Partial Breakdown)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9016
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

25. RING 110. PIN
GEARSHAFT
GEARSHAFT
DRIVE) GEAR
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9017
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
INTERMEDIATE HOUSING AND GEAR ASSEMBLY (DIAPHRAGM) – ASSEMBLY
(1) Use these procedures to assemble the intermediate housing and gear assembly (diaphragm).

install bearings on idler gear shaft)

press bearing on internally splined
end of starter-generator spur gear
shaft)

press bearing on end opposite
internal splines of starter-generator
spur gear shaft)

press bearing on internally splined
end of PG spur gear shaft)

press bearing on accessory drive
gear)

press bearing on end opposite
internal splines of hydraulic pump
gear shaft)
PN 287226-1-1 gear holder (used to hold idler spur CAGE: 06848

gear shaft while removing or
installing bearing retainer, replaces
PN 285774-1-1)
UP495246
ALL Page 10001
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

compound
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-13-430-802-A01)
B. Assemble Diaphragm Assembly (Subtask 72-10-13-430-004-A01)

(1) Assemble diaphragm as follows:
(a) Install bearing retaining ring (75, Figure 10001) on aft housing half.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT INDEX MARKS ARE ALIGNED WHEN INSTALLING OUTER
RACES.
(b) Install bearings (80) outer race and rollers in housing halves.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT SLOT IN BEARING OUTER RACE IS ALIGNED WITH TAB
ON RETAINER PLATE.
(c) Install retainer plates (70) on housing halves. Secure with lockplates (65) and bolts (60).
1 Torque bolts to 50 in-lb (5.6 Nm).
UP495246
ALL Page 10002
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2 Loosen bolts and torque to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm).

3 Bend lockplate tabs against bolt heads.
(d) (Post SB TPE331-A72-2114) Install packing (10, Figure 10002) on nozzle assembly (1).
(e) Install nozzle assembly (1) in housing and secure with retaining nut (20). Torque nut to 40
in-lb (4.5 Nm).
(f) Install sun and bull gear assembly (85, Figure 10001) and high speed pinion gear assembly
(90) in forward housing half, meshing teeth of bull gear with high speed pinion gearshaft.
(g) Install new packing (55) in aft housing half.
(h) Install aft housing half over sun and bull gear assembly (85) and high speed pinion gear
assembly (90). Secure to forward housing half with bolts (25, 35, 45) and washers (30, 40,
50). Torque bolts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(i) Install bearing retainers (10, 20) and bolts (5, 15) to diaphragm housing assembly (95).
(j) Remove plastic tie wraps securing high speed pinion internal components.
(k) Check freedom of rotation and axial flotation of sun and bull gear. Minimum axial float must
be 0.010 inch (0.25 mm).
(2) Install oil scavenge pump assembly as follows:
(a) Install new packings (85, Figure 10003) on air transfer tube (80). Install tube assembly in
oil scavenge pump assembly (65).
(b) Install screen assemblies (40, 60) on oil scavenge pump assembly (65). Secure with bolts
(35, 55) and nuts (25, 45). Torque bolts to 27 to 35 in-lb (3.1 to 4.0 Nm).
(c) Install new packings (70, 75) in oil scavenge pump assembly (65).
(d) Install oil scavenge pump assembly (65). Secure with bolts (5, 15), washer (10), and packing
with retainer (20). Torque bolts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(3) Install accessory gear assembly and spur gear assembly as follows:
(a) Install accessory gear assembly (55, Figure 10004) and spur gear assembly (25) on
diaphragm assembly. Secure with washers (20, 35) and nuts (15, 30). Torque nuts (15) to
40 in-lb (4.5 Nm).
(b) Install new packings (40, 50) on nozzle assembly (45).
(c) Install nozzle assembly on accessory gear assembly (55) and spur gear (25).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE NOZZLE ASSEMBLY IS FULLY SEATED PRIOR TO
TORQUING THE NUT (30).
(d) Torque nut (30) to 100 in-lb (11.3 Nm).

(e) Install new packings (10) on oil transfer tube (5). Install oil transfer tube.
(4) Assemble and install idler gearshaft, starter-generator drive gearshaft, hydraulic pump drive
gearshaft, and PG drive gearshaft as follows:
UP495246
ALL Page 10003
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: THE INNER AND OUTER RACES OF THE IDLER GEARSHAFT AFT BEARING,
PN 358271, ARE A MATCHED SET IDENTIFIED BY SERIAL NUMBER. RACES
OF THIS MATCHED SET ARE NOT INTERCHANGEABLE WITH OTHER RACES
OF THE SAME PART NUMBER.
(a) Assemble and install idler gearshaft (70, Figure 10005) as follows:
1 Press roller bearing (60) on idler gearshaft (70) aft end, so serial number is next to
shaft shoulder.
NOTE: Install roller bearing inner race with serial number next to shaft shoulder.
2 Press ball bearing (65) on idler gearshaft (70) forward end using PN 287226-1-1,
gear holder and PN 284475-1-1, bearing and bushing driver.
3 Install plugs (45) in retainers (50). Sand exposed ends of plugs flush with surface of
retainer threads.
4 Apply Liqui-Moly brand NV thread compound, anti-seize lubricant to retainers (50)
face and threads.
5 Install retainers (50) in each end of idler gearshaft (70). Torque retainers to 450 in-lb
(50.8 Nm).
6 Install assembled idler gearshaft (70) in diaphragm assembly.
(b) Assemble and install starter-generator drive gearshaft (35, Figure 10005) as follows:
1 Press bearing (15) on starter-generator drive gearshaft (35) internally splined (aft)
end using PN 285162-1-1, bearing and bushing driver.
2 Press bearing (15) on starter-generator drive gearshaft (35) forward end using PN
285163-1-1, bearing and bushing driver.
3 Install assembled starter-generator drive gearshaft (35) in diaphragm assembly.
4 Secure idler gearshaft (70) and starter-generator drive gearshaft (35) with washer
(10) and bolt (5). Torque bolt to 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm).
(c) Assemble and install PG drive gear (150, Figure 10005) as follows:
1 Press bearings (145) on PG drive gear (150) using PN 285180-1-1, bearing and
bushing driver.
2 Install (spring tension) washer (155) in diaphragm assembly.
NOTE: Make sure that (spring tension) washer is installed in proper position.
3 Install assembled PG drive gear (150) in diaphragm assembly. Secure with washer
(140) and bolt (135). Torque bolt to 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm).
(d) Assemble and install hydraulic pump drive gearshaft (125, Figure 10005) as follows:
1 Install new packing (120) on seal plug (115).
2 Install seal plug in hydraulic pump drive gearshaft (125). Secure with pin (110).
3 Press bearing (100) on internally splined (aft) end of hydraulic pump drive gearshaft
(125) using PN 285179-1-1, bearing and bushing driver.
4 Press bearing (100) on forward end of hydraulic pump drive gearshaft (125) using
PN 285181-1-1, bearing and bushing driver.
UP495246
ALL Page 10004
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5 Install (spring tension) washer (130) in diaphragm assembly.

NOTE: Make sure that (spring tension) washer is installed in proper position.
6 Install assembled hydraulic pump drive gearshaft (125) in diaphragm assembly.

Secure with retainer (95) and bolt (90). Torque bolt to 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm).
7 Install oil deflector (85). Secure with washers (80) and bolts (75). Torque bolts to 80
in-lb (9.0 Nm).
UP495246
ALL Page 10005
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10001. (Sheet 1 of 1) (POST SB TPE331-A72-2114) Intermediate Housing and Gear Assembly
(GRAPHIC 72-10-13-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 10006
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 55. PACKING

10. AFT BEARING RETAINER 60. BOLT
15. BOLT 65. LOCKPLATE
20. FORWARD BEARING RETAINER 70. RETAINER PLATE
25. BOLT 75. RETAINING RING
30. WASHER 80. ROLLER BEARING (OUTER RACE)
35. BOLT 85. (POST SB TPE331-A72-2114) SPUR
AND HELICAL (SUN AND BULL) GEAR
ASSEMBLY
40. WASHER 90. (POST SB TPE331-A72-2114) HIGH
SPEED PINION GEAR ASSEMBLY
45. BOLT 95. INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX HOUSING
(DIAPHRAGM HOUSING ASSEMBLY)
50. WASHER
UP495246
ALL Page 10007
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10002. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-A72-2114) High Speed Pinion Nozzle Assembly (GRAPHIC
72-10-13-99B-002-A01)

10. PACKING
UP495246
ALL Page 10008
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-10-13-99B-003-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 10009
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 55. BOLT

25. NUT 75. PACKING
45. NUT
UP495246
ALL Page 10010
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Gear and Drive Idler Housing Assembly (GRAPHIC
72-10-13-99B-004-A01)

30. NUT
UP495246
ALL Page 10011
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10005. (Sheet 1 of 1) Intermediate Housing and Gear Assembly (Partial Breakdown) (Gearshafts)
(GRAPHIC 72-10-13-99B-005-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 10012
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

25. RING 110. PIN
GEARSHAFT
GEARSHAFT
DRIVE) GEAR
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 10013
72-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL TUBE ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the oil tube assembly.
PN 285768-1-1 bushing extractor pliers (used to CAGE: 06848

install or remove sleeve bushings
from outside diameter of all tubes)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-14-420-802-A01)
B. Install Oil Tube Assembly (Subtask 72-10-14-420-004-A01)
(1) Determine proper size oil tube bushings (10, Figure 4001) as follows:
(a) Use the following criteria when determining proper size bushing.
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-14 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1 Use largest dash number as initial trial size.

2 Proper size bushing (10) will have a slight resistance, but will not bind, when inserting
oil tube (5) (with bushing installed) in shouldered (main) shaft.
3 Bushing end gap must not be less than 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) when compressed on
oil tube.
(b) Using PN 285768-1-1, bushing extractor pliers, install trial size bushing (10) (largest dash
number) on oil tube (5) aft journals.
(c) Insert oil tube (5) in main shaft from forward end. Make sure that criteria listed above is
met.
1 If criteria is not met, repeat procedure using smaller dash number bushing (10).
2 If oil tube, with bushing installed, can be inserted into main shaft and criteria listed
above is met, proper size bushing is determined.
3 Remove bushing and set aside.
(d) Repeat the procedure for each oil tube journal to determine proper size oil tube bushings.
(2) Coat bushings (10), determined initially, lightly with clean, approved engine oil. Using PN
285768-1-1, bushing extractor pliers, install bushings on oil tube (5).
(3) Insert oil tube (5) in main shaft from forward end. If required, compress bushings (10) by hand
to permit installation of oil tube.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-14 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Tube Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-14-99B-001-A01)
5. OIL TUBE ASSEMBLY 10. BUSHING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-14 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL TUBE ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the oil tube assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-14-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Oil Tube Assembly (Subtask 72-10-14-200-004-A01)
NOTE: If inspection is being performed with oil tube in shouldered (main) shaft, oil tube and main
shaft must be replaced if inspection requirements are not met. Refer to
(1) Visually inspect for internal damage and distortion. Minor damage or distortion that does not
affect oil flow is allowed.
(2) Visually inspect flange (Plane A) for tears and wear damage. Refer to Figure 8001, Example 1.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-14 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Tears up to 0.150 inch (3.81 mm) are allowed.

(b) Wear damage is allowed around entire flange if wear is not on both sides of flange and is
not through wall of flange.
(c) Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-14-9000) if damage exceeds allowable limits.
(3) Visually inspect flange for distortion. Refer to Figure 8001, Examples 2 and 3. No flange distortion
allowed. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-14-9000).
(4) Inspect gap between flange and main shaft. A gap of 0.250 inches (6.35 mm) or less is allowed.
Refer to Figure 8001, Example 2.
(5) Replace oil tube if inspection requirements are not met and repair is beyond limits of REPAIR
(PGBLK 72-10-14-9000).
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Tube Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-14-99B-001-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-14 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL TUBE ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the oil tube assembly.



APPLICABLE.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-14-300-802-A01)
B. Repair Oil Tube Tears and Wear Damage (Subtask 72-10-14-300-004-A01)
(1) Hand finish lobes of flange to remove material outboard of minimum tear radius. Radial runout
of lobes must be 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) after repair. Refer to Figure 9001.
(2) Flush to remove debris, using MIL-PRF-680, solvent.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-10-14 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Tube Repair (GRAPHIC 72-10-14-99B-001-A01)
C. Repair Oil Tube Flange Distortion (Subtask 72-10-14-300-005-A01)
(1) Cold work to straighten flange.

(2) Perform FPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-10-14 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TACHOMETER-GENERATOR GEAR ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the tachometer-generator gear assembly.

remove bearings from gear shaft or
remove spur gear from
tachometer-generator drive gear
shaft)
PN 285812-1-1 bearing pressing holder (used to CAGE: 06848

hold various bearings while
removing or installing gear shafts)

press gear shaft from bearings)
PN 291606-1 torque and drill hold fixture (used to CAGE: 06848

hold gear assembly to drill out pin
or drill pin hole in bearing retainer
nut)
PN 291606-15 wrench (used to install and torque CAGE: 06848

bearing retainer nut (component of
PN 291606-1))
PN 291606-17 adapter (used to remove bearing CAGE: 06848

retainer nut (component of PN
291606-1))
PN 291786-1 driver set (used to install and CAGE: 06848

remove bearing set on spur gear)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-15-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Tachometer-Generator Gear Assembly (Subtask 72-10-15-020-004-A01)

NOTE: Disassemble only as far as necessary to accomplish required maintenance.
(1) Remove fuel heater plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-01-3000).
(2) Remove torque limiter. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-22-01-3000).
(4) Remove diaphragm assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-13-3000).
(5) Remove spring washer (50, Figure 3001).
(6) Remove assembled gearshaft (55 through 140) from housing.
(7) Press annular ball bearing (55) from assembled gearshaft using PN 285812-1-1, bearing pressing
holder and PN 291140-1, bearing and bushing driver. Discard annular ball bearing.
(8) Place assembled gearshaft and bearing set in PN 291606-1, torque and drill hold fixture.
(9) Drill out pin (60) from assembled gearshaft and annular ball bearing (matched set) as follows:
(a) Install 1/16-inch drill bit in drill press.
(b) Drill out pin (60) by applying pressure intermittently until depth of 0.175 inch (4.45 mm) is
achieved.
(c) Clean drill chips from area.
(d) Remove slotted round nut (65) using PN 291606-15, wrench.
(10) Remove assembled gearshaft and annular ball bearing (matched set) (70 through 140) from
fixture.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(11) Using PN 285812-1-1, bearing pressing holder and PN 291140-1, bearing and bushing driver,
press assembled gearshaft and annular ball bearing (matched set) from annular ball bearing
(70). Discard annular ball bearing and replace with new annular ball bearing when reassembling.
(12) Remove spacer.
(13) Using PN 284181-1-1, bearing and bushing driver, remove pin (80), bearing retainer nut (85),
and spur gear (95) as an assembly from gearshaft (140).
(14) Place assembled spur gear and annular ball bearing (matched set) (80 through 95) in PN
291606-1, torque and drill hold fixture.
(15) Drill out pin (80) from assembled gearshaft and annular ball bearing (matched set) as follows:
(b) Drill out pin (80) by intermittently applying pressure until 0.135-inch (3.43 mm) depth is
achieved.
(c) Clean drill chips from area.
(d) Remove nut using PN 291606-17, adapter.
(16) Remove assembled annular ball bearing (matched set) and spur gear (90, 95) from fixture.
(17) Using PN 291786-1, driver set, remove annular ball bearing (matched set) (90) from spur gear
(95). Discard bearing set.
(18) Remove insert (130) from gearshaft. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-15-9000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Tachometer-Generator Gear Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC

72-10-15-99B-001-A01)

SET)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TACHOMETER-GENERATOR GEAR ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the tachometer-generator gear assembly.

press larger bearing on tachometer
drive gear shaft)

press smaller bearing on
tachometer drive gear shaft)
PN 285747-1-1 nut staking tool (used to stake CAGE: 06848

nozzle to body threaded joint)
PN 285748-1-1 stake pin (used to stake pin in nut CAGE: 06848

and coupling)
PN 287463-1-1 fixed depth gage (used to measure CAGE: 06848

depth of drilled hole, measures
0.170 inch (4.32 mm) depth)



PN 291606-1 torque and drill hold fixture (used to CAGE: 06848

hold gear assembly to drill out pin
or drill pin hole in bearing retainer
nut)
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 291606-17 adapter (used to remove bearing CAGE: 06848

retainer nut (component of PN
291606-1))
PN 291786-1 driver set (used to install and CAGE: 06848

remove bearing set on spur gear)
PN 293602-1 bearing flushing kit (used to CAGE: 06848

pressure flush bearings after drilling
and pinning operations)

remove and install nut from gear
shaft (used with PN 291606-1
torque and drill fixture))


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-15-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Tachometer-Generator Gear Assembly (Subtask 72-10-15-420-004-A01)

NOTE: Refer to ASSEMBLY (PGBLK 70-00-00-10000), for recommended general torque values.
(1) Install insert (130, Figure 4001) in gearshaft. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-15-9000).
(2) Align manufacturer's V mark on new annular ball bearing (matched set) (90).
NOTE: Make sure that manufacturer's markings on outer race of bearing set are aligned
prior to installation.
(3) Install annular ball bearing (matched set) (90) in spur gear (95) using PN 291786-1, driver set.
(a) Place spur gear and annular ball bearing (matched set) in PN 291606-1, torque and drill
hold fixture.
(b) Install bearing retainer nut (85). Torque nut to 100 in-lb (11.3 Nm) using PN 291606-17,
adapter (part of PN 291606-1, torque and drill hold fixture).
(4) Drill and pin bearing retainer nut (85) as follows:
NOTE: Install a protective rubber pad over exposed bearings prior to drilling operation.

(b) Align PN 291606-1, torque and drill hold fixture with drill press so bit is aligned with guide
hole in fixture.
(c) Drill hole to 0.130- to 0.150-inch (3.30 to 3.81 mm) depth. Use PN 287463-15-1, fixed
depth gage to measure 0.130-inch (3.30 mm) depth hole and PN 287463-13-1, fixed depth
gage to measure 0.150-inch (3.81 mm) depth hole.
(d) Use PN 293602-1, bearing flushing kit to clean chips from area.
(e) Install pin (135) to bottom of drilled hole.
(5) Stake pin in place using PN 285748-1-1, stake pin. Use PN 285747-1-1, nut staking tool to offset
pin hole.
(6) Remove gearshaft assembly from fixture.
(7) Install assembled components on gearshaft. Install sleeve spacer (75) and new annular ball
bearing (70) using PN 285178-1-1, bearing and bushing driver. Secure with slotted round nut
(65).
(8) Place assembled gearshaft in PN 291606-1, torque and drill hold fixture and torque slotted round
nut (65) to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm) using PN 294940-1, torque wrench adapter.
(9) Drill and pin assembled gearshaft (65 through 140) as follows:
NOTE: Install a protective rubber pad over exposed bearings prior to drilling operation.

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(b) Align PN 291606-1, torque and drill hold fixture with drill press so that bit is aligned with
guide hole in fixture.
(c) Drill hole by applying intermittent pressure until a depth of 0.170 to 0.190 inch (4.32 to 4.83
mm) is achieved. Use PN 287463-1-1, fixed depth gage to measure 0.170-inch (4.32 mm)
depth hole and PN 287463-2-1, fixed depth gage to measure 0.190-inch (4.83 mm) depth
hole.
(d) Use PN 293602-1, bearing flushing kit to clean chips from area. Install pin to bottom of
drilled hole.
(e) Stake pin in place using PN 285748-1-1, stake pin, and offset pin hole using PN 285747-1-1,
nut staking tool.
(10) Remove gearshaft assembly from fixture. Install new annular ball bearing (55) on gearshaft (140)
using PN 285177-1-1, bearing and bushing driver.
(11) Install gearshaft assembly in housing.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT FUEL CONTROL DRIVE GEARSHAFT WASHER (SPRING
TENSION) IS INSTALLED IN DIAPHRAGM BORE PRIOR TO DIAPHRAGM
INSTALLATION. SPRING WASHER CAN CAUSE EXTENSIVE DAMAGE IF
DISLODGED INTO GEARCASE.
(12) Install spring washer (50). Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-13-4000).

(13) Install diaphragm assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-13-4000).
(15) Install torque limiter. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-22-01-4000).
(16) Install fuel heater plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-01-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Tachometer-Generator Gear Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC

72-10-15-99B-001-A01)

SET)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4005
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TACHOMETER-GENERATOR GEAR ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the tachometer-generator gear assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-15-100-802-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Cleaning Methods
Figure No. Item No. Nomenclature 1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 55, 70
1 Annular ball bearing
6001
Figure 65 Slotted round nut X X
6001
Figure 75 Sleeve spacer X X
6001
Figure 85 Bearing retainer nut X X
6001
Figure 90
1 Annular ball bearing (matched
6001 set)
Figure 95 Spur gear X X
6001
Figure 130 Insert X
6001
Figure 140 Gearshaft X X
6001
NOTES:
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Tachometer-Generator Gear Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC

72-10-15-99B-001-A01)

SET)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TACHOMETER-GENERATOR GEAR ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the tachometer-generator gear assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-15-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Tachometer-Generator Gear Assembly (Subtask 72-10-15-200-004-A01)

(1) Inspect spur gears, gearshaft, and bearings for freedom of rotation. Inspect gear teeth for chips,
cracks, and uneven wear pattern.
(2) Replace insert (130, Figure 8001) if there is any indication of internal cracks, deformation, or
wear depth exceeding 0.010 inch (0.25 mm). Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-15-9000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Tachometer-Generator Gear Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC

72-10-15-99B-001-A01)

SET)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TACHOMETER-GENERATOR GEAR ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the tachometer-generator gear assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-15-300-802-A01)
B. Remove Tachometer-Generator Drive Insert (Subtask 72-10-15-300-004-A01)
(1) Remove ring (125, Figure 9001) from end of gearshaft (140).
(2) Using an awl, remove insert (nonmetallic) (130) from end of gearshaft (140).
(3) If insert cannot be removed easily, a tap, slightly larger than the square hole, may be screwed
in square hole. Remove insert by grasping tap and pulling straight out from end of gearshaft.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Tachometer-Generator Gear Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 72-10-15-99B-001-A01)

SET)
C. Install New Tachometer-Generator Drive Insert (Subtask 72-10-15-300-005-A01)
(1) Prior to installing new insert, make sure that slot in insert is aligned with anti-rotation pin (135,
Figure 9002) in gearshaft.
(2) Install new insert (130).
(3) Install ring (125) on gearshaft (140).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Tachometer-Generator Gear Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 72-10-15-99B-002-A01)

SET)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
72-10-15 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the accessory gear assembly.

install or remove compressor
bearing nut)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-17-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Accessory Gear Assembly (Subtask 72-10-17-020-004-A01)
NOTE: Disassemble only as far, as necessary, to accomplish required maintenance.

(2) Remove torque limiter by-pass valve. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-22-01-3000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(5) Remove nut (5, Figure 3001) using PN 296132-1, torque wrench adapter.
(6) Remove retainers (10, 15), splined coupling (main shaft) (20), sleeve (25), retainer ring (30),
and splined coupling (35).
(7) Remove bolts (40), washers (45), nozzle assembly (60), and oil tube (70).
(9) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Remove nuts (80), washers (85), and accessory gear assembly
(90).
(10) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Remove nuts (80) and accessory gear assembly (90).
NOTE: Once accessory gear assembly is removed, compressor bearing shims are loose.
Retain shims for assembly.
(11) Remove spur gear (95) and oil scoop (100).

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Gear Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 72-10-17-99B-001-A01)

10. RETAINER 65. PACKING
15. RETAINER 70. OIL TUBE
20. SPLINED COUPLING (MAIN SHAFT) 75. PACKING
25. SLEEVE 80. NUT
35. SPLINED COUPLING 90. ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY
40. BOLT 95. SPUR GEAR
45. WASHER 100. OIL SCOOP
55. STRAINER
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the accessory gear assembly.

bearing nut)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-17-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

INSERT PAGE 2 OF 4 FACING 72-10-17, INSTALLATION, PAGE 4002.
Reason: To add CAUTION before Paragraph 1.B.(7) and change Paragraph 1.B.(7).
CAUTION is added and Paragraph 1.B.(7) is changed as follows:
CAUTION: DO NOT RE-USE RETAINER RING. REPLACE RING WITH NEW (0 TIME SINCE
NEW) RING AT EACH EXPOSURE.
(7) Install sleeve (25) in splined shaft coupling (20) and install new (0 TSN) retaining ring (30) in
coupling.
Page 2 of 4
72-10-17 19 Oct 2015

NOTE: Please see
RELEASED the
FOR THE TEMPORARY REVISION
EXCLUSIVE USE BY: AIRCRAFT that
TECHNICAL revises this page.
PUBLISHERS

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Accessory Gear Assembly (Subtask 72-10-17-420-004-A01)

CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CORRECT WIDTH SPUR GEAR IS INSTALLED. USE ONLY THE
PART NUMBER LISTED IN IPC, 72-01-34.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT OIL SCOOP IS INSTALLED WITH WORDS “GEAR SIDE” VISIBLE
AFTER INSTALLATION.
(1) Install oil scoop (100, Figure 4001) (with words “gear side” visible) and spur gear (95) on
shouldered (main) shaft.
(2) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install accessory gear assembly (90). Secure with washers (85)
and nuts (80). Torque nuts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT ANTI-ROTATION PIN IN ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY LOCKS
IN SLOT IN BEARING.
(3) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Position accessory gear assembly (90) on carrier making sure that
anti-rotation pin locks in slot of bearing. Secure with nuts (5). Torque nuts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(4) Install new packings (75) on oil tube (70). Install oil tube in accessory gear assembly (90).
(5) Install new packing (65) on nozzle assembly (60). Install nozzle on oil tube (70). Secure with
washers (45) and bolts (40). Torque bolts to 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm).
(6) Install splined coupling (35) on shouldered (main) shaft.
NOTE: Inspection of splined coupling may have revealed that load surfaces on only one side
of splines were acceptable. This will be indicated by the words “THIS SIDE
FORWARD” etched on splined coupling.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT RETAINER RING IS COMPLETELY ENGAGED IN GROOVE OF

SPLINED SHAFT COUPLING. IF RETAINER RING IS NOT PROPERLY INSTALLED,
THE GEARTRAIN COULD UNCOUPLE FROM THE ENGINE RESULTING IN A
TOTAL LOSS OF THRUST AND THE ENGINE BEING CONTROLLED BY THE OSFG.
(7) Install sleeve (25) in splined coupling (main shaft) (20), then install retainer ring (30) in coupling.
(8) Install assembled coupling over splined coupling (35). Install retainer (15) in splined coupling
(main shaft) (20).
(9) Install nut (5) with slots at lower end in retainer (10) dimples.
(10) Apply clean, approved engine oil to shouldered (main) shaft nut face and threads.
(11) Install assembled nut and retainer in retainer (15) and secure with nut (5).
(12) Using PN 296132-1, torque wrench adapter, torque nut (5) to 900 in-lb (101.7 Nm). Loosen nut
and torque three times to 900 in-lb (101.7 Nm).
(13) Deform retainer (10) in slots of retainer (15).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(16) Install torque limiter by-pass valve. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-22-01-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Gear Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-17-99B-001-A01)

25. SLEEVE 80. NUT
55. STRAINER
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4005
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the accessory gear assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-17-100-802-A01)
(1) Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000) for general cleaning instructions and description
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Cleaning Methods
Figure 6001 5 Nut X X
Figure 6001 10, 15 Retainer X X
Figure 6001 20 Splined coupling X X
(main shaft)
Figure 6001 25 Sleeve X X
Figure 6001 35 Splined coupling X X
Figure 6001 55 Strainer X
Figure 6001 70 Oil tube X
Figure 6001 95 Spur gear X X
Figure 6001 100 Oil scoop X X
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Gear Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-10-17-99B-001-A01)

25. SLEEVE 80. NUT
55. STRAINER
UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6004
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the accessory gear assembly.


APPLICABLE.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-17-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Accessory Gear Assembly (Subtask 72-10-17-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect splined coupling (main shaft) (20, Figure 8001).
(a) No cracks allowed.
(b) No dents or scoring on outer diameter surfaces which exceed 0.01-inch (0.3 mm) depth
allowed.
(c) No raised metal is allowed. Remove raised metal using a white Arkansas polishing stone.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(d) No chipping or dents at end of splines allowed.

(e) Missing or worn-through silver plate is allowed on splined surfaces.
(f) No internal spline wear step which exceeds 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) allowed.
(g) No internal spline spalling which exceeds 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) allowed.
(h) No damage through wall of Teflon liner which exposes inner diameter allowed.
(i) Replace splined shaft coupling if inspection requirements are not met.
(2) Visually inspect splined coupling (35).
(a) No cracks or broken-out pieces allowed.
(b) No raised metal allowed. Remove raised metal using a white Arkansas polishing stone.
(c) Visually inspect internal and external spline load surfaces (both sides of splines) for wear
step and spalling.
1 No spline wear step which exceeds 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) allowed.
2 No spalling which exceeds 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) allowed.
(d) Visually inspect forward and aft surfaces (example: Surface A, Figure 8002) for wear step
and pitting. No wear step or pitting which exceeds 0.0002 inch (0.005 mm) allowed.
(e) Perform the following if load surfaces on one side of splines are acceptable and load
surfaces on opposite side of splines have defects which exceed 0.007 inch (0.18 mm).
1 Position splined coupling with unacceptable spline load surfaces to the right. Refer
to Figure 8002.
2 Etch to a maximum depth of 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) the words “THIS SIDE FORWARD”
on Surface A.
(3) Replace splined coupling if inspection requirements are not met.
(4) Inspect accessory gear assembly for binding of assembled gearing, and unusual wear patterns.
Inspect gearshafts for chipped and broken teeth, and unusual wear pattern. Replace assembly
that does not meet inspection requirements.
(5) Visually inspect accessory gear bearing for excessive damage and accessory gear assembly
for cracks. If bearing has excessive damage or housing is cracked, inspect second stage turbine
rotor for blade shift. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-07-8000).
(6) Inspect nozzle assembly for contamination and distortion that may affect oil flow, or spray pattern.
Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
(7) Inspect spur gear splines and teeth.
(a) No chipped or broken splines or teeth allowed.
(b) Inspect gear teeth load surfaces for defects such as scoring, pitting, and chipping. No visual
defects that can be felt using a ball tip stylus tool - 0.015 inch radius, 0.031 inch diameter
(0.38 mm radius, 0.79 mm diameter) allowed.
(c) No wear steps allowed.
(8) Visually inspect retainer for cracks. If cracks are suspected, perform MPI. Refer to
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). No cracks allowed.
(9) Visually inspect locking portion of the retainer for roundness. Reshape the top lip, as necessary,
to avoid interference during installation. After reshaping, visually check for cracks. If cracks are
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

INSERT PAGE 3 OF 4 FACING 72-10-17, INSPECTION/CHECK, PAGE 8003.
Reason: To delete Paragraph 2.B.(10).
Paragraph 2.B.(10) is deleted as follows:
(10) Deleted.
Page 3 of 4
72-10-17 19 Oct 2015

NOTE: Please see
RELEASED the
PUBLISHERS

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
suspected, perform MPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). No cracks

allowed.
(10) Inspect retainer ring for wear. Replace retainer ring if wear exceeds 0.003 inch (0.08 mm).
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Gear Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-17-99B-001-A01)

25. SLEEVE 80. NUT
55. STRAINER
UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Splined Coupling Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-17-99B-002-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8005
72-10-17 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL PRESSURE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER BEARING – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the oil pressure pump assembly and roller bearing.
PN 284183-1-1 oil pump removal driver (used to CAGE: 06848

remove oil pressure pump from
accessory drive housing, replaced
by PN 296509-2)
PN 285773-1-1 bearing puller ((mechanical) used CAGE: 06848

to remove bearing outer race from
accessory drive housing)
PN 296509-2 pressure pump installer/remover CAGE: 06848

assembly (used to install or remove
oil pressure pump into or from cavity
of accessory drive housing,
replaces PN 296509-1)


APPLICABLE.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-18-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Oil Pressure Pump Assembly and Roller Bearing (Subtask 72-10-18-020-004-A01)

NOTE: If no maintenance is required in this area proceed to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-19-3000)
for further disassembly.
(3) Remove screws (5, Figure 3001) and washers (10) securing oil pressure pump assembly (15).
Align holes on gear of pump assembly with head of each screw to be removed.
(4) Using PN 284183-1-1, oil pump removal driver or PN 296509-2, pressure pump installer/remover
assembly, remove oil pressure pump assembly (15) and remove packings (20, 25).
(5) Remove screw (5, Figure 3002) and retainer (10) securing outer race of roller bearing (15) and
remove outer race using PN 285773-1-1, bearing puller.
(6) Remove bolts (20) and washers (25) securing flanged journal roller bearing outer race (30) and
remove outer race.
NOTE: (Post SB TPE331-72-0957) Washer (25) is not used.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Pressure Pump Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 72-10-18-99B-001-A01)

15. OIL PRESSURE PUMP ASSEMBLY
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Roller Bearing Removal (GRAPHIC 72-10-18-99B-002-A01)
5. SCREW 20. BOLT

10. RETAINER 25. WASHER (PART DELETED)
15. ROLLER BEARING (OUTER RACE) 30. ROLLER BEARING (OUTER RACE)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL PRESSURE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER BEARING – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the oil pressure pump assembly and roller bearing.

PN 296509-1 pressure pump installer (used to CAGE: 06848

install oil pressure pump in
accessory drive housing, replaced
by PN 296509-2)
PN 296509-2 pressure pump installer/remover CAGE: 06848

assembly (used to install or remove
oil pressure pump into or from cavity
of accessory drive housing,


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-18-420-802-A01)
B. Install Oil Pressure Pump Assembly and Roller Bearing (Subtask 72-10-18-420-004-A01)

CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT SCREWS (15, FIGURE 4001) ARE INSTALLED ON OIL PRESSURE
PUMP ASSEMBLY WITH 20 IN-LB (2.3 NM) TORQUE.
(1) Install new packings (20, 25, Figure 4002) on oil pressure pump assembly (15). Install oil pressure
pump assembly so pump outlet is aligned with gearcase passage.
NOTE: When oil pressure pump is installed, the oil passage in pump must align with gearcase
oil passage.
(2) Install and secure PN 296509-1, pressure pump installer or PN 296509-2, pressure pump
installer/remover assembly against face of accessory drive housing with four nuts.
(3) Press oil pressure pump assembly in place using PN 296509-1, pressure pump installer or PN
296509-2, pressure pump installer/remover assembly.
(4) Remove pressure pump installer.
(5) Secure oil pressure pump assembly (15) with washers (10) and screws (5). Torque screws to
60 in-lb (6.8 Nm).
(6) Check oil pressure pump assembly (15) for freedom of rotation.
CAUTION: ALIGN ROLLER BEARING DRAIN HOLES AT TOP AND BOTTOM.
(7) Install roller bearing (30, Figure 4003) outer race in accessory housing.
NOTE: Inner race of bearing is installed on propeller shaft.
(8) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0957) Secure with washers (25) and bolts (20).
(9) (Post SB TPE331-72-0957) Secure with bolts (20).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(10) Torque bolts (20) to an initial value of 70 in-lb (7.9 Nm), then loosen and retorque to a final value
of 60 in-lb (6.8 Nm).
(11) Hold roller bearings in place with PN 284197-1-1, bearing retainer. Secure retainer to accessory
housing.
(12) Install outer race of roller bearing (15) in accessory housing with bearing serial number visible
from front of gearbox. Secure race with retainers (10) and screws (5). Torque screws to 50 in-lb
(5.6 Nm) then loosen and retorque to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm).
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Pressure Pump Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-18-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 35. KEY

10. WASHER 40. BODY ASSEMBLY
15. SCREW 45. SEAL
25. PLATE ASSEMBLY 50. SPUR GEARSHAFT
30. ROTOR SET
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Pressure Pump Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-18-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4005
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Roller Bearing Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-18-99B-003-A01)
5. SCREW 20. BOLT

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4006
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL PRESSURE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER BEARING – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the oil pressure pump assembly and roller bearing.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-18-100-802-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Cleaning Methods
Figure No. Item No. Nomenclature 1 2 3 4 5
Figure 15 Oil pressure pump assembly X
6001
Figure 10 Retainer X X
6002
Figure 15
1 Roller bearing (outer race)
6002
Figure 30
1 Roller bearing (outer race)
6002
NOTES:
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Pressure Pump Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-10-18-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Roller Bearing Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-10-18-99B-002-A01)
5. SCREW 20. BOLT

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6004
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL PRESSURE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER BEARING – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the oil pressure pump assembly and roller bearing.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-18-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Oil Pressure Pump Assembly and Roller Bearing (Subtask 72-10-18-200-004-A01)

(1) Inspect roller bearing (30, Figure 8001) and oil pressure pump assembly (15, Figure 8002) for
freedom of rotation and any evidence of binding.
(2) Visually inspect oil pressure pump assembly (15) for pitting.
(a) Pitting is allowed anywhere, provided it does not exceed 0.01-inch (0.2 mm) depth.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(b) No pitting which exceeds 0.01-inch (0.2 mm) depth allowed except as defined in REPAIR
(PGBLK 72-10-18-9000).
(3) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
72-10-18-9000).
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Roller Bearing Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-18-99B-001-A01)
5. SCREW 20. BOLT

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Pressure Pump Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-18-99B-002-A01)

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL PRESSURE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND ROLLER BEARING – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the oil pressure pump assembly and roller bearing.
PN 285133-2-1 seal puller (used to remove seal CAGE: 06848

from oil pressure pump)
PN 296386-1 seal holder and driver (used to CAGE: 06848

install seal in oil pressure pump
plate assembly)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
Aeroshell No. 7 grease Shell Oil Co., Aviation Sales Div.,

PL32/H Hylomar jointing compound Marston Bentley Ltd., 9 Naylor St.,

Liverpool L36DS United Kingdom
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-18-300-802-A01)
B. Repair Oil Pump Assembly (Subtask 72-10-18-300-004-A01)
(1) Partially disassemble oil pressure pump assembly as follows:

NOTE: To replace oil pressure pump seal (45, Figure 9001) without removing oil pressure
pump. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-08-3000) and INSTALLATION (PGBLK
72-10-08-4000).
NOTE: The following repair procedures are considered acceptable as corrective action for
oil pressure pump assemblies experiencing a low pressure output.
(a) Remove nuts (5), washers (10), and screws (15) securing plate assembly (25) to body
assembly (40).
(b) Remove assembled plate assembly (25) and seal (45).
(c) Remove rotor set (30).
(d) Using PN 285133-2-1, seal puller, remove oil pump shaft seal (45).
(2) Visually inspect oil pressure pump plate assembly (25) and body assembly (40) for pitting as
follows:
(a) Pitting is allowed anywhere if it does not exceed 0.01-inch (0.2 mm) depth.
(b) Pitting on interior of plate assembly within the boundaries of Dimension R and Dimension
S is allowed if it does not exceed 0.02-inch (0.5 mm) depth. Refer to View B, Figure 9002.
1 Dimension R must not exceed 0.15 inch (3.8 mm).
2 Dimension S must not exceed 0.15 inch (3.8 mm).
(c) Pitting on interior of housing assembly within the boundary of Dimension P and outward
of minimum diameter of casting is allowed if it does not exceed 0.02-inch (0.5 mm) depth.
Refer to View C, Figure 9002.
1 Dimension P must not exceed 0.15 inch (3.8 mm).
(d) Pitting which exceeds 0.02-inch (0.5 mm) depth and is within the boundaries specified in
above two steps may be repaired as follows:
1 Hand finish within the boundaries defined above to depth of pitting and to profile
shown in Sections Y-Y and Z-Z. Minimum thickness of reworked area must not be
less than minimum wall as cast (Dimension T).
2 Break edges and polish reworked area with rubber polish wheel.
3 Treat reworked area with chromate conversion coating solution. Refer to CLEANING
(PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
(3) Inspect oil pressure pump rotor set (30, Figure 9001) as follows:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Visually inspect rotor set (30) for nicks, scoring, burrs, pitting, gouges, and cracks. None
are permitted. Refer to Figure 9003.
NOTE: Rotor sets are matched. Do not separate or intermingle with rotors from other
matched sets.
(b) Perform dimensional inspection if visual inspection indicates wear or damage. Refer to
Figure 9003 for dimensional check.
(c) Replace rotor set (30, Figure 9001) if inspection requirements are not met.
(4) Assemble oil pressure pump assembly as follows:
(a) Insert spur-gearshaft (50) through body assembly (40) and install key (35) in slot of
spur-gearshaft.
(b) Apply a light coat of clean, approved engine oil to rotor set (30) and install inner rotor of
rotor set to spur-gearshaft (50) over key (35).
NOTE: Rotors of rotor set may be assembled without regard to position of side markings.
(c) Install outer rotor of rotor set over inner rotor in inside rotor pocket of body.
(d) Install oil pressure pump shaft seal (45).
1 Coat outer surface of seal with mating surface of oil pressure pump plate assembly
with PL32/H, Hylomar jointing compound.
2 Coat lip of seal and mating surface of shaft with Aeroshell No. 7, grease.
3 Install new oil pressure pump shaft seal using PN 296386-1, seal holder and driver.
(e) Carefully install plate (25) in place on gearshaft. Make sure that body assembly (40) and
plate (25) have full interfacing fit.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT SCREWS (15) ARE INSTALLED ON OIL PRESSURE PUMP
ASSEMBLY WITH 20 IN-LB (2.3 NM) TORQUE.
(f) Secure plate assembly (25) to body assembly (40) with nuts (5), washers (10) and screws
(15). Torque screws to 20 in-lb (2.3 Nm).
(g) Check for freedom of rotation of spur-gearshaft and rotor set.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Pressure Pump Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 72-10-18-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 35. KEY

10. WASHER 40. BODY ASSEMBLY
15. SCREW 45. SEAL
25. PLATE ASSEMBLY 50. SPUR GEARSHAFT
30. ROTOR SET
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9004
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Pressure Pump Housing and Plate Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC
72-10-18-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9005
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. P 0.15 (3.8) MAXIMUM DIM. S 0.15 (3.8) MAXIMUM
DIM. R 0.15 (3.8) MAXIMUM
Figure 9003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Rotor Set Repair (GRAPHIC 72-10-18-99B-003-A01)
Limits
Reference Inch (mm)
DIA B 2.1220 TO 2.1230 (53.899 TO 53.924)
DIM. D 0.010 (0.25) MAXIMUM
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9006
72-10-18 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
COMPRESSOR BEARING – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the compressor bearing.
PN 296633-2 compressor seal holder and driver CAGE: 06848

(used to guide, align and press seal
into bearing carrier, also used to
remove seal)
PN 296637-2 compressor bearing mechanical CAGE: 06848

puller (used to remove bearing from
carrier and shouldered (main) shaft)
PN 298424-1 hydraulic bearing and spacer puller CAGE: 06848

assembly (used to remove
compressor bearing and spacer)
PN 298436-1 mechanical spacer puller (used to CAGE: 06848

remove bearing spacer from
shouldered (main) shaft)
PN 831086-1 compressor bearing carrier CAGE: 06848

remover/installer (used to remove
or install compressor bearing
carrier)
PN 831389-1 mechanical spacer puller (used to CAGE: 06848

remove bearing spacer from main
shaft)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-19-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Compressor Bearing Retainer and Carrier (Subtask 72-10-19-020-004-A01)

(3) Remove accessory gear assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-17-3000).
(4) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Remove nuts (5, Figure 3001), retainer (20) and shims (25).
NOTE: Do not remove pin from retainer unless damage is indicated by inspection.
(5) Remove duplex bearing (40) from bearing carrier (65) and shouldered (main) shaft using PN
296637-2, compressor bearing mechanical puller or PN 298424-1, hydraulic bearing and spacer
puller assembly.
(6) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0751/TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Remove spring washer (45).
(7) (Post SB TPE331-72-0751/TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Remove notched spacer (46).
(8) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Using PN 298436-1, mechanical spacer puller, PN
298424-1, hydraulic bearing and spacer puller assembly, or PN 831389-1, mechanical spacer
puller, remove spacer (50).
NOTE: (Post SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Spacer (50) is not used.
(9) Using PN 831086-1, compressor bearing carrier remover/installer, remove assembled bearing
carrier, stationary oil seal, and rotor assembly.
(10) Remove rotor (rotating oil seal) (55). Press stationary oil seal assembly (compressor bellows
seal) (60) from bearing carrier using PN 296633-2, compressor seal holder and driver.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: SHIMS INSTALLED BETWEEN BEARING CARRIER AND HOUSING ESTABLISH A

CRITICAL DIMENSION. RECORD EXACT NUMBER AND THICKNESS OF SHIMS
REMOVED TO MAKE SURE THAT SAME NUMBER AND THICKNESS ARE
INSTALLED AT INSTALLATION.
(12) Remove shims (80). Record exact number and thickness.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Compressor Bearing Removal (GRAPHIC

72-10-19-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 50. SPACER

15. PIN 55. ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL)
1 RETAINER 60. STATIONARY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY
20.
(COMPRESSOR BELLOWS SEAL)
25. SHIM 65. BEARING CARRIER
40. DUPLEX BEARING 70. PACKING
45. SPRING WASHER 75. PACKING
46. NOTCHED SPACER 80. SHIM
NOTES:
1. (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Retainer (20) installation is deleted and accessory gear assembly installation is
used in its place.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3005
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
COMPRESSOR BEARING – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the compressor bearing.

bearing nut)
PN 296562-2 bearing puller ((mechanical) used CAGE: 06848

to install bearing in carrier and on

remove seal)
PN 298026-1 back-up fixture assembly (used to CAGE: 06848

hold rotating group in place when
installing compressor end bearing)
PN 831086-1 compressor bearing carrier CAGE: 06848

remover/installer (used to remove
or install compressor bearing
carrier)
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-19-420-802-A01)
B. Install Bearing Retainer and Bearing Carrier (Subtask 72-10-19-420-004-A01)

(1) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0751/TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Determine thickness of shims
required for fixed build Dimension BD as follows:
NOTE: Dimension BD (fixed build dimension) is the desired height of the spring washer under
load.
(a) Using depth micrometer, measure bearing carrier (65, Figure 4001) from bearing seat to
flange face. Record as Dimension A.
(b) Measure bearing (40) height. Record as Dimension B.
(c) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Measure retainer (20) step. Record as Dimension C.
(d) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Measure accessory gear assembly (90) step. Record as
Dimension C.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: DO NOT COMPRESS SPRING WASHER TO LESS THAN AN OPERATING

HEIGHT OF 0.197 INCH (5.00 MM).
(e) Calculate shim requirement. Refer to Figure 4002.

NOTE: Dimension BD is the spring washer compressed height. Dimension BD must
be 0.197 to 0.200 inch (5.00 to 5.08 mm).
1 Add Dimensions B, C, and Nominal BD (0.1985 inch (5.042 mm)).

2 Subtract Dimension A from the sum of Dimensions B, C, and BD.
3 Result is shim (25) thickness required to obtain Dimension BD.
(2) (Post SB TPE331-72-0751/TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Determine thickness of shims
required for nominal build Dimension BD as follows:
(a) Measure bearing carrier (65, Figure 4003) from bearing seat to flange face using a depth
micrometer. Record as Dimension A.
(b) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Place bearing (40, Figure 4003) and notched spacer (46) on
retainer (20).
(c) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Place bearing (40) and notched spacer (46) on accessory
gear assembly (90).
(d) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Measure from notched spacer (46) face to retainer (20) step.
Record as Dimension B.
(e) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Measure from notched spacer (46) face to accessory gear
assembly (90) step. Record as Dimension B.
(f) Calculate shim requirement. Refer to Figure 4004.
NOTE: Dimension BD must be 0.002 to 0.004 inch (0.05 to 0.10 mm).
1 Subtract Dimension A from Dimension B.

2 Subtract Dimension BD from the difference of Dimensions A and B.
3 Result is shim (25) thickness required to obtain Dimension BD.
(3) Install new packing (75, Figure 4005) in bearing carrier (65).
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: PERSONNEL HANDLING STATIONARY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY (COMPRESSOR

BELLOWS SEAL) AND ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) MUST WEAR EITHER
SYNTHETIC RUBBER GLOVES OR NYLON MESH GLOVES WITH POLYETHYLENE
PALMS AND FINGERS. IN CASE NEITHER OF THE ABOVE ARE AVAILABLE,
CLEAN COTTON GLOVES MUST BE WORN.
CAUTION: STATIONARY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY (COMPRESSOR BELLOWS SEAL) AND ROTOR
(ROTATING OIL SEAL) MUST BE INSTALLED DRY. DO NOT LUBRICATE.
CAUTION: STATIONARY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY (COMPRESSOR BELLOWS SEAL) MUST

BOTTOM IN CARRIER WITHOUT EXCESSIVE PRESSURE OR CUTTING PACKING.
CAUTION: STATIONARY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY (COMPRESSOR BELLOWS SEAL) (60) AND
ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) (55) MUST BE INSTALLED AS A SET TO MAKE
SURE OF CORRECT ENGINE BUILD, AND TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO
COMPRESSOR COMPONENTS.
(4) Using PN 296633-2, compressor seal holder and driver and an arbor press, install stationary oil
seal assembly (compressor bellows seal) (60) in bearing carrier (65).
(5) Install PN 298026-1, back-up fixture assembly at scavenge pump mount.
CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTORQUE BACK-UP FIXTURE HANDLE.
(6) Turn back-up fixture handle until snug against shaft to hold second stage impeller against shroud.
(7) Make sure that packing (75) is properly installed in bearing carrier (65).
(8) Install packing (70) on bearing carrier (65).
NOTE: Apply a thin coat of clean, approved, engine oil, Santovac OS-124, lubricant, or
Santovac 5, lubricant prior to installation.
(9) Install same number and thickness of shims (80) removed. Refer to the exact number and
thickness of shims recorded in REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-19-3000).
(10) Install assembled bearing carrier (65), stationary oil seal assembly, and packings in housing
assembly using PN 831086-1, compressor bearing carrier remover/installer.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT PART NUMBER OF ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) (55) IS
CORRECT. INSTALLATION OF THE WRONG PART NUMBER ROTOR CAN RESULT
IN DAMAGE TO COMPRESSOR IMPELLERS AND SHROUDS, AND WILL CAUSE
BINDING OF ROTATING ASSEMBLY.
(11) Make sure that part number of rotor (rotating oil seal) (55) is correct.
(12) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Measure thickness of rotor (rotating oil seal) (55).
Refer to Figure 4006. Record as Dimension J. If Dimension J is not 0.359 to 0.361 inch (9.12
to 9.17 mm), replace rotor.
(13) (Post SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Measure thickness of rotor (rotating oil seal) (55).
Refer to Figure 4006. Record as Dimension J. If Dimension J is not 0.653 to 0.658 inch (16.59
to 16.71 mm), replace rotor.
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: STATIONARY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY (COMPRESSOR BELLOWS SEAL) AND ROTOR
(ROTATING OIL SEAL) MUST BE INSTALLED DRY. DO NOT LUBRICATE.
(14) Make sure that stationary oil seal assembly (compressor bellows seal) (60, Figure 4005) and
rotor (rotating oil seal) (55) are dry; do not lubricate prior to installation.
(15) Install rotor (rotating oil seal) (55), flat side down, on stationary oil seal assembly (compressor
bellows seal) (60).
(16) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Heat spacer (50) to 450°F (232.2°C) for 10 minutes
and install, or install using PN 296562-2, bearing puller.
CAUTION: (PRE SB TPE331-72-0751/TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) FAILURE TO INSTALL

SPRING WASHER MAY RESULT IN SIGNIFICANT LOSS OF ENGINE
PERFORMANCE OR ABNORMAL ENGINE OPERATION IN THE FORM OF
COMPRESSOR SURGE.
(17) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0751/TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Install spring washer (45) in

bearing carrier (65).
CAUTION: (POST SB TPE331-72-0751/TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) NOTCHED SPACER
MUST BE INSTALLED WITH ARROW POINTING TOWARD BEARING CARRIER.
AN IMPROPERLY INSTALLED NOTCHED SPACER CAN CAUSE AN INCONSISTENT
LOAD ON THE COMPRESSOR BEARING, REDUCED OIL SCAVENGE, AND HIGH
OIL TEMPERATURE.
(18) (Post SB TPE331-72-0751/TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Install notched spacer (46) in

bearing carrier (65), with arrow pointing toward bearing carrier.
(19) Align duplex bearing (40) outer race anti-rotation slot at the 12 o'clock position. Using PN
296562-2, bearing puller, install duplex bearing (40) on shouldered (main) shaft.
(20) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install oil scoop (100, Figure 4007) and spur gear (95).
(21) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install thickness of shims (25, Figure 4005) determined for fixed
build Dimension BD or for nominal build Dimension BD, as applicable.
(22) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install thickness of shims (92, Figure 4007) determined for fixed
build Dimension BD or for nominal build Dimension BD, as applicable.
(23) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Position retainer (20, Figure 4005) on bearing carrier (65). Secure
with speed nut in place of nuts (5). Torque speed nuts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
NOTE: Make sure that retainer anti-rotation pin locks in bearing slot.
(24) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install accessory gear assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK
72-10-17-4000).
(25) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install accessory gear assembly (90, Figure 4007). Secure with
speed nuts in place of nuts (80). Torque speed nuts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
NOTE: Make sure that accessory gear assembly anti-rotation pin locks in bearing slot.
UP495246
ALL Page 4005
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(26) Remove PN 298026-1, back-up fixture assembly.

(27) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install splined coupling (35) on shouldered (main) shaft.
NOTE: Inspection of splined coupling may have revealed that load surfaces on only one side
of splines were acceptable. This will be indicated by the words “THIS SIDE
FORWARD” etched on splined coupling.
CAUTION: (POST SB TPE331-A72-0997) MAKE SURE THAT RETAINER RING IS COMPLETELY

ENGAGED IN GROOVE OF SPLINED SHAFT COUPLING. IF RETAINER RING IS
NOT PROPERLY INSTALLED, THE GEARTRAIN COULD UNCOUPLE FROM THE
ENGINE RESULTING IN A TOTAL LOSS OF THRUST AND THE ENGINE BEING
CONTROLLED BY THE OSFG
(28) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install sleeve (25) and retainer ring (30) in splined (main shaft)
coupling (20).
(29) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install assembled coupling over splined coupling (35).
(30) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install retainer (15) in splined (main shaft) coupling (20).
(31) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install nut (5) with slots at lower end in retainer (10).
(32) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Apply clean, approved engine oil to hexagon (main shaft) nut (5)
face and threads.
(33) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install assembled nut and retainer in retainer (15) and secure with
main shaft nut (5).
(34) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Using PN 296132-1, torque wrench adapter, torque main shaft
nut (5) to 900 in-lb (101.7 Nm). Loosen main shaft nut and torque three times to 900 in-lb (101.7
Nm).
(35) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Deform retainer (10) in retainer (15) slots.
(36) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install new packing (65) on nozzle assembly (60).
(37) Install nozzle on oil tube (70). Secure with washers (45) and bolts (40). Torque bolts to 35 in-lb
(4.0 Nm).
(38) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install new packings (75) on oil tube (70). Install oil tube in accessory
gear assembly (90).
NOTE: (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Packings must be lubricated with clean, approved
engine oil, Santovac OS-124, lubricant, or Santovac 5, lubricant prior to installation.

UP495246
ALL Page 4006
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0751/TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Compressor Bearing

Carrier Installation - Retainer Shim Requirement (GRAPHIC 72-10-19-99B-001-A01)
20. RETAINER 65. BEARING CARRIER

40. BEARING 90. ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY
UP495246
ALL Page 4007
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0751/TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Assemble

Compressor Bearing Carrier (GRAPHIC 72-10-19-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4008
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
20. RETAINER 45. SPRING WASHER

UP495246
ALL Page 4009
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4003. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-0751/TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Compressor

Bearing Carrier Installation - Retainer Shim Requirement (GRAPHIC 72-10-19-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4010
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

46. NOTCHED SPACER
UP495246
ALL Page 4011
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4004. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-0751/TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Assemble

Compressor Bearing Carrier (GRAPHIC 72-10-19-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4012
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
20. RETAINER 46. NOTCHED SPACER

UP495246
ALL Page 4013
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4005. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Compressor Bearing Installation (GRAPHIC

72-10-19-99B-005-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4014
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 50. SPACER

20.
NOTES:
used in its place.
Figure 4006. (Sheet 1 of 1) Rotor Measurement (GRAPHIC 72-10-19-99B-006-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4015
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4007. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Accessory Gear Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC
72-10-19-99B-007-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4016
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

25. SLEEVE 80. NUT
30. RETAINER RING 90. ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY
35. SPLINED COUPLING 92. SHIM (25)
55. STRAINER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4017
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
COMPRESSOR BEARING – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the compressor bearing.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-19-100-802-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Cleaning Methods
Figure No. Item No. Nomenclature 1 2
Figure 6001 20 Retainer X X
Figure 6001 25, 80 Shim X X
Figure 6001 40 1 Duplex bearing
Figure 6001 45 Spring washer X X

Figure 6001 46 Notched spacer X X
Figure 6001 50 Spacer X X
Figure 6001 55 Rotor (rotating oil seal) X X
Figure 6001 60 Stationary oil seal assembly (compressor X X
bellows seal)
Figure 6001 65 Bearing carrier X X
NOTES:
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Compressor Bearing Cleaning (GRAPHIC

72-10-19-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 50. SPACER

20.
NOTES:
used in its place.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6004
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
COMPRESSOR BEARING – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the compressor bearing.


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-19-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Compressor Bearing Carrier Support Assembly (Subtask 72-10-19-200-004-A01)

(1) Inspect compressor bearing carrier components (installed).
(2) Check for oil leakage from compressor seal at air inlet with engine not operating. Refer to FAULT
ISOLATION (PGBLK 72-00-00-1000), for maximum allowable limits.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Inspect removed compressor bearing carrier components as follows:

(a) Inspect bearing carrier for cracks and warpage. No cracks or warpage allowed.
CAUTION: HANDLING OF STATIONARY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY AND ROTOR MUST BE
MINIMIZED. PERSONNEL MUST WEAR EITHER SYNTHETIC RUBBER
GLOVES OR NYLON MESH GLOVES WITH POLYETHYLENE PALMS AND
FINGERS. IN CASE NONE OF THE ABOVE ARE AVAILABLE, CLEAN COTTON
GLOVES MUST BE WORN.
CAUTION: STATIONARY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY AND ROTOR MUST BE INSTALLED DRY.
DO NOT LUBRICATE.
(b) Inspect stationary oil seal assembly and rotor as follows:

1 Visually inspect metal housing for cracks and distortion. No cracks or distortion
allowed.
2 Visually inspect carbon seal for cracks. No cracks allowed.
3 Visually inspect carbon sealing surface for discontinuous contact (skipping). No
discontinuous contact (skipping) allowed.
4 Visually inspect carbon sealing surface for pitting. No pitting allowed.
5 Press carbon seal in seal housing and check axial float. No binding allowed.
6 Visually inspect carbon sealing surface for wear, scratches, and grooves. No visual
defects that can be felt with a ball tip stylus tool - 0.015 inch radius, 0.031 inch diameter
(0.38 mm radius, 0.79 mm diameter) allowed.
7 Visually inspect carbon seal for coking.
a No coking on carbon sealing surface allowed.
b No coke buildup on carbon sealing surface inner diameter allowed.
c Coke buildup on carbon sealing surface outer diameter is acceptable provided
it does not extend beyond major outer diameter (step) of carbon seal.
8 Using 10X magnification, inspect sealing surface and inner and outer diameters of
sealing surface for chipping. Minor chipping of inner and outer diameters is acceptable
providing the minimum sealing surface width is 70 percent or greater of original surface
measured radially.
9 (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Visually inspect the assembly for missing
retainer pin(s). Three or more missing pin(s) is cause for rejection.
10 Visually inspect rotor sealing surface for chipping. No chipping allowed.
11 Visually inspect seal rotor sealing surface for wear, scratches, and grooves. Visual
defects that cannot be felt with a ball tip stylus tool - 0.015 inch radius, 0.031 inch
diameter (0.38 mm radius, 0.79 mm diameter) are acceptable.
12 If air-oil carbon seal or carbon seal housing is cracked, inspect second stage turbine
rotor for blade shift. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-07-8000).
(c) Inspect compressor bearing. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). If
components of compressor bearings have indications of excessive damage, inspect second
stage turbine rotor for blade shift. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-07-8000).
(d) Inspect spring washer as follows:
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1 Perform MPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). No cracks

allowed.
2 Measure spring washer in free state.
a Minimum free height of any one lobe must not be less than 0.229 inch (5.82
mm).
b Average free height of all six lobes must not be less than 0.232 inch (5.89 mm).
3 If spring washer is cracked or broken, inspect second stage turbine rotor for blade
shift. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-07-8000).
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-10-19 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the accessory drive housing assembly.


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-20-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Accessory Drive Housing Assembly (Subtask 72-10-20-020-004-A01)
CAUTION: IF THE ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING IS TO BE REPLACED, THIS PROCEDURE CAN

ONLY BE ACCOMPLISHED IF OLD AND REPLACEMENT ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSINGS
ARE AVAILABLE.
CAUTION: IF OLD ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE ENGINE MUST BE
TOTALLY DISASSEMBLED AND REASSEMBLED. REFER TO 72-30-04.
NOTE: Remove only those items required to gain access to accessory drive housing assembly
for removal and replacement. Accomplish disassembly in any order required due to facilities
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
available. The following procedure is for replacement of accessory drive housing assembly
without disassembly of turbine and combustion sections.
(1) Remove nose cone. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-09-3000).
(2) Remove ignition unit. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 74-10-01-3000).
(3) Remove fuel manifold purge system. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 75-10-01-3000).
(4) Remove anti-icing valve and plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 75-10-01-3000).
(5) Remove anti-icing shield. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 75-10-02-3000).
(6) Remove compensating resistor. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 77-20-03-3000).
(7) Remove fuel system plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-01-3000).
(8) Remove rear turbine bearing plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-08-3000).
(9) Remove PG. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-03-3000).
(10) Remove fuel heater. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-05-3000).
(11) Remove fuel shutoff valve. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-06-3000).
(12) Remove fuel flow divider valve. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-07-3000).
(13) Remove PRI only solenoid control valve. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-08-3000).
(14) Remove fuel control/fuel pump assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-20-01-3000).
(15) Remove control linkage. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 76-10-01-3000).
(16) Remove oil filter and adapter. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-02-3000).
(17) Remove oil filter by-pass valve. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-04-3000).
(18) Remove oil pressure regulator. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-05-3000).
(19) Remove magnetic drain plug. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-30-01-3000).
(20) Remove feathering valve. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-07-3000).
(21) Remove shaft oil seals. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-08-3000).
(23) Remove tachometer-generator gear assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-15-3000).
(24) Remove oil inlet retainer shield assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-01-3000).
(25) Remove tail cone. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-02-3000).
(26) Remove oil inlet tube and oil pressure jet. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-03-3000).
(27) Remove turbine scavenge pump assembly and spur gearshaft. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-50-04-3000).
(28) Measure and record the top normal running dimension. Refer to Figure 3001.
(a) Put the nose of the engine in the down position.
(b) Place a parallel bar across the turbine bearing support assembly.
(c) Use a depth micrometer to measure from the top of the parallel bar to the end of the main
shaft. Record as Dimension A, for use at assembly to make sure that the correct quantity
of shims is installed.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: (POST SB TPE331-A72-0997) AFTER REMOVAL OF THE ACCESSORY GEAR

ASSEMBLY (90, 90A, FIGURE 3002), RECORD THE QUANTITY AND THICKNESS
OF SHIMS (105) REMOVED. THIS RECORD IS CRITICAL TO THE INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE.
(29) Remove accessory gear assembly (90, 90A). Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-17-3000).
CAUTION: (PRE SB TPE331-A72-0997) AFTER REMOVAL OF RETAINER (94, FIGURE 3002),
RECORD THE QUANTITY AND THICKNESS OF SHIMS (105) REMOVED. THIS
RECORD IS CRITICAL TO THE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
CAUTION: AFTER REMOVAL OF THE COMPRESSOR BEARING CARRIER, RECORD THE

QUANTITY AND THICKNESS OF SHIMS (150) REMOVED. THIS RECORD IS
CRITICAL TO THE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
(30) Remove compressor bearing carrier support assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-19-3000).
(31) Remove oil pressure pump assembly and roller bearings. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-18-3000).
(32) Remove plugs and drain valves from accessory drive housing assembly. Refer to REMOVAL
(PGBLK 72-00-05-3000).
(33) Remove oil vent valve and damper assembly from accessory drive housing assembly. Refer to
(34) Remove accessory drive housing assembly as follows:
(a) Remove nuts (5, Figure 3003), bolts (15), and washers (10).
(b) Remove nuts (20), washers (25), adapters (30), and washers (35).
(c) Remove jam nut (40) and plug (45).
(d) Remove jam nut (50) and drain fitting (55).
(e) Remove accessory drive housing assembly (60), gasket (65), shim (70), and packing (95).
Record quantity and thickness of shims removed.
(f) Remove plug and bleeder (85) and packing (90).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Obtain Top Normal Running Measurement (GRAPHIC 72-10-20-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Compressor Bearing Removal (GRAPHIC 72-10-20-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3005
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 90A. ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY

10. RETAINER 91. NUT (5)
15. RETAINER 93. PIN (15)
20. SPLINED COUPLING 94. RETAINER (20)
25. SLEEVE 95. SPUR GEAR
30. RETAINER RING 100. OIL SCOOP
40. BOLT 110. DUPLEX BEARING (40)
45. WASHER 115. SPRING WASHER (45)
55. STRAINER 116. NOTCHED SPACER (46)
60. NOZZLE BODY 120. SPACER (50)
65. PACKING 125. ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) (55)
70. OIL TUBE 130. STATIONARY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY
(COMPRESSOR BELLOWS SEAL) (60)
75. PACKING 135. BEARING CARRIER (65)
80. NUT 140. PACKING (70)
85. WASHER 145. PACKING (75)
90. ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY 150. SHIM (80)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3006
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Drive Housing Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 72-10-20-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3007
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 50. JAM NUT

10. BOLT 55. DRAIN FITTING
15. WASHER 60. ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING
ASSEMBLY
20. NUT 65. GASKET
25. WASHER 70. SHIM
30. ADAPTER 85. PLUG AND BLEEDER
35. SPACER 90. PACKING
40. JAM NUT 95. PACKING
45. PLUG 100. POWER GROUP ASSEMBLY
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3008
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the accessory drive housing assembly.
PN 287891-1 seal installation pilot (used to CAGE: 06848

protect seal assembly when
installing accessory drive housing
assembly)

bearing nut)



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-20-420-802-A01)
B. Install Accessory Drive Housing Assembly (Subtask 72-10-20-420-004-A01)
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT DRAIN VALVE AND PLUG ARE INSTALLED IN ACCESSORY
DRIVE HOUSING. IF NOT INSTALLED, REFER TO REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-20-9000)
FOR INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
(1) Install accessory drive housing as follows:

(a) Install packing (95, Figure 4001) and verify gasket (65) is installed.
(b) Install thickness of shims (70) previously removed (if using the same accessory drive
housing assembly) or calculated in REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-20-3000) for first stage
clearance.
(c) Install PN 287891-1, seal installation pilot.
(d) Install accessory drive housing on partially assembled power group. Remove PN 287891-1,
seal installation pilot.
NOTE: When installing accessory drive housing assembly, make sure that relief holes
in accessory drive housing assembly are aligned with mounting studs of first
stage impeller shroud.
NOTE: Do not install bolts in holes listed in Figure 4002.
(e) Install washers (35, Figure 4001), adapters (30), washers (25) and nuts (20). Torque nuts
(20), alternating from side to side until 30 in-lb (3.4 Nm) is reached, to make sure that
shroud is pulled in position evenly.
(f) Install bolts (10), washers (15) and nuts (5) in holes as shown in Figure 4002. Torque nuts
to 50 to 60 in-lb (5.6 to 6.8 Nm).
(g) Install new packing (90, Figure 4001) on plug (85). Install plug (85) in accessory drive
housing. Torque plug to 160 in-lb (18.1 Nm).
(2) Measure bearing and associated components to provide required dimensions to accomplish a
stack check after bearing and components have been installed. Refer to Figure 4003 and Figure
4004.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Stack duplex bearing (110, Figure 4003) and
spacer (120) together as shown in Figure 4004. Measure combined height of bearing (inner
race) and spacer and record as Dimension L.
(b) (Post SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Stack duplex bearing (110, Figure 4003)
and rotor (rotating oil seal) (125) together as shown in Figure 4004. Measure combined
height of bearing (inner race) and rotor and record as Dimension L.
CAUTION: PRIOR TO INSTALLING ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) (125, FIGURE 4003),
VERIFY THAT PART NUMBER OF ROTOR IS CORRECT. FAILURE TO
INSTALL CORRECT PART NUMBER ROTOR MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO
COMPRESSOR IMPELLERS AND SHROUDS, AND WILL CAUSE BINDING
OF ROTATING ASSEMBLY.
(c) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Measure thickness of rotor (rotating oil seal)

(125) as shown in Figure 4004 and record as Dimension J. If Dimension J is not 0.359 to
0.361 inch (9.12 to 9.17 mm), replace rotor.
(d) (Post SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Measure thickness of rotor (rotating oil seal)
(125) as shown in Figure 4004 and record as Dimension L. If Dimension L is not 0.653 to
(e) Using a depth micrometer, measure from top of main shaft to step on shaft as shown in
Figure 4004. Record measurement as Dimension K.
(f) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Add Dimensions L and J. Subtract the total
of Dimensions L and J from Dimension K. Record result as calculated Dimension M.
K − (L+J) = M (calculated)
NOTE: Dimension M must be a measurement taken from the top of main shaft to the
top of the inner race of bearing after bearing has been installed. Refer to Figure
4005. A calculated Dimension M is established, from dimensions taken above,
and is to be compared to an actual Dimension M taken in a later step.
(g) (Post SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Subtract Dimension L from Dimension K.

Record result as calculated Dimension M.
K − L = M (calculated)
NOTE: Dimension M must be a measurement taken from the top of main shaft to the
top of the inner race of bearing after bearing has been installed. Refer to Figure
4005. A calculated Dimension M is established, from dimensions taken above,
and is to be compared to an actual Dimension M taken in a later step.
(3) Install compressor bearing and components. Refer to Figure 4003 and Figure 4005.
(a) Install thickness of shims (150) recorded during REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-20-3000) in
accessory drive housing assembly.
NOTE: Verify thickness of shims (150, Figure 4003) agrees with value recorded during
REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-20-3000), prior to installation.
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: HANDLING OF STATIONARY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY (COMPRESSOR

BELLOWS SEAL) AND ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) MUST BE MINIMIZED.
BE WORN.
CAUTION: STATIONARY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY (COMPRESSOR BELLOWS SEAL) AND

ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) MUST BE INSTALLED DRY. DO NOT
LUBRICATE.
(b) Install packing (140) on assembled bearing carrier (135) and install bearing carrier in
accessory drive housing assembly.
NOTE: Make sure that stationary oil seal assembly (compressor bellows seal) (130)
has been installed in bearing carrier.
CAUTION: PRIOR TO INSTALLING ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) (125), VERIFY THAT
PART NUMBER OF ROTOR IS CORRECT. FAILURE TO INSTALL CORRECT
PART NUMBER ROTOR MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO COMPRESSOR
IMPELLERS AND SHROUDS, AND WILL CAUSE BINDING OF ROTATING
ASSEMBLY.
(c) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Verify rotor (rotating oil seal) thickness of

0.359 to 0.361 inch (9.12 to 9.17 mm).
(d) (Post SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Verify rotor (rotating oil seal) thickness of
0.653 to 0.658 inch (16.59 to 16.71 mm).
(e) Make sure that stationary oil seal assembly (compressor bellows seal) and rotor (rotating
oil seal) are dry; do not not lubricate prior to installation. Install rotor (rotating oil seal) (125)
face down on stationary oil seal assembly (compressor bellows seal) (130).
(f) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Heat spacer (120) to 450°F (232.2°C) for 10

minutes and install, or install using PN 296562-2, bearing puller.
(g) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0751/TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Install spring washer (115)

into bearing carrier (135).
CAUTION: (POST SB TPE331-72-0751/TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) INSTALL
NOTCHED SPACER (116) WITH ARROW POINTING TOWARD BEARING
CARRIER.
(h) (Post SB TPE331-72-0751/TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Install notched spacer

(116) in bearing carrier.
(i) Align anti-rotation slot in outer race of duplex bearing (110) at the 6 o'clock position.
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(j) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Using PN 296562-2, bearing puller, install

duplex bearing (110) on main shaft. Make sure that bearing contacts spacer (120).
(k) (Post SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) Using PN 296562-2, bearing puller, install
duplex bearing (110) on main shaft. Make sure that bearing contacts rotor (rotating oil seal)
(125).
(l) Using a depth micrometer, measure from top of main shaft to top of inner race of bearing.
Refer to Figure 4005. Record measurement as Dimension M (actual).
(m) Compare actual Dimension M to calculated Dimension M. Actual Dimension M must be
the same or greater than calculated Dimension M.
(n) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) If Dimension M is not within limits, remove
and install spacer (120, Figure 4003) and duplex bearing (110) to make sure that parts are
seated completely and limits are met.
(o) (Post SB TPE331-72-0984/TPE331-72-2003) If Dimension M is not within limits, remove
and install rotor (rotating oil seal) (125) and duplex bearing (110) to make sure that parts
are seated completely and limits are met.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT OIL SCOOP (100) IS INSTALLED WITH FACE MARKED
“GEAR SIDE” VISIBLE AFTER INSTALLATION.
(p) Install oil scoop (100) with words “gear side” visible.
(q) Install spur gear (95).
(r) Install same quantity and thickness of shims (105) that were removed and recorded during
disassembly, onto flange of bearing carrier (135).
(s) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install retainer (94) into bearing carrier (135). Make sure that
anti-rotation pin (93) on retainer locks in slot in outer race of duplex bearing (110). Secure
bearing retainer (94) with nuts (91). Torque nuts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
NOTE: (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Make sure that anti-rotation pin (93) on retainer
(94) locks into slot in outer race of duplex bearing (110).
(t) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install and secure accessory gear assembly (90) with washers
(85) and nuts (80). Do not tighten nuts at this time.
(u) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install accessory gear assembly (90A). Make sure that
anti-rotation pin on accessory gear assembly is engaged in slot of outer race of duplex
bearing (110). Secure accessory gear assembly (90A) with nuts (80). Do not tighten nuts
at this time.
NOTE: (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Make sure that anti-rotation pin on accessory
gear housing (90A) locks in slot in outer race of duplex bearing (110).
(v) Install remaining components as follows:

NOTE: Lubricate packings (65, 75) with clean, approved engine oil, Santovac OS-124,
1 Install new packings (75) on oil tube (70).

UP495246
ALL Page 4005
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2 Install strainer (55) and new packing (65) on nozzle body (60).
3 (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install oil tube (70) into accessory gear assembly (90)
and install nozzle body (60) on oil tube. Secure oil tube and nozzle body with washers
(45) and bolts (40). Torque bolts to 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm).
4 (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install oil tube (70) into accessory gear assembly (90A)
and install nozzle body (60) on oil tube. Secure oil tube and nozzle body with washers
(45) and bolts (40). Torque bolts to 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm).
5 Install splined coupling (35) on main shaft.
NOTE: Inspection of splined coupling (35) may have revealed that load surfaces
on only one side of splines were acceptable. This will be indicated by the
words “THIS SIDE FORWARD” etched on splined coupling.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT RETAINER RING IS COMPLETELY ENGAGED IN

GROOVE OF SPLINED SHAFT COUPLING. IF RETAINER RING IS NOT
PROPERLY INSTALLED, THE GEARTRAIN COULD UNCOUPLE FROM
THE ENGINE RESULTING IN A TOTAL LOSS OF THRUST AND THE
ENGINE BEING CONTROLLED BY THE OSFG.
6 Install sleeve (25) in splined coupling (20) and install retainer ring (30) in coupling.
7 Install assembled splined coupling (20) over splined coupling (35). Install retainer
(15) inside assembled splined coupling (20).
8 Install nut (5) with slots at lower end into dimples of retainer (10).
9 Apply clean, approved engine oil to face and threads of nut (5). Install assembled nut
and retainer into retainer (15).
10 Using PN 296132-1, torque wrench adapter, torque nut to 900 in-lb (101.7 Nm).
Loosen nut and torque three times to 900 in-lb (101.7 Nm).
11 Deform retainer (10) into slots of retainer (15).
12 Torque nuts (80) to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(4) Measure and record the top normal running dimension. Refer to Figure 4006.
(a) Put the nose of the engine in the down position.
(b) Place a parallel bar across the turbine bearing support assembly.
(c) Use a depth micrometer to measure from the top of the parallel bar to the end of the main
shaft. Dimension A must be within +/-0.001 inch (+/-0.03 mm) of Dimension A recorded in
(5) Install oil vent valve and damper assembly in accessory drive housing assembly. Refer to
(6) Install plugs and drain valves in accessory drive housing assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION
(PGBLK 72-00-05-4000).
(7) Install oil pressure pump assembly and roller bearings. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK
72-10-18-4000).
(8) Install turbine scavenge pump assembly and spur gearshaft. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK
72-50-04-4000).
(9) Install oil inlet tube and oil pressure jet. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-03-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4006
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(10) Install tail cone. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-02-4000).

(11) Install oil inlet retainer shield assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-01-4000).
(12) Install compressor bearing carrier support assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK
72-10-19-4000).
(13) Install accessory gear assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-17-4000).
(14) Install tachometer-generator gear assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-15-4000).
(16) Install shaft oil seals. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-08-4000).
(17) Install feathering valve. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-07-4000).
(18) Install magnetic drain plug. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 79-30-01-4000).
(19) Install oil pressure regulator. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 79-20-05-4000).
(20) Install oil filter by-pass valve. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 79-20-04-4000).
(21) Install oil filter and adapter. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 79-20-02-4000).
(22) Install control linkage. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 76-10-01-4000).
(23) Install fuel control/fuel pump assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-20-01-4000).
(24) Install PRI only solenoid control valve. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-08-4000).
(25) Install fuel flow divider valve. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-07-4000).
(26) Install fuel shutoff valve. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-06-4000).
(27) Install fuel heater. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-05-4000).
(28) Install PG. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-03-4000).
(29) Install rear turbine bearing plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 79-20-08-4000).
(30) Install fuel system plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-01-4000).
(31) Install compensating resistor. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 77-20-03-4000).
(32) Install anti-icing shield. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 75-10-02-4000).
(33) Install anti-icing valve and plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 75-10-01-4000).
(34) Install fuel manifold purge system. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 75-10-01-4000).
(35) Install ignition unit. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 74-10-01-4000).
(36) Install nose cone. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-09-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4007
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Drive Housing Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC

72-10-20-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4008
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 50. JAM NUT

10. BOLT 55. DRAIN FITTING
15. WASHER 60. ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING
ASSEMBLY
20. NUT 65. GASKET
25. WASHER 70. SHIM
30. ADAPTER 85. PLUG AND BLEEDER
35. SPACER 90. PACKING
40. JAM NUT 95. PACKING
45. PLUG 100. POWER GROUP ASSEMBLY
UP495246
ALL Page 4009
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Drive Housing Assembly Bolt Hole Pattern (GRAPHIC
72-10-20-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4010
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1
Component Bolt Hole
Anti-Ice Valve Brackets 5, 6, 7, 8
Fuel Shutoff Valve 18, 19, 20, 21
Fuel Flow DIvider Valve 26, 27, 28, 29
Fuel Control System 30, 31, 32
Solenoid Valve PRI Only 40, 41, 42
Fuel Heater 44, 45, 49, 50
NOTES:
1. Installation of bolts in the holes may be delayed until components are installed.
UP495246
ALL Page 4011
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Compressor Bearing Installation (GRAPHIC 72-10-20-99B-003-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4012
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 90A. ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY

10. RETAINER 91. NUT (5)
15. RETAINER 93. PIN (15)
20. SPLINED COUPLING 94. RETAINER (20)
25. SLEEVE 95. SPUR GEAR
30. RETAINER RING 100. OIL SCOOP
40. BOLT 110. DUPLEX BEARING (40)
45. WASHER 115. SPRING WASHER (45)
55. STRAINER 116. NOTCHED SPACER (46)
60. NOZZLE BODY 120. SPACER (50)
65. PACKING 125. ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) (55)
70. OIL TUBE 130. STATIONARY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY
(COMPRESSOR BELLOWS SEAL) (60)
75. PACKING 135. BEARING CARRIER (65)
80. NUT 140. PACKING (70)
85. WASHER 145. PACKING (75)
90. ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY 150. SHIM (80)
UP495246
ALL Page 4013
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Measurement of Bearings and Components for Stack (GRAPHIC
72-10-20-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4014
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4005. (Sheet 1 of 1) Compressor Bearing, Spacer, and Rotor Seating Check (GRAPHIC
72-10-20-99B-005-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4015
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4006. (Sheet 1 of 1) Obtain Top Normal Running Measurement (GRAPHIC 72-10-20-99B-006-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4016
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the accessory drive housing assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-20-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Accessory Drive Housing Assembly (Subtask 72-10-20-200-004-A01)
(1) Inspect compressor bearing carrier studs as follows:

(a) Check adjacent mounting surface. Refer to Figure 8001.
1 Fretting up to 0.005-in (0.13 mm) depth is allowed, provided surface where bearing
carrier actually contacts is parallel to accessory drive housing assembly rear flange
within 0.0005 inch (0.013 mm). If parallelism requirement is not met, return accessory
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
drive housing assembly for repair to Honeywell International Inc., Distribution Center,
2 Touch-up worn areas. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method
7.
(b) Check studs. Side or rotational movement is not allowed. Axial movement must not exceed
0.007 inch (0.18 mm). No cracking or material breakout in mounting surface allowed. Refer
to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-20-9000).
(c) If studs are pulled or loose beyond acceptable limits, inspect second stage turbine rotor
for blade shift. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-07-8000).
(2) Visually inspect oil transfer adapter bushing bore for wear grooves. Refer to Figure 8002. If wear
is estimated to be 0.035 inch (0.89 mm) or more, bushing must be replaced. If depth of wear
groove is undetermined or questionable, the following pressure check may be performed. With
oil transfer assembly installed, connect NTS test stand as for calibration. Set pressure as high
as attainable, but do not exceed 100 PSIG (689.5 kPa) maximum. Block all oil drain ports at
gearcase, if oil leaks between bushing and adapter, bushing must be replaced. Refer to REPAIR
(PGBLK 72-10-20-9000).
(3) Inspect accessory drive housing assembly for loose and damaged alignment studs and bushings,
and through studs. Refer to Figure 8002. If through stud, or alignment stud or bushing is loose
or damaged return accessory housing to a Honeywell-authorized service facility for repair.
(4) Inspect accessory drive housing assembly for loose or damaged insert at mount hole for oil
pressure and oil by-pass valve. Refer to Figure 8003. Replace insert if needed. Refer to REPAIR
(PGBLK 72-10-20-9000).
(5) Inspect accessory drive housing assembly for cracks. No cracks allowed, except Area G and
P, Figure 8004.
(6) Inspect intake area (Areas G and P, Figure 8004) for cracks.
(a) If a crack exists and the maximum length on either side of center support is under 1.0 inch
(25.4 mm), monitor cracks. Check crack progression after every 25 hours of operation.
(b) For a crack appearing to exceed 1.0-inch (25.4 mm) length on either side of center support,
the following procedures must be performed.
1 Remove paint and protective compound from suspected cracked area.
2 Perform FPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
3 If base metal is not cracked, touch-up exposed magnesium area with Dow 19 and
repaint. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
4 If base metal is cracked less than 1.0 inch (25.4 mm) maximum length on either side
of center support, touch-up exposed magnesium area with Dow 19 only and monitor
cracks. Check crack progression after every 25 hours of operation. Replace input
housing assembly when crack exceeds 1.0 inch (25.4 mm).
(7) Inspect engine mounting pads and intake for cracks caused by internal engine malfunction.
(a) Inspect Areas A, B and C at locations illustrated in Figure 8005.
(b) Inspect intake Area D left-hand side intake immediately aft of inlet temperature sensor and
inboard of engine mounting pad location.
(c) Inspect like area on right-hand side of intake.
(d) If cracks are suspected, the following procedures must be performed to verify cracks.
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1 Remove paint and protective compound from suspected crack area.

2 Perform FPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(e) If base metal is not cracked, touch-up exposed magnesium area with Dow 19 and repaint.
Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
CAUTION: ENGINE DAMAGE MAY RESULT IF OPERATED WITH CRACKS IN
ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY MOUNTING PADS.
(f) If FPI reveals a crack in the base metal of more than 0.5 inch (12.7 mm), the accessory
drive housing assembly must be replaced prior to next engine operation.
(g) If FPI reveals a crack in the base metal of 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) or less, the accessory drive
housing assembly must be replaced. A one-time flight of less than 5 hours is allowed to
return to maintenance facility for replacement of accessory drive housing assembly.
(8) Inspect accessory drive housing assembly for corrosion as follows:
NOTE: All corrosion must be treated. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
NOTE: Particular attention must be given to areas where dissimilar metals contact the
magnesium-alloy housing at machined surfaces.
NOTE: Limits apply after all corrosion has been removed.
(a) Inspect Surface A, Figure 8006 observing specified limits of Table 8003.
(b) Inspect Surface B observing specified limits of Table 8004.
(c) Inspect Surface R observing specified limits of Table 8005.
(d) Inspect Area D (mounting pads). Corrosion must not exceed 0.020-inch (0.51 mm) depth
and total area of 0.5 square-inch (323 mm²) per mount pad.
(e) Inspect Areas E and M, Figure 8007, observing specified limits of Table 8006.
(f) Inspect Area F as follows:
1 Corrosion must not exceed 0.050-inch (1.27 mm) depth in a 2 square-inch (1,290
mm²) area.
2 Number of corrosion areas must not exceed three.
(g) Inspect Area G, Figure 8004. Corrosion must not exceed 0.010-inch (0.25 mm) depth and
total area of 0.5 square-inch (323 mm²).
(h) Inspect Areas H and L, Figure 8007. The combined total of corrosion of both sides must
not exceed 0.040-inch (1.02 mm) total depth and total area of 2.0 square-inches (1,290
mm²) on each side.
(i) Inspect Area P, Figure 8004. Corrosion must not exceed 0.020-inch (0.51 mm) depth and
total area of 1 square-inch (645 mm²).
(j) Inspect Area J (Detail A) observing limits in Figure 8007 (Sheet 2 of 2).
(k) Inspect Area K as follows:
1 Corrosion must not exceed 0.040-inch (1.02 mm) depth in a 2 square-inch (1,290
mm²) area.
2 Number of corrosion areas must not exceed three.
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(l) Inspect Area N observing specified limits of Table 8007.

(m) Inspect areas adjacent to studs and inserts for corrosion. Maximum corrosion depth must
(n) Inspect Area T, Figure 8007, observing specified limits of Table 8008.
(o) If limits are exceeded, return accessory drive housing assembly to manufacturer for further
evaluation.
Table 8003. Surface A Limits for Corrosion
Maximum Depth (inch) (mm) 0.185 0.160 0.140 0.120 0.100 0.080 0.060
(4.70) (4.06) (3.56) (3.05) (2.54) (2.03) (1.52)
Maximum Total Area (square-inch) 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.7 5.5 7.0 9.0
(mm²) (1,935) (2,258) (2,581) (3,032) (3,548) (4,516) (5,806)
Table 8004. Surface B Limits for Corrosion
Maximum Depth (inch) (mm) 0.080 0.070 0.060 0.050 0.040 0.030 0.020
(2.03) (1.78) (1.52) (1.27) (1.02) (0.76) (0.51)
Maximum Total Area (square-inch) 0.5 (323) 0.5 (323) 0.5 (323) 0.5 (323) 0.5 (323) 0.5 (323) 0.5 (323)
(mm²)
Number Places 4 5 6 8 10 12 15
Table 8005. Surface R Limits for Corrosion
Maximum Depth (inch) (mm) 0.060 0.040

(1.52) (1.02)
Maximum Total Area (square-inch) (mm²) 0.5 0.7
(323) (452)
Number Places 8 10
Table 8006. Areas E and M Limits for Corrosion
Maximum Depth 0.080 0.070 0.060 0.050 0.040 0.030 0.020 0.010
1 (2.03) (1.78) (1.52) (1.27) (1.02) (0.76) (0.51) (0.25)
(inch) (mm)
Maximum Total 0.75 1.6 2.8 4.8 8.5 20.0 40.0 75.0
Area (square-inch) (483.9) (1,032) (1,806) (3,097) (5,484) (12,903) (25,806) (48,387)
(mm²)
NOTES:
1. These limits include combined corrosion damage depth of both Areas E and M.
UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 8007. Area N Limits for Corrosion
Maximum Depth (inch) (mm) 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.02
(2.0) (1.8) (1.5) (1.3) (1.0) (0.5)
Maximum Total Area (square-inch) (mm²) 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.0 2.0
(323) (387) (452) (516) (645) (1,290)
Table 8008. Area T Limits for Corrosion
Maximum Depth (inch) (mm) 0.060 0.040 0.020

(1.52) (1.02) (0.51)
Maximum Total Area (square-inch) (mm²) 5 10 20
(3,226) (6,452) (12,903)
(9) Inspect inlet temperature sensor mounting pad as follows:

(a) Inspect accessory drive housing assembly inlet temperature sensor mounting pad for
evidence of corrosion or salt deposits. Particular attention must be given to area where
dissimilar metals contact the magnesium surface (Surface A, Figure 8008).
(b) All screw and bolt locations must be checked for evidence of corrosion.
(c) Treat corrosion. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
(d) If limits are exceeded, return accessory drive housing assembly to manufacturer for further
evaluation.
(10) Inspect sleeve seal as follows:
(a) Dimensionally inspect sleeve seal to make sure that ID is within allowable tolerance of
1.750 to 1.752 inches (44.45 to 44.50 mm). Refer to Figure 8009.
(b) Inspect sleeve seal for evidence of excessive grooving or wear. Wear grooves must not
exceed 0.010-inch (0.25 mm) rub depth.
(c) Wear grooves are not allowed within 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) of seal edge.
(d) If the above conditions are not met, refer to IRM, 72-IR-15, PN 3103733, PN 3102400, PN
3107114, or PN 3107045 for repair.
UP495246
ALL Page 8005
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Compressor Bearing Carrier Studs Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-20-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8006
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Inserts, Bushings, and Alignment Studs Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-10-20-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8007
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Pressure Regulator and Oil By-Pass Valve Insert Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-10-20-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8008
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Drive Housing Assembly Crack and Corrosion Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-10-20-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8009
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8005. (Sheet 1 of 1) Inspect Accessory Drive Housing Assembly Mounting Pad for Cracks (GRAPHIC
72-10-20-99B-005-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8010
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8006. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Drive Housing Assembly Corrosion Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-10-20-99B-006-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8011
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
72-10-20-99B-007-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8012
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
72-10-20-99B-007-A01)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.50 (12.7) DIM. B 0.10 (2.5)
UP495246
ALL Page 8013
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8008. (Sheet 1 of 1) Inlet Temperature Sensor Mounting Pad Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-10-20-99B-008-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8014
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8009. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Drive Housing Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-10-20-99B-009-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8015
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 1.7500 TO 1.7520
(44.450 TO 44.501)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8016
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the accessory drive housing assembly.



APPLICABLE.
Epoxylite 203 epoxy adhesive CAGE: 1M9V0
Epoxylite 203 and activator 1A potting compound CAGE: 1M9V0
Epoxylite 810 potting compound CAGE: 1M9V0
2. Procedure (TASK 72-10-20-300-802-A01)
B. Repair Accessory Drive Housing Assembly (Subtask 72-10-20-300-004-A01)
(1) Replace damaged compressor bearing carrier studs as follows:

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) If stud has not been previously replaced, remove stud using Keensert removal procedures.
Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 70-00-00-9000). Refer to Figure 9001. Previously replaced studs
have letter R etched adjacent to or on end of stud, or may be a clinch (through) bolt. If stud
has been previously replaced, return accessory drive housing assembly for stud replacement
to Honeywell International Inc., Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix,
AZ 85034-3440.
NOTE: Mounting studs may have been previously replaced with clinch (through) bolts.
Clinch bolts do not have any identifying mark. However, mounting stud holes
were drilled to a depth that extends in the air inlet area.
(b) Inspect mounting hole for failed threads. If failed threads exist, return accessory drive
housing assembly for stud replacement to Honeywell International Inc., Distribution Center,
(c) Install stud, PN 682-533-9653 (Stud A, Figure 9001) or stud, PN 682-533-9652 (Stud B)
using Keensert installation procedures. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 70-00-00-9000).
(d) Etch letter R on end of replacement stud.
(2) Repair corrosion damaged areas on accessory drive housing assembly. Refer to CLEANING
(PGBLK 72-00-00-6000).
(3) If indicated by inspection, replace oil transfer adapter bushing as follows:
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ENGINE OIL SYSTEM CONTAMINATION DURING REWORK
USE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES. CONNECT NTS TEST STAND
AS FOR CALIBRATION AND FLUSH DRILL CHIPS OR REMOVE REAR
BEARING LUBRICATION LINE AT INPUT HOUSING AND APPLY SHOP AIR
AT THE BEARING LUBRICATION FITTING.
(a) Using drill size 33/64, drill inner diameter of bushing and collapse walls. If bushing wall
cannot be collapsed, drill size 17/32 inch or rotary file may be used, however extreme
caution must be used not to remove gearbox material. Refer to Figure 9002.
(b) If gearbox threads were damaged during bushing removal, a 5/8-16 UN3B bottom tap may
be used to repair threads.
(c) Prior to installation of new bushing, preheat gearcase with heat lamp. Coat new bushing
with Epoxylite 810, potting compound, Epoxylite 203, epoxy adhesive, or Epoxylite 203
and activator 1A, potting compound and install 0.01 to 0.03 inch (0.3 to 0.8 mm) below
gearcase and surface.
(d) Allow to dry for 6 hours utilizing heat lamp during drying period.
(4) Replace loose or damaged oil by-pass valve mount insert as follows:
(a) Remove insert using Keensert removal procedures. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
70-00-00-9000) and Figure 9003.
(b) Inspect mount hole for pulled threads.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) If mount hole threads are not pulled, install insert. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 70-00-00-9000).
Refer to Table 9003 for insert part number.
(d) If mount hole has pulled threads, install oversize insert. Refer to Table 9003 for insert part
number.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT HOLE FOR OVERSIZE INSERT IS DRILLED
PERPENDICULAR TO FACE OF ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING
ASSEMBLY AND CENTERED WITH EXISTING HOLE, TO MAKE SURE
OF PROPER ALIGNMENT OF MOUNTING BOLTS.
1 (First oversize) Drill a 0.3110-inch (7.899 mm) (drill size 5/16 inch) hole at location
of removed insert to a depth of 0.32 to 0.35 inch (8.1 to 8.9 mm) flat bottom.
2 (First oversize) Tap drilled hole to bottom with 3/8-16UNC-2A bottom tap. Countersink
hole to 0.385-inch (9.78 mm) diameter by 0.037-inch (0.94 mm) deep.
PERPENDICULAR TO FACE OF ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING
ASSEMBLY AND CENTERED WITH EXISTING HOLE, TO MAKE SURE
OF PROPER ALIGNMENT OF MOUNTING BOLT.
3 (Second oversize) Drill a 0.3642-inch (9.251 mm) (drill size U) hole at location of
removed insert to a depth of 0.32 to 0.35 inch (8.1 to 8.9 mm) flat bottom.
4 (Second oversize) Tap drilled hole to bottom with 7/16-14UNC-2A bottom tap.
Countersink hole to 0.385-inch (9.78 mm) diameter by 0.037-inch (0.94 mm) deep.
5 Flush threaded hole using MIL-PRF-680, solvent and dry thoroughly.

6 Install insert. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 70-00-00-9000).
Table 9003. Replacement Inserts
Insert Location Original PN First Oversize PN Second Oversize PN

Oil By-Pass Valve Mount MS51830-201L MS51831-201L MS51832-201L
Oil Pressure Regulator MS51830-202L MS51831-202L MS51832-202L
Mount
(5) Replace loose or damaged pressure regulator mount insert as follows:

(a) Remove insert using Keensert removal procedures. Refer to replaceable components,
REPAIR (PGBLK 70-00-00-9000) and Figure 9003.
(b) Inspect mount hole for pulled threads.
(c) If mount hole threads are not pulled, install insert. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 70-00-00-9000).
Refer to Table 9003 for insert part number.
(d) If mount hole has pulled threads, install oversize insert. Refer to Table 9003 for insert part
number.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

PERPENDICULAR TO FACE OF ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING AND
CENTERED WITH EXISTING HOLE, TO MAKE SURE OF PROPER
ALIGNMENT OF MOUNTING BOLT.
1 (First oversize) Drill a 0.3642-inch (9.251 mm) (drill size U) hole at location of removed
insert to a depth of 0.32- to 0.35-inch (8.1 to 8.9 mm) flat bottom.
2 (First oversize) Tap drilled hole to bottom with 7/16-14UNC-2A bottom tap. Countersink
hole to 0.385-inch (9.78 mm) diameter by 0.037-inch (0.94 mm) deep.
PERPENDICULAR TO FACE OF ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING AND
CENTERED WITH EXISTING HOLE, TO MAKE SURE OF PROPER
ALIGNMENT OF MOUNTING BOLT.
3 (Second oversize) Drill a 0.4219-inch (10.716 mm) (drill size 27/64 inch) hole at
location of removed insert to a depth of 0.32- to 0.35-inch (8.1 to 8.9 mm) flat bottom.
4 (Second oversize) Tap drilled hole to bottom with 0.5-13UNC-2A bottom tap.
Countersink hole to 0.4375-inch (11.112 mm) diameter by 0.037-inch (0.94 mm)
deep.
5 Flush threaded hole using MIL-PRF-680, solvent and dry thoroughly.

6 Install insert. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 70-00-00-9000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9004
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Compressor Bearing Carrier Studs Repair (GRAPHIC 72-10-20-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9005
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Inserts, Bushings, and Alignment Studs Repair (GRAPHIC 72-10-20-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9006
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Pressure Regulator and Oil By-Pass Valve Insert Repair (GRAPHIC
72-10-20-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9007
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Drive Housing Assembly Crack and Corrosion Repair (GRAPHIC
72-10-20-99B-004-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9008
72-10-20 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
COMPRESSOR SECTION – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Compressor Section (Subtask 72-30-00-870-001-A01)
(1) The compressor section of the engine consists essentially of those components located in the
center of the engine and enclosed by the compressor housing and a portion of the input housing.
The principal components of the compressor section are the impellers, interstage diffuser
assembly, impeller shroud, and compressor housing. The compressor section furnishes the
compressed air to the combustion section.
(2) Inlet air enters the engine through an inlet duct. From the air duct, the air enters the compressor
section at the first stage impeller, where it is compressed and forced through the interstage
diffuser assembly to the second stage impeller. Air is further compressed by the second stage
impeller and is discharged into the combustion section.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
72-30-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FIRST STAGE IMPELLER – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the first stage impeller.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-30-01-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect First Stage Impeller (Subtask 72-30-01-200-004-A01)
NOTE: Inspection/Check of first stage impeller is performed with engine assembled.

(1) Using a strong light and mirror, check first stage impeller through inlet for damage.
(a) Visually inspect impeller for deformed blades. Limits for deformed blades are as follows:
1 Deformed blades are restricted to the outer one-half of the LE.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2 The radius at the bend must be greater than 0.2 inch (5.1 mm) and blade contour
must be within 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) of the original projected blade contour.
3 If deformed blades are within limits, check blades for cracks. No cracks allowed.
(b) Visually inspect impeller for cracks. If cracks are evident, engine must be removed for
repair.
(c) Visually inspect impeller blades for dents and nicks. Limits for dents and nicks on blades
are as follows:
1 Dents or nicks on inner one-half of blade LE must not exceed 0.03 inch (0.8 mm) in
depth.
2 Dents or nicks on outer one-half of LE must not exceed 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) in depth.
3 Repair, if dents or nicks are within above limits. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
72-30-01-9000).
4 No dents or nicks within 0.25 inch (6.4 mm) of hub acceptable.
(d) If limits are exceeded, the engine must be removed for repair. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
72-30-04-9000).
(2) Check first stage impeller for rubbing.
(a) Check around periphery of impeller and interior surface finish on shroud face for rubbing.
(b) If rubbing is evident, contact a Honeywell-authorized service facility (refer to SIL P331-27)
or the appropriate Honeywell Field Service Engineer (refer to SIL P331-22) for guidance
and further instructions.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FIRST STAGE IMPELLER – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the first stage impeller.



APPLICABLE.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-30-01-300-802-A01)
B. Repair First Stage Impeller (Subtask 72-30-01-300-004-A01)
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED REWORK LIMITS OF FIGURE 9001. PERFORMANCE MAY BE

AFFECTED. BLADES MAY BE REWORKED MORE THAN ONCE IF LIMITATIONS SHOWN
IN FIGURE 9001 ARE NOT EXCEEDED.
NOTE: Repair of first stage impeller is performed with engine assembled.
(1) Dents or nicks 0.03 inch (0.8 mm) in depth may be removed from the inner one-half of the blade
LE. Dent or nicks 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) in depth may be removed from the outer one-half of the
LE.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Hand finish to remove dents or nicks on blade. Hand finish to remove material from the LE of
the blade at a length equal to four times the depth of the nick or dent. Refer to Figure 9001,
Details B and C.
(3) All places where material is removed must fair smoothly, be finished with 180 grit, sandpaper,
or finer, and not leave any corners or edges sharper than 0.1-inch (2.5 mm) radius.
(4) Blade repair is not allowed within 0.25 inch (6.4 mm) of hub.
(5) Blending of LE contour which extends more than 0.2 inch (5.1 mm) beyond the allowable repair
depth is not allowed. Refer shaded area, Details B and C, Figure 9001.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Impeller Nick or Dent Repair (GRAPHIC 72-30-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
72-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
RAD A 0.1 (2.5) RAD D 0.1 (2.5)
DIM. B 0.2 (5.1) DIM. E 0.2 (5.1)
DIM. C 0.03 (0.8) MAXIMUM DIM. F 0.05 (1.3) MAXIMUM
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9004
72-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
COMPRESSOR GROUP ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the compressor group assembly.
PN 294278-1 seal removal holder (used to CAGE: 06848

remove labyrinth seal from
shouldered (main) shaft without
damaging knife-edges)


APPLICABLE.
PN NAS816-268 plastic cap (curvics) commercially available
for silver pencil)
pencil)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-30-04-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Accessory Drive Housing Assembly, Compressor Housing Assembly, Compressor

Impellers, Shouldered (Main) Shaft, and Second Stage Vane Assembly Diffuser (Subtask
72-30-04-020-004-A01)
CAUTION: IF ONLY THE ACCESSORY DRIVE ASSEMBLY IS BEING REPLACED, REFER TO

NOTE: Remove only those items required for maintenance being accomplished.
NOTE: Accomplish disassembly in any order, as required, due to facilities and maintenance being
performed.
NOTE: Changing the die cast crossover duct alone with no main rotating group parts replaced
does not require a performance test.
(1) Remove beta tube. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-01-3000).
(2) Remove fuel lines. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-01-3000).
(3) Remove fuel heater assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-05-3000).
(4) Remove fuel shutoff valve and plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-06-3000).
(5) Remove turbine bearing oil line. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-08-3000).
(6) Remove beta plumbing and switch housing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 77-10-02-3000).
(7) Remove manifold purge system plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-13-3000).
(8) Remove ignition system. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 74-10-01-3000).
(9) Remove fuel manifold and nozzle assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-09-3000).
(10) Remove air anti-ice valve and plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 75-10-01-3000).
(11) Remove temperature sensor and compensating resistor. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
77-20-03-3000).
(12) Remove water injection manifold. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 82-20-01-3000).
(13) Remove oil filter and adapter. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-02-3000).
(14) Remove fuel flow divider. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-07-3000).
(16) Remove control linkage. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 76-10-01-3000).
(17) Remove PPC. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-02-3000).
(18) Remove PG. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-03-3000).
(19) Remove fuel control and pump assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-20-01-3000).
(20) Remove torque limiter. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-22-01-3000).
(21) Remove fuel regulator. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-21-04-3000).
(22) Remove fuel filter. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-21-03-3000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(23) Remove torque load assemblies. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-05-3000).

(24) Remove NTS valve and housing assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-06-3000).
(25) Remove nose cone assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-09-3000).
(27) Remove magnetic drain plugs. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-30-01-3000).
(28) Remove oil inlet retainer shield. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-01-3000).
(30) Remove oil inlet fitting and oil pressure jet. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-03-3000).
(31) Remove turbine oil scavenge pump. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-04-3000).
NOTE: Do not remove oil tube.
(32) Remove tachometer-generator gear assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-15-3000).

(33) Remove accessory gear housing assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-17-3000).
(34) Remove compressor bearing assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-19-3000).
(35) Remove exhaust duct assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-05-3000).
(36) Remove turbine bearing, bearing carrier, and turbine bearing support assembly. Refer to
REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-06-3000)
(37) Remove rotor and stator module. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-07-3000).
(38) Remove turbine plenum and combustion chamber. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-40-01-3000).
(39) Remove anti-icing shield assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 75-10-02-3000).
(40) Remove shaft oil seals. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-08-3000).
(41) Remove negative torque pressure regulator. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-04-3000).
(42) Remove oil pressure regulator valve. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-05-3000).
(43) Remove oil filter by-pass valve. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-04-3000).
(44) Remove feathering valve. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-07-3000).
(45) Remove oil pressure pump assembly and roller bearings. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-10-18-3000).
(46) Remove accessory drive housing assembly as follows:
(a) Remove nuts (5, Figure 3001), bolts (10), and washers (15).
(b) Remove nuts (20), washers (25), adapters (30), and washers (35). Separate accessory
drive housing assembly (60) from power group assembly.
(c) Remove packing (95) from first stage impeller shroud.
(47) Remove first stage impeller shroud as follows:
(a) Remove nuts (5, Figure 3002), washers (10), and first stage impeller shroud (15).
(b) Remove packing (30) from first stage impeller shroud.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(48) (Codes AA, BA, CA, BC, CC) Remove first stage impeller, first stage compressor diffuser, and
shouldered (main) shaft as follows:
NOTE: When indexing components during disassembly, place index marks where removal
of marks are readily accessible during assembly.
NOTE: Using Verithin No. 753, silver pencil, Violet, No. 127 1/2, industrial marking ink,
orYellow No. 170T, China marker, index mark second stage impeller to first stage
impeller and mark first stage impeller to shouldered (main) shaft.
(a) Remove assembled shouldered (main) shaft (35, Figure 3003), first stage impeller (40),
labyrinth seal (50), and first stage compressor diffuser (85).
NOTE: Whenever components with knife-edge labyrinth seals are removed from engine,
use care to prevent any handling damage such as dents, nicks, or bends on
knife-edges.
CAUTION: PROTECT CURVIC COUPLINGS BY INSTALLING PN NAS816-268, PLASTIC

CAPS OR SIMILAR PROTECTIVE DEVICES. SURFACES OF COUPLINGS
ARE CRITICAL AND MAY BE DAMAGED BY CARELESS HANDLING OR
STORAGE. REFER TO INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000) FOR
CURVIC COUPLING HANDLING AND INSPECTION.
(b) Remove first stage compressor diffuser (85) from shouldered (main) shaft (35), then press
shouldered (main) shaft from first stage impeller (40).
CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE OIL TUBE FROM SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT. IF OIL
TUBE IS DAMAGED OR DISTORTED, REFER TO INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-30-04-8000).
(c) Remove labyrinth seal (50) from shouldered (main) shaft (35) using PN 294278-1, seal
removal holder.
NOTE: Do not remove labyrinth seal (50) from shouldered (main) shaft (35) unless
damage is indicated at inspection.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT CORRECT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET IS INSTALLED.

INSTALLATION OF INCORRECT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET MAY
ADVERSELY AFFECT COOLING AIR-FLOW TO CRITICAL LIFE-LIMITED
COMPONENTS, AND MAY RESULT IN PREMATURE FAILURE OF THE
COMPONENTS, SEVERE DAMAGE TO HARDWARE, AND PERSONAL
INJURY OR DEATH.
CAUTION: CHECK CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (45) TO MAKE SURE THAT GASKET
WHICH IS PRESENTLY INSTALLED CONTAINS NO HOLES. IF INCORRECT
GASKET IS INSTALLED, REFER TO PARAGRAPH 2.E. ACTION REQUIRED
IF INCORRECT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET HAS BEEN INSTALLED
(SUBTASK 72-30-04-300-007-A01) FOR ACTION REQUIRED.
(d) Remove curvic coupling gasket (45), ring (55), ring retainers (60, 75), disc seals (65), seal
spacers (70), and spring washers (80) from first stage compressor diffuser.
(e) If no evidence of damage and/or wear to lockplate (95) and bolt (90), do not remove.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(49) (Codes BB, CB, BD, CD) Remove first stage impeller assembly, first stage diffuser assembly
and shouldered (main) shaft as follows:
NOTE: Using Verithin No. 753, silver pencil, Violet, No. 127 1/2, industrial marking ink, or
Yellow No. 170T, China marker, index mark second stage impeller to first stage
impeller assembly and mark first stage impeller assembly to shouldered (main) shaft.
(a) Remove assembled shouldered (main) shaft (35, Figure 3004), first stage impeller assembly
(40), labyrinth seal (50), and first stage diffuser assembly (85).
use care to prevent any handling damage such as dents, nicks, or bends on
knife-edges.

(b) Remove first stage diffuser assembly (85) from shouldered (main) shaft (35), then press
shouldered (main) shaft from first stage impeller assembly (40).
CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE OIL TUBE FROM SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT. IF OIL
TUBE IS DAMAGED OR DISTORTED, REFER TO INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-30-04-8000).
(c) Remove labyrinth seal (50) from shouldered (main) shaft (35) using PN 294278-1, seal
removal holder.
NOTE: Do not remove labyrinth seal (50) from shouldered (main) shaft (35) unless
damage is indicated at inspection.

INJURY OR DEATH.
CAUTION: CHECK CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (45) TO MAKE SURE THAT GASKET
WHICH IS PRESENTLY INSTALLED CONTAINS NO HOLES. IF INCORRECT
(d) Remove screws (60) from stationary air seal (70).

(e) Remove stationary air seal (70) from first stage diffuser assembly (85).
(50) Remove transition liner assembly, seal assembly, second stage impeller, and compressor
housing assembly as follows:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3005
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Remove nuts (5, Figure 3005) and seal assembly (10).
(b) Rotate transition liner assembly (15) and remove from transition liner support (30).
(c) Remove bolts (20) and washers (25).
(d) Remove transition liner support (30), interstage seal assembly support (35), second stage
impeller (40), deswirl assembly (45), and second stage vane assembly diffuser (50) from
compressor housing assembly (55).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3006
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Drive Housing Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3007
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 60. ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING

ASSEMBLY
10. BOLT 65. GASKET
15. WASHER 70. SHIM
20. NUT 85. PLUG AND BLEEDER
30. ADAPTER 95. PACKING
35. SPACER 100. POWER GROUP ASSEMBLY
Figure 3002. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Impeller Shroud Removal (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-002-A01)
5. NUT 15. FIRST STAGE IMPELLER SHROUD

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3008
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3003. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Codes AA, BA, CA, BC, CC) First Stage Impeller, First Stage Compressor
Diffuser, and Shouldered (Main) Shaft Removal (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3009
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
35. SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT 70. SEAL SPACER

40. FIRST STAGE IMPELLER 75. RING RETAINER
45. CURVIC COUPLING GASKET 80. SPRING WASHER
50. LABYRINTH SEAL 85. FIRST STAGE COMPRESSOR DIFFUSER
55. RING 90. BOLT
60. RING RETAINER 95. LOCKPLATE
65. DISC SEAL
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3010
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3004. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Codes BB, CB, BD, CD) First Stage Impeller Assembly, First Stage Diffuser
Assembly, and Shouldered (Main) Shaft Removal (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3011
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
35. SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT 60. SCREW

40. FIRST STAGE IMPELLER ASSEMBLY 70. STATIONARY AIR SEAL
45. CURVIC COUPLING GASKET 85. FIRST STAGE DIFFUSER ASSEMBLY
50. LABYRINTH SEAL
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3012
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3005. (Sheet 1 of 1) Transition Liner Assembly, Seal Assembly, Second Stage Impeller, and
Compressor Housing Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-005-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3013
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 35. INTERSTAGE SEAL ASSEMBLY

SUPPORT
10. SEAL ASSEMBLY 40. SECOND STAGE IMPELLER
15. TRANSITION LINER ASSEMBLY 45. DESWIRL ASSEMBLY
20. BOLT 50. SECOND STAGE VANE ASSEMBLY
DIFFUSER
25. WASHER 55. COMPRESSOR HOUSING ASSEMBLY
30. TRANSITION LINER SUPPORT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3014
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
COMPRESSOR GROUP ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the compressor group assembly.

stand (2 required))
PN 284457-1-1 splined torque wrench adapter CAGE: 06848

(used to engage aft end of main
shaft to prevent rotation of rotation
group and hand crank engine)
PN 284476-2-1 puller ((mechanical) used to remove CAGE: 06848

curvic coupling from exhaust end of
PN 284480-2-1 rotating assembly holder (used to CAGE: 06848

hold rotating group in upright
position while stretching shaft)

and maintenance)
PN 285153-2-1 elongation gage (used to provide a CAGE: 06848

point from which measurement may
be taken when checking shouldered
(main) shaft length before and after
shaft if stretched)
PN 285153-3-1 turbine wheel shaft elongation gage CAGE: 06848

(used in shouldered (main) shaft to
provide a reference for measuring
shaft stretch)
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 285160-2-1 dummy bearing carrier assembly CAGE: 06848

(used to align and allow up and
down movement of main shaft when
measuring first and second stage
impeller clearance)
PN 285167-19 spacer (used to support turbine end CAGE: 06848

of rotating group during runout
check (component of PN
285167-1-1 rotating assembly
balancing kit))
PN 285167-25 spacer (used to support compressor CAGE: 06848

end of rotating group during runout
check (component of PN
285167-1-1 rotating assembly
balancing kit))
PN 285253-3-1 turbine wheel shaft elongation gage CAGE: 06848

(used to provide a point from which
measurement may be taken when
checking (main) shaft length before
and after shaft if stretched)
PN 287517-1-1 rotating group holder (used to hold CAGE: 06848

partially assembled rotating group
as shouldered (main) shaft is
installed)
PN 287518-1-1 fixture assembly inspection runout CAGE: 06848

(used to support rotating group
when check runout of components
parts)
PN 287891-1 seal installation pilot (used to CAGE: 06848

protect seal assembly when
installing accessory drive housing
assembly)
PN 291756-1 retaining ring guide (used to aid in CAGE: 06848

installing thrust ring and spring
washer in turbine bearing cavity)
PN 295192-4 cylinder and pump assembly CAGE: 06848

(component of PN 298420-1 thru
PN 298420-4 shaft stretching
fixtures)
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 295194-6 nut (component of PN 298420-1 CAGE: 06848

thru PN 298420-4 shaft stretching
fixtures)
PN 295195-1 fixture stretch protective cover CAGE: 06848

fixtures)

bearing nut)
PN 296493-1 turbine rotor holder (used to remove CAGE: 06848

and install second and third stage
rotors)


remove seal)
PN 296637-2 compressor bearing mechanical CAGE: 06848

puller (used to remove bearing from
carrier and shouldered (main) shaft)
PN 297641-1 two-piece adapter (component of CAGE: 06848

PN 298420-1 thru PN 298420-3
shaft stretching fixtures)
PN 297641-2 shaft stretching adapter (component CAGE: 06848

of PN 298420-4 shaft stretching
fixture)
PN 297642-1 adapter (component of PN CAGE: 06848

298420-1 thru PN 298420-3 shaft
stretching fixtures)

fixture)
PN 297643-1 socket wrench (component of PN CAGE: 06848

298420-1 shaft stretching fixture)
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

298420-2 thru PN 298420-4 shaft
PN 297644-1 stretching shaft CAGE: 06848
PN 297644-2 stretching shaft (component of PN CAGE: 06848

PN 298420-1 shaft stretching fixture ((20 tons) CAGE: 06848

used to stretch shouldered (main)
shaft to install and remove
shouldered (main) shaft nut)



PN 298422-1 turbine module handling fixture CAGE: 06848

(used to install or remove a turbo
prop engine turbine module from
unit and also used for transporting
or storage of module)
PN 298424-1 hydraulic bearing and spacer puller CAGE: 06848

assembly (used to remove
compressor bearing and spacer)
PN 298435-2 compressor bearing dummy spacer CAGE: 06848

(used as replacement for spacer
when obtaining running clearance
when bearing is replaced)
PN 831079-1 micing bridge fixture (used during CAGE: 06848

engine assembly when measuring
to determine proper amount of
shims)
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 831128-1 compressor dummy shaft assembly CAGE: 06848

(used to enable turbine nut
installation while performing
operation to obtain impeller
clearance)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
camel hair brush commercially available
cotton gloves commercially available
nylon mesh gloves commercially available
synthetic rubber gloves commercially available
80 grit lapping compound Timesaver Products Co, 3770

Podlin Dr., Franklin Park, IL 60131

compound

(MIL-PRF-907)
PN NAS816-268 plastic cap (curvics) commercially available

UP495246
ALL Page 4005
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
for silver pencil)
pencil)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-30-04-420-802-A01)
B. Install Accessory Drive Housing Assembly, Compressor Housing Assembly, Compressor

Impellers, Shouldered (Main) Shaft, and Compressor Diffuser (Subtask 72-30-04-420-004-A01)
drag (run-down torque) of self-locking devices to recommended values.
NOTE: Fits and clearances and special torque values involved in assembly are specified at the
applicable point of assembly.
NOTE: When bolts, screws, or nuts are installed on or forward of the compressor housing forward
flange, all threaded surfaces must be coated with Liqui-Moly brand NV thread compound,
anti-seize lubricant unless otherwise specified.
NOTE: When male plumbing fittings are installed forward of the compressor housing forward
flange, all threaded surfaces (except first two threads) must be coated with clean, approved
engine oil unless otherwise specified.
NOTE: When bolts, screws, nuts, or male plumbing fittings are installed on or aft of the compressor
housing forward flange, all threaded surfaces (except first two threads of male plumbing
fittings) must be coated with Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound unless
NOTE: When splines or gear teeth are to be mated, coat the surface with lubricating oil of the
same specification as used in the engine lubricating system unless otherwise specified.
UP495246
ALL Page 4006
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: IF NO ROTATING COMPONENTS HAVE BEEN REPLACED, MAKE SURE THAT

EACH PART IS REINSTALLED IN SAME RELATIVE POSITION TO SHOULDERED
(MAIN) SHAFT.
CAUTION: IF A ROTATING COMPONENT IS REPLACED, THE REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS

CURVIC TOOTH MARKED WITH A “V” OR “I” SHOULD BE POSITIONED
APPROXIMATELY 180 DEGREES FROM “V” OR “I” ON MATING CURVICS. THE
REMAINING COMPONENTS PREVIOUSLY MARKED SHOULD REMAIN ALIGNED
WITH EACH OTHER BUT MAY NOT ALIGN WITH MARK ON SHOULDERED (MAIN)
SHAFT.
(1) Assemble rotating assembly for runout as follows:

NOTE: Curvic teeth marked with “V” or “I” indicates the high tooth. When replacing a turbine
rotating component or components, “V” or “I” tooth should be positioned approximately
180 degrees from “V” or “I” tooth on mating curvic.
NOTE: The index line marked during disassembly on components not being replaced should
remain aligned regardless of position of “V” or “I” teeth on curvics.
NOTE: Prior to assembly of rotating group, inspect components for inspection acceptance
and any damage. Make sure that turbine wheel seals are fully seated and alignment
pins are properly installed and seated with no cracks. Record serial numbers of
turbine wheels.
(a) Install labyrinth seal on shouldered (main) shaft as follows:

1 Place impeller end of main shaft (5, Figure 4001) on PN 284480-2-1, rotating assembly
holder.
2 Heat labyrinth seal (20) in oven at 350°F (177°C) for 15 minutes.

3 Install seal with two blades down over main shaft (5) until firmly seated against shaft
shoulder.
4 Remove assembled components from rotating assembly holder.
(b) Install first and second stage impellers and rotating air seal and coupling assembly on
shouldered (main) shaft as follows:
UP495246
ALL Page 4007
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

1 Place rotating air seal and coupling assembly on PN 287517-1-1, rotating group
holder. Refer to Figure 4002.
NOTE: Brush mating surfaces of curvic with a camel hair brush, then clean
thoroughly with MIL-PRF-680, solvent.
NOTE: Assemble high tooth marks indicated by “V” or “I” on impellers and curvic
coupling 180 degrees apart.
NOTE: Assemble impeller and rotating air seal and coupling assembly with index
marks (made during disassembly) aligned.
2 Install second stage impeller on rotating air seal and coupling assembly.
3 Heat first stage impeller in an oven at 350°F (177°C) for 15 minutes and install on
second stage impeller. Place impellers, rotating air seal and coupling assembly and
holder on arbor press and press main shaft down through the stackup. Make sure
that master spline on main shaft is properly aligned with curvic coupling shaft and
seal splines.
4 Install PN 285167-25, spacer, spur gear, splined coupling, retainer, and nut on impeller
end of main shaft.
CAUTION: IF NO ROTATING COMPONENTS HAVE BEEN REPLACED, MAKE SURE
THAT EACH PART IS REINSTALLED IN SAME RELATIVE POSITION TO
SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT.
CAUTION: IF A ROTATING COMPONENT IS REPLACED, THE REPLACEMENT

COMPONENT CURVIC TOOTH MARKED WITH A “V” OR “I” SHOULD BE
POSITIONED APPROXIMATELY 180 DEGREES FROM “V” OR “I” ON MATING
CURVICS. THE REMAINING COMPONENTS PREVIOUSLY MARKED SHOULD
REMAIN ALIGNED WITH EACH OTHER BUT MAY NOT ALIGN WITH MARK
ON SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT.
(c) Install first, second, and third stage turbine rotors on shouldered (main) shaft as follows:
NOTE: Curvic teeth marked with “V” or “I” indicates the high tooth. When replacing a
turbine rotating component or components, “V” or “I” tooth should be positioned
approximately 180 degrees from “V” or “I” tooth on mating curvic.
NOTE: The index line marked during disassembly on components not being replaced
should remain aligned regardless of position of “V” or “I” teeth on curvics.
1 Remove partially assembled rotating group from PN 287517-1-1, rotating group

holder. Refer to Figure 4003.
UP495246
ALL Page 4008
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2 Rotate partially assembled rotating group 180 degrees and place on PN 284480-2-1,
rotating assembly holder so rotating air seal and coupling assembly is up.
3 Install first stage turbine rotor.
4 Install second stage turbine rotor with seal assembly toward compressor end of main
shaft.
5 Install third stage turbine rotor with seal assembly toward compressor end of main
shaft.
6 Place curvic coupling over main shaft and align teeth to mate with those on turbine
rotor. Heat coupling with hand torch while turning rotating group until it completely
engages turbine rotor.
7 Install seal rotor over main shaft end with flat side against curvic coupling.
8 Install PN 285167-19, spacer.
(d) Stretch shouldered (main) shaft to install hexagon (main shaft) nut for runout check using
PN 298420-1, shaft stretching fixture, PN 298420-2, shaft stretching fixture, PN 298420-3,
shaft stretching fixture, or PN 298420-4, shaft stretching fixture for runout check. Refer to
72-ST-06, Special Tools Pamphlet for maintenance instructions.
CAUTION: USE ONLY CLEAN, APPROVED ENGINE OIL ON HEXAGON NUT. OTHER
LUBRICANTS MAY CAUSE CORROSION.
1 Coat main shaft nut face and threads with clean, approved engine oil.
2 Install nut on main shaft and hand-tighten to seat curvic coupling using a 1 7/16-inch
wrench and PN 284457-1-1, splined torque wrench adapter. Refer to Figure 4004.
NOTE: Use old hexagon nut removed at disassembly. Use new nut at final
assembly.
CAUTION: STRETCHING SHAFT MUST BE THREADED IN THE SHOULDERED

(MAIN) SHAFT UNTIL FULLY INSTALLED (APPROXIMATELY 6 1/2
TURNS). LOOSENING STRETCHING SHAFT 1/4 TURN WILL PREVENT
SHAFT BINDING.
3 Install and tighten PN 297644-1, stretching shaft or PN 297644-2, stretching shaft in

turbine end of main shaft until fully installed (approximately 6 1/2 turns from start of
thread engagement). Then loosen stretching shaft 1/4 turn.
UP495246
ALL Page 4009
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: WHEN STRETCHING MAIN SHAFT, USE OF INCORRECT SHAFT

STRETCHING FIXTURE ADAPTERS COULD DAMAGE THE CURVIC
COUPLING.
CAUTION: (PRE SB TPE331-72-0774) USE ONLY PN 297641-1, TWO-PIECE

ADAPTER AND PN 297642-1, ADAPTER.
CAUTION: (POST SB TPE331-72-0774) USE ONLY PN 297641-2, SHAFT

STRETCHING ADAPTER AND PN 297642-2, SHAFT STRETCHING
ADAPTER.
4 (Pre SB TPE331-72-0774) Install PN 297641-1, two-piece adapter on aft curvic

coupling.
5 Install packing (furnished) around two-piece adapter to hold it in place.
6 (Post SB TPE331-72-0774) Install PN 297641-2, shaft stretching adapter on aft curvic
coupling.
8 Install PN 297643-1, socket wrench or PN 297643-2, socket wrench on hexagon
(main shaft) nut.
9 (Pre SB TPE331-72-0774) Install hydraulic cylinder (component of PN 295192-4,
cylinder and pump assembly) and PN 297642-1, adapter over stretching shaft,
two-piece adapter, and PN 297643-2, socket wrench.
10 (Post SB TPE331-72-0774) Install hydraulic cylinder (component of PN 295192-4,
cylinder and pump assembly) and PN 297642-2, shaft stretching adapter over
stretching shaft, two-piece adapter, and socket wrench.
11 Install and tighten PN 295194-6, nut on stretching shaft until fully installed against
two-piece adapter. While holding stretching shaft, loosen nut to create a 0.25-inch
(6.4 mm) gap between nut and two-piece adapter.
NOTE: The stretching shaft and nut (components of shaft stretching fixture) are
pilot fitted to cylinder bore. The piloting feature makes sure of alignment
of the hydraulic head to the shouldered (main) shaft. Install nut with small
diameter down.
WARNING: SAFETY COVER (COMPONENT OF SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE)

MUST BE INSTALLED WHEN USING SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE.
OPERATING FIXTURE WITHOUT SAFETY COVER COULD RESULT IN
SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY.
12 Install PN 295195-1, fixture stretch protective cover on hydraulic cylinder. Connect

hydraulic pump (component of PN 295192-4, cylinder and pump assembly) hose to
hydraulic cylinder.
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING STEP, APPLY A NOMINAL
PRESSURE OF 5,600 PSIG (38,611 KPA). DO NOT EXCEED 6,100 PSIG
(42,058 KPA).
13 Apply hydraulic pressure (5,600 to 5,700 PSIG (38,611 to 39,300 kPa)) to shouldered
(main) shaft. Do not allow pressure exceed 5,660 PSIG (39,024 kPa). Turn PN
UP495246
ALL Page 4010
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
297643-2, socket wrench CW to tighten hexagon (main shaft) nut. Release pressure
and remove shaft stretching fixture.
(e) Perform assembled rotating assembly runout check as follows:
1 Place assembly in PN 287518-1-1, fixture assembly inspection runout. Check runout
at positions 1, 6, and 11. Refer to Figure 4005.
2 Maximum runout at each position must not exceed 0.0015-inch (0.038 mm) TIR.
3 If runout is not within limits, disassemble rotating assembly to the unsatisfactory
component.
CAUTION: IF COMPONENTS MUST BE ROTATED, MAKE SURE THAT THE CURVIC
COUPLING TEETH ALIGN PROPERLY WITH MATING COMPONENTS.
CURVIC COUPLING TEETH WILL NOT ALWAYS MATE PROPERLY
WHEN ROTATED A SINGLE 90-DEGREE INCREMENT. CONTINUE TO
ROTATE COMPONENTS UNTIL CURVIC TEETH ALIGN PROPERLY.
4 Rotate the unsatisfactory component 90 degrees and reassemble rotating assembly.

NOTE: It may be necessary to remove and rotate the first stage impeller in order
to obtain satisfactory runout limits. Before reinstallation, it is necessary to
make sure that the selected position will allow component curvic teeth
and splines to align with mating components.
5 Repeat the complete assembled rotating assembly runout check as required.

NOTE: This procedure may be repeated until satisfactory limits are obtained or
until it is determined a component requires replacement.
(f) Index and disassemble rotating assembly as follows:

1 Remove PN 285167-25, spacer from forward end of rotating assembly. Refer to
Figure 4006.
2 Place rotating assembly on PN 284480-2-1, rotating assembly holder.
3 Using Verithin No. 753, silver pencil, Violet, No. 127 1/2, industrial marking ink, or
Yellow No. 170T, China marker, mark index lines.
(g) Remove hexagon (main shaft) nut as follows:
SHAFT BINDING DURING HEXAGON NUT REMOVAL.
1 Install and tighten PN 297644-1, stretching shaft or PN 297644-2, stretching shaft in

turbine end of shouldered (main) shaft until fully installed (approximately 6 1/2 turns
from start of thread engagement). Then loosen stretching shaft 1/4 turn. Refer to
Figure 4006.
UP495246
ALL Page 4011
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: WHEN STRETCHING SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT, USE OF

INCORRECT SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE ADAPTERS COULD
DAMAGE THE CURVIC COUPLING.
CAUTION: (PRE SB TPE331-72-0774) USE ONLY PN 297641-1, TWO-PIECE

ADAPTER AND PN 297642-1, ADAPTER.
CAUTION: (POST SB TPE331-72-0774) USE ONLY PN 297641-2, SHAFT

STRETCHING ADAPTER AND PN 297642-2, SHAFT STRETCHING
ADAPTER.
2 (Pre SB TPE331-72-0774) Install PN 297641-1, two-piece adapter on aft curvic

coupling.
4 (Post SB TPE331-72-0774) Install PN 297641-2, shaft stretching adapter on aft curvic
coupling.
6 Install PN 297643-1, socket wrench or PN 297643-2, socket wrench on main shaft
nut.
7 (Pre SB TPE331-72-0774) Install hydraulic cylinder (component of PN 295192-4,
cylinder and pump assembly) and PN 297642-1, adapter over stretching shaft,
two-piece adapter, and PN 297643-2, socket wrench.
8 (Post SB TPE331-72-0774) Install hydraulic cylinder (component of PN 295192-4,
cylinder and pump assembly) and PN 297642-2, shaft stretching adapter over
stretching shaft, two-piece adapter, and PN 297643-2, socket wrench.
two-piece adapter. While holding stretching shaft, loosen nut to create a 0.25-inch
(6.4 mm) gap between nut and two-piece adapter.
NOTE: PN 297644-1, stretching shaft or PN 297644-2, stretching shaft and PN
295194-6, nut are pilot fitted to cylinder bore to make sure alignment of
the hydraulic head to the engine shouldered (main) shaft. Do not reverse
nut.


hydraulic cylinder.
UP495246
ALL Page 4012
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: USE EXTREME CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE SHOULDERED (MAIN)

SHAFT WHILE USING SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE. A NOMINAL
PRESSURE OF 5,600 PSIG (38,611 KPA) SHOULD BE ENOUGH TO
LOOSEN HEXAGON (MAIN SHAFT) NUT. WHEN SEPARATION
BETWEEN MATING SURFACES OF HEXAGON NUT, ROLLER BEARING
(INNER RACE), SEAL ROTOR, OR CURVIC COUPLING IS OBSERVED,
NO FURTHER STRETCH IS REQUIRED. DO NOT EXCEED 6,100 PSIG
(42,058 KPA).
11 Apply hydraulic pressure (5,600 to 5,700 PSIG (38,611 to 39,300 kPa)) to shouldered
(main) shaft, turn PN 297643-1, socket wrench or PN 297643-2, socket wrench CCW
to loosen hexagon (main shaft) nut. Loosen nut and slowly decrease hydraulic
pressure, as required, until nut is loose and hydraulic pressure is zero.
12 Remove shaft stretching fixture from engine.
13 Remove main shaft nut.
14 Remove PN 285167-19, spacer and seal rotor from main shaft.
15 This concludes the main shaft nut removal procedure using shaft stretching fixture.
(h) Using PN 284476-2-1, puller, remove curvic coupling from rotating assembly.
NOTE: When indexing components during disassembly, place index marks where they
are accessed easily for removal during assembly.
(i) Using Verithin No. 753, silver pencil, Violet, No. 127 1/2, industrial marking ink, or Yellow
No. 170T, China marker, mark an index line on shouldered (main) shaft in line with the
mark on the curvic coupling made earlier.
STORAGE.
(j) Remove curvic coupling.

(k) Mark a line on shouldered (main) shaft with Verithin No. 753, silver pencil, Violet, No. 127
1/2, industrial marking ink, or Yellow No. 170T, China marker with the mark on the third
stage turbine rotor made earlier.
(l) Remove third stage turbine rotor.
(m) Repeat the preceding two steps for second stage turbine rotor, first stage turbine rotor,
rotating air seal and curvic coupling assembly, and second stage impeller.
NOTE: All components are removed from shouldered (main) shaft except first stage
impeller and labyrinth seal.
(2) Assemble compressor and turbine sections as follows:

(a) Assemble second stage impeller, compressor housing assembly, and transition liner
assembly as follows:
UP495246
ALL Page 4013
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT ALIGNMENT PINS ARE INSTALLED ON PN

284203-1-1, MAINTENANCE STAND ADAPTER PRIOR TO INSTALLING
ADAPTERS ON ENGINE.
1 Install two PN 284203-1-1, maintenance stand adapters on forward side of aft flange
of compressor housing assembly (55, Figure 4007). Refer to Figure 4008. Attach
adapters to PN 284493-1-1, engine maintenance stand.
NOTE: The inside front face of the compressor housing assembly is drilled in
three places at bolt hole locations 27 and 28.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW ANY LAPPING COMPOUND TO COME IN CONTACT

WITH ANY BEARINGS OR OIL-WETTED PARTS.
CAUTION: DO NOT GOUGE LAPPED SURFACES.
2 Lap second stage impeller to compressor housing assembly shroud surface.

NOTE: Lapping second stage impeller to compressor housing assembly shroud
surface will improve fit.
a Mix 80 grit, lapping compound with clean, approved engine oil to develop a light
consistency mixture. Spread mixture evenly over entire compressor housing
assembly (55, Figure 4007) shroud surface.
b Using second stage impeller (40), lap shroud surface applying light force. Obtain
circumferential contact of 0.375-inch (9.52 mm) minimum width at impeller blade
tips (impeller vane exit area).
c Remove any throat (radial) contact by polishing and/or lapping.
WARNING: CLEANING AGENTS ARE TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE IN
WELL-VENTILATED AREA. AVOID BREATHING FUMES OR
CONTACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO PHYSICAL
WARNING: SOLVENT IS TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. USE IN

WELL-VENTILATED AREA. AVOID BREATHING FUMES OR
CONTACT WITH SKIN TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO PHYSICAL
CAUTION: REMOVE ALL LAPPING COMPOUND FROM IMPELLER AND

SHROUD. DO NOT GOUGE LAPPED SURFACES.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE CHLORINATED SOLVENTS AS CLEANING AGENTS

ON TITANIUM IMPELLERS.
d Use MIL-PRF-680, solvent to remove lapping compound.

3 Install second stage diffuser vane assembly (50, Figure 4007), with the anti-rotation
pin facing rear of engine, in compressor housing assembly (55). Align diffuser vane
assembly bolt holes with compressor housing assembly threaded holes.
NOTE: Second stage vane assembly diffuser lip must face rear of engine.
UP495246
ALL Page 4014
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
4 Align deswirl assembly (45) inner edge notch with second stage diffuser vane
assembly (50) anti-rotation pin and install.
AREA. AVOID BREATHING FUMES OR CONTACT WITH SKIN TO
PREVENT DAMAGE TO PHYSICAL HEALTH. KEEP AWAY FROM
5 Install second stage impeller (40) in compressor housing assembly (55).

NOTE: Always brush mating surfaces of curvics with a camel hair brush, and
clean thoroughly with MIL-PRF-680, solvent before installation.
6 Install interstage seal assembly support (35), with studs facing rear of engine. Align
second stage diffuser vane assembly (50) anti-rotation pin with seal assembly support
outer edge notch.
NOTE: Interstage seal assembly support studs must face rear of engine.
Interstage seal assembly support notch must align with second stage
diffuser vane assembly anti-rotation pin.
7 Make sure that interstage seal assembly support (35, Figure 4007) bolt holes are
aligned with second stage diffuser vane assembly (50) bolt holes. If bolts holes do
not align, rotate seal assembly support 180 degrees. Align notch on opposite edge
with diffuser vane assembly anti-rotation pin.
NOTE: Interstage seal assembly support bolt holes must align with second stage
diffuser vane assembly bolt holes.
8 Align transition liner support (30) notch with interstage seal assembly support (35)
anti-rotation pin and install.
9 Coat bolt (20) threads with Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound.
10 Secure transition liner support (30) and interstage seal assembly support (35) with
washers (25) and bolts (20). Torque bolts to 50 in-lb (5.6 Nm).
11 Align transition liner assembly (15) notches with interstage seal assembly support
(35) notches and install.
12 Align seal assembly (10) anti-rotation pins with transition liner assembly (15) and
interstage seal assembly support (35) notches and install. Secure seal assembly with
nuts (5). Torque nuts to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm).
NOTE: Always make sure that seal assembly anti-rotation pins are engaged in
transition liner assembly and interstage seal assembly support notches
before securing seal assembly to seal assembly support.
(b) (Codes AA, BA, CA, BC, CC) Assemble compressor diffuser as follows:
1 If previously removed, install lockplates (95, Figure 4009) and bolts (90) on compressor
diffuser (85). Torque bolts (90) to 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm).
2 Place compressor diffuser (85) on bench with studs up.
3 Install two spring washers (80), ring retainer (75) and one disc seal (65) into bore of
compressor diffuser (85).
UP495246
ALL Page 4015
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
4 Place one seal spacer (70) on top of disc seal (65), then alternate disc seals and seal
spacers until five disc seals (65) and four seal spacers (70) have been installed into
bore of compressor diffuser (85).
5 Secure disc seals, seal spacers, and spring washers to compressor diffuser with ring
retainer (60) and retaining ring (55).
(c) (Codes BB, CB, BD, CD) Assemble first stage diffuser assembly as follows:
1 Place first stage diffuser assembly (85, Figure 4010) on bench with studs facing up.
2 Install stationary air seal (70) into first stage diffuser assembly (85).
3 Secure stationary air seal (70) with screws (60).
4 Torque screws (60) to 50 in-lb (5.6 Nm).
(d) Assemble partially assembled rotating group, compressor diffuser, and partially assembled
power group as follows:
1 Install partially assembled rotating group on PN 284480-2-1, rotating assembly holder.
Refer to Figure 4011 and Figure 4012.
2 Install compressor diffuser on shouldered (main) shaft until it makes contact with first
stage impeller.
CAUTION: A CURVIC COUPLING GASKET WITH NO HOLES MUST BE INSTALLED
IN FIRST STAGE IMPELLER.
3 Install curvic coupling gasket (45, Figure 4013) (V seal), with no holes in first stage
impeller aft curvic coupling. Make sure that gasket is properly seated.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT (VERITHIN NO. 753, SILVER PENCIL, VIOLET, NO.
127 1/2, INDUSTRIAL MARKING INK, OR YELLOW NO. 170T, CHINA
MARKER) INDEX MARKINGS ARE REMOVED DURING ASSEMBLY.
4 Throughout assembly, remove index markings from each component. Refer to

CAUTION: USE OF LUBRICANTS ON MAIN SHAFT TURBINE NUT OTHER THAN
CLEAN, APPROVED ENGINE OIL IS PROHIBITED. OTHER LUBRICANTS
MAY RESULT IN A CORROSIVE ATTACK TO THE MAIN SHAFT TURBINE
NUT.
5 Coat main shaft nut face and threads with clean, approved engine oil.
NOTE: Use old hexagon nut removed at disassembly. Use new nut at final
assembly.
6 Remove partially assembled rotating group with compressor diffuser from PN

284480-2-1, rotating assembly holder.
7 Install aft end of main shaft up through partially assembled power group. Make sure
that index marks on main shaft and second stage impeller are aligned.
8 Secure assembly with PN 831128-1, compressor dummy shaft assembly and main
shaft nut.
9 Install 1 7/16-inch wrench on main shaft nut and tighten hand tight.
(e) Assemble combustion chamber assembly into combustion case as follows:
UP495246
ALL Page 4016
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1 (Pre SB TPE331-77-0054) Align retainer bolt holes in combustion chamber case (55,
Figure 4014) with retainer nut on combustion chamber assembly (60) and secure
with shouldered machine bolts (5) and washers (10, 12). Torque bolts to 70 in-lb (7.9
Nm).
2 (Post SB TPE331-77-0054) Align retainer bolt holes in combustion chamber case
(55) with holes in retainer bracket on combustion chamber assembly (60) and secure
with shouldered machine bolts (5), locking plate (11), and washers (12). Torque bolts
to 70 in-lb (7.9 Nm).
3 (Pre SB TPE331-77-0054) Bend washers (10, 12) down against flat on combustion
chamber case boss, and bend opposite side of washer up against flat on shouldered
machine bolt (5) heads.
4 (Post SB TPE331-77-0054) Bend washers (12) and locking plate (11) down against
flat on combustion chamber case boss, and bend opposite side of washers and
locking plate (11) up against flat on shouldered machine bolt (5) heads.
(f) Install combustion chamber assembly and combustion chamber case as follows:
1 Remove bolts previously installed securing PN 284203-1-1, maintenance stand
adapter to compressor housing assembly.
2 Install assembled combustion chamber assembly and combustion chamber case on
compressor housing assembly with drain holes at the 6 o'clock position.
3 Secure assembly with bolts (35, Figure 4015) and nuts (15). Do not install bolts in
holes 16, 18, 20, 21, and 26 through 29. Torque bolts to 60 in-lb (6.8 Nm).
NOTE: Refer to Figure 4016 for bolt hole pattern.
4 Install identification plate (25) at bolt holes 16 and 18. Secure with bolts (20). Torque
5 Install previously removed bolts on PN 284203-1-1, maintenance stand adapter.
(g) Prepare for shouldered (main) shaft stretch as follows:
1 Install PN 285153-2-1, elongation gage or PN 285153-3-1, turbine wheel shaft
elongation gage in shouldered (main) shaft from impeller end and tighten hand tight.
2 Using depth micrometer, measure from aft end of shouldered (main) shaft to top of
turbine wheel shaft elongation gage.
3 Record this measurement as Dimension B (unstretched) on Figure 4017, Build
Dimension Worksheet. Make a copy of Build Dimension Worksheet to record this
data.
(h) Perform shaft stretch using PN 298420-4, shaft stretching fixture.
SHAFT BINDING.
1 Install and tighten PN 297644-2, stretching shaft in turbine end of shouldered (main)
shaft until fully installed (approximately 6 1/2 turns from start of thread engagement).
Loosen stretching shaft 1/4 turn.
UP495246
ALL Page 4017
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: WHEN STRETCHING SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT, USE OF

INCORRECT SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE ADAPTERS COULD
DAMAGE THE TWO-PIECE ADAPTER OR PN 831128-1, COMPRESSOR
DUMMY SHAFT ASSEMBLY.
CAUTION: USE ONLY PN 297641-2, SHAFT STRETCHING ADAPTER AND PN

297642-2, SHAFT STRETCHING ADAPTER.
2 Install PN 297641-2, shaft stretching adapter on PN 831128-1, compressor dummy

shaft assembly.
3 Install packing (furnished) around two-piece adapter to hold in place.
4 Install PN 297643-2, socket wrench on hexagon (main shaft) nut.
5 Install hydraulic cylinder with PN 297642-2, shaft stretching adapter over stretching
shaft, two-piece adapter, and socket wrench.
6 Install PN 298420-4, shaft stretching fixture, hydraulic head over stretching shaft and
two-piece adapter.
hydraulic head. While holding stretching shaft, loosen nut to create a 0.25-inch (6.4
mm) gap between nut and hydraulic head.
NOTE: PN 297644-2, stretching shaft and PN 295194-6, nut are pilot fitted to
cylinder bore to make sure of alignment of the hydraulic head to the engine
shouldered (main) shaft. Do not reverse nut.


hydraulic cylinder.
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING STEP, APPLY A NOMINAL
4,900 PSIG (33,784 KPA). DO NOT EXCEED 6,100 PSIG (42,058 KPA).
9 Apply hydraulic pressure (4,900 to 5,000 PSIG (33,784 to 34,474 kPa)) to main shaft.
Turn socket wrench CW to tighten hexagon (main shaft) nut. Do not exceed 6,100
PSIG (42,058 kPa). Release applied pressure.
10 Remove shaft stretching fixture from engine.
11 Using a depth micrometer, measure from aft end of main shaft to top of PN
285253-3-1, turbine wheel shaft elongation gage and record as Dimension B
(stretched) on Build Dimension Worksheet copy. If Dimension B (stretched) is 0.057
to 0.060 inch (1.45 to 1.52 mm) greater than previously recorded Dimension B
(unstretched), shaft stretch is within limits.
NOTE: Use Dimension B (unstretched), recorded previously in obtaining shaft
stretch. The required shaft stretch (the difference between Dimension B
unstretched and Dimension B stretched) must be 0.057 to 0.060 inch (1.45
to 1.52 mm).
UP495246
ALL Page 4018
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
12 If Dimension B (stretched) is greater than Dimension B (unstretched), but less than

0.057 inch (1.45 mm) previously recorded, repeat the above procedures and add 50
PSIG (345 kPa) increments above the previous pressure used until required Dimension
B is obtained.
13 If Dimension B (stretched) is greater than Dimension B (unstretched) previously
recorded, repeat the hydraulic pressure application procedure and loosen hexagon
(main shaft) nut until required Dimension B is obtained.
14 Remove turbine wheel shaft elongation gage.
(3) Obtain second stage zero measurement. Refer to Figure 4018.
NOTE: Table 4003 provides a list of compressor clearances, sample measurements and
calculations required for shimming the first stage impeller shroud. The following
information provides a definition of terms and an explanation of procedure.
NOTE: Definition of terms:

• Second stage zero measurement: Represents the position of rotating group when
second stage impeller is lightly loaded against second stage shroud portion of
compressor housing prior to installation of the first stage shroud.
• Second stage running clearance: Represents the required clearance between the
second stage impeller and second stage shroud portion of compressor housing
after the rotating group has been secured by installation of the compressor bearing.
• Desired top normal running clearance measurement: Represents desired position
of the rotating group after rotating group has been secured by installation of
compressor bearing.
• First stage running clearance: Represents the required clearance between first
stage impeller and first stage impeller shroud after the rotating group has been
secured by installation of the compressor bearing.
• First stage zero measurement with trial shims: This measurement represents the
position of the rotating group when first stage impeller is lightly loaded against
first stage impeller shroud after a trial amount of shims has been installed between
accessory drive housing and the crossover duct (which positions the first stage
shroud). This measurement when reduced by the desired first stage measurement
(as calculated) provides the amount of shims (noted above) to be removed.
• Desired first stage zero measurement: Represents the desired position of the
rotating group if the first stage impeller could be lightly loaded against first stage
impeller shroud after accomplishment of first stage shroud shimming. (Calculated
measurement only, cannot be checked.)
NOTE: Explanation of procedure: A calculated first stage zero measurement must be obtained
before proper shimming of first stage impeller shroud can be accomplished. Refer
to Table 4003.The calculated first stage zero is obtained by first obtaining second
stage zero measurement. Add nominal second stage running clearance to second
stage zero measurement. This establishes desired top normal running clearance
measurement. Subtract nominal first stage running clearance from top normal running
clearance measurement. The remainder is the desired first stage zero measurement
needed to continue shimming first stage shroud.
UP495246
ALL Page 4019
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Install PN 831079-1, micing bridge fixture or turbine bearing support on combustion case
and secure with four slave bolts. Torque slave bolts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(b) Using a depth micrometer, measure from PN 831079-1, micing bridge fixture or micing bar
on turbine bearing support to aft end of main shaft. Record this measurement as second
stage zero on Build Dimension Worksheet copy.
NOTE: One location on the end surface of shouldered (main) shaft should be marked
with Verithin No. 753, silver pencil, Violet, No. 127 1/2, industrial marking ink,
or Yellow No. 170T, China marker and all measurements taken adjacent to this
reference.
(c) Using second stage zero measurement obtained in the above step, calculate top normal
running clearance and first stage zero clearance. Refer to sample shown in Table 4003.
Table 4003. Clearance Limits, Sample Measurements, and Calculations
Sample Measurements and

Limits Calculations
Reference Inches (mm) Inches (mm)
Second stage zero measurement 3.598 (91.39)
Second stage running clearance 0.032 to 0.034 (0.81 to 0.86) -0.033 (-0.84) (nominal)
Desired top normal running 3.565 (90.55)
clearance measurement
First stage running clearance 0.033 to 0.035 (0.84 to 0.89) +0.034 (+0.86) (nominal)
Desired first stage zero 3.599 (91.41)
measurement
First stage zero measurement with -3.581 (-90.96)
trial shims
Thickness of shims to be removed 0.018 (0.46)
Thickness of trial shims installed 0.090 (2.29)
Thickness of shims to be removed -0.018 (-0.46)
Required shim thickness 0.072 (1.83)
NOTE: First stage zero measurement cannot be checked after shimming procedure is
completed. This is caused by second stage running clearance (0.033 inch (0.84
mm) nominal) being less than first stage running clearance (0.034 inch (0.86
mm) nominal). Second stage zero would occur prior to first stage impeller
contacting its shroud. Refer to Table 4003 for calculation procedures to
determine amount of shims to remove.
(4) Rotate assembly in stand 180 degrees.

(5) Install first stage impeller shroud.
(a) Install packing (30, Figure 4019) on first stage impeller shroud (15).
(b) Apply Liqui-Moly brand NV thread compound, anti-seize lubricant to compressor diffuser
stud threads.
UP495246
ALL Page 4020
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) Install first stage impeller shroud (15) over first stage impeller. Make sure that bolt holes
are properly aligned with studs.
NOTE: Compressor diffuser studs are not equally spaced. Make sure that first stage
impeller shroud bolt holes are properly aligned with compressor diffuser studs
during installation.
(d) Secure first stage impeller shroud (15) with washers (10) and nuts (5). Torque nuts to 27
in-lb (3.1 Nm).
(6) First stage impeller shimming calculation.
(a) Install 0.090-inch (2.29 mm) trial shims (70, Figure 4020) on crossover duct studs.
NOTE: The installation of 0.090-inch (2.29 mm) shims will cause an over-shimmed
condition between crossover duct and accessory drive housing assembly. Over
shimming is necessary to make sure that second stage zero is not attained
prior to first stage zero.
(b) Coat gasket (65) with a thin film of DC-111, silicone grease.
(c) Install gasket on compressor housing assembly.
(d) Install PN 287891-1, seal installation pilot on shouldered (main) shaft.
(e) Install accessory drive housing assembly on compressor housing flange of partially
assembled power group.
NOTE: When installing accessory drive housing assembly, it is necessary to make sure
that the housing assembly relief cuts are aligned with the first stage impeller
shroud mounting studs.
(f) Remove PN 287891-1, seal installation pilot and install PN 285160-2-1, dummy bearing
carrier assembly.
NOTE: PN 285160-2-1, dummy bearing carrier assembly is used to center the rotating
group.
(g) Install speed nuts flush with stud ends on dummy bearing carrier.
NOTE: Dummy shaft assembly should be free to move axially within restraint of studs.
(h) Install spacers (35), adapters (30), washers (25), and speed nuts on every other first stage
compressor diffuser stud. Torque speed nuts, alternating from side to side to 30 in-lb (3.4
Nm).
NOTE: Torquing speed nuts, alternating from side to side, will make sure that the shroud
is pulled in position evenly.
(i) Install bolts (10), washers (15), and speed nuts in every third flange bolt hole. Torque speed
nuts to 50 to 60 in-lb (5.6 to 6.8 Nm).
(j) Rotate partially assembled engine 180 degrees, aft end up.
(k) Using depth micrometer, measure from PN 831079-1, micing bridge fixture or micing bar
on turbine bearing support to aft end of shouldered (main) shaft. Refer to Figure 4018.
Record this measurement as first stage zero with trial shims on Build Dimension Worksheet
copy.
UP495246
ALL Page 4021
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: CALCULATION FOR SHIM REMOVAL IS EXTREMELY CRITICAL. NO

MEASUREMENT METHOD IS PROVIDED TO CHECK THAT THE PROPER
AMOUNT OF SHIMS ARE REMOVED.
(l) Subtract first stage zero measurement with trial shims from required first stage zero in
Table 4003.
NOTE: The result of shimming the crossover duct to the accessory drive housing
assembly is to provide 0.001-inch (0.02 mm) clearance between the first stage
impeller and the first stage shroud when the second stage impeller is against
compressor housing shroud portion (second stage zero). The second stage
compressor running clearance (0.032 to 0.034 inch (0.81 to 0.86 mm)) is less
than first stage running clearance (0.033 to 0.035 inch (0.84 to 0.89 mm)).
NOTE: The difference calculated in this step equals the thickness of shims to be
removed to establish proper correlation between first stage impeller and second
stage impeller when top normal running clearance is established in a later step.
(m) Rotate partially assembled engine 180 degrees, forward end up.
(n) Remove speed nuts, bolts (10, Figure 4020), and washers (15).
(o) Remove speed nuts, washers (25), adapters (30), and spacers (35).
(p) Remove accessory drive housing assembly.
(q) Remove trial shims.
(7) Installing accessory drive housing.
(a) Install packing (95, Figure 4021) and verify gasket (65) is installed.
(b) Install required shim thickness calculated in Table 4003 for first stage clearance.
(c) Install PN 287891-1, seal installation pilot.
(d) Install accessory drive housing assembly on partially assembled power group.
NOTE: When installing accessory drive housing assembly, make sure that relief holes
in housing assembly are aligned with first stage impeller shroud mounting studs.
(e) Remove PN 287891-1, seal installation pilot.

(f) Install spacers (35, Figure 4021), adapters (30), washers (25) and nuts (20). Torque nuts,
alternating from side to side to 30 in-lb (3.4 Nm).
NOTE: Torquing bolts, alternating from side to side, will make sure that the shroud is
pulled in position evenly.
(g) Install bolts (15), washers (10) and nuts (5) in holes as shown in Figure 4022. Torque nuts
to 50 to 60 in-lb (5.6 to 6.8 Nm).
NOTE: Do not install bolts in holes listed in Figure 4022.
UP495246
ALL Page 4022
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: DO NOT MEASURE DIMENSION A IN BEARING CARRIER (65) ON RADIUS OF

BEARING SEAT.

(8) Measure compressor bearing components to determine bearing pinch.

(a) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0751, Pre SB TPE331-72-0984, or Pre SB TPE331-72-2003) Determine
thickness of shims required for fixed build Dimension BD as follows:
NOTE: Dimension BD (fixed build dimension) is the desired height of the spring washer
under load.
1 Using depth micrometer, measure bearing carrier (65, Figure 4023) from bearing
seat to flange face. Record as Dimension A on Build Dimension Worksheet copy.
2 Measure bearing (40) height. Record as Dimension B on Build Dimension Worksheet
copy.
3 (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Measure retainer (20) step. Record as Dimension C on
Build Dimension Worksheet copy.
4 (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Measure accessory gear assembly (90) step. Record
as Dimension C on Build Dimension Worksheet copy.
CAUTION: DO NOT COMPRESS SPRING WASHER TO LESS THAN AN OPERATING
HEIGHT OF 0.197 INCH (5.00 MM).
5 Calculate shim requirement.

NOTE: Dimension BD is the spring washer compressed height. Dimension BD
must be 0.197 to 0.200 inch (5.00 to 5.08 mm).
a Add Dimensions B, C, and Nominal BD (0.1985 inch (5.042 mm)).

b Subtract Dimension A from the sum of Dimensions B, C, and BD.
c Result is shim (25, Figure 4024) thickness required to obtain Dimension BD.
(b) (Post SB TPE331-72-0751, Post SB TPE331-72-0984, or Post SB TPE331-72-2003)
Determine thickness of shims required for nominal build Dimension BD as follows:
1 Measure bearing carrier (65, Figure 4025) from bearing seat to flange face using a
depth micrometer. Record as Dimension A on Build Dimension Worksheet copy.
CAUTION: HANDLING OF BEARING COMPONENTS MUST BE MINIMIZED. REFER
TO INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000) FOR HANDLING
PROCEDURES.
2 (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Place bearing (40) and notched spacer (46) on retainer
(20), as shown on Figure 4025.
3 (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Place bearing (40) and notched spacer (46) on accessory
gear assembly (90), as shown on Figure 4025.
4 (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Measure from notched spacer (46) face to retainer (20)
step. Record as Dimension B on Build Dimension Worksheet copy.
UP495246
ALL Page 4023
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5 (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Measure from notched spacer (46, Figure 4025) face
to accessory gear assembly (90) step, as shown on Figure 4026. Record as Dimension
B on Build Dimension Worksheet copy.
6 Calculate shim requirement. Refer to Figure 4026.
NOTE: Dimension BD must be 0.002 to 0.004 inch (0.05 to 0.10 mm).
a Subtract Dimension A from Dimension B.

b Subtract Dimension BD from the difference of Dimensions A and B.
c Result is shim (25) thickness required to obtain Dimension BD.
(9) Partially assemble compressor bearing carrier.
(a) Install packing (75, Figure 4027) in bearing carrier (65).
CAUTION: PERSONNEL HANDLING STATIONARY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY (COMPRESSOR
BELLOWS SEAL) AND ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) MUST WEAR EITHER
SYNTHETIC RUBBER GLOVES OR NYLON MESH GLOVES WITH
POLYETHYLENE PALMS AND FINGERS. IN CASE NEITHER OF THE ABOVE
ARE AVAILABLE, CLEAN COTTON GLOVES MUST BE WORN.

ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) MUST BE INSTALLED DRY; DO NOT
LUBRICATE.
CAUTION: STATIONARY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY (COMPRESSOR BELLOWS SEAL) MUST

BOTTOM IN BEARING CARRIER WITHOUT EXCESSIVE PRESSURE OR
CUTTING PACKING.
CAUTION: STATIONARY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY (COMPRESSOR BELLOWS SEAL) (60)

AND ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) (55) MUST BE INSTALLED AS A SET
TO MAKE SURE OF CORRECT ENGINE BUILD, AND TO PREVENT DAMAGE
TO COMPRESSOR COMPONENTS.
(b) Using PN 296633-2, compressor seal holder and driver and an arbor press, install stationary
oil seal assembly (compressor bellows seal) (60) in bearing carrier (65).
(c) Install partially assembled bearing carrier assembly in accessory drive housing assembly.
(d) Align duplex bearing (40) outer race anti-rotation slot at the 12 o'clock position. Using PN
296562-2, bearing puller, install bearing (40) on shouldered (main) shaft.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT PART NUMBER OF ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) (55,
FIGURE 4027) IS CORRECT. INSTALLATION OF THE WRONG PART NUMBER
ROTOR CAN RESULT IN DAMAGE TO COMPRESSOR IMPELLERS AND
SHROUDS, AND WILL CAUSE BINDING OF ROTATING ASSEMBLY.
(e) Make sure that part number of rotor (rotating oil seal) (55) is correct.
(f) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984 or Pre SB TPE331-72-2003) Measure thickness of rotor (rotating
oil seal) as shown in Figure 4028. Record as Dimension J. If Dimension J is not 0.359 to
UP495246
ALL Page 4024
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(g) (Post SB TPE331-72-0984 or Post SB TPE331-72-2003) Measure thickness of rotor

(rotating oil seal) as shown in Figure 4028. Record as Dimension J. If Dimension J is not
0.653 to 0.658 inch (16.59 to 16.71 mm), replace rotor.
LUBRICATE.
(h) Make sure that stationary oil seal assembly (compressor bellows seal) (60, Figure 4027)
and rotor (rotating oil seal) (55) are dry; do not lubricate prior to installation.
(i) Install rotor (rotating oil seal) (55), flat side down, on stationary oil seal assembly
(compressor bellows seal) (60).
CAUTION: (PRE SB TPE331-72-0751, PRE SB TPE331-72-0984, OR PRE SB
TPE331-72-2003) FAILURE TO INSTALL SPRING WASHER MAY RESULT IN
SIGNIFICANT LOSS OF ENGINE PERFORMANCE OR ABNORMAL ENGINE
OPERATION IN THE FORM OF COMPRESSOR SURGE.
(j) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0751, Pre SB TPE331-72-0984, or Pre SB TPE331-72-2003) Install

spring washer (45) in bearing carrier (65).
CAUTION: (POST SB TPE331-72-0751, POST SB TPE331-72-0984, OR POST SB
TPE331-72-2003) NOTCHED SPACER MUST BE INSTALLED WITH ARROW
POINTING TOWARD BEARING CARRIER. AN IMPROPERLY INSTALLED
NOTCHED SPACER CAN CAUSE AN INCONSISTENT LOAD ON THE
COMPRESSOR BEARING, REDUCED OIL SCAVENGE, AND HIGH OIL
TEMPERATURE.
(k) (Post SB TPE331-72-0751, Post SB TPE331-72-0984, or Post SB TPE331-72-2003) Install

notched spacer (46) in bearing carrier (65), with arrow pointing toward bearing carrier.
(l) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984 or Pre SB TPE331-72-2003) Install PN 298435-2, compressor
bearing dummy spacer in place of spacer (50).
NOTE: (Post SB TPE331-72-0984 or Post SB TPE331-72-2003) Spacer (50) is not
used.
(10) Determine shim requirement for compressor bearing carrier to obtain compressor clearance.
(a) Install 0.04-inch (1.14 mm) trial shims (80, Figure 4027) in accessory drive housing
assembly. Record number and thickness of each shim installed.
NOTE: When clearances between first and second stage impeller shrouds have been
established, the rotating group must be positioned for proper second stage
impeller clearance. Trial shims must be installed under bearing carrier to
accomplish this.
(b) Install partially assembled bearing carrier (65).

(c) Align duplex bearing (40) outer race anti-rotation slot at the 12 o'clock position. Using PN
296562-2, bearing puller, install duplex bearing (40) on shouldered (main) shaft.
(d) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install oil scoop (100, Figure 4029) and spur gear (95).
(e) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install previously determined thickness of shims (25, Figure
4027).
UP495246
ALL Page 4025
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(f) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install previously determined thickness of shims (92, Figure
4029).
(g) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Position retainer (20, Figure 4027) on bearing carrier (65).
Secure with speed nut in place of nuts (5). Torque speed nuts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(h) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install accessory gear assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION

(PGBLK 72-10-17-4000).
(i) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install accessory gear assembly (90, Figure 4029). Secure
with speed nuts in place of nuts (5). Torque speed nuts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(j) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install oil scoop (100, Figure 4027) and spur gear (95).
(k) Install splined coupling (35, Figure 4030) on shouldered (main) shaft.
NOTE: Inspection of splined coupling may have revealed that load surfaces on only
one side of splines were acceptable. This will be indicated by the words “THIS
SIDE FORWARD” etched on splined coupling.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT RETAINER RING IS COMPLETELY ENGAGED IN GROOVE

OF SPLINED SHAFT COUPLING. IF RETAINER RING IS NOT PROPERLY
INSTALLED, THE GEARTRAIN COULD UNCOUPLE FROM THE ENGINE
RESULTING IN A TOTAL LOSS OF THRUST AND THE ENGINE BEING
CONTROLLED BY THE OSFG.
(l) Install sleeve (25) and retainer ring (30) in splined (main shaft) coupling (20).
(m) Install assembled coupling over splined coupling (35).
(n) Install retainer (15) in main shaft coupling (20).
(o) Place hexagon (main shaft) nut (5) with slots at lower end in retainer (10).
(p) Apply clean, approved engine oil to main shaft nut (5) face and threads.
(q) Install main shaft nut (5) on main shaft.
(r) Using PN 296132-1, torque wrench adapter, torque main shaft nut to 900 in-lb (101.7 Nm).
(s) Loosen main shaft nut and torque three times to 900 in-lb (101.7 Nm).
(t) Remove PN 296132-1, torque wrench adapter.
(u) Rotate engine 180 degrees, aft end up.
(v) Using depth micrometer, measure from PN 831079-1, micing bridge fixture or micing bar
on turbine bearing support to aft end of shouldered (main) shaft. Refer to Figure 4031.
(w) Record as measured top normal running measurement with trial shims on Build Dimension
Worksheet copy.
(x) Compare measurement to top normal running calculated in Table 4003. Determine amount
of shims (80, Figure 4027) to be added or removed to obtain proper top normal running
clearance measurement. Refer to Table 4004 and Table 4005 for examples.
UP495246
ALL Page 4026
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 4004. Shim Thickness to Obtain Top Normal Running Clearance (Example 1)
Calculation
Desired top normal running clearance measurement. = 1.182 (30.02)
Measured top normal running clearance measurement. = 1.172 (29.77)
Difference = +0.010 (+0.25)
Trial shims installed = 0.045 (1.14)
+0.010 (+0.25)
Total shims required = 0.055 (1.40)
Table 4005. Shim Thickness to Obtain Top Normal Running Clearance (Example 2)
Calculation
Desired top normal running clearance measurement. = 1.182 (30.02)
Measured top normal running clearance measurement. = 1.192 (30.28)
Difference = -0.010 (-0.25)
Trial shims installed = 0.045 (1.14)
-0.010 (-0.25)
Total shims required = 0.035 (0.89)
(y) Rotate engine 180 degrees, forward end up.

(z) Using PN 296132-1, torque wrench adapter, remove hexagon (main shaft) nut (5, Figure
4030).
(aa) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Remove retainers (10, 15, Figure 4027), splined (main shaft)
coupling (20), splined coupling (35), spur gear (95), and oil scoop (100).
(ab) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Remove retainers (10, 15, Figure 4030), splined (main shaft)
coupling (20), and splined coupling (35).
(ac) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Remove speed nut, retainer (20, Figure 4027), and shims
(25).
(ad) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Remove speed nuts, accessory gear assembly (90, Figure
4029), and shims (92).
(ae) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Remove spur gear (95) and oil scoop (100).
(af) Using PN 296637-2, compressor bearing mechanical puller or PN 298424-1, hydraulic
bearing and spacer puller assembly, remove duplex bearing (40).
(ag) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0751, Pre SB TPE331-72-0984, or Pre SB TPE331-72-2003) Remove
spring washer (45, Figure 4027), PN 298435-2, compressor bearing dummy spacer, and
rotor (rotating oil seal) (55).
UP495246
ALL Page 4027
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(ah) (Post SB TPE331-72-0751, Pre SB TPE331-72-0984 or Pre SB TPE331-72-2003) Remove

notched spacer (46, Figure 4027), PN 298435-2, compressor bearing dummy spacer, and
rotor (rotating oil seal) (55).
(ai) (Post SB TPE331-72-0751, Post SB TPE331-72-0984, or Post SB TPE331-72-2003)
Remove notched spacer (46, Figure 4027) and rotor (rotating oil seal) (55).
(aj) Remove partially assembled bearing carrier (65) and trial shims (80).
(11) Measure bearing and associated components to provide required dimensions to accomplish a
stack check after bearing and components have been installed.
(a) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984 or Pre SB TPE331-72-2003) Measure rotor (rotating oil seal)
(55, Figure 4027) thickness. Refer to Figure 4032. Record as Dimension J on Build
Dimension Workshee copy. If Dimension J is not within limits (0.359 to 0.361 inch (9.12 to
9.17 mm)), replace rotor.
(b) (Post SB TPE331-72-0984 or Post SB TPE331-72-2003) Measure rotor (rotating oil seal)
(55, Figure 4027) thickness. Refer to Figure 4032. Record as Dimension J on Build
Dimension Worksheet copy. If Dimension J is not within limits (0.653 to 0.658 inch (16.59
to 16.71 mm)), replace rotor.
(c) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984 or Pre SB TPE331-72-2003) Stack duplex bearing (40, Figure
4027) and spacer (50) as shown in Figure 4032. Measure combined height of bearing inner
race and spacer. Record as Dimension L on Build Dimension Worksheet copy.
(d) (Post SB TPE331-72-0984 or Post SB TPE331-72-2003) Stack duplex bearing (40, Figure
4027) and rotor (rotating oil seal) (55) as shown in Figure 4032. Measure combined height
of bearing inner race and rotor (rotating oil seal). Record as Dimension L on Build Dimension
Worksheet copy.
NOTE: (Post SB TPE331-72-0984 or Post SB TPE331-72-2003) Installed rotor (rotating
oil seal) rather than spacer is used for measurement of bearings and components
stack check. Refer to Figure 4028 for correct rotor (rotating oil seal) style.
CAUTION: VERIFY ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) PART NUMBER PRIOR TO

INSTALLATION. IF INCORRECT ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) IS INSTALLED,
IT WILL CAUSE THE ROTATING ASSEMBLY TO BIND AND MAY RESULT IN
COMPRESSOR IMPELLER AND SHROUD DAMAGE.
(e) Using a depth micrometer, measure shouldered (main) shaft from forward end to shoulder
(Figure 4032). Record as Dimension K on Build Dimension Worksheet copy.
(f) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984 or Pre SB TPE331-72-2003) Add Dimensions L and J. Subtract
the result from Dimension K. Record result as Calculated Dimension M on Build Dimension
Worksheet copy.
K − (L+J) = M (Calculated)
NOTE: Dimension M is the measurement taken from the top of shouldered (main) shaft
to the top of the bearing inner race (Figure 4033). Calculated Dimension M is
established from measurements of Dimension J, Dimension L, and Dimension
K previously taken. The calculated dimension will be compared to the actual
Dimension M taken later.
UP495246
ALL Page 4028
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(g) (Post SB TPE331-72-0984 or Post SB TPE331-72-2003) Subtract Dimension L from

Dimension K. Record result as Calculated Dimension M on Build Dimension Worksheet
copy.
K − L = M (Calculated)
(12) Install compressor bearing components.

(a) Install shims (80, Figure 4034), calculated previously, in accessory drive housing assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to verify shim thickness as calculated previously.
(b) Make sure that stationary oil seal assembly (compressor bellows seal) is installed in bearing
carrier.
NOTE: Before continuing assembly, it is necessary to make sure that stationary oil seal
assembly (compressor bellows seal) is installed in bearing carrier.
(c) Install packing (70) on assembled bearing carrier (65) and install carrier in accessory drive
housing assembly.
CAUTION: VERIFY ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) PART NUMBER PRIOR TO
INSTALLATION. IF INCORRECT ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) IS INSTALLED,
IT WILL CAUSE THE ROTATING ASSEMBLY TO BIND AND MAY RESULT IN
COMPRESSOR IMPELLER AND SHROUD DAMAGE.
(d) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984 or Pre SB TPE331-72-2003) Verify rotor (rotating oil seal) (55)
thickness is 0.359 to 0.361 inch (9.12 to 9.17 mm).
(e) (Post SB TPE331-72-0984 or Post SB TPE331-72-2003) Verify rotor (rotating oil seal)
thickness is 0.653 to 0.658 inch (16.59 to 16.71 mm).
ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL) HANDLING MUST BE MINIMIZED.
PERSONNEL MUST WEAR SYNTHETIC RUBBER GLOVES OR NYLON MESH
GLOVES WITH POLYETHYLENE PALMS AND FINGERS. IF NONE OF THE
ABOVE ARE AVAILABLE, CLEAN COTTON GLOVES MUST BE WORN.

LUBRICATE.
(f) Make sure that stationary oil seal assembly (compressor bellows seal) (60) and rotor
(rotating oil seal) (55) are dry. Do not lubricate seal and rotor prior to installation.
(g) Install rotor (rotating oil seal) (55) face down on stationary oil seal assembly (compressor
bellows seal) (60).
(h) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984 or Pre SB TPE331-72-2003) Heat spacer (50) to 450°F (232.2°C)
for 10 minutes and install; or install using PN 296562-2, bearing puller.
NOTE: (Post SB TPE331-72-0984 or Post SB TPE331-72-2003) Spacer (50) is not
used.
UP495246
ALL Page 4029
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: (PRE SB TPE331-72-0751, PRE SB TPE331-72-0984, OR PRE SB

TPE331-72-2003) FAILURE TO INSTALL SPRING WASHER MAY RESULT IN
SIGNIFICANT LOSS OF ENGINE PERFORMANCE OR ABNORMAL ENGINE
OPERATION IN THE FORM OF COMPRESSOR SURGE.
(i) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0751, Pre SB TPE331-72-0984, or Pre SB TPE331-72-2003) Install

spring washer (45, Figure 4034) in bearing carrier.
CAUTION: (POST SB TPE331-72-0751, POST SB TPE331-72-0984, OR POST SB
TPE331-72-2003) NOTCHED SPACER MUST BE INSTALLED WITH ARROW
POINTING TOWARD BEARING CARRIER. AN IMPROPERLY INSTALLED
NOTCHED SPACER CAN CAUSE AN INCONSISTENT LOAD ON THE
COMPRESSOR BEARING, REDUCED OIL SCAVENGE, AND HIGH OIL
TEMPERATURE.
(j) (Post SB TPE331-72-0751, Post SB TPE331-72-0984, or Post SB TPE331-72-2003) Install

notched spacer (46) in bearing carrier, with arrow pointing toward bearing carrier.
CAUTION: BEARING COMPONENT HANDLING MUST BE MINIMIZED. REFER TO
(k) Align duplex bearing (40) outer race anti-rotation slot at the 12 o'clock position.
(l) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984 or Pre SB TPE331-72-2003) Using PN 296562-2, bearing puller,
install duplex bearing (40) on main shaft. Make sure bearing contacts spacer (50).
(m) (Post SB TPE331-72-0984 or Post SB TPE331-72-2003) Using PN 296562-2, bearing
puller, install duplex bearing (40) on main shaft. Make sure bearing contacts rotor (rotating
oil seal) (55).
(n) Using a depth micrometer, measure from top of main shaft to top of bearing inner race.
Refer to Figure 4033. Record as Dimension M (actual) on Build Dimension Worksheet
copy.
(o) Compare actual Dimension M to calculated Dimension M determined previously. Actual
Dimension M must be the same or larger than calculated Dimension M.
(p) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0984 or Pre SB TPE331-72-2003) If Dimension M is not within limits,
remove and install spacer (50, Figure 4034) and duplex bearing (40) until limits are met.
(q) (Post SB TPE331-72-0984 or Post SB TPE331-72-2003) If Dimension M is not within limits,
remove and install rotor (rotating oil seal) (55, Figure 4034) and duplex bearing (40) until
limits are met.
(r) Install previously determined thickness of shims (25, Figure 4034 or 92, Figure 4035).
(s) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Position retainer (20) on bearing carrier (65). Secure with nuts
(5). Torque nuts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(t) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install oil scoop (100, Figure 4035) and spur gear (95).
(u) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install previously determined thickness of shims (25, Figure
4034).
(v) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install previously determined thickness of shims (92, Figure
4035).
UP495246
ALL Page 4030
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012
TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

INSERT PAGE 4 OF 4 FACING 72-30-04, INSTALLATION, PAGE 4031.
Reason: To add CAUTION before Paragraph 2.B.(12)(aa).
CAUTION is added as follows:
CAUTION: DO NOT RE-USE RETAINER RING. REPLACE RING WITH NEW (0 TIME SINCE
NEW) RING AT EACH EXPOSURE.
Page 4 of 4
72-30-04 19 Oct 2015

NOTE: Please see
RELEASED the
PUBLISHERS

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(w) Make sure that oil tube is installed in shouldered (main) shaft. Install tube if it is not installed.
Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-14-4000)
(x) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install accessory gear housing assembly. Refer to
(y) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install accessory gear assembly (90). Secure with speed
nuts. Torque nuts (80) to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(z) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install splined coupling (35) on main shaft.

NOTE: Inspection of splined coupling may have revealed that load surfaces on only
one side of splines were acceptable. This will be indicated by the words “THIS
SIDE FORWARD” etched on splined coupling.
CAUTION: (POST SB TPE331-A72-0997) MAKE SURE THAT RETAINER RING IS

COMPLETELY ENGAGED IN GROOVE OF SPLINED SHAFT COUPLING. IF
RETAINER RING IS NOT PROPERLY INSTALLED, THE GEARTRAIN COULD
UNCOUPLE FROM THE ENGINE RESULTING IN A TOTAL LOSS OF THRUST
AND THE ENGINE BEING CONTROLLED BY THE OSFG.
(aa) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install assembled splined (main shaft) coupling (20).
(ab) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install assembled coupling over splined coupling (35).
(ac) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install retainer (15) in main shaft coupling (20).
(ad) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Place hexagon (main shaft) nut (5) with slots at lower end in
retainer (10).
(ae) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Apply clean, approved engine oil to main shaft nut (5) face
and threads.
(af) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install main shaft nut (5) on main shaft.
(ag) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Using PN 296132-1, torque wrench adapter, torque main
shaft nut to 900 in-lb (101.7 Nm). Loosen main shaft nut and torque three times to 900
in-lb (101.7 Nm).
(ah) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install new packings (75, Figure 4035) on oil tube (70).
NOTE: (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Packings must be lubricated with clean, approved
engine oil or Santovac OS-124, lubricant or Santovac 5, lubricant prior to
installation.
(ai) Install oil tube in accessory gear assembly (90).

(aj) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Install new packing (65) on nozzle assembly (60).
(ak) Install nozzle on oil tube (70). Secure with washers (45) and bolts (40). Torque bolts to 35
in-lb (4.0 Nm).
CAUTION: RECORD FINAL NUMBER AND THICKNESS OF SHIMS INSTALLED AND
KEEP WITH PERMANENT ENGINE RECORDS FOR REFERENCE USE AT
POSSIBLE FUTURE ENGINE DISASSEMBLY.
(al) Rotate engine 180 degrees, aft end up.

UP495246
ALL Page 4031
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(am) Using a depth micrometer, measure from PN 831079-1, micing bridge fixture or micing bar
on turbine bearing support to aft end of main shaft. Refer to Figure 4031. Record as desired
top normal running clearance measurement on Build Dimension Worksheet copy.
(an) Desired top normal running clearance must be as calculated in Table 4003.
(ao) Remove PN 831079-1, micing bridge fixture or micing bar.
(13) Stretch shouldered (main) shaft to remove hexagon (main shaft) nut using PN 298420-4, shaft
stretching fixture as follows:
CAUTION: STRETCHING SHAFT MUST BE THREADED IN THE SHOULDERED (MAIN)
SHAFT UNTIL FULLY INSTALLED (APPROXIMATELY 6 1/2 TURNS).
LOOSENING STRETCHING SHAFT 1/4 TURN WILL PREVENT SHAFT BINDING
DURING HEXAGON NUT REMOVAL.
(a) Install and tighten PN 297644-2, stretching shaft in turbine end of main shaft until fully
installed (approximately 6 1/2 turns from start of thread engagement). Then loosen stretching
shaft 1/4 turn.
CAUTION: WHEN STRETCHING SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT, USE OF INCORRECT
SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE ADAPTERS COULD DAMAGE THE PN
831128-1, COMPRESSOR DUMMY SHAFT ASSEMBLY.
CAUTION: USE ONLY PN 297641-2, SHAFT STRETCHING ADAPTER AND PN 297642-2,

SHAFT STRETCHING ADAPTER.
(b) Install PN 297641-2, shaft stretching adapter on PN 831128-1, compressor dummy shaft
assembly.
(c) Install packing (furnished) around two-piece adapter to hold in place.
(d) Install PN 297643-2, socket wrench on main shaft nut.
(e) Install hydraulic cylinder with PN 297642-2, shaft stretching adapter over stretching shaft,
two-piece adapter, and socket wrench.
(f) Install and tighten PN 295194-6, nut on stretching shaft until fully installed against two-piece
adapter. While holding stretching shaft, loosen nut to create a 0.25-inch (6.4 mm) gap
between nut and two-piece adapter.
NOTE: The stretching shaft and nut (components of shaft stretching fixture) are pilot
fitted to cylinder bore. The piloting feature makes sure of alignment of the
hydraulic head to the shouldered (main) shaft. Install nut with small diameter
down.
WARNING: SAFETY COVER (COMPONENT OF SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE) MUST

BE INSTALLED WHEN USING SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE. OPERATING
FIXTURE WITHOUT SAFETY COVER COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY.
(g) Install PN 295195-1, fixture stretch protective cover on hydraulic cylinder. Connect hydraulic
pump (component of PN 295192-4, cylinder and pump assembly) hose to hydraulic cylinder.
UP495246
ALL Page 4032
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: USE EXTREME CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT
WHILE USING SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE. A NOMINAL PRESSURE OF
5,600 PSIG (38,611 KPA) SHOULD BE ENOUGH TO LOOSEN HEXAGON
(MAIN SHAFT) NUT. WHEN SEPARATION BETWEEN MATING SURFACES
OF HEXAGON (MAIN SHAFT) NUT AND COMPRESSOR DUMMY SHAFT IS
OBSERVED, NO FURTHER STRETCH IS REQUIRED. DO NOT EXCEED 6,100
PSIG (42,058 KPA).
(h) Apply hydraulic pressure (5,600 PSIG (38,611 kPa)) to shouldered (main) shaft, turn socket
wrench CCW to loosen hexagon nut. Loosen nut and slowly decrease hydraulic pressure,
as required, until nut is loose and hydraulic pressure is zero.
(i) Remove shaft stretching fixture from engine.
(j) Remove hexagon (main shaft) nut.
(k) Remove PN 831128-1, compressor dummy shaft assembly.
(14) Assemble turbine stator and rotor module. Refer to ASSEMBLY (PGBLK 72-50-07-10000).
(15) Install turbine stator and rotor module in partially assembled power group as follows:
INJURY OR DEATH.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET WITH FOUR HOLES (HOLE
DIAMETER 0.057 TO 0.064 INCH (1.45 TO 1.63 MM)), IS INSTALLED INTO
SECOND STAGE IMPELLER AND THAT HOLES IN GASKET FACE TOWARD
REAR OF ENGINE. REFER TO PARAGRAPH 2.E. ACTION REQUIRED IF
INCORRECT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET HAS BEEN INSTALLED (SUBTASK
72-30-04-300-007-A01).
(a) Install curvic coupling gasket (V seal) (20, Figure 4036), with four holes (hole diameter
0.057 to 0.064 inch (1.45 to 1.63 mm)) facing rear of engine, in second stage impeller aft
curvic coupling. Make sure that gasket is properly seated.
(b) Install 0.035-inch (0.89 mm) thickness of shims (25) (Dimension Y on Build Worksheet
copy) on combustion chamber case. Make sure that notches in shims are aligned with
raised area of turbine module.
(c) Using PN 298422-1, turbine module handling fixture, install turbine stator and rotor module
down over shouldered (main) shaft. Make sure that curvic coupling master spline properly
engages master spline on main shaft.
(d) Remove PN 298422-1, turbine module handling fixture.
UP495246
ALL Page 4033
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

INJURY OR DEATH.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (50), WITH EIGHT HOLES
(HOLE DIAMETER 0.097 TO 0.102 INCH (2.46 TO 2.59 MM)), IS INSTALLED
INTO SECOND STAGE ROTOR AND THAT HOLES IN GASKET FACE TOWARD
72-30-04-300-007-A01).
(e) Install curvic coupling gasket (V seal) (50), with eight holes (hole diameter 0.097 to 0.102
inch (2.46 to 2.59 mm)) facing rear of engine, in second stage rotor aft curvic coupling.
(f) Using PN 296493-1, turbine rotor holder, install third stage rotor assembly (15) in turbine
stator housing.
INJURY OR DEATH.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET, WITH FOUR HOLES (HOLE
DIAMETER 0.057 TO 0.064 INCH (1.45 TO 1.63 MM)), IS INSTALLED INTO
SECOND STAGE IMPELLER AND THAT HOLES IN GASKET FACE TOWARD
72-30-04-300-007-A01).
(g) Install curvic coupling gasket (V seal) (10, Figure 4036), with four holes (hole diameter
0.057 to 0.064 inch (1.45 to 1.63 mm)) facing rear of engine, in third stage turbine rotor aft
curvic coupling. Make sure that gasket is properly seated.
CAUTION: INDEX MARKINGS MUST BE REMOVED DURING ASSEMBLY.
(h) Remove index markings during assembly. Refer to ASSEMBLY (PGBLK 70-00-00-10000)
for standard assembly procedures.
(i) Heat curvic coupling (5) at 300°F (149°C) for 5 minutes and assemble on shaft against
third stage turbine rotor using caution to align index marks.
(16) Preparation for shouldered (main) shaft stretch as follows:
UP495246
ALL Page 4034
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: BEARING COMPONENTS HANDLING MUST BE MINIMIZED. REFER TO

(a) Separate bearing outer race (20, Figure 4037) from bearing inner race (65, Figure 4038).
Set bearing outer race to one side for later assembly.
(b) Place four gaskets (85) on four bolts (80).
(c) Insert bolts with gaskets through holes in seal (75).
CAUTION: AIR-OIL SEAL AND SEAL ROTOR HANDLING MUST BE MINIMIZED.
BE WORN. AIR-OIL SEAL AND SEAL ROTOR MUST BE INSTALLED DRY;
DO NOT LUBRICATE.
(d) Make sure that air-oil seal (75) and seal rotor (70) are dry; do not lubricate prior to
installation.
(e) Install air-oil seal (75), carbon seal facing up, with gaskets and bolts down over main shaft
on top of curvic coupling.
CAUTION: INSTALL SEAL ROTOR WITH FLAT SIDE AGAINST AIR-OIL SEAL.
(f) Install seal rotor (70), with flat side down, over main shaft and press in place, against air-oil
seal.
(g) Place bearing inner race (65, Figure 4038) with rollers and cage on shouldered (main)
shaft. Push bearing down in position against seal rotor using PN 291756-1, retaining ring
guide.
NOTE: Rollers can be held in place on inner race with use of assembly fluid and a
plastic strap.
CAUTION: USE ONLY CLEAN, APPROVED ENGINE OIL ON HEXAGON NUT. OTHER
LUBRICANTS MAY CAUSE CORROSION.
(h) Apply clean, approved engine oil to hexagon (main shaft) nut (5) face and threads.
(i) Install main shaft nut (5) on shouldered (main) shaft and hand-tighten to seat curvics using
a 1 7/16-inch wrench and PN 284457-1-1, splined torque wrench adapter.
(j) Visually inspect for proper engagement of curvic coupling to third stage rotor assembly.
(k) Install PN 831079-1, micing bridge fixture or micing bar on turbine bearing support. Torque
slave bolts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm). Refer to Figure 4031.
(l) With a depth micrometer, measure from top of PN 831079-1, micing bridge fixture or micing
bar on turbine bearing support to aft end of shouldered (main) shaft.
(m) Record this measurement as Dimension B (unstretched) on Build Dimension Worksheet
copy.
(n) Remove PN 831079-1, micing bridge fixture or micing bar from turbine bearing support.
UP495246
ALL Page 4035
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMING SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT STRETCH ENGINE MUST

BE IN AN INLET DOWN POSITION.
(17) Perform shaft stretch using PN 298420-1, shaft stretching fixture, PN 298420-2, shaft stretching
fixture, PN 298420-3, shaft stretching fixture, or PN 298420-4, shaft stretching fixture.
LOOSENING STRETCHING SHAFT 1/4 TURN WILL PREVENT SHAFT
BINDING.
(a) Install and tighten PN 297644-1, stretching shaft or PN 297644-2, stretching shaft in turbine
end of main shaft until fully installed (approximately 6 1/2 turns from start of thread
engagement). Loosen stretching shaft 1/4 turn.
SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE ADAPTERS COULD DAMAGE THE CURVIC
COUPLING.
CAUTION: (PRE SB TPE331-72-0774) USE ONLY PN 297641-1, TWO-PIECE ADAPTER

AND PN 297642-1, ADAPTER.
CAUTION: (POST SB TPE331-72-0774) USE ONLY PN 297641-2, SHAFT STRETCHING

ADAPTER AND PN 297642-2, SHAFT STRETCHING ADAPTER.
(b) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0774) Install PN 297641-1, two-piece adapter between seal and curvic
coupling.
(c) Install packing (furnished) around two-piece adapter to hold in place.
(d) (Post SB TPE331-72-0774) Install PN 297641-2, shaft stretching adapter between seal
and curvic coupling.
(e) Install packing (furnished) around two-piece adapter to hold in place.
(f) Install PN 297643-1, socket wrench or PN 297643-2, socket wrench on hexagon nut.
(g) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0774) Install hydraulic cylinder with PN 297642-1, adapter over
stretching shaft, two-piece adapter, and socket wrench.
(h) (Post SB TPE331-72-0774) Install hydraulic cylinder with PN 297642-2, shaft stretching
adapter over stretching shaft, two-piece adapter, and socket wrench.
(i) Install and tighten PN 295194-6, nut on PN 297644-1, stretching shaft or PN 297644-2,
stretching shaft until fully installed against hydraulic head. While holding PN 297644-1,
stretching shaft or PN 297644-2, stretching shaft, loosen nut to create a 0.25-inch (6.4
mm) gap between nut and hydraulic head.
NOTE: PN 297644-1, stretching shaft or PN 297644-2, stretching shaft and PN
295194-6, nut are pilot fitted to cylinder bore to make sure of alignment of the
hydraulic head to the engine shouldered (main) shaft. Do not reverse nut.
UP495246
ALL Page 4036
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

PERSONAL INJURY.
(j) Install PN 295195-1, fixture stretch protective cover on hydraulic cylinder. Connect hydraulic
pump hose to hydraulic cylinder.
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING STEP, APPLY A NOMINAL 5,600
PSIG (38,611 KPA). DO NOT EXCEED 6,100 PSIG (42,058 KPA).
(k) Apply hydraulic pressure (approximately 5,600 PSIG (38,611 kPa)) to shouldered (main)
shaft. Turn PN 297643-1, socket wrench or PN 297643-2, socket wrench CW to tighten
hexagon (main shaft) nut. Do not exceed 6,100 PSIG (42,058 kPa). Relieve pressure.
(l) Remove hydraulic cylinder and shaft stretching fixture from engine.
(m) Install PN 831079-1, micing bridge fixture on turbine bearing support and secure with slave
bolts. Torque slave bolts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(n) Using a depth micrometer, measure and record Dimension B (stretched) on Build Dimension
Worksheet copy. If Dimension B (stretched) is 0.057 to 0.060 inch (1.45 to 1.52 mm) greater
than Dimension B (unstretched), shaft stretch is within limits.
NOTE: Use Dimension B (unstretched), previously recorded in Build Dimension
Worksheet, to obtain shaft stretch. The required shaft stretch, the difference of
Dimension B unstretched and stretched, is 0.057 to 0.060 inch (1.45 to 1.52
mm).
(o) If Dimension B (stretched) is greater than Dimension B (unstretched), previously recorded

in Build Dimension Worksheet, but less than 0.057 inch (1.45 mm), repeat the hydraulic
pressure application procedure and add 50 PSIG (345 kPa) increments above the previous
pressure used until required Dimension B is obtained.
(p) If Dimension B (stretched) is greater than Dimension B (unstretched), previously recorded
in Build Dimension Worksheet, but greater than 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), repeat the previous
procedures and loosen main shaft nut until required Dimension B is obtained.
(q) Remove PN 831079-1, micing bridge fixture on turbine bearing support.
(r) This concludes the shouldered (main) shaft stretch procedure.
(18) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Determine shims required
between turbine stator and rotor module and turbine bearing support.
(a) Temporarily install turbine bearing support (105, Figure 4039) with eight equally spaced
slave bolts. Torque slave bolts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(b) Using a thickness gage, measure Dimension R at four equally spaced positions. Record
the average dimension. Refer to Figure 4040.
NOTE: If Dimension R is 0.000, a nominal amount of shims (110, Figure 4039) must
be installed to obtain a preliminary measurement.
(c) Add or remove necessary shims (110, Figure 4039) to obtain a Dimension R (0.031 to
0.035 inch (0.79 to 0.89 mm)).
UP495246
ALL Page 4037
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(19) Determine shims required between turbine stator and rotor module and combustion chamber
case.
NOTE: All measurements are to be taken at four equally spaced points. Record the average
of the four measurements. Mark and use the same four points for all measurements.
(a) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Remove turbine bearing

support and shims installed previously and reinstall slave bolts. Torque slave bolts to 80
in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(b) Place parallel bar across turbine group housing. Refer to Figure 4041.
(c) Using a depth micrometer, measure Dimension F and record on Figure 4042, Turbine
Stator and Rotor Module Shim Requirement Worksheet.
NOTE: Make a copy of the Turbine Stator and Rotor Module Shim Requirement
Worksheet to record data.
(d) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Use the following

calculations in Table 4006 to determine the amount of shims to be removed to obtain Build
Dimension G.
Table 4006. Shim Determination for Power Group PN3103319-8, -11, or -21
Legend: Sample Measurements (Inches (mm)):

Dimension F = Distance from top of turbine group housing flange Dim. F = 0.360 (9.14)
to platform of third stage turbine blade.
Dimension R = Expansion joint (gap) between turbine bearing Dim. R = +0.033 (+0.84)
support and third stage stator.
Dimension S = Dimension F + Dimension R. Dim. S = 0.393 (9.98)
Dimension G = Build Dimension of 0.365 to 0.373 inch (9.27 to Dim. G = -0.369 (-9.37) (Optimum)
9.47 mm).
X= Amount of shims to be removed between turbine X = 0.024 (0.61)
group housing flange and combustion chamber
case to establish Dimension G.
Y= Trial shim thickness installed earlier. Y= 0.035 (0.89)
Z= Required shim thickness between turbine group Z = 0.011 (0.28)
housing and combustion chamber case to
establish Dimension G.
Sample Calculation Step 1: S = F + R (0.360 (9.14) + 0.033 (0.84)) = 0.393 (2.36)
Sample Calculation Step 2: X = S - G (0.393 (9.98) - 0.369 (9.37)) = 0.024 (0.61)
Sample Calculation Step 3: Z = Y - X (0.035 (0.89) - 0.024 (0.61)) = 0.011 (0.28)
(e) (Power Group, PN 3103319-16, -20, -23, -29, -32, or -33) Use the calculations in Table
4007 to determine the amount of shims to be removed to obtain Build Dimension G.
UP495246
ALL Page 4038
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 4007. PN 3103319-16, -20, -23, -29, -32, or -33
Legend: Sample Measurements (Inches (mm)):

Dimension F = Distance from top of turbine group housing flange Dim. F = 0.360 (9.14)
to platform of third stage turbine blade.
Dimension G = Build Dimension of 0.350 to 0.358 inch (8.89 to Dim. G = -0.354 (-8.99) (Optimum)
9.09 mm).
X= Amount of shims to be removed between turbine X = 0.006 (0.15)
group housing flange and combustion chamber
case to establish Dimension G.
Y= Trial shim thickness installed earlier. Y= 0.035 (0.89)
Z= Required shim thickness between turbine group Z = 0.029 (0.74)
housing and combustion chamber case to
establish Dimension G.
Sample Calculation Step 1: X = F (0.360 (9.14)) - G (0.354 (8.99)) = X (0.006 (0.15))
Sample Calculation Step 2: Z = Y (0.035 (0.89)) - X (0.006 (0.15)) = Z (0.029 (0.74))
(f) Remove parallel bar.

(g) Remove excess shim(s) as follows:
1 Remove four bolts securing turbine stator and rotor module to combustion chamber
case.
2 Cut, remove, and discard excess shims.
3 Rotate engine to a horizontal position. Move turbine stator flange and rotor module
away from combustor far enough (0.125 inch (3.18 mm)) to facilitate cutting and
removal of excess shims.
NOTE: Excess shim(s) can be cut and removed at a bolt hole.
(20) Install bearing (carrier) support components.

(a) Install gasket (60, Figure 4037) and bearing (carrier) support (55) over shouldered (main)
shaft in turbine bearing support assembly. Align bearing carrier dowel pin (Figure 4043)
with hole in turbine bearing support assembly.
NOTE: Make sure that dowel pin is fully engaged to allow bearing carrier to seat
properly.
(b) Install spring tension washer (30, Figure 4037) and thrust ring (25) in bearing carrier (55).
CAUTION: BEARING COMPONENT HANDLING MUST BE MINIMIZED. REFER TO
(c) Apply Royco HF-825, assembly fluid to hold rollers in bearing inner race, then install keys
(35) and roller bearing (20) outer race.
(d) Position retainer (15) so that oil transfer boss is approximately 120 degrees CW from
vertical. Refer to Figure 4043.
UP495246
ALL Page 4039
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(e) Install retainer (15, Figure 4037) over dowel pins in bearing carrier (55) and secure with
nuts (10). Torque nuts to 70 in-lb (7.9 Nm). Wait 30 to 35 minutes for possible cold-flow of
gasket. Then torque nuts again to 70 in-lb (7.9 Nm). Use caution while torquing nuts to
make sure that bolt heads do not bind on seal assembly.
(f) Use clean, approved engine oil to rinse assembly fluid from bearing.
(21) Measure to make sure that bearing (carrier) support is properly seated. Refer to Figure 4037.
(a) Using a parallel bar and depth micrometer, measure Dimension A at the three recessed
locations around bearing (carrier) support (55). Record average measurement as Dimension
A.
(b) Using a parallel bar and depth micrometer, measure Dimension B at three locations adjacent
to points where Dimension A was measured. Record average measurement as Dimension
B on Turbine Stator and Rotor Module Shim Requirement Worksheet copy.
(c) Subtract recorded Dimension B from recorded Dimension A. Record result as Dimension
U.
(d) Dimension U must be 1.025 to 1.029 inch (26.04 to 26.14 mm).
(e) If Dimension U is not within these limits, disassemble components and reassemble until
Dimension U is within limits.
(22) Install exhaust duct and rear engine mount as follows:
(a) Rotate assembly in maintenance stand so aft end is up.
NOTE: Make sure that exhaust duct is properly aligned to allow for oil inlet tube
assembly and retainer shield assembly installation.
(b) Remove eight slave bolts temporarily installed to secure turbine bearing support.
(c) Install exhaust duct (40, Figure 4044). Make sure that turbine bearing support and exhaust
duct are properly aligned.
(d) Install bolts (35) to secure exhaust duct (40). Torque bolts, using cross torque method in
12 to 15 in-lb (1.4 to 1.7 Nm) increments to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(e) Install approximately 0.080-inch (2.03 mm) trial shims (20), rear engine mount (15), and
secure with bolts (10). Torque bolts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(f) Using thickness gage, measure gap between mount and plenum mount boss. (Thickness
gage must be completely through.) Determine amount of shims to be removed to obtain
0.002 to 0.005 inch (0.05 to 0.13 mm) clearance between mount and plenum mount boss.
(g) Remove bolts (10), rear engine mount (15) and trial shims (20).
(h) Install rear engine mount (15) and shims (20) determined in the above procedure. Secure
with bolts (5, 10).
1 Torque bolts (10) to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
2 Torque bolts (5) to 600 to 650 in-lb (67.8 to 73.4 Nm).
(i) Lockwire bolts (5, 10, 35) using single-wire method.
(23) Check third stage turbine rotor tip clearance. Refer to Figure 4045.
(a) Using 0.019-inch (0.48 mm) diameter wire, fabricate a 12 inch (305 mm) long wire gage.
(b) Rotate engine in maintenance stand to a running position with inlet up.
UP495246
ALL Page 4040
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) Insert fabricated wire gage between the third stage turbine rotor tip and third stage nozzle.
Check at 6 o'clock position.
(d) The wire gage must move back and forth smoothly between the rotor tip and nozzle.
(e) If wire gage will not move smoothly between rotor tip and nozzle, the top normal running
clearance must be rechecked.
(24) Install all remaining components and plumbing. Refer to applicable chapter/section/subject.
(25) Upon completion of engine assembly, if either impeller has been replaced or if first stage impeller
was removed from shouldered (main) shaft, a vibration check is required. Refer to TESTING
(PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
(26) Upon completion of engine assembly, engine performance test must be accomplished at a
Honeywell-authorized service facility.
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Rotating Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-001-A01)
5. SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT (35) 20. LABYRINTH SEAL (50)

UP495246
ALL Page 4041
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) First and Second Stage Impellers and Rotating Air Seal and Coupling Assembly
Installation (Typical) (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4042
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4003. (Sheet 1 of 1) First, Second, and Third Stage Turbine Rotors Installation (Typical) (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4043
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Stretching Shouldered (Main) Shaft (Shaft Stretching Fixture, PN 298420-1,
PN 298420-2, PN 298420-3, or PN 298420-4) (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4044
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4005. (Sheet 1 of 1) Runout Check of Assembled Rotating Assembly (GRAPHIC

72-30-04-99B-005-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4045
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4006. (Sheet 1 of 1) Rotating Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-006-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4046
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4007. (Sheet 1 of 1) Transition Liner Assembly, Seal Assembly, Second Stage Impeller, and
Compressor Housing Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-007-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4047
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

SUPPORT
DIFFUSER
UP495246
ALL Page 4048
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4008. (Sheet 1 of 1) Install Compressor Housing Assembly on Maintenance Stand (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-008-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4049
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4009. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Codes AA, BA, CA, BC, CC) Compressor Diffuser Installation (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-008-A01)
55. RING 80. SPRING WASHER

60. RING RETAINER 85. FIRST STAGE COMPRESSOR DIFFUSER
65. DISC SEAL 90. BOLT
70. SEAL SPACER 95. LOCKPLATE
75. RING RETAINER
UP495246
ALL Page 4050
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4010. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Codes BB, CB, BD, CD) First Stage Diffuser Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-009-A01)
60. SCREW 85. FIRST STAGE DIFFUSER ASSEMBLY

70. STATIONARY AIR SEAL
UP495246
ALL Page 4051
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4011. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Codes AA, BA, CA, BC, CC) Assembling Partially Assembled Rotating Group
with Compressor Diffuser to Partially Assembled Power Group (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-010-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4052
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4012. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Codes BB, CB, BD, CD) Assembling Partially Assembled Rotating Group with
Compressor Diffuser to Partially Assembled Power Group (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-011-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4053
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4013. (Sheet 1 of 1) Partially Assembled Rotating Group in Diffuser Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-012-A01)
45. CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (V SEAL)

UP495246
ALL Page 4054
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4014. (Sheet 1 of 1) Combustion Chamber and Combustion Case Installation On Partially Assembled
Power Group Installation (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-013-A01)
5. SHOULDERED MACHINE BOLT 12. WASHER

10. WASHER 55. COMBUSTION CHAMBER CASE
11. LOCKING PLATE 60. COMBUSTION CHAMBER ASSEMBLY
UP495246
ALL Page 4055
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4015. (Sheet 1 of 1) Assembled Combustion Chamber Assembly and Combustion Chamber Case
Installation On Partially Assembled Power Group Installation (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-014-A01)
15. NUT 25. IDENTIFICATION PLATE

20. BOLT 35. BOLT (DRILLED HEAD)
UP495246
ALL Page 4056
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4016. (Sheet 1 of 1) Combustion Chamber Case Assembly Flange Bolt Hole Pattern (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-015-A01)
1
Component Bolt Holes
REAR TURBINE BEARING OIL LINE BRACKET 20, 21
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER MOUNTING BRACKET 26, 27, 28, 29
NOTES:
1. Installation of bolts in the holes listed may be delayed until components are installed.
UP495246
ALL Page 4057
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4017. (Sheet 1 of 3) Build Dimension Worksheet (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-016-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4058
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
ALL Page 4059
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
ALL Page 4060
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4018. (Sheet 1 of 1) Second Stage Zero Clearance Measurement (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-017-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4061
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4019. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Impeller Shroud Installation (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-018-A01)
5. NUT 15. FIRST STAGE IMPELLER SHROUD

UP495246
ALL Page 4062
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4020. (Sheet 1 of 1) Shimming Calculation First Stage and Accessory Drive Housing Assembly
Installation (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-019-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4063
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
10. BOLT 35. SPACER

15. WASHER 65. GASKET
25. WASHER 70. SHIM
30. ADAPTER
UP495246
ALL Page 4064
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4021. (Sheet 1 of 1) Shimming Calculation First Stage and Accessory Drive Housing Assembly
Installation (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-020-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4065
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 35. SPACER

10. BOLT 60. ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING
ASSEMBLY
15. WASHER 65. GASKET
20. NUT 70. SHIM
30. ADAPTER 100. POWER GROUP ASSEMBLY
UP495246
ALL Page 4066
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4022. (Sheet 1 of 1) Accessory Drive Housing Assembly Bolt Hole Pattern (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-021-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4067
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1
Component Bolt Holes
ANTI-ICE VALVE 5, 6, 7, 8
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE 18, 19, 20, 21
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE 26, 27, 28, 29
FUEL CONTROL SYSTEM 30, 31, 32
SOLENOID VALVE PRI ONLY 40, 41, 42
FUEL HEATER 44, 45, 49, 50
NOTES:
1. Installation of bolts in the holes listed may be delayed until components are installed.
UP495246
ALL Page 4068
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4023. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0751, Pre SB TPE331-72-0984, or Pre SB TPE331-72-2003)

Measuring Compressor Bearing Components (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-022-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4069
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4024. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0751, Pre SB TPE331-72-0984, or Pre SB TPE331-72-2003)

Assemble Compressor Bearing Carrier (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-023-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4070
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
20. RETAINER 45. SPRING WASHER

40. DUPLEX BEARING 90. ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY
UP495246
ALL Page 4071
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4025. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-0751, Post SB TPE331-72-0984, or Post SB TPE331-72-2003)

Compressor Bearing Carrier - Retainer Shim Requirement (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-024-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4072
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

46. NOTCHED SPACER
UP495246
ALL Page 4073
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4026. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-0751, Post SB TPE331-72-0984, or Post SB TPE331-72-2003)

Assemble Compressor Bearing Carrier (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-025-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4074
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
20. RETAINER 46. NOTCHED SPACER

UP495246
ALL Page 4075
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4027. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Partial Assembly of Compressor Bearing Carrier
(GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-026-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4076
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 55. ROTOR (ROTATING OIL SEAL)

15. PIN 60. STATIONARY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY
1 RETAINER 65. BEARING CARRIER
20.
25. SHIM 70. PACKING
45. SPRING WASHER 80. SHIM
46. NOTCHED SPACER 95. SPUR GEAR
50. SPACER 100. OIL SCOOP
NOTES:
used in its place.
UP495246
ALL Page 4077
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4028. (Sheet 1 of 1) Rotor Measurement (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-027-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4078
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4029. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-A72-0997) Accessory Gear Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-028-A01)
80. NUT 95. SPUR GEAR

90. ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY 100. OIL SCOOP
92. SHIMS (25)
UP495246
ALL Page 4079
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 25. SLEEVE

10. RETAINER 30. RETAINER RING
15. RETAINER 35. SPLINED COUPLING
20. SPLINED (MAIN SHAFT) COUPLING
UP495246
ALL Page 4080
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4031. (Sheet 1 of 1) Establishing Compressor Bearing Shimming Requirements (GRAPHIC

72-30-04-99B-030-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4081
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4032. (Sheet 1 of 1) Measurement of Bearings and Components for Stack Check (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-031-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4082
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4033. (Sheet 1 of 1) Compressor Bearing, Spacer, and Rotor Seating Check (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-032-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4083
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4034. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-A72-0997) Compressor Bearing Installation (GRAPHIC

72-30-04-99B-033-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4084
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 50. SPACER

20.
NOTES:
used in its place.
UP495246
ALL Page 4085
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
ALL Page 4086
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

25. SLEEVE 80. NUT
30. RETAINER RING 90. ACCESSORY GEAR ASSEMBLY
35. SPLINED COUPLING 92. SHIM
55. STRAINER
UP495246
ALL Page 4087
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4036. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Stator and Rotor Module Installation in Partially Assembled Power
Group Installation (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-035-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4088
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. CURVIC COUPLING 25. SHIM

15. THIRD STAGE ROTOR ASSEMBLY (5) 45. THIRD STAGE NOZZLE (40)
10. CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (FOUR 50. CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (EIGHT
HOLES) HOLES)
20. CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (FOUR
HOLES)
UP495246
ALL Page 4089
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4037. (Sheet 1 of 1) Bearing Carrier Components Installation (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-036-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4090
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
10. NUT 30. SPRING TENSION WASHER

15. RETAINER 35. KEY
20. ROLLER BEARING (OUTER RACE) 55. BEARING (CARRIER) SUPPORT
25. THRUST RING 60. GASKET
UP495246
ALL Page 4091
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4038. (Sheet 1 of 1) Preparing for Stretching Shouldered (Main) Shaft (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-037-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4092
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. HEXAGON NUT 75. AIR-OIL SEAL

70. SEAL ROTOR 85. GASKET
Figure 4039. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Bearing Support Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-038-A01)
105. TURBINE BEARING SUPPORT 110.

1 SHIM
ASSEMBLY
NOTES:
1. Shims (110) are only used on Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21.
UP495246
ALL Page 4093
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4040. (Sheet 1 of 1) Determining Shim Requirements (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-039-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4094
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4041. (Sheet 1 of 1) Determining Shim Requirements (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-040-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4095
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4042. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Stator and Rotor Module Shim Requirement Worksheet (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-040-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4096
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4043. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Transfer Boss Location (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-041-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4097
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4044. (Sheet 1 of 1) Exhaust Duct and Rear Engine Mount Installation (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-042-A01)
5. BOLT 20. SHIM

10. BOLT 35. BOLT
15. REAR ENGINE MOUNT 40. EXHAUST DUCT
UP495246
ALL Page 4098
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4045. (Sheet 1 of 1) Check Third Stage Turbine Rotor Tip Clearance (Typical) (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-043-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4099
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4100
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
COMPRESSOR GROUP ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the compressor group assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-30-04-100-802-A01)
of cleaning methods.
Methods 1 and 2.
(3) Clean seal assembly (10, Figure 6001). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning
Method 1.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: DO NOT IMMERSE TRANSITION LINER WITH TBC IN SOLUTIONS CONTAINING

SODIUM OR POTASSIUM. SOLUTIONS SUCH AS ALKALINE CLEANERS, RUST
STRIPPERS AND SODIUM HYDROXIDE CAN PENETRATE THROUGH THE TBC
AND DAMAGE THE BOND COAT BETWEEN THE BARRIER COATING AND THE
BASE METAL.
(4) Clean transition liner (15). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Methods 2
and 9.
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Transition Liner Assembly, Seal Assembly, Second Stage Impeller and
Compressor Housing Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

SUPPORT
DIFFUSER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6004
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
COMPRESSOR GROUP ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the compressor group assembly.


APPLICABLE.
fine abrasive stone commercially available
2. Procedure (TASK 72-30-04-200-802-A01)
B. (Codes AA, BA, CA, BC, CC) Inspect First Stage Compressor Impeller (Subtask
72-30-04-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect impeller LEs for deformation. No deformation allowed. Refer to Figure 8001.
(2) Visually inspect impeller blades for dents and nicks as follows:
(a) Dents or nicks on inner one-half of blade LE must not exceed 0.05-inch (1.3 mm) deep.
(b) Dents or nicks on outer one-half of LE must not exceed 0.08-inch (2.0 mm) deep.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) Dents or nicks which are within 0.25 inch (6.4 mm) of hub fillet must not exceed 0.05-inch
(1.3 mm) deep.
(d) Repair, if dents or nicks are within above limits. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-30-04-9000).
(3) Perform FPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). Pay special attention to
critical areas including bore, backface, and curvics. No cracks allowed.
(4) Visually inspect Diameter B for wear step (groove). Wear step is allowed if groove does not
exceed 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) in depth.
(5) Visually inspect impeller for evidence of rubbing.
(a) Minor rubbing is allowed on blades (Surface E).
(b) Minor rub damage to outside edge of platform rim (Area A) is allowed if damage does not
exceed following limits.
1 Damage must not exceed 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) in depth.
2 No damage is allowed within 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) of blade platform or blade root
area (Dimension E).
(c) Repair minor rub damage. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-30-04-9000).
(6) Inspect impeller for proper blade height (Dimension D) of 0.540 to 0.552 inch (13.72 to 14.02
mm) for each passage. Average of all passages must be 0.543-inch (13.79 mm) minimum.
(7) If impeller LE and/or contour (Surface E) is damaged beyond allowed repair limits and damage
does not exceed 0.125-inch (3.18 mm) depth, return impeller to Honeywell International Inc.,
Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440 for repairs.
NOTE: A restoration repair of LE and contour edges has been developed by the manufacturer.
However, due to the critical process control requirement that must be maintained,
this restoration must be accomplished at a manufacturer's authorized repair facility
only. It is suggested that damaged impellers be inspected to determine restoration
feasibility.
(8) Inspect and repair impeller curvic coupling. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
70-00-00-8000).
(9) Perform dimensional inspection. Refer to Figure 8001.
(10) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements or is damaged beyond repair.
(11) When first stage impeller is replaced it is necessary to perform a vibration check. Refer to
TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Codes AA, BA, CA, BC, CC) First Stage Compressor Impeller Inspection
Limit Limit
DIA A 1.2594 TO 1.2598 DIA C 8.980 (228.09) GAGE
(31.989 TO 31.999)
DIA B 2.788 TO 2.790 (70.82 TO 70.87) DIM. D 0.540 TO 0.552 (13.72 TO 14.02)
FOR EACH PASSAGE.
(AVERAGE OF ALL PASSAGES
MUST BE 0.543 (13.79)
MINIMUM) AT 8.980 (228.09)
GAGE DIAMETER
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
C. (Codes BB, CB, BD, CD) Inspect First Stage Compressor Impeller Assembly (Subtask
72-30-04-200-005-A01)
(1) Visually check impeller LEs for deformation. Deformation is not acceptable. Refer to Figure
8002.
(2) Visually check impeller blades for dents and nicks. Limits for dents and nicks on blades are as
follows:
(a) Dents or nicks on inner one-half of blade LE must not exceed 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) in depth.
(b) Dents or nicks on outer one-half of LE must not exceed 0.08 inch (2.0 mm) in depth.
(c) Dents or nicks which are within 0.25 inch (6.4 mm) of hub fillet must not exceed 0.05 inch
(1.3 mm) in depth.
(4) Visually inspect impeller for evidence of rubbing.
(a) Minor rubbing is acceptable on blades (Surface E).
(b) Minor rub damage to outside edge of platform rim (Area A) is acceptable provided rub
damage does not exceed following limits.
1 Damage must not exceed 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) in depth.
2 No damage allowed within 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) of blade platform or blade root area
(Dimension E).
(c) Repair minor rub damage. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-30-04-9000).
mm) for each passage. Average of all passages must be 0.543-inch (13.79 mm) minimum.
(6) If impeller LE and/or contour (Surface E) is damaged beyond allowable repair limits and damage
does not exceed 0.125-inch (3.18 mm) depth, return impeller to the following facility for evaluation
and possible restoration repair to Honeywell International Inc., Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky
Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440.
feasibility.
(7) Inspect and repair impeller curvic. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(8) Perform dimensional inspection. Refer to Figure 8002.
(10) Replacement of first stage impeller requires a vibration check. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK
72-00-00-13000).
(11) Inspect labyrinth seal (knife seal).
UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Visually check knife-edges for cracks, chips and other damage. No cracks and chips
allowed.
NOTE: Blue discoloration of knife-edges is acceptable.
(b) Perform dimensional inspection of seal. A maximum of two diameters on seal may be 0.002
inch (0.05 mm) below 3.263 inches (82.88 mm).
(c) Perform FPI if damage is indicated or suspected. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
(d) Refer to IRM, 72-IR-02 for seal replacement if part does not meet requirements.
NOTE: Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000) for seal break-in procedures if
knife-edge seal or related components (rub-strips) have been replaced.
UP495246
ALL Page 8005
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8002. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Codes BB, CB, BD, CD) First Stage Compressor Impeller Assembly Inspection
UP495246
ALL Page 8006
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIA A 1.2594 TO 1.2598 DIM. D 0.540 TO 0.552 (13.72 TO 14.02)
(31.989 TO 31.999) FOR EACH PASSAGE.
MUST BE 0.543 (13.79)
MINIMUM) AT 8.980 (228.09)
GAGE DIAMETER
DIA C 8.980 (228.09) GAGE DIA E 3.263 TO 3.265 (82.88 TO 82.93)
(TWO DIAMETERS MAXIMUM
MAY BE 0.002 (0.05) BELOW
3.263 (82.88))
D. Inspect First Stage Impeller Shroud (Subtask 72-30-04-200-006-A01)
(1) Visually inspect surface of Area C for damage of shroud. Refer to Figure 8003.
(a) Craze cracks are allowed.
(b) No chipped-out material is allowed.
(c) No nicks exceeding 0.01-inch (0.3 mm) deep are allowed.
(d) No rub damage resulting in material loss exceeding 0.005-inch (0.13 mm) deep is allowed.
(e) No raised metal and metal deposits are allowed. Hand finish using 120 grit, sandpaper or
finer to remove any raised metal or metal deposits.
(f) If damage to shroud is greater than allowable limits, return part to a Honeywell-authorized
repair facility for metal spray and recontour.
(2) Visually inspect housing structure for cracks or other damage. No cracks in areas other than
Area C, the shroud, are allowed.
UP495246
ALL Page 8007
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8003. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Impeller Shroud Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-003-A01)
E. (Codes AA, BA, CA, BC, CD) Inspect First Stage Compressor Diffuser (Subtask
72-30-04-200-007-A01)
(1) Visually inspect for cracks. If cracks are suspected, perform FPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK
(PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). No cracks allowed except as follows:
(a) Cracks in rails (located between ID studs, refer Diameters E and F, Figure 8004) may not
be closer than 0.20 inch (5.1 mm) from stud bosses.
(b) Cracks in rails may be full depth of rail, but may not extend in forward face of front cover.
(c) No cracks in stud bosses or within 0.20 inch (5.1 mm) of stud bosses is allowed.
(d) No cracks in aft cover, forward of Surface G are allowed.
(e) No cracks aft of Surface G may exceed a cumulative length of 0.65 inch (16.5 mm) in any
90-degree arc of circumference.
(f) Any acceptable crack in rails, aft of Surface G, must be stop drilled using a 1/16-inch drill
bit.
(2) Missing sealant is allowed if rivets are tight. If any rivets are loose return diffuser to Honeywell
International Inc., Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440 for
repairs.
UP495246
ALL Page 8008
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Inspect diffuser for loose mounting studs. Repair loose mounting studs. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
70-00-00-9000).
(4) Visually inspect diffuser for vane tip erosion/damage. Vane tip erosion/damage is allowed if it
can be blended within maximum limits specified in Detail A, Figure 8004.
(5) Visually inspect vanes and air passages for corrosion. Remove corrosion. Refer to CLEANING
(PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method 6.
(6) Visually inspect diffuser for wear. If wear is evident, perform dimensional inspection of Diameter
A, Figure 8004. Diameter A must be 3.310 inches (84.07 mm) maximum.
(7) Inspect disc seals for cracks or chips. Cracked or chipped seals must be replaced. Any seal with
ID worn to 2.840 inches (72.14 mm) or greater at any circumferential location must be replaced.
(8) Measure Diameter E, Figure 8004. Diameter E must be 10.369 to 10.374 inches (263.37 to
263.50 mm). If necessary, machine Diameter E to specified limits.
UP495246
ALL Page 8009
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8004. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Codes AA, BA, CA, BC, CD) Compressor Diffuser Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8010
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. B 0.10 (2.5) DIA E 10.369 TO 10.374
(263.37 TO 263.50 )
F. (Codes BB, CB, BD, CD) Inspect First Stage Compressor Diffuser (Subtask
72-30-04-200-008-A01)
(1) Visually inspect for cracks. Refer to Figure 8005. If cracks are suspected, perform FPI. Refer to
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). No cracks allowed except as follows:
(a) Cracks in rails (located between ID studs, refer Diameters E and F) may not be closer than
0.20 inch (5.1 mm) from stud bosses.
(b) Cracks in rails may be full depth of rail, but may not extend into forward face of front cover.
(c) Cracks in stud bosses or within 0.20 inch (5.1 mm) of stud bosses not allowed.
(d) Cracks in aft cover which are forward of Surface G not allowed.
(e) Cracks aft of Surface G may not exceed a cumulative length of 0.65 inch (16.5 mm) in any
90-degree arc of circumference.
(f) Cracks in rails and aft of Surface G which are acceptable must be stop drilled with a
1/16-inch drill bit.
(2) Inspect diffuser for loose mounting studs. Repair loose mounting studs. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
70-00-00-9000).
(3) Visually check diffuser for vane tip erosion/damage. Vane tip erosion/damage is acceptable
providing it can be blended within maximum limits specified in Detail A, Figure 8005.
(4) Visually inspect vanes and air passages for corrosion, remove corrosion. Refer to CLEANING
(5) Measure Diameter E, it must not exceed 10.374 inches (263.50 mm) in diameter, Figure 8005.
Diameter E must be 10.372 to 10.374 inches (263.45 to 263.50 mm). If necessary, machine
Diameter E to within specified limits.
(6) In stationary (honeycomb) seal area inspect 40° to 44° surface for rubs. Rubs up to 0.020 inch
(0.51 mm) are acceptable.
(7) Replace diffuser if inspection requirements are not met.
(8) (Codes BB, CB, BD, CD) Inspect stationary air seal (honeycomb seal). Refer to Figure 8006.
(a) Visually inspect the honeycomb portion of the stationary air seal for abnormalities which
could cause seal to leak, separation of brazed joint, and pieces missing.
(b) Visually inspect honeycomb ID surface for rotation knife wear. Wear grooves must not
exceed 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) in depth measured from the unworn surface and wear must
not intersect the edge of the honeycomb step.
UP495246
ALL Page 8011
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8005. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Codes BB, CB, BD, CD) Compressor Diffuser Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-005-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8012
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Dimensional Limit for Figure 8005 (Sheet 1 of 1)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.10 (2.5) MAXIMUM DIA E 10.369 TO 10.374
(263.37 TO 263.50 )
Figure 8006. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Codes BB, CB, BD, CD) Stationary Air Seal Wear Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-006-A01)
Limit Limit
UP495246
ALL Page 8013
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
G. Inspect Labyrinth Seal (Subtask 72-30-04-200-009-A01)
(1) Visually check for burrs and pickup metal on knife-edges. If present, remove pickup metal by
stoning. Refer to Figure 8007.
(2) Visually check knife-edges for cracks, chips and other damage. No cracks and chips allowed.
NOTE: Blue discoloration of knife-edges is acceptable.
(3) Perform dimensional inspection of seal.

(4) Perform MPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000), if damage is indicated
or suspected. No cracks allowed.
NOTE: Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000) for seal break-in procedures if knife-edge
seal or related components (rub-strips) have been replaced.
Figure 8007. (Sheet 1 of 1) Labyrinth Seal Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-007-A01)
Limit Limit
DIA A 1.7460 TO 1.7490
(44.348 TO 44.424) MAXIMUM
H. Inspect Shouldered (Main) Shaft (Subtask 72-30-04-200-010-A01)
(1) Inspect oil tube (located in shouldered (main) shaft). Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-10-14-8000).
(2) Perform dimensional inspection of shouldered (main) shaft. Refer to Figure 8008.
(3) Perform FPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). No cracks allowed.
UP495246
ALL Page 8014
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(4) Check splines for wear, limits are as follows:

(a) Front (external) spline: Wear must not exceed 0.007 inch (0.18 mm).
(b) Center (external) spline: Wear must not exceed 0.007 inch (0.18 mm).
(c) Rear (internal) spline: Wear must not exceed 0.005 inch (0.13 mm).
(5) Visually inspect threads for damage. Replace main shaft if damaged threads cannot be repaired
by brushing with wire brush.
(6) Replace main shaft and oil tube, if either does not meet inspection requirements. Refer to
INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-10-14-4000), for installation of oil tube.
(7) Replacement of shouldered (main) shaft requires a vibration check. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK
72-00-00-13000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8015
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8008. (Sheet 1 of 1) Shouldered (Main) Shaft Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-008-A01)
Limit Limit
DIA E 1.1813 TO 1.1815 DIA H 1.1863 TO 1.1865
(30.005 TO 30.010) (30.132 TO 30.137)
DIA F 1.1812 TO 1.1814 DIM. L 21.31 TO 21.33 (541.3 TO 541.8)
(30.002 TO 30.008)
DIA G 1.2598 TO 1.2600
(31.999 TO 32.004)
UP495246
ALL Page 8016
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
I. Inspect Curvic Coupling Gaskets (Subtask 72-30-04-200-011-A01)
(1) Visually inspect gasket for burrs and other damage. If damage is evident or suspected, perform
FPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). No cracks allowed.
(2) Check minimum height of gasket. Minimum height must be 0.212 inch (5.38 mm) with both
sealing surfaces parallel within 0.006 inch (0.15 mm).
J. Inspect Seal Assembly (Subtask 72-30-04-200-012-A01)
(1) Inspect seal as follows:

(a) Visually inspect the honeycomb portion of seal assembly for abnormalities which could
cause seal to leak (separation of brazed joint, pieces missing, and any other damage).
(b) Visually inspect honeycomb ID surface for rotating knife wear. Wear grooves must not
exceed 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) in depth measured from unworn surface.
(c) Visually inspect seal housing for cracks, if cracks are suspected perform FPI. Refer to
(d) Visually check anti-rotation pins for wear and security. Loose and worn pins are not allowed.
No loose or worn pins allowed.
(e) Damaged honeycomb material of seal assembly can be repaired by sending seal assembly
AZ 85034-3440.
(f) Visually inspect Surface R for fret wear, wear steps, or material buildup. If fret wear, wear
steps, or material buildup is felt using a 0.030-inch (0.76 mm) diameter stylus scriber, repair
or replace part. Refer to Figure 8009.
(g) Check bore of seal assembly (Diameter D) for roundness as follows:
1 Place seal ring (45, IPC, 72-50-07) into the approximate center of the bore of seal
assembly. Refer to Figure 8009.
2 Make sure that the placement of the seal ring is at the same depth all around from
the top of the outer ridge of seal assembly.
3 Using a 0.0015-inch (0.038 mm) thickness gage, check gap between seal ring and
Surface R. If thickness gage can fit between the two, the seal assembly must be
repaired or replaced.
(h) Repair or replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
(2) Visually inspect honeycomb seal assembly for wear in area of contact with first stage nozzle
seal ring. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-07-8000). Light surface polishing is
acceptable. Wear sufficient to form a step or measurable depression of 0.005 inch (0.13 mm)
or less is acceptable; however, sharp edges must be blended to a smooth contour.
UP495246
ALL Page 8017
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8009. (Sheet 1 of 1) Seal Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-009-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8018
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
K. Inspect Transition Liner (Subtask 72-30-04-200-013-A01)
(1) Visually inspect transition liner for cracks. No cracks allowed except as shown on Figure 8010.
(2) Visually inspect transition liner for warpage and damage. No warpage allowed.
(3) Visually inspect transition liner for loose and broken welded seams and spot welds. No loose or
broken welds allowed.
(4) Visually inspect transition liner for broken tabs. Two adjacent broken tabs are not allowed.
(5) Visually inspect shield dimples for wear. No wear through shield dimples or through liner allowed.
(6) Visually inspect TBC for peeling, flaking, erosion, and missing coating. Peeling, flaking, erosion,
or missing coating are acceptable if no localized warpage or distortion of base metal has occurred.
(7) Replace transition liner if inspection requirements are not met.
Figure 8010. (Sheet 1 of 1) Transition Liner Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-010-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8019
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
L. Inspect Second Stage Impeller (Subtask 72-30-04-200-014-A01)
(1) Visually inspect impeller for cracks. No cracks allowed.

(3) Visually check impeller blades for dents and nicks. Limits for dents and nicks on blades are as
follows:
(a) Dents or nicks on inner half of blade LE must not exceed 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) in depth.
(b) Dents or nicks on outer half of LE must not exceed 0.08 inch (2.0 mm) in depth.
(c) Dents or nicks which are within 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) of hub fillet are not acceptable.
(4) Visually inspect impeller for evidence of rubbing. Refer to Figure 8011.
(a) Rubbing is not permitted in Area B.
(b) Minor rubbing is acceptable on blades (Surface C).
(c) Minor rub damage to outside edge of platform rim (Area A) is acceptable provided rub
damage does not exceed following limits.
1 Damage must not exceed 0.005-inch (0.13 mm) depth.
2 No damage allowed within 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) of blade platform or blade root area
(Dimension E).
(d) Repair minor rub damage. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-30-04-9000).
mm). Refer to Figure 8011.
(6) If impeller LE and/or contour (Surface C) is damaged beyond allowable repair limits and damage
does not exceed 0.125-inch (3.18 mm) depth, return impeller to Honeywell International Inc.,
Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440 for possible restoration
repair.
feasibility.
(7) Inspect and repair curvic couplings. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(9) Replacement of second stage impeller requires a vibration check. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK
72-00-00-13000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8020
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8011. (Sheet 1 of 1) Second Stage Compressor Impeller Inspection (Typical) (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-011-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8021
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIA C 8.080 (205.23) GAGE DIM. D 0.418 TO 0.424 (10.62 TO 10.77)
M. Inspect Compressor Housing (Subtask 72-30-04-200-015-A01)
NOTE: Inspection of compressor housing assembly in conjunction with a turbine (hot) section
inspection is performed with the compressor housing assembly and combustion transition
liner assembly installed in the gearbox.
(1) Visually inspect surface of Area B for damage of abradable shroud material. Refer to Figure
8012.
(a) Cracks are acceptable.
(b) Chipped out material is not acceptable.
(c) Nicks exceeding 0.01 inch (0.2 mm) in depth are not acceptable.
(d) Rub damage resulting in material loss exceeding 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) in depth is not
acceptable.
(e) Rub through shroud material exposing base metal is not acceptable.
(f) Raised metal and metal deposits are not acceptable. Hand finish using 120 grit paper or
finer to remove any raised metal or metal deposits.
(g) If damage to shroud is greater than acceptable limits, return part to a Honeywell-authorized
repair facility for metal spray and recontour.
(2) Visually inspect housing structure for cracks or other damage. Cracks in areas other than Area
B, the abradable shroud, are not acceptable.
(3) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements and is damaged beyond approved
repair.
UP495246
ALL Page 8022
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8012. (Sheet 1 of 1) Inspection of Compressor Housing Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-012-A01)
N. Inspect Curvic Coupling Gasket (Subtask 72-30-04-200-016-A01)
(1) Visually inspect curvic coupling gasket for nicks, deformation, cracks, hanging burrs, kinks, and
other damage.
(2) Visually inspect curvic coupling gasket for evidence of positive contact of gasket tips which mate
with curvics. There must be no visible leakage paths.
(3) Measure height of gasket at three positions approximately 120 degrees apart. Minimum average
height of gasket must be 0.212 inch (5.38 mm).
O. Inspect Input Housing Assembly (Subtask 72-30-04-200-017-A01)
(1) Inspect input housing assembly. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-10-20-8000).
P. Inspect Second Stage Diffuser Vane Assembly (Subtask 72-30-04-200-018-A01)
(1) Visually check assembly for cracks and voids. No cracks allowed. A 15-percent void is allowed
in brazed joints.
(2) Visually check assembly for vane tip erosion/damage. Vane tip erosion/damage is acceptable
providing it can be blended within maximum blend depth specified in Figure 8013.
(3) Visually check for metal buildup on diffuser vanes.
(4) Remove all buildup using approved cleaning procedure.
(5) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements or that is damaged beyond repair.
UP495246
ALL Page 8023
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8013. (Sheet 1 of 1) Diffuser Vane Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-013-A01)
Limit Limit
UP495246
ALL Page 8024
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Q. Inspect Deswirl Assembly (Subtask 72-30-04-200-019-A01)
(1) Visually check deswirl assembly for distortion, and loose and missing vanes. Distortion and
loose or missing vanes are not allowed.
(2) Dimensionally inspect flange for wear. Dimension A must not be less than 0.020 inch (0.51 mm).
(3) Inspect vane LE for erosion. Erosion (Dimension B) must not exceed 0.10 inch (2.5 mm). Erosion
not exceeding 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) may be removed by blending.
(4) Visually inspect for cracks. Cracks must not exceed the following limitations.
(a) Cracks initiating from vane TE and progressing to aft edge of inner band (Crack B, Figure
8014) are acceptable and may continue forward of vane TE (Crack A) if forward travel
does not exceed 0.30 inch (7.6 mm) (Dimension J).
(b) Cracks initiating from or adjacent to LE must not exceed 0.10 inch (2.5 mm).
UP495246
ALL Page 8025
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8014. (Sheet 1 of 1) Deswirl Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-014-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8026
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
R. Inspect Interstage Seal Support Assembly (Subtask 72-30-04-200-020-A01)
(1) Visually check seal support assembly for loose and damaged bolts. Loose or damaged bolts
are not allowed.
(2) Visually check for cracks, distortion, and other damage. No cracks, distortion, and damage
allowed.
S. Inspect Transiton Liner Support (Subtask 72-30-04-200-021-A01)
(1) Visually inspect for cracks. No cracks allowed.

(2) Visually inspect for wear steps. Wear steps may not exceed 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) in depth.
(3) Visually inspect for raised metal. Use fine abrasive stone with a 250 grit or finer to remove.
(4) Replace or repair part that does not meet inspection requirements.
T. Perform Hot Section Inspection (Subtask 72-30-04-200-022-A01)
(1) Perform hot section inspection. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-00-00-8000).
U. Inspect Accessory Drive Housing Assembly (Subtask 72-30-04-200-023-A01)
(1) Inspect accessory drive housing assembly. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK

72-10-20-8000).
V. Job Close-up (Subtask 72-30-04-200-024-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8027
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
COMPRESSOR GROUP ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the compressor group assembly.
Gisholt Model 13S balancing machine CAGE: 16074
PN 284989-2-1 impeller balancing arbor (used to CAGE: 06848

adapt first stage impeller to supports
of standard balancing machine)
PN 284992-1-1 impeller balancing arbor (used to CAGE: 06848

adapt second stage impeller to
supports of standard balancing
machine)


APPLICABLE.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-30-04-300-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Repair First Stage Compressor Impeller (Subtask 72-30-04-300-004-A01)
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THERE ARE NO STRESS RISES (SHARP EDGES) OR CRACKS IN
REPAIRED AREA AFTER BLENDING.
(1) Repair nicks and dents on LE of impeller blades as follows:
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED LIMITS OF FIGURE 9001. PERFORMANCE MAY BE
AFFECTED. BLADES MAY BE REPAIRED MORE THAN ONCE IF LIMITS ARE
NOT EXCEEDED.
(a) Dents or nicks which do not exceed the limits specified may be repaired. Refer to
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-30-01-8000) and REPAIR (PGBLK 72-30-01-9000).
(b) Blending of LE contour which extends more than 0.2-inch (5.1 mm) beyond the allowable
repair depth is not acceptable. Refer to shaded area, Details B and C, Figure 9001.
(c) Remove dents or nicks which are within 0.05 to 0.25 inch (1.3 to 6.4 mm) from hub fillet
as follows:
NOTE: No blending allowed within 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) of hub fillet.
1 Use a stone to deburr dents or nicks which do not exceed 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) in
depth.
2 Repair blades with dents or nicks which exceed 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) in depth but do
not exceed 0.03 inch (0.8 mm) in depth as follows:
a Hand finish to remove dents or nicks. Blending must fair smoothly to existing
blade LE.
b Perform FPI of reworked area. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
c Shot peen reworked area as described later in this procedure.
3 Repair blades with dents or nicks which exceed 0.03 inch (0.8 mm) in depth but do
not exceed 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) in depth as follows:
a Hand finish to remove material from the LE of the blade at an equal depth from
the dent or nick to the shroud end of LE.
b LE must be contoured to 4:1 ellipse as indicated in Figure 9001, View A-A.
c Perform FPI of reworked area. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
d Shot peen reworked area as described later in this procedure.
(d) Dents or nicks 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) in depth may be removed from inner one-half of the
blade LE. Dents or nicks 0.08 inch (2.0 mm) in depth may be removed from outer one-half
of the LE. Refer to Figure 9001, Details B and C.
(e) Hand finish to remove dents or nicks from the blade. Hand finish to remove material from
LE of the blade at a length equal to four times the depth of the nick or dent. Refer to Figure
9001, Details B and C.
NOTE: No blending allowed within 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) of hub fillet.
(f) All places where material is removed must fair smoothly, finished with 180 grit, sandpaper,
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(g) Balance impeller as described later in this procedure.

(2) Remove raised metal/adhered metal (Figure 9005, Surface E) by hand finishing. Hand blending
at Surface E must not result in rounding of edges at Surface E.
(3) Hand finish to remove minor rub damage to outside edge of platform rim (Area A, Figure 9005).
(4) Dynamically balance impeller, after repair, as follows:
(a) Install PN 284989-2-1, impeller balancing arbor on impeller curvic coupling and Diameter
A and install in Gisholt Model 13S, balancing machine or Gisholt Model 1S, balancing
machine. Refer to Figure 9004.
(b) Dynamically balance impeller to an accuracy of 0.028 inch-ounce in Plane M and 0.014
inch-ounce in Plane N.
(c) Remove material for balancing from areas illustrated in Figure 9004. Area 2 must be shot
peened after removing material for balancing.
(d) All places where material is removed for balancing must fair smoothly and leave no corners
or edges sharper than 0.015-inch (0.38 mm) radius.
(5) Shot peen reworked areas as follows:
(a) Mask curvic coupling and if installed mask knife seal.
(b) Locate arrows using Diameter K and Dimension L. Refer to Figure 9002 and Figure 9003.
(c) Shot peen areas enclosed by arrows to an intensity of 0.002 to 0.006 inch (0.05 to 0.15
mm) per Almen A2 gage.
(d) Locate shaded areas using Dimensions H and J.
(e) Shot peen shaded areas to an intensity of 0.004 to 0.006 inch (0.10 to 0.15 mm) per Almen
A2 gage. Refer to AMS 2430 using 0.018 to 0.023 inch (0.46 to 0.58 mm) diameter steel
shot.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Impeller Nick or Dent Repair (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9004
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
RAD A 0.1 (2.5) DIM. D 0.2 (5.1)
DIM. B 0.2 (5.1) DIM. E 0.05 (1.3) MAXIMUM
RAD C 0.1 (2.5) DIM. F 0.03 (0.8) MAXIMUM
Figure 9002. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Codes AA, BA, CA, BD, CC) First Stage Impeller Shot Peening Repair (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-002-A01)
Limit Limit
DIM. H 1.250 (31.75) MINIMUM DIA K 2.788 TO 2.790 (70.82 TO 70.87)
DIM. J 1.0 (25) MINIMUM DIM. L 3.659 (92.94) NOMINAL
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9005
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9003. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Codes BB, CB, BD, CD) First Stage Impeller Shot Peening Repair (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-003-A01)
Limit Limit
DIM. H 1.250 (31.75) MINIMUM DIA K 2.788 TO 2.790 (70.82 TO 70.87)
DIM. J 1.0 (25) MINIMUM DIM. L 3.659 (92.94) NOMINAL
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9006
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9004. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Compressor Impeller Balancing (Typical) (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-005-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9007
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. Refer to Figure 9002 or Figure 9003.
Limit Limit
DIM. B 0.720 (18.29) MINMUM DIM. D 0.010 (0.25) MINIMUM
DIM. C 2.100 (53.34) MAXIMUM
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9008
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9005. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Codes AA, BA, CA, BC, CC) First Stage Compressor Impeller Repair (Typical)
(GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-004-A01)
Limit Limit
DIA A 1.2594 TO 1.2598 DIA C 8.980 (228.09) GAGE
(31.989 TO 31.999)
DIA B 2.788 TO 2.790 (70.82 TO 70.87) DIM. D 0.540 TO 0.552 (13.72 TO 14.02)
FOR EACH PASSAGE.
MUST BE 0.543 (13.79)
MINIMUM) AT 8.980 (228.09)
GAGE DIAMETER
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9009
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9006. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Codes BB, CB, BD, CD) First Stage Compressor Impeller Assembly Repair
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9010
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIA A 1.2594 TO 1.2598 DIM. D 0.540 TO 0.552 (13.72 TO 14.02)
(31.989 TO 31.999) FOR EACH PASSAGE.
MUST BE 0.543 (13.79)
MINIMUM) AT 8.980 (228.09)
GAGE DIAMETER
DIA C 8.980 (228.09) GAGE DIA E 3.263 TO 3.265 (82.88 TO 82.93)
(TWO DIAMETERS MAXIMUM
MAY GO 0.002 (0.05) BELOW
3.263 (82.88))
C. Repair First Stage Impeller Shroud (Subtask 72-30-04-300-005-A01)
(1) Hand blend minor rubs in Area C smooth with contour. Refer to Figure 9007.
Figure 9007. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Impeller Shroud Repair (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-007-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9011
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
D. Repair Accessory Drive Housing (Subtask 72-30-04-300-006-A01)
(1) Repair accessory drive housing. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-10-20-9000).
E. Action Required if Incorrect Curvic Coupling Gasket Has Been Installed (Subtask
72-30-04-300-007-A01)
NOTE: There are two potential courses of action for this situation.
(1) Scrap all of the life-limited turbine rotating components in the affected engine and render all of
the scrapped components as unserviceable by damaging at least two adjacent curvic teeth or
turbine blades severely enough that the rotor is no longer serviceable.
(2) If a decision is made not to scrap parts without further input, then contact Honeywell as described
below to determine if any life-limited turbine rotating components may be retained for further
use. Once the information below is provided to Honeywell, a decision can be made following an
investigation using computer analytical modeling as to whether hardware can be retained, or
should be scrapped. There may be a cost to the customer associated with this investigation
depending on whether or not a similar combination of parts and time operated at this condition
has been modeled before. The customer will be informed in the beginning as to the degree of
cost involved before proceeding with the investigation.
(3) Contact Honeywell Global Customer Care Center and provide the following data:
• Engine serial number
• Part numbers and hours/cycles of life-limited rotating components
• Location of incorrectly installed curvic coupling gasket, part number of curvic coupling gasket,
number of holes in curvic coupling gasket, and diameter of holes
• Condition of turbine rotating components being considered
• Hours/cycles operated with incorrect parts.
F. Repair Second Stage Impeller (Subtask 72-30-04-300-008-A01)
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THERE ARE NO STRESS RISES (SHARP EDGES) OR CRACKS IN
REPAIRED AREA AFTER BLENDING.
(1) Remove raised metal/adhered metal (Surface C, Figure 9008) by hand finishing. Hand blending
at Surface C must not result in rounding of edges at Surface C.
(2) Hand finish to remove rub damage to outside edge of platform rim (Area A, Figure 9008).
(3) Repair nicks and dents on LE of impeller blades as follows:
(a) Blending of LE contour which extends more than 0.2 inch (5.1 mm) beyond the allowable
repair depth is not acceptable. Refer to shaded area, Details B and C, Figure 9009.
(b) Dents or nicks 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) in depth may be removed from inner one-half of the
blade LE. Dents or nicks 0.08 inch (2.0 mm) in depth may be removed from outer one-half
of the LE. Refer to Figure 9009, Details B and C.
(c) Hand finish to remove dents or nicks from the blade. Hand finish to remove material from
LE of the blade at a length equal to four times the depth of the nick or dent. Refer to Figure
9009, Details B and C.
NOTE: No bending allowed within 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) of hub fillet.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9012
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(d) All places where material is removed must fair smoothly, finished with 180 grit, sandpaper,
(e) Balance impeller as in next step.
(4) Dynamically balance second stage impeller, after repair, as follows:
(a) Install PN 284992-1-1, impeller balancing arbor on curvic couplings and install in Gisholt
Model 13S, balancing machine or Gisholt Model 1S, balancing machine.
(b) Dynamically balance impeller to an accuracy of 0.005 inch-ounce in Plane L and 0.013
inch-ounce in Plane M.
(c) Remove material for balancing from areas illustrated in Figure 9010. Area 2 must be shot
peened after removing material for balancing.
(d) All places where material is removed for balancing must fair smoothly and leave no corners
or edges sharper than 0.150-inch (3.8 mm) radius.
(5) Shot peen areas enclosed by arrows to an intensity of 0.002 to 0.006 inch (0.05 to 0.15 mm)
per Almen A2 gage. Refer to Figure 9011.
NOTE: Shot peening is not required unless balance material was removed from Area 2.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9013
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9008. (Sheet 1 of 1) Second Stage Compressor Impeller Inspection (Typical) (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-008-A01)
Limit Limit
DIA C 8.080 (205.23) GAGE DIM. D 0.418 TO 0.424 (10.62 TO 10.77)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9014
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9009. (Sheet 1 of 1) Second Stage Impeller Nick or Dent Repair (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-008-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9015
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
RAD A 0.1 (2.5) DIM. D 0.2 (5.1)
DIM. B 0.2 (5.1) DIM. E 0.05 (1.3) MAXIMUM
RAD C 0.1 (2.5) DIM. F 0.03 (0.8) MAXIMUM
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9016
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9010. (Sheet 1 of 1) Second Stage Compressor Impeller Balancing (Typical) (GRAPHIC
72-30-04-99B-009-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9017
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 2.20 (55.9) MAXIMUM DIM. C 1.90 (48.3) MAXIMUM
DIM. B 0.50 (12.7) MINIMUM RAD D 0.40 (10.2) MINIMUM
Figure 9011. (Sheet 1 of 1) Second Stage Impeller Shot Peening Repair (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-010-A01)
Limit Limit
DIM. R 4.90 TO 5.10 (124.5 TO 129.5)
G. Repair Compressor Housing (Subtask 72-30-04-300-009-A01)
(1) Hand blend shallow pitted, chipped, or flaked areas of contoured area (aluminum-silicon-coated).
Do not expose base metal.
(2) Any rub step in contour area must not exceed 0.005 inch (0.13 mm). Hand blend step smooth
with contour. Do not expose base metal.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9018
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
H. Repair Diffuser Vane Assembly (Subtask 72-30-04-300-010-A01)
(1) Diffuser vane LE blend repairs should be accomplished using approved repair procedures. Refer
to Figure 9012.
(2) Abradable spatter on diffuser vanes must be removed using approved cleaning procedures.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9019
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9012. (Sheet 1 of 1) Diffuser Vane Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 72-30-04-99B-011-A01)
Limit Limit
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9020
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9021
72-30-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
COMBUSTION SECTION – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Combustion Section (Subtask 72-40-00-870-001-A01)
(1) The combustion section is located in the rear one-third of the engine and encompasses the
turbine section. It provides an area where fuel and air are mixed and ignited. Principle components
of the combustion section are the transition liner assembly, combustion chamber, and combustion
chamber case.
(2) The transition liner assembly registers on the compressor housing. The assembly directs air to
the turbine section and also provides support for the seal on the splined curvic coupling. The
liner assembly supports the forward end of the combustion chamber. Small holes in the center
section of the liner assembly direct cooling air at the front face of the first stage turbine wheel
and through the curvic coupling teeth to the center area between the turbine wheel hubs and
the shouldered (main) shaft. The stator and liner assembly forms an inner register for the
combustion chamber.
(3) The annular combustion chamber assembly mates on one end with a slip joint on the transition
liner assembly to form the combustion chamber. The other end is supported at the rear by three
welded tabs and three special stud bolts in the turbine plenum assembly. The combustion
chamber assembly contains fuel nozzle ports and three igniter plugs ports (only two are used
on any installation). Slots and holes are appropriately located on the inner and outer walls of
the chamber assembly to control combustion during starting and operation.
(4) The combustion chamber case, attached to the compressor housing assembly, encloses the
entire combustion area, provides a plenum for compressed air, and consequently provides a
relatively cool skin enclosure. The rear end of the plenum assembly provides a register for the
turbine bearing support and for mounting the fuel nozzle and manifold assemblies. A flange on
the rear face of the turbine plenum assembly provides mounting for the exhaust duct assembly.
An oil tube assembly passes through the exhaust duct assembly and mates with an oil jet
assembly supported on the oil scavenge pump assembly to provide lubricating oil to the turbine
roller bearing.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
72-40-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
COMBUSTION CASE (PLENUM) AND COMBUSTION CHAMBER ASSEMBLY

(LINER) – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the combustion case (plenum) and combustion chamber
assembly (liner).



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-40-01-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Combustion Case and Combustion Chamber Assembly (Subtask 72-40-01-020-004-A01)
(1) Remove fuel manifolds and nozzles. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-09-3000).
(2) Remove fuel manifold purge system. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-01-3000).
(3) Remove ignition leads and igniter plugs. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 74-10-01-3000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(4) Remove anti-icing valve plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 75-10-01-3000).

(5) Remove temperature sensor assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 77-20-03-3000).
(6) Remove PS3 plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-01-3000).
(10) Remove oil inlet fitting and oil pressure jet. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-03-3000).
(11) Remove turbine scavenge pump assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-04-3000).
(12) Remove exhaust duct and rear engine mount. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-05-3000).
(13) Remove bearing support assembly components. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-06-3000).
(14) Remove turbine group assembly (module). Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-07-3000).
(15) Remove nuts (15, Figure 3001) and bolts (20) securing combustion case (55) to compressor
housing and remove assembled combustion case and combustion chamber.
(16) (Pre SB TPE331-77-0054) Remove bolts (5) and washers (10, 12).
(17) Remove combustion chamber assembly (60) from combustion case (55).
(18) (Post SB TPE331-77-0054) Remove bolts (5), washers (12), and locking plate (11).
(19) Remove combustion chamber assembly (60) from combustion case (55).
(20) Remove nut (5, Figure 3002), transition liner assembly (15), and turbine interstage liner seal
assembly (10).
NOTE: Do not remove transition liner assembly and turbine interstage liner seal assembly
unless they fail inspection requirements for installed components.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Combustion Case and Combustion Chamber Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC
72-40-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. SHOULDERED MACHINE BOLT 25. IDENTIFICATION PLATE

10. WASHER 35. BOLT
11. LOCKING PLATE 50. KEY LOCKED STUD
12. WASHER 55. COMBUSTION CASE
15. NUT 60. COMBUSTION CHAMBER ASSEMBLY
20. BOLT
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Seal Assembly and OTL Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 72-40-01-99B-002-A01)
5. NUT 15. TRANSITION LINER ASSEMBLY

10. TURBINE INTERSTAGE LINER SEAL
ASSEMBLY
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3005
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(LINER) – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the combustion case (plenum) and combustion chamber assembly
(liner).



APPLICABLE.

(MIL-PRF-907)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-40-01-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Combustion Chamber Assembly and Combustion Chamber Case (Subtask

72-40-01-420-004-A01)
drag (run-down torque) of self-locking devices to recommended values.
NOTE: Apply Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound to threads of all bolts unless
(1) Install transition liner assembly (15, Figure 4001) and turbine interstage liner seal assembly (10).
Secure with nuts (5). Torque nuts to a torque valve of 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm).
CAUTION: IF THE OLD COMBUSTION CHAMBER CASE IS NOT REINSTALLED, TURBINE
BUILD DIMENSIONS WILL CHANGE. COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING STEP TO
DETERMINE IF REPLACEMENT PLENUM CAN BE INSTALLED WITHOUT FURTHER
DISASSEMBLY AND SHIMMING OF STATOR COMPONENTS.
(2) Determine if new combustion case (55) can be installed without further disassembly and shimming
of stator components as follows:
(a) On OLD and NEW cases, measure distance between forward and aft flanges (Dimension
A, Figure 4002) at three places approximately 120 degrees apart. Average the three
measurements for each case.
(b) Find the difference in measurement averages for OLD and NEW cases.
1 If difference does not exceed +/-0.002 inch (+/-0.05 mm), proceed with installation.
2 If difference exceeds +/-0.002 inch (+/-0.05 mm), refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK
72-50-06-4000), for instructions to obtain proper turbine build dimensions.
(3) Install combustion chamber assembly.
(4) (Pre SB TPE331-77-0054) Install combustion chamber case. Align igniter plug holes in case
with combustion chamber assembly and secure with washers (10, 12, Figure 4003) and bolts
(5) (Pre SB TPE331-77-0054) Bend washers (10, 12) down against flat on combustion chamber
case boss. Bend opposite sides of washers up against flats on bolt heads.
(6) (Post SB TPE331-77-0054) Install combustion chamber case. Align igniter plug holes in case
with combustion chamber assembly and secure with washers (12), locking plate (11), and bolts
(7) (Post SB TPE331-77-0054) Bend washers (12) and locking plate (11) down against flat on
combustion case boss. Bend opposite sides of washers up against flats on bolt heads.
(8) Position case and chamber assembly so drain holes are at the 6 o'clock position. Secure assembly
with bolts (20) and nuts (15). Torque nuts to 50 in-lb (5.6 Nm).
NOTE: Bolts must be installed from aft side of combustion case.
(9) Install turbine group assembly (module). Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-07-4000).
(10) Install bearing support assembly components. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-06-4000).
(11) Install exhaust duct and rear engine mount. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-05-4000).
(12) Install turbine scavenge pump assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-04-4000).
(13) Install oil inlet fitting and oil pressure jet. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-03-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(17) Install PS3 plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-01-4000).
(18) Install temperature sensor assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 77-20-03-4000).
(19) Install anti-icing valve plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 75-10-01-4000).
(20) Install ignition leads and igniter plugs. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 74-10-01-4000).
(21) Install fuel manifold purge system. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-01-4000).
(22) Install fuel manifolds and nozzles. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-09-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Seal Assembly and OTL Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-40-01-99B-001-A01)

ASSEMBLY
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Measure Replacement Combustion Case (GRAPHIC 72-40-01-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4005
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Combustion Case and Combustion Chamber Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC
72-40-01-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4006
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

10. WASHER 35. BOLT
20. BOLT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4007
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(LINER) – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the combustion case (plenum) and combustion chamber assembly
(liner).



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-40-01-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean combustion case (55, Figure 6001). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning
Method 1 or 9.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: (POST SB TPE331-72-0761 AND POST SB TPE331-72-2109) DO NOT IMMERSE

COMBUSTION CHAMBER ASSEMBLY IN SOLUTIONS CONTAINING SODIUM OR
POTASSIUM. SOLUTIONS SUCH AS ALKALINE CLEANERS, RUST STRIPPERS,
AND SODIUM HYDROXIDE CAN PENETRATE THROUGH THE TBC AND DAMAGE
THE BOND COAT BETWEEN THE BARRIER COATING AND THE BASE METAL.
(3) Clean combustion chamber assembly (60). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000),
CAUTION: DO NOT IMMERSE TRANSITION LINER ASSEMBLY IN SOLUTIONS CONTAINING
SODIUM OR POTASSIUM. SOLUTIONS SUCH AS ALKALINE CLEANERS, RUST
STRIPPERS, AND SODIUM HYDROXIDE CAN PENETRATE THROUGH THE TBC
AND DAMAGE THE BOND COAT BETWEEN THE BARRIER COATING AND THE
BASE METAL.
(4) Clean transition liner assembly (15, Figure 6002). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000),
Cleaning Methods 2 and 9.
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Combustion Case and Combustion Chamber Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC
72-40-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

10. WASHER 35. BOLT
20. BOLT
UP495246
ALL Page 6004
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Seal Assembly and OTL Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-40-01-99B-002-A01)

ASSEMBLY
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6005
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(LINER) – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the combustion case (plenum) and combustion chamber
assembly (liner).


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-40-01-200-802-A01)
B. Inspection of the Combustion Case Assembly (Subtask 72-40-01-200-004-A01)
(1) Do a visual inspection of the exterior surfaces of the combustion case assembly.
(a) Visually examine all accessible areas of the combustion case assembly for cracks or
evidence of combustion air leakage. Perform inspection under strong light and use mirrors
as necessary.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1 Combustion gas leakage may be evident by the presence of any of the following:
• Local soot
• Discoloration and/or oxidation near a suspected crack site
• Heat damage to other engine and/or aircraft components in the vicinity of a
suspected crack site.
2 During visual inspection, specifically examine the following:
• Weld joints at drain bosses, igniter bosses, fuel nozzle bosses, P3 boss, and air
bleed pad bosses
• Weld joints between the sheet metal casing and the forward flange and between
the sheet metal casing and the aft dome
• Lateral seam weld which joins the sheet metal casing together
• Weld repairs, if present.
(b) Visually identified cracks are not allowed.
(2) If a crack is suspected and cannot be verified visually, the site may be checked using a portable
penetrant inspection. Refer to ASTM E 1417 Type I, Method C, Sensitivity Level 3.
(a) This inspection must be performed by personnel qualified and certified. Refer to NAS 410.
(b) No cracks are allowed.
(3) If cracks are determined to be present, replace the combustion case assembly with a serviceable
unit. Refer to 72-40-01 or OH 72-01-37.
C. Inspect Combustion Chamber Case (Subtask 72-40-01-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually check combustion chamber case for damage.

(2) Visually check shank portion of shouldered machine bolts (5, Figure 8001) used to locate
combustion chamber assembly in combustion chamber case for wear grooves. Wear grooves
in bolt shank must not exceed 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) in depth.
D. Inspect Combustion Chamber Liner Assembly (Subtask 72-40-01-200-005-A01)
(1) Visually check combustion chamber assembly for cracks, buckles, erosion, and deformation.
Refer to Figure 8002, Figure 8003, and Figure 8004.
(2) Carefully check welded seams, brazed joints, and spot welds for cracking. No cracks allowed.
(3) (Pre SB TPE331-72-2109) Circumferential cracks not exceeding 2.25 inches (57.2 mm) in length
in the inner and outer surfaces are acceptable. Refer to Figure 8002. Maximum of two cracks
allowed.
(4) (Post SB TPE331-72-2109) Circumferential cracks not exceeding 2.25 inches (57.2 mm) in
length in the inner and outer surfaces are acceptable, except in the area of the effusion holes.
Refer to Figure 8003. Maximum of two cracks allowed. Inspect cracks in the area of the effusion
holes as follows:
(a) Cracks between adjacent effusion holes in inner and outer panel must not extend beyond
four holes.
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(b) Individual cracks from effusion holes in inner and outer panel must not exceed 0.75 inch
(19.1 mm).
(5) Cracks not exceeding 0.25-inch (6.4 mm) length in the cooling skirts are allowed.
(6) Cracks not exceeding 0.25-inch (6.4 mm) length in the dome (cap) are allowed.
(7) No cracks allowed within areas shown at end of liner. Refer to Figure 8004.
(8) Intersecting cracks or cracks that would intersect after progressing twice their existing length
are not acceptable.
(9) Inspect combustor swirls (exit area) for cracks. Refer to Figure 8005. Cracks over 0.050 inch
(1.27 mm) in length, intersecting cracks, or cracks extending into the support flange are not
acceptable.
NOTE: Inspect swirls in place; do not remove.
(10) (Pre SB TPE331-72-2109) Inspect igniter panel for cracks and metal thickness.
(a) Cracks extending to igniter grommet are allowed. Refer to Example 1, Figure 8006.
(b) Cracks not exceeding 0.4-inch (10.2 mm) length extending to igniter panel joint are allowed.
Refer to Example 2.
(c) Cracks extending around igniter grommet are not allowed. Refer to Example 3.
(d) Circumferential cracks are not allowed. Refer to Example 4.
(e) Metal thickness less than 0.025 inch (0.64 mm) due to erosion on louvers is not acceptable.
(11) (Post SB TPE331-72-2109) Inspect effusion holes for cracks as follows:
(a) Cracks between adjacent effusion holes in inner and outer panel must not extend beyond
four holes. Refer to Figure 8003.
(b) Individual cracks from effusion holes in inner and outer panel must not exceed 0.75 inch
(19.1 mm).
(12) (Post SB TPE331-72-2109) Inspect effusion holes for blockage. Blockage of effusion holes is
not acceptable.
(13) (Post SB TPE331-72-0761 and Post SB TPE331-72-2109) Inspect combustion chamber TBC
for spalling and chipping as follows:
(a) Missing, spalled, or chipped coating within 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) of cooling skirt edges is
acceptable around entire circumference of cooling skirt.
(b) Missing, spalled, or chipped coating (excluding cooling skirt edges) not to exceed 1.0
square-inch (645 mm²) area separated by 1.0-inch (25.4 mm) minimum from adjacent
missing, spalled, or chipped areas are acceptable provided total missing, spalled, or chipped
area must not exceed 4.8 square-inches (3,097 mm²).
(c) Coating cracks of any length are acceptable provided criteria in the previous procedures
are not exceeded.
(14) Replace or repair liner that does not meet inspection requirements. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
72-40-01-9000). Return liner that does not meet inspection requirements and is not repairable
to Honeywell International Inc., Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ
85034-3440 for evaluation and possible repair.
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Combustion Case and Combustion Chamber Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-40-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

10. WASHER 35. BOLT
20. BOLT
UP495246
ALL Page 8005
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8002. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-72-2109) Combustion Chamber Assembly Inspection (Typical)
(GRAPHIC 72-40-01-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8006
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8003. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-2109) Combustion Chamber Assembly Inspection (Typical)
(GRAPHIC 72-40-01-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8007
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Liner Inspection (Typical) (GRAPHIC 72-40-01-99B-004-A01)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.750 (19.0)
UP495246
ALL Page 8008
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8005. (Sheet 1 of 1) Combustor Swirl Inspection (Typical) (GRAPHIC 72-40-01-99B-005-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8009
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. B 0.050 (1.27) MAXIMUM
UP495246
ALL Page 8010
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8006. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-72-2109) Combustion Chamber Assembly Igniter Panel
Inspection (Typical) (GRAPHIC 72-40-01-99B-006-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8011
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
E. Inspect Transition Liner Assembly (Subtask 72-40-01-200-006-A01)
(1) Visually inspect for cracks. No cracks are allowed except as shown on Figure 8007.
(2) Visually inspect for warpage and damage. No warpage is allowed.
(3) Visually inspect for loose and broken welded seams and spot welds. No loose or broken welds
are allowed.
(4) Visually inspect for broken tabs. No broken adjacent tabs are allowed.
(5) Visually inspect shield dimples for wear. No wear through dimples or liner is allowed.
(6) Visually inspect TBC for peeling, flaking, erosion, and burn-through to base metal. Peeling,
flaking, erosion, and burn-through to base metal is allowed if no localized warpage or distortion
of base metal has occurred.
NOTE: A TBC repair has been developed for the inner contour of liner shell. Incorporation
of this repair will provide longer life and greater durability. However, due to the process
control requirement that must be maintained, this repair must only be accomplished
at Honeywell International Inc., Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle,
Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440.
(7) Replace transition liner assembly if it does not meet inspection requirements.
UP495246
ALL Page 8012
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
F. Inspect Turbine Interstage Seal Assembly (Subtask 72-40-01-200-007-A01)
(1) Visually inspect the honeycomb portion of seal assembly for abnormalities that could cause seal
to leak (separation of brazed joint, pieces missing, or any other damage).
(2) Visually inspect honeycomb ID surface for rotating knife wear. Wear grooves must not exceed
0.030 inch (0.76 mm) in depth measured from unworn surface.
(3) Visually inspect seal housing for cracks. If cracks are suspected, perform FPI. Refer to
(4) Visually inspect anti-rotation pins for wear and security. No loose or worn pins are allowed.
(5) Damaged honeycomb material of seal assembly can be repaired by sending seal assembly to
Honeywell International Inc., Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ
85034-3440 for repair facility.
(6) Visually inspect Surface R (Figure 8008) for fret wear, wear steps, and material buildup. No
wear, wear steps, or material buildup that can be felt using a 0.030-inch (0.76 mm) diameter
stylus scriber is allowed.
UP495246
ALL Page 8013
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(7) Check bore of seal assembly (Diameter D, Figure 8008) for roundness as follows:
(a) Place seal ring (45, IPC, 72-50-07) into the approximate center of the bore of seal assembly.
(b) Make sure that the placement of the seal ring is at the same depth all around from the top
of the outer ridge of seal assembly.
(c) Using a 0.0015-inch (0.038 mm) thickness gage, check gap between seal ring and Surface
R. If thickness gage will not fit between the seal ring and Surface R, the seal assembly
must be repaired or replaced.
(8) Repair or replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
(9) Visually inspect honeycomb seal assembly for wear in area of contact with first stage nozzle
seal ring. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-07-8000). Light surface polishing is
allowed. Wear sufficient to form a step or measurable depression of 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) or
less is allowed; however, sharp edges must be blended to a smooth contour.
UP495246
ALL Page 8014
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8008. (Sheet 1 of 1) Seal Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-40-01-99B-008-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8015
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(LINER) – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the combustion case (plenum) and combustion chamber assembly
(liner).
PN 296002-1 combustor expander (to expand CAGE: 06848

combustion chamber (liner)
assembly inner and outer flanges)


APPLICABLE.
Haynes 188 filler rod (SAE AMS 5801) commercially available
2. Procedure (TASK 72-40-01-300-802-A01)
B. Repair Cracks Found in Combustion Chamber Assembly (Subtask 72-40-01-300-004-A01)
NOTE: All welding must be accomplished by qualified personnel certified to Specification AWS
D17.1 and familiar with industry techniques commonly used for welding high temperature
alloys.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) (Pre SB TPE331-72-2109) Stop drill cracks that do not exceed limits specified in Figure 9001.
Stop-drilled hole must be 0.050- to 0.070-inch (1.27 to 1.78 mm) diameter.
(2) (Post SB TPE331-72-2109) Stop drill cracks that do not exceed limits specified in Figure 9002.
Stop-drilled hole must be 0.050- to 0.070-inch (1.27 to 1.78 mm) diameter. Stop drilling of cracks
in area of effusion holes is not permitted.
CAUTION: (PRE SB TPE331-72-0761) DO NOT WELD ALONG A BRAZED SEAM. HOWEVER,

WELDING ACROSS A BRAZED SEAM IS ALLOWABLE.
(3) (Pre SB TPE331-0761) Weld cracks that do not exceed 1 inch (25.4 mm), using Haynes 188,
filler rod. Refer to Specification AWS D17.1. Grind welded areas flush against base metal surface
to within 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) to eliminate airstream obstruction.
NOTE: (Pre SB TPE331-72-0761) Combustion chamber assembly must be solution heat
treated prior to repairing cracks that exceed 1 inch (25.4 mm). Repair of cracks
exceeding 1 inch (25.4 mm) must be accomplished at a Honeywell-authorized service
facility.
(4) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0761) Weld repair to dome surface (ie, hanger bolt boss attachment and
swirl boss ring) requires the following stress relief cycle and inspection of swirl bosses for
distortion.
NOTE: (Pre SB TPE331-0761) Make sure that stress relief cycle has been accomplished to
combustion chamber if weld repairs were accomplished on dome.

(a) Perform stress relief cycle, by heating combustion chamber at 1,700 to 1,750°F (926 to
954°C) for 30 minutes, then rapid air cool.
(b) Visually inspect swirl bosses for distortion. No distortion allowed.
(5) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0761) Make sure that repaired cracks are properly welded. Perform FPI.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-72-2109) Combustion Chamber Assembly Repair (Typical)
(GRAPHIC 72-40-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9002. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-2109) Combustion Chamber Assembly Repair (Typical)
(GRAPHIC 72-40-01-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9004
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
C. (Pre SB TPE331-72-0761) Resize Inner Combustion Chamber Assembly Flanges (Subtask

72-40-01-300-005-A01)
(1) Install combustion chamber assembly in PN 296002-1, combustor expander. Resize ID and OD
of flanges.
NOTE: Combustion chamber assembly inner and outer flanges may require expanding 0.020-
to 0.030-inch (0.51 to 0.76 mm) greater than desired diameter when using PN
296002-1, combustor expander due to metal contraction.
(2) Remove combustion chamber assembly from PN 296002-1, combustor expander.
D. (Post SB TPE331-72-2109) Repair Blocked Effusion Holes In Inner and Outer Panels (Subtask
72-40-01-300-006-A01)

(1) Bake at 1,188 to 1,306° F (660 to 690°C) for 30 minutes and air cool to room temperature.
(2) Spray flush parts with water. Flush effusion holes in panels from the metal side.
THAT CAN GET IN YOUR EYES AND CAUSE INJURY.
(3) Air-dry parts with low pressure compressed air (20 PSIG (137.9 kPa) maximum) through effusion
holes.
(4) If blockage remains, use a 0.020-inch (0.51 mm) diameter pin to remove remaining blockage.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9005
72-40-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBINE SECTION – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Turbine Section (Subtask 72-50-00-870-001-A01)
(1) The turbine section contains three axial flow turbine rotors and three stator assemblies. Gases
from the combustion section flow through the stator and rotors and exhaust to atmosphere
through the exhaust duct assembly. The turbine section provides power to drive the compressor
through the reduction gear and shaft section to drive the propeller.
B. Oil Inlet Retainer Shield Assembly (Subtask 72-50-00-870-002-A01)
(1) The oil inlet retainer shield assembly is a metal sleeve that provides a heat shield for the oil inlet
tube assembly and oil pressure jet.
C. Tail Cone (Subtask 72-50-00-870-003-A01)
(1) The tail cone attaches to the rear end of the turbine bearing support assembly and provides a
protective cover for the turbine bearing scavenge pump and associated components.
D. Oil Inlet Tube Assembly and Oil Pressure Jet (Subtask 72-50-00-870-004-A01)
(1) The oil inlet tube assembly and oil pressure jet connects to the rear turbine bearing plumbing
and directs oil to the rear turbine bearing.
E. Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly (Subtask 72-50-00-870-005-A01)
(1) The oil scavenge pump is a 3 GPM (11.36 L/min), gerotor-type pump located inside the tail cone
that forces oil from the rear turbine sump to the accessory drive gearbox housing assembly.
F. Roller Bearing, Bearing Support Assembly, and Seal (Subtask 72-50-00-870-006-A01)
(1) The turbine bearing support assembly supports the roller bearing in a mount, and also supports
the seal and rotor at the rear of the shouldered (main) shaft. The seal prevents entry of lubricating
oil into the turbine gas path area.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
72-50-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL INLET RETAINER SHIELD ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the oil inlet retainer shield assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-01-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Oil Inlet Retainer Shield Assembly (Subtask 72-50-01-020-004-A01)
(1) Remove turbine bearing plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-08-3000).

(2) Remove nuts (5, Figure 3001), bolts (10, 15), and shield assembly (20).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-50-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Inlet Retainer Shield Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 72-50-01-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 15. BOLT

10. BOLT 20. SHIELD ASSEMBLY
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-50-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL INLET RETAINER SHIELD ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the oil inlet retainer shield assembly.



APPLICABLE.

(MIL-PRF-907)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-01-420-802-A01)
B. Install Oil Inlet Retainer Shield Assembly (Subtask 72-50-01-420-004-A01)
NOTE: Apply Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound, to threads of bolts, studs, screws,
or nuts located aft of the compressor housing unless otherwise specified.
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-50-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Install shield assembly (20, Figure 4001) in exhaust duct assembly. Shield assembly should
drop freely into position without using force or moving oil inlet tube.
NOTE: If force is required to install, improper size spacer may have been used to seat oil
inlet fitting assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-03-4000), for
instructions for selecting and installing proper size spacer.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT SHIELD ASSEMBLY (20) IS PROPERLY CENTERED AROUND
OIL INLET TUBE. MISALIGNMENT MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO OIL INLET TUBE.
(2) Check shield assembly (20) for alignment around oil inlet tube. Shield assembly (20) should be
checked at both ends for alignment. If not properly aligned, perform the following check.
(a) Make sure that shield assembly (20) is installed properly (rotated 180 degrees).
(b) Remove oil inlet tube and install different size (thickness) spacer. Refer to INSTALLATION
(PGBLK 72-50-03-4000).
(3) Apply Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound, to bolt (10, 15) and nut (5) threads.
(4) Install shield assembly (20), nuts (5), and bolts (10, 15). Torque bolts to 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm).
(5) Install turbine bearing plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 79-20-08-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-50-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Inlet Retainer Shield Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-50-01-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 15. BOLT

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-50-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL INLET RETAINER SHIELD ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the oil inlet retainer shield assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-01-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean shield assembly (20, Figure 6001). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning
Method 2.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-50-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Inlet Retainer Shield Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-50-01-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 15. BOLT

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-50-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL INLET RETAINER SHIELD ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the oil inlet retainer shield assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-01-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Oil Retainer Shield Assembly (Subtask 72-50-01-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect for cracks and distortion. No cracks or distortion allowed. Refer to Figure 8001.
(2) Visually inspect for broken welds. No broken welds allowed. Repair minor broken welds. Refer
(3) Repair or replace shield assembly (20) that does not meet inspection requirements.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-50-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Inlet Retainer Shield Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-01-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 15. BOLT

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-50-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL INLET RETAINER SHIELD ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the oil inlet retainer shield assembly.



APPLICABLE.
Braze Alloy 2100 filler rod commercially available
CRES 347 filler rod (AMS 5680) commercially available
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-01-300-802-A01)
B. Repair Oil Inlet Retainer Shield Assembly (Subtask 72-50-01-300-004-A01)
(1) Repair minor broken welds by rewelding in accordance with standard shop practices using Braze
Alloy 2100, filler rod, or CRES 347, filler rod (AMS 5680). Refer to Figure 9001.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-50-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Inlet Retainer Shield Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 72-50-01-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 15. BOLT

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-50-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TAIL CONE – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the tail cone.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-02-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Tail Cone (Subtask 72-50-02-020-004-A01)

(3) Remove screws (5, Figure 3001) and washers (10).
(4) Remove tail cone (15) and spacers (20).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-50-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Tail Cone Removal (GRAPHIC 72-50-02-99B-001-A01)
5. SCREW 15. TAIL CONE

10. WASHER 20. SPACER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-50-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TAIL CONE – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the tail cone.



APPLICABLE.

(MIL-PRF-907)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-02-420-802-A01)
B. Install Tail Cone (Subtask 72-50-02-420-004-A01)
NOTE: Refer to ASSEMBLY (PGBLK 70-00-00-10000), for general torque values. Add frictional
(1) Install spacers (20, Figure 4001) and tail cone (15).
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-50-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Apply Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound, to screws (5) threads.
(3) Secure with washers (10) and screws (5). Torque screws to 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm) and lockwire.
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Tail Cone Installation (GRAPHIC 72-50-02-99B-001-A01)

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-50-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TAIL CONE – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the tail cone.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-02-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean tail cone (15, Figure 6001). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method
2.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-50-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Tail Cone Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-50-02-99B-001-A01)

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-50-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TAIL CONE – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the tail cone.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-02-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Tail Cone (Subtask 72-50-02-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect for cracks and distortion. No cracks or distortion allowed. Refer to Figure 8001.
(2) Visually inspect for broken welds. No broken welds allowed. Repair minor broken welds. Refer
(3) Repair or replace shield assembly that does not meet inspection requirements.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-50-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Tail Cone Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-02-99B-001-A01)

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-50-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TAIL CONE – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the tail cone.



APPLICABLE.
Inconel 718 nickel base alloy (AMS 5832) commercially available
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-02-300-802-A01)
B. Repair Tail Cone (Subtask 72-50-02-300-004-A01)
(1) Repair minor broken welds by rewelding in accordance with standard shop practices using
Inconel 718, nickel base alloy. Refer to Figure 9001.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-50-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Tail Cone Repair (GRAPHIC 72-50-02-99B-001-A01)

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-50-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL INLET TUBE AND OIL PRESSURE JET – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the oil inlet tube and oil pressure jet.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-03-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Oil Inlet Tube and Oil Pressure Jet (Subtask 72-50-03-020-004-A01)
(4) Remove nuts (5, Figure 3001), inlet tube (10), gaskets (30, 40), spacer (15), and oil pressure
jet (35). Retain spacers for use during assembly.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-50-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Inlet Tube and Oil Pressure Jet Removal (GRAPHIC 72-50-03-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 30. GASKET

10. OIL INLET TUBE 35. OIL PRESSURE JET
15. SPACER 40. GASKET
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-50-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL INLET TUBE AND OIL PRESSURE JET – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the oil inlet tube and oil pressure jet.



APPLICABLE.

(MIL-PRF-907)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-03-420-802-A01)
B. Install Oil Inlet Tube and Oil Pressure Jet (Subtask 72-50-03-420-004-A01)
NOTE: Refer to ASSEMBLY (PGBLK 70-00-00-10000), for general torque values. Add frictional
NOTE: USE EYE PROTECTION. COMPRESSED AIR CAN CAUSE LOOSE PARTICLES THAT
CAN GET IN YOUR EYES AND CAUSE INJURY.
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-50-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Temporarily close lower end of oil inlet tube (10) and apply low pressure air to fitting end to
check for leakage. No evidence of leakage allowed.
(2) Install oil pressure jet (35, Figure 4001) and new gaskets (30, 40).
NOTE: Nuts (5, Figure 4002) securing oil scavenge pump may be loosened to allow slight
movement (rotation) of oil scavenge pump. Rotating oil scavenge pump CW or CCW
will prevent oil pressure jet binding during installation.
(3) Apply Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound, to nuts (5, Figure 4001) and stud
threads.
(4) If nuts (5, Figure 4002) securing oil scavenge pump were loosened during installation of oil
pressure jet (35, Figure 4001), torque nuts (5, Figure 4002) to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm). After 30 to 45
minutes cold-flow, torque nuts (5) to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
CAUTION: SELECTION OF IMPROPER SIZE SPACER IN THE FOLLOWING STEP MAY CAUSE
MISALIGNMENT OR FAILURE OF OIL INLET TUBE ASSEMBLY.
(5) Select a spacer (15, Figure 4001) thick enough to install oil inlet shield assembly without binding.
(6) Install gaskets (30), spacer (15), oil pressure jet (35), and gasket (40) on oil inlet tube (10).
(7) Install assembly and secure with nuts (5). Torque nuts to 70 in-lb (7.9 Nm). After 30 to 45 minutes
cold-flow, torque nuts to 70 in-lb (7.9 Nm).
(8) Make sure that oil inlet tube (10) is centered in boss of exhaust pipe. If oil inlet tube (10) is not
centered, accomplish the following as required.
(a) Loosen nuts (5, Figure 4002) and move oil inlet tube (10) CW or CCW to center tube.
Torque nuts to 70 in-lb (7.9 Nm). After 30 to 45 minutes cold-flow, torque nuts to 70 in-lb
(7.9 Nm).
(b) If nuts (5, Figure 4002) securing oil scavenge pump were loosened during installation of
oil pressure jet (35, Figure 4001), torque nuts (5, Figure 4002) to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm). After
30 to 45 minutes cold-flow, torque nuts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
CAUTION: SELECTION OF IMPROPER SIZE SPACER IN THE FOLLOWING STEP MAY
CAUSE MISALIGNMENT OR FAILURE OF OIL INLET TUBE ASSEMBLY.
(c) Select a spacer (15, Figure 4001) thick enough to install oil inlet shield assembly without
binding.
(9) Install oil inlet retainer shield. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-01-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-50-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Inlet Tube and Oil Pressure Jet Installation (GRAPHIC 72-50-03-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 30. GASKET

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-50-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Scavenge Pump Assembly and Spur Gearshaft Removal (GRAPHIC
72-50-03-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 20. GASKET

10. WASHER 25. SPUR GEARSHAFT
15. OIL SCAVENGE PUMP ASSEMBLY
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-50-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL INLET TUBE AND OIL PRESSURE JET – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the oil inlet tube and oil pressure jet.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-03-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean spacer (15, Figure 6001), oil inlet tube (10), and oil pressure jet (35). Refer to CLEANING
(PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method 2 or 9.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-50-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Inlet Tube and Oil Pressure Jet Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-50-03-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 30. GASKET

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-50-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
OIL INLET TUBE AND OIL PRESSURE JET – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the oil inlet tube and oil pressure jet.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-03-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Oil Inlet Tube and Oil Pressure Jet (Subtask 72-50-03-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect oil pressure jet (35, Figure 8001) for bent and distorted mounting flange and
cracked bolt holes. Check orifice in end of jet for nicks, burrs, and other irregularities.
(2) Visually inspect oil inlet tube (10) for distortion, wear, and oil passage for obstructions.
(a) No distortion allowed.
(b) A wear step on wrenching flats is allowed if it is not more than 0.03-inch (0.8 mm) deep.
No other wear allowed.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-50-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) No oil passage obstructions allowed.

(4) Replace oil inlet tube (10) and oil pressure jet (35) that do not meet inspection requirements.
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Oil Inlet Tube and Oil Pressure Jet Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-03-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 30. GASKET

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-50-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBINE SCAVENGE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND SPUR GEARSHAFT – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the turbine scavenge pump assembly and spur gearshaft.
PN 298442-1 scavenge pump puller (used to CAGE: 06848

remove turbine scavenge pump,
replaced by PN 831103-1)

replaces PN 298442-1, replaced by
PN 831191-1)



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-04-020-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Remove Turbine Scavenge Pump Assembly and Spur Gearshaft (Subtask 72-50-04-020-004-A01)
(1) Remove rear turbine bearing oil line. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 79-20-08-3000).
(5) Prior to turbine scavenge pump removal, measure the following. Refer to Figure 3001.
(a) Place parallel bar on turbine bearing support assembly.
(b) Mark position of parallel bar.
(c) Measure from parallel bar to turbine scavenge pump nut mounting flange at three places
120 degrees apart.
NOTE: Take measurements at three places 120 degrees apart.
(d) Average the three measurements and record for later use when installing turbine scavenge
pump.
(6) Remove nuts (5, Figure 3002) and washers (10).
(7) Using PN 298442-1, scavenge pump puller, PN 831103-1, scavenge pump puller, or PN
831191-1, scavenge pump puller, remove oil scavenge pump assembly (15).
(8) Remove spur gearshaft (25) and gasket (20). Discard gasket.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Measurement of Proper Seating of Bearing Carrier (GRAPHIC

72-50-04-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Scavenge Pump Assembly and Spur Gearshaft Removal (GRAPHIC
72-50-04-99B-002-A01)
5. NUT 20. GASKET

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBINE SCAVENGE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND SPUR GEARSHAFT – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the turbine scavenge pump assembly and spur gearshaft.



APPLICABLE.

(MIL-PRF-907)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-04-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Turbine Scavenge Pump Assembly and Spur Gearshaft (Subtask 72-50-04-420-004-A01)
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT GASKET IS INSTALLED PROPERLY WITH HOLES AND NOTCHED
AREAS ALIGNED WITH TURBINE SCAVENGE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND TURBINE
BEARING SUPPORT ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: Apply Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound to threads of studs prior to
installation.
(1) Install new gasket (20, Figure 4001), spur gearshaft (25), and oil scavenge pump assembly (15).
Make sure that splines mesh properly.
(2) Install washers (10) and nuts (5).
(3) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0962) Torque nuts (5) to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm). Wait 30 to 45 minutes for possible
cold-flow of gasket. Torque nuts again to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(4) (Post SB TPE331-72-0962) Torque nuts (5) as follows:
(a) Torque nuts (5) in sequence (1, 2, 3, 4) to 30 in-lb (3.4 Nm). Refer to Figure 4002.
(b) Torque nuts (5) in sequence (1, 2, 3, 4) to 60 in-lb (6.8 Nm).
(c) Torque nuts (5) in sequence (1, 2, 3, 4) to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(d) Wait at least 5 minutes, then again torque nuts (5) in sequence (1, 2, 3, 4) to 80 in-lb (9.0
Nm).
(e) Upon completion of engine reassembly, check and make sure of proper engine operation.
Refer to engine test instructions.
(f) If required, retorque nuts (5) in sequence (1, 2, 3, 4) to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(g) Wait at least 5 minutes, then again torque nuts (5) in sequence (1, 2, 3, 4) to 80 in-lb (9.0
Nm).
NOTE: If temperature of pump and support assembly was at least 32°F (0°C) when
the bearing carrier is properly seated, retorquing of nuts after engine run is not
required.
(5) To make sure that bearing carrier is properly seated, measure the following:
(a) Place parallel bar on turbine bearing support assembly. Refer to Figure 4003.
(b) Mark position of parallel bar.
(c) Measure from parallel bar to turbine scavenge pump nut mounting flange at three places
120 degrees apart.
NOTE: Take measurements at three places 120 degrees apart.
(d) Average the three measurements. Compare measurement previously recorded in REMOVAL
(PGBLK 72-50-04-3000). Difference in measurements must be within +0.00 to -0.020 inch
(+0 to -0.51 mm).
(e) If measurements are not within +0.00 to -0.020 inch (+0 to -0.51 mm), remove turbine
scavenge pump. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-04-3000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(f) Remove, inspect, and install bearing carrier. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-06-3000),
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-06-8000), and INSTALLATION (PGBLK
72-50-06-4000), prior to reassembly.
(9) Install rear turbine bearing oil line. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 79-20-08-4000).
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Scavenge Pump Assembly and Spur Gearshaft Installation (GRAPHIC
72-50-04-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 20. GASKET

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post TPE331-72-0962) Nut Torque Sequence (GRAPHIC 72-50-04-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Measurement of Proper Seating of Bearing Carrier (GRAPHIC

72-50-04-99B-003-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4005
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBINE SCAVENGE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND SPUR GEARSHAFT – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the turbine scavenge pump assembly and spur gearshaft.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-04-100-802-A01)
Method 1.
(2) Clean spur gearshaft (25, Figure 6001). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning
Method 1 or 9.
(3) Clean oil scavenge pump assembly (15). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning
Method 1.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Scavenge Pump Assembly and Spur Gearshaft Cleaning (GRAPHIC
72-50-04-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 20. GASKET

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBINE SCAVENGE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND SPUR GEARSHAFT – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the turbine scavenge pump assembly and spur gearshaft.


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-04-200-802-A01)
B. Spur Gearshaft Assembly Inspection (Subtask 72-50-04-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect spur gearshaft splines or gear teeth for chipping, pitting, and excessive wear of
base metal. No chipping, pitting, or excessive wear of base metal allowed. Chipping, pitting,
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
flaking, or wearing of the gearshaft Copper plating is allowed and is not cause for gearshaft
rejection.
(2) Dimensionally inspect spur gearshaft. Dimension K must be 3.100 to 3.110 inches (78.74 to
78.99 mm). Refer to Figure 8001.
(3) Visually inspect for evidence of wear on the scavenge pump end of the spur gearshaft. No wear
allowed.
(4) Visually inspect spur gearshaft oil passage for obstruction and contamination that may affect oil
flow. Clean oil passage to remove contamination or obstruction.
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Spur Gearshaft Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-04-99B-001-A01)
C. (Pre SB TPE331-72-0982/Pre SB TPE331-72-2074) Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly Inspection

(Subtask 72-50-04-200-005-A01)
(1) Remove screws (5, Figure 8002) and cover (10).
(2) Inspect for sheared pin in rotor (matched set) (15) retainer. No sheared pin allowed.
(3) Using a suitable scribe or equivalent, apply light hand pressure alternately on ends of rotor
(matched set) (15) retainer pin as shown in Figure 8003. If movement of pin is detected, refer
(4) Inspect oil scavenge pump assembly for freedom of rotation of drive gear and shaft and gerotors.
No binding allowed.
(5) Inspect oil scavenge pump assembly for chipped and broken gear teeth and for cracks. No
chipped or broken gear teeth or cracks allowed.
(6) Closely inspect bushing in rear of oil scavenge pump assembly housing (25) for evidence of
wear or looseness. No wear or looseness allowed.
(7) (Post SB TPE331-72-0533) Inspect oil scavenge pump housing (25) center bore for wear, in
area where end of spur gearshaft contacts housing (25). Wear must not exceed 0.010 inch (0.25
mm). Replace pump assembly if wear limits are exceeded.
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(8) Inspect rotor (matched set) (15) as follows:

(a) Visually inspect rotor (matched set) (15) for cracks, gouges, and wear step. No cracks,
gouges, or wear step allowed.
(b) Dimensionally inspect rotor (matched set) (15). Refer to Figure 8004.
(c) Remove outer portion of rotor (matched set) (15) and inspect oil scavenge pump assembly
bore for scoring. Minor scoring is allowed.
(9) Visually inspect cover (10, Figure 8002) sealing surface for roughness, nicks, and scratches.
Replace cover (10) if roughness, nicks, or scratches are evident.
(10) Install outer portion of rotor (matched set) (15).
NOTE: Lubricate matched rotor (matched set) (15) with clean, approved engine oil prior to
installation.
(11) Check oil scavenge pump shaft end play clearance. Oil scavenge pump shaft end play clearance
must be within 0.005 to 0.015 inch (0.13 to 0.38 mm).
(12) Install cover (10) as follows:
(a) Install cover (10) and screws (5).
(b) Rotate shaft assembly while tightening screws (5). If any binding of the shaft is felt while
tightening screws (5), loosen screws (5), reposition cover (10) and repeat procedure.
(c) Repeat above step until screws (5) are torqued to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm) and shaft rotates without
binding.
(d) Lockwire screws (5) in pairs.
(13) Visually inspect studs for security and damage. Replace studs. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK
(PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(14) If inspection requirements are not met, replace or repair scavenge pump. Refer to component
OH listed in applicable publications table. Refer to INTRODUCTION.
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8002. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0982/Pre SB TPE331-72-2074) Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly
(GRAPHIC 72-50-04-99B-002-A01)
5. SCREW (10) 15. ROTOR (MATCHED SET) (OUTER

PORTION) (30)
10. COVER (20) 25. HOUSING (60)
UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8003. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-0982) (Pre SB TPE331-72-2074) Inspect Rotor (Matched
Set) (GRAPHIC 72-50-04-99B-003-A01)
Limits Limits
DIA A 1.1225 (28.512) MINIMUM DIM. D 0.004 (0.10) MAXIMUM
UP495246
ALL Page 8005
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8004. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0982/Pre SB TPE331-72-2074) Rotor (Matched Set) Inspection
(GRAPHIC 72-50-04-99B-004-A01)
Limits Limits
D. (Post SB TPE331-72-0982) (Pre SB TPE331-72-2074) Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly Inspection

(Subtask 72-50-04-200-006-A01)
(1) Inspect oil scavenge pump assembly for freedom of rotation of the scavenge pump gearshaft
(60, Figure 8005) and rotor (matched set) (40). No binding allowed.
(2) Remove nuts (10), cover plate (20), retaining ring (30), rotor (matched set) (40), drive key (50),
and scavenge pump gearshaft (60) from assembled housing (100) and studs (80, 90).
(3) Inspect cover plate (20) as follows:
(a) Visually inspect cover plate (20) for cracks. No cracks allowed.
(b) Dimensionally inspect cover plate (20). Refer to Figure 8006.
(c) Visually inspect fluorocarbon dispersion coating (Surface D) between DIA A and DIA B for
nicks, burrs, scratches, heat deterioration, and other damage. No nicks, burrs, scratches,
heat deterioration, or other damage allowed.
(4) Inspect rotor (matched set) (40, Figure 8005) as follows:
(a) Visually inspect for gouges, cracks, and broken teeth. No gouges, cracks, or broken teeth
allowed.
(5) Inspect scavenge pump gearshaft (60, Figure 8005) as follows:
UP495246
ALL Page 8006
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Visually inspect gear teeth for cracks. No cracks allowed.

(b) Inspect gear tooth load surface for defects such as scoring, pitting, and chipping. Visual
defects on gear teeth are acceptable as long as defects cannot be felt using a 0.064-inch
(1.63 mm) diameter stylus scriber.
(6) Inspect housing (100) as follows:
(b) Inspect mounting surfaces for gouges. Minor repair is allowed.
(c) Visually inspect gearshaft bushings for looseness in housing (100) and scoring. No
looseness or scoring allowed.
(d) Inspect studs (80, 90) for looseness and thread damage. Minor repair to threads is allowed.
(7) Install rotor (matched set) (40).
NOTE: Lubricate matched rotor set (40) with clean MIL-PRF-7808, lubricating oil or
MIL-PRF-23699, lubricating oil prior to installation.
(8) Install drive key (50) on scavenge pump gearshaft (60) and carefully install assembled scavenge
pump gearshaft in the back of housing (100). Make sure that the drive key (50) on scavenge
pump gearshaft (60) is aligned with key slot on inner portion of rotor (matched set) (40).
(9) Install retaining ring (30) on end of scavenge pump gearshaft (60).
(10) Inspect retaining ring (30) for looseness and damage. No looseness or damage allowed.
(11) Check scavenge pump gearshaft (60) end play clearance. Scavenge pump gearshaft (60) end
play must be within 0.025 to 0.085 inch (0.64 to 2.16 mm).
(12) Install cover plate (20) as follows:
(a) Install cover plate (20) and nuts (10). Torque nuts to 30 in-lb (3.4 Nm).
(b) Rotate scavenge pump gearshaft (60) and check for binding.
(c) If scavenge pump gearshaft (60) can be easily rotated by hand, no further action is
necessary.
(d) If scavenge pump gearshaft (60) cannot be easily rotated by hand, remove nuts (10) and
cover plate (20). Inspect for foreign material in the rotor (matched set) (40) and/or scavenge
pump gearshaft (60) area.
(e) Install cover plate (20) and nuts (10). Torque nuts to 30 in-lb (3.4 Nm).
(f) Rotate scavenge pump gearshaft (60) and check for binding.
(g) If scavenge pump gearshaft (60) can be easily rotated by hand, no further action is
necessary.
(h) If scavenge pump gearshaft (60) still cannot be easily rotated by hand, reject oil scavenge
pump assembly.
(13) Repair or replace part that does not meet inspection requirements. Refer to component OH,
72-50-04, OH, 72-50-06, or OH, 72-50-07 for possible repair of oil scavenge pump assembly.
UP495246
ALL Page 8007
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8005. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-0982) (Pre SB TPE331-72-2074) Oil Scavenge Pump
Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-50-04-99B-005-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8008
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
10. NUT 60. SCAVENGE PUMP GEARSHAFT

20. COVER PLATE 80. STUD
30. RETAINING RING 90. STUD
40. ROTOR (MATCHED SET) 100. HOUSING
50. DRIVE KEY
Figure 8006. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-0982) (Pre SB TPE331-72-2074) Cover Plate Inspection
(GRAPHIC 72-50-04-99B-006-A01)
Limits Limits
DIA A 1.940 (49.28) DIA B 1.125 (28.58)
UP495246
ALL Page 8009
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8007. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-0982) (Pre SB TPE331-72-2074) Inspect Rotor (Matched
Set) (GRAPHIC 72-50-04-99B-007-A01)
Limits Limits
E. (Post SB TPE331-72-2074) Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly Inspection (Subtask

72-50-04-200-007-A01)
(1) Inspect oil scavenge pump assembly for freedom of rotation of scavenge pump gearshaft (35,
Figure 8008) and rotor (matched set) (25). No binding allowed.
(2) (PN 3108282-2) Remove bolts (5), cover plate (10), retaining ring (15), washer (20), rotor
(matched set) (25), drive key (30), and scavenge pump gearshaft (35) from assembled inserts
(75), studs (80), and housing (85).
(3) (PN 3107163-1 and PN 3108346-1) Remove nuts (5, Figure 8009), cover plate (10), retaining
ring (15), washer (20), rotor (matched set) (25), drive key (30), and scavenge pump gearshaft
(35) from assembled studs (75, 80), and housing (85).
(4) Inspect cover plate (10, Figure 8008 or Figure 8009) as follows:
(a) Visually inspect cover plate (10) for cracks. No cracks allowed.
(b) Dimensionally inspect cover plate. Refer to Figure 8010.
(c) Visually inspect fluorocarbon dispersion coating (Surface D) between DIA A and DIA B for
nicks, burrs, scratches, heat deterioration, and other damage. No nicks, burrs, scratches,
heat deterioration, or other damage allowed.
(5) Inspect rotor (matched set) (25, Figure 8008 or Figure 8009) as follows:
(a) Visually inspect rotor (matched set) (25) for gouges, cracks, and broken teeth. No gouges,
cracks, or broken teeth allowed.
UP495246
ALL Page 8010
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(6) Inspect scavenge pump gearshaft (35, Figure 8008 or Figure 8009) as follows:
(a) Visually inspect gear teeth for cracks. No cracks allowed.
(b) Inspect gear tooth load surface for defects such as scoring, pitting, and chipping. Visual
defects on gear teeth is acceptable as long as defects cannot be felt using a 0.031-inch
(0.79 mm) diameter stylus scriber.
(7) Inspect housing (85) as follows:
(b) Inspect mounting surfaces for gouges. Minor repair is allowed.
(c) Visually inspect gearshaft bushings for looseness in housing and scoring. No looseness
or scoring allowed.
(d) Inspect studs (75, 80) for looseness and thread damage. Minor repair to threads is allowed.
No looseness allowed.
(8) Install rotor (matched set) (25).
NOTE: Lubricate rotor (matched set) (25) with clean, approved MIL-PRF-7808, lubricating
oil prior to installation.
(9) Install drive key (30) on scavenge pump gearshaft (35) and carefully install assembled scavenge
pump gearshaft (35) in the back of housing (85). Make sure that the drive key (30) on scavenge
pump gearshaft (35) is aligned with key slot on inner portion of rotor (matched set) (25).
(10) Install retaining ring (15) on end of scavenge pump gearshaft (35).
(11) Inspect retaining ring (15) for looseness and damage. No looseness or damage allowed.
(12) Check scavenge pump gearshaft (35) end play clearance. Scavenge pump gearshaft (35) end
play must be within 0.031 to 0.091 inch (0.79 to 2.31 mm).
(13) Install cover plate (10) as follows:
(14) Lubricate rotor pocket of cover plate (10) with MIL-PRF-7808, lubricating oil or MIL-PRF-23699,
lubricating oil.
NOTE: Lubricate rotor pocket of cover plate (10) with MIL-PRF-7808, lubricating oil or
MIL-PRF-23699, lubricating oil prior to installation.
(15) (PN 3108282-2) Install cover plate (10, Figure 8008) and bolts (5). Torque bolts to 25 in-lb (2.8
Nm) above run-down torque. Refer to the sequence shown in Figure 8012.
(16) (PN 3107163-1 and PN 3108346-1) Install cover plate (10, Figure 8009) and nuts (5). Torque
nuts to 25 in-lb (2.8 Nm) above run-down torque. Refer to the sequence shown in Figure 8012.
(17) Rotate scavenge pump gearshaft (35, Figure 8008 or Figure 8009) and check for binding.
(18) If scavenge pump gearshaft (35) can be easily rotated by hand, no further action is necessary.
(19) (PN 3108282-2) If scavenge pump gearshaft (35) cannot be easily rotated by hand, remove
bolts (5) and cover plate (10). Inspect for foreign material in the rotor (matched set) (25) and/or
scavenge pump gearshaft (35) area.
(20) (PN 3108282-2) Torque bolts (5, Figure 8008) to 30 to 40 in-lb (3.4 to 4.5 Nm). Refer to the
sequence shown in Figure 8012. Repeat the torque sequence two additional times at 30 to 40
in-lb (3.4 to 4.5 Nm).
UP495246
ALL Page 8011
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(21) (PN 3107163-1 and PN 3108346-1) If scavenge pump gearshaft cannot be easily rotated by
hand, remove bolts (5) and cover plate (10). Inspect for foreign material in the rotor (matched
set) (25) and/or scavenge pump gearshaft (35) area.
(22) (PN 3107163-1 and PN 3108346-1) Torque nuts (5, Figure 8009) to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm). Refer to
the sequence shown in Figure 8012. Repeat the torque sequence two additional times at 40
in-lb (4.5 Nm).
(23) If scavenge pump gearshaft (35, Figure 8008 or Figure 8009) still cannot be easily rotated by
hand, reject oil scavenge pump assembly.
(24) Repair or replace part that does not meet inspection requirements. Refer to component OH,
72-50-07 for possible repair of turbine oil scavenge pump assembly.
UP495246
ALL Page 8012
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8008. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-2074) (PN 3108282-2) Oil Scavenge Pump Assembly
(GRAPHIC 72-50-04-99B-008-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8013
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 30. DRIVE KEY

10. COVER PLATE 35. SCAVENGE PUMP GEARSHAFT
15. RETAINING RING 75. INSERT
20. WASHER 80. STUD
UP495246
ALL Page 8014
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8009. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-2074) (PN 3107163-1 and PN 3108346-1) Oil Scavenge
Pump Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-50-04-99B-009-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8015
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 30. DRIVE KEY

10. COVER PLATE 35. SCAVENGE PUMP GEARSHAFT
15. RETAINING RING 75. STUD
20. WASHER 80. STUD
Figure 8010. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-2074) Cover Plate Inspection (GRAPHIC

72-50-04-99B-010-A01)
Serviceable Limits Serviceable Limits

DIA A 1.940 (49.28) DIA B 1.125 (28.58)
UP495246
ALL Page 8016
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8011. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-72-2074) Inspect Rotor (Matched Set) (GRAPHIC
72-50-04-99B-011-A01)

DIA A 1.1225 (28.512) DIM. E 0.2485 TO 0.2490 (6.312 TO 6.325)
DIM. D 0.004 (0.10)
Figure 8012. (Sheet 1 of 1) Bolt/Nut Torque Sequence (GRAPHIC 72-50-04-99B-012-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8017
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBINE SCAVENGE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND SPUR GEARSHAFT – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the turbine scavenge pump assembly and spur gearshaft.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-04-300-802-A01)
B. (Pre SB TPE331-72-0982/Pre SB TPE331-72-2074) Repair Loose Rotor Set Retainer Pin (Subtask
72-50-04-300-004-A01)
CAUTION: USE CARE NOT TO BREAK PIN WHEN UPSET OPERATION IS PERFORMED. IF PIN
IS BROKEN, SCAVENGE PUMP ASSEMBLY MUST BE SENT TO AUTHORIZED
COMPONENT OVERHAUL FACILITY FOR REPLACEMENT OF PIN.
(1) Upset rotor set retainer pin to a maximum depth of 0.010 inch (0.25 mm). Refer to Figure 9001.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Using a suitable scribe or equivalent, apply light hand pressure alternately on ends of rotor
(matched set) retainer pin. No pin movement allowed.
(3) Check pump shaft end play clearance. Pump shaft end play clearance must be within 0.005 to
0.015 inch (0.13 to 0.38 mm).
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0982/Pre SB TPE331-72-2074) Rotor (Matched Set) Retainer
Pin Inspection and Repair (GRAPHIC 72-50-04-99B-001-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-50-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
EXHAUST DUCT AND REAR ENGINE MOUNT – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the exhaust duct and rear engine mount.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-05-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Exhaust Duct and Rear Engine Mount (Subtask 72-50-05-020-004-A01)

(5) Remove exhaust pressure plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 76-10-04-3000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-50-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(6) Disconnect temperature sensor assembly (EGT). Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 77-20-03-3000).
NOTE: Do not remove temperature sensor assembly (EGT) from exhaust duct except for
repair of exhaust duct or sensor assembly.
(7) Remove bolts (5, 10, Figure 3001), rear engine mount (15), and shims (20).
(8) Remove bolts (35) and exhaust duct (40).
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Exhaust Duct and Rear Engine Mount Removal (GRAPHIC 72-50-05-99B-001-A01)
5. BOLT 20. SHIM

10. BOLT 35. BOLT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-50-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
EXHAUST DUCT AND REAR ENGINE MOUNT – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the exhaust duct and rear engine mount.



APPLICABLE.

(MIL-PRF-907)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-05-420-802-A01)
B. Install Exhaust Duct and Rear Engine Mount (Subtask 72-50-05-420-004-A01)
NOTE: Apply Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound, to threads of bolts, studs, screws
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-50-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Install exhaust duct (40, Figure 4001) and bolts (35). Torque bolts using cross torque method
in 12 to 15 in-lb (1.4 to 1.7 Nm) increments until 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm) is attained.
NOTE: Exhaust duct (40) must be properly aligned to allow installation of oil inlet tube and
retainer shield assembly.
(2) Install approximately 0.080-inch (2.03 mm) trial shims (20) and rear engine mount (15). Secure
with bolts (10). Torque bolts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(3) Using thickness gage, measure gap between mount and plenum mount boss. Thickness gage
must go completely through. Determine shims to remove to attain 0.002- to 0.005-inch (0.05 to
0.13 mm) clearance.
(4) Remove bolts (10), rear engine mount (15), and trial shims (20).
(5) Apply Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound, to bolts (5, 10) threads.
(6) Install rear engine mount (15), shims (20) determined above, and bolts (5, 10). Torque bolt (10)
to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm). Torque bolt (5) to 600 to 650 in-lb (67.8 to 73.4 Nm). Lockwire bolts (5, 10,
35) using single-wire method.
(7) Connect temperature sensor assembly (EGT). Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 77-20-03-4000).
(8) Install exhaust pressure plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 76-10-04-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-50-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Exhaust Duct and Rear Engine Mount Installation (GRAPHIC
72-50-05-99B-001-A01)
5. BOLT 20. SHIM

10. BOLT 35. BOLT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-50-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
EXHAUST DUCT AND REAR ENGINE MOUNT – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the exhaust duct and rear engine mount.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-05-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean exhaust duct assembly (40, Figure 6001). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000),
(3) Clean rear engine mount (15). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method
1 or 9.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-50-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Exhaust Duct and Rear Engine Mount Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-50-05-99B-001-A01)
5. BOLT 20. SHIM

10. BOLT 35. BOLT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-50-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
EXHAUST DUCT AND REAR ENGINE MOUNT – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the exhaust duct and rear engine mount.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-05-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Exhaust Duct (Subtask 72-50-05-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect thermocouple mounting bosses for cracks. Cracks in, or adjacent to, weld fillet
are allowed up to 0.25-inch (6.4 mm) long. Refer to Figure 8001.
(2) Visually inspect forward flange for cracks.
(a) Radial cracks between bolt hole and flange bend radius are allowed.
(b) No cracks between bolt hole and flange outer edge allowed.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-50-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) Cracks which are within an area 30 degrees either side of a line perpendicular to bolt hole
centerline, as shown in Figure 8001, View A-A may be slot repaired. Refer to REPAIR
(PGBLK 72-50-05-9000).
(3) Visually inspect aft flange for cracks. No cracks allowed.
(4) Visually inspect outer exhaust duct body, inner weld joining outer shell, and ring for cracks. No
cracks allowed.
(5) Circumferential ID cracks for the entire 360 degrees are allowed if crack gap does not disrupt
airflow.
(6) Cracks in tack welds are allowed.
(7) Inspect exhaust duct flanges and body for buckling and distortion. No buckling or distortion
allowed.
(8) If inspection requirements are not met, refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-50-05-9000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-50-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Exhaust Duct Inspection and Repair (GRAPHIC 72-50-05-99B-001-A01)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.03 (0.8) ANG B 30 DEGREES
C. Inspect Rear Engine Mount (Subtask 72-50-05-200-005-A01)
(1) Inspect rear engine mount for cracks, weld cracks, and other damage. No cracks allowed.
(2) Replace rear engine mount if cracks or separated welds are evident.
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-50-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-50-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
EXHAUST DUCT AND REAR ENGINE MOUNT – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the exhaust duct and rear engine mount.



APPLICABLE.
CRES 155 filler rod (AMS 5794) Bob Martin Co., 2209-T N. Seaman
Ave, South El Monte, CA
91733-2630
Inconel 718 nickel base alloy (AMS 5832) commercially available
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-05-300-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-50-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Repair Exhaust Duct (Subtask 72-50-05-300-004-A01)
WARNING: USE APPROPRIATE CLOTHING AND PROTECTIVE GEAR TO PREVENT INJURY TO

BODY AND HANDS FROM CONTACT WITH HOT PARTS.
(1) Weld repair cracks on aft flange, bosses, and body using Inconel 718, nickel base alloy. Weld
repair cracks on forward flange using CRES 155, filler rod. Refer to AWS D17.1, Class B.
NOTE: All welding must be accomplished by qualified personnel certified to Specification
AWS D17.1 and familiar with industry techniques commonly used for welding high
temperature alloys.
(2) Perform FPI to make sure that repaired cracks are properly welded. Refer to
(3) Heat treat after weld as follows:

(a) Re-solution heat treat as follows:
1 Heat to 1,725 to 1,775°F (941 to 968°C) and hold 10 to 60 minutes depending on
section thickness.
2 Cool to room temperature at rate equivalent to air-cool or faster.
(b) Precipitation heat treat as follows:
1 Heat to 1,300 to 1,350°F (704 to 732°C) and hold for 8 hours.
2 Furnace-cool at a rate of 84 to 117°F (29 to 47°C) per hour to 1,125 to 1,175°F (607
to 635°C) and hold for 8 hours.
3 Cool to room temperature at rate equivalent to air-cool or faster.
(4) Repair buckling or distortion by cold straightening to obtain the best possible condition. After
cold straightening, perform FPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(5) Slot repair cracks in forward flange, between bolt hole and flange outer edge, using a 0.02- to
0.03-inch (0.5 to 0.8 mm) thick cutting wheel. Refer View A-A, Figure 9001.
(a) Crack must be within area 30 degrees either side of a line perpendicular to bolt hole
centerline as shown in Figure 9001.
(b) Follow existing crack line and cut from flange outer edge to bolt hole to remove cracks.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-50-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Exhaust Duct Inspection and Repair (GRAPHIC 72-50-05-99B-001-A01)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.03 (0.8) ANG B 30 DEGREES
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
72-50-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
BEARING CARRIER COMPONENTS AND TURBINE BEARING SUPPORT – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the bearing carrier components and turbine bearing support.
PN 284637-1-1 bearing puller ((mechanical) used CAGE: 06848

to remove turbine end bearing inner
race from the shouldered (main)
shaft when replacing bearing or
seal)
PN 287386-1-1 mechanical puller (used to remove CAGE: 06848

turbine bearing carrier and outer
race of bearing from support
assembly)

fixtures)

fixtures)

fixtures)

PN 298420-1 thru PN 298420-3

fixture)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

298420-1 thru PN 298420-3 shaft

fixture)


298420-2 thru PN 298420-4 shaft







APPLICABLE.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-06-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Bearing Carrier Components and Turbine Bearing Support (Subtask

72-50-06-020-004-A01)
CAUTION: HANDLING BEARING COMPONENTS MUST BE MINIMIZED. REFER TO

(5) Remove exhaust pressure plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-10-04-3000).
NOTE: Exhaust duct must be removed with EGT harness in place.
(8) Secure turbine bearing support (105, Figure 3001) with four equally spaced slave bolts. Torque
(9) Remove nuts (10) and retainer (15).
CAUTION: MAINTAIN ENGINE IN A VERTICAL POSITION (INTAKE DOWN) TO MAINTAIN
ENGAGEMENT OF CURVIC COUPLINGS.
(10) Clean end of shouldered (main) shaft to remove all dirt, coking, and other foreign matter.
NOTE: To make sure of accuracy in measuring Dimension B, the end of shouldered (main)
shaft must be thoroughly cleaned and free of all dirt, coking, and other foreign matter,
prior to taking measurement.
(11) Before loosening hexagon (main shaft) nut (5), measure and record Dimension B (stretched).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: COVER ROTATING GROUP AND END OF SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT TO

PREVENT FOREIGN OBJECTS ENTERING ENGINE.
(12) Remove roller bearing (outer race) (20, Figure 3001), keys (35), thrust ring (25), spring tension
washer (30), and bearing carrier (55) using PN 287386-1-1, mechanical puller.
NOTE: If spring tension washer (30) is broken, use a magnet to remove pieces. After removal,
reconstruct washer to make sure that all pieces have been removed. Discard washer.
NOTE: (PN 3101092-1 or PN 3101092-2) Turbine bearing must be discarded when removed
in conjunction with a hot section inspection, overhaul, or major CAM inspection.
NOTE: (PN 3108098-1) Turbine bearing must be discarded when removed in conjunction
with an overhaul or major CAM inspection.
(13) Remove turbine bearing support (105).

CAUTION: MEASURE AND RECORD THICKNESS OF SHIMS REMOVED. DO NOT MIX WITH
OTHER SHIMS.
(14) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Remove shims (110). Record
thickness of shims removed, tie-wrap, and set aside for assembly.
(15) Remove hexagon (main shaft) nut (5, Figure 3001) using PN 298420-1, shaft stretching fixture,
PN 298420-2, shaft stretching fixture, PN 298420-3, shaft stretching fixture, or PN 298420-4,
shaft stretching fixture as follows:
NOTE: Maintenance instructions for PN 298420-1 through -4, shaft stretching fixture can be
found in 72-ST-21, Special Tools Pamphlet.

LOOSENING STRETCHING SHAFT 1/4 TURN WILL PREVENT SHAFT BINDING
DURING HEXAGON (MAIN SHAFT) NUT REMOVAL.
(a) Install and tighten PN 297644-1, stretching shaft, or PN 297644-2, stretching shaft, in
turbine end of shouldered (main) shaft until fully installed (approximately 6 1/2 turns from
start of thread engagement). Then loosen stretching shaft 1/4 turn. Refer to Figure 3003.
COUPLING.

AND PN 297642-1, ADAPTER, COMPONENTS OF PN 298420-1, SHAFT
STRETCHING FIXTURE, PN 298420-2, SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE, OR
PN 298420-3, SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE.
CAUTION: (POST SB TPE331-72-0774) USE ONLY PN 297641-2, SHAFT STRETCHING

ADAPTER AND PN 297642-2, SHAFT STRETCHING ADAPTER, COMPONENTS
OF PN 298420-4, SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE.
(b) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0774) Install PN 297641-1, two-piece adapter, on aft curvic coupling.
Install packing (furnished) around two-piece adapter to hold it in place.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) (Post SB TPE331-72-0774) Install PN 297641-2, shaft stretching adapter, on aft curvic
coupling. Install packing (furnished) around two-piece adapter to hold it in place.
(d) Install PN 297643-1, socket wrench or PN 297643-2, socket wrench, on hexagon (main
shaft) nut.
(e) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0774) Install hydraulic cylinder (component of PN 295192-4, cylinder
and pump assembly), and PN 297642-1, adapter over stretching shaft, two-piece adapter,
and socket wrench.
(f) (Post SB TPE331-72-0774) Install hydraulic cylinder (component of PN 295192-4, cylinder
and pump assembly) and PN 297642-2, shaft stretching adapter over stretching shaft,
(g) Install and tighten PN 295194-6, nut, on stretching shaft until fully installed against two-piece
between nut and two-piece adapter.
fitted to cylinder bore. The piloting feature aligns the hydraulic head to the
shouldered (main) shaft. Install nut with small diameter down.
NOTE: SAFETY COVER (COMPONENT OF SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE) MUST

PERSONAL INJURY.
(h) Install PN 295195-1, fixture stretch protective cover, on hydraulic cylinder. Connect hydraulic
pump (component of PN 295192-4, cylinder and pump assembly), hose to hydraulic cylinder.
CAUTION: USE EXTREME CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT
WHILE USING SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE. A NOMINAL PRESSURE OF
5,600 PSIG (38,610 KPA) SHOULD BE ENOUGH TO LOOSEN HEXAGON
(MAIN SHAFT) NUT (5). WHEN SEPARATION BETWEEN MATING SURFACES
OF HEXAGON (MAIN SHAFT) NUT (5), ROLLER BEARING (INNER RACE),
SEAL ROTOR, OR CURVIC COUPLING IS OBSERVED, NO FURTHER
STRETCH IS REQUIRED. DO NOT EXCEED 6,100 PSIG (42,058 KPA).
(i) Apply hydraulic pressure (approximately 5,600 PSIG (38,610 kPa)) to shouldered (main)
shaft, turn socket wrench CCW to loosen hexagon (main shaft) nut (5). Simultaneously
loosen hexagon (main shaft) nut (5) and slowly decrease hydraulic pressure until hexagon
(main shaft) nut (5) is loose and hydraulic pressure is zero.
(j) Remove shaft stretching fixture from engine.
(k) Remove hexagon (main shaft) nut (5).
(16) Remove gasket (60).
(17) Remove roller bearing (inner race) (65) using PN 284637-1-1, bearing puller.
NOTE: (PN 3101092-1 or PN 3101092-2) Turbine bearing must be discarded when removed
in conjunction with a hot section inspection, overhaul, or major CAM inspection.
NOTE: (PN 3108098-1) Turbine bearing must be discarded when removed in conjunction
with an overhaul or major CAM inspection.
(18) Remove seal rotor (70), air-oil seal (75), bolts (80), and gaskets (85).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3005
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Bearing Carrier Components and Turbine Bearing Support Removal (GRAPHIC
72-50-06-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3006
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. HEXAGON (MAIN SHAFT) NUT 60. GASKET

10. NUT 65. ROLLER BEARING (INNER RACE)
15. RETAINER 70. SEAL ROTOR
20. ROLLER BEARING (OUTER RACE) 75. AIR-OIL SEAL
25. THRUST RING 80. BOLT
30. SPRING TENSION WASHER 85. GASKET
35. KEY 95. PIN
45. PIN 100. BOLT
50. PIN 105. TURBINE BEARING SUPPORT
55. BEARING CARRIER 110.
1 SHIM
NOTES:
1. Shims (110) are only used on Power Groups, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21.
Figure 3002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Shaft Stretch Measurements (GRAPHIC 72-50-06-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3007
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Stretching Shouldered (Main) Shaft (Shaft Stretching Fixture, PN 298420-4)
(30 Ton) (GRAPHIC 72-50-06-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3008
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3009
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
BEARING CARRIER COMPONENTS AND TURBINE BEARING SUPPORT – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the bearing carrier components and turbine bearing support.
depth micrometer
PN 291756-1 retaining ring guide (used to aid in CAGE: 06848

installing thrust ring and spring
washer in turbine bearing cavity)

fixtures)

fixtures)

fixtures)

PN 298420-1 thru PN 298420-3

fixture)

298420-1 thru PN 298420-3 shaft
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

fixture)


298420-2 thru PN 298420-4 shaft







APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(MIL-PRF-907)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-06-420-802-A01)
B. Install Bearing Carrier Components and Turbine Bearing Support (Subtask

72-50-06-420-004-A01)
CAUTION: MAINTAIN ENGINE IN A VERTICAL POSITION (INTAKE DOWN) TO MAINTAIN

ENGAGEMENT OF CURVIC COUPLINGS.
CAUTION: REPLACE WITH A NEW BEARING. HONEYWELL RECOMMENDS NOT INSTALLING A
CONTINUED TIME, REPAIRED, RESTORED, OR REMANUFACTURED BEARING.
NOTE: Apply Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound to threads of bolts, studs, screws,
NOTE: (PN 3101092-1 or PN 3101092-2) Install new turbine bearing if in conjunction with a hot
section inspection, overhaul, or major CAM inspection.
NOTE: (PN 3108098-1) Install a new turbine bearing if in conjunction with an overhaul or major
CAM inspection.
(1) Separate roller bearing (outer race) (20, Figure 4001) from roller bearing (inner race) (65). Set
outer race aside.
(2) Using a micrometer, measure the depth of bearing carrier (55) and record as Dimension C. Refer
to Figure 4002.
(3) Place gasket (60, Figure 4001) on air-oil seal (75), then install bolts (80) with gaskets (85) in
air-oil seal and gasket bolt holes.
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: HANDLING AIR-OIL SEALS (SEAL AND ROTOR) MUST BE MINIMIZED. PERSONNEL
MUST WEAR EITHER SYNTHETIC RUBBER GLOVES OR NYLON MESH GLOVES
WITH POLYETHYLENE PALMS AND FINGERS. IN CASE NONE OF THE ABOVE
ARE AVAILABLE, CLEAN COTTON GLOVES MUST BE WORN.
CAUTION: AIR-OIL SEAL AND SEAL ROTOR MUST BE INSTALLED DRY; DO NOT LUBRICATE.
CAUTION: INSTALL SEAL ROTOR WITH POLISHED SIDE AGAINST SEAL.
(4) Make sure that air-oil seal (75) and seal rotor (70) are dry; do not lubricate prior to installation.
Install seal (carbon seal facing up) on main shaft on top of aft curvic coupling. Place seal rotor
(polished side down) on air-oil seal (75).
(5) Apply light coat of Royco HF-825, assembly fluid to roller bearing (inner race) (65) rollers. Place
inner race with rollers on shouldered (main) shaft and push down in position against seal rotor
(7).
NOTE: Use plastic strap to hold bearing rollers on inner race until outer race is installed.
CAUTION: INSTALL NEW HEXAGON (MAIN SHAFT) NUT. DO NOT REUSE NUT REMOVED
AT DISASSEMBLY. LUBRICATE THREADS AND FACE OF NUT WITH CLEAN,
APPROVED ENGINE OIL.
CAUTION: USE ONLY CLEAN, APPROVED ENGINE OIL ON HEXAGON (MAIN SHAFT) NUT.
OTHER LUBRICANTS MAY CAUSE CORROSION.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE OF PROPER ENGAGEMENT OF CURVIC COUPLINGS.
(6) Install new hexagon (main shaft) nut (5) on shouldered (main) shaft using PN 298420-1, shaft
stretching fixture, PN 298420-2, shaft stretching fixture, PN 298420-3, shaft stretching fixture,
or PN 298420-4, shaft stretching fixture as follows:
NOTE: Maintenance instructions for PN 298420-1 through -4, shaft stretching fixture can be
found in 72-ST-21, Special Tools Pamphlet.
(a) Seat curvic coupling gaskets and curvic couplings as follows:

1 Install new hexagon (main shaft) nut (5, Figure 4001) on shouldered (main) shaft.
2 Using 1 7/16-inch boxed end wrench or socket, tighten hexagon (main shaft) nut (5)
using hand pressure.
3 If curvic couplings are not properly engaged, slightly rotate (shake) third stage turbine
rotor by hand until curvic couplings are properly seated. Repeat this procedure as
necessary until curvic couplings are properly seated.
NOTE: If shouldered (main) shaft is not flush with nut or does not protrude beyond
nut, curvic couplings are not properly engaged.
4 Loosen hexagon (main shaft) nut (5) until hand tight.

(b) Install turbine bearing support (105) to combustion chamber case. Secure with four evenly
spaced bolts. Torque bolts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(c) Loosen hexagon (main shaft) nut (5).
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(d) Using depth micrometer, measure Dimension B. Refer to Figure 4003. Record as Dimension
B (unstretched).
NOTE: To make sure of the accuracy in measuring Dimension B (unstretched), the
end of shouldered (main) shaft must be thoroughly cleaned and free of all dirt,
coking, and other foreign matter, prior to taking measurement.
(e) Remove four bolts and turbine bearing support (105, Figure 4001).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE PN 297644-2, STRETCHING SHAFT IS THREADED INTO MAIN
SHAFT UNTIL FULLY INSTALLED (APPROXIMATELY 6 1/2 TURNS). LOOSEN
STRETCHING SHAFT 1/4 TURN TO PREVENT SHAFT BINDING DURING
INSTALLATION OF MAIN SHAFT NUT.
(f) Install and tighten PN 297644-1, stretching shaft or PN 297644-2, stretching shaft in turbine
end of shouldered (main) shaft until fully installed (approximately 6 1/2 turns from start of
thread engagement). Then loosen stretching shaft 1/4 turn. Refer to Figure 4004.
COUPLING.

AND PN 297642-1, ADAPTER, COMPONENTS OF PN 298420-1, SHAFT
STRETCHING FIXTURE, PN 298420-2, SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE, OR
PN 298420-3, SHAFT STRETCHING FIXTURE.
CAUTION: (POST SB TPE331-72-0774) USE ONLY TWO-PIECE ADAPTER, PN 297641-2

AND ADAPTER, PN 297642-2, COMPONENTS OF PN 298420-4, SHAFT
STRETCHING FIXTURE.
(g) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0774) Install PN 297641-1, two-piece adapter on aft curvic coupling.
Install packing (furnished) around two-piece adapter to hold it in place.
(h) (Post SB TPE331-72-0774) Install PN 297641-2, shaft stretching adapter on aft curvic
coupling. Install packing (furnished) around two-piece adapter to hold it in place.
(i) Install PN 297643-1, socket wrench or PN 297643-2, socket wrench on hexagon (main
shaft) nut.
(j) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0774) Install hydraulic cylinder (component of PN 295192-4, cylinder
and pump assembly) and PN 297642-1, adapter over stretching shaft, two-piece adapter,
and socket wrench.
(k) (Post SB TPE331-72-0774) Install hydraulic cylinder (component of PN 295192-4, cylinder
and pump assembly) and PN 297642-2, shaft stretching adapter over stretching shaft,
(l) Install and tighten PN 295194-6, nut, on stretching shaft until fully installed against two-piece
between nut and two-piece adapter. Refer to Figure 4004.
fitted to cylinder bore. The piloting feature aligns of the hydraulic head to the
shouldered (main) shaft. Install nut with small diameter down.
UP495246
ALL Page 4005
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

PERSONAL INJURY.
(m) Install PN 295195-1, fixture stretch protective cover on hydraulic cylinder. Connect hydraulic
pump (component of PN 295192-4, cylinder and pump assembly) hose to hydraulic cylinder.
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING STEP, APPLY A NOMINAL 5,600
PSIG (38,610 KPA). DO NOT EXCEED 6,100 PSIG (42,058 KPA).
(n) Apply hydraulic pressure (approximately 5,600 PSIG (38,610 kPa)) to main shaft, turn
socket wrench CW to tighten hexagon (main shaft) nut (5). Do not exceed 6,100 PSIG
(42,058 kPa). Release applied pressure and remove shaft stretching fixture from engine.
(o) Install and secure turbine bearing support (105, Figure 4001) with four evenly spaced bolts
to combustion chamber case. Torque bolts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(p) Using a depth micrometer, measure and record Dimension B (stretched). Refer to Figure
4003.
NOTE: Use Dimension B (stretched) recorded in REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-06-3000).
However, use Dimension B only as a general reference after shaft is stretched.
The required shaft stretch is the difference between Dimension B (unstretched)
and Dimension B (stretched). The difference must be 0.057 to 0.060 inch (1.45
to 1.52 mm).
1 If the difference between Dimension B (unstretched), recorded earlier, and Dimension

B (stretched) is 0.057 to 0.060 inch (1.45 to 1.52 mm), shaft stretch is within limits.
Continue engine assembly. Refer to Paragraph 2.C. Procedures to Perform After
Stretching the Shouldered (Main) Shaft (Subtask 72-50-06-420-005-A01).
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING STEPS, APPLY A NOMINAL
5,600 PSIG (38,610 KPA). DO NOT EXCEED 6,100 PSIG (42,058 KPA).

B (stretched) is less than 0.057 inch (1.45 mm), repeat hydraulic pressure application
procedure, adding 50 PSIG (344.7 kPa) above previous pressure used until required
shaft stretch (0.057 to 0.060 inch (1.45 to 1.52 mm)) is obtained. Do not exceed 6,100
PSIG (42,058 kPa).
B (stretched) is more than 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), repeat hydraulic pressure application
procedure. Slightly loosen hexagon (main shaft) nut (5), as required, until required
shaft stretch (0.057 to 0.060 inch (1.45 to 1.52 mm)) is obtained. Refer to Figure
4003. Do not exceed 6,100 PSIG (42,058 kPa).
UP495246
ALL Page 4006
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Bearing Carrier Components and Turbine Bearing Support Installation (GRAPHIC
72-50-06-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4007
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

35. KEY 95. PIN
45. PIN 100. BOLT
1 SHIM
NOTES:
UP495246
ALL Page 4008
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Checking Seating of Support Assembly (Turbine Bearing Carrier) (GRAPHIC
72-50-06-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4009
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
ALL Page 4010
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(30 Ton) (GRAPHIC 72-50-06-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4011
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
C. Procedures to Perform After Stretching the Shouldered (Main) Shaft (Subtask

72-50-06-420-005-A01)
(1) Make sure that rotating assembly rotates freely. If interference is noted, remove and reinstall
components, as required, to make sure that bolts (80, 100, Figure 4001) seal rotor (70), and
air-oil seal (70) are correctly installed and oriented.
(2) Determine shim(s) (110) required between turbine group and turbine bearing support (105) as
follows:
NOTE: Do not perform this step unless the turbine group has been removed. Refer to
72-50-07.
(a) Remove four bolts (100) securing turbine bearing support (105) to combustion chamber
case.
(b) Remove turbine bearing support (105).
(c) Using a depth micrometer, measure the distance from the top flange of the turbine stator
housing to the top of the third stage nozzle assembly (40). Record measurement as
Dimension E. Refer to Figure 4005.
(d) Using a depth micrometer, measure the distance from the turbine bearing support (150,
Figure 4001) outer bolt flange to the inner step. Record measurement as Dimension F.
(e) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Using the following
formula, calculate the required thickness of turbine bearing support shims (110, Figure
4006) to be installed.
NOTE: (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Shims
(110) are installed to obtain a calculated expansion joint (gap) of 0.031 to 0.035
inch (0.79 to 0.89 mm) between the third stage turbine nozzle and turbine
bearing support (105).
DIM. R = Desired expansion joint (0.031 to 0.035 inch (0.79 to 0.89 mm)).
DIM. E = Determined by measuring the distance from the top flange of the turbine
stator housing to the top of the third stage nozzle assembly (40).
DIM. F = Determined by measuring the distance from the turbine bearing support
outer bolt flange to the inner step.
(R + F) - E = Shims (110) to be installed.
(f) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Install required shims
(110) on turbine group bolt flange and temporarily secure with four bolts.
(g) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Place parallel bar on
top of shims (110). Refer to Figure 4007.
NOTE: Second stage impeller at top normal running.
(h) (Power Group, PN 3103319-16, PN 3103319-20, PN 3103319-23, PN 3103319-29, PN

3103319-32, or PN 3103319-33) Place parallel bar on top of turbine stator housing. Refer
to Figure 4007.
UP495246
ALL Page 4012
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(i) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Using a , measure

and record Dimension G (from top of shims to blade platform on third stage rotor).
(j) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, PN 3103319-21, or PN 3103319-35)
Dimension G must be 0.364 to 0.374 inch (9.24 to 9.50 mm). If Dimension G is not within
these limits, determine if limits can be obtained by adding or subtracting shims (110, Figure
4006) while maintaining Dimension R (0.031 to 0.035 inch (0.79 to 0.89 mm)). If Dimension
G cannot be obtained by adjusting shims (110), add or subtract shims between turbine
stator housing and combustion chamber case. Refer to Figure 4007.
(k) (Power Group, PN 3103319-16, PN 3103319-20, PN 3103319-23, PN 3103319-29, PN
3103319-32, or PN 3103319-33) Using a , measure and record Dimension G (from top of
turbine stator housing to blade platform on third stage rotor).
(l) To install additional turbine stator housing shims (110, Figure 4006), the turbine group
must be removed. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-07-3000).
(m) Remove excess turbine stator housing shims (110) as follows:
1 Remove four bolts securing turbine group and shims (110) to combustion chamber
case.
2 Rotate engine to horizontal position.
3 Move turbine stator and rotor module assembly flange away from combustion chamber
case far enough (approximately 0.125 inch (3.18 mm)) to allow cutting and removing
excess shims (110).
4 Cut excess shim(s) at a bolt hole and remove. Discard cut shims (110).
(3) Install turbine bearing support (105, Figure 4006). Temporarily secure support with bolts at every
third hole. Torque bolts to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm).
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000), FOR HANDLING PROCEDURE.
(4) Make sure that bearing carrier is properly seated in turbine bearing support (105, Figure 4006).
NOTE: All measurements will be taken at three places 120 degrees apart.
(a) Measure Dimension B (Figure 4009) as follows:

1 Place parallel bar on turbine bearing support assembly.
2 Mark the position of parallel bar.
3 Measure Dimension B.
4 Repeat this measurement two times, 120 degrees apart.
5 Average the three measurements and record as Dimension B.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT DOWEL BEARING CARRIER PIN LOCATES IN TURBINE
BEARING SUPPORT ASSEMBLY HOLE.
(b) Install gasket (60, Figure 4006) and bearing carrier (55) over shouldered (main) shaft in
turbine bearing support (105). Align bearing carrier dowel pin with turbine bearing support
hole.
UP495246
ALL Page 4013
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) Install sufficient amount of shop spacers and washers on retaining studs to allow proper
installation of retaining nuts to secure bearing carrier (55). Install retaining nuts and torque
to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(d) Measure Dimension D (Figure 4009) as follows:
1 Place parallel bar on turbine bearing support assembly.
2 Mark the position of parallel bar.
3 Measure Dimension D.
4 Repeat this measurement two times, 120 degrees apart.
5 Average the three measurements and record as Dimension D.
(e) Using following formula, make sure of proper seating of bearing carrier.
DIM. B = Determined above.
DIM. C = Determined in Paragraph 2.B. Install Bearing Carrier Components and
Turbine Bearing Support (Subtask 72-50-06-420-004-A01).
DIM. D = Determined above.
DIM. C + DIM. D = DIM. B +/-0.002 inch (+/-0.05 mm).
C + D = B +/-0.002 inch (+/-0.05 mm).
(f) If total of Dimensions C and D does not equal Dimension B within +/-0.002 inch (+/-0.05
mm), disassemble, find, and correct cause. Repeat steps, as required, to verify proper
seating.
(g) Remove retaining nuts, washers, and shop spacers.
(5) Install washer and thrust ring (25, Figure 4006) in bearing carrier using PN 291756-1, retaining
ring guide. Position key slot on thrust ring 45 degrees CW from vertical.
(6) Install keys (35) in key slots on thrust ring (25), then install roller bearing (outer race) (20) and
retainer (15). Position retainer so the oil transfer boss is located approximately 120 degrees CW
from vertical and secure with nuts (10). Refer to Figure 4011.
(7) Align bolt scribe mark at positions shown in Figure 4011.
NOTE: Use caution to make sure that bolt heads do not bind on air-oil seal (75). Bolt (PN
865397-2) has a scribe mark on threaded end.
(8) Tighten nuts (10) on these bolts a 1/4 turn and check position of scribe mark. Continue this
procedure until bolts are tight. Torque nuts (10, Figure 4006) to 70 in-lb (7.9 Nm).
(9) Wait 30 to 45 minutes for possible coldflow of gasket, then retorque nuts (10) to 70 in-lb (7.9
Nm). Use caution during tightening of nuts to make sure that heads of bolts do not bind on seal.
(10) Apply clean, approved engine oil to bearing to remove Royco HF-825, assembly fluid.
(11) Remove bolts temporarily installed to secure turbine bearing support (105).
(12) Install exhaust duct and rear engine mount. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-05-4000).
(13) Install turbine scavenge pump assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-04-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4014
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
ALL Page 4015
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4005. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Determine

Shim Requirement For Turbine Bearing Support and Turbine Module (GRAPHIC 72-50-06-99B-005-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4016
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4006. (Sheet 1 of 1) Bearing Carrier Components and Turbine Bearing Support Installation (GRAPHIC
72-50-06-99B-007-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4017
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

35. KEY 95. PIN
45. PIN 100. BOLT
1 SHIM
NOTES:
UP495246
ALL Page 4018
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4007. (Sheet 1 of 1) Determine Turbine Bearing Support and Turbine Stator Housing Shims
(GRAPHIC 72-50-06-99B-008-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4019
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
ALL Page 4020
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4009. (Sheet 1 of 1) Checking Seating of Support Assembly (Turbine Bearing Carrier) (GRAPHIC
72-50-06-99B-010-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4021
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(30 Ton) (GRAPHIC 72-50-06-99B-011-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4022
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4011. (Sheet 1 of 1) Location of Oil Transfer Boss (GRAPHIC 72-50-06-99B-012-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4023
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
BEARING CARRIER COMPONENTS AND TURBINE BEARING SUPPORT – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the bearing carrier components and turbine bearing support.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-06-100-802-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Cleaning Methods
Figure No. Item No. Nomenclature 1 2
Figure 15 Retainer X
6001
Figure 20
1 Roller Bearing (Outer Race)
6001
Figure 25 Thrust Ring X
6001
Figure 55 Bearing Carrier X
6001
Figure 65
1 Roller Bearing (Inner Race)
6001
Figure 70 Rotor Seal X
6001
Figure 75 Air-Oil Seal X
6001
Figure 105 Turbine Bearing Support X X
6001
NOTES:
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Bearing Carrier Components and Turbine Bearing Support Cleaning (GRAPHIC
72-50-06-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

35. KEY 95. PIN
45. PIN 100. BOLT
55. BEARING CARRIER 110. SHIM
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6004
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
BEARING CARRIER COMPONENTS AND TURBINE BEARING

SUPPORT – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the bearing carrier components and turbine bearing support.


APPLICABLE.
abrasive stone commercially available
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-06-200-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Inspect Bearing Carrier Components and Turbine Bearing Support (Subtask

72-50-06-200-004-A01)

(1) Bearing carrier.
(a) Visually inspect bearing bore in bearing carrier (55, Figure 8001) for scoring, grooves, and
distortion. Scoring which does not exceed 0.005-inch (0.13 mm) depth is allowed. Refer
(b) Replace bearing carrier (55) if damage is sufficient to affect sealing.
(2) Roller (turbine) bearing.
NOTE: Install new turbine bearing, PN 3101092-2, if in conjunction with a hot section
inspection, overhaul, or major CAM inspection.
(a) Visually inspect outer diameter of bearing outer race (20) for evidence of varnishing. Refer
to Figure 8001. Thoroughly clean bearing outer race (20) and inner race (65). Refer to
(b) Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000), for bearing inspection.
NOTE: To determine the extent of any damage, 6X to 10X magnification may be used.

CAUTION: HANDLING AIR-OIL SEALS (SEAL AND ROTOR) MUST BE MINIMIZED. PERSONNEL
MUST WEAR EITHER SYNTHETIC RUBBER GLOVES OR NYLON MESH GLOVES
WITH POLYETHYLENE PALMS AND FINGERS. IN CASE NONE OF THE ABOVE
ARE AVAILABLE, CLEAN COTTON GLOVES MUST BE WORN. AIR-OIL SEAL (SEAL
AND ROTOR) MUST BE INSTALLED DRY; DO NOT LUBRICATE.
(3) Air-oil seal (75, Figure 8001) and seal rotor (70).
(a) Visually inspect carbon seal for cracks. No cracks allowed.
(b) Visually inspect carbon sealing surface for discontinuous contact (skipping). No
discontinuous contact (skipping) allowed.
(c) Visually inspect carbon sealing surface for pitting. No pitting allowed.
(d) Visually inspect carbon sealing surface for wear, scratches, and grooves. No defect that
can be felt with a 0.015-inch (0.38 mm) diameter stylus scriber allowed.
(e) Visually inspect carbon seal for coking.
1 No coking on carbon sealing surface allowed.
2 No coke buildup on carbon sealing surface ID allowed.
3 No coke buildup on carbon sealing surface outer diameter allowed.
(f) Visually inspect bellows for cracks, distortion, coking, and other deposits.
1 No cracks or distortion allowed.
2 Remove coking and other deposits. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-50-06-6000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(g) Visually inspect forward and aft sides of mounting flange for raised metal. Remove raised
metal using an abrasive stone.
(h) Using 10X magnification, inspect sealing surface and ID and outer diameter of sealing
surface for chipping. Minor chipping of ID and outer diameter is allowed if the minimum
sealing surface width is 70 percent or greater of original surface measured radially.
(i) Measure carbon sealing surface (Surface D) height. Refer to Figure 8002, Dimensions A.
Carbon sealing surface height is 0.025-inch (0.64 mm) minimum.
(j) Visually inspect carbon seal and air-oil seal (75, Figure 8001) housing for cracks and
fractures. If crack or fractures are evident, inspect second stage turbine rotor for blade
shift. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-07-8000).
(k) Visually inspect seal rotor (70) sealing surface for chipping. No chipping allowed.
(l) Visually inspect seal rotor (70) sealing surface for wear, scratches, and grooves. No visual
defects that can be felt with a 0.015-inch (0.38 mm) diameter stylus scriber allowed.
(m) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
(4) Turbine bearing retainer.
(a) Visually inspect ID of bearing retainer (15) for evidence of varnishing. Refer to CLEANING
(PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), for removal of varnishing.
(b) Visually inspect retainer (15) for cracks, nicks, and burrs. No cracks, nicks, or burrs allowed.
(c) Visually inspect Diameter C and Surface D for wear. Refer to Figure 8003. if wear is evident,
perform dimensional inspection as follows:
1 Dimension A must be 0.029 to 0.031 inches (0.74 to 0.79 mm).
2 Diameter C must be 2.1734 to 2.1744 inches (55.204 to 55.230 mm).
(d) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
(5) Turbine bearing support (105, Figure 8001).
NOTE: If the turbine bearing support (105) has two or more of the three struts cracked to
the extent that the struts are separated from the inner cone, the engine must be
returned to a Honeywell-authorized service facility for complete disassembly.
(a) FPI the turbine bearing support (105). Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
70-00-00-8000). If cracks are evident at the junction of the struts with the inner cone or at
ID cone braze joint, replace the turbine bearing support.
(b) Visually inspect bolts (80, 100), pins (45, 50, 95), nuts (10), and rivets for security.
(6) Inspect shouldered (main) shaft turbine end threads for damage.
(a) Visually inspect shouldered (main) shaft turbine end threads for damage.
(b) Repair threads. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-50-06-9000).
(c) If damage cannot be removed with a wire brush, return engine to a Honeywell-authorized
service facility for repair.
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Bearing Carrier Components and Turbine Bearing Support Components
(GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-001-R01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

35. KEY 95. PIN
45. PIN 100. BOLT
55. BEARING CARRIER 110. SHIM
Figure 8002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Seal Wear Limits (GRAPHIC 72-50-06-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8005
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Bearing Retainer (GRAPHIC 72-50-06-99B-003-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8006
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
BEARING CARRIER COMPONENTS AND TURBINE BEARING SUPPORT – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the bearing carrier components and turbine bearing support.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-06-300-802-A01)
B. Repair Bearing Carrier Components and Turbine Bearing Support (Subtask

72-50-06-300-004-A01)
(1) Polish out minor scoring on bearing carrier (55). Refer to Figure 9001.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Bearing Carrier Components and Turbine Bearing Support Repair (GRAPHIC
72-50-06-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

35. KEY 95. PIN
45. PIN 100. BOLT
1 SHIM
NOTES:
C. Repair Turbine Main Shaft (Subtask 72-50-06-300-005-A01)
(1) Repair damaged threads by brushing with a wire brush.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
72-50-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBINE GROUP ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the turbine group assembly.
propane torch commercially available
PN 284476-2-1 puller ((mechanical) used to remove CAGE: 06848

curvic coupling from exhaust end of

(used to install or remove a TPE
turbine module from unit, also used
for transporting or storage of
module)
PN 293248-1 impeller retaining dummy coupling CAGE: 06848

(used in conjunction with PN
293249-1 spacer to maintain
impeller curvic engagement when
turbine module is removed from
engine)
PN 293249-1 impeller retaining spacer (used in CAGE: 06848

conjunction with PN 293248-1
dummy coupling to maintain
engine)
PN 293410-1 turbine module holder (used to CAGE: 06848

support a partial TPE turbine
module during assembly operations
or whenever removed from power
group)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

rotors)
PN 831105-1 puller assembly (used to remove aft CAGE: 06848

curvic coupling from shouldered
(main) shaft)


APPLICABLE.
for silver pencil)
pencil)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-07-020-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Removal of Turbine Group Assembly (Subtask 72-50-07-020-004-A01)
CAUTION: PRIOR TO REMOVAL OF CURVIC COUPLING OR TURBINE WHEEL ASSEMBLIES,

MARK AN INDEX LINE USING VERITHIN NO. 753, SILVER PENCIL, VIOLET, NO. 127
1/2, INDUSTRIAL MARKING INK, OR YELLOW NO. 170T, CHINA MARKER BETWEEN
EACH COMPONENT AND MAIN SHAFT TO SHOW RELATIONSHIP. IF NO COMPONENTS
ARE REPLACED, MAKE SURE THAT EACH PART IS REINSTALLED IN SAME RELATIVE
POSITION TO MAIN SHAFT.
CAUTION: IF A TURBINE ROTATING COMPONENT IS REPLACED, THE REPLACEMENT
COMPONENT CURVIC TOOTH MARKED WITH A “V” OR “I” SHOULD BE POSITIONED
APPROXIMATELY 180 DEGREES FROM “V” OR “I” ON MATING CURVICS. THE
REMAINING COMPONENTS PREVIOUSLY MARKED SHOULD REMAIN ALIGNED WITH
EACH OTHER BUT MAY NOT ALIGN WITH MARK ON SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT.
NOTE: Curvic teeth marked with “V” or “I” indicate the high tooth. When replacing a turbine rotating
component or components, “V” or “I” tooth would be positioned approximately 180 degrees
from “V” or “I” tooth on mating curvic.
NOTE: The index line marked during disassembly on components not being replaced should
remain aligned regardless of position of “V” or “I” teeth on curvics.
NOTE: Exhaust duct must be removed with EGT harness in place.
(7) Remove bearing carrier components and turbine bearing support. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
72-50-06-3000).
CAUTION: PROTECT CURVIC COUPLINGS BY INSTALLING PLASTIC CAPS OR SIMILAR
PROTECTIVE DEVICES. SURFACES OF COUPLINGS ARE CRITICAL AND MAY
BE DAMAGED BY CARELESS HANDLING OR STORAGE. REFER TO
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000) FOR CURVIC COUPLING HANDLING
AND INSPECTION.
(8) Using Verithin No. 753, silver pencil, Violet, No. 127 1/2, industrial marking ink, or Yellow No.
170T, China marker, mark index lines from shouldered (main) shaft to curvic coupling (10, Figure
3001) and from curvic coupling to third stage turbine rotor assembly.
NOTE: When marking index lines on components during disassembly, place lines where
removal of marks are readily accessible during assembly.
(9) Remove curvic coupling (10) from shouldered (main) shaft as follows:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(a) Using a propane torch, evenly heat circumference of aft curvic coupling (10) for a maximum
of 2 minutes.
NOTE: Keep flame of torch moving around circumference of curvic coupling (10) at all
times while heating.
(b) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0774) Using PN 284476-2-1, puller, remove curvic coupling (10).
(c) (Post SB TPE331-72-0774) Using PN 831105-1, puller assembly, remove curvic coupling
(10).
INSTALLATION OF INCORRECT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET MAY ADVERSELY
AFFECT COOLING AIR-FLOW TO CRITICAL LIFE-LIMITED COMPONENTS, AND
MAY RESULT IN PREMATURE FAILURE OF THE COMPONENTS, SEVERE
DAMAGE TO HARDWARE, AND PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (15) CONTAINS FOUR HOLES
(HOLE DIAMETER 0.057 TO 0.064 INCH (1.45 TO 1.63 MM)). IF CURVIC COUPLING
GASKET (15) WITH IMPROPER NUMBER OF HOLES HAS BEEN INSTALLED IN
ENGINE, REFER TO PARAGRAPH 2.E. ACTION REQUIRED IF INCORRECT CURVIC
COUPLING GASKET HAS BEEN INSTALLED (SUBTASK 72-30-04-300-007-A01).
(10) Remove curvic coupling gasket (15). Visually inspect gasket for holes. If installed gasket does
not contain four holes (hole diameter 0.057 to 0.064 inch (1.45 to 1.63 mm)), refer to REPAIR
(PGBLK 72-50-07-9000).
BE DAMAGED BY CARELESS HANDLING OR STORAGE. REFER TO
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000) FOR CURVIC COUPLING HANDLING
AND INSPECTION.
170T, China marker, mark index line from third stage turbine rotor assembly to second stage
turbine rotor assembly. Refer to Figure 3002.
NOTE: Turbine rotor assembly is life-limited. Refer to SB TPE331-72-0476 for maximum
operating cycles.
(12) Separate third and second stage turbine rotor assemblies. Using PN 296493-1, turbine rotor
holder, remove third stage turbine rotor assembly from turbine group.
NOTE: Record number and thickness of shims (30) removed to make sure that same number
and thickness are installed at installation.
NOTE: Prior to removing turbine group, mark an index line between the combustion chamber
case and turbine stator housing at the 12 o'clock position of the engine. Make sure
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
that index line is visible on the inner and outer area of the turbine stator housing and
outer area of combustion chamber case.
use care to prevent handling damage such as dents, nicks, or bends on knife-edges.
170T, China marker, mark index lines from combustion chamber case and turbine stator housing
at the 12 o'clock position of the engine. Make sure that index line is visible on the inner and outer
area of the turbine stator housing and outer area of the combustion chamber case.
(14) Using PN 293246-1, turbine module handling fixture or PN 293246-1, turbine module handling
fixture, remove turbine group assembly.
NOTE: Remove turbine group as an assembly.
(15) Install PN 293248-1, impeller retaining dummy coupling and PN 293249-1, impeller retaining
spacer, on shouldered (main) shaft, and secure with hexagon (main shaft) nut to maintain impeller
curvic engagement while turbine is removed.
(16) Install turbine group assembly (20) on PN 293410-1, turbine module holder.
(17) Remove shims (30, Figure 3001) from combustion chamber case. Record number and thickness
of shims removed.
NOTE: Make sure that the same thickness of shims removed during disassembly are kept
together and reinstalled during assembly.

CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (20, FIGURE 3001) CONTAINS
FOUR HOLES (HOLE DIAMETER 0.057 TO 0.064 INCH (1.45 TO 1.62 MM)). IF
GASKET WITH IMPROPER NUMBER OF HOLES HAS BEEN INSTALLED IN ENGINE,
REFER TO PARAGRAPH 2.E. ACTION REQUIRED IF INCORRECT CURVIC
COUPLING GASKET HAS BEEN INSTALLED (SUBTASK 72-30-04-300-007-A01)
FOR ACTION REQUIRED.
(18) Remove curvic coupling gasket (25). If installed gasket does not contain four holes (hole diameter
0.057 to 0.064 inch (1.45 to 1.63 mm)), refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-50-07-9000) for action
required.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3005
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Group Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-001-A01)
10. CURVIC COUPLING 25. CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (FOUR

HOLES)
15. CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (FOUR 30. SHIM
HOLES)
20. TURBINE GROUP ASSEMBLY
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3006
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Group Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-002-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3007
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBINE GROUP ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the turbine group assembly.

module)

module)
PN 293248-1 impeller retaining dummy coupling CAGE: 06848

(used in conjunction with PN
293249-1 spacer to maintain
engine)
PN 293249-1 impeller retaining spacer (used in CAGE: 06848

dummy coupling to maintain
engine)
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)


APPLICABLE.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-07-420-802-A01)
B. Installation of Turbine Group Assembly (Subtask 72-50-07-420-004-A01)

NOTE: All index markings applied during removal/disassembly must be removed after serving
their purpose unless required method of assembly prevents accessibility. Remove index
marks with MIL-PRF-680, solvent.
(1) Install PN 293246-1, turbine module handling fixture or PN 293246-1, turbine module handling
fixture on turbine group assembly. Refer to Figure 4001 and Figure 4002.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET, WITH FOUR HOLES (HOLE
DIAMETER 0.057 TO 0.064 INCH (1.45 TO 1.63 MM)), IS INSTALLED IN SECOND
STAGE COMPRESSOR IMPELLER SO HOLES FACE TOWARD REAR OF ENGINE.
REFER TO PARAGRAPH 2.E. ACTION REQUIRED IF INCORRECT CURVIC
(2) Make sure that curvic coupling gasket (15, Figure 4001) with four holes (hole diameter 0.057 to
0.064 inch (1.45 to 1.63 mm)), is installed on second stage compressor impeller prior to installing
turbine group assembly (20). Make sure that holes face toward rear of engine.
(3) Shim selection.
NOTE: If no components of turbine group assembly (20) are replaced, install same number
and thickness of shims (30) as removed. No calculation is required. If components
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
of turbine group assembly (20) have been replaced, shimming calculation, to obtain
Dimension G, is required. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-06-4000).
(a) If no components have been replaced in turbine group assembly (20), install same number
and thickness of shims (30) removed.
(b) If components of turbine group assembly (20) have been replaced, install 0.035 inch (0.89
mm) of trial shims (25, Figure 4001) and calculate shim thickness, to obtain Dimension G.
Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 72-50-06-4000).
(4) Install the selected shims (30) on combustion case. Make sure that notches in shims are properly
aligned with raised areas of combustion chamber case.
(5) Remove PN 293248-1, impeller retaining dummy coupling, and PN 293249-1, impeller retaining
spacer, from shouldered (main) shaft.
(6) Install turbine group assembly (20) down over shouldered (main) shaft. Align index lines on
turbine module and combustion chamber case. Make sure that curvic coupling properly engages
second stage compressor impeller curvic coupling.
NOTE: Make sure that index lines on turbine module and combustion chamber case are
properly aligned.
(7) Remove PN 293246-1, turbine module handling fixture or PN 293246-2, turbine module handling
fixture.
(8) Install third stage turbine rotor assembly (5, Figure 4003) in turbine stator support housing. Refer
to Figure 4002
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (20) WITH FOUR HOLES (HOLE
DIAMETER 0.057 TO 0.064 INCH (1.45 TO 1.63 MM)), IS INSTALLED IN THIRD
STAGE TURBINE ROTOR ASSEMBLY SO HOLES FACE TOWARD REAR OF
ENGINE. REFER TO PARAGRAPH 2.E. ACTION REQUIRED IF INCORRECT CURVIC
(9) Install curvic coupling gasket (15, Figure 4001), with four holes (hole diameter 0.057 to 0.064
inch (1.45 to 1.63 mm)), in third stage turbine rotor assembly (5, Figure 4003). Make sure that
holes face toward rear of engine.
(10) Heat curvic coupling (10, Figure 4001), at 300°F (149°C) for 5 minutes. Install on shouldered
(main) shaft against third stage turbine rotor assembly (5, Figure 4003). Align index lines on
curvic coupling and third stage turbine rotor assembly (5).
NOTE: Make sure that index lines on curvic coupling and third stage turbine rotor assembly
(5) are properly aligned.
(11) Install bearing support assembly components and turbine bearing support. Refer to
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Group Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-001-A01)

HOLES)
HOLES)
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
ALL Page 4005
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Group Assembly (Partial Breakdown) (Third Stage Turbine Nozzle
and Turbine Rotor Assembly) (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-003-A01)
5. THIRD STAGE TURBINE ROTOR 30. SPACER

ASSEMBLY
15. RIVET 35. SEAL ASSEMBLY
20. UPPER RETAINER 40. THIRD STAGE TURBINE NOZZLE
ASSEMBLY
25. LOWER RETAINER 45. CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (EIGHT
HOLES)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4006
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBINE GROUP ASSEMBLY – DISASSEMBLY
(1) Use these procedures to disassemble the turbine group assembly.
PN 293265-1 seal plate holder and driver (used CAGE: 06848

to assemble curvic coupling shaft
and seal assembly)
PN 293268-1 tube installing and extracting tool CAGE: 06848

(used to install or remove cooling
air tube from the first stage turbine
stator)

rotors)
PN 296494-1 special wrench (used in conjunction CAGE: 06848

with standard torque wrench to
install or remove nuts securing first
stage nozzle to stator housing)
PN 298415-1 rotor blade retainer (used to retain CAGE: 06848

rotor blades in rotor disk when rotor
assembly is removed)
UP495246
ALL Page 5001
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)


APPLICABLE.
for silver pencil)
pencil)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-07-030-802-A01)
B. Disassembly of Turbine Group Assembly (Subtask 72-50-07-030-004-A01)

PROTECTIVE DEVICES. SURFACES OF COUPLINGS ARE CRITICAL AND MAY BE
DAMAGED BY CARELESS HANDLING OR STORAGE.
CAUTION: REFER TO INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000), FOR CURVIC COUPLING
HANDLING AND INSPECTION.
(1) Remove third stage turbine nozzle and rotor assemblies. Refer to Figure 5001.
NOTE: Turbine rotor assembly is life-limited. Refer to SB TPE331-72-0476 for maximum

operating cycles.
(a) Third stage rotor assembly was removed in REMOVAL (PGBLK 72-50-07-3000).
UP495246
ALL Page 5002
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

INJURY OR DEATH.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET CONTAINS EIGHT HOLES
(HOLE DIAMETER 0.097 TO 0.102 INCH (2.46 TO 2.59 MM)). IF INCORRECT
(b) Remove curvic coupling gasket (45, Figure 5002) from first stage turbine rotor assembly
(5, Figure 5003). If installed gasket does not contain eight holes (hole diameter 0.097 to
0.102 inch (2.46 to 2.59 mm)), refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-50-07-9000) for action required.
(c) Remove third stage nozzle assembly (40, Figure 5002).
(d) Do not remove rivets (15), seal assembly (35), spacer (30), or retainers (20, 25) from third
stage nozzle assembly (40) unless damage is evident. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK
(PGBLK 72-50-07-8000).
(2) Remove the second stage turbine rotor assembly (5, Figure 5004) and the nozzle assembly
(15).
NOTE: Turbine rotor assemblies are life-limited. Refer to SB TPE331-72-0476 for maximum
operating cycles.
NOTE: When components with knife-edge seals are removed from engine, use care to
prevent any handling damage such as dents, nicks, or bends on knife-edges.

PROTECTIVE DEVICES. SURFACES OF COUPLINGS ARE CRITICAL AND
MAY BE DAMAGED BY CARELESS HANDLING OR STORAGE.
CAUTION: REFER TO INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000), FOR CURVIC

COUPLING HANDLING AND INSPECTION.
(a) Using Verithin No. 753, silver pencil, Violet, No. 127 1/2, industrial marking ink, or Yellow
No. 170T, China marker, mark an index line from second stage turbine rotor assembly to
first stage turbine rotor assembly. Refer to Figure 5001.
(b) Using PN 296493-1, turbine rotor holder, separate the second turbine stage rotor assembly
(5, Figure 5004) from first stage turbine rotor assembly (5, Figure 5003). Remove second
stage turbine rotor assembly from turbine module.
(c) Using Verithin No. 753, silver pencil, Violet, No. 127 1/2, industrial marking ink, or Yellow
No. 170T, China marker, mark an index line from aft side (TE vane) of second stage turbine
nozzle assembly to previously marked index line on turbine stator housing. Refer to Figure
5001.
(d) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Remove second stage
turbine nozzle assembly (15, Figure 5004).
UP495246
ALL Page 5003
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(e) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Remove nozzle

segments (5, Figure 5005), deflector (15), and seal assembly (10).
(f) (Power Group, PN 3103319-16, PN 3103319-20, PN 3103319-23, PN 3103319-29, PN
3103319-32, or PN 3103319-33) Remove bolts (20, Figure 5004), key washers (25) and
retention pins (30). Remove second stage turbine nozzle assembly (35) and ring seal (40).
INJURY OR DEATH.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (45) CONTAINS 15 HOLES
(EACH SIDE) (HOLE DIAMETER 0.097 TO 0.0102 INCH (2.46 TO 0.259 MM)).
IF GASKET WITH IMPROPER NUMBER OF HOLES HAS BEEN INSTALLED
IN ENGINE, REFER TO PARAGRAPH 2.E. ACTION REQUIRED IF INCORRECT
CURVIC COUPLING GASKET HAS BEEN INSTALLED (SUBTASK
72-30-04-300-007-A01).
(g) Remove curvic coupling gasket (45, Figure 5004) from first stage turbine rotor assembly.
If installed gasket does not contain 15 holes (each side) (hole diameter 0.097 to 0.0102
inch (2.46 to 0.259 mm)), refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-50-07-9000) for action required.
BE DAMAGED BY CARELESS HANDLING OR STORAGE.
CAUTION: REFER TO INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000), FOR CURVIC COUPLING

HANDLING AND INSPECTION.
(3) Remove first stage turbine nozzle and rotor assemblies. Refer to Figure 5001 and Figure 5003
through Figure 5007.
NOTE: Turbine rotor assemblies are life-limited. Refer to SB TPE331-72-0476 for maximum
operating cycles.
NOTE: When components with knife-edge seals are removed from engine, use care to
prevent any handling damage such as dents, nicks, or bends on knife-edges.
(a) Using Verithin No. 753, silver pencil, Violet, No. 127 1/2, industrial marking ink, or Yellow
No. 170T, China marker, mark index line from first stage turbine rotor assembly (5, Figure
5003) to the rotating air seal and coupling assembly (15).
(b) Separate first stage turbine rotor assembly (5) from rotating air seal and coupling assembly
(15).
(c) Remove the first stage turbine rotor assembly (5).
(d) Install PN 298415-1, rotor blade retainer on first stage turbine rotor assembly (5).
UP495246
ALL Page 5004
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

INJURY OR DEATH.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (10) CONTAINS NO HOLES.
IF GASKET WITH IMPROPER NUMBER OF HOLES HAS BEEN INSTALLED
IN ENGINE, REFER TO PARAGRAPH 2.E. ACTION REQUIRED IF INCORRECT
CURVIC COUPLING GASKET HAS BEEN INSTALLED (SUBTASK
72-30-04-300-007-A01).
(e) Remove curvic coupling gasket (10) and rotating air seal and coupling assembly (15). If
installed gasket has any holes, refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-50-07-9000) for action required.
(f) If rotating air seal and coupling assembly (15) does not have cooling holes, discard rotating
air seal and coupling assembly. Refer to Figure 5006. For further instructions regarding
replacement of other components, contact Honeywell International Inc., Distribution Center,
(g) Using PN 296494-1, special wrench, remove bolts (20, Figure 5003), nuts (25), and turbine
stator support housing (30) from first stage turbine nozzle assembly (50).
(h) Remove seal ring (45), metal ring seal (35) and first stage shroud segments (40). Discard
segments with erosion exceeding limits in INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-50-07-8000).
(i) Disassemble rotating air seal and coupling assembly (15) as follows:
NOTE: Rotating air seal is life-limited. Refer to SB TPE331-72-0476 for maximum
operating cycles.
If inspection of rotating air seal and coupling assembly reveals no damage,
proceed to the step below. If rotating air seal and coupling assembly is damaged
or exceeds cycle life-limits, disassemble as outlined in this step.

1 Place assembled rotating air seal and coupling assembly in oven preheated to 350°F
(177°C) for 10 minutes. Remove assembly from oven.
2 Place rotating air seal and coupling assembly in PN 293265-1, seal plate holder and
driver (View B, Figure 5007).
3 Using standard arbor press, press splined coupling half (20, Figure 5008) from rotating
air seal (5).
4 Remove PN 293265-1, seal plate holder and driver. Refer to Figure 5007.
5 If applicable, remove shim (8, Figure 5008).
(j) Disassemble first stage nozzle assembly as follows:
1 Remove nuts (10, Figure 5009) and bolts (15), then separate stator support (20) and
transition liner (25).
2 Remove nuts (30), bolts (35), baffle (50), and housing piston ring (55).
UP495246
ALL Page 5005
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
3 Remove stator pins (60) and nozzle segments (70). Using PN 293268-1, tube installing
and extracting tool, remove cooling air tubes (65) from nozzle segments (70).

UP495246
ALL Page 5006
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
HOLES)
UP495246
ALL Page 5007
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Group Assembly (Partial Breakdown) (First Stage Turbine Nozzle and
Rotor Assemblies) (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 5008
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. FIRST STAGE TURBINE ROTOR 32. TURBINE STATOR SUPPORT HOUSING

ASSEMBLY
10. CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (NO 35. METAL RING SEAL
HOLES)
15. ROTATING AIR SEAL AND COUPLING 40. FIRST STAGE SHROUD SEGMENT
ASSEMBLY
20. BOLT 45. SEAL RING
25. NUT 50. FIRST STAGE TURBINE NOZZLE
ASSEMBLY
30. TURBINE STATOR SUPPORT HOUSING
UP495246
ALL Page 5009
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Group Assembly (Partial Breakdown) (Second Stage Turbine Nozzle
and Rotor Assemblies) (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 5010
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. SECOND STAGE TURBINE ROTOR 30. RETENTION PIN

ASSEMBLY
10. SECOND STAGE SHROUD SEGMENT 35. SECOND STAGE TURBINE NOZZLE
ASSEMBLY
15. SECOND STAGE TURBINE NOZZLE 40. RING SEAL
ASSEMBLY
20. BOLT 45. CURVIC COUPLING GASKET (15 HOLES)
25. KEY WASHER
UP495246
ALL Page 5011
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5005. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8 or PN 3103319-11) Turbine Group Assembly
(Partial Breakdown) (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-005-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 5012
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NOZZLE SEGMENT 15. DEFLECTOR

10. SEAL ASSEMBLY
Figure 5006. (Sheet 1 of 1) Rotating Air Seal and Coupling Assembly Cooling Hole Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-006-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 5013
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5007. (Sheet 1 of 1) Rotating Air Seal and Coupling Assembly (Assembly/Disassembly) (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-007-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 5014
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5008. (Sheet 1 of 1) Rotating Air Seal and Coupling Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-008-A01)
5. ROTATING AIR SEAL 15. ANTI-ROTATION PIN

8. SHIM 20. SPLINED COUPLING HALF
UP495246
ALL Page 5015
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5009. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Nozzle Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-009-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 5016
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
10. NUT 45. ANTI-ROTATION PIN

15. BOLT 50. BAFFLE
20. STATOR SUPPORT 55. HOUSING PISTON RING
25. TRANSITION LINER 60. STATOR PIN
30. NUT 65. COOLING AIR TUBE
35. BOLT 70. NOZZLE SEGMENT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 5017
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBINE GROUP ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the turbine group assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-07-100-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 6001
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: DO NOT IMMERSE TRANSITION LINER WITH TBC IN SOLUTIONS CONTAINING SODIUM
OR POTASSIUM. SOLUTIONS SUCH AS ALKALINE CLEANERS, RUST STRIPPERS
AND SODIUM HYDROXIDE CAN PENETRATE THROUGH THE TBC AND DAMAGE THE
BOND COAT BETWEEN THE BARRIER COATING AND THE BASE METAL.
NOTE: Table 6003 provides references to recommended cleaning methods located in
Cleaning Methods
Figure 5 Curvic Coupling X
6001
Figure 15, 25 Curvic Coupling Gasket X
6001
Figure 5 Third Stage Turbine Rotor X
6002 Assembly
Figure 40 Nozzle X
6002
Figure 45 Curvic Coupling Gasket X
6002
Figure 5 Second Stage Turbine X
6003 Rotor Assembly
Figure 10 Second Stage Shroud X
6003 Segment
Figure 15, 35 Second Stage Turbine X X
6003 Nozzle Assembly
Figure 40 Ring Seal X X
6003
6003
Figure 5 First Stage Turbine Rotor X
6004 Assembly
6004
Figure 15 Rotating Air Seal and X
6004 Coupling Assembly
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Table 6003. Cleaning Methods (Cont)
Cleaning Methods
Figure 30, 32 Turbine Stator Support X
6004 Housing
Figure 35 Metal Ring Seal X
6004
Figure 40 First Stage Shroud X
6004 Segment
Figure 5 Rotating Air Seal X
6005
Figure 20 Splined Coupling-Half X
6005
Figure 20 Stator Support X X
6006
Figure 25 Transition Liner X X
6006
Figure 50 Inner Baffle X X
6006
Figure 55 Piston Ring Housing X X
6006
Figure 60 Stator Pin X X
6006
Figure 65 Cooling Air Tube X X
6006
Figure 70 Nozzle Segment X X
6006
UP495246
ALL Page 6003
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Group Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-001-A01)

HOLES)
HOLES)
UP495246
ALL Page 6004
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
HOLES)
UP495246
ALL Page 6005
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
ALL Page 6006
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
25. KEY WASHER
UP495246
ALL Page 6007
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
ALL Page 6008
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
HOLES)
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY

UP495246
ALL Page 6009
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

15. BOLT 50. BAFFLE
UP495246
ALL Page 6010
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6011
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBINE GROUP ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the turbine group assembly.


APPLICABLE.
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-07-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect (Aft) Curvic Coupling (Subtask 72-50-07-200-004-A01)
(1) Inspect and repair curvic coupling teeth. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
C. Inspect Curvic Coupling Gaskets (Subtask 72-50-07-200-005-A01)
(1) Visually inspect for nicks, deformation, cracks, hanging burrs, kinks, and other damage.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Visually inspect for evidence of positive contact of gasket lips which mate with curvics. No visible
leakage paths allowed.
(3) Measure height of gasket at lowest point. If lowest point cannot be determined visually, measure
gasket height at eight places, approximately 45 degrees apart. Minimum height of gasket must
be 0.212 inch (5.38 mm).
(4) Replace gasket if it does not meet inspection requirements.
D. Inspect Third Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly (Subtask 72-50-07-200-006-A01)
CAUTION: METAL DEPOSITS FROM TURBINE SECTION COMPONENTS ON TURBINE ROTOR

HAVE CAUSED LOSS OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES. REUSE IS NOT APPROVED OF
TURBINE ROTORS THAT HAVE BEEN SUBJECTED TO THE METAL DEPOSIT DUE TO
EXPOSURE TO HIGH TEMPERATURE BECAUSE OF THE FOLLOWING:
• ENGINE DECELERATION (BOGDOWN) 55 PERCENT RPM OR BELOW
• OVER TEMPERATURE ABOVE THE START LIMIT OUTLINED IN TESTING (PGBLK
72-00-00-13000).
NOTE: If engine has been subjected to third stage stator vane burn-through, third stage turbine
rotor assembly must be discarded.
(1) Inspect third stage turbine rotor blades for metal deposits.
(a) Removal of metal deposits from turbine rotor is not approved.
(b) Reuse of turbine rotor subjected to metal deposits is not allowed.
Particular attention must be given to Surfaces A, B, and C. Refer to Figure 8001.
(3) Inspect turbine rotor rim as follows:
(a) Visually inspect LE rim for damage. Refer to Figure 8001, Surface A. Repair damaged
area. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-50-07-9000). Repair must not exceed 0.040-inch (1.02
mm) deep after blending.
(b) Visually inspect TE rim (Surface B) and area between blades (Surface C) for damage. No
damage allowed.
(4) Inspect and repair curvic coupling teeth. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(5) Inspect blades for damage on LE and TE as follows:
(a) Visually inspect Area A for damage. Repair damaged area. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
72-50-07-9000). Repair must not exceed 0.0625-inch (1.588 mm) deep after blending.
(b) Visually inspect Area B for damage. Repair damaged area. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
(c) Visually inspect Area C for damage. Repair damaged area. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
(d) Visually inspect Area D for damage. Repair damaged area. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
72-50-07-9000). Repair must not exceed 0.030-inch (0.76 mm) deep after blending. Only
one repair is allowed per blade and only five blades may be repaired per turbine rotor
assembly.
(6) Perform dimensional inspection of rotating knife seals. Refer to Figure 8003.
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Diameter A must be 3.769 to 3.775 inches (95.73 to 95.88 mm).

(b) Diameter D must be 3.649 to 3.655 inches (92.68 to 92.84 mm).
(c) Diameter E must be 3.529 to 3.535 inches (89.64 to 89.79 mm).
(d) (PN 3103838-2) Diameter J must be 3.555 to 3.561 inches (90.30 to 90.45 mm).
(7) Inspect blades for erosion by measuring the blade tip cord length (Dimension F, Figure 8004).
Dimension F must not be less than 0.900 inch (22.86 mm).
(8) Blend LE to normal blade contour to remove raised metal with subsequent check balance.
(9) Inspect gap between knife seal and rotor shoulder.
(a) Gap 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) or less is allowed.
(b) If gap is between 0.010 and 0.050 inch (0.25 and 1.27 mm), refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
72-50-07-9000).
(c) If gap exceeds 0.050 inch (1.27 mm), seal assembly must be replaced. Return turbine
rotor assembly to a Honeywell-authorized service facility for repair.
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Inspection of Third Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8004
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Third Stage Turbine Rotor Blade Inspection and Repair (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8005
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. E 0.20 (5) DIM. G 0.20 (5)
RAD F 0.3 (7.6)
UP495246
ALL Page 8006
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Third Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8007
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Third Stage Turbine Rotor Blade Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8008
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
E. Inspect Third Stage Turbine Nozzle Seal (Subtask 72-50-07-200-007-A01)
(1) Visually inspect honeycomb for brazed joint separation, missing pieces, and other damage which
could cause seal assembly (35, Figure 8005) to leak.
(2) Visually inspect honeycomb ID for rotating knife wear. Wear grooves must not exeed 0.030-inch
(0.76 mm) deep, measured from unworn surface.
(3) Visually inspect seal wear grooves. Adjacent grooves must not have connecting paths. No wear
grooves within 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) of seal edge allowed.
(4) Radial movement of the honeycomb seal relative to the third stage turbine nozzle housing allowed
up to 0.014 inch (0.36 mm), if all rivets are properly secured.
(5) Visually inspect seal housing for cracks. If cracks are suspected, perform FPI. Refer to
UP495246
ALL Page 8009
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
25. LOWER RETAINER 45. CURVIC COUPLING GASKET
(EIGHT HOLES)
F. Inspect Third Stage Turbine Nozzle Assembly (Subtask 72-50-07-200-008-A01)
(1) Buckling at the TE of each vane is allowed if it does not deviate more than 0.100 inch (2.54 mm)
from normal contour of each vane. Refer to Figure 8006.
(2) Maximum allowable erosion depth is shown in Figure 8006, Detail C.
(3) No LE or TE nicks or dents more than 0.020-inch (0.51 mm) deep allowed. Refer to REPAIR
(PGBLK 72-50-07-9000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8010
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(4) LE corrosion/sulfidation on full length of vanes may be hand finished if damage is not more than
0.075 inch (1.90 mm) deep.
(5) Visually inspect for cracks as follows:
(a) No inner band cracks (1) more than 0.250 inch (6.35 mm) allowed. Refer to Figure 8006.
(b) No outer band cracks (2) more than 0.250 inch (6.35 mm) allowed.
(c) Two TE cracks (3) are allowed in each vane if:
1 Cracks originate at TE.
2 Cracks do not intersect and are not on intersecting plane with another crack.
3 Crack does not exceed 0.150 inch (3.81 mm) with six cracks maximum per assembly.
(d) Inner casting TE cracks (4) are allowed if crack is not more than 0.100 inch (2.54 mm).
(e) Two LE cracks (5) are allowed in each vane if:
1 Cracks originate at LE.
2 Cracks do not intersect and are not on intersecting plane with another crack.
3 Crack does not exceed 0.150 inch (3.81 mm) with six cracks maximum per assembly.
(6) No blade shroud rub must be more than 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) deep. No rub through at an arc
greater than 90 degrees allowed.
(7) No shroud metal deposit greater than 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) above the shroud surface allowed.
(8) Visually inspect stator assembly for evidence of turbine wheel blade tip rub. If rub indications
are present, remove raised metal and sharp edges by lightly hand finishing.
(9) Inspect stator vanes for burn-through. No stator burn-through allowed. Burn-through is defined
as any vane material loss that allows sight through stator vanes when viewed parallel to engine
center line. Refer to Figure 8007.
(10) If inspection reveals stator vane burn-through, third stage turbine rotor assembly must be replaced
and removed rotor must be discarded.
(11) Replace third stage turbine nozzle assembly if it does not meet inspection requirements.
UP495246
ALL Page 8011
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8006. (Sheet 1 of 1) Third Stage Turbine Nozzle Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-006-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8012
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.075 (1.9) DIM. C 0.100 (2.5)
DIM. B 0.150 (3.8)
Figure 8007. (Sheet 1 of 1) Third Stage Turbine Stator Vane Burn-Through (Typical) (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-007-A01)
G. Inspect Second Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly (Subtask 72-50-07-200-009-A01)
NOTE: If engine has been subjected to second stage nozzle vane burn-through, second stage
turbine rotor blades must be removed and discarded. Return second stage turbine rotor
to manufacturer for reblading. Use address listed under metal deposit inspection.
CAUTION: METAL DEPOSITS FROM TURBINE SECTION COMPONENTS ON TURBINE ROTOR
BLADES HAVE CAUSED LOSS OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES. REUSE IS NOT
APPROVED OF TURBINE ROTOR BLADES THAT HAVE BEEN SUBJECTED TO
THE METAL DEPOSITS DUE TO EXPOSURE TO HIGH TEMPERATURE BECAUSE
OF THE FOLLOWING:
• ENGINE DECELERATION (BOGDOWN) 55 PERCENT RPM OR BELOW
• OVER TEMPERATURE ABOVE THE START LIMIT OUTLINED IN TESTING
(PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
(1) Inspect turbine rotor blades for metal deposits.

(a) Removal of metal deposits from turbine rotor blades not approved.
UP495246
ALL Page 8013
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(b) Reuse of turbine rotor blades subjected to metal deposits not allowed.
(c) Return second stage turbine rotor to manufacturer to have blades replaced. Send rotor to
Honeywell International Inc., Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ
85034-3440.
(2) Make sure that precleaned turbine rotor is free of oil, carbon, etc. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK
72-50-07-6000). Perform FPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). No
cracks allowed.
(3) Visually inspect curvic coupling teeth. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(4) Inspect LE and TE of blades for an indication of blade shift. If there is any indication of blade
contact with adjacent stator, perform second stage turbine rotor blade shift inspection
requirements. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 72-00-00-8000).
NOTE: Blade shift is defined as blade LE or TE, contact (rub) with adjacent stator.
NOTE: The blade shift inspection is not required if rotor has blade tip rub or light platform
rub of 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) or less.
(5) Inspect blades for erosion by measuring the blade tip chord length. Refer to Figure 8008. Minimum
blade tip chord length (Dimension C) must not be less than 0.965 inch (24.51 mm).
(6) Visually inspect turbine blades for cracks. No cracks allowed.
(7) Visually inspect blades for tip rub. Rubbing of blade tip that eliminates the forward or aft indicator
notch is not allowed. Displaced metal and feathered edges caused by tip rub must be removed
by stoning. Refer to Figure 8008.
(8) Inspect blades for damage on LE and TE. Refer to Figure 8009. Maximum allowable damage
depth is 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) on LE and TE. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-50-07-9000).
(9) Visually inspect blades. Blistered coating and hot gas corrosion not allowed. Light sulfidation
(pitting less than 0.006 inch (0.15 mm)) is acceptable on the blade platform. Identification markings
found on the blade platform surface (up to 0.010-inch (0.25 mm) depth) may be used as a
reference to determine the depth of the pitting. No sulfidation pitting allowed on the airfoil surface.
(10) Chipped coating adjacent to tip edges is allowed. No lifting of the coating from base metal
allowed.
(11) Inspect blades for axial movement. Movement must not exceed 0.012 inch (0.30 mm). If
movement exceeds 0.012 inch (0.30 mm), return rotor assembly for repair to Honeywell
(12) Perform dimensional inspection of rotating knife seals. Diameter L must be 3.925 to 3.931 inches
(99.70 to 99.85 mm). Refer to Figure 8010.
(13) Replace second stage rotor assembly if it does not meet inspection requirements.
UP495246
ALL Page 8014
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8008. (Sheet 1 of 1) Second Stage Turbine Rotor Blade Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-008-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8015
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8009. (Sheet 1 of 1) Second Stage Turbine Rotor Blade Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-009-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8016
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.20 (5.1) RAD B 0.30 (7.6)
Figure 8010. (Sheet 1 of 1) Second Stage Turbine Rotor Knife Seals Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-010-A01)
H. Inspect Second Stage Turbine Shroud Segment (Subtask 72-50-07-200-010-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8017
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Visually inspect for evidence of blade tip rub. If blade tip rub is evident, perform FPI. Refer to
(3) Visually inspect Surface B for wear. Refer to Figure 8011. Maximum wear at any point is 0.0087
inch (0.221 mm) deep. Remove any raised metal by hand finishing.
(4) Perform dimensional inspection for Dimension A. Dimension A must not exceed 0.090 inch (2.29
mm).
(5) Visually inspect Surface D for wear step. Wear step must not exceed 0.003 inch (0.08 mm)
deep.
Figure 8011. (Sheet 1 of 1) Second Stage Turbine Shroud Segment Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-011-A01)
I. (Power Group, PN 3103319-8 or PN3103319-11) Inspect Second Stage Turbine Nozzle Assembly
(Segmented) (Subtask 72-50-07-200-011-A01)
(1) Visually inspect nozzle segments for warpage, distortion, and other damage. No warpage,
distortion, or other damage allowed, except as follows:
(2) Visually inspect nozzle segments for cracks as follows:
(a) Area 1 – LE outer diameter fillet: Multiple cracks are allowed on each vane. Longest crack
must not exceed 0.10 inch (2.5 mm). Refer to Figure 8012.
(b) Area 2 – LE midspan: Two cracks maximum are allowed on vane. Each crack must not
(c) Area 3 – TE outer diameter: Multiple cracks are allowed on each vane. Longest crack must
(d) Area 4 – TE midspan: One crack maximum is allowed on vane. Crack must not exceed
0.30 inch (7.6 mm). Refer to Figure 8012. Detail D.
(e) Area 5 – Outer band: One crack maximum is allowed on vane. Crack must not exceed
0.10 inch (2.5 mm).
(f) Area 6 – Inner band aft side: Crack are allowed. Cracks must not exceed 0.50 inch (12.7
mm).
UP495246
ALL Page 8018
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Visually inspect rear platform for rub marks. Refer to Figure 8012. If there is evidence of rubbing,
refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-50-07-9000).
(4) Visually inspect nozzle segment vanes for burn-through. Refer to Figure 8013. No vane
burn-through allowed. If burn-through exists, remove second stage turbine rotor blades and
discard. Return second stage turbine rotor assembly for reblading to Honeywell International
Inc., Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440.
NOTE: Burn-through is anywhere vane material loss that allows sight through nozzle vane
segments when viewed parallel to engine centerline.
(5) Inspect seal assembly.

(a) Visually inspect honeycomb for brazed joint separation, missing pieces, and other damage
which could cause seal to leak.
(b) Visually inspect honeycomb ID for rotating knife wear. Wear grooves must not exceed
0.030 inch (0.76 mm) deep, measured from unworn surface.
(c) Visually inspect seal wear grooves. Adjacent grooves must not have connecting paths. No
wear grooves within 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) of seal edge are allowed.
(d) Radial movement of the honeycomb seal relative to the third stage turbine nozzle housing
is allowed up to 0.014 inch (0.36 mm), if all rivets are properly secured.
(e) Visually inspect seal housing for cracks. If cracks are suspected, perform FPI. Refer to
(f) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirements.
UP495246
ALL Page 8019
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8012. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8 or PN 3103319-11) Second Stage Turbine Nozzle
Assembly (Segmented) Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-012-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8020
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8013. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8 or PN 3103319-11) Second Stage Turbine Nozzle
Segment Burn-Through (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-013-A01)
J. (Power Group, PN 3103319-16, PN 3103319-20, PN 3103319-23, PN 3103319-29, PN 3103319-32,

or PN 3103319-33) Inspect Second Stage Nozzle Assembly (Subtask 72-50-07-200-012-A01)
(1) Visually inspect for cracks as follows:

(a) Intersecting cracks are allowed if one or both of the cracks are surface cracks and they
are not more than 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) apart at any point. Refer to Figure 8014, Figure 8015,
and Figure 8016.
NOTE: Surface cracks are defined as cracks which do not indicate to be through to the
opposing surface.
(b) No adjacent cracks which are more than 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) apart are allowed if they would
intersect after progressing twice their existing length.
(c) Area Location 1 – LE outer diameter and airfoil fillet (Figure 8014): Multiple cracks up to
0.10 inch (2.5 mm) are allowed on each vane.
(d) Area Location 2 – Airfoil LE midspan: Multiple surface cracks are allowed. One through-wall
crack up to 0.20 inch (5.1 mm) or two through-wall cracks whose total length does not
exceed 0.20 inch (5.1 mm) are allowed.
UP495246
ALL Page 8021
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(e) Area Location 3 – TE outer diameter and airfoil fillets: Multiple cracks up to 0.10 inch (2.5
mm) are allowed. Eight vanes may have cracks up to 0.15 inch (3.8 mm) in length, but no
two may exist on same inner band segment.
(f) Area Location 4 – Airfoil TE midspan (Figure 8014, Detail D): Multiple surface cracks are
allowed. One through-wall crack not exceeding 0.25 inch (6.4 mm) is allowed.
(g) Area Location 5 – Outer band (Figure 8016): One crack allowed in each vane segment.
No crack can exceed 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) and no more than five locations.
(h) Area Location 6 – LE ID and airfoil fillet (Figure 8014): Multiple cracks up to 0.10 inch (2.5
mm) are allowed in each vane.
(i) Area Location 7 – Inner band LE and TE: Multiple surface cracks are allowed. One
through-wall crack per inner band segment not exceeding 0.15 inch (3.8 mm) in a maximum
of five inner band segments.
(j) Area Location 8 – Outer band support bosses (Figure 8016, View A): Multiple surface
cracks are allowed at or adjacent to boss fillet and may converge. Circumferential cracks
aft of boss in small web region not exceeding 0.20 inch (5.1 mm) (Dimension Y) are allowed
if the two adjacent webs are not cracked.
(k) Area Location 9 – LE and outer band (Figure 8014): Multiple surface cracks and one
through-wall crack extending from LE to Surface A are allowed if the circumferential
propagation at fillet radius is less than 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). Four multiple crack regions are
allowed if each crack region is separated by at least 1.50 inches (38.1 mm).
(l) Area Location 10 – LE outer diameter radial flange: No cracks allowed on Surface A.
Multiple surface cracks on Surface B and it's fillet to the outer band are allowed. Surface
cracks are allowed to converge.
(2) Inspect for TE buckling. Refer to Figure 8014, View A-A. Buckling at the TE of each vane is
allowed, if it does not deviate more than 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) from normal contour of each vane.
(3) Inspect vane LE as follows:
(a) Erosion is allowed on outer area if it does not exceed 0.150 inch (3.81 mm) radially and
0.075 inch (1.91 mm) axially on one vane per inner band segment.
(b) Hot corrosion/sulfidation on full length of blade may be hand finished if damage does not
(4) Visually inspect second stage turbine nozzle seal as follows:
(a) Visually inspect honeycomb for brazed joint separation, missing pieces, and other damage
which could cause seal to leak. Refer to Figure 8014.
(b) Visually inspect honeycomb ID for rotating knife wear. Wear grooves must not exceed
0.030 inch (0.76 mm) deep, measured from unworn surface.
(c) Visually inspect seal wear grooves. Adjacent grooves must not have connecting paths. No
wear grooves within 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) of seal edge allowed.
(d) Visually inspect seal housing for cracks. If cracks are suspected, perform FPI. Refer to
(5) Visually inspect nozzle vanes for burn-through. Refer to Figure 8017. No vane burn-through is
allowed. If burn-through exists, remove second stage turbine blades and discard. Return second
UP495246
ALL Page 8022
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
stage turbine for reblading to Honeywell International Inc., Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky
Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440.
NOTE: Burn-through is anywhere vane material loss that allows sight through nozzle vane
segments when viewed parallel to engine centerline.
(6) Visually inspect vanes for molten flow from overtemp, as indicated by localized increase in vane
thickness. None is allowed.
(7) Visually inspect rear platform for rub marks. If rub is indicated, refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
72-50-07-9000). Refer to Figure 8018.
(8) Visually inspect shroud surface for rub damage. Metal deposits not exceeding 0.005 inch (0.13
mm) relative to adjacent undamaged surface are allowed. Grooves or missing material not
exceeding 0.01 inch (0.3 mm) in depth is allowed. Raised metal may be removed by hand
finishing using 180 grit or finer material.
(9) Replace second stage nozzle assembly if the above inspection requirements are not met.
UP495246
ALL Page 8023
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8014. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Power Group, PN 3103319-16, -20, -23, -29, -32, or -33) Second Stage Turbine
Nozzle Assembly Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-014-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8024
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.060 (1.5) DIM. C 0.150 (2.5)
DIM. B 0.075 (1.9)
UP495246
ALL Page 8025
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
ALL Page 8026
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
ALL Page 8027
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Serviceable Limits
DIM. T 1.060 (26.92) MAXIMUM
UP495246
ALL Page 8028
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
K. Inspect First Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly (Subtask 72-50-07-200-013-A01)
NOTE: Engines subjected to first stage nozzle vane missing material (burn-through), remove all
blades and discard.
(1) Visually inspect curvic coupling teeth. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(a) No cracks in disk allowed.
NOTE: When inspecting for cracks, give particular attention to rotor disks areas around
blade firtree and between curvic couplings and blades.
(b) No indications of cracks allowed in the following areas. Refer to Figure 8019.
1 Blade LE (area of radius).
2 Blade/platform fillet (approximately 1/2 of blade height both sides).
3 Platform.
4 Firtree.
(c) No indications of cracks allowed on blade airfoil surfaces above the blade/platform fillet
which are visible with 10X magnification.
(3) Visually inspect first stage turbine rotor blades as follows:
CAUTION: METAL DEPOSITS FROM TURBINE SECTION COMPONENTS ON TURBINE
ROTOR BLADES HAVE CAUSED LOSS OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES. REUSE
IS NOT APPROVED OF TURBINE ROTOR BLADES THAT HAVE BEEN
SUBJECTED TO THE METAL DEPOSIT DUE TO EXPOSURE TO HIGH
TEMPERATURE BECAUSE OF THE FOLLOWING:
ENGINE DECELERATION (BOGDOWN) 55 PERCENT RPM OR BELOW.
OVER TEMPERATURE ABOVE THE START LIMIT OUTLINED IN TESTING
(PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
(a) Inspect for metal deposits.

1 No removal of metal deposits is allowed.
2 Reuse of turbine rotor blades subjected to metal deposits is not allowed.
3 Replace all turbine rotor blades.
(b) Inspect for LE erosion. Refer to Figure 8020. Dimension A must not exceed 0.12 inch (3.0
mm) on any blade.
(c) Inspect for impact damage (FOD) resulting in cooling cavity exposure or missing metal.
No missing material or cooling port exposure is allowed.
(d) Inspect for squealer tip rub. Refer to Figure 8020. If rub is evident, Dimension B (squealer
tip) must not be less than 0.010 inch (0.25 mm). If rub is not proportional on all blades, the
turbine rotor may not be concentric. Balance check is recommended. Refer to REPAIR
(PGBLK 72-50-07-9000).
(e) Inspect turbine rotor blades for smeared metal covering of cooling discharge ports. Refer
to Figure 8020. Hand finish, as necessary, to clear cooling ports.
UP495246
ALL Page 8029
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(f) Inspect blade surfaces for hot corrosion/sulfidation. Refer to Figure 8021. No excessive
hot corrosion/sulfidation is allowed.
(4) Inspect rotor assembly for loose blades by placing rotor on bench with LE down. Blade forward
movement must not exceed 0.150 inch (3.81 mm). Circumferential movement is allowed. If any
blade falls out of rotor disc, replace blade. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-50-07-9000) if inspection
requirement is not met.
NOTE: Do not drop, bounce, or use finger pressure to determine blade looseness.
(5) Inspect for blade tip rub. Cooling passage exit holes at blade tip must not be restricted more
than 50 percent. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-50-07-9000).
(6) Inspect turbine rotor blade cooling tubes, to make sure that cooling tubes are installed to correct
depth. Refer to Figure 8022.
(a) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0840) Dimension B must be 0.257 to 0.293 inches (6.53 to 7.44 mm).
(b) (Post SB TPE331-72-0840) Dimension B must be 0.057 to 0.093 inches (1.45 to 2.36 mm).
(7) Replacement of any turbine rotor blades requires balance check. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
72-50-07-9000).
NOTE: Due to critical repair requirements, the first stage turbine rotor assembly, PN
3103278-4, must be returned to Honeywell International Inc., Distribution Center,

UP495246
ALL Page 8030
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8019. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Rotor Blade Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-015-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8031
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8020. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Rotor Blade Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-016-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8032
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8021. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Rotor Blade Oxidation/Sulfidation (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-017-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8033
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8022. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Rotor Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-018-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8034
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.010 (0.25) MINIMUM DIM. D 0.010 (0.25) MINIMUM
THICKNESS THICKNESS
DIM. C 0.173 (0.44) ANG E 40 TO 50 DEGREES
L. Inspect Rotating Air Seal and Coupling Assembly (Subtask 72-50-07-200-014-A01)
(1) Inspect curvic coupling teeth. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).

(2) Inspect splined coupling for cracks in the ID spline area. No cracks allowed.
(3) Inspect Area J for cracks. Refer to Figure 8023.
(a) Visually inspect Area J for cracks using 10X magnification and suitable lighting. No cracks
allowed.
(b) Perform FPI. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). No cracks allowed.
(c) If cracks are detected by either visual or FPI, return part and Life-Limit Card for evaluation
AZ 85034-3440.
(4) Visually inspect Area H for damage. Refer to Figure 8023.
(a) No damage that can be felt using a 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) diameter stylus scriber allowed.
(b) Raised metal or metal transfer may be removed using a white Arkansas polishing stone.
No other material removal allowed.
(c) If damage can be felt using a 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) diameter stylus scriber, but is not more
0.010 inch (0.25 mm) deep, return part for evaluation and possible repair to Honeywell
(d) If damage exceeds 0.010-inch (0.25 mm) depth, replace part.
(5) Dimensionally inspect knife seals. Knife seal diameters must be within serviceable limits. Refer
to Figure 8023.
UP495246
ALL Page 8035
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

DIA F 3.375 TO 3.381 (85.72 TO 85.88) DIA L 3.755 TO 3.761 (95.38 TO 95.53)
DIA G 3.475 TO 3.481 (88.26 TO 88.42) DIA M 3.835 TO 3.841 (97.41 TO 97.56)
DIA H 3.575 TO 3.581 (90.81 TO 90.96) DIA N 3.915 TO 3.921 (99.44 TO 99.59)
DIA J 3.675 TO 3.681 (93.34 TO 93.50) DIA P 3.995 TO 4.001 (101.47 TO 101.62)
DIA K 3.675 TO 3.681 (93.34 TO 93.50)
M. Inspect Turbine Stator Support Housing (Subtask 72-50-07-200-015-A01)
(1) Visually inspect for dents. No dents allowed.

UP495246
ALL Page 8036
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Visually inspect for cracks. If cracks are evident or suspected, perform FPI. Refer to
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000). No cracks, other than those indicated in Figure
8024, allowed.
UP495246
ALL Page 8037
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8024. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Stator Support Housing Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-020-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8038
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
N. Inspect Metal Ring Seal (Subtask 72-50-07-200-016-A01)

(2) Replace metal ring seal if it does not meet inspection requirements.
O. Inspect First Stage Inner Baffle (Subtask 72-50-07-200-017-A01)
(1) Visually inspect for cracks.

(a) Maximum allowable crack length at bolt holes is 0.030 inch (0.76 mm). No other cracks
allowed.
(b) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0828 and Pre SB TPE331-72-0897) Remove cracks in flange (shaded
area, View D-D, Figure 8025). Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-50-07-9000).
(c) (Post SB TPE331-72-0828 and Pre SB TPE331-72-0897) A maximum of two axial cracks
in Diameter E (Figure 8025) are allowed. Cracks must not be closer than 2.5 inches (63.5
mm). Cracks must not exceed 0.04 inch (1.0 mm) long.
(2) Visually inspect Surface C for wear step. Refer to Figure 8025. Wear step must not exceed
0.003 inch (0.08 mm) deep.
(3) Visually inspect Surfaces C, F, and H for hot gas erosion. If hot gas erosion exceeds 0.020 inch
(0.51 mm) in depth, replace part.
(4) Visually inspect Surfaces G and J for hot gas erosion. If hot gas erosion exceeds 0.002 inch
(0.05 mm) in depth, replace part.
(5) Visually inspect anti-rotation pins for wear step. Refer to Figure 8025.
(a) (Pre SB TPE331-72-0828 and Pre SB TPE331-72-0897) If wear step is evident,
dimensionally inspect. Dimension B must not exceed 0.01 inch (0.3 mm).
(b) (Post SB TPE331-72-0828 and Post SB TPE331-72-0897) If wear step is evident,
dimensionally inspect. Dimension B must not exceed 0.03 inch (0.8 mm).
(c) Replace anti-rotation pin if wear step exceeds specified limits. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
72-50-07-9000).
(6) Replace first stage inner baffle if it does not meet inspection requirements.
UP495246
ALL Page 8039
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8025. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Inner Baffle (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-021-A01)
P. Inspect First Stage Nozzle Segment (Subtask 72-50-07-200-018-A01)
(1) Visually inspect for cracks, warpage, distortion, and other damage (Figure 8026, View A).
Warpage of vane trailing edges is allowed if crack limitations are met. No cracks allowed in any
portion of the stator except as noted.
UP495246
ALL Page 8040
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Multiple LE cracks are allowed with the following limitations.

NOTE: The manufacturer has developed a restoration repair of vane LE with crack
lengths up to 0.25 inch (6.4 mm). However, due to the critical process control
requirement that must be maintained, this restoration must be accomplished at
a manufacturer's authorized repair facility.
NOTE: First stage nozzle segments may be installed with vane LE crack lengths up to
0.3 inch (7.6 mm), however, future restoration repair may not be possible if
crack length exceeds 0.25 inch (6.4 mm). Repairable parts may be sent to
Honeywell International Inc., Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle,
Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440.
1 Maximum end-to-end length of any individual crack must not exceed 0.3 inch (7.6
mm).
2 No cracks with material separation, sulfidation, or chipping allowed.
3 Space between adjacent cracks more than 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) long must not be less
than 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).
4 No intersecting cracks allowed.
(b) Multiple TE cracks are allowed with the following limitations.
NOTE: Surface cracks are defined as cracks which do not indicate to be through to the
opposing surface.
1 Intersecting cracks are allowed if one or both of the cracks are surface cracks and
they are not more than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) apart at any point.
2 Adjacent cracks which are more than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) apart are not allowed if they
would intersect after progressing twice their existing length.
3 Combined length of any two cracks must not exceed 0.8 inch (20.3 mm).
4 Cracks must not approach within 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) of the inner or outer nozzle wall.
5 Axial TE cracks are allowed. Maximum end-to-end length of any individual crack must
not exceed 0.8 inch (20.3 mm) (Figure 8026, View A, Crack 1).
6 Curving TE cracks (View A, Cracks 2 and 3) are allowed if cracks are not more than
0.3 inch (7.6 mm) long.
7 One high pressure surface TE crack per segment (View B, Crack 5) is allowed. Crack
must not exceed 0.3 inch (7.6 mm) long.
(c) Inner band axial cracks (View B, Crack 6) are allowed up to 0.2 inch (5.1 mm) long.
(d) No radial vane cracks (View A, Crack 4) allowed.
(2) Visually inspect nozzle segment for erosion as follows:
(a) Erosion on nozzle outer wall fillet must not exceed 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) long.
(b) Erosion on vane LE extending full vane width radially is allowed if it is not more than 0.050
inch (1.27 mm) axially.
(c) Local erosion of vane TE is allowed if it is not more than 50 percent of original metal
thickness or 0.3 inch (7.6 mm) axially.
UP495246
ALL Page 8041
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Visually inspect nozzle segment to verify installation of cooling tube(s) (View C). If cooling tube(s)
are not installed, refer to ASSEMBLY (PGBLK 72-50-07-10000) for installation procedures.
(4) Inspect inlet of cooling tubes for obstruction or being pinched closed (View C).
(5) Remove obstruction and/or restore cooling tube shape or replace cooling tube. Make sure that
cooling tube is inserted to proper depth. Top of cooling tube must be flush with the immediate
adjacent area.
(6) Inspect cooling tube covers on nozzle segment inner band (View D). No broken tack welds,
metal separation, or missing covers allowed.
CAUTION: MISSING MATERIAL (BURN-THROUGH) AT VANE LE OR TE OR INNER BAND
AREA RESULTS IN IMPULSE (CYCLIC) LOADING OF BLADES.
(7) Visually inspect nozzle segment vanes LE/TE and inner band area for missing material.
NOTE: Burn-through is anywhere vane material loss allows sight through nozzle vane
segments while viewed parallel to engine centerline.
(a) Missing sections of vane or inner band material not allowed.

(b) If inspection reveals missing material which would allow placement of a 0.125-inch (3.18
mm) diameter pin within plane of LE/TE or in the inner band area, first stage turbine rotor
blades must be discarded. Refer to Figure 8027.
UP495246
ALL Page 8042
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8026. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Nozzle Segment Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-023-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8043
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8027. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Nozzle Vane Segment Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-024-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8044
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.125 (3.2)
Q. Inspect Transition Liner (Subtask 72-50-07-200-019-A01)
(1) Visually inspect transition liner for cracks.

(a) No cracks allowed except on ID lip. Refer to Figure 8028.
(b) Cracks on ID lip allowed except as follows:
1 No cracks allowed if they would intersect with any other crack after progressing twice
their existing length.
2 No intersecting cracks allowed.
3 Maximum end-to-end length of any individual crack must not exceed 0.50 inch (12.7
mm). Refer to Figure 8028, Dimension C.
4 Space must not be less than 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) between cracks greater than 0.25
inch (6.4 mm) long. Short cracks (0.25 inch (6.4 mm) or less) are allowed between
two long cracks (greater than 0.25 inch (6.4 mm)) if limitations of below steps are
met. Refer to Figure 8028, Dimension B.
a No cracks allowed if they would intersect with any other crack after progressing
twice their existing length.
b No intersecting cracks allowed.
(2) Inspect for local voids on the transition liner ID lip. Maximum allowable void must not exceed
0.100 inch (2.54 mm) deep. Refer to Figure 8028, Dimension A.
(3) Visually inspect TBC for peeling, flaking, erosion, and burn-through to base metal. Peeling,
flaking, erosion, and burn-through to base metal are allowed if no localized warpage or distortion
of base metal has occurred.
(4) Replace transition liner if it does not meet inspection requirements.
UP495246
ALL Page 8045
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.10 (2.5) MAXIMUM DEPTH DIM. C 0.50 (12.7) MAXIMUM LENGTH
DIM. B 0.50 (12.7) MINIMUM
R. Inspect First Stage Shroud Segments (Subtask 72-50-07-200-020-A01)
(1) Visually inspect shroud segments for light nicks, burrs, and scratches. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
72-50-07-9000).
(2) Visually inspect shroud segments for cracks, bent and broken flanges, and distortion. Cracks,
bent or broken flanges, or distortion not allowed.
(3) Inspect shroud segments for erosion. Maximum erosion depth allowable at any point is 0.005
inch (0.13 mm). Refer to Figure 8029 View B-B, Dimension C. Maximum allowable erosion on
any tang is 0.020 inch (0.51 mm). Refer to View C-C, Dimension D.
UP495246
ALL Page 8046
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(4) Visually inspect shroud segments for rotor tip rub. Refer to View A-A. Raised metal not allowed.
Figure 8029. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Shroud Segment Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-026-A01)
S. Inspect Turbine Stator Support Housing (Subtask 72-50-07-200-021-A01)
(1) Visually inspect for wear, cracks, and other damage. No cracks allowed, except for as shown
in Figure 8030.
UP495246
ALL Page 8047
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
ALL Page 8048
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8030. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Stator Support Housing Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-027-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8049
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
T. Inspect Seal Ring (Subtask 72-50-07-200-022-A01)
(1) Measure seal ring in free state. Gap between ends must be 0.2-inch (5.1 mm) minimum.
(2) Interlock ends of seal ring, then release the interlock ends. The free state gap of seal ring should
be 0.2-inch (5.1 mm) minimum.
(3) Visually inspect for fretting, pitting, and wear steps. No defect that can be felt using a 0.030-inch
(0.76 mm) diameter stylus scriber allowed.
(4) Install seal ring in turbine support (55, Figure 8031) groove and inspect for binding. No circular
or axial binding allowed.
UP495246
ALL Page 8050
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
ALL Page 8051
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

15. BOLT 50. BAFFLE
U. Inspect Piston Ring Housing (Subtask 72-50-07-200-023-A01)

(2) Install seal ring (45, Figure 8032) in piston ring housing groove and inspect for binding. No
circular or axial binding allowed.
(3) Visually inspect forward face for fretting, pitting, and wear steps. Refer to Figure 8033. No defect
that can be felt using a 0.030-inch (0.76 mm) diameter stylus scriber allowed.
(4) Visually inspect Surface D and outer flange for hot gas erosion. Hot gas erosion on outer flange
must not exceed 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) deep. Hot gas erosion on Surface D must not exceed
0.003 inch (0.08 mm) deep.
(5) Visually inspect sealing surface for hot gas erosion. Hot gas erosion must not exceed 0.002 inch
(0.05 mm) deep.
(6) Visually inspect Surface D for wear step. Wear step must not exceed 0.003 inch (0.08 mm)
deep.
UP495246
ALL Page 8052
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
ALL Page 8053
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
HOLES)
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
Figure 8033. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Support (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-030-A01)
V. (Power Group, PN 3103319-16, PN 3103319-20, PN 3103319-23, PN 3103319-29, PN 3103319-32,

or PN 3103319-33) Inspect Ring Seal (Subtask 72-50-07-200-024-A01)
(1) Perform minimum pinch inspection as follows:

(a) Using depth micrometer, measure and record Dimensions B and C. Refer to Figure 8034.
(b) Using micrometer, measure ring seal free height and record as Dimension E.
(c) Install second stage turbine nozzle assembly (35, Figure 8035) in turbine stator support
housing (32, Figure 8036) with vane LE down.
NOTE: Do not install seal ring when performing this step.
UP495246
ALL Page 8054
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(d) Install retention pins (30, Figure 8035).

(e) Using depth micrometer, measure and record Dimension A. Refer to Figure 8034.
(f) Determine if minimum ring seal pinch can be obtained as follows:
1 Add Dimensions A and B. Record as Dimension F.
2 Subtract Dimension C from Dimension F. Record as Dimension G.
3 Subtract Dimension G from Dimension E. Record as Dimension I.
4 Dimension I must be 0.003 inch (0.08 mm) or more.
UP495246
ALL Page 8055
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8034. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Power Group, PN 3103319-16, PN 3103319-20, PN 3103319-23, PN 3103319-29,

PN 3103319-32, or PN 3103319-33) Ring Seal Minimum Pinch Inspection (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-031-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8056
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
ALL Page 8057
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
25. KEY WASHER
UP495246
ALL Page 8058
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
ALL Page 8059
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
HOLES)
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
W. Job Close-up (Subtask 72-50-07-200-025-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8060
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBINE GROUP ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the turbine group assembly.
0.750-inch orifice plate CAGE: 15916
flow measuring section (2-inch) CAGE: 15916
gage (0 to 100 inHg (0 to 2,540 commercially available

mmHg))
temperature indicator (0 to 120°F commercially available

(-18 to 49°C))
water manometer (0 to 100 inches commercially available

H2O delta P)
PN 284201-2-1 arbor (used to hold a turbine wheel CAGE: 06848

or curvic coupling and seal
assembly)
PN 294273-1 die set press adapter (used in CAGE: 06848

conjunction with an arbor press and
PN 293272-1 die set to shear
excess metal spray from firtree on
a rotor blade prior to pressing into
first stage turbine rotor)
PN 294274-1 blade installation fixture (used in CAGE: 06848

conjunction with an arbor press to
install blades into firtree of a rotor
disk on a TPE first stage turbine
rotor)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 294384-1 metal spray mask holder (used in CAGE: 06848

conjunction with a blade mask to
hold up to ten assemblies during
metal spray operation on blade
firtree, replaced by PN 831021-1)
PN 295298-1 blade installing fixture (used in CAGE: 06848

turbine rotor support, PN 298414-1
blade installing pin set, and an arbor
press to install blades into firtree of
a rotor disk on first stage turbine
rotor)
PN 298413-1 turbine rotor support (adapts to CAGE: 06848

base of PN 295298-1 blade
installing fixture to support rotor disk
at proper angle to press blades into
disk and using the PN 298414-1
blade installing pin set to hold rotor
disk while installing blades)
PN 298414-1 blade installing pin set (adapts to CAGE: 06848

base of PN 295298-1 blade
installing fixture and PN 298413-1
turbine rotor support to hold rotor
disk while installing blades)
PN 298415-1 rotor blade retainer (used to retain CAGE: 06848

rotor blades in rotor disk when rotor
assembly is removed)
PN 298416-1 blade shearing die set (used in CAGE: 06848

adapter press to shear excess metal
spray from firtree on a rotor blade
prior to pressing into first stage
turbine rotor)
PN 298417-1 metal spray blade mask (use to hold CAGE: 06848

turbine rotor blade and mask off all
areas except surface to be metal
sprayed, replaced by PN 831021-1)
PN 298418-1 grit blasting blade mask (use to CAGE: 06848

mask off firtree of turbine rotor blade
except area to be grit blasted in
preparation for metal spray,
replaced by PN 831021-1)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 831021-1 metal spray blade mask (used to CAGE: 06848

mask off all areas of blade that does
not receive metal spray, replaces
PN 294384-1, PN 298417-1, and
PN 298418-1)
PN 831039-1 turbine wheel seal plate and flow CAGE: 06848

adapter (with rubber stoppers, used
to flow test first stage turbine wheel)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
crocus cloth (ANSI B74.18) commercially available
Metco 307 nickel graphite (Type XII CAGE: 01FK4

(75Ni/C25))
Metcolite-F aluminum oxide 24 grit CAGE: 01FK4
No. 76214 blue layout fluid Osborn Mfg Corp, 5401 Hamilton
Ave, Cleveland, OH 44114
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-07-300-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Repair Curvic Coupling (Subtask 72-50-07-300-004-A01)
(1) Repair curvic coupling teeth. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 70-00-00-9000).
C. Repair Third Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly (Subtask 72-50-07-300-005-A01)
(1) Repair curvic coupling teeth. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 70-00-00-9000).

(2) Repair LE of erosion by blending. Minimum blade tip cord length (Figure 9001, Dimension F)
must not be less than 0.900 inch (22.86 mm) after repair.
(3) Repair LE and TE damage by blending as follows:
(a) Area A repair must not exceed 0.0625 inch (1.588 mm) deep after blending. Refer to Figure
9002.
(b) Area B repair must not exceed 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) after blending.
(c) Area C repair must not exceed 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) deep after blending.
(d) Area D repair must not exceed 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) deep after blending. One repair per
blade is allowed. Five blades repairs per rotor assembly are allowed.
(4) Repair Surface A damaged by blending. Surface A repair must not exceed 0.040 inch (1.02 mm)
deep after blending. One repair per rotor assembly is allowed. Refer to Figure 9003.
(5) All repaired areas must have a blend radius of five times blend depth.
(6) Balance third stage turbine rotor assembly as follows:
(a) Install PN 284201-2-1, arbor on rotor curvic couplings and install in Gisholt Model 13S,
balancing machine or Gisholt Model 1S, balancing machine. Refer to Figure 9004.
(b) Dynamically balance rotor assembly on curvic couplings to an accuracy of 0.015 ounce-inch
in Planes M and N. Material may be removed for balancing from area designated. All places
where material is removed for balancing must fair smoothly and leave no corners or edges
sharper than 0.15-inch (3.8 mm) radius and have a surface of 63 microinches (1.6 µm) or
better.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9004
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Third Stage Turbine Rotor Blade Repair (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9005
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Third Stage Turbine Rotor Blade Inspection and Repair (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9006
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. E 0.20 (5.1) DIM. G 0.20 (5.1)
RAD F 0.3 (7.6)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9007
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Repair of Third Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9008
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Third Stage Turbine Rotor (Balancing) (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9009
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
D. Remove and Replace Third Stage Turbine Nozzle Seal Assembly (Subtask 72-50-07-300-006-A01)
(1) Drill off head of installed rivet (15, Figure 9005). Use centerpunch and hammer to punch out
remainder of rivet.
(2) Remove upper retainer (20), lower retainer (25), spacers (30), and seal assembly (35).
CAUTION: DURING SEAL INSTALLATION, POSITION THE SEAL BRAZED JOINT AS NEAR
TO THE 12 O'CLOCK (11 O'CLOCK TO 1 O'CLOCK) POSITION OF THE ENGINE
VERTICAL REFERENCE LINE AS POSSIBLE.
(3) Install new seal assembly (35) with spacers (30) between third stage turbine nozzle (40) and
seal assembly.
(4) Install upper retainer (20), lower retainer (25), and secure with new rivets (15).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9010
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
HOLES)
E. Repair Second Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly (Subtask 72-50-07-300-007-A01)
(1) Repair blade LE erosion by blending. Refer to Figure 9006 for limits. Minimum blade tip cord
length (Dimension C) must not be less than 0.980 inch (24.89 mm) after blending.
(2) Repair damage on blade LE and TE by blending as follows:
(a) Repair must not exceed 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) deep after blending. Refer to Figure 9007.
(b) All repair areas must have a blend radius of five times the blend depth.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9011
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) Polish blend area with 400 grit or finer abrasive material.
(3) Balance second stage turbine rotor assembly as follows:
(a) Install PN 284201-2-1, arbor, on second stage turbine rotor assembly and install in Gisholt
Model 13S, balancing machine or Gisholt Model 1S, balancing machine. Refer to Figure
9008.
(b) Dynamically balance second stage turbine rotor assembly to an accuracy of 0.037
ounce-inch in Planes M and N. Material may be removed for balancing from areas
designated. All places where material is removed must fair smoothly and leave no corners
or edges sharper than 0.125-inch (3.18 mm) radius and have a surface finish of 63
microinches (1.6 µm).
(c) After removing material for balancing, there must be a minimum of 0.020 inch (0.51 mm)
material remaining when measured from face of disk and face of seal plate. Refer to Figure
9008, Dimensions A and B.
Figure 9006. (Sheet 1 of 1) Second Stage Turbine Rotor Blade Repair (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-006-A01)
Limit Limit
DIM. C 0.980 inch (24.89 mm)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9012
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9007. (Sheet 1 of 1) Second Stage Turbine Rotor Blade Repair (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-007-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9013
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.20 (5.1) MINIMUM RAD B 0.30 (7.6) MINIMUM
Figure 9008. (Sheet 1 of 1) Second Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly Balancing (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-008-A01)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.020 (0.51) MINIMUM DIM. B 0.020 (0.51) MINIMUM
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9014
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
F. (Power Group, PN 3103319-16, -20, -23, -29, -32, or -33) Replace Second Stage Turbine Nozzle
Seal (Subtask 72-50-07-300-008-A01)
CAUTION: USE CAUTION WHEN REMOVING RIVETS TO PREVENT ENLARGING, ELONGATING,

AND/OR OTHERWISE DAMAGING NOZZLE RIVET HOLES.
(1) Machine or hand finish to remove heads of rivets (5, Figure 9009). Use hammer and suitable
punch to drive out remainder of rivet.
(2) Remove retainer (10), deflector (15), spacers (20), and seal (25) from nozzle segment (30).
CAUTION: SEAL MUST BE INSTALLED WITH SEAL SUPPORT/RING JOINT FACING AFT.
(3) Install new seal (25), spacers (20), deflector (15), and retainer (10).
CAUTION: RIVETS MUST BE INSTALLED FROM THE AFT SIDE OF THE NOZZLE ASSEMBLY.
(4) Secure nozzle assembly with rivets (5).

NOTE: Rivets, PN NAS1398C4A4, may be installed using a hand-held riveting tool.
(5) Check seal for security in nozzle assembly. No axial movement should be apparent. Radial
movement of the seal relative to the nozzle is allowed up to 0.014 inch (0.36 mm), if all rivets
are properly secured.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9015
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Nozzle Seal Replacement (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-009-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9016
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. RIVET 20. SPACER

10. RETAINER 25. SEAL
15. DEFLECTOR 30. NOZZLE
G. (CHECK—Power Group, PN 3103319-16, -20, -23, -29, -32, or -33) Repair Second Stage Turbine
Nozzle Rear Platform (Subtask 72-50-07-300-009-A01)
(1) Use crocus cloth to smooth out minor surface burrs, galling, pitting, and scratches.
(2) Dimension T must not exceed 1.060 inch (26.92 mm) after repair. Refer to Figure 9010 (Sheet
1 of 1).
Nozzle Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-010-A01)

DIM. T 1.060 (26.92) MAXIMUM
H. (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, -11, or -21) Repair Second Stage Turbine Nozzle Segment Rear
Platform (Subtask 72-50-07-300-010-A01)
(1) Use crocus cloth to smooth out minor surface burrs, galling, pitting, and scratches.
(2) Dimension T must not exceed 0.160 inch (4.06 mm) after repair. Refer to Figure 9011.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9017
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9011. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, -11, or -21) Second Stage Turbine Nozzle Seal
Replacement (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-011-A01)

DIM. T 0.160 (4.06) MAXIMUM
I. Repair First Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly (Subtask 72-50-07-300-011-A01)
CAUTION: USED ROTOR DISK, PN 3103836-1, MAY BE RE-BLADED AS PER THIS PROCEDURE.
CAUTION: NEW (ZERO TIME) ROTOR DISK, PN 3103836-1, MUST BE RETURNED TO HONEYWELL
FOR INITIAL BLADE INSTALLATION. RETURN TO HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL INC.,
DISTRIBUTION CENTER, 1944 E. SKY HARBOR CIRCLE, PHOENIX, AZ 85034-3440.
(1) Repair loose and damaged blades as follows:
(a) Using index arrow located on aft disk web as a starting point, number the blade slots 1
through 32 in a CW direction. Refer to Figure 9012.
(b) Any blade removed must be marked to correspond to the slot on disk. Remove blades
from disk. If necessary, use an aluminum drift and mallet to dislodge blade.
(c) Remove metal spray as follows:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9018
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1 Insert blade into PN 298418-1, grit blasting blade mask, or PN 831021-1, metal spray
blade mask.
2 Remove metal spray from firtree by abrasive blasting using Metcolite-F, aluminum
oxide 24 grit. Surface finish must be within 60 to 120 microinches (1.5 to 3.0 µm).
3 Remove blast residue. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method
2. Allow part to dry thoroughly.
(d) Apply metal spray to firtree as follows:
1 Secure blade in PN 298417-1, metal spray blade mask, or PN 831021-1, metal spray
blade mask. To prevent metal spray from sticking to metal spray mask, coat exterior
of tool with No. 76214, blue layout fluid. Refer to Figure 9013.
2 Attach PN 298417-1, metal spray blade mask, to PN 294384-1, metal spray mask
holder if PN 831021-1, metal spray blade mask, is not used.
3 Apply Metco 307, nickel graphite powder, to firtree using thermospray gun. Maintain
a spray angle of 40 to 50 degrees. Apply metal spray to a minimum thickness of 0.010
inch (0.25 mm). Apply no more than 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) metal spray to firtree bottom
surface.
(e) Size turbine blade firtree as follows:
1 Remove turbine blade from metal spray mask.
2 Place blade in PN 298416-1, blade shearing die set. Place driver pin from PN
298416-1, blade shearing die set, in ram on PN 294273-1, die set press adapter.
Secure PN 298416-1, blade shearing die set in PN 294273-1, die set press adapter.
3 Connect approximately 30 PSI (206.8 kPa) air source to PN 294273-1, die set press
adapter.
4 Place assembled tooling and turbine blade in a standard arbor press, then with airflow
directed toward shear surface of die set apply sufficient hand pressure on arbor press
to force metal-sprayed area of blade through PN 298416-1, blade shearing die set.
5 Place ejector pin from PN 298416-1, blade shearing die set, into bottom ram of PN
294273-1, die set press adapter. Align ejector pin against blade shoulder then actuate
press adapter lever to eject turbine blade.
(2) Select turbine rotor blades for rotor disk as follows:
(a) If six or fewer blades are to be replaced, the replacement blade must be within 0.1 g pan
weight of the removed blade.
NOTE: Pan weight is stamped on side of blade.
(b) If all blades are being replaced, select blades as follows:

1 Identify each individual blade with its corresponding weight to the nearest gram.
2 Prepare blade layout grid as specified in Figure 9015.
3 Place heaviest blade in upper left-hand corner of grid, rectangle 1. Proceed horizontally
on grid, placing second heaviest blade in number 17 rectangle, third heaviest blade
in number 3 rectangle, and fourth heaviest blade in number 19 rectangle. Continue
placing blades on grid from left to right, ending with the lightest blade being placed
in number 2 rectangle.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9019
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Install blades in rotor disk as follows:

(a) For each numbered slot in disk, select the blade from the corresponding number on grid.
NOTE: These three combined tools, PN 295298-1, blade installing fixture, PN 298413-1,
turbine rotor support, and PN 298414-1, blade installing pin set, can be used
in place of PN 294274-1, blade installation fixture assembly.
(b) Secure rotor disk to PN 294274-1, blade installation fixture assembly. Connect approximately
30 PSI (206.8 kPa) air source to fixture.
(c) Place turbine blade in rotor disk, then place press adapter in a standard arbor press. With
airflow directed toward blade firtree, press turbine blade to full depth in rotor disk.
(d) Remove the first stage turbine rotor assembly from PN 294274-1, blade installation fixture,
and invert using normal handling conditions. With the assembly held stationary in the
inverted position (aft facing upward) and no pressure applied to the turbine blade(s), note
any blade movement. Blades must not fall out of disc while in the inverted position. “Fall
out” is defined as complete removal from the disc.
(e) Blades that fall out must be replaced. Blades that have fallen out may be reworked by
respraying the metal spray on the firtree area to build up the material. To rework the blades
they should have the metal spray removed and then reapplied. Refer to the instructions
provided in Paragraph 2.I. Repair First Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly (Subtask
72-50-07-300-011-A01).
NOTE: Perform the following steps if disk was replaced.
(4) Perform runout check on Surface C. Refer to Figure 9017. Runout must not exceed 0.004 TIR.
Blades may be replaced requirements.
(5) Measure Diameter B at 0.250 inch (6.35 mm) from blade LE. Refer to Figure 9017 Diameter B
must not exceed 7.211 inches (183.16 mm).
(6) Measure Dimension B at the squealer tip, Area C, Figure 9018. Dimension B (squealer tip) must
not be less than 0.010 inch (0.25 mm).
(7) Etch first stage turbine rotor assembly part number on rotor disk by electrochemical etch process
to a maximum of 0.0004 inch (0.010 mm). Refer to Figure 9017.
(9) Balance first stage turbine rotor assembly as follows:
(a) Install PN 284201-2-1, arbor, on first stage turbine rotor assembly (5) and install in Gisholt
Model 13S, balancing machine or Gisholt Model 1S, balancing machine. Refer to Figure
9019.
(b) Dynamically balance first stage turbine rotor assembly to an accuracy of 0.015 ounce-inch
in Plane C, and 0.015 ounce-inch in Plane D. Material may be removed for balancing from
areas designated. All places where material is removed for balancing must fair smoothly
and leave no corners or edges and have a surface finish of 63 microinches (1.6 µm) or
better.
(10) Flow check first stage turbine rotor assembly (5) as follows:
NOTE: The flow check of the first stage turbine rotor assembly is not required unless more
than six blades were removed and reinstalled and/or replaced.
(a) Prepare first stage turbine rotor assembly for flow check as follows:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9020
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1 Remove first stage turbine rotor assembly (5) from PN 298415-1, rotor blade retainer.
Make sure blades do not dislodge from rotor.
2 Install rubber stoppers or equivalent in each of blade cooling air inlet tubes on blade
platform LE.
3 Lightly coat adapter packing with clean, approved engine oil.
4 Install first stage turbine rotor assembly (5) on PN 831039-1, turbine wheel seal plate
and flow adapter and secure with retaining bolt. Torque retaining bolt to 125 in-lb
(14.1 Nm).
NOTE: Turbine wheel seal plate and flow adapter duplicates the engine forward
seal plate and seals the rotor bore.
(b) Construct test setup as shown in Figure 9020 using equipment listed in Table 9001.
(c) Install first stage turbine rotor assembly and flow adapter on test setup shown in Figure
9020. Connect test setup to a source of clean, dry air of 150 PSI (1,034 kPa) maximum.
(d) Perform flow check and record results on Figure 9021, First Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly
Flow Test Data Sheet.
NOTE: Make a copy of First Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly Flow Test Data Sheet to
record data.
1 Adjust pressure regulator until the P inlet gage indicates 39.8 to 40.2 inHg.
2 Record measured values on First Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly Flow Test Data
Sheet copy as follows:
Delta P = inches of water
To = degrees F (To = 60 to 100°F range during test)
Po = inches of mercury (absolute)
3 Calculate Sigma Delta P using the following formula:
Sigma Delta P = (Po x Delta P x 17.35) ÷ (To + 460°F)
4 Using the calculated Sigma Delta P, determine air flow in PPM from Figure 9022 and
record on First Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly Flow Test Data Sheet copy.
5 Reject first stage turbine rotor assembly if air flow exceeds 5.56 PPM or is less than
2.97 PPM at proper inlet pressure.
(e) If air flow rate exceeds 5.56 PPM inspect test setup as follows:
1 Remove flow adapter and make sure that all blades are fully seated on rotor.
2 Check security of rubber stops.
3 Check runout of blade firtree faces above cooling air tube holes. Maximum runout is
0.004-inch (0.10 mm) TIR.
4 Reject first stage turbine rotor assembly if excessive runout is noted. If runout is within
limits, seal forward face of flow adapter where blades contact using electrical tape
or equivalent and repeat the flow check procedure.
NOTE: Table 9001 provides a list of test equipment required for flow check of first
stage turbine rotor assembly.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9021
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
• flow measuring section

• 0.750-inch orifice plate
• gage Hg gage, 2 required (P and P0)
• water manometer delta P gage
• temperature indicator
(f) If air flow is less than 2.97 PPM, replace blades. Refer to the entire set of steps of this
procedure.
NOTE: Turbine rotor blades replaced for leakage may be used in another rotor and
retested.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT NO PORTION OF RUBBER STOPPERS OR OTHER DEBRIS

REMAIN IN AIR TUBES OR BLADE FAILURE MAY OCCUR.
(g) Upon completion of flow check, remove PN 831039-1, turbine wheel seal plate and flow
adapter, from test setup.
(h) Remove first stage turbine rotor assembly from flow adapter. Remove rubber stoppers and
tape.
(i) Install first stage turbine rotor assembly in PN 298415-1, rotor blade retainer.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9022
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9012. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly Repair (Blade to Disk Placement) (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-012-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9023
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9013. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Rotor Repair (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-013-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9024
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.010 (0.25) MINIMUM DIM. D 0.010 (0.25) MINIMUM
THICKNESS THICKNESS
DIM. C 0.173 (0.44) ANG E 40 TO 50 DEGREES
Figure 9014. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Second Stage
Turbine Nozzle Seal Replacement (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-014-A01)
Limits Limits
DIM. T 0.160 (4.06) MAXIMUM
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9025
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9015. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Rotor (Blade Layout Grid) (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-015-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9026
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9027
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
HOLES)
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9028
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9017. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Rotor Repair (Runout Check) (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-017-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9029
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9018. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Rotor Blade Repair (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-018-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9030
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9019. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly Balancing (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-019-A01)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.70 (17.8) MINIMUM (TYPICAL) DIM. B 0.70 (17.8) MAXIMUM (TYPICAL)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9031
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9020. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Wheel Flow Test Setup (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-020-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9032
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9021. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Rotor Assembly Flow Test Data Sheet (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-021-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9033
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9022. (Sheet 1 of 2) Cooling Air Flow Test (Flow Calculation) (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-022-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9034
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9022. (Sheet 2 of 2) Cooling Air Flow Test (Flow Calculation) (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-022-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9035
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
J. Action Required if Incorrect Curvic Coupling Gasket Has Been Installed (Subtask
72-50-07-300-012-A01)
NOTE: There are two potential courses of action for this situation:
(1) Scrap all of the life-limited turbine rotating components in the affected engine and render all of
the scrapped components as unserviceable by damaging at least two adjacent curvic teeth or
turbine blades severely enough that the rotor is no longer serviceable.
(2) If a decision is made not to scrap parts without further input, then contact Honeywell as described
below to determine if any life-limited turbine rotating components may be retained for further
use. Once the information below is provided to Honeywell, a decision can be made following an
investigation using computer analytical modeling as to whether hardware can be retained, or
should be scrapped. There may be a cost to the customer associated with this investigation
depending on whether or not a similar combination of parts and time operated at this condition
has been modeled before. The customer will be informed in the beginning as to degree of cost
involved before proceeding with the investigation.
(3) Contact Honeywell Global Customer Care Center and provide the following data:
(a) Engine serial number.
(b) Part numbers and hours/cycles on life-limited rotating components.
(c) Location of incorrectly installed curvic coupling gasket, part number of curvic coupling
gasket, number of holes in curvic coupling gasket, and diameter of holes.
(d) Condition of turbine rotating components being considered.
(e) Hours/cycles operated with incorrect parts.
K. Remove and Replace First Stage Nozzle Segment Cooling Core Covers (Subtask
72-50-07-300-013-A01)
NOTE: Cover, PN 3103356-1, is designed to cover two cooling tube ports. If one cooling tube
cover is missing, the adjacent cover must be removed.
NOTE: Tack weld new cooling core covers using Method One or Method Two.
(1) Remove cooling core covers by grinding off tack welds. Refer to Figure 9023.
(2) Clean nozzle segment. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-50-07-6000).
(3) (Method One) Install new nozzle core cover, PN 3103356-1, on nozzle segment and tack weld.
Refer to AWS D17.1. There must be 34 tack welds or more tack welds on cooling core cover.
(4) (Method Two) Install new nozzle core cover, PN 3103356-1, on nozzle segment and tack weld.
Refer to AWS D17.1. There must be 34 or more tack welds on each cooling core cover.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9036
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9023. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Nozzle Segment (Cooling Core Cover Replacement)
(GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-023-A01)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.020 (0.51) MINIMUM (REF) DIM. C 0.03 (0.8) MINIMUM (REF)
DIM. B 0.005 (0.13) MINIMUM (REF)
L. Repair Rotating Air Seal and Coupling Assembly (Subtask 72-50-07-300-014-A01)
(1) Repair curvic coupling. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 70-00-00-9000).

(2) Install PN 284201-2-1, arbor on curvic couplings of rotating air seal and coupling assembly (15,
Figure 9024) and perform the following:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9037
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Using PN 284201-2-1, arbor and outer diameter grinder, grind rotating knives of rotating
air seal and coupling assembly (15) to dimensions specified in Figure 9025.
NOTE: The knife-edge seals can be ground to specifications on any outer diameter
grinder with the use of PN 284201-2-1, arbor. When using this arbor, the outer
diameter grinder drive clutch should have aluminum or Copper jaws to prevent
any arbor damage.
(b) Balance rotating air seal and coupling assembly (15, Figure 9024) as follows:
1 Install PN 284201-2-1, arbor, with rotating air seal and coupling assembly (15) on
Gisholt Model 13S, balancing machine or Gisholt Model 1S, balancing machine.
2 Dynamically balance rotating air seal and coupling assembly (15) to an accuracy of
0.0096 ounce-inches. Remove material at areas shown in Figure 9025.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9038
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9039
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
HOLES)
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9040
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9025. (Sheet 1 of 1) Rotating Air Seal and Coupling Assembly (Balancing and Grinding Rotating
Knives) (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-025-A01)
Limits Limits
DIM. A 0.03 (0.76) MAXIMUM DIA F 3.679 TO 3.681 (93.45 TO 93.50)
DIM. B 0.040 (1.01) MAXIMUM DIA G 3.759 TO 3.761 (95.489 TO 95.53)
DIA C 3.3799 TO 3.381 (85.839 TO 85.88) DIA H 3.8399 TO 3.841 (97.519 TO 97.56)
DIA D 3.4799 TO 3.481 (88.379 TO 88.42) DIA J 3.9199 TO 3.921 (99.549 TO 99.59)
DIA E 3.5799 TO 3.581 (90.919 TO 90.96) DIA K 3.9999 TO 4.001 (101.579 TO 101.62)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9041
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
M. Repair Third Stage Rotor to Seal Assembly Gap (Subtask 72-50-07-300-015-A01)
NOTE: The following repair is not authorized if gap between seal assembly and rotor is in excess
of 0.050 inch (1.27 mm). Return turbine rotor assembly to a Honeywell-authorized service
facility for repair.
(1) Press seal assembly into place using 5,000 pounds (2,268 kg) force for 1 minute to make sure
that seal assembly is against shoulder of rotor.
(2) Gap between seal assembly and rotor must be less than 0.003 inch (0.08 mm).
N. Replace First Stage Inner Baffle Anti-Rotation Pin (Subtask 72-50-07-300-016-A01)
(1) Hand finish to remove pin head without damaging adjacent surface.
(2) Remove remainder of pin.
(3) Inspect hole diameter for evidence of corrosion and obvious distortion. No evidence of corrosion
or obvious distortion allowed.
(4) Make sure that new pin cannot be pressed in using finger pressure. If so, reject baffle.
(5) Press new pin into shoulder using standard shop practices.
(6) Make sure that new pin cannot be pressed out by finger pressure. If so, replace baffle.
O. (Pre SB TPE331-72-0766 and Pre SB TPE331-72-0767) Repair First Stage Inner Baffle Flange
Cracks (Subtask 72-50-07-300-017-A01)
(1) Remove cracks in flange (Figure 9026, shaded area, View D-D) using a 60 to 80 grit wheel.
(2) Blend to depth of crack. Blend radius must be 0.375 to 0.5 inch (9.53 to 12.7 mm).
(3) Dimension A must not be less than 0.350 inch (8.89 mm) after crack removal.
(4) Do an FPI on the reworked area to make sure that crack is completely removed. Refer to
(5) Blend edges in reworked area using PN ST70AL0512, soft rubberized abrasive, or PN
ST70AL0801, soft rubberized abrasive.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9042
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9026. (Sheet 1 of 1) First Stage Turbine Inner Baffle (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-026-A01)
P. Job Close-up (Subtask 72-50-07-300-018-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9043
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TURBINE GROUP ASSEMBLY – ASSEMBLY
(1) Use these procedures to assemble the turbine group assembly.
PN 293265-1 seal plate holder and driver (used CAGE: 06848

to assemble curvic coupling shaft
and seal assembly)
PN 293268-1 tube installing and extracting tool CAGE: 06848

(used to install or remove cooling
air tube from the first stage turbine
stator)
PN 293410-1 turbine module holder (used to CAGE: 06848

support a partial TPE turbine
module during assembly operations
or whenever removed from power
group)
PN 296494-1 special wrench (used in conjunction CAGE: 06848

with standard torque wrench to
install or remove nuts securing first
stage nozzle to stator housing)


APPLICABLE.
UP495246
ALL Page 10001
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
dry-ice (LGA CG-6.9, carbon commercially available

dioxide solid)
nitrogen liquid (A-A-59503) commercially available

(MIL-PRF-907)
2. Procedure (TASK 72-50-07-430-802-A01)
B. Assembly of Turbine Group Assembly (Subtask 72-50-07-430-004-A01)

or nuts, located aft of the compressor housing unless otherwise specified.
NOTE: All index markings applied during removal/disassembly must be removed after serving
their purpose unless required method of assembly prevents accessibility. Remove index
marks with MIL-PRF-680, solvent.
(1) Assemble first stage turbine nozzle assembly.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT COOLING AIR TUBES ARE INSTALLED.
(a) Install cooling air tubes (65, Figure 10001) in nozzle segments (70) using PN 293268-1,
tube installing and extracting tool. Install nozzle segments (70) in turbine stator support
(20). Secure nozzle segments (70) with stator pins (60). Refer to Figure 10002.
NOTE: Nozzle segments (70) must be installed according to their respective effective
flow area. Start with the largest effective flow area segment placing progressively
smaller effective flow area segments on either side with the smallest effective
flow area segment 180 degrees opposite the largest effective flow area segment.
NOTE: Record actual total effective flow area of assembly. Sum of eleven segments
must be within AE = 3.825 to 4.075.
(b) Install baffle (50) and housing piston ring (55) to stator support (20) and nozzle segment
(70) assembly and secure with bolts (35) and nuts (30). Coat bolt threads with Never-Seez
NG-165, pure nickel thread compound. Torque nuts to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm).
(c) Place transition liner (25) on PN 293410-1, turbine module holder. Install previously
assembled stator support (20), nozzle segment (70), baffle (50), and housing piston ring
UP495246
ALL Page 10002
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(55) in transition liner (25). Align bolt holes. Install four bolts (15) and nuts (10) to temporarily
secure parts.
CAUTION: IF NO TURBINE ROTATING COMPONENTS HAVE BEEN REPLACED, MAKE
SURE THAT EACH PART IS REINSTALLED IN SAME RELATIVE POSITION
TO SHOULDERED (MAIN) SHAFT.
CAUTION: IF A ROTATING COMPONENT IS REPLACED, THE REPLACEMENT

COMPONENT CURVIC TOOTH MARKED WITH A “V” OR “I” SHOULD BE
POSITIONED APPROXIMATELY 180 DEGREES FROM “V” OR “I” ON MATING
CURVICS. THE REMAINING COMPONENTS PREVIOUSLY MARKED SHOULD
REMAIN ALIGNED WITH EACH OTHER BUT MAY NOT ALIGN WITH MARK
ON MAIN SHAFT.
(d) Place first stage turbine nozzle assembly (50, Figure 10003) on PN 293410-1, turbine
module holder. Remove four bolts (15, Figure 10001) and nuts (10) used to temporarily
secure parts.
NOTE: Curvic teeth marked with “V” or “I” indicate the high tooth. When replacing a
turbine rotating component or components, “V” or “I” tooth should be positioned
approximately 180 degrees from “V” or “I” tooth on mating curvic.
NOTE: The index line marked during assembly on components not being replaced
should remain aligned regardless of position of “V” or “I” teeth on curvics.
NOTE: Turbine rotor assemblies are life-limited. Refer to SB TPE331-72-0476 for

maximum operating cycles.
(e) Install metal ring seal (35, Figure 10003), first stage shroud segments (40), and turbine
stator support housing (30) on first stage turbine nozzle assembly (50). Secure with bolts
(20) and nuts (25). Using PN 296494-1, special wrench, torque nuts to 50 in-lb (5.6 Nm).
(f) Install seal ring (45) on first stage turbine nozzle assembly (50).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT SPLINED COUPLING HAS COOLING HOLES, PRIOR TO
ASSEMBLING ROTATING AIR SEAL AND COUPLING ASSEMBLY. REFER
TO FIGURE 10003. DAMAGE TO ENGINE MAY RESULT DUE TO IMPROPER
COOLING.
(g) Assemble rotating air seal and coupling assembly (15, Figure 10003) as follows:
NOTE: If rotating air seal and coupling assembly (15) was disassembled to replace
parts, perform this step. If rotating air seal and coupling assembly (15) was not
disassembled, proceed to next step.

1 Heat rotating air seal (5, Figure 10005) in an oven at 350°F (177°C) for 15 minutes.
Cool splined coupling half (20) in nitrogen liquid or dry-ice.
UP495246
ALL Page 10003
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT ANTI-ROTATION PINS (15) ON SPLINED COUPLING

HALF (20) ARE ALIGNED WITH SLOTS IN ROTATING AIR SEAL (5).
2 (Rotating Air Seal and Coupling Assembly, PN 3103315-X) Remove rotating air seal
(5) from oven and place on PN 293265-1, seal plate holder and driver (Figure 10006,
View A). Place splined coupling half (20, Figure 10005) in rotating air seal. Using PN
293265-1, seal plate holder and driver, press splined coupling half (20) in rotating air
seal (5). Make sure that anti-rotation pins (15) in splined coupling half (20) are aligned
with slots in rotating air seal (5).
3 (Rotating Air Seal and Coupling Assembly, PN 3107085-X) Remove rotating air seal
(5) from oven and place on PN 293265-1, seal plate holder and driver (Figure 10006,
View A). Place shim (8, Figure 10005) and splined coupling half (20) in rotating air
seal (5). Using PN 293265-1, seal plate holder and driver, press splined coupling half
(20) in rotating air seal (5). Make sure that anti-rotation pins (15) in splined coupling
half (20) are aligned with slots in rotating air seal (50).
4 Tip grind rotating knives and dynamically balance rotating air seal and coupling
assembly (15, Figure 10003). Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 72-50-07-9000).
(h) Install rotating air seal and coupling assembly (15) on PN 293410-1, turbine module holder.
NOTE: When installing any replacement component that contains curvic couplings,
make sure that high point “V” marks on mating curvics are positioned as close
to 180 degrees apart as proper curvic mating permits.
NOTE: The remaining components previously marked may not line up with the line
drawn on the main shaft. Exception to lining the “Vs” 180 degrees apart: (1) on
previously marked components and (2) at the second stage impeller aft curvic
to the rotating air seal and coupling assembly when the rotating air seal and
coupling assembly (15) is replaced.

INJURY OR DEATH.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET, WITH NO HOLES, IS

INSTALLED IN ROTATING AIR SEAL AND COUPLING ASSEMBLY (15). REFER
TO PARAGRAPH 2.E. ACTION REQUIRED IF INCORRECT CURVIC COUPLING
GASKET HAS BEEN INSTALLED (SUBTASK 72-30-04-300-007-A01).
(i) Install curvic coupling gasket (10), with no holes, in rotating air seal and coupling assembly
(15).
UP495246
ALL Page 10004
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(j) Install first stage turbine rotor assembly (5). Align index lines on first stage turbine rotor
assembly and rotating air seal and coupling assembly (15).
NOTE: Make sure that index lines on first stage turbine rotor assembly and rotating air
seal and coupling assembly (15) are properly aligned.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT PROTECTIVE COVERINGS ARE REMOVED FROM TURBINE
ROTOR KNIFE SEALS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF TURBINE ROTOR.
(2) Install second stage turbine nozzle and rotor assemblies. Refer to Figure 10007.
INJURY OR DEATH.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET WITH 15 HOLES (EACH
SIDE) (HOLE DIAMETER 0.097 TO 0.0102 INCH (2.46 TO 0.259 MM)) IS
INSTALLED IN FIRST STAGE TURBINE ROTOR ASSEMBLY. REFER TO
PARAGRAPH 2.E. ACTION REQUIRED IF INCORRECT CURVIC COUPLING
GASKET HAS BEEN INSTALLED (SUBTASK 72-30-04-300-007-A01).
(a) Install curvic coupling gasket (45, Figure 10007), with 15 holes (each side) (hole diameter
0.097 to 0.0102 inch (2.46 to 0.259 mm)), in first stage turbine rotor assembly (5, Figure
10003).
(b) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Install deflector (15,
Figure 10008) on seal assembly (10). Assemble nozzle segments (5) on seal assembly
(10) and deflector (15). Refer to Figure 10008. Using a rubber band or other suitable
restraint, secure nozzle segments (5) to seal assembly (10) to allow installation of second
stage turbine nozzle assembly (15, Figure 10007) as a single unit.
(c) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Install second stage
turbine nozzle assembly (15). Align the index lines on second stage nozzle assembly (15)
and turbine stator housing (30, Figure 10003).
NOTE: Make sure that index lines on second stage turbine nozzle assembly (15, Figure
10007) and turbine stator support housing (30) are properly aligned.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT RUBBER BAND OR OTHER SUITABLE RESTRAINT IS

REMOVED AFTER SECOND STAGE NOZZLE ASSEMBLY IS INSTALLED.
(d) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Remove rubber band

or other restraint.
(e) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Install second stage
shroud segments (10).
(f) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8, PN 3103319-11, or PN 3103319-21) Install second stage
turbine rotor assembly (5). Align index lines on first stage turbine rotor assembly (5, Figure
10003) and second stage turbine rotor assembly (5, Figure 10007).
NOTE: Make sure that index lines on second stage turbine nozzle assembly and turbine
stator housing are properly aligned.
UP495246
ALL Page 10005
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(g) (Power Group, PN 3103319-16, PN 3103319-20, PN 3103319-23, PN 3103319-29, PN

3103319-32, or PN 3103319-33) Perform used ring seal minimum pinch inspection. Install
ring seal (40, Figure 10007) in turbine stator support housing (32, Figure 10003). Refer to
Figure 10009.
NOTE: (Power Group, PN 3103319-16, PN 3103319-20, PN 3103319-23, PN
3103319-29, PN 3103319-32, or PN 3103319-33) Used (not new) ring seals
must pass minimum pinch inspection. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
72-50-07-8000). New ring seals do not require minimum pinch inspection.
(h) (Power Group, PN 3103319-16, PN 3103319-20, PN 3103319-23, PN 3103319-29, PN

3103319-32, or PN 3103319-33) Install second stage turbine nozzle assembly (35, Figure
10007). Align index lines on first stage turbine rotor assembly (5, Figure 10003) and second
stage turbine rotor assembly (5, Figure 10007).
NOTE: Make sure that index lines on second stage nozzle assembly and turbine stator
housing are properly aligned.
1 Secure second stage turbine nozzle to turbine stator support housing (32, Figure
10003) with retention pins (30, Figure 10007), key washers (25), and bolts (20).
Torque bolts to 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm). Bend key washer tab locks into bolt flats. Refer to
Figure 10009.
(3) Install third stage turbine nozzle and rotor assemblies.
INJURY OR DEATH.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT PROTECTIVE COVERINGS ARE REMOVED FROM

TURBINE ROTOR KNIFE SEALS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF TURBINE
ROTOR.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET, WITH EIGHT HOLES (HOLE
DIAMETER 0.097 TO 0.102 INCH (2.46 TO 2.59 MM)), IS INSTALLED IN
SECOND STAGE TURBINE ROTOR ASSEMBLY. MAKE SURE THAT HOLES
FACE TOWARD REAR OF ENGINE. REFER TO PARAGRAPH 2.E. ACTION
REQUIRED IF INCORRECT CURVIC COUPLING GASKET HAS BEEN
INSTALLED (SUBTASK 72-30-04-300-007-A01).
(a) Install curvic coupling gasket (45, Figure 10010), with eight holes (hole diameter 0.097 to
0.102 inch (2.46 to 2.59 mm)), in second stage rotor. Make sure that holes face toward
rear of engine.
(b) Install third stage turbine nozzle assembly (40) in turbine stator support housing (30, 32,
Figure 10003).
UP495246
ALL Page 10006
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

15. BOLT 50. BAFFLE
UP495246
ALL Page 10007
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Assemble First Stage Nozzle Assembly (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 10008
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
10. NUT 50. BAFFLE

15. BOLT 55. HOUSING PISTON RING
20. STATOR SUPPORT 60. STATOR PIN
25. TRANSITION LINER 65. COOLING AIR TUBE
30. NUT 70. NOZZLE SEGMENT
35. BOLT
UP495246
ALL Page 10009
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Turbine Group Assembly (Partial Breakdown) (First Stage Turbine Nozzle
UP495246
ALL Page 10010
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
HOLES)
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
Figure 10004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Rotating Air Seal and Coupling Assembly Cooling Hole Inspection (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 10011
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
ALL Page 10012
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10006. (Sheet 1 of 1) Rotating Air Seal and Coupling Assembly (Assembly/Disassembly) (GRAPHIC
72-50-07-99B-006-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 10013
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
UP495246
ALL Page 10014
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
25. KEY WASHER
UP495246
ALL Page 10015
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10008. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Power Group, PN 3103319-8 or PN 3103319-11) Turbine Group Assembly
(Partial Breakdown) (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-008-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 10016
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NOZZLE SEGMENT 15. DEFLECTOR

10. SEAL ASSEMBLY
UP495246
ALL Page 10017
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10009. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Power Group, PN 3103319-16, PN 3103319-20, PN 3103319-23, PN 3103319-29,

PN 3103319-32, or PN 3103319-33) Installation of Second Stage Nozzle (GRAPHIC 72-50-07-99B-009-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 10018
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
HOLES)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 10019
72-50-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

LEP-1 31 Jan 2012 3007 31 Jan 2012
LEP-2 31 Jan 2012 3008 31 Jan 2012
LEP-3 31 Jan 2012 3009 31 Jan 2012
LEP-4 31 Jan 2012 3010 31 Jan 2012
LEP-5 31 Jan 2012 3011 31 Jan 2012
LEP-6 31 Jan 2012 3012 31 Jan 2012
LEP-7 31 Jan 2012 FUEL SYSTEM
LEP-8 31 Jan 2012 PLUMBING–INSTALLATION
TC-1 31 Jan 2012 4002 31 Jan 2012
TC-2 31 Jan 2012 4003 31 Jan 2012
TC-3 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012
TC-4 31 Jan 2012 4005 31 Jan 2012
73-00-00 4006 31 Jan 2012
ENGINE FUEL AND 4007 31 Jan 2012
CONTROL – SYSTEM 4008 31 Jan 2012
1 31 Jan 2012 4010 31 Jan 2012
2 31 Jan 2012 4011 31 Jan 2012
ENGINE FUEL AND 4012 31 Jan 2012
CONTROL – REPAIR 4013 31 Jan 2012
9001 31 Jan 2012 4014 31 Jan 2012
9002 31 Jan 2012 4015 31 Jan 2012
9003 31 Jan 2012 4016 31 Jan 2012
9004 31 Jan 2012 FUEL SYSTEM
73-10-00 PLUMBING – CLEANING
DISTRIBUTION – SYSTEM 6001 31 Jan 2012
1 31 Jan 2012 FUEL SYSTEM
2 31 Jan 2012 PLUMBING – INSPECTION/
73-10-01 CHECK
FUEL SYSTEM 8001 31 Jan 2012
PLUMBING – REMOVAL 8002 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 73-10-05
3002 31 Jan 2012 FUEL HEATER
3004 31 Jan 2012 3001 31 Jan 2012
3005 31 Jan 2012 3002 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-1
73-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
3003 31 Jan 2012 4006 31 Jan 2012

3004 31 Jan 2012 FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE
FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
4001 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012 6003 31 Jan 2012
4003 31 Jan 2012 6004 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012 FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE
FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY– INSPECTION/
ASSEMBLY – CLEANING CHECK
6001 31 Jan 2012 8001 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 8002 31 Jan 2012
FUEL HEATER 8003 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLY– INSPECTION/ 73-10-02
CHECK
8001 31 Jan 2012 8004 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 73-10-06
FUEL HEATER FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE
ASSEMBLY – TESTING ASSEMBLY – TESTING
13001 31 Jan 2012 13001 31 Jan 2012
13002 31 Jan 2012 13002 31 Jan 2012
13003 31 Jan 2012 13003 31 Jan 2012
13004 31 Jan 2012 13004 31 Jan 2012
13005 31 Jan 2012 73-10-07
13006 31 Jan 2012 FUEL FLOW DIVIDER
73-10-06 VALVE
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
3001 31 Jan 2012 3002 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012 3003 31 Jan 2012
3003 31 Jan 2012 3004 31 Jan 2012
3004 31 Jan 2012 FUEL FLOW DIVIDER
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE VALVE
ASSEMBLY–INSTALLATION ASSEMBLY–INSTALLATION
4001 31 Jan 2012 4001 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012 4002 31 Jan 2012
4003 31 Jan 2012 4003 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012
4005 31 Jan 2012 4005 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-2
73-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
4006 31 Jan 2012 PRI ONLY SOLENOID

FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE – INSTALLATION
VALVE 4001 31 Jan 2012
6001 31 Jan 2012 4003 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012
6003 31 Jan 2012 PRI ONLY SOLENOID
6004 31 Jan 2012 VALVE – CLEANING
6005 31 Jan 2012 6001 31 Jan 2012
6006 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER PRI ONLY SOLENOID
VALVE VALVE – INSPECTION/
ASSEMBLY– INSPECTION/ CHECK
CHECK 8001 31 Jan 2012
8001 31 Jan 2012 8002 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 73-10-09
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER FUEL MANIFOLD AND
VALVE NOZZLE
ASSEMBLY – REPAIR ASSEMBLIES – REMOVAL
9001 31 Jan 2012 3001 31 Jan 2012
9002 31 Jan 2012 3002 31 Jan 2012
9003 31 Jan 2012 3003 31 Jan 2012
9004 31 Jan 2012 3004 31 Jan 2012
9005 31 Jan 2012 3005 31 Jan 2012
9006 31 Jan 2012 3006 31 Jan 2012
9007 31 Jan 2012 FUEL MANIFOLD AND
9008 31 Jan 2012 NOZZLE
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER ASSEMBLIES–INSTALLATION
VALVE 4001 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLY – TESTING 4002 31 Jan 2012
13001 31 Jan 2012 4003 31 Jan 2012
13002 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012
73-10-08 4005 31 Jan 2012
PRI ONLY SOLENOID 4006 31 Jan 2012
VALVE – REMOVAL 4007 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 4008 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012
3003 31 Jan 2012
3004 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-3
73-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL MANIFOLD AND FUEL MANIFOLD AND

NOZZLE NOZZLE
ASSEMBLIES–DISASSEMBLY ASSEMBLIES– ASSEMBLY
5001 31 Jan 2012 10001 31 Jan 2012
5002 31 Jan 2012 10002 31 Jan 2012
5003 31 Jan 2012 10003 31 Jan 2012
5004 31 Jan 2012 10004 31 Jan 2012
5005 31 Jan 2012 10005 31 Jan 2012
5006 31 Jan 2012 10006 31 Jan 2012
5007 31 Jan 2012 10007 31 Jan 2012
5008 31 Jan 2012 10008 31 Jan 2012
5009 31 Jan 2012 10009 31 Jan 2012
5010 31 Jan 2012 10010 31 Jan 2012
FUEL MANIFOLD AND FUEL MANIFOLD AND
NOZZLE NOZZLE
ASSEMBLIES – CLEANING ASSEMBLIES – TESTING
6001 31 Jan 2012 13001 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 13002 31 Jan 2012
6003 31 Jan 2012 13003 31 Jan 2012
6004 31 Jan 2012 13004 31 Jan 2012
6005 31 Jan 2012 13005 31 Jan 2012
6006 31 Jan 2012 13006 31 Jan 2012
FUEL MANIFOLD AND 13007 31 Jan 2012
NOZZLE 13008 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLIES–INSPECTION/ 13009 31 Jan 2012
CHECK 13010 31 Jan 2012
8001 31 Jan 2012 13011 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 13012 31 Jan 2012
8003 31 Jan 2012 13013 31 Jan 2012
8004 31 Jan 2012 13014 31 Jan 2012
8005 31 Jan 2012 73-10-13
8006 31 Jan 2012 FUEL MANIFOLD PURGE
FUEL MANIFOLD AND SYSTEM – REMOVAL
NOZZLE 3001 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLIES – REPAIR 3002 31 Jan 2012
9001 31 Jan 2012 FUEL MANIFOLD PURGE
9002 31 Jan 2012 SYSTEM – INSTALLATION
4001 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-4
73-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
4003 31 Jan 2012 FUEL CONTROL AND

4004 31 Jan 2012 PUMP
FUEL MANIFOLD PURGE ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
SYSTEM – CLEANING 6001 31 Jan 2012
6001 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 6003 31 Jan 2012
6003 31 Jan 2012 6004 31 Jan 2012
6004 31 Jan 2012 FUEL CONTROL AND
FUEL MANIFOLD PURGE PUMP
SYSTEM – INSPECTION/ ASSEMBLY– INSPECTION/
CHECK CHECK
8001 31 Jan 2012 8001 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 8002 31 Jan 2012
8003 31 Jan 2012 8003 31 Jan 2012
8004 31 Jan 2012 8004 31 Jan 2012
73-20-00 FUEL CONTROL AND
CONTROLLING (ENGINE PUMP
FUEL AND ASSEMBLY – TESTING
CONTROL) – SYSTEM 13001 31 Jan 2012
1 31 Jan 2012 73-21-03
2 31 Jan 2012 FUEL
73-20-01 FILTER – REMOVAL
FUEL CONTROL AND 3001 31 Jan 2012
PUMP 3002 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 3004 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012 FUEL
3003 31 Jan 2012 FILTER – INSTALLATION
3004 31 Jan 2012 4001 31 Jan 2012
FUEL CONTROL AND 4002 31 Jan 2012
PUMP 4003 31 Jan 2012
4001 31 Jan 2012 FUEL
4002 31 Jan 2012 FILTER – CLEANING
4003 31 Jan 2012 6001 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
4005 31 Jan 2012
4006 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-5
73-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL 73-21-05
FILTER – INSPECTION/ FUEL CONTROL UNIT
CHECK AND INLET
8001 31 Jan 2012 TEMPERATURE AND
8002 31 Jan 2012 PRESSURE
73-21-04 SENSOR – REMOVAL-1
STARTING FUEL FLOW 3001-1 31 Jan 2012
REGULATOR 3002-1 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL 3003-1 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 3004-1 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012 3005-1 31 Jan 2012
REGULATOR FUEL CONTROL UNIT
ASSEMBLY–INSTALLATION AND INLET
4002 31 Jan 2012 PRESSURE
4003 31 Jan 2012 SENSOR–INSTALLATION-1
73-21-05 4001-1 31 Jan 2012
4002-1 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012 4003-1 31 Jan 2012
73-21-04 4004-1 31 Jan 2012
REGULATOR 4006-1 31 Jan 2012
ASSEMBLY – CLEANING 4007-1 31 Jan 2012
6001 31 Jan 2012 4008-1 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 FUEL CONTROL UNIT
STARTING FUEL FLOW AND INLET
REGULATOR TEMPERATURE AND
ASSEMBLY– INSPECTION/ PRESSURE
CHECK SENSOR – CLEANING
8001 31 Jan 2012 6001 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
STARTING FUEL FLOW 6003 31 Jan 2012
REGULATOR 6004 31 Jan 2012
9001 31 Jan 2012 6006 31 Jan 2012
9002 31 Jan 2012 FUEL CONTROL UNIT
9003 31 Jan 2012 AND INLET

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-6
73-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

SENSOR – INSPECTION/ FUEL PUMP
CHECK ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
8001 31 Jan 2012 9001 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 9002 31 Jan 2012
8003 31 Jan 2012 9003 31 Jan 2012
8004 31 Jan 2012 9004 31 Jan 2012
FUEL CONTROL UNIT 9005 31 Jan 2012
AND INLET 9006 31 Jan 2012
TEMPERATURE AND 9007 31 Jan 2012
SENSOR – TESTING 9009 31 Jan 2012
13001 31 Jan 2012 9010 31 Jan 2012
13002 31 Jan 2012 9011 31 Jan 2012
13003 31 Jan 2012 9012 31 Jan 2012
13004 31 Jan 2012 9013 31 Jan 2012
13005 31 Jan 2012 9014 31 Jan 2012
13006 31 Jan 2012 FUEL PUMP
73-21-06 ASSEMBLY – TESTING
FUEL PUMP 13001 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 73-22-00
3002 31 Jan 2012 TORQUE/TEMPERATURE
3003 31 Jan 2012 LIMITING – SYSTEM
4001 31 Jan 2012 73-22-01
4002 31 Jan 2012 TORQUE LIMITER
4003 31 Jan 2012 BY-PASS
4004 31 Jan 2012 VALVE – REMOVAL
6001 31 Jan 2012 3003 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 3004 31 Jan 2012
FUEL PUMP TORQUE LIMITER
ASSEMBLY– INSPECTION/ BY-PASS
CHECK VALVE – INSTALLATION
8001 31 Jan 2012 4001 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-7
73-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
4002 31 Jan 2012

4003 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012
TORQUE LIMITER
BY-PASS
VALVE – CLEANING
6001 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012
6003 31 Jan 2012
6004 31 Jan 2012
6005 31 Jan 2012
6006 31 Jan 2012
TORQUE LIMITER
BY-PASS
VALVE – INSPECTION/
CHECK
8001 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012
8003 31 Jan 2012
8004 31 Jan 2012
TORQUE LIMITER
BY-PASS
VALVE – TESTING
13001 31 Jan 2012
13002 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-8
73-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER – 73
Title Page
CHAPTER 73 – ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL

Section 73-00 – 73-00-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 73-00-00 – ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL..................................................... 1
ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION............................... 1
ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – REPAIR.......................................................... 9001
Section 73-10 – 73-10-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 73-10-00 – DISTRIBUTION............................................................................... 1
DISTRIBUTION – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION......................................................... 1
Subject 73-10-01 – FUEL SYSTEM PLUMBING............................................................ 3001
FUEL SYSTEM PLUMBING – REMOVAL............................................................. 3001
FUEL SYSTEM PLUMBING – INSTALLATION..................................................... 4001
FUEL SYSTEM PLUMBING – CLEANING............................................................ 6001
FUEL SYSTEM PLUMBING – INSPECTION/CHECK........................................... 8001
Subject 73-10-05 – FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY........................................................... 3001
FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL............................................................ 3001
FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION.................................................... 4001
FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY – CLEANING........................................................... 6001
FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK.......................................... 8001
FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY – TESTING.............................................................. 13001
Subject 73-10-06 – FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY............................................ 3001
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL............................................. 3001
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION..................................... 4001
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY – CLEANING............................................ 6001
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK........................... 8001
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY – TESTING............................................... 13001
Subject 73-10-07 – FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE ASSEMBLY................................... 3001
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL.................................... 3001
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION............................ 4001
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-1
73-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Title Page
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE ASSEMBLY – CLEANING................................... 6001

FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK.................. 8001
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE ASSEMBLY – REPAIR........................................ 9001
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE ASSEMBLY – TESTING...................................... 13001
Subject 73-10-08 – PRI ONLY SOLENOID VALVE....................................................... 3001
PRI ONLY SOLENOID VALVE – REMOVAL........................................................ 3001
PRI ONLY SOLENOID VALVE – INSTALLATION................................................ 4001
PRI ONLY SOLENOID VALVE – CLEANING........................................................ 6001
PRI ONLY SOLENOID VALVE – INSPECTION/CHECK...................................... 8001
Subject 73-10-09 – FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES............................ 3001
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES – REMOVAL............................. 3001
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES – INSTALLATION..................... 4001
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES – DISASSEMBLY..................... 5001
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES – CLEANING............................ 6001
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES – INSPECTION/CHECK........... 8001
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES – REPAIR................................. 9001
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES – ASSEMBLY........................... 10001
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES – TESTING............................... 13001
Subject 73-10-13 – FUEL MANIFOLD PURGE SYSTEM.............................................. 3001
FUEL MANIFOLD PURGE SYSTEM – REMOVAL............................................... 3001
FUEL MANIFOLD PURGE SYSTEM – INSTALLATION....................................... 4001
FUEL MANIFOLD PURGE SYSTEM – CLEANING.............................................. 6001
FUEL MANIFOLD PURGE SYSTEM – INSPECTION/CHECK............................. 8001
Section 73-20 – 73-20-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 73-20-00 – CONTROLLING (ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL)........................ 1
CONTROLLING (ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL) – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..... 1
Subject 73-20-01 – FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP ASSEMBLY.................................... 3001
FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL..................................... 3001
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-2
73-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Title Page
FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION............................. 4001

FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP ASSEMBLY – CLEANING.................................... 6001
FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK................... 8001
FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP ASSEMBLY – TESTING....................................... 13001
Section 73-21 – 73-21-03........................................................................................................ 3001
Subject 73-21-03 – FUEL FILTER.................................................................................. 3001
FUEL FILTER – REMOVAL................................................................................... 3001
FUEL FILTER – INSTALLATION........................................................................... 4001
FUEL FILTER – CLEANING.................................................................................. 6001
FUEL FILTER – INSPECTION/CHECK................................................................. 8001
Subject 73-21-04 – STARTING FUEL FLOW REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..................... 3001
STARTING FUEL FLOW REGULATOR ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL...................... 3001
STARTING FUEL FLOW REGULATOR ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION.............. 4001
STARTING FUEL FLOW REGULATOR ASSEMBLY – CLEANING..................... 6001
STARTING FUEL FLOW REGULATOR ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK..... 8001
STARTING FUEL FLOW REGULATOR ASSEMBLY – REPAIR.......................... 9001
Subject 73-21-05 – FUEL CONTROL UNIT AND INLET TEMPERATURE AND 3001
PRESSURE SENSOR....................................................................................................
FUEL CONTROL UNIT AND INLET TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE 3001-1
SENSOR – REMOVAL-1.......................................................................................
FUEL CONTROL UNIT AND INLET TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE 4001-1
SENSOR – INSTALLATION-1...............................................................................
FUEL CONTROL UNIT AND INLET TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE 6001
SENSOR – CLEANING..........................................................................................
SENSOR – INSPECTION/CHECK........................................................................
SENSOR – TESTING............................................................................................
Subject 73-21-06 – FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY............................................................... 3001
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL................................................................ 3001
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION........................................................ 4001
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-3
73-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Title Page
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY – CLEANING................................................................ 6001

FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK.............................................. 8001
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY – REPAIR..................................................................... 9001
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY – TESTING................................................................... 13001
Section 73-22 – 73-22-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 73-22-00 – TORQUE/TEMPERATURE LIMITING............................................ 1
TORQUE/TEMPERATURE LIMITING – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION...................... 1
Subject 73-22-01 – TORQUE LIMITER BY-PASS VALVE............................................ 3001
TORQUE LIMITER BY-PASS VALVE – REMOVAL.............................................. 3001
TORQUE LIMITER BY-PASS VALVE – INSTALLATION...................................... 4001
TORQUE LIMITER BY-PASS VALVE – CLEANING............................................. 6001
TORQUE LIMITER BY-PASS VALVE – INSPECTION/CHECK............................ 8001
TORQUE LIMITER BY-PASS VALVE – TESTING................................................ 13001
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-4
73-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Engine Fuel and Control (Subtask 73-00-00-870-001-A01)
(1) The engine fuel and control system includes a fuel control unit, pumps, filters, flow divider valve,
and fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies. The system provides fuel flow to satisfy speed and
power demands of the engine.
(2) The engine is equipped with an SRL/auto-start system which consists of an electronic controller
that receives electrical input signals representing airspeed and ambient pressure, engine TT2,
engine rotor speed and EGT, and correct engine EGT output signal (EGT indicated) based on
EGT, turbine inlet temperature relationships as established by engine performance calculations.
This function is effective for all engine operation above 80 percent engine speed. The SRL
circuitry deactivates the EGT correction function for engine operation below 80 percent engine
speed. As a separate feature, the SRL controller incorporates 10, 80, and 90 percent speed
switches to provide signals for aircraft functions and for the engine EGT-limited fuel enrichment
provisions for automatic starting.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
73-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the engine fuel and control.

accuracy)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-00-00-300-802-A01)
B. Clean Fuel System Contamination with Fungus or Particulate Matter (Subtask

73-00-00-300-004-A01)
(1) Clean or replace fuel pump filter as specified in 73-21-03.

(2) Clean or replace flow divider as specified in 73-10-07.
(3) Clean or replace drain valve filter as specified in 73-10-07.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
73-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(4) Flush fuel shutoff valve as follows:

(a) Manually actuate fuel shutoff valve while motoring engine to flush valve.
(5) Check fuel pump assembly deadhead pressure as follows:
(a) Connect pressure gage, 0 to 1,000 PSIG (0 to 6,895 kPa) to fuel heater supply port. Refer
to Figure 9001.
(b) With fuel shutoff valve in off position, motor engine. Indicated pressure must be 300 PSIG
(2,068 kPa) minimum with engine speed above 16 percent.
(c) If pressure is low, refer to Figure 1021.
(d) Remove pressure gage.
(6) Check fuel control unit as follows:
(a) Initiate a normal engine start and operation.
(b) If improper performance of fuel control unit is indicated, as demonstrated by poor engine
start or power performance, replace fuel control unit.
(7) Check fuel manifold assemblies. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
NOTE: If indicated by fuel manifold and nozzle assembly functional check, inspect, clean,
or replace nozzles, as required. Refer to 73-10-09.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
73-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fault Isolation Test Points (Typical) (GRAPHIC 73-00-00-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
73-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9004
73-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
DISTRIBUTION – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Fuel System Lines (Subtask 73-10-00-870-001-A01)
(1) The fuel system lines include tubes, fittings, and other hardware necessary to interconnect
components of the fuel system.
B. Fuel Heater (Subtask 73-10-00-870-002-A01)
(1) The oil-to-fuel heat exchanger is mounted on the upper left rear flange of the input housing. Fuel
entering the heat exchanger is heated by oil to provide for fuel filter anti-icing.
C. Fuel Shutoff Valve (Subtask 73-10-00-870-003-A01)
(1) The fuel shutoff valve, mounted on the right side of the compressor housing flange, acts as a
shutoff valve in the line from the fuel control unit to the fuel flow divider valve. The valve has a
dual solenoid and mechanically latches in either the fuel-on or fuel-off position. The fuel-on
solenoid is energized by action of the speed switch and the fuel-off solenoid is energized by a
switch in the aircraft cockpit. The valve may also be closed by manually overriding the mechanical
latch from the ON position.
D. Fuel Flow Divider Valve (Subtask 73-10-00-870-004-A01)
(1) The fuel flow divider, mounted at the bottom of the turbine section, directs fuel flow to the nozzles.
The valve delivers metered fuel flow to the primary and secondary fuel nozzles. The drain valve
provides a path for purging fuel from the fuel nozzle during roll-down when the fuel shutoff valve
is closed. An inlet filter is provided to prevent valve or fuel nozzle blockage through all phases
of operation. In the event the filter becomes clogged, fuel is by-passed to the primary and
secondary fuel nozzle and manifold assemblies to sustain emergency engine operation.
E. PRI Only Solenoid Valve (Subtask 73-10-00-870-005-A01)
(1) An additional orifice and solenoid valve in parallel with the fuel flow divider valve increases the
flow divider opening point from 44 PPH to 120 PPH approximate fuel flow when the solenoid
valve is open. The solenoid valve is energized open by the aircraft start switching logic at 10
percent RPM and allows the engine to operate on the primary fuel nozzles only during starting
and ground taxi operations when the engine fuel demand is less than 120 PPH. Primary-only
operation permits more efficient combustor operation and a reduction in undesirable engine
exhaust emissions during ground operation. The primary-only solenoid valve is de-energized at
60 percent RPM returning the valve to the normally closed position allowing the engine to operate
on both primary and secondary fuel nozzles.
F. Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assemblies (Subtask 73-10-00-870-006-A01)
(1) The fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies are engine-mounted. One manifold provides primary
fuel flow for engine starting and continuous operation and the other provides only secondary
fuel flow for continuos operation. The engine contains 10 dual-orifice fuel nozzles connected
through primary and secondary manifolds from the primary and secondary sides of the fuel flow
divider as applicable. The fuel nozzles are circumferentially spaced evenly around the rear of
the turbine plenum and extend through the plenum wall into the combustion chamber. During
initial phases of an engine start, fuel atomization is provided only by the primary nozzles. For
all other phases of engine operation, fuel is provided by both the primary and secondary nozzles.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
73-10-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
G. Fuel Manifold Purge System (Subtask 73-10-00-870-007-A01)
(1) The fuel purge system includes a remotely located pneumatic accumulator, solenoid valve, two
check valves, and filter.
(2) Fuel that remains in the flow divider and fuel manifolds is purged into the combustor by bleed-air
during shutdown and burned. Bleed-air is stored in an accumulator during normal engine operation
and is discharged during shutdown. The bleed-air is regulated by a normally closed solenoid
valve which is opened by actuating the stop switch. The purge system is self testing. Residual
fuel is forced into the combustor causing a momentary increase in engine speed which can be
observed during shutdown.
UP495246

ALL Page 2
73-10-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL SYSTEM PLUMBING – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the fuel system plumbing.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-01-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Torque Limiter By-Pass Valve Assembly Plumbing (Subtask 73-10-01-020-004-A01)
NOTE: Provide a suitable container to drain residual fuel from lines and fuel control assembly.
NOTE: If it is necessary to remove torque limiter assembly, refer to 73-22-01.
(1) Remove nuts (5, 25, 65, Figure 3001), bolts (10, 30, 70), and clamps (15, 20, 35, 40, 75).
(2) Remove tube assemblies (45, 80), reducers (55, 90), and elbow (110) from torque limiter by-pass
valve and fuel control assembly. Remove and discard packings (60, 105, 115).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Limiter By-Pass Valve Assembly Plumbing Removal (GRAPHIC
73-10-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 65. NUT

10. BOLT 70. BOLT
15. CLAMP 75. CLAMP
20. CLAMP 80. TUBE ASSEMBLY
25. NUT 90. REDUCER
35. CLAMP 100. BOLT
40. CLAMP 105. PACKING
45. TUBE ASSEMBLY 110. ELBOW
55. REDUCER 115. PACKING
60. PACKING 120. TORQUE LIMITER BY-PASS VALVE
C. Remove Fuel Shutoff Valve and Fuel Control and Pump Assembly Plumbing (Subtask
73-10-01-020-005-A01)
NOTE: Provide a suitable container to drain residual fuel from lines and fuel control assembly.
NOTE: If it necessary to remove fuel control shutoff valve, refer to 73-10-06.
(1) Remove nuts (25, 60, 100, Figure 3002), bolts (30, 65, 105), and clamps (35, 70, 110, 115).
(2) Remove tube assemblies (5, 75, 90, 120) and unions (95).
(3) Remove orificed fitting (80), tee (20), cap (141), and unions (15, 142). Remove and discard
packings (10, 85, 130, 145).
(4) Remove nut (40), bracket (45), washer (50), and bolt (55).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Shutoff Valve and Fuel Control and Pump Assembly Plumbing Removal
(GRAPHIC 73-10-01-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. TUBE ASSEMBLY 90. TUBE ASSEMBLY

10. PACKING 95. UNION
15. UNION 100. NUT
20. TEE 105. BOLT
25. NUT 110. CLAMP
30. BOLT 115. CLAMP
40. NUT 125. FUEL FITTING LINE
45. BRACKET 130. PACKING
55. BOLT 140. NUT
60. NUT 141. CAP
65. BOLT 142. UNION
75. TUBE ASSEMBLY 150. FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY
80. ORIFICED FITTING 155. FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP ASSEMBLY
85. PACKING
D. Remove PRI Only Solenoid Valve Fuel Plumbing (Subtask 73-10-01-020-006-A01)
NOTE: Provide a suitable container to drain residual fuel and oil from lines and fuel heater
assembly.
NOTE: If it necessary to remove PRI only solenoid valve, refer to 73-10-08.
(1) Remove nuts (5, 20, Figure 3003), bolts (10, 25), and clamps (15, 30).
(2) Remove tube assemblies (35, 40).
(3) Remove reducer (45), elbow (55), and nut (55) from PRI only solenoid valve (70). Remove and
discard packings (50, 60).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3005
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3003. (Sheet 1 of 1) PRI Only Solenoid Valve Plumbing Removal (GRAPHIC 73-10-01-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3006
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 40. TUBE ASSEMBLY

10. BOLT 45. REDUCER
20. NUT 55. ELBOW
30. CLAMP 65. NUT
35. TUBE ASSEMBLY 70. PRI ONLY SOLENOID VALVE
E. Remove Fuel Heater Assembly Plumbing (Subtask 73-10-01-020-007-A01)
NOTE: Provide a suitable container to drain residual fuel and oil from lines and fuel heater
assembly.
NOTE: If it necessary to remove fuel heater assembly, refer to 73-10-05.
(1) Remove nuts (5, 25, 40, Figure 3004), bolts (10, 30, 45), and clamps (15, 20, 35, 50, 55).
(2) Remove tube assemblies (60, 95, 100).
(3) Remove elbows (65, 80) and nuts (75, 90). Remove and discard packings (70, 85).
(4) Remove unions (105, 135). Remove and discard packings (110, 140).
(5) Remove elbow (115), washer (125), and nut (130). Remove and discard packings (120).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3007
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Heater Assembly Plumbing Removal (GRAPHIC 73-10-01-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3008
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 80. ELBOW

15. CLAMP 90. NUT
30. BOLT 105. UNION
40. NUT 115. FUEL LINE FITTING
50. CLAMP 125. WASHER
55. CLAMP 130. NUT
60. TUBE ASSEMBLY 135. UNION
65. ELBOW 140. PACKING
70. PACKING 150. FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY
75. NUT
F. Remove Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor Plumbing (Subtask 73-10-01-020-008-A01)
NOTE: If it is necessary to remove inlet temperature and pressure assembly, refer to 73-21-05.
(1) Remove nuts (5, 80, Figure 3005), bolts (10, 20, 70, 85), and clamps (15, 25, 75, 90).
(2) Remove bolt (95) and bracket (100).
(3) Remove tube assemblies (30, 55, 105), tee (50), and cap (45).
(4) Remove unions (35, 60) and restrictor (110). Remove and discard packings (40, 65, 115).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3009
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3005. (Sheet 1 of 1) Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor Plumbing Removal (GRAPHIC
73-10-01-99B-005-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3010
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 65. PACKING

10. BOLT 70. BOLT
15. CLAMP 75. CLAMP
20. BOLT 80. NUT
25. CLAMP 85. BOLT
30. TUBE ASSEMBLY 90. CLAMP
35. UNION 95. BOLT
40. PACKING 100. BRACKET
45. CAP 105. TUBE ASSEMBLY
50. TEE 110. RESTRICTOR
55. TUBE ASSEMBLY 115. PACKING
60. UNION 120. INLET TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE
SENSOR
G. Remove PS3 Plumbing (Subtask 73-10-01-020-009-A01)
(1) Remove tube assembly (5, Figure 3006).

(2) Remove fitting (10). Remove and discard packing (15).
(3) Remove warning tags (40, 45), elbow (20), and nut (30). Remove and discard gasket (25).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3011
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3006. (Sheet 1 of 1) PS3 Plumbing Removal (GRAPHIC 73-10-01-99B-006-A01)
5. TUBE ASSEMBLY 25. GASKET

10. FITTING 30. NUT
15. PACKING 40. WARNING TAG
20. ELBOW 45. WARNING TAG
H. Job Close-up (Subtask 73-10-01-020-010-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3012
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL SYSTEM PLUMBING – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the fuel system plumbing.



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

compound

(MIL-PRF-907)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-01-420-802-A01)
B. Install Torque Limiter By-Pass Valve Assembly Plumbing (Subtask 73-10-01-420-004-A01)
NOTE: New gaskets or packings must be lightly coated with any clean, approved engine fuel,
Santovac OS-124, lubricant, or Santovac 5, lubricant prior to installation unless otherwise
specified.
NOTE: Apply Liqui-Moly brand NV thread compound, anti-seize lubricant to threads of bolts or
screws and clean, approved engine oil to threads (except first two threads) of male plumbing
fittings located forward of the aft compressor case flange unless otherwise specified.
NOTE: Use conical seals, as required, for leak repair. Refer to ASSEMBLY (PGBLK
70-00-00-10000) for installation instructions.
NOTE: Make sure that serviceable ring seals are installed on fittings that require them. Refer to
(1) Install elbow (110, Figure 4001) with new packing (115) in fuel pump and secure with new packing
(105) and bolt (100). Torque bolt to 27 to 35 in-lb (3.1 to 4.0 Nm).
(2) Install reducer (90) with new packing (95) in torque limiter. Torque reducer to 20 to 25 in-lb (2.3
to 2.8 Nm).
(3) Install tube assembly (80) between elbow (110) in fuel control and reducer (90) on torque limiter.
(4) Install clamp (75) on tube assembly (80) and secure with bolt (70) and nut (65). Torque nut to
27 to 35 in-lb (3.1 to 4.0 Nm).
(5) Install reducer (55) with new packing (60) in fuel control. Torque reducer to 35 to 40 in-lb (4.0
to 4.5 Nm).
(6) Install clamps on tube assembly (45) and install tube assembly between reducer on torque limiter
(120) and fuel control.
(7) Secure clamps (15, 20, 35, and 40) with bolts (10, 30) and nuts (5, 25). Torque nuts to 27 to 35
in-lb (3.1 to 4.0 Nm).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Limiter By-Pass Valve Assembly Plumbing Installation (GRAPHIC
73-10-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 65. NUT

10. BOLT 70. BOLT
15. CLAMP 75. CLAMP
25. NUT 90. REDUCER
35. CLAMP 100. BOLT
45. TUBE ASSEMBLY 110. ELBOW
55. REDUCER 115. PACKING
60. PACKING 120. TORQUE LIMITER BY-PASS VALVE
C. Install Fuel Shutoff Valve and Fuel Control and Pump Assembly Plumbing (Subtask
73-10-01-420-005-A01)
NOTE: New packings must be lightly coated with any clean, approved engine fuel, Santovac
OS-124, lubricant, or Santovac 5, lubricant prior to installation unless otherwise specified.
screws and clean, approved engine oil to threads (except first two threads) of male plumbing
fittings located forward of the aft compressor case flange unless otherwise specified.
(1) Lubricate and install new packings (10, 85, 130, 145, Figure 4002).
(2) Install bracket (45) on aft side of forward compressor flange. Secure with nut (40), washer (50),
and bolt (55). Torque bolt to 55 to 60 in-lb (6.2 to 6.8 Nm).
(3) Install union (15) in side of fuel shutoff valve assembly (150). Torque union to 50 to 55 in-lb (5.6
to 6.2 Nm).
(4) Install tee (20) in fuel flow divider.
(5) Install tube assembly (5) between union (15) and tee (20).
(6) Install nut (140) and washer (135) on elbow (125). Install elbow in top of fuel control and pump
assembly (155). Torque nut to 50 to 55 in-lb (5.6 to 6.2 Nm).
(7) Install orificed fitting (80) in bottom of fuel shutoff valve assembly (150). Torque orificed fitting
to 60 to 65 in-lb (6.8 to 7.3 Nm).
(8) Install tube assemblies (75, 90, 120) and unions (95) between elbow (125) and orificed fitting
(80).
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(9) Install clamps (35, 110, 115) around tube assemblies and secure with nuts (25, 100) and bolts
(30, 105). Torque bolts to 27 to 40 in-lb (3.1 to 4.5 Nm).
(10) Install clamps (70) on tube (90) and secure with nut (60) and bolt (65). Torque bolt to 27 to 35
in-lb (3.1 to 4.0 Nm).
(11) Install union (142). Torque union to 35 to 40 in-lb (4.0 to 4.5 Nm).
(12) Install cap (141) and lockwire.
(13) (Post SB TPE331-73-0189) Lockwire tube nuts at both ends of tube assemblies (75, 120).
UP495246
ALL Page 4005
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Shutoff Valve and Fuel Control and Pump Assembly Plumbing Installation
(GRAPHIC 73-10-01-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4006
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. TUBE ASSEMBLY 90. TUBE ASSEMBLY

10. PACKING 95. UNION
15. UNION 100. NUT
20. TEE 105. BOLT
25. NUT 110. CLAMP
30. BOLT 115. CLAMP
40. NUT 125. FUEL FITTING LINE
45. BRACKET 130. PACKING
55. BOLT 140. NUT
60. NUT 141. CAP
65. BOLT 142. UNION
75. TUBE ASSEMBLY 150. FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY
80. ORIFICED FITTING 155. FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP ASSEMBLY
85. PACKING
D. Install PRI Only Solenoid Valve Fuel Plumbing (Subtask 73-10-01-420-006-A01)
NOTE: Lightly coat new packings with clean, approved engine fuel, Santovac OS-124, lubricant,
screws and apply new clean, approved engine oil to threads (except first two threads) of
male fittings located forward of the aft compressor case flange unless otherwise specified.
(1) Lubricate and install new packings (50, 60, Figure 4003).
(2) Install nut (65) on elbow (55). Install elbow in top of PRI only solenoid valve (70). Torque nut to
50 to 55 in-lb (5.6 to 6.2 Nm).
(3) Install reducer (45) in bottom of PRI only solenoid valve (70). Torque reducer to 60 to 65 in-lb
(6.8 to 7.3 Nm).
(4) Install tube assemblies (35, 40) between top of PRI only solenoid valve (70) and tee on fuel flow
divider valve.
UP495246
ALL Page 4007
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) Install clamps (15, 30) and secure with nuts (5, 20), and bolts (10, 25). Torque bolts to 27 to 35
in-lb (3.1 to 4.0 Nm).
UP495246
ALL Page 4008
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4003. (Sheet 1 of 1) PRI Only Solenoid Valve Plumbing Installation (GRAPHIC 73-10-01-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4009
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

20. NUT 55. ELBOW
30. CLAMP 65. NUT
35. TUBE ASSEMBLY 70. PRI ONLY SOLENOID VALVE
E. Install Fuel Heater Assembly Plumbing (Subtask 73-10-01-420-007-A01)
screws and apply new clean, approved engine oil to threads (except first two threads) of
male fittings located forward of the aft compressor case flange unless otherwise specified.
(1) Lubricate and install packings (70, 85, 110, 120, 140, Figure 4004).
(2) Install nut (130) and washer (125) on elbow (115). Install elbow in fuel control assembly. Torque
nut to 50 to 55 in-lb (5.6 to 6.2 Nm).
(3) Install unions (105) in fuel heater assembly (150) fuel-in and fuel-out ports. Torque unions to 35
to 40 in-lb (4.0 to 4.5 Nm).
(4) Install union (135) in fuel pump. Torque union to 35 to 40 in-lb (4.0 to 4.5 Nm).
(5) Install tube assemblies (95, 100) from fuel heater assembly (150) fuel-in and fuel-out ports to
the fuel control assembly.
(6) Install clamps (35, 50), nuts (25, 40), and bolts (30, 45). Torque bolts to 20 to 25 in-lb (2.3 to
2.8 Nm).
(7) Install elbow (80) and nut (90) in input housing assembly. Torque nut to 175 to 185 in-lb (19.8
to 20.9 Nm).
(8) Install elbow (65) and nut (75) in fuel heater assembly (150) oil-in port. Torque nut to 175 to 185
in-lb (19.8 to 20.9 Nm).
(9) Install tube assembly (60) between elbow (80) and elbow (65).
(10) Install clamp (15), nut (5), and bolt (10). Torque bolt to 27 to 35 in-lb (3.1 to 4.0 Nm).
UP495246
ALL Page 4010
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Heater Assembly Plumbing Installation (GRAPHIC 73-10-01-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4011
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 80. ELBOW

15. CLAMP 90. NUT
30. BOLT 105. UNION
40. NUT 115. FUEL LINE FITTING
50. CLAMP 125. WASHER
55. CLAMP 130. NUT
60. TUBE ASSEMBLY 135. UNION
65. ELBOW 140. PACKING
70. PACKING 150. FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY
75. NUT
F. Install Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor Plumbing (Subtask 73-10-01-420-008-A01)
CAUTION: WHEN PACKINGS ARE INSTALLED ON PNEUMATIC FITTINGS, MAKE SURE THAT NO
LUBRICANT IS USED. WHEN PNEUMATIC LINES AND FITTINGS ARE INSTALLED,
MAKE SURE THAT NO CONTAMINATION IS INTRODUCED OR THREAD COMPOUND
IS USED. MAKE SURE THERE IS PROPER ALIGNMENT AND THREAD ENGAGEMENT
TO PREVENT GALLING AND/OR CROSS THREADING.
screws located forward of the aft compressor case flange unless otherwise specified.
NOTE: Apply Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound to threads of bolts and studs
located aft of the compressor case unless otherwise specified.
(1) Install union (35, Figure 4005) with new packing (40) in inlet temperature and pressure sensor
(120). Torque union to 35 to 40 in-lb (4.0 to 4.5 Nm).
(2) Install union (60) with new packing (65) in fuel control. Torque union to 35 to 40 in-lb (4.0 to 4.5
Nm).
(3) Assemble tube assemblies (30, 55) and tee (50).
(4) Install assembled tube assemblies (30, 55) and tee (50) between union (60) on fuel control and
union (35) on inlet temperature and pressure sensor.
(5) Install cap (45) on tee (50). Torque cap to 70 to 80 in-lb (7.9 to 9.0 Nm).
(6) Secure tube assemblies (30, 55) with clamps (15, 25), bolts (10, 20), and nuts (5).
UP495246
ALL Page 4012
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Torque bolts (10) to 27 to 35 in-lb (3.1 to 4.0 Nm).

(b) Torque bolt (20) to 70 in-lb (7.9 Nm).
(7) Install restrictor (110) with new packing (115) in inlet temperature and pressure sensor. Torque
restrictor to 35 to 40 in-lb (4.0 to 4.5 Nm).
(8) Install tube assembly (105) between inlet temperature and pressure sensor and fitting on anti-ice
shield. Secure tube assembly (105) with bolt (70) and clamp (75). Torque bolt to 25 in-lb (2.8
Nm).
(9) Install bracket (100) and secure with bolt (95). Torque bolt to 70 in-lb (7.9 Nm).
(10) Install clamp (90) on tube assembly (105) and secure to bracket with nut (80) and bolt (85).
UP495246
ALL Page 4013
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4005. (Sheet 1 of 1) Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor Plumbing Installation (GRAPHIC
73-10-01-99B-005-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4014
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 65. PACKING

10. BOLT 70. BOLT
15. CLAMP 75. CLAMP
20. BOLT 80. NUT
25. CLAMP 85. BOLT
30. TUBE ASSEMBLY 90. CLAMP
35. UNION 95. BOLT
40. PACKING 100. BRACKET
45. CAP 105. TUBE ASSEMBLY
50. TEE 110. RESTRICTOR
55. TUBE ASSEMBLY 115. PACKING
60. UNION 120. INLET TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE
SENSOR
G. Install PS3 Plumbing (Subtask 73-10-01-420-009-A01)
CAUTION: WHEN GASKETS OR PACKINGS ARE INSTALLED ON PNEUMATIC FITTINGS, MAKE

SURE THAT NO LUBRICANT IS USED. WHEN PNEUMATIC LINES AND FITTINGS ARE
INSTALLED, MAKE SURE THAT NO CONTAMINATION IS INTRODUCED OR THREAD
COMPOUND IS USED. MAKE SURE THERE IS PROPER ALIGNMENT AND THREAD
ENGAGEMENT TO PREVENT GALLING AND/OR CROSS THREADING.
(1) Install elbow (20, Figure 4006) with new gasket (25) in turbine plenum. Secure with nut (30).
Torque nut to 50 to 55 in-lb (5.6 to 6.2 Nm).
(2) Install fitting (10) with new packing (15) in fuel control assembly. Torque fitting to 35 to 40 in-lb
(4.0 to 4.5 Nm).
(3) Install tube assembly (5) between fitting (10) and elbow (20).
(4) Attach warning tags (40, 45) to elbow (20).
UP495246
ALL Page 4015
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4006. (Sheet 1 of 1) PS3 Plumbing Installation (GRAPHIC 73-10-01-99B-006-A01)
5. TUBE ASSEMBLY 25. GASKET

10. FITTING 30. NUT
15. PACKING 40. WARNING TAG
20. ELBOW 45. WARNING TAG
H. Job Close-up (Subtask 73-10-01-420-010-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4016
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL SYSTEM PLUMBING – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the fuel system plumbing.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-01-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean all fittings and plumbing. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method
12.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL SYSTEM PLUMBING – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the fuel system plumbing.
filter (10 micron minimum) commercially available


APPLICABLE.
compressed air or nitrogen source commercially available

(0 to 400 PSIG (0.0 to 2,758 kPa))
detergent solution American Gas and Chemical Co.,

511 E. 72nd St., New York, NY
10021
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-01-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Tube Assemblies (Subtask 73-10-01-200-004-A01)
(1) Inspect tube assemblies. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).

(2) Inspect threaded parts for crossed, galled, or peened threads.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Check clamps for worn or missing cushions.

(4) Perform leakage check of pneumatic system lines as follows:
(a) Disconnect tube assembly at the turbine plenum elbow.
(b) Connect clean, dry compressed air or nitrogen source source with filter and pressurize to
95 to 105 PSIG (655 to 724 kPa).
(c) Apply detergent solution to all pneumatic system connections. No leakage allowed.
(d) If leakage is observed, apply proper torque values to the connecting nuts. If leakage is still
observed, replace faulty part and recheck for leakage.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
73-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the fuel heater assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-05-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Fuel Heater Assembly (Subtask 73-10-05-020-004-A01)
(1) Disconnect fuel heater assembly plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-01-3000).
NOTE: Provide a suitable container to drain residual fuel and oil from fuel heater.
(2) Remove elbow (40, Figure 3001) and union (65). Remove and discard packings (45, 70).
(3) Remove bolts (15) and nuts (5) securing brackets (30, 35) to input housing assembly.
(4) Remove bolts (20) and washers (25) securing brackets (30, 35) to fuel heater assembly (75).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Heater Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 73-10-05-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 40. ELBOW

20. BOLT 50. NUT
30. BRACKET ASSEMBLY 70. PACKING
35. BRACKET ASSEMBLY 75. FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the fuel heater assembly.



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

compound

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-05-420-802-A01)
B. Installation of Fuel Heater Assembly (Subtask 73-10-05-420-004-A01)
screws and apply clean, approved engine oil to threads (except first two threads) of male
plumbing fittings located forward of the aft compressor case flange unless otherwise
specified.
(1) Lubricate and install packings (45, 70, Figure 4001).
(2) Install nut (50) on elbow (40). Install elbow in fuel heater assembly (75) oil-out port. Torque nut
to 175 to 185 in-lb (19.8 to 20.9 Nm).
(3) Install unions (65) in fuel heater assembly (75) fuel-in and fuel-out ports. Torque unions to 35
to 40 in-lb (4.0 to 4.5 Nm).
(4) Install brackets (30, 35) on fuel heater assembly (70). Secure with bolts (20) and washers (25).
(5) Install assembled fuel heater and brackets on input housing assembly. Secure with bolts (15)
and nuts (5). Torque bolts to 50 to 60 in-lb (5.6 to 6.8 Nm).
(6) Connect fuel heater assembly plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-01-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Heater Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 73-10-05-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 40. ELBOW

20. BOLT 50. NUT
30. BRACKET ASSEMBLY 70. PACKING
35. BRACKET ASSEMBLY 75. FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4004
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the fuel heater assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-05-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean external surface of fuel heater. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning
Method 1.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the fuel heater assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-05-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Fuel Heater Assembly (Subtask 73-10-05-200-004-A01)
NOTE: Conduct inspection under a strong light and preferably a means of magnification.
(1) Visually inspect all threaded ports for crossed, stripped, and otherwise damaged threads.
(2) Visually inspect all welded joints thoroughly. No defective welds allowed.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL HEATER ASSEMBLY – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test fuel heater assembly.
general purpose fluid heater (0 to commercially available

150°F (-18 to 66°C))
hydraulic pump (0 to 2,000 PSIG (0 commercially available

to 13,790 kPa) capacity)

accuracy)

temperature sensor (0 to 150°F (0 commercially available

to 66°C))


APPLICABLE.
plug (fuel) (threaded to mate with commercially available

PN SAE-AS5202-03 fluid boss
connection)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
plug (oil) (threaded to mate with PN commercially available

SAE-AS5202-08 fluid boss
connection)
JP-4 engine fuel (MIL-DTL-5624) commercially available
Type II test fluid (MIL-PRF-7024) commercially available
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-05-700-802-A01)
B. Perform Fuel Side Pressure and Leakage Test (Subtask 73-10-05-700-004-A01)
NOTE: Conduct test at room temperature.

(1) Using equipment listed below, set up equipment for fuel test. Refer to Test Setup A, Figure
13001.
• A plug (fuel)
• A general purpose fluid heater
• A supply of Type II, test fluid or JP-4, engine fuel
• A pressure gage, 0 to 2,000 PSIG (0 to 13,790 kPa)
• A temperature sensor
• A hydraulic pump
(2) Perform fuel leakage test as follows:
(a) Fill fuel side with Type II, test fluid or JP-4, engine fuel taking care to remove as much air
as possible. Refer to Figure 13001.
(b) Plug the fuel outlet port with plug (fuel). Leave both oil ports open.
(c) Connect hydraulic pump with Type II, test fluid and pressure gage, 0 to 2,000 PSIG (0 to
13,790 kPa) to the fuel inlet port.
(d) Position the unit to enable the detection of any inter-passage leakage.
(e) Apply between 1,575 to 1,585 PSIG (10,859 to 10,928 kPa) hydrostatic pressure at a fluid
temperature of 70 to 90°F (21.1 to 32.2°C) to the fuel inlet port for a minimum of 5 minutes.
(f) No leakage or permanent deformation of housing is allowed.
(g) Reduce pressure to zero and remove fuel heater assembly from test setup.
(h) Visually inspect fuel heater assembly for evidence of permanent deformation. No permanent
deformation allowed.
(i) Replace fuel heater assembly if it does not meet above test requirements.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13002
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Heater Assembly Test Setup (GRAPHIC 73-10-05-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13003
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
C. Perform Oil Side Pressure and Leakage Test (Subtask 73-10-05-700-005-A01)
NOTE: Conduct test at room temperature.

(1) Using equipment listed below, set up equipment for oil test. Refer to Test Setup B, Figure 13002.
• A plug (oil)
• A general purpose fluid heater
• A supply of MIL-PRF-7808, lubricating oil
• A pressure gage, 0 to 400 PSIG (0 to 2,758 kPa)
• A temperature sensor
• A hydraulic pump
(2) Perform oil pressure test.
(3) To determine isothermal oil pressure drop of the heater, apply MIL-PRF-7808, lubricating oil to
inlet port at a flow rate of 58 to 62 PPM at a temperature of 90 to 100°F (32.2 to 37.8°C). Maximum
pressure drop must be 20 PSI (138 kPa).
(4) Perform oil leakage test.
(a) Plug the oil outlet port with oil plug. Leave both fuel ports open.
(b) Apply MIL-PRF-7808, lubricating oil to oil inlet port to a pressure of 300 to 305 PSIG (2,068
to 2,103 kPa) at a temperature of 70 to 90°F (21.1 to 32.2°C) for a minimum of 5 minutes.
No leakage allowed.
(c) Reduce pressure to zero.
(d) Remove fuel heater assembly from test setup and drain oil.
(e) Visually inspect heater for evidence of permanent deformation. No permanent deformation
allowed.
(5) Replace fuel heater assembly if it does not meet above test requirements.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13004
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Heater Assembly Test Setup (GRAPHIC 73-10-05-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13005
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13006
73-10-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the fuel shutoff valve assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-06-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Fuel Shutoff Valve Assembly (Subtask 73-10-06-020-004-A01)
(1) Disconnect electrical connector and attached aircraft linkage from fuel shutoff valve assembly
(35, Figure 3001).
(2) Disconnect fuel shutoff valve assembly plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-01-3000).
(3) Remove bolts (40, 65, 80), washers (45, 60, 75, 90), nuts (55, 70, 85), fuel shutoff valve assembly
(35), and brackets (110, 115).
(4) Remove actuating arm (15) (manual override).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) Remove plug (5). Remove and discard packing (10).

(6) Remove fittings (120, 140) and packings (135, 145).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Shutoff Valve Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 73-10-06-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. PLUG 75. WASHER

15. ACTUATING ARM 85. NUT
20. NUT 90. WASHER
25. WASHER 95. NUT
30. SCREW 100. WASHER
35. FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY 105. BOLT
40. BOLT 110. BRACKET
45. WASHER 115. BRACKET
55. NUT 135. PACKING
60. WASHER 140. ORIFICED FITTING
70. NUT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the fuel shutoff valve assembly.



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

compound

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-06-420-802-A01)
B. Install Fuel Shutoff Valve Assembly (Subtask 73-10-06-420-004-A01)
plumbing fittings located forward of the aft compressor case flange unless otherwise
specified.
(1) Lubricate and install packings (10, 135, 145, Figure 4001).
(2) Make sure that fuel shutoff valve is in the AUTO position. Refer to Figure 4002.
NOTE: Fuel shutoff valve assembly is in AUTO position when index mark on end of fuel
shutoff valve assembly actuating shaft is in the vertical position.
(3) Install actuating arm (15, Figure 4001) (manual override) (as shown in Figure 4003) on fuel
shutoff valve assembly (35, Figure 4001) shaft extension. Secure with screw (30), washers (25),
and nut (20). Torque screw to 20 to 25 in-lb (2.3 to 2.8 Nm).
(4) Install fuel shutoff valve assembly (35) on brackets (110, 115). Secure with bolts (40, 65, 80),
washers (45, 60, 75, 90), and nuts (55, 70, 85).
(a) Make sure that a maximum of two washers (60) are installed between fuel shutoff valve
assembly (35) and bracket (110).
(b) Torque bolts (40) to 70 in-lb (7.9 Nm).
(c) Torque bolt (65) to 50 to 70 in-lb (5.6 to 7.9 Nm).
(d) Torque bolt (80, 85) to 20 to 25 in-lb (2.3 to 2.8 Nm).
(5) Install plug (5). Torque plug to 65 to 70 in-lb (7.3 to 7.9 Nm).
(6) Install union (120). Torque union to 60 to 65 in-lb (6.8 to 7.3 Nm).
(7) Install orificed fitting (140). Torque orificed fitting to 60 to 65 in-lb (6.8 to 7.3 Nm).
(8) Install assembled brackets and fuel shutoff valve on input housing assembly. Secure with bolts
(105), washers (100), and nuts (95). Torque bolts to 50 to 60 in-lb (5.6 to 6.8 Nm).
(9) Connect fuel shutoff valve assembly plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-01-4000).
(10) Connect electrical connector and connect aircraft linkage.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Shutoff Valve Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 73-10-06-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. PLUG 75. WASHER

20. NUT 90. WASHER
25. WASHER 95. NUT
70. NUT
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Shutoff Valve Assembly Arm Positions (Typical) (GRAPHIC
73-10-06-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4005
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Shutoff Valve Assembly Actuator Arm Installation (GRAPHIC
73-10-06-99B-003-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4006
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the fuel shutoff valve assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-06-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean fuel shutoff valve assembly (35, Figure 6001) external surface. Refer to CLEANING
(3) Clean fuel shutoff valve assembly electrical connector. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK
72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method 11.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Shutoff Valve Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 73-10-06-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. PLUG 75. WASHER

20. NUT 90. WASHER
25. WASHER 95. NUT
70. NUT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6003
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the fuel shutoff valve assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-06-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Fuel Shutoff Valve Assembly (Subtask 73-10-06-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect valve for cracks and other damage.

(2) Visually inspect electrical connector for bent, broken, or burned pins.
(3) Visually inspect splined external shaft for worn and damaged splines.
(4) Visually inspect threaded parts for crossed, galled, and peened threads.
(5) Visually inspect brackets for cracks and other damage.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
C. Check Fuel Shutoff Valve Assembly for Leakage (Subtask 73-10-06-200-005-A01)
(1) Disconnect fuel line from fuel shutoff valve assembly outlet port.
(2) Install slave line to allow leakage from fuel shutoff valve assembly to be collected.
(3) De-energize ignition system and remove electrical connector from fuel shutoff valve assembly.
STARTER-GENERATOR.
(4) Motor engine and monitor slave line connected to valve outlet. Measure outlet port leakage, if
any.
stop.
(5) Allowable fuel leakage is 2 drops (0.10 cc) in 2 minutes.

(6) If no leakage observed, or if leakage within limits, remove slave line from valve outlet and connect
engine fuel line.
(7) Re-energize ignition system and install electrical connector on fuel shutoff valve.
(8) If leakage observed exceeds allowable limits, activate manual shutoff by removing valve actuation
linkage and rotating valve actuator arm 90 degrees in the CW direction.
STARTER-GENERATOR.
(9) Motor engine and monitor slave line connected to valve outlet. Measure outlet port leakage, if
any.
stop.
(10) Allowable fuel leakage is 2 drops (0.10 cc) in 2 minutes.

(11) If leakage observed exceeds allowable limits, remove valve for excessive leakage.
(12) If no leakage was observed, or if leakage is within limits, recheck normal shutoff leakage as
follows:
(a) Return valve actuating arm to AUTO (original) position.
(b) Momentarily apply 24 to 28 VDC to valve connector Pins A (+) and C (-) to energize solenoid
to open position.
NOTE: It is necessary to open valve before rechecking leakage as the internal spring
will hold valve closed after mechanical shutoff is activated.
(c) Momentarily apply 24 to 28 VDC to valve connector Pins B (+) and C (-) to energize solenoid
to closed position.
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

STARTER-GENERATOR.
(d) Motor engine and monitor slave line connected to valve outlet. Measure outlet port leakage,
if any.
complete stop.
(e) Allowable fuel leakage is 2 drops (0.10 cc) in 2 minutes.

(13) If leakage observed exceeds allowable limits, remove valve for excessive leakage.
(14) If no leakage is observed, or leakage is within limits, remove slave line from valve outlet and
connect engine fuel line.
(15) Re-energize ignition system and install electrical connector on fuel shutoff valve.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8003
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test fuel shutoff valve assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-06-700-802-A01)
B. Test Fuel Shutoff Valve Assembly (Subtask 73-10-06-700-004-A01)
(1) Set manual override arm on valve to AUTO position.

(2) Check continuity across connector pins on electrical connector.
(a) Continuity across Pins A and C indicate Limit Switch 2 is closed and valve is closed.
(b) Continuity across Pins B and C indicate Limit Switch 1 is closed and valve is open.
(c) If valve is closed, perform the following steps:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING STEPS, DO NOT APPLY

VOLTAGE TO ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR PINS FOR LONGER THAN 1
SECOND. IF SWITCHES ARE NOT PROPERLY ADJUSTED, VOLTAGE
REMAINS APPLIED TO ELECTROMAGNETIC COILS CAUSING
OVERHEATING.
1 Momentarily apply 24 VDC maximum across Pins A and C.

a Valve must open and remain open when voltage is removed.
b There must be continuity across Pins B and C.
2 Momentarily apply 24 VDC maximum across Pins B and C.
a Valve must close and remain closed when voltage is removed.
b There must be continuity across Pins A and C.
3 Apply 24 VDC maximum across Pins A and C to open valve.
a With a torque measuring device, measure force required to close valve in using
manual override arm.
b Apply force parallel to valve axis.
c Force required must be 7.5 to 11 in-lb (0.8 to 1.2 Nm).
d Valve must hold in closed position with force removed.
(d) If valve is open, perform the following steps in sequence.
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING STEPS, DO NOT APPLY
VOLTAGE TO ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR PINS FOR LONGER THAN 1
SECOND. IF SWITCHES ARE NOT PROPERLY ADJUSTED, VOLTAGE
REMAINS APPLIED TO ELECTROMAGNETIC COILS CAUSING
OVERHEATING.

2 Momentarily apply 24 VDC maximum across Pins A and C.
a Valve must open and remain open when voltage is removed.
b There must be continuity across Pins B and C.
4 Apply 24 VDC maximum across Pins A and C to open valve.
a With a torque measuring device, measure force required to close valve in using
manual override arm.
b Apply force parallel to valve axis.
c Force required must be 7.5 to 11 in-lb (0.8 to 1.2 Nm).
d Valve must hold in closed position with force removed.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13002
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) If requirements are not met, proceed to Paragraph 2.C. Adjust Fuel Shutoff Valve Assembly
Limit Switches (Subtask 73-10-06-700-005-A01) to reset valve limit switches.
C. Adjust Fuel Shutoff Valve Assembly Limit Switches (Subtask 73-10-06-700-005-A01)
NOTE: Perform this procedure when switch adjustment is determined faulty during performance
of test instructions, Paragraph 2.B. Test Fuel Shutoff Valve Assembly (Subtask
73-10-06-700-004-A01). When index mark in valve shaft is in vertical position, valve is in
AUTO position.
(1) Set manual override arm shaft on fuel shutoff valve to MAN/OFF position, then to AUTO position.
Note position of manual override arm to aid reassembly.
(2) Remove bolt and nut securing manual override arm, then remove manual override arm.
(3) Remove three screws securing cover on fuel shutoff valve and remove cover and gasket.
(4) Connect continuity meter across Pins B and C of fuel shutoff valve electrical connector.
(5) Loosen locking screw securing bracket for close limit switch (nearest to manual override arm
shaft extension) 1/4 turn.
(6) Loosen locknut securing close limit switch positioning screw and turn screw CCW to obtain
continuity on continuity meter, then CW until continuity just breaks. Turn screw an additional 90
to 120 degrees CW. Make sure that there is clearance between close limit switch arm and pin
which actuates switch by moving against arm. If required, reposition close limit switch positioning
screw CW to obtain clearance. Torque locknut to 8 to 10 in-lb (0.9 to 1.1 Nm). Torque locking
screw to secure close limit switch bracket to 14 to 20 in-lb (1.6 to 2.3 Nm).
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING STEPS, DO NOT APPLY VOLTAGE TO
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR PINS FOR LONGER THAN 1 SECOND. IF SWITCHES
ARE NOT PROPERLY ADJUSTED, VOLTAGE REMAINS APPLIED TO
ELECTROMAGNETIC COILS CAUSING OVERHEATING.
(7) Momentarily apply 24 VDC across Pins A and C of fuel shutoff valve assembly electrical
connector. Valve must actuate open.
(8) Connect continuity meter to Pins A and C of electrical connector.
(9) Loosen locking screw securing bracket for open position switch (farthest from manual override
arm shaft extension) 1/4 turn.
(10) Loosen locknut securing open limit switch positioning screw and turn screw CW to obtain
continuity, then CCW until continuity just breaks. Turn screw an additional 90 to 120 degrees
CCW. Torque locknut to 8 to 10 in-lb (0.9 to 1.1 Nm). Torque locking screw to secure open limit
switch bracket to 14 to 20 in-lb (1.6 to 2.3 Nm).
(11) Apply 24 VDC to Pins B and C of electrical connector. Valve must close.
(12) Apply and maintain 24 VDC to Pins A and C of electrical connector. Valve must open.
(13) Rotate manual override arm shaft to MAN/OFF position. Valve must close and remain closed
when released. Remove voltage from electrical connector pins.
(14) Rotate manual override arm shaft to AUTO.
(15) Install cover and gasket on fuel shutoff valve and secure with screws.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13003
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(16) Install the removed manual override arm.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13004
73-10-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the fuel flow divider valve assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-07-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Fuel Flow Divider Valve Assembly (Subtask 73-10-07-020-004-A01)
(1) Disconnect fuel flow divider valve assembly plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
73-10-01-3000).
(2) Disconnect fuel manifold assemblies. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-09-3000).
(3) Remove nuts (5, 10, Figure 3001) washers (30, 35).
(4) Remove nuts (15) and bolts (20).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) Remove fuel flow divider valve assembly (25).

(6) Remove bolts (60), washers (65), and support (70).
(7) Remove unions (40, 50) and tee (95).
(9) Remove bolts (90, 105), washers (80), nuts (75, 100), bracket (85), and support (110) from
accessory drive housing assembly flange.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Flow Divider Valve Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 73-10-07-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 60. BOLT

10. NUT 65. WASHER
15. NUT 70. SUPPORT
20. BOLT 75. NUT
25. FLOW DIVIDER VALVE ASSEMBLY 80. WASHER
35. WASHER 90. BOLT
40. UNION 95. TEE
45. PACKING 100. NUT
50. UNION 105. BOLT
55. PACKING 110. SUPPORT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the fuel flow divider valve assembly.



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

compound

(MIL-PRF-907)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-07-420-802-A01)
B. Install Fuel Flow Divider Valve Assembly (Subtask 73-10-07-420-004-A01)
plumbing fittings located forward of the compressor housing unless otherwise specified.
NOTE: Apply Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound to threads of bolts and screws,
to thread (except first two threads) of male plumbing fittings located within or aft of the
compressor housing unless otherwise specified.
(2) Install unions (40, 50).
(a) Torque union (40) to 60 to 65 in-lb (6.8 to 7.3 Nm).
(b) Torque union (50) to 35 to 40 in-lb (4.0 to 4.5 Nm).
(3) Assemble bracket (85) and support (70) with bolts (20) and nuts (15). Torque bolts to 20 to 25
in-lb (2.3 to 2.8 Nm).
(4) Install assembled bracket and support on fuel flow divider valve assembly (25). Loosely secure
with bolts (60) and washers (65).
(5) Install support (110) on compressor case. Secure with bolts (105) and nuts (100). Torque nuts
to 50 to 60 in-lb (5.6 to 6.8 Nm).
(6) Install and adjust fuel flow divider assembly (25) using the procedure below.
(a) Install washers (30, 35) on unions (40, 50).
(b) Install fuel flow divider valve with bracket and support on input housing assembly and
secure with bolts (90), washers (80), and nuts (75). Torque bolts to 50 to 60 in-lb (5.6 to
6.8 Nm).
(c) Add or remove washers (35), as required, and adjust fuel flow divider assembly (25). Torque
bolts (60) to 20 to 25 in-lb (2.3 to 2.8 Nm).
NOTE: Use washers, as required, to eliminate gap between fuel flow divider valve
assembly and support.
(7) Install nuts (5, 10) on unions (40, 50).

(a) Torque nut (5) to 30 to 35 in-lb (3.4 to 4.0 Nm).
(b) Torque nut (10) to 50 to 55 in-lb (5.6 to 6.2 Nm).
(8) Install tee (95).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(9) Connect fuel manifold assemblies. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-09-4000).

(10) Connect fuel flow divider valve assembly plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK
73-10-01-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Flow Divider Valve Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 73-10-07-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 60. BOLT

10. NUT 65. WASHER
15. NUT 70. SUPPORT
20. BOLT 75. NUT
35. WASHER 90. BOLT
40. UNION 95. TEE
50. UNION 105. BOLT
(1) Not applicable..

UP495246
ALL Page 4005
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the fuel flow divider valve assembly.
beaker (200 ml capacity) commercially available
Model HT 1.9 heated tank ultrasonic cleaner Blackstone-NEY Ultrasonics, Inc.,

P.O. Box 220, 9 N. Main St.,
Jamestown, NY 14702-0220
Model S-2 Sonac ultrasonic cleaner (alternate Cooper Laboratories Inc, 300
for Model HT 1.9, Blackstone Fairfield Rd, Wayne, NJ
heated tank ultrasonic cleaner) 07407-07315
Wyandotte FS electrocleaner CAGE: 83339


APPLICABLE.
muriatic acid (ASTM E1146) commercially available
tap water (of drinking purity, 25 to commercially available

126 PSIG (172 to 869 kPa) at an
approximate rate of 2 1/2 GPM (9.5
L/min))
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN K-8864-10 ultrasonic cleaner (5.2 gallons) Cole-Parmer Instrument Co, 7425

N. Oak Park Ave, Chicago, IL 60648
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-07-100-802-A01)
WARNING: CLEANING MUST BE PERFORMED IN A CLEAN, WELL-VENTILATED ROOM. RUBBER

(1) Clean all standard metallic hardware. Refer CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean all fittings. Refer CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method 12.
(3) Clean external surface of fuel flow divider valve (25, Figure 6001). Refer CLEANING (PGBLK
(4) Clean internal parts of fuel flow divider valve (25). Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 73-10-07-9000).
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Flow Divider Valve Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 73-10-07-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6003
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 60. BOLT

10. NUT 65. WASHER
15. NUT 70. SUPPORT
20. BOLT 75. NUT
35. WASHER 90. BOLT
40. UNION 95. TEE
50. UNION 105. BOLT
C. Perform Special Cleaning (Subtask 73-10-07-100-005-A01)
NOTE: To perform a thorough cleaning of the metal filter use the sonic method. If the sonic method
is not available, use alternate method.
(1) (Preferred Method) Clean metallic filter element, sonic method as follows:
(a) Place filter element in beaker and fill beaker with acetone cleaner to submerge strainer
element of filter.
NOTE: A beaker is used in ultrasonic cleaner to conserve cleaning agent. Water is
used in Model HT 1.9, heated tank ultrasonic cleaner or Model S-2, Sonac
ultrasonic cleaner as transmitting fluid.
(b) Place beaker containing filter element in ultrasonic cleaner tank and fill ultrasonic cleaner
tank to within 0.375 inch (9.53 mm) of top with water.
(c) Operate PN K-8864-10, ultrasonic cleaner for 5 minutes.
(d) Discard contaminated acetone cleaner and rinse filter element and beaker with clean
acetone cleaner using plastic squeeze bottle.
UP495246
ALL Page 6004
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(e) Refill beaker with clean acetone cleaner and operate ultrasonic cleaner for an additional
5 minutes.
(f) Repeat the above two steps until acetone cleaner remains clean after a 5-minute operation
period.
(g) Remove the filter element from the beaker and blow dry using clean, low pressure air
supply.
(h) Install new packing in filter element.
(2) (Alternate Method) Clean metallic filter element as follows:
FIRE HAZARD.
(a) Remove packing and degrease filter element in cold MIL-PRF-680, solvent.
(b) Prepare solution of TT-C-490, alkaline cleaning solution by combining 3 to 5 pounds (1.36
to 2.27 kg) rust stripper to each gallon (3.8 L) of water. Maintain solution at 161 to 180°F
(72 to 82°C) with air agitation. Soak filter in solution for 30 minutes.
(c) Remove filter element from solution and rinse thoroughly with clean water.
(d) Prepare an electrocleaner solution by combining 9 ounces (29.6 mL) of Wyandotte FS,
electrocleaner to each one gallon (3.8 L) of water. Maintain solution at 161 to 200°F (72
to 93°C). Immerse filter element in electrocleaner solution for 4 to 6 minutes. During this
period, filter element must be made an anode for 1 to 2 minutes at a potential of 4 to 7
VDC. Rinse filter element in cold running tap water.
(e) Immerse filter element in equal parts muriatic acid and water, by volume, at room
temperature for 30 seconds to 1 minute. Rinse element thoroughly in cold running tap
water.
(f) Immerse filter element in Wyandotte FS, electrocleaner solution maintained at temperature
of 161 to 205°F (72 to 96°C) for 4 to 6 minutes. Rinse in cold running tap water.
UP495246
ALL Page 6005
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(g) Rinse filter element in clean hot water. Dry filter element with filtered compressed air. If
cleaned filter element is not to be used immediately in present assembly, place filter element
in clean container.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6006
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the fuel flow divider valve assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-07-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Flow Divider Valve (Subtask 73-10-07-200-004-A01)
(1) Inspect valve for cracks or obvious damage.

(2) Inspect threaded parts for damaged threads.
(3) Inspect for evidence of fuel leakage from drain with parts installed. Refer to FAULT ISOLATION
(PGBLK 72-00-00-1000) for maximum allowable leakage. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
73-10-07-9000) for repair procedure.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the fuel flow divider valve assembly.



APPLICABLE.
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-07-300-802-A01)
B. Partially Disassemble Flow Divider Valve for Cleaning/Inspection (Subtask 73-10-07-300-004-A01)
CAUTION: USE SPECIAL CARE TO AVOID LOSING OR DAMAGING SMALL PRECISION PARTS.
NOTE: Performance of the following procedure is recommended when malfunction of the drain
valve portion of the flow divider valve is indicated by evidence of leakage or through testing.
Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 73-10-07-13000).
(1) Remove tube nipple (85, Figure 9001), filter (95), and spring (100).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Remove screws (5), cover (10), and packing (15).

(4) Remove assembled drain valve assemblies.
NOTE: Drain valve assembly is a matched set. Make sure that parts are not interchanged
with parts from other drain valve assemblies. Record number and thickness of washers
removed to aid in reassembly.
(5) Remove washers (80) from housing assembly (150).

(6) Disassemble drain valve assemblies.
NOTE: Components of drain valve assembly are spring loaded.
(a) Remove retaining ring (25).

(b) Disassemble drain housing (30), sleeve (35), spring (40), washer (45), and drain valve
piston (50).
(c) Remove and discard packings (55, 60, 65, 70, 75).
(7) Loosen nut (120). Remove special fitting (105), backup ring (115), and nut.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Flow Divider Valve Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 73-10-07-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

10. COVER 75. PACKING
15. PACKING 80.
1 WASHER
25. RETAINING RING 85. TUBE NIPPLE

30. DRAIN HOUSING 90. PACKING
35. SLEEVE 95. FILTER
40. SPRING 100. SPRING
1 WASHER 105. SPECIAL FITTING
45.
50. DRAIN VALVE PISTON 110. PACKING
55. PACKING 115. BACKUP RING
65. PACKING 125. HOUSING ASSEMBLY
NOTES:
1. REFER TO IPC, 72-01-34 FOR DETAILS ON AVAILABLE WASHER THICKNESS.
C. Clean Fuel Flow Divider Valve Assembly Components (Subtask 73-10-07-300-005-A01)
(1) Clean filter and fuel flow divider internal components. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK
73-10-07-6000).

(2) Clean all other parts with MIL-PRF-680, solvent, then dry with clean low pressure compressed
air.
D. Inspect Parts (Subtask 73-10-07-300-006-A01)
(1) Visually inspect all parts for damage and deterioration which could cause possible malfunction
or leakage.
(2) Visually inspect filter for cracks, tears, and deformation.
(3) Inspect housing assembly.
(a) Visually inspect threaded ports for damaged threads.
(b) Visually inspect all exposed passages and bores for obstructions and foreign matter.
(4) Inspect drain valve assembly components for freedom from nicks, burrs, and scoring.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9004
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) Check piston for freedom of movement in drain valve sleeve.

(6) Replace parts if inspection requirements are not met.
E. Assemble Flow Divider Valve (Subtask 73-10-07-300-007-A01)
NOTE: Drain valve components are a matched set. Make sure that components are not
interchanged with components of other drain valve assemblies.
(1) Install new packing (90, Figure 9002) on tube nipple.
(2) Install spring (100), filter (95), and tube nipple (85). Torque tube nipple to 75 to 80 in-lb (8.5 to
9.0 Nm).
(3) Install same number and thickness of washers (80) removed in Paragraph 2.B. Partially
Disassemble Flow Divider Valve for Cleaning/Inspection (Subtask 73-10-07-300-004-A01),
housing assembly drain valve bore.
(4) Assemble drain valve assembly.
(a) Install new packings (60, 70, 75).
(b) Assemble drain housing (30), sleeve (35), spring (40), washer (45), and drain valve piston
(50).
(c) Install retaining ring (25).
(5) Install drain valve assembly.
(6) Install cover (10) and secure with screws (5). Torque screws to 20 in-lb (2.3 Nm).
(7) Install new packing (110), nut (120), and backup ring (115) on special fitting (105).
(8) Install special fitting (105) in housing assembly (125). Secure with nut (120).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9005
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Flow Divider Valve Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 73-10-07-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9006
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

10. COVER 75. PACKING
15. PACKING 80.
1 WASHER
25. RETAINING RING 85. TUBE NIPPLE

30. DRAIN HOUSING 90. PACKING
35. SLEEVE 95. FILTER
40. SPRING 100. SPRING
1 WASHER 105. SPECIAL FITTING
45.
50. DRAIN VALVE PISTON 110. PACKING
55. PACKING 115. BACKUP RING
65. PACKING 125. HOUSING ASSEMBLY
NOTES:
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9007
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE ASSEMBLY – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test fuel flow divider valve assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-07-700-802-A01)
B. Testing (Subtask 73-10-07-700-004-A01)
NOTE: The fuel manifold purge system incorporates a one-way check valve which is connected
to the flow divider drain port. The drain valves open during the last phase of engine
shutdown and remain open until the first part of the following start cycle. The check valve
prevents any fuel from flowing into the pneumatic system of the fuel manifold purge system
upon engine start and shutdown.
NOTE: Upon engine shutdown, the fuel purge solenoid valve is actuated simultaneously with the
engine fuel shutoff valve. Bleed-air that is stored in the accumulator is forced through the
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
fuel flow divider and fuel manifolds. Fuel purge system will not totally charge unless a
minimum engine RPM of 95 percent is attained during the operational cycle.
(1) Perform a normal engine start. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000). Make sure that
acceleration time and starting temperature are within normal operating limits. Using observer,
check for fuel leaks.
(2) Upon engine shutdown, monitor the engine tachometer indicator for an increase of engine speed.
Any increase of engine speed denotes a properly operating purge system.
(3) If no increase in engine speed is noted, the following action must be taken:
(a) Remove electrical connector at the fuel purge solenoid valve. Using voltmeter, check for
voltage at the connector. If voltage is not available, refer to AMM.
(b) If the above step is satisfactory, apply 24 VDC across Pins A and B of electrical connector
of solenoid valve. Valve must open. If valve is found defective, replace.
(c) If the above step is satisfactory, disassemble, inspect, and replace packings. Complete
the steps below. Replace flow divider valve if problem still exists.
1 Perform a normal engine start. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000). Make
sure that acceleration time and starting temperature are within normal operating limits.
Using observer, check for fuel leaks.
2 Upon engine shutdown, monitor the engine tachometer indicator for an increase of
engine speed. Any increase of engine speed denotes a properly operating purge
system.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13002
73-10-07 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PRI ONLY SOLENOID VALVE – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the PRI only solenoid valve.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-08-020-802-A01)
B. Remove PRI Only Solenoid Valve (Subtask 73-10-08-020-004-A01)
(1) Disconnect electrical connectors.

NOTE: Provide a suitable container to drain residual fuel from fuel lines and PRI only solenoid
valve.
(2) Disconnect PRI only solenoid valve (65, Figure 3001) plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
73-10-01-3000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
73-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Remove nuts (5), bolts (10), and PRI only solenoid valve (65) with bracket (30) from input housing
assembly.
(4) Disassemble nuts (15), bolts (20), washers (25), PRI only solenoid valve (65), and bracket (30).
(5) Remove elbow (40), nut (50), and reducer (55).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
73-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) PRI Only Solenoid Valve Removal (GRAPHIC 73-10-08-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 40. ELBOW

15. NUT 50. NUT
30. BRACKET 65. SOLENOID VALVE (PRI ONLY)
35. WASHER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
73-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PRI ONLY SOLENOID VALVE – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the PRI only solenoid valve.



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

compound

(MIL-PRF-907)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
73-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-08-420-802-A01)
B. Install PRI Only Solenoid Valve (Subtask 73-10-08-420-004-A01)
screws and to threads (except first two threads) of male plumbing fittings located forward
of the aft compressor case flange unless otherwise specified.
and to threads (except first two threads) of male plumbing fittings located aft of the
compressor case unless otherwise specified.
(2) Install reducer (55). Torque reducer (55) to 60 to 65 in-lb (6.8 to 7.3 Nm).
(3) Install nut (50) on elbow (40). Install elbow (40).
(4) Install PRI only solenoid valve (65) on bracket (30). Secure with bolts (20), washers (25, 35),
and nuts (15). Torque nuts (15) to 27 to 35 in-lb (3.1 to 4.0 Nm).
NOTE: Make sure that PRI only solenoid valve (65) is installed with the flow arrow in direction
shown in Figure 4001.
(5) Install PRI only solenoid valve (65) with bracket (30). Secure with bolts (10) and nuts (5). Torque
bolts (10) to 50 to 60 in-lb (5.6 to 6.8 Nm).
(6) Connect PRI only solenoid valve (65) plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-01-4000).
(7) Connect electrical connector.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
73-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) PRI Only Solenoid Valve Installation (GRAPHIC 73-10-08-99B-001-A01)
5. NUT 40. ELBOW

15. NUT 50. NUT
30. BRACKET 65. SOLENOID VALVE (PRI ONLY)
35. WASHER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
73-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PRI ONLY SOLENOID VALVE – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the PRI only solenoid valve.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-08-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean all fittings. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method 12.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6001
73-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PRI ONLY SOLENOID VALVE – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the PRI only solenoid valve.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-08-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect PRI Only Solenoid Valve (Subtask 73-10-08-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect solenoid valve body for dents, cracks, and obvious damage. No dents, cracks,
or obvious damage allowed.
(2) Visually inspect electrical connector for bent, broken, or burned pins. No bent, broken, or burned
pins allowed.
(3) Visually inspect threaded parts for stripped, galled, or peened threads. No stripped, galled, or
peened threads allowed.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
73-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
C. Check PRI Only Solenoid Valve (Subtask 73-10-08-200-005-A01)
(1) Check for continuity across Pins A and B of electrical connector. Continuity must be indicated.
(2) Apply 24 VDC across Pins A and B of electrical connector to energize electromagnet assembly.
The valve must open. Remove the 24 VDC from Pins A and B of electrical connector. The valve
must close.
(3) If normally closed solenoid valve does not meet check requirements, replace valve.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
73-10-08 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-09-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Fuel Manifold Assemblies, Fuel Nozzle Assemblies, and Plumbing (Subtask
73-10-09-020-004-A01)
NOTE: The primary and secondary fuel manifold assemblies are identical and may be replaced
individually. If either fuel manifold assembly is damaged or plugged, remove the affected
fuel manifold.
NOTE: Provide a suitable container to drain residual fuel from fuel manifold assemblies and fuel
flow divider.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Remove nut (5, Figure 3001), bolt (10), and clamps (15, 20).
(2) Remove tube assemblies (25, 35), seals (40, 55), and tees (45, 60).
(3) Disconnect tube assemblies (25, 35).
CAUTION: USE WRENCH FLATS LOCATED AT SECONDARY NOZZLE CONNECTION WHEN
LOOSENING PRIMARY AND SECONDARY MANIFOLD TUBE NUT CONNECTION
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO FUEL NOZZLE ASSEMBLY. REFER TO FIGURE 3002.
CAUTION: USE EXTREME CARE WHEN HANDLING FUEL NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES TO

PREVENT DAMAGE TO NOZZLE TIPS AND MATING SURFACES.
(4) Remove nut (80, Figure 3001), bolt (85), and loop clamp (90).
(5) Remove lock pins (95, 115, 135) and locking plates (100, 120, 140).
(6) Loosen and remove fuel manifold assemblies (70) and seals (75).
(7) Remove bolts (105, 125, 145, Figure 3001), fuel nozzle assemblies (150), and packings (155).
NOTE: Fuel nozzle assembly packings may be reused if no distress is noted and no indication
of leakage can be found on turbine plenum bosses.
(8) Inspect fuel manifold assemblies. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 73-10-09-8000).

(9) Inspect fuel nozzle assemblies. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 73-10-09-8000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Manifold Assemblies, Fuel Nozzle Assemblies, and Plumbing Removal
(GRAPHIC 73-10-09-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 85. BOLT

10. BOLT 90. LOOP CLAMP
15. CLAMP 95. LOCK PIN
20. CLAMP 100. LOCKING PLATE
25. TUBE ASSEMBLY 105. BOLT
30. SEAL 110. BRACKET
35. TUBE ASSEMBLY 115. LOCK PIN
40. SEAL 120. LOCKING PLATE
45. TEE 125. BOLT
50. CAP ASSEMBLY 130. LOOP CLAMP
55. SEAL 135. LOCK PIN
60. TEE 140. LOCKING PLATE
65. CAP ASSEMBLY 145. BOLT
70. FUEL MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY 150. FUEL NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
75. SEAL 155. PACKING
80. NUT 160. FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE ASSEMBLY
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3002. (Sheet 1 of 1) (PN 3103235-8/PN 3103235-10) Fuel Nozzle Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC
73-10-09-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3005
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. FUEL NOZZLE (NOZZLE TIP) 30. SCREEN

25. SPRING 35. FUEL NOZZLE BODY
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3006
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies.



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

(MIL-PRF-907)
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-09-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Fuel Manifold and Fuel Nozzle Assemblies (Subtask 73-10-09-420-004-A01)
CAUTION: USE EXTREME CARE WHEN HANDLING FUEL NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES TO PREVENT
DAMAGE TO NOZZLE TIPS AND MATING SURFACES.
CAUTION: USE EXTREME CARE WHEN INSTALLING FUEL NOZZLES TO MAKE SURE THAT
NOZZLE IS FULLY SEATED IN COMBUSTION CHAMBER CASE. IMPROPER SEATING
WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO FUEL NOZZLE AND COMBUSTION CHAMBER CASE
ASSEMBLY.
CAUTION: RETEST OF FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLY (SET OF TEN FUEL NOZZLES)
IS REQUIRED IF INDIVIDUAL FUEL NOZZLE(S) IS REPLACED FOR ANY REASON.
CAUTION: FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLY THAT MEET TEST REQUIREMENTS MUST
BE MAINTAINED AS A SET (TEN FUEL NOZZLES).
and to threads (except first two threads) of male plumbing fittings located aft of the
compressor case unless otherwise specified.
(1) Install packing (155, Figure 4001) on fuel nozzle assembly (150).
NOTE: Apply Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound to threads of bolts and
fittings prior to installation.
NOTE: Install thermocouple bracket at upper fuel nozzle mount at the 2 o'clock position.
(2) Install fuel nozzle assemblies (150) on turbine plenum. Secure with bolts (145). Tighten bolts
hand tight.
(3) Install bracket (110) on left side of fuel nozzle assembly (viewed from aft end of engine) and
secure with bolt (105). Tighten bolts hand tight.
(4) Install loop clamp (130) on thermocouple cable assembly and secure on left side of fuel nozzle
assembly (viewed from aft of engine) with bolt (125). Tighten bolts hand tight.
(5) Align primary fuel manifold assembly with fuel nozzle assemblies, align tube nut (fuel inlet) at
approximately 5 o'clock position (facing flow divider).
CAUTION: INSTALL CONICAL SEAL ONLY IF A FUEL LEAK EXISTS.
(6) Install primary manifold assembly tube nuts loosely on fuel nozzle assembly fittings marked “P”.
NOTE: For use of conical seals, refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 73-10-09-9000).
(7) Align secondary fuel manifold assembly with fuel nozzle assemblies, locate tube nut (fuel inlet)
at approximately 7 o'clock position (facing exhaust pipe).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: INSTALL CONICAL SEAL ONLY IF A FUEL LEAK EXISTS.
(8) Install secondary manifold assembly tube nuts loosely on fuel nozzle assembly fittings marked
“S”.
NOTE: For use of conical seals, refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 73-10-09-9000).
(9) Torque bolts (105, 125, 145, Figure 4001) securing fuel nozzle assemblies to 60 in-lb (6.8 Nm).
CAUTION: USE BACKUP WRENCH ON FLATS OF SECONDARY FUEL MANIFOLD FITTINGS
WHEN INSTALLING ELBOW AND TUBE ASSEMBLY TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO
SECONDARY FUEL MANIFOLD. REFER TO FIGURE 4002.
(10) Assemble tube assemblies (25, 35), seals (40, 55), and tees (45, 60).
(11) Install tube assemblies between primary and secondary fuel manifold assemblies (70) and fuel
flow divider valve assembly (160).
(12) Install clamps (15, 20) on tube assemblies between fuel manifold assemblies and fuel flow divider
valve assembly. Secure clamps to one another with nut (5) and bolt (10). Torque bolt to 27 to
35 in-lb (3.1 to 4.0 Nm).
(13) Install loop clamp (90) on thermocouple cable assembly and secure to bracket with nut (80) and
bolt (85). Torque bolt to 27 to 35 in-lb (3.1 to 4.0 Nm).
CAUTION: USE BACKUP WRENCH ON FLATS OF PRIMARY AND/OR SECONDARY
CONNECTION FITTINGS WHEN TORQUING MANIFOLD NUTS AND TUBE NUTS
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE MANIFOLD ASSEMBLIES.
(14) Tighten connections as follows:

(a) Torque primary manifold assembly nuts at tee (45, Figure 4001) and fuel nozzle assembly
(150) connections to 110 to 120 in-lb (12.4 to 13.6 Nm) (with conical seals, torque to 165
to 190 in-lb (18.6 to 21.5 Nm)).
(b) Torque tube assembly (25) tube nuts at tee (45) and fuel flow divider connection. Torque
cap (50) at tee (45) to 110 to 120 in-lb (12.4 to 13.6 Nm) (with conical seals, torque to 165
to 190 in-lb (18.6 to 21.5 Nm)).
(c) Torque secondary manifold tube nuts at tee (60) and fuel nozzle assembly (150). Torque
cap (65), at tee (60) connections to 110 to 120 in-lb (12.4 to 13.6 Nm) (with conical seals,
torque to 165 to 190 in-lb (18.6 to 21.5 Nm)).
(15) Secure bolts (105, 125, 145) using one of the three following methods:
(a) (Method 1) Secure bolts with locking plates and pins.
CAUTION: LOCKING PLATES FIT ONLY ON INBOARD SIDE OF FUEL NOZZLE
ASSEMBLIES. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL LOCKING PLATE OVER
FUEL INLET BOSSES. DAMAGE TO LOCKING PLATES WILL RESULT.
1 Align locking plate (100, 120, 140) hole serrations with fuel nozzle mounting bolt (105,
125, 145) serrations. Tighten bolts slightly if required to obtain alignment.
NOTE: Fuel nozzle mounting bolts may be torqued to an additional 5 in-lb (0.6
Nm) maximum over normal installation torque if required to obtain
alignment of locking plates with bolt heads.
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2 Install straight leg of lock pins (95, 115, 135) in bolt (105, 125, 145) so open end of
pin (legs) points toward bottom of engine and pin locking feature engages bolt head
center hole.
3 Repeat the above two steps for each fuel nozzle assembly.
(b) (Method 2) Secure bolts with locking plates and lockwire.
CAUTION: LOCKING PLATES FIT ONLY ON INBOARD SIDE OF FUEL NOZZLE
ASSEMBLIES. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL LOCKING PLATE OVER
FUEL INLET BOSSES. DAMAGE TO LOCKING PLATES WILL RESULT.
1 Align locking plate (100, 120, 140, Figure 4001) hole serrations with fuel nozzle
mounting bolt (105, 125, 145) serrations. Tighten bolts slightly if required to obtain
alignment.
NOTE: Fuel nozzle mounting bolts may be torqued to an additional 5 in-lb (0.6
Nm) maximum over normal installation torque if required to obtain
alignment of locking plates with bolt heads.
2 Secure locking plates with lockwire.

(c) (Method 3) Secure bolts with lockwire.
(16) Perform fuel manifold and fuel nozzle assembly functional check. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK
72-00-00-13000).
(17) Start and operate engine and check for fuel leaks at fuel manifold tube nut connection points,
between fuel manifold and fuel flow divider connection points and at fuel nozzle assembly bosses.
If leakage exists between fuel manifold and fuel nozzle assemblies, refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
73-10-09-9000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Manifold Assemblies, Fuel Nozzle Assemblies, and Plumbing Installation
(GRAPHIC 73-10-09-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4005
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 85. BOLT

10. BOLT 90. LOOP CLAMP
15. CLAMP 95. LOCK PIN
20. CLAMP 100. LOCKING PLATE
30. SEAL 110. BRACKET
35. TUBE ASSEMBLY 115. LOCK PIN
40. SEAL 120. LOCKING PLATE
45. TEE 125. BOLT
50. CAP ASSEMBLY 130. LOOP CLAMP
55. SEAL 135. LOCK PIN
60. TEE 140. LOCKING PLATE
65. CAP ASSEMBLY 145. BOLT
70. FUEL MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY 150. FUEL NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
75. SEAL 155. PACKING
80. NUT 160. FUEL FLOW DIVIDER VALVE ASSEMBLY
UP495246
ALL Page 4006
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) (PN 3103235-8/PN 3103235-10) Fuel Nozzle Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC
73-10-09-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4007
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4008
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES – DISASSEMBLY
(1) Use these procedures to disassemble the fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies.
modified 7/16-inch crowfoot wrench CAGE: 06848

(component of PN 298235-1)
PN 298235-1 fuel nozzle holder (used to secure CAGE: 06848

nozzle body during
assembly/disassembly, must be
secured in a bench vise)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-09-030-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 5001
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. (PN 3103235-8/PN 3103235-10) Disassemble Fuel Nozzle Assembly (Subtask

73-10-09-030-004-A01)
NOTE: Prior to disassembly of fuel nozzle, visually inspect the secondary tube fitting for braze
cracks. No cracks allowed. Return cracked fuel nozzle(s) to Honeywell International Inc,
Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440 for repair.
CAUTION: USE WRENCH FLATS OF FUEL NOZZLE BODY WHEN REMOVING FUEL NOZZLE
BODY FROM NOZZLE TIP.
(1) Install nozzle tip (5, Figure 5001) in PN 298235-1, fuel nozzle holder (Figure 5002).
(2) Remove fuel nozzle body (35, Figure 5001) using modified 7/16-inch crowfoot wrench (a
component of PN 298235-1, fuel nozzle holder) on fuel nozzle body wrench flats.
(3) Remove screen (30), crossover plate, spring (25), primary plug, and primary body.
NOTE: Primary plug, primary body, and crossover plate are a matched set and must not be
mixed with other assemblies.
(4) Clean fuel nozzle assembly component parts. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 73-10-09-6000).
UP495246
ALL Page 5002
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5001. (Sheet 1 of 1) (PN 3103235-8/PN 3103235-10) Fuel Nozzle Assembly (GRAPHIC
73-10-09-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 5003
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
ALL Page 5004
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Nozzle Disassembly (GRAPHIC 73-10-09-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 5005
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
C. (PN 3103235-9/PN 3103235-11) Fuel Nozzle Disassembly (Subtask 73-10-09-030-005-A01)
NOTE: Prior to disassembly of fuel nozzle, visually inspect the secondary tube fitting for braze
cracks. No cracks allowed. Return cracked fuel nozzle(s) to Honeywell International Inc,
Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle, Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440 for repair.
CAUTION: USE WRENCH FLATS OF FUEL NOZZLE BODY WHEN REMOVING FUEL NOZZLE
BODY FROM FUEL NOZZLE.
(1) Place nozzle tip (5, Figure 5003) in PN 298235-1, fuel nozzle holder (Figure 5004).
(2) Remove fuel nozzle body (35, Figure 5003) using modified 7/16-inch crowfoot wrench (component
of PN 298235-1, fuel nozzle holder) on fuel nozzle body wrench flats.
(3) Remove screen (30) and crossover plate from fuel nozzle.
NOTE: Do not attempt to remove parts other than screen and crossover plate from fuel nozzle
assembly.
(4) Clean fuel nozzle assembly component parts. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 73-10-09-6000).
UP495246
ALL Page 5006
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
73-10-09-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 5007
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. FUEL NOZZLE (NOZZLE TIP) 35. FUEL NOZZLE BODY

30. SCREEN
UP495246
ALL Page 5008
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 5004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Nozzle Disassembly (GRAPHIC 73-10-09-99B-004-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 5009
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 5010
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies.

(510°C))
K-8863-10 ultrasonic tank (2.6 gallon (9.8 L)) Cole-Palmer Instrument Co., 7425
N. Oak Park Ave., Chicago, IL
60648


APPLICABLE.
de-ionized water commercially available
distilled water commercially available
isopropyl alcohol (TT-I-735) commercially available
nitric acid (A-A-59105) commercially available

UP495246
ALL Page 6001
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
tap water (of drinking purity, 25 to commercially available

126 PSIG (172 to 869 kPa) at an
approximate rate of 2 1/2 GPM (9.5
L/min))
Oakite Rustripper alkaline cleaning solution CAGE: 44389

(TT-C-490)
Turco 4181 GL cleaning solution CAGE: 61102
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-09-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean manifold assembly. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method 12.
C. Clean Component Parts of Disassembled Fuel Nozzles (Subtask 73-10-09-100-005-A01)

NOTE: Fuel nozzle component parts are matched sets and must be kept segregated.
NOTE: Fuel nozzle body must be cleaned by baking.
(1) Clean parts with MIL-PRF-680, solvent to remove oil and grease contamination.
WARNING: EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN PREPARING RUST STRIPPER SOLUTION.
USE OF RESPIRATOR IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED. MIXING MAY PRODUCE
TEMPERATURES EXCEEDING THE BOILING POINT OF THE SOLUTION.
CAUTION: FUEL NOZZLE PARTS ARE SUSCEPTIBLE TO CHEMICAL ATTACK AT THE

TEMPERATURE USED IN THIS PROCEDURE IF STRENGTH OF SOLUTION IS
STRONGER THAN SPECIFIED.
(2) Dissolve 8 to 10 ounces (227 to 284 g) of Oakite Rustripper, alkaline cleaning solution or Turco
4181 GL, cleaning solution in 1 gallon (3.8 L) of distilled water, or de-ionized water.
NOTE: OaKite Rustripper and Turco Alkaline Rust Remover (ARR) T-4181 have been tested
and determined effective for cleaning fuel nozzles.
(3) Remove carbon using one of the following procedures:

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(a) Procedure A.
1 Place parts in Oakite Rustripper, alkaline cleaning solution solution (soak tank) heated
to 190 to 210°F (88 to 99°C) and soak for 45 to 75 minutes.
NOTE: Segregate nozzle component parts in basket for cleaning.
2 Remove parts from solution and place in similar solution of Oakite Rustripper, alkaline
cleaning solution in an K-8863-10, ultrasonic tank heated to 150 to 160°F (65 to 71°C)
for 30 to 45 minutes.
3 Remove parts from ultrasonic tank and return to soak tank for 45 to 75 minutes.
4 Proceed to the step to remove parts from solution and thoroughly rinse in tap water.
(b) Procedure B.
1 Place parts in TT-C-490, alkaline cleaning solution solution maintained at 212 to
220°F (100 to 104°C) (rapid boil). Basket must be suspended approximately 1 inch
(25.4 mm) above bottom of container. A vented lid may be placed over container to
minimize heat loss.
NOTE: Segregate nozzle component parts in basket for cleaning.
2 Rapidly boil nozzle components in solution for 2 hours.

3 Proceed to the the next step.
(4) Remove parts from solution and thoroughly rinse in tap water.
(5) Soak parts in hot water at 160 to 180°F (71 to 82°C) for 5 to 10 minutes. If water becomes cloudy,
replace water and repeat step.
WARNING: NITRIC ACID IS EXTREMELY DANGEROUS. ALWAYS ADD ACID TO WATER,
NEVER ADD WATER TO ACID.
SOLUTION.
(6) Prepare nitric acid bath by mixing 1 part nitric acid with 9 parts water.
UP495246
ALL Page 6003
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
SOLUTION.
CAUTION: PARTS MUST NOT BE IMMERSED IN NITRIC ACID BATH LONGER THAN 2
MINUTES.
(7) Dip parts in 10 percent nitric acid bath for a maximum of 2 minutes, remove and immediately
immerse in cold tap water bath.
(8) Rinse parts thoroughly with cold tap water.
(9) Blow dry parts with filtered shop air.

(10) Immerse in isopropyl alcohol and agitate for 5 minutes to make sure of complete removal of all
water. Remove and blow dry.
(11) Inspect parts for evidence of contamination. Repeat cleaning cycle if required.
(12) Immerse in MIL-PRF-680, solvent to prevent corrosion, drip dry.
D. Clean Fuel Nozzle Body By Baking (Subtask 73-10-09-100-006-A01)
(1) Remove surface dirt and grime from fuel nozzle body using soft-plastic fiber-bristled brush.
(2) Flush fuel nozzle body, under pressure, with tap water to remove fuel or solvent that may ignite
in oven.
(3) Dry fuel nozzle body using low pressure filtered shop air.
(4) Place fuel nozzle body in oven and bake at 935 to 965°F (502 to 518°C) for 3 hours 45 minutes
to 4 hours 15 minutes.
NOTE: Discoloration of fuel nozzle body is acceptable after baking.
(5) Remove fuel nozzle body and allow to cool to room temperature.
UP495246
ALL Page 6004
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(6) Flush with demineralized water for 3 to 5 minutes and rinse with isopropyl alcohol.
(7) Dry fuel nozzle body using low pressure filtered shop air.
(8) For nozzle assembly procedure, refer to ASSEMBLY (PGBLK 73-10-09-10000).
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6005
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies.



APPLICABLE.
bristled brass brush commercially available
PN MS20995C20 lockwire (0.020 inch) commercially available
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-09-200-802-A01)
B. Check Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly (Installed) (Subtask 73-10-09-200-004-A01)
(1) Check fuel manifold and nozzle assembly for security and evidence of fuel leakage.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
C. Inspect Removed Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assemblies (Subtask 73-10-09-200-005-A01)
CAUTION: IF NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES ARE REMOVED FROM FLEXIBLE FUEL MANIFOLDS, NOZZLE
ASSEMBLIES PRIMARY AND SECONDARY INLET FITTINGS SHOULD BE IMMEDIATELY
CAPPED TO AVOID CONTAMINATION DURING INSPECTION.
(1) Inspect nozzle assemblies as follows:
(a) Inspect nozzle tip locking ring for secure staking in fuel nozzle body locking groove (10,
any one of four locations). Refer to Figure 8001.
(b) Inspect the nozzle tip-to-body threaded joint (3) and body slip joint (2) for indications of
fuel leakage. Replace nozzle assembly if leakage is evident at either location.
(c) Inspect air inlet side of nozzle tip at swirl vanes and air inlet (1) for areas plugged with
debris.
(d) Remove debris using compressed air or gently dislodging debris using 0.02-inch (5.1 mm)
PN MS20995C20, lockwire (0.020 inch) or equivalent instrument.
(e) Visually inspect lip of air sweep shroud (7, View A) for deformation or burning. Deformation
of lip causes Dimension B to vary. Acceptable tolerance of Dimension B is 0.030 to 0.050
inch (0.76 to 1.27 mm). Carefully straighten deformed lip or replace nozzle assembly if
Dimension B cannot be met.
(f) Visually inspect lip of air sweep shroud (7, View A) for cracks (9, View A). A maximum of
3 radial, non-intersecting cracks permitted in shroud lip. Maximum crack length 0.080 inch
(2.03 mm). Replace nozzle assembly if limits are exceeded.
(g) Visually inspect lip of air sweep shroud (7, View A) for material loss (8, View A). Acceptable
material loss not to exceed area equivalent to two adjoining holes measured at OD in not
more than three separate locations. Remove carbon deposits on nozzle shroud face using
a bristled brass brush or equivalent. Replace nozzle assembly if limits are exceeded.
CAUTION: EXERCISE CARE NOT TO NICK OR SCRATCH THE EXIT ORIFICES (5), FUEL
SPRAY STREAKING MAY RESULT.
(h) Visually inspect inner air blast passages (6) and cavity for carbon deposits. A light soot
film on the surfaces is allowed.
(i) Visually inspect outer air blast passage (4) for carbon deposits. A light soot film or fuel
deposit staining on this surface is allowed.
(j) Use clean compressed air to remove lodged carbon deposits.

(k) Inspect for cracks in brazed joints. No cracks allowed.
(l) Inspect conical sealing surface(s) for burrs, chatter marks, flat spots, and circumferential
grooves. Criterion for acceptance is no leakage allowed during testing. Refer to
INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000), for minor conical sealing surface repair.
(m) Inspect threads for damage. No thread damage allowed.
(n) Inspect for deformation between fuel nozzle body and nozzle tip adapter as follows:
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1 Measure Dimension A and B at location illustrated in Figure 8002. Position alignment

pin as shown.
2 Difference between Dimension A and B must not exceed 0.01 inch (0.25 mm).
3 Replace fuel nozzle body if inspection requirements are not met.
(2) Inspect fuel manifold assembly as follows:
(a) Inspect fuel manifold flexible hoses and tubing. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK
70-00-00-8000).
(b) Inspect fittings for chaffing. No chaffing allowed.
(c) Inspect “B” nut threads for damage. Criteria for acceptance are smooth engagement with
the nozzle fitting and no leakage during testing.
(d) Inspect insulation for fuel swelling. No swelling allowed. Minor nicks in insulation which do
not expose the pressure hose are allowed. Replace damaged insulation. Refer to REPAIR
(PGBLK 73-10-09-9000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Nozzle Assembly Inspection (Typical) (GRAPHIC 73-10-09-99B-001-A01)
1. AIR INLET 6. AIR BLAST PASSAGES (INNER)

2. BODY SLIP JOINT 7. AIR SWEEP SHROUD (BURN AREA)
3. BODY THREADED JOINT 8. AIR SWEEP SHROUD (EROSION AREA)
4. AIR BLAST PASSAGES (OUTER) 9. AIR SWEEP SHROUD (CRACK AREA)
5. EXIT ORIFICES 10. CRIMPED AREA
UP495246
ALL Page 8004
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Nozzle Assembly Deformation Inspection (GRAPHIC 73-10-09-99B-002-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8005
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies.
PN 211-557-9001 clamp CAGE: 06848


APPLICABLE.
towel (Kim-Wipes) commercially available
PN 664-522-9003 replacement sleeve (Silicone CAGE: 06848

impregnated fiberglass cloth split
sleeve)
Silastic 732 RTV adhesive sealant (MIL-A-46106, CAGE: 71984

Group III)
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-09-300-802-A01)
B. Repair Damaged Fuel Manifold Hose Insulation Sleeve (Subtask 73-10-09-300-004-A01)
(1) Remove metal bands securing insulation sleeve and remove damaged insulation sleeve from
fuel manifold hose assembly.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Cut a length of PN 664-522-9003, replacement sleeve to extend from tube nut to tube nut of
hose assembly.
(3) For ease of assembly roll sleeve inside out. Sleeve is sized to wrap around hose assembly
approximately twice. The end of the sleeve that will first be wrapped around the hose assembly
may be trimmed at edges to allow the first wrapping to cover only the hose portion of the hose
assembly. The second wrapping will cover both the hose and hose fitting to provide for a smoother
appearance.
(4) Wrap the sleeve on the hose assembly with inside surface of sleeve next to OD of hose assembly.
(5) Apply Silastic 732 RTV, adhesive sealant under the outer edge of sleeve approximately 0.25
inch (6.4 mm) from edge along full length of sleeve.
(6) Apply hand pressure at the sleeve edge to work out excess adhesive. Wipe away excess Silastic
732 RTV, adhesive sealant with paper towel or cloth.
(7) Secure sleeve at each end with PN 211-557-9001, clamp.
(8) Apply a bead of Silastic 732 RTV, adhesive sealant at each fitting end of sleeve to prevent
moisture entrapment.
(9) Allow adhesive to dry for 4 hours before reinstalling fuel manifold assembly.
C. Correcting Fuel Leaks Between Fuel Manifold Assemblies and Nozzle Assemblies (Subtask
73-10-09-300-005-A01)
CAUTION: INSTALL A CONICAL SEAL ONLY IF A FUEL LEAK EXISTS.
CAUTION: IMPROPERLY INSTALLED CONICAL SEALS CAN CAUSE AN OBSTRUCTION IN

FUEL FLOW. INSTALLATION OF CONICAL SEAL REQUIRES A FLOW CHECK.
REFER TO TESTING (PGBLK 73-10-09-13000).
(1) Install conical seal on nozzle assembly fitting.

(2) Connect fuel manifold assembly to nozzle assembly.
CAUTION: ANYTIME A CONNECTION (WITH A CONICAL SEAL INSTALLED) BETWEEN FUEL
MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLY IS LOOSENED, CONICAL SEAL
MUST BE REPLACED.
(3) Tighten fuel manifold assembly and nozzle assembly connection. Refer to ASSEMBLY (PGBLK
70-00-00-10000).
D. Minor Repair of Fuel Nozzle Conical Sealing Surface(s) (Subtask 73-10-09-300-006-A01)
(1) Remove minor burrs, chatter marks, and flat spots. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 70-00-00-9000).
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES – ASSEMBLY
(1) Use these procedures to assemble the fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies.
27/32-inch collet and collet holder commercially available

(alternative for PN 298235-1 fuel
nozzle holder)
modified 7/16-inch crowfoot wrench CAGE: 06848

(component of PN 298235-1)
PN 285747-1-1 nut staking tool (used to stake CAGE: 06848

nozzle to body threaded joint)
PN 298235-1 fuel nozzle holder (used to secure CAGE: 06848

nozzle body during
assembly/disassembly, must be
secured in a bench vise)


APPLICABLE.

UP495246
ALL Page 10001
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-09-430-802-A01)
B. (PN 3103235-8/PN 3103235-10) Assemble Fuel Nozzle Assembly (Subtask 73-10-09-430-004-A01)
NOTE: Work area to be well lighted, clean, and lint free. Handle the fuel nozzle components with
clean hands, vinyl gloves, or tweezers to prevent contamination.
(1) Lightly clamp fuel nozzle body (35, Figure 10001) in suitable holding fixture with nozzle end up.
(2) Install screen (30) with cylindrical portion inserted in fuel nozzle body (35).
NOTE: Screen must be free of dents in non-perforated area.
(3) Carefully assemble primary body, primary plug, spring (25), and crossover plate. Make sure that
three legs of spring are seated in recess of crossover plate.
(4) Carefully place assembled parts centered on previously installed screen.
(5) Carefully position nozzle tip (5) on assembled fuel nozzle housing and tighten hand tight.
(6) Remove fuel nozzle assembly from holding fixture and clamp nozzle tip (5) in PN 298235-1, fuel
nozzle holder. Refer to Figure 10002.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT APPLIED TORQUE VALUE IS 150 IN-LB (16.9 NM). USE BACKUP
WRENCH ON FLATS OF FUEL NOZZLE BODY WHEN APPLYING TORQUE.
(7) Using a modified 7/16-inch crowfoot wrench (a component of PN 298235-1, fuel nozzle holder)
on fuel nozzle body wrench flats, torque fuel nozzle body (35) to 150 in-lb (16.9 Nm).
(8) Fuel nozzle assembly functional test is required after assembly. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK
73-10-09-13000).
(9) After successful functional test, install fuel nozzle in 27/32-inch collet and collet holder and using
PN 285747-1-1, nut staking tool, deform rim of nozzle shroud in housing slot, one place.
NOTE: The use of PN 285747-1-1, nut staking tool will prevent excessive deformation of
fuel nozzle shroud. Do not deform shroud adjacent to a previous deformation.
UP495246
ALL Page 10002
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
73-10-09-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 10003
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
ALL Page 10004
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Nozzle Assembly (GRAPHIC 73-10-09-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 10005
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
C. (PN 3103235-9/PN 3103235-11) Assemble fuel nozzle assembly. (Subtask 73-10-09-430-005-A01)
(1) Lightly clamp fuel nozzle body (35, Figure 10003) in suitable holding fixture with nozzle end up.
(2) Install screen (30) with cylindrical portion inserted in fuel nozzle body. Carefully place crossover
plate centered on previously installed screen.
NOTE: Screen must be free of dents in non-perforated area.
(3) Carefully position nozzle tip (5) on assembled fuel nozzle and tighten hand tight.
(4) Remove assembly from holding fixture and clamp nozzle tip (5, Figure 10003) in PN 298235-1,
fuel nozzle holder. Refer to Figure 10004.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT APPLIED TORQUE VALUE IS 85 IN-LB (9.6 NM). USE BACKUP
WRENCH ON FLATS OF FUEL NOZZLE BODY WHEN APPLYING TORQUE TO
PREVENT DAMAGE TO NOZZLE ASSEMBLY.
(5) Using modified 7/16-inch crowfoot wrench (a component of PN 298235-1, fuel nozzle holder)
on fuel nozzle body wrench flats, torque fuel nozzle body (35, Figure 10003) to 85 in-lb (9.6
Nm).
(6) Fuel nozzle assembly functional test is required after assembly. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK
73-10-09-13000).
(7) After successful functional test, install fuel nozzle in PN 298235-1, fuel nozzle holder and using
PN 285747-1-1, nut staking tool deform rim of nozzle shroud in housing slot, one place.
NOTE: The use of PN 285747-1-1, nut staking tool will prevent excessive deformation of
fuel nozzle shroud. Do not deform shroud adjacent to a previous deformation.
UP495246
ALL Page 10006
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
73-10-09-99B-003-A01)
5. FUEL NOZZLE (NOZZLE TIP) 35. FUEL NOZZLE BODY

30. SCREEN
UP495246
ALL Page 10007
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 10004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Nozzle Assembly (GRAPHIC 73-10-09-99B-004-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 10008
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 10009
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies.
container (capable of collecting commercially available

measured amount of test fluid
(1,000 cc))
filter (10 micron minimum) commercially available

pressure pump (general purpose, 0 commercially available

to 500 PSIG (0 to 3,447 kPa)
capacity)
PN 284021-1 fuel atomizer spray pattern test set CAGE: 06848

assembly (used to check flow rate
and spray pattern test)
PN 298097-2 fuel nozzle adapter (adapts fuel CAGE: 06848

nozzle assembly to fuel nozzle
tester)
PN 67273 brass cap Delavan Mfg. Co., 811-T 4th St.,

P.O. Box 65100, Des Moines, IA
50265
PN 831084-1 fuel nozzle tester container (used CAGE: 06848

to check flow rate and spray pattern
test) (110 VAC, 60 Hz)
PN 831084-2 fuel nozzle tester container (used CAGE: 06848

to check flow rate and spray pattern
test (240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, single
phase))
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PN 831085-2 fuel manifold tester (used to check CAGE: 06848

flow distribution and leak check)


APPLICABLE.
nitrogen (available to 500 PSIG commercially available

(3,450 kPa))
towel (Kim-Wipes) commercially available
wooden toothpick (round) commercially available
Chevron thinner 325 test fluid commercially available
PN 31350-007 packing CAGE: 71895
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-09-700-802-A01)
B. Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assemblies Flow Test (Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assemblies Removed
From Engine) (Subtask 73-10-09-700-004-A01)
CAUTION: RETEST OF FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLY (SET OF TEN FUEL NOZZLES)
IS REQUIRED, IF INDIVIDUAL FUEL NOZZLE(S) IS REPLACED FOR ANY REASON.
CAUTION: FUEL MANIFOLD AND NOZZLE ASSEMBLY THAT MEET REQUIREMENTS MUST BE
MAINTAINED AS A SET (TEN FUEL NOZZLES).
NOTE: Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000), Fuel Nozzle Flow Check (Dynamic Pressure
Flow Test), for testing procedure for fuel manifold and nozzle assembly installed on engine.
NOTE: Fuel nozzle assemblies, PN 3103235-8, PN 3103235-9, PN 3103235-10, or PN 3103235-11,
may be inter-mixed on the same engine.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13002
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Use PN 831085-2, fuel manifold tester or construct a test setup as illustrated in Figure 13001
using the following components:
NOTE: A fuel manifold and nozzle assembly consisting of 10 nozzle assemblies that have
met flow test requirements for flow quantity, spray angle, and spray quality, and have
zero time in service since testing, does not require a fuel manifold and nozzle
assembly flow check.
NOTE: A leak check of manifold and manifold fitting connections must be accomplished after
completing flow checks.
NOTE: Prior to performing fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies flow checks, make sure that
Inspection/Check procedures have been accomplished.
WARNING: TEST FLUIDS ARE FLAMMABLE. USE ONLY IN WELL-VENTILATED AREAS. DO

NOT USE JET FUEL.
(2) Use Type II, test fluid or Chevron thinner 325, test fluid at an inlet temperature of 75 to 85°F (24
to 29°C).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT TEST SETUP SYSTEM DOES NOT BECOME CONTAMINATED
BY MAKING SURE THAT ALL PROTECTIVE COVERS ARE REPLACED WHEN NOT
TESTING. MAKE SURE THAT SYSTEM FLUID IS PERIODICALLY SAMPLED AND
EXAMINED AND VERIFY THAT FILTER IS INSTALLED UPSTREAM OF ASSEMBLY
BEING TESTED.
(3) Perform fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies flow distribution test as follows:
NOTE: Fuel nozzle assemblies that do not conform to flow rate must be replaced.
(a) Install fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies on PN 831085-2, fuel manifold tester or test
setup as schematically shown in View A, Figure 13001.
(b) Apply 98 to 102 PSIG (676 to 703 kPa) pressure to primary manifold for a period of time
required to obtain 100 cc of Type II, test fluid or Chevron thinner 325, test fluid in lowest
flow container as shown in View A, Figure 13001. Drain container until each has 100 cc
fluid.
(c) Reapply 98 to 102 PSIG (676 to 703 kPa) for period of time required to obtain 800 cc total
in highest container. Record amount (in cc) of Type II, test fluid or Chevron thinner 325,
test fluid contained in each container on Figure 13002 Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly
Test Data Sheet.
NOTE: Make a copy of Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly Test Data Sheet to record
data.
(d) Subtract 100 cc from the amount recorded for each container as determined in the above
procedure to obtain relative quantity in each container. Record relative quantities.
(e) Select largest and smallest relative quantity recorded in the above procedure and determine
percentage differential using the following formula. Percentage differential and flow limits
must be within limits shown in Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly Test Data Sheet copy.
Record flow variation on Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly Test Data Sheet copy.
PERCENTAGE DIFFERENTIAL = 100 x ((LARGEST RELATIVE QUANTITY−SMALLEST
RELATIVE QUANTITY) ÷ LARGEST RELATIVE QUANTITY)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13003
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(f) Repeat the above test procedure for secondary manifold.

(g) Reduce pressure to 0 PSIG (0 kPa) and remove fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies from
test setup.
(h) Individual nozzle assemblies should be replaced if nozzle assemblies do not meet the flow
distribution test requirements.
(4) Perform fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies leak checks.
(a) Use pressure pump to apply 398 to 402 PSIG (2,744 to 2,772 kPa) to manifold for sufficient
duration to perform leakage check of manifold and fitting connections.
(b) After installation of fuel manifold and nozzle assemblies, perform leak check with engine
operating at takeoff power setting.
(5) Perform fuel nozzle body cross leakage test.
(a) Provide PN 284021-1, fuel atomizer spray pattern test set assembly, PN 831084-1, fuel
nozzle tester container, or PN 831084-2, fuel nozzle tester container for Type II, test fluid
or Chevron thinner 325, test fluid large enough to submerge fuel nozzle body.
(b) Provide clean (filtered to 10 microns nominal, 25 microns absolute) Type II, test fluid or
Chevron thinner 325, test fluid at a temperature of 75 to 84°F (24 to 29°C).
(c) Connect hoses from nitrogen supply to primary and secondary fittings.
(d) With fuel nozzle body in vertical position, PN 31350-007, packing with Type II, test fluid or
Chevron thinner 325, test fluid, place on tip and install PN 67273, brass cap onto tip.
Hand-tighten brass cap.
(e) Set nitrogen pressure to 490 to 510 PSIG (3,378 to 3,516 kPa) and submerge fuel nozzle
body in Type II, test fluid or Chevron thinner 325, test fluid for 30 to 40 seconds. Bubbles
coming from slip joint indicate a primary-to-ambient leak. Bubbles coming from around
primary and secondary inlet fittings indicate cracked fittings.
(f) Set nitrogen to 0 PSIG (0 kPa), remove fuel nozzle body from Type II, test fluid or Chevron
thinner 325, test fluid and disconnect hose to secondary fitting.
(g) Set nitrogen pressure to 490 to 510 PSIG (3,378 to 3,516 kPa) and submerge fuel nozzle
body in Type II, test fluid or Chevron thinner 325, test fluid for 30 to 40 seconds. Bubbles
coming from secondary fittings indicate a primary-to-secondary leak.
NOTE: A primary-to-secondary leak can also be caused by an improperly seated
packing. Verify by repeating the following steps:
1) Connect hoses from nitrogen supply to primary and secondary fittings.
2) With fuel nozzle body in vertical position, PN 31350-007, packing with
Type II, test fluid or Chevron thinner 325, test fluid, place on tip and install
PN 67273, brass cap onto tip. Hand tighten brass cap.
3) Set nitrogen pressure to 490 to 510 PSIG (3,378 to 3,516 kPa) and
submerge fuel nozzle body in Type II, test fluid or Chevron thinner 325,
test fluid for 30 to 40 seconds. Bubbles coming from secondary fittings
indicate a primary-to-secondary leak.
(h) Parts which exhibit primary-to-ambient or primary-to-secondary leakage must be scrapped.

Cracked fittings may be repaired.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13004
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assemblies Test Setup (GRAPHIC
73-10-09-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13005
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
1. MANUAL SHUTOFF VALVE 6. PRESSURE GAGE − 0 TO 500 PSI +/-2%

ACCURACY
2. PUMP − 400 PSIG 7. MANUAL SHUTOFF VALVE
3. PRESSURE REGULATOR − 0 TO 400 8. PRESSURE GAGE − 0 TO 500 PSI +/-2%
PSIG ACCURACY
4. FILTER − 10 MICRON MINIMUM 9. TEN CONTAINERS (CONTAINER) FOR
MANIFOLD NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES
5. FLOWMETER (ROTAMETER OR
EQUIVALENT) − 0 TO 600 LB/HR +/-2%
ACCURACY
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13006
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Manifold and Nozzle Assembly Test Data Sheet (GRAPHIC
73-10-09-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13007
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
C. Fuel Nozzle Assemblies Functional Test (Subtask 73-10-09-700-005-A01)
NOTE: This test is required after fuel nozzle disassembly, cleaning, and reassembly, ASSEMBLY
(PGBLK 73-10-09-10000).
(1) Test setup requirements for nozzle flow rate and spray pattern test.
(a) Provide PN 831084-1, fuel nozzle tester container or PN 831084-2, fuel nozzle tester
container and PN 298097-2, fuel nozzle adapter or construct a test setup equivalent to
that shown on Figure 13003.
(b) Use spray basin fitted with glass windows to observe spray angles and inspect for flow
pattern discrepancies.
(c) Install the nozzle assembly in PN 831084-1, fuel nozzle tester container or PN 831084-2,
fuel nozzle tester container, or to equivalent test setup as shown in Figure 13003 so the
spray cone is discharged vertically.
(d) Illuminate the resultant spray pattern by setting a 300-watt bulb outside and below the
bottom of the basin.
(e) Vent the spray basin to allow the fuel to spray in calm air at atmospheric pressure.
(f) Instrumentation must be provided to measure quantities within the range and accuracy
specified in Table 13003.
WARNING: TEST FLUIDS ARE FLAMMABLE, USE ONLY IN WELL-VENTILATED AREAS.
DO NOT USE JET FUEL.
CAUTION: PERFORM FUEL NOZZLE ASSEMBLY TEST USING A LIQUID FORM OF TEST
FLUID. IF TEST FLUID IS OTHER THAN A LIQUID FORM, SUCH AS BOTTLED
GAS, SOME LEAKS MAY NOT BE DETECTED.
(g) Provide test fluid at an inlet temperature of 75 to 85°F (24 to 29°C).

NOTE: The PN 831084-1, fuel nozzle tester container or PN 831084-2, fuel nozzle
tester container has been calibrated for use of Type II, test fluid. Do not use a
substitute test fluid.
Table 13003. Test Stand Requirements
Quantity Approximate Measuring Range Accuracy Required

Inlet Fuel Pressure 50 to 1,200 PSIG (344 to 8,274 kPa) +/-1.0%
Fuel Flow 4 to 40 PPH +/-0.5%
Fuel Spray Angle 40 to 100 degrees +/-2 degrees
Leak Check Pressure 500 PSIG (3,447 kPa) +/-1.0%
CAUTION: DO NOT PERFORM NOZZLE ASSEMBLY PRESSURE TEST WITH NOZZLE

INSTALLED IN PN 298097-2, FUEL NOZZLE ADAPTER. ENTIRE NOZZLE TIP AND
NOZZLE TO BODY THREADED JOINT AREA MUST BE VISIBLE DURING NOZZLE
PRESSURE TEST.
(2) Perform nozzle assembly pressure test.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13008
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Connect fluid supply line to fuel nozzle assembly primary inlet. Do not connect line to, or
cap the secondary inlet.
(b) Secure fuel nozzle assembly in suitable manner to make sure that spray discharges in test
basin and that all areas of fuel nozzle are visible for inspection.
(c) Gradually apply 1,000 PSIG (6,895 kPa) fluid pressure to primary inlet for a minimum of
30 seconds and check for external leaks, and for leakage (crossleaks) from secondary
inlet. No leakage allowed.
(3) Perform nozzle flow rate and spray pattern test.
NOTE: A nozzle that does not conform to flow rate and spray pattern requirements may be
disassembled and cleaned. Nozzles which cannot meet the flow rate and spray
pattern specified, after cleaning, must be replaced.
(a) Install nozzle assembly in PN 298097-2, fuel nozzle adapter and install in test stand.
Connect fluid supply lines to primary and secondary inlets.
(b) Connect air pressure gage, 0 to 400 PSIG (0 to 2,758 kPa) to center connector on PN
298097-2, fuel nozzle adapter. Length of air line from connector to air pressure gage, 0 to
400 PSIG (0 to 2,758 kPa) should be as short as possible to make sure of accurate pressure
readings.
(c) Make sure that no air leaks or blockage exists in air line. Air leaks or restriction in air line
could cause erroneous pressure reading and result in fuel nozzle spray angle pattern
deviations.
(d) Establish primary flow by applying 100 PSIG (689 kPa) to primary inlet only. Flow rate
must be as specified on Figure 13004 Nozzle Flow Rate Data Sheet. Measure spray angle
at 1-inch (25.4 mm) radius from primary tip. Refer to Figure 13005. Evaluate spray quality
using examples from Figure 13006.
NOTE: Make a copy of Nozzle Flow Rate Data Sheet to record data.
1 The fuel spray must consist of finely divided droplets in the form of a fully developed
spray cone. No solid streams, spitting, or dribbling allowed in the spray pattern. Refer
to the spray pattern characteristics below.
a Solid stream is defined as an improper flow discharge wherein a substantial
portion of the nozzle discharge is localized in a singular wide stream of fluid.
b Spitting is defined as a disruption of the spray cone resulting from the intermittent
discharge of a globular mass of fuel.
c Dribbling is defined as a consistent or steady droplet of unatomized fuel.
d Bubbling is very similar to spitting (erratic) or dribbling (consistent). However,
bubbling entails a globular particle of fluid which appears as a thin film of fuel
around an air pocket.
e Fluctuating is defined as an unstable or pulsation of the flow pattern which is
observed as radical changes in the spray angle or intensity.
f Discontinuity is defined as a gap or void of atomized spray in the spray cone of
measurable width.
g Streaking is defined as a localized area wherein the flow discharge combines
in one unbroken flow stream of measurable width. A streaking nozzle would
exhibit this condition for a substantial distance from the nozzle discharge face.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13009
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2 If any of the discrepancies noted above occur, apply 1 PSI (7 kPa) air pressure to
the air box to clear aircap of all fuel. Reduce air pressure to zero. If the flow
discrepancy reoccurs within 30 seconds of reducing the air pressure, the nozzle is
acceptable as long as the solid stream or discontinuity does not exceed 10 percent
of the total pattern of each nozzle tip.
3 Compare the spray pattern with Figure 13005 and Figure 13006. If spray discrepancies
exist, clean the primary tip with a towel (primary orifice may be gently polished with
the tip of a wooden toothpick). Retest the nozzle. If discrepancies still exist as specified
in procedure below, reject the nozzle assembly.
4 The conditions, solid stream, spitting, and dribbling specified are considered
unacceptable and cause for rejection if they cannot be corrected per above
procedures. The conditions, bubbling, fluctuating, discontinuity, and streaking specified
are acceptable as long as the solid stream or discontinuity does not exceed 10 percent
of the total pattern of each nozzle tip.
(e) Establish secondary flow by applying 100 PSIG (690 kPa) to secondary inlet only. Flow
rate must be as specified in Nozzle Flow Rate Data Sheet copy.
(f) Establish combined flow by first applying 174 to 176 PSIG (1,200 to 1,213 kPa) pressure
at primary inlet. Apply secondary inlet pressure, as required, to bring total nozzle flow to
19.8 to 20.2 PPH. Apply 27.7 inches (704 mm) H2O air pressure at PN 298097-2, fuel
nozzle adapter airbox adapter fittings.
(g) Measure spray angle at 1-inch (2.54 mm) radius from primary tip. Refer to Figure 13005.
Evaluate spray quality using examples from Figure 13006. Record all data on Nozzle Flow
Rate Data Sheet copy.
(h) Nozzle test discrepancies such as spray pattern deviations or low flow may be corrected
by cleaning. High flow nozzles must be rejected. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK
73-10-09-6000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13010
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Atomizer Test Setup Schematic (GRAPHIC 73-10-09-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13011
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Nozzle Flow Rate Data Sheet (GRAPHIC 73-10-09-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13012
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13005. (Sheet 1 of 1) Spray Cone Concentricity (GRAPHIC 73-10-09-99B-005-A01)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.9 TO 1.1 (22.7 TO 27.9)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13013
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13006. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Nozzle Test Spray Pattern (GRAPHIC 73-10-09-99B-006-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13014
73-10-09 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL MANIFOLD PURGE SYSTEM – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the fuel manifold purge system.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-13-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Fuel Manifold Purge System Components (Subtask 73-10-13-020-004-A01)
(1) Refer to AMM for removal of remotely located components of fuel manifold purge system. Refer
to Figure 3001.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
73-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Manifold Purge System Parts Kit (Remotely Located) Removal (GRAPHIC
73-10-13-99B-001-A01)
5. ACCUMULATOR 25. CHECK VALVE

10. FILTER (LINE FILTER) 30. PACKING
15. CHECK VALVE 35. PACKING
20. SOLENOID VALVE
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
73-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL MANIFOLD PURGE SYSTEM – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the fuel manifold purge system.



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

compound

(MIL-PRF-907)
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-13-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
73-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Fuel Manifold Purge System Components (Subtask 73-10-13-420-004-A01)
CAUTION: WHEN GASKETS OR PACKINGS ARE INSTALLED ON PNEUMATIC FITTINGS, MAKE

SURE THAT NO LUBRICANT IS USED. WHEN PNEUMATIC LINES AND FITTINGS ARE
INSTALLED, MAKE SURE THAT NO CONTAMINATION IS INTRODUCED OR THREAD
COMPOUND IS USED. MAKE SURE THERE IS PROPER ALIGNMENT AND THREAD
ENGAGEMENT TO PREVENT GALLING AND/OR CROSS THREADING.
located aft of the compressor section unless otherwise specified.
(1) Refer to AMM for installation of remotely located components of fuel manifold purge system.
Refer to Figure 4001 for the fuel manifold purge system components and Figure 4002 for a
typical installation schematic.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
73-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Manifold Purge System Parts Kit (Remotely Located) Installation (GRAPHIC
73-10-13-99B-001-A01)

20. SOLENOID VALVE
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
73-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Manifold Purge System Schematic (Typical) (GRAPHIC
73-10-13-99B-002-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4004
73-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL MANIFOLD PURGE SYSTEM – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the fuel manifold purge system.



APPLICABLE.
2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-13-100-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 6001
73-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Clean external surface of solenoid valve (20, Figure 6001), accumulator (5), and check valves
(15, 25). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method 1.
(3) Clean electrical connector on solenoid valve (20). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000),
Cleaning Method 11.
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Manifold Purge System Parts Kit (Remotely Located) (GRAPHIC
73-10-13-99B-001-A01)

20. SOLENOID VALVE
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
73-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
C. Perform Special Cleaning of Fuel Manifold Purge System Filter (Subtask 73-10-13-100-005-A01)

(1) Clean filter by sonic method as follows:
NOTE: Filter may be cleaned temporarily by back flushing filter under light pressure using
MIL-PRF-680, solvent. However, the sonic cleaning method should be used for
thorough cleaning.
NOTE: A beaker is used in Model HT 1.9, heated tank ultrasonic cleaner or Model S-2, Sonac
ultrasonic cleaner to conserve cleaning agent. Water is used in Model HT 1.9, heated
tank ultrasonic cleaner or Model S-2, Sonac ultrasonic cleaner as transmitting fluid.

FIRE HAZARD.
(a) Place filter in beaker and fill beaker with MIL-PRF-680, solvent to submerge filter.
(b) Place beaker containing filter in ultrasonic cleaner and fill Model HT 1.9, heated tank
ultrasonic cleaner or Model S-2, Sonac ultrasonic cleaner to within 0.375 inch (9.52 mm)
of top with water.
(c) Operate ultrasonic cleaner for 5 minutes.
FIRE HAZARD.
(d) Discard contaminated MIL-PRF-680, solvent and rinse filter and beaker with clean
MIL-PRF-680, solvent using plastic squeeze bottle.
FIRE HAZARD.
(e) Refill beaker with clean MIL-PRF-680, solvent and operate ultrasonic cleaner for an
additional 5 minutes.
FIRE HAZARD.
(f) Repeat the above two steps until MIL-PRF-680, solvent remains clean after a 5-minute
operation period.
UP495246
ALL Page 6003
73-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(g) Remove filter from beaker and blow dry using clean, low pressure air supply.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6004
73-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL MANIFOLD PURGE SYSTEM – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the fuel manifold purge system.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-10-13-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Fuel Manifold Purge System (Subtask 73-10-13-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect solenoid valve electrical connector for bent, broken, or burned pins. No bent,
broken, or burned pins allowed.
(2) Visually inspect line filter for contaminated and damaged screen. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK
73-10-13-6000) for cleaning procedure.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
73-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Visually inspect solenoid valve body, filter, accumulator, and check valves for cracks, dents,
peened or stripped threads, or other damage. No cracks, dents, peened or stripped threads, or
other damage allowed.
(4) Visually inspect tube assemblies for bends, kinks, or cracks. No bends, kinks, or cracks allowed
in tube assemblies.
(5) Visually inspect threaded parts for crossed, galled, or peened threads. No crossed, galled, or
C. Check Solenoid Valve (Subtask 73-10-13-200-005-A01)
(1) Momentarily apply 24 VDC maximum across Pins A and B of electrical connector. Valve must
open.
(2) Remove voltage from electrical connector. Valve must close.
(3) Replace valve that does not meet above requirements.
D. Test Check Valves (Subtask 73-10-13-200-006-A01)
(1) Perform leakage check of each valve as follows:

(a) Connect an air pressure source capable of 1,000 PSIG (6,895 kPa) to outlet fitting
(determined by direction of flow arrow) of check valve (15, 25, Figure 8001).
(b) Immerse check valve in a container of water.
(c) Apply 1,000 PSIG (6,895 kPa) air pressure for 1 minute. No internal or external leakage
allowed.
(2) Check cracking pressure of each valve as follows:
(a) Connect an air pressure source capable of 5 PSIG (34 kPa) to inlet fitting of check valve.
(b) Slowly increase air pressure until flow commences from outlet fitting. Cracking pressure
must be 0.5 to 1.0 PSIG (3.4 to 6.9 kPa).
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
73-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Manifold Purge System Parts Kit (Remotely Located) Inspection (GRAPHIC
73-10-13-99B-001-A01)

20. SOLENOID VALVE
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8003
73-10-13 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CONTROLLING (ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL) – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Fuel Control and Pump Assembly (Subtask 73-20-00-870-001-A01)
(1) The fuel control and pump assembly provides metered fuel to the engine and is mounted on the
input housing assembly fuel control drive pad. It is driven by the fuel control drive gear in the
reduction geartrain. The assembly is comprised of the fuel control assembly and the fuel pump
assembly.
B. Fuel Control Assembly (Subtask 73-20-00-870-002-A01)
(1) The fuel control assembly is attached to the rear of the fuel pump assembly. The control assembly
incorporates a USFG, OSFG, by-pass valve, fuel metering valve, minimum and maximum limiting
stops, input levers, and fuel trim adjustment to meter fuel to the engine.
C. Fuel Pump Assembly (Subtask 73-20-00-870-003-A01)
(1) The fuel pump assembly is mounted on the fuel control drive pad on the input housing assembly.
It is driven by the fuel control drive gear in the reduction geartrain. The fuel pump assembly
consists of a boost element and HP element with a common drive train. The boost element of
the fuel pump assembly is a centrifugal pump assembly which boosts inlet pressure to the HP
element. The HP element incorporates a vane-type pump and pressure relief valve, filter, and
anti-ice valve. The fuel pump assembly delivers filtered fuel at required pressure to the fuel
control unit for metering.
D. Fuel Filter (Subtask 73-20-00-870-004-A01)
(1) The fuel filter is a component of the fuel pump assembly. Inlet fuel to the HP fuel pump is routed
through the fuel filter to make sure that fuel is clean through all phases of operation. In the event
the filter becomes clogged, fuel is by-passed around the filter to sustain emergency engine
operation.
E. Starting Fuel Flow Regulator Assembly (Subtask 73-20-00-870-005-A01)
(1) The starting fuel flow regulator assembly is attached to the side of the fuel control assembly. It
is a normally closed pressure regulator. The regulator assembly provides additional fuel during
light-off and simultaneous solenoid lockout of the filter anti-ice circuit when energized. The
regulator is also used to maintain a predetermined pressure to the fuel nozzles.
F. Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor (Subtask 73-20-00-870-006-A01)
(1) The inlet temperature and pressure sensor is part of the fuel control assembly. The sensing
probe, located in the compressor inlet section, senses compressor inlet temperature and pressure,
then compensates the fuel flow schedules for changes in inlet total temperature and pressure.
G. Torque Limiter By-Pass Valve (Subtask 73-20-00-870-007-A01)
(1) The torque limiting system consists of a torque limiter by-pass valve, an installation kit for
mounting the limiter by-pass valve, an adapter for linking the torque sensing components, and
a remotely located electronic controller.
(2) An instrument-panel-mounted torque indicator (customer-furnished) provides readout of torque
in percent of horsepower.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
73-20-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) The torque limiter by-pass valve is essentially a fuel by-pass valve inserted in the fuel system
between the fuel control and the engine fuel nozzles. The assembly consists of a torque motor
with two coils wound in parallel. When electrically energized, the torque motor moves a beam
to uncover a plate valve which receives high pressure fuel from the fuel control. When the torque
motor receives the appropriate electrical signal from electronic controller the beam is moved
away from the plate valve permitting fuel to by-pass back to fuel pump inlet. By-passing the fuel
reduces the amount to the fuel nozzles and accordingly reduces engine torque. During normal
starting, acceleration, and engine torque settings the limiter plate valve is closed.
UP495246

ALL Page 2
73-20-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the fuel control and pump assembly.
PN 294670-1 fuel control torquing wrench set CAGE: 06848

(used to torque nuts securing fuel
control and pump assembly to
accessory drive housing mounting
pad)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-20-01-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Fuel Control and Pump Assembly (Subtask 73-20-01-020-004-A01)
NOTE: Before replacing fuel control assembly with another complete unit, make sure that trouble
has been isolated to this component. For fuel control assembly replacement refer to
73-21-05. For fuel pump assembly replacement refer to 73-21-06. For inlet temperature
and pressure sensor replacement refer to 73-21-05.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(2) Disconnect controls linkage assembly. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 76-10-01-3000).
CAUTION: WHEN SCREWS SECURING FUEL PUMP ANTI-ICE VALVE ASSEMBLY ARE
LOOSENED OR REMOVED, MAKE SURE THAT THE VALVE REMAINS IN POSITION.
WHEN THE VALVE IS REMOVED OR DISLODGED, IT IS NECESSARY TO
DISASSEMBLE AND INSPECT IT FOR DISLODGED SHIMS.
(3) Disconnect fuel control system plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-01-3000).
CAUTION: HANDLE INLET TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE SENSOR WITH CARE. UNIT IS
PRE-CALIBRATED. THE SENSING ELEMENT AND BELLOWS ARE PRECISION
PARTS. CAPILLARY TUBE JOINING SENSING ELEMENT AND BELLOWS MUST
NOT BE KINKED OR LEAKAGE MAY RESULT.
(4) Remove inlet temperature and pressure sensor. Refer to Paragraph 2.B. Install Inlet Temperature
and Pressure Sensor (Subtask 73-21-05-420-004-A01).
(5) Remove bolts (30, 60, Figure 3001) and washers (40, 50) attaching fuel control and pump
assembly (200) to supports (70, 140).
NOTE: Do not remove rivets (120) or nutplates (130) from support (140) unless damage is
indicated by inspection. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 73-20-01-8000).
(6) Remove bolts (100), washers (90), nuts (80), and supports (70, 140).
(7) Using PN 294670-1, fuel control torquing wrench set, remove nuts (150) and washers (160)
attaching fuel control and pump assembly (200) to gearbox assembly mounting pad.
(8) Remove fuel control and pump assembly (200) in a straight line to avoid damage to drive coupling
(170).
(9) Remove drive coupling (170).
(10) Remove and discard packings (180, 190) from drive coupling.
(11) Remove fuel control and pump assembly plumbing, as required, in a convenient and appropriate
sequence. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-01-3000).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Control and Pump Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 73-20-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
10. INLET TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE 120. RIVET

SENSOR
30. BOLT 130. NUTPLATE
1 WASHER 140. SUPPORT
40.
1 WASHER 150. NUT
50.
60. BOLT 160.
1 WASHER
70. SUPPORT 170. DRIVE COUPLING

1 WASHER 190. PACKING
90.
100. BOLT 200. FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP ASSEMBLY
NOTES:
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the fuel control and pump assembly.
PN 285843-1-1 seal installing pilot (used to install CAGE: 06848

packing over end of drive coupling
without damaging packing)

pad)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.
2. Procedure (TASK 73-20-01-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Fuel Control and Pump Assembly (Subtask 73-20-01-420-004-A01)
CAUTION: DO NOT PACK FUEL CONTROL DRIVE COUPLING SPLINE WITH ANY TYPE OF
GREASE.
NOTE: The fuel control and pump assembly drive coupling is lubricated by clean, approved engine
oil.
(1) Assemble fuel control and pump assembly plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK
73-10-01-4000).
(2) Install fuel control and pump assembly.
(a) Install support (140, Figure 4001) with bolts (100), washers (90), and nuts (80) on accessory
drive gearbox housing assembly flange. Torque bolts to 50 to 60 in-lb (5.6 to 6.8 Nm).
CAUTION: DO NOT PACK FUEL CONTROL DRIVE COUPLING SPLINE WITH ANY TYPE
OF GREASE.
(b) Install new packings (180, 190) on drive coupling (170) using PN 285843-1-1, seal installing
pilot.
NOTE: The drive coupling is lubricated by clean, approved engine oil.
CAUTION: EXERCISE CARE TO MAKE SURE THAT SPLINES ON DRIVE COUPLING

AND ACCESSORY MOUNTING PAD SPLINES PROPERLY ALIGN.
(c) Install drive coupling (170) in fuel pump assembly shaft.

(d) Install fuel control and fuel pump assembly (200). Secure with washers (160) and nuts
(150). Torque nuts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm) using a PN 294670-1, fuel control torquing wrench
set.
(e) Install support (70) on support (140) and secure with bolts (60). Torque bolts to 45 to 55
in-lb (5.1 to 6.2 Nm).
(f) Install washers (40), as required, to avoid bending support.
(g) Install washers (50) under bolt (30) head, to make sure that bolt does not bottom out in
fuel control. Torque bolt to 60 in-lb (6.8 Nm).
NOTE: A minimum of 4 threads must engage fuel control body.
(h) Lockwire bolts (30, 60).

CAUTION: HANDLE INLET TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE SENSOR WITH CARE AS UNIT
IS PRE-CALIBRATED. THE SENSING ELEMENT AND BELLOWS ARE PRECISION
(3) Install inlet temperature and pressure sensor (10). Refer to Paragraph 2.B. Install Inlet
Temperature and Pressure Sensor (Subtask 73-21-05-420-004-A01).
(4) Connect fuel control system plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-01-4000).
(5) Connect fuel control linkage. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 76-10-01-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(6) Connect electrical connectors.

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Control and Pump Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 73-20-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

SENSOR
40.
1 WASHER 150. NUT
50.
60. BOLT 160.
1 WASHER

90.
NOTES:
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4005
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the fuel control and pump assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-20-01-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean external surfaces of TT2 sensor (10, Figure 6001) and fuel control and pump assembly
(200). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method 1.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Control and Pump Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 73-20-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

SENSOR
40.
1 WASHER 150. NUT
50.
60. BOLT 160.
1 WASHER

90.
NOTES:
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6003
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the fuel control and pump assembly.
toolmakers microscope Brown and Sharpe, North Kingston,

RI 02852
QC No. 771 look/see kit Quality Control Co., 3301 Beverly

Blvd., Los Angeles, CA 90004


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-20-01-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Fuel Control System (Subtask 73-20-01-200-004-A01)
(1) Perform visual inspection of both external and internal splines for wear as follows:
(a) Perform visual inspection using strong light and 10X magnification. Refer to Figure 8001.
(b) Minor burnish marks or discoloration is allowed.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) Spline teeth showing no visible wear step, when viewed from end of spline and parallel to
spline teeth, is allowed.
(d) All internal splines showing wear pattern types C, D, E, Figure 8001, require further
inspection using QC No. 771, look/see kit, or equivalent borescope-type instrument.
(2) Perform dimensional inspection of both external and internal splines for wear as follows:
(a) Splines with borderline conditions upon visual inspection must be replaced or dimensionally
inspected using a toolmakers microscope or equivalent. An impression mold may be
required in conjunction with the toolmakers microscope for internal splines. Splines with
wear in excess of 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) must require replacement.
(b) Defective internal splines must be replaced by replacement of the affected assembly (oil
pump assembly or fuel pump assembly). If either assembly is replaced, a new drive coupling
must be installed.
(3) Check fuel control system for security, loose fittings, evidence of fuel leakage and obvious
damage. Refer to FAULT ISOLATION (PGBLK 72-00-00-1000), for leakage limits.
(4) Inspect threaded parts for crossed, galled, or peened threads. No damaged threads are allowed.
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Spline Location and Wear Pattern (GRAPHIC 73-20-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Key Item Type Spline Type Wear Pattern

1. FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY INTERNAL D OR E
2. DRIVE COUPLING EXTERNAL B
3. OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY INTERNAL C
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8004
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP ASSEMBLY – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test fuel control and pump assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-20-01-700-802-A01)
(1) Perform fuel control assembly testing procedures. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
73-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL FILTER – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the fuel filter.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-03-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Fuel Filter (Subtask 73-21-03-020-004-A01)
NOTE: Provide a suitable container to drain residual fuel from lines and fuel filter assembly.
(1) Remove plug (5, Figure 3001). Remove and discard packing (10).
(2) Remove filter cap (15). Remove and discard packing (20).
(3) Remove spring clip (25) and compression spring (50).
(4) Remove filter cup (30), washer (35), and filter element (40). Remove and discard packing (45).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
73-21-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Filter Removal (GRAPHIC 73-21-03-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
73-21-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. PLUG 30. FILTER CUP

15. FILTER CAP 40. FILTER ELEMENT
25. SPRING CLIP 50. COMPRESSION SPRING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
73-21-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL FILTER – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the fuel filter.



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

compound
2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-03-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
73-21-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Fuel Filter (Subtask 73-21-03-420-004-A01)
CAUTION: FUEL FILTER ELEMENT, PN 897513-1, IS A DISPOSABLE-TYPE FILTER AS IDENTIFIED

ON BOTTOM OF FILTER ELEMENT, REMOVE AND REPLACE WITH NEW FILTER
ELEMENT.
NOTE: New packings must be lightly coated with clean, approved engine fuel, Santovac OS-124,
lubricant, or Santovac 5, lubricant prior to installation unless otherwise specified.
(1) Install filter cup (30, Figure 4001), washer (35), new packing (45), and filter element (40) in pump
assembly body. Make sure that filter element is seated on adapter in pump assembly housing.
(2) Install compression spring (50) with large diameter up. Install spring clip (25).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CAP THREADS ARE PROPERLY LUBRICATED AS DESCRIBED
IN THE FOLLOWING STEP TO PREVENT CAP THREADS FROM SEIZING.
(3) Apply a thin coat of Liqui-Moly brand NV thread compound, anti-seize lubricant to threads of
filter cap (15). Install filter cap with new packing (20). Torque filter cap to 15 to 20 in-lb (1.7 to
2.3 Nm). Install lockwire.
(4) Install plug (5) with new packing (10). Torque plug to 25 to 35 in-lb (2.8 to 4.0 Nm).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
73-21-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Filter Installation (GRAPHIC 73-21-03-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
73-21-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. PLUG 30. FILTER CUP

15. FILTER CAP 40. FILTER ELEMENT
25. SPRING CLIP 50. COMPRESSION SPRING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4004
73-21-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL FILTER – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the fuel filter.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-03-100-802-A01)
NOTE: Fuel filter element, PN 897513-1, is a disposable-type filter. Remove and replace with new
filter element.
Method 1 or 2.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
73-21-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
73-21-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL FILTER – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the fuel filter.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-03-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Fuel Filter (Subtask 73-21-03-200-004-A01)
(1) Inspect filter case and cap for stripped and damaged threads, or other damage. No stripped or
damaged threads, or other damage allowed on filter case and cap.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8001
73-21-03 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
STARTING FUEL FLOW REGULATOR ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the starting fuel flow regulator assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-04-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Starting Fuel Flow Regulator Assembly (Subtask 73-21-04-020-004-A01)

(2) Remove bolts (5, 15, 25, Figure 3001), washers (10, 20, 30), and starting fuel flow regulator
assembly (55).
NOTE: Fuel pressure regulator may be removed after removal of fuel control unit.
(3) Remove transfer tubes (35, 45).

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
73-21-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Starting Fuel Flow Regulator Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC
73-21-04-99B-001-A01)
5. BOLT 35. TRANSFER TUBE

25. BOLT 55. STARTING FUEL FLOW REGULATOR
ASSEMBLY
30. WASHER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
73-21-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
STARTING FUEL FLOW REGULATOR ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the starting fuel flow regulator assembly.



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

compound
2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-04-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
73-21-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Starting Fuel Flow Regulator Assembly (Subtask 73-21-04-420-004-A01)
Add frictional drag (run-down torque) of self-locking devices to recommended values.
NOTE: New packings must be lightly coated with any approved clean, approved engine fuel,
Santovac OS-124, lubricant, or Santovac 5, lubricant prior to installation unless otherwise
specified.
NOTE: Apply Liqui-Moly brand NV thread compound, anti-seize lubricant to threads of screws.
(1) Install new packings (40, 50, Figure 4001) on transfer tubes (35, 45).
(2) Install transfer tubes in fuel control assembly.
(3) Install starting fuel flow regulator assembly (55) on fuel control assembly. Secure with washers
(10, 20, 30) and bolts (5, 15, 25). Torque bolts to 20 to 25 in-lb (2.3 to 2.8 Nm).
(4) Connect electrical connectors. Refer to AMM.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
73-21-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Starting Fuel Flow Regulator Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC
73-21-04-99B-001-A01)

ASSEMBLY
30. WASHER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
73-21-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
STARTING FUEL FLOW REGULATOR ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the starting fuel flow regulator assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-04-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean starting fuel flow regulator assembly (55, Figure 6001) external surface. Refer to 72-00-00,
CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method 1.
(3) Clean electrical connectors. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method
11.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
73-21-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Starting Fuel Flow Regulator Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC
73-21-04-99B-001-A01)

ASSEMBLY
30. WASHER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
73-21-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
STARTING FUEL FLOW REGULATOR ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the starting fuel flow regulator assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-04-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Starting Fuel Flow Regulator Assembly (Subtask 73-21-04-200-004-A01)
(1) Inspect fuel pressure regulator assembly for security, loose fittings, fuel leakage, and other
damage.
C. Check Starting Fuel Flow Regulator Assembly (Subtask 73-21-04-200-005-A01)
(1) Check anti-ice lockout valve (normally open).

UP495246
ALL Page 8001
73-21-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Visually inspect anti-ice valve body for dents, cracks, or other damage. No dents, cracks,
or other damage allowed on anti-ice valve body.
(b) Visually inspect electrical connector for bent, broken, or burned pins. No bent, broken, or
burned pins allowed.
(c) Visually inspect threaded parts for stripped, galled, or peened threads. No stripped, galled,
or peened threads allowed.
(d) Apply 24 VDC across Pins A and B of electrical connector. Valve must close.
(e) Remove voltage. Valve must open.
(2) Check start fuel valve (normally closed).
(a) Visually inspect anti-ice valve body for dents, cracks, or other damage. No dents, cracks,
or other damage allowed on anti-ice valve body.
(b) Visually inspect electrical connector for bent, broken, or burned pins. No bent, broken, or
burned pins allowed.
(c) Visually inspect threaded parts for stripped, galled, or peened threads. No stripped, galled,
or peened threads allowed.
(d) Apply 24 VDC across Pins A and B of electrical connector. Valve must open.
(e) Remove voltage. Valve must close.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
73-21-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
STARTING FUEL FLOW REGULATOR ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the starting fuel flow regulator assembly.

packing on plunger)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-04-300-802-A01)
B. Partially Disassemble Starting Fuel Flow Regulator Assembly (Subtask 73-21-04-300-004-A01)
(1) Remove plug (5, Figure 9001), helical compression spring (15), seat (20), plunger (25), sleeve
(35), and stop (50).
NOTE: Valve plunger is spring loaded and care must be exercised during removal to prevent
inadvertent ejection of plunger, spring, and spring seat when plug is removed.
(2) Remove and discard packings (10, 30, 40, 45).

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
73-21-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Starting Fuel Flow Regulator Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 73-21-04-99B-001-A01)
5. PLUG 35. SLEEVE

15. HELICAL COMPRESSION SPRING 45. PACKING
20. SEAT 50. STOP
25. PLUNGER 55. FUEL REGULATOR
30. PACKING
C. Assemble Starting Fuel Flow Regulator Assembly (Subtask 73-21-04-300-005-A01)
Add frictional drag (run-down torque) of self-locking devices to recommended values.
(1) Install new packings (10, 30, 40, 45, Figure 9002) using PN 285838-1-1, seal installing pilot.
(2) Install stop (50), sleeve (35), plunger (25), seat (20), helical compression spring (15), and plug
(5) in fuel regulator (55). Torque plug to 150 to 175 in-lb (16.9 to 19.8 Nm).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
73-21-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Starting Fuel Flow Regulator Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 73-21-04-99B-002-A01)
5. PLUG 35. SLEEVE

15. HELICAL COMPRESSION SPRING 45. PACKING
20. SEAT 50. STOP
25. PLUNGER 55. FUEL REGULATOR
30. PACKING
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
73-21-04 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL CONTROL UNIT AND INLET TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE

SENSOR – REMOVAL-1
(1) Use these procedures to remove the fuel control unit and inlet temperature and pressure sensor.
(1) Refer to Table 3001-1 for the specified special tools, fixtures, and equipment in this section.
Table 3001-1. Special Tools, Fixtures, and Equipment

pad)


APPLICABLE.
(4) Refer to Table 3002-1 for the specified consumable materials in this section.
Table 3002-1. Consumables

2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-05-020-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL-1
ALL Page 3001-1
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Remove Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor (Subtask 73-21-05-020-004-A01)
(1) Disconnect inlet temperature and pressure sensor plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
73-10-01-3000).
(2) Remove nuts (5, 20, Figure 3001-1), clamps (15, 30), and bolts (10, 25).
(3) Remove screws (100, 110), washers (105, 115, 125), bracket (120), and inlet temperature and
pressure sensor (130).
(5) Remove bolts (50, 65, 85), washers (55, 70, 90), clamp (75), bushing insulators (60, 80, 95),
inlet temperature and pressure sensor (130), and inlet sensor insulator (140) from input housing
assembly.
UP495246
ALL Page 3002-1
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001-1. (Sheet 1 of 1) Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor Removal (GRAPHIC
73-21-05-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 3003-1
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Key for Figure 3001-1 (Sheet 1 of 1)
5. NUT 85. BOLT

10. BOLT 90. WASHER
15. CLAMP 95. BUSHING INSULATOR
20. NUT 100. SCREW
25. BOLT 105. WASHER
30. CLAMP 110. SCREW
55. WASHER 120. SUPPORT BRACKET
60. BUSHING INSULATOR 125. WASHER
65. BOLT 130. INLET TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE
SENSOR
75. CLAMP 140. INLET SENSOR INSULATOR
80. BUSHING INSULATOR
C. Remove Fuel Control Assembly (Subtask 73-21-05-020-005-A01)
(1) Using PN 294670-1, fuel control torquing wrench set, remove nuts (10, Figure 3002-1), screws
(30), and washers (20, 40).
CAUTION: DO NOT USE SCREWDRIVER OR OTHER POINTED OBJECT TO PRY FUEL
CONTROL AWAY FROM FUEL PUMP AS THIS MAY DAMAGE FUEL CONTROL
CASE OR P2 BELLOWS INSIDE OF FUEL CONTROL.
(2) Separate fuel control assembly (110) from fuel pump assembly.
(3) Remove fuel control assembly (110) and pull in a straight line to avoid damage to drive splines.
(4) Remove packing (90) and washers (50). Record number and thickness of washers for reference
during assembly.
(5) Remove transfer tube (60) and screen (80).
UP495246
ALL Page 3004-1
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3002-1. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Control Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 73-21-05-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 3005-1
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
10. NUT 60. TRANSFER TUBE

30. SCREW 80. SCREEN
50. WASHER 110. FUEL CONTROL ASSEMBLY
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 3006-1
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

SENSOR – INSTALLATION-1
(1) Use these procedures to install the fuel control unit and inlet temperature and pressure sensor.
(1) Refer to Table 4001-1 for the specified special tools, fixtures, and equipment in this section.
Table 4001-1. Special Tools, Fixtures, and Equipment

pad)


APPLICABLE.
(4) Refer to Table 4002-1 for the specified consumable materials in this section.
and engine fuels.
Table 4002-1. Consumables

compound

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY INSTALLATION-1
ALL Page 4001-1
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-05-420-802-A01)
B. Install Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor (Subtask 73-21-05-420-004-A01)
PRE-CALIBRATED. THE SENSING ELEMENT AND BELLOWS ARE PRECISION PARTS.
CAPILLARY TUBE JOINING SENSING ELEMENT AND BELLOWS MUST NOT BE KINKED
OR LEAKAGE MAY RESULT.
NOTE: Apply Liqui-Moly brand NV thread compound, anti-seize lubricant to threads of bolts located
forward of the aft compressor case flange unless otherwise specified.
(1) Install inlet temperature and pressure sensor (130, Figure 4001-1) and inlet sensor insulator
(140). Secure with clamp (75), bushing insulators (60, 80, 95), washers (55, 70, 90), and bolts
(50, 65, 85). Torque bolts to 25 in-lb (2.8 Nm).
(2) Install pressure sensor (130) with new packing (135) in fuel control assembly. Secure with
washers (105, 115, 125), support bracket (120), and screws (100, 110). Torque screws to 20 to
25 in-lb (2.3 to 2.8 Nm).
(3) Install clamps (15, 30) and secure with nuts (5, 20) and bolts (10, 25).
(a) Torque bolts (10) to 25 in-lb (2.8 Nm).
(b) Torque bolts (25) to 70 in-lb (7.9 Nm).
(4) Connect inlet temperature and pressure sensor plumbing. Refer to install 73-10-01-4000.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002-1
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001-1. (Sheet 1 of 1) Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor Installation (GRAPHIC
73-21-05-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4003-1
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 85. BOLT

10. BOLT 90. WASHER
20. NUT 100. SCREW
SENSOR
C. Install Fuel Control Assembly (Subtask 73-21-05-420-005-A01)
forward of the aft compressor case flange unless otherwise specified.
(1) Lubricate and install new packing (90, Figure 4002-1).
(2) Shim fuel control inlet transfer tube as follows:
(a) Install transfer tube (60, Figure 4002-1) in fuel pump assembly.
(b) Measure Dimension A, Figure 4003-1, and determine thickness of washers required to
obtain Dimension A. Dimension A must be 0.200 to 0.215 inch (5.08 to 5.46 mm).
(c) Install washers (50, Figure 4002-1), as required, in fuel pump assembly until Dimension A
equals 0.200 to 0.215 inch (5.08 to 5.46 mm).
(d) Install screen (80) in transfer tube (60).
(e) Lubricate and install new packings (70) on transfer tube (60). Install transfer tube.
(3) Install fuel control assembly supports. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-20-01-4000).
CAUTION: DO NOT PACK FUEL CONTROL DRIVE COUPLING WITH ANY TYPE OF GREASE.
(4) Align fuel control assembly on fuel pump assembly and secure with washers (20, 40), screw
(30), and nuts (10). Torque nuts and screw to 65 in-lb (7.3 Nm) using PN 294670-1, fuel control
torquing wrench set.
UP495246
ALL Page 4004-1
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) Attach fuel control assembly to supports. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-20-01-4000).
(6) Install inlet temperature and pressure sensor. Refer to Paragraph 2.B. Install Inlet Temperature
and Pressure Sensor (Subtask 73-21-05-420-004-A01).
(7) Install fuel control assembly plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-01-4000).
(8) Install starting fuel flow regulator assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-21-04-4000).
(9) Connect control linkages. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 76-10-01-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4005-1
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002-1. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Control Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 73-21-05-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4006-1
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Figure 4003-1. (Sheet 1 of 1) Shimming of Fuel Control Inlet Transfer Tube (GRAPHIC 73-21-05-99B-003-A01)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4007-1
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

SENSOR – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the fuel control unit and inlet temperature and pressure sensor.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-05-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean external surface of inlet temperature and pressure sensor (130, Figure 6001), fuel control
assembly (110, Figure 6002), and start fuel flow regulator (55, Figure 6003) assembly. Refer to
CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method 1.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor Cleaning (GRAPHIC
73-21-05-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 85. BOLT

10. BOLT 90. WASHER
20. NUT 100. SCREW
SENSOR
UP495246
ALL Page 6003
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Control Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 73-21-05-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 6004
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
ALL Page 6005
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Starting Fuel Flow Pressure Regulator Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC
73-21-05-99B-003-A01)

ASSEMBLY
30. WASHER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6006
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

SENSOR – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the fuel control unit and inlet temperature and pressure sensor.
crowned sight-pipe optical viewer Dave Jones Machinist, 1023 S.

Main St., South Bend, IN 46618
toolmakers microscope Brown and Sharpe, North Kingston,

RI 02852
QC No. 771 look/see kit Quality Control Co., 3301 Beverly

Blvd., Los Angeles, CA 90004


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-05-200-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 8001
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Inspect Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor (Subtask 73-21-05-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect inlet temperature and pressure sensor for security and evidence of damage.
(2) Visually inspect tube in inlet end of inlet temperature and pressure sensor for dirt and obstructions.
(3) Visually inspect bellows on inlet temperature and pressure sensor for collapsing, cracks, and
breaks. If bellows cannot be further compressed, unit is defective.
(4) Visually inspect capillary tube. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
(5) Check output stroke of inlet temperature and pressure sensor bellows as follows:
(a) Cool probe and bellows to approximately 40°F (4.4° C) to make sure that insert retracts
and Dimension A is less than 1.02 inches (25.9 mm). Refer to Figure 8001.
(b) Maintain temperature of probe and bellows at 75°F (23.9°C).
(c) Provide and install 0.150-inch (3.81 mm) diameter ball in end of insert and apply 15 pounds
(6.8 kg) force against ball.
(d) Measure Dimension A. Output stroke of bellows (Dimension A) must be approximately
1.02 inches (25.9 mm).
(6) Replace part that does not meet inspection requirement.
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor Bellows Inspection (GRAPHIC
73-21-05-99B-001-A01)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 1.02 (3.8) MAXIMUM DIA B 0.150 (3.8)
C. Inspect Fuel Control Assembly and Start Fuel Flow Regulator Assembly (Subtask
73-21-05-200-005-A01)
(1) Check fuel control assembly for security, loose fittings, fuel leakage, and other damage.
(2) Check fuel control lever for freedom of rotation.
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Visually inspect splines of fuel pump assembly and fuel control assembly.
NOTE: Whenever excessive wear is detected, thoroughly inspect mating part for similar
condition.
(a) Perform visual inspection using strong light and 10 power magnification.
(b) Minor burnish marks and discoloration are allowed.
(c) All internal splines showing discernible wear require further inspection using QC No. 771,
look/see kit, crowned sight-pipe optical viewer or other equivalent borescope-type
instrument.
(d) If spline teeth wear is suspected to exceed 0.003 inch (0.08 mm), the shaft must be replaced
or dimensionally inspected as described in the next step.
(e) Splines with wear in excess of 0.003 inch (0.08 mm) must be dimensionally inspected
using a toolmakers microscope or equivalent. An impression mold may be required in
conjunction with the toolmakers microscope for internal splines. If measured spline wear
is more than 0.005 inch (0.127 mm), the shaft must be replaced.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8003
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL CONTROL UNIT AND INLET TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE SENSOR – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test fuel control unit and inlet temperature and pressure sensor.

69 kPa) (+/-1.0 PSI (+/-7 kPa))

1,034 kPa) (with +0.1/-0.2 percent
accuracy)
pressure regulator (capable of commercially available

regulating air or oil pressure at 0 to
150 PSIG (0 to 1,034 kPa))
shutoff valve (manual type with 500 commercially available

PSIG (3,447 kPa) rating)
soft silicone tube (0.250-inch (6.35 commercially available

mm) ID)
Model MMF-1 flowmeter (Mini-Master Flowmeter, Dwyer Instruments Inc., 102 Hwy
capable of measuring 0.1 to 1.0 212, P.O. Box 373, Michigan City,
SCFH) IN 46361-0373


APPLICABLE.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
compressed air or nitrogen source commercially available

(0 to 400 PSIG (0.0 to 2,758 kPa))
2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-05-700-802-A01)
B. (Recommended Procedure) Fuel Control PS3 Rolling Diaphragm Leakage Check (Subtask
73-21-05-700-004-A01)
CAUTION: INLET TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE SENSOR PORT ON FUEL CONTROL MUST
BE SECURELY SEALED TO OBTAIN ACCURATE TEST RESULTS. AIR LEAKAGE WILL
INVALIDATE TEST RESULTS.
NOTE: Not applicable to Fuel Controls, PN 897780-X or PN 897780-XX and PN 897801-X or PN
897801-XX.
NOTE: Post SB TPE331-A73-0203/TPE331-73-0207 leak check procedures are recommended
however, Pre SB TPE331-A73-0203/ TPE331-73-0207 leakage check procedures may
be used as alternatives for the Post SB TPE331-A73-0203/TPE331-73-0207 procedures.
(1) Remove PS3 and PT2 sensing lines from fuel control assembly.
(2) Connect test equipment as follows:
(a) Connect a source of clean, filtered, compressed air or nitrogen source to a pressure
regulator. Set regulator at 150 PSIG (1,034 kPa). Refer to Figure 13001.
(b) Install a pressure gage, 0 to 150 PSIG (0 to 1,034 kPa) at pressure regulator outlet.
(c) Connect a soft silicone tube from gage to fuel control PS3 port.
(d) Connect soft silicone tube on fuel control PT2 port.
NOTE: A metal tube may be used instead of the soft silicone tube.
(e) (Pre SB TPE331-A73-0203/TPE331-73-0207) Install opposite end of soft silicone tube on

Model MMF-1, flowmeter inlet port. Make sure of a tight fit at both ends of soft silicone
tube.
NOTE: The sleeve on Model MMF-1, flowmeter may be removed if required.
(f) (Post SB TPE331-A73-0203/TPE331-73-0207) Install opposite end of soft silicone tube in

container of water. Make sure of a tight fit at PT2 port.
(3) (Pre SB TPE331-A73-0203/TPE331-73-0207) Slowly apply pressure to fuel control PS3 port
until pressure gage reads 20 PSIG (138 kPa). The Model MMF-1, flowmeter should indicate
flow briefly, as the rolling diaphragm travels, and then returns to 0 PSIG (0 kPa).
NOTE: Observe Model MMF-1, flowmeter while applying pressure to PS3 port.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13002
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CAUTION: REMOVE SOFT SILICONE TUBE FROM WATER BEFORE REDUCING PRESSURE.
REDUCING PRESSURE WITH SOFT SILICONE TUBE IN WATER WILL CAUSE
WATER TO BE DRAWN INTO FUEL CONTROL.
(4) (Post SB TPE331-A73-0203/TPE331-73-0207) Slowly apply pressure to fuel control PS3 port
until pressure gage reads 20 PSIG (138 kPa). Observe end of tube for bubbles for approximately
15 seconds.
NOTE: Observe end of soft silicone tube immersed in water while applying pressure to PS3
port.
NOTE: Bubbles will appear as the rolling diaphragm travels, and then stop once a steady
pressure is obtained.
(5) Reject fuel control if any flow is indicated on Model MMF-1, flowmeter or by bubbles with steady
pressure applied.
(6) (Pre SB TPE331-A73-0203/TPE331-73-0207) Slowly apply pressure to fuel control PS3 port
until pressure gage reads each of the pressures below. The Model MMF-1, flowmeter should
indicate flow briefly, as the rolling diaphragm travels, and then returns to 0 PSIG (0 kPa).
• 40 PSIG (276 kPa)
• 60 PSIG (414 kPa)
• 80 PSIG (552 kPa)
• 100 PSIG (690 kPa)
• 120 PSIG (827 kPa)
• 140 PSIG (965 kPa)
• 150 PSIG (1,034 kPa)
(a) Reject fuel control if any flow is indicated at any of the above pressures.
CAUTION: REMOVE SOFT SILICONE TUBE FROM WATER BEFORE REDUCING PRESSURE.
REDUCING PRESSURE WITH SOFT SILICONE TUBE IN WATER WILL CAUSE
WATER TO BE DRAWN INTO FUEL CONTROL.
(7) (Post SB TPE331-A73-0203/TPE331-73-0207) Slowly apply pressure to fuel control PS3 port
until the pressure gage reads each of the pressures below. Observe end of soft silicone tube
for bubbles for approximately 15 seconds.
NOTE: Observe end of soft silicone tube immersed in water while applying pressure to PS3
port.
NOTE: Bubbles will appear as the rolling diaphragm travels, and then stop once a steady
pressure is obtained.
• 50 PSIG (345 kPa)

• 75 PSIG (517 kPa)
• 100 PSIG (690 kPa)
• 125 PSIG (862 kPa)
• 150 PSIG (1,034 kPa)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13003
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Reject fuel control if any flow is indicated (bubbles) at any of the above pressures.
(8) (Post SB TPE331-A73-0203/TPE331-73-0207) Remove end of soft silicone tube from water and
release pressure from test setup.
(9) Remove test equipment and reconnect lines removed from PT2 and PS3 ports.
Figure 13001. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Recommended Procedure) Fuel Control PS3 Rolling Diaphragm Test Setup
(GRAPHIC 73-21-05-99B-001-A01)
5. AIR SOURCE (COMPRESSED AIR OR 20. (PRE SB TPE331-A73-0203)

NITROGEN) FLOWMETER
10. REGULATOR 21. (POST SB TPE331-A73-0203)
CONTAINER OF WATER
15. PRESSURE GAGE 25. FUEL CONTROL+/-
C. (Alternate Procedure) Fuel Control PS3 Rolling Diaphragm Leakage Check (Subtask
73-21-05-700-005-A01)
NOTE: Not applicable to fuel controls, PN 897780-X or PN 897780-XX and PN 897801-X or PN

897801-XX.
(1) Remove PS3 and PT2 sensing lines from fuel control assembly.
(2) Connect test equipment as follows:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13004
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(a) Connect a source of clean, filtered, compressed air or nitrogen source to a regulator. Set
pressure regulator at 150 PSIG (1,034 kPa). Refer to Figure 13002.
(b) Install a pressure gage, 0 to 150 PSIG (0 to 1,034 kPa) at pressure regulator outlet.
(c) Connect a soft silicone tube from gage to fuel control PS3 port.
(d) Connect a manual shutoff valve to a pressure gage, 0 to 10 PSIG (0 to 69 kPa) with 1
PSIG (7 kPa) increments. Connect a soft silicone tube from pressure gage to fuel control
PT2 port.
(3) Fully open manual shutoff valve and verify PT2 pressure gage reads 0 PSIG (0 kPa).
CAUTION: PRESSURE MUST BE APPLIED TO PS3 PORT SLOWLY, AND PT2 GAGE MUST
BE MONITORED WHILE PRESSURE TO PS3 PORT IS INCREASED. DO NOT
ALLOW ANY PRESSURE INCREASE TO BE OBSERVED ON THE PT2 GAGE WITH
MANUAL SHUTOFF VALVE OPEN.
(4) Slowly increase pressure to PS3 port from 0 to 150 PSIG (0 to 1,034 kPa) while observing PT2
pressure gage. If a pressure increase is noted on the PT2 gage at any pressure:
(a) Decrease pressure applied to PS3 port to 0 PSIG (0 kPa).
(b) Reject fuel control assembly.
(5) If no pressure rise is observed on PT2 gage, close manual shutoff valve at PT2 port. Verify PT2
pressure gage reads 0 PSIG (0 kPa).
CAUTION: PRESSURE MUST BE APPLIED TO PS3 PORT SLOWLY, AND PT2 GAGE MUST
BE MONITORED WHILE PRESSURE TO PS3 PORT IS INCREASED. DO NOT
ALLOW ANY PRESSURE OBSERVED ON THE PT2 GAGE TO EXCEED 10 PSIG
(68.9 KPA) WITH MANUAL SHUTOFF VALVE CLOSED.
(6) Slowly increase pressure to PS3 port from 0 to 150 (0 to 1,034 kPa) while observing PT2 pressure
gage. If a pressure increase is noted on the PT2 gage:
(a) Decrease pressure applied to PS3 port to 0 PSIG (0 kPa).
(b) If any pressure is indicated on PT2 gage, reject fuel control assembly.
(7) Remove test equipment and reconnect lines removed from PT2 and PS3 ports.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13005
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 13002. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Alternate Procedure) Fuel Control PS3 Rolling Diaphragm Test Setup
(GRAPHIC 73-21-05-99B-002-A01)
5. AIR SOURCE (COMPRESSED AIR OR 20. MANUAL SHUTOFF VALVE

NITROGEN)
10. REGULATOR 25. PRESSURE GAGE
15. PRESSURE GAGE 30. FUEL CONTROL
D. Perform Test Procedures (Subtask 73-21-05-700-006-A01)
(1) Perform fuel control assembly testing. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13006
73-21-05 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the fuel pump assembly.

pad)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-06-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Fuel Pump Assembly (Subtask 73-21-06-020-004-A01)
(1) Remove fuel filter. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-21-03-3000).

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Separate inlet temperature and pressure sensor and fuel control assembly from fuel pump
assembly. Refer to Paragraph 2.B. Install Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor (Subtask
73-21-05-420-004-A01).
(3) Using PN 294670-1, fuel control torquing wrench set, remove nuts (150, Figure 3001), and
washers (155) attaching fuel pump assembly (175), to mounting pad. Remove fuel pump
assembly.
(4) Remove cap (120), unions (110, 125), and packings (115, 130). Discard packings.
(5) Remove drive coupling (160) and packings (165, 170). Discard packings.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Pump Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 73-21-06-99B-001-A01)
110. UNION 155. WASHER

115. PACKING 160. DRIVE COUPLING
120. CAP 165. PACKING
125. UNION 170. PACKING
130. PACKING 175. FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
150. NUT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the fuel pump assembly.


pad)


APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

compound
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-06-420-802-A01)
B. Install Fuel Pump Assembly (Subtask 73-21-06-420-004-A01)
NOTE: Lightly coat new packings with any clean, approved engine fuel, Santovac OS-124, lubricant,
forward of the fireshield unless otherwise specified.
(1) Install unions (110, 125, Figure 4001) with new packings (115, 130). Torque unions to 35 to 40
in-lb (4.0 to 4.5 Nm). Install cap (120).
CAUTION: DO NOT PACK DRIVE COUPLING SPLINE WITH ANY TYPE OF GREASE.
(2) Install new packings (165, 170) on drive coupling (160) using PN 285843-1-1, seal installing
pilot.
(3) Install drive coupling (160) into fuel pump assembly (175).
NOTE: Fuel pump assembly drive coupling (160) is lubricated by clean, approved engine
oil.
(4) Install fuel pump assembly (175), exercising care to make sure that splines on drive coupling
(160) and accessory mounting pad splines properly align.
(5) Secure fuel pump assembly (175) with washers (155) and nuts (150). Torque nuts to 80 in-lb
(9.0 Nm) using PN 294670-1, fuel control torquing wrench set.
(6) Install fuel control assembly and inlet temperature and pressure sensor. Refer to Paragraph 2.B.
Install Inlet Temperature and Pressure Sensor (Subtask 73-21-05-420-004-A01).
(7) Install fuel filter. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-21-03-4000).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Pump Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC 73-21-06-99B-001-A01)

150. NUT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the fuel pump assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-06-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean outside surfaces of fuel pump assembly (175, Figure 6001). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK
(3) Clean fuel pump splines. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method 12.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Pump Assembly Cleaning (GRAPHIC 73-21-06-99B-001-A01)

150. NUT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the fuel pump assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-06-200-802-A01)
B. Perform Inspection/Check (Subtask 73-21-06-200-004-A01)
(1) Check fuel pump assembly for security, fuel leakage, loose fittings, and damage.
(2) Inspect splines of reduction gear section cavity, fuel pump assembly cavity, and drive coupling.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8001
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the fuel pump assembly.
PN 285802-1-1 adapter holder (used to install or CAGE: 06848

remove cap of HP relief valve body)

PN 298177-1 torque wrench splined adapter CAGE: 06848

(used to check fuel pump drive
running torque)


APPLICABLE.
cotton swab applicator commercially available
Krytox 240AC grease Dupont E.I. De Nemours and Co.

Inc., Industrial Polymers Div., 1300
Crossroads Pkwy, Ste 230, La
Puente, CA 91749
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-06-300-802-A01)
B. Partially Disassemble Fuel Pump Assembly (Subtask 73-21-06-300-004-A01)
(1) Remove boost pump assembly from HP pump assembly as follows:

(a) Position fuel pump on bench with boost pump assembly facing down.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW BEARINGS AND SHIMS TO SEPARATE FROM FUEL PUMP
WITHOUT FIRST DETERMINING THEIR PROPER LOCATIONS PRIOR TO
SEPARATION. FUEL PUMP MUST BE REASSEMBLED WITH BEARINGS AND
SHIMS IN EXACT LOCATIONS PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED. IF PREVIOUS
LOCATION OF BEARINGS AND SHIMS CANNOT BE DETERMINED, FUEL
PUMP MUST BE REPLACED.
(b) Remove bolts (5, 15, Figure 9001) and washers (10, 20) then separate boost pump
assembly (95) from HP pump assembly (100).
NOTE: When separating the HP pump assembly from the boost pump assembly, use
extreme care. Shim location and thickness must be recorded for later assembly.
(c) Place tape over bearings in HP pump assembly to hold bearings in place.
NOTE: If bearings are separated from fuel pump, bearings may be reinstalled only if
positive location identification was made during disassembly. Refer to Paragraph
2.C. Assemble Fuel Pump Assembly (Subtask 73-21-06-300-005-A01).
(d) Remove shaft (35). Remove and discard packings (40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 80).
NOTE: If discoloration of bearings in HP pump assembly or on removed drive shaft is
observed, replace pump.
(e) Remove washers (75) and spring tension washers (70) from boost pump assembly (95).
Record thickness of washers (75). Secure washers and spring tension washers together
and tag as being removed from Location 1.
(f) Remove washers (90) and spring tension washers (85) from boost pump assembly (95).
Record thickness of washers (90). Secure washers and spring tension washers together
and tag as being removed from Location 2.
(2) Remove HP relief valve assembly from fuel pump assembly as follows:
(a) Remove plug (5, Figure 9002). Remove and discard packing (10).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(b) Remove assembled HP relief valve assembly (25 through 75). Remove and discard packings
(70, 75).
WARNING: EXERCISE CARE IN DISASSEMBLY OF HP RELIEF VALVE ASSEMBLY (25
THROUGH 75) TO AVOID EJECTION OF PARTS BY SPRING FORCE AND
POSSIBLE INJURY TO PERSONNEL.
(c) Disassemble relief valve.

1 Place assembled relief valve in PN 285802-1-1, adapter holder with cap end down.
2 Disassemble cap assembly (25), washers (30), spring (45), valve guide (50), ball
(55), and relief valve body (65). Remove and discard packing (60).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Pump Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 73-21-06-99B-001-A01)
5. BOLT 60. PACKING

15. BOLT 70. SPRING TENSION WASHER
20. WASHER 75.
1 WASHER
35. SHAFT 80. PACKING

40. PACKING 85. SPRING TENSION WASHER
45. PACKING 90.
1 WASHER
50. PACKING 95. BOOST PUMP ASSEMBLY

55. PACKING 100. HP PUMP ASSEMBLY
NOTES:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9004
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9002. (Sheet 1 of 1) HP Relief Valve Assembly (GRAPHIC 73-21-06-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9005
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. PLUG 55. BALL

25. CAP 65. RELIEF VALVE BODY
45. SPRING 75. PACKING
50. VALVE GUIDE 80. PUMP ASSEMBLY
C. Assemble Fuel Pump Assembly (Subtask 73-21-06-300-005-A01)
NOTE: Refer to ASSEMBLY (PGBLK 70-00-00-10000) for conical seal installation procedure and
recommended general torque values. Add frictional drag (run-down) torque of self-locking
devices to recommended values.
(1) Install boost pump assembly to HP pump assembly as follows:
(a) If bearing separated during disassembly, install bearings at same locations noted during
disassembly. Make sure that bearings are installed as specified in Figure 9003.
NOTE: If the bearings separated from the boost pump housing during disassembly,
installation of bearings may only be accomplished if positive location identification
was made during disassembly.
(b) Install washers and new packings in fuel pump as follows:

NOTE: If discoloration of bearings in HP pump assembly or on removed drive shaft is
observed, replace fuel pump.
1 Install same quantity and thickness of washers (75) removed and recorded in
Paragraph 2.B. Partially Disassemble Fuel Pump Assembly (Subtask
73-21-06-300-004-A01) from Location 1 in boost pump assembly (95). Refer to Figure
9004.
2 Install spring tension washers (70).
3 Install same quantity and thickness of washers (90) removed and recorded in
Paragraph 2.B. Partially Disassemble Fuel Pump Assembly (Subtask
73-21-06-300-004-A01) from Location 2 in boost pump assembly (95).
4 Install spring tension washers (85).
5 Lubricate new packings (60, 65, 80) using Santovac OS-124, lubricant or Santovac
5, lubricant. Install packings on boost pump assembly (95).
6 Install new packing (55) on HP pump assembly (100).
(c) Lubricate and install drive shaft as follows:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9006
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
WARNING: WHEN USING KRYTOX 240AC, GREASE AVOID CONTACT WITH

HANDS. CLEAN THOROUGHLY AFTER USING KRYTOX 240AC,
GREASE TO PREVENT POSSIBLE INGESTION WHEN EATING OR
SMOKING.
1 Fill shaft cavities with Krytox 240AC, grease using grease gun or plastic syringe. Fill
shaft cavities from bottom to top. Refer to Figure 9005.
2 Install new packings (40, 45, 50) on shaft (35) using PN 285843-1-1, seal installing
pilot.
3 Coat shaft (35) with a heavy layer of Krytox 240AC, grease at Area A.
4 Press long end of shaft (35) in HP pump shaft cavity, forcing excess Krytox 240AC,
grease to flow from center of hole of shaft (35).
5 Coat shaft (35) with a heavy layer of Krytox 240AC, grease at Area B. Push cotton
swab applicator, bare end first in center hole of shaft (35) to remove excess Krytox
240AC, grease. Remove swab coated with excess Krytox 240AC, grease and discard.
CAUTION: DO NOT FORCE FLANGES TOGETHER AS DAMAGE TO THRUST
BEARINGS MAY RESULT.
6 Position HP pump against boost pump so that Area B of shaft (35) is inserted in boost
pump shaft cavity.
(d) Position HP pump against boost pump mating flange and secure with bolts (5, 15, Figure
9004) and washers (10, 20). Torque bolts to 25 to 30 in-lb (2.8 to 3.4 Nm).
(e) Position fuel pump assembly on a suitable bench with the fuel pump drive shaft in view
and support the assembly for inspection.
(f) Install PN 298177-1, torque wrench splined adapter in fuel pump female spline coupling.
(g) Attach torsion-spring-type torque wrench (0 to 35 in-lb (0 to 4.0 Nm) range) to hex end of
PN 298177-1, torque wrench splined adapter and apply torque in a CW rotation (facing
the fuel pump drive pad) to check running torque. Make a minimum of three complete
360-degree turns. Indicated torque must remain constant.
(h) If the running torque is less than 18 in-lb (2.0 Nm) return pump to service.
FIRE HAZARD.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT ADEQUATE LUBRICATION IS APPLIED TO FUEL PUMP

INTERNAL PART DURING PUMP RUN.
(i) If running torque is 18 in-lb (2.0 Nm) or more, rotate fuel pump at varying speeds up to
3,000 RPM for no more than 3 minutes. During fuel pump rotation continually spray engine
fuel or MIL-PRF-680, solvent on fuel pump internal parts. Check running torque, if less
than 18 in-lb (2.0 Nm), return pump to service.
(j) If the running torque continues to be 18 in-lb (2.0 Nm) or more after run-in, disassemble
fuel pump to determine cause. If after disassembly the cause cannot be determined, and
following reassembly the running torque still continues to be 18 in-lb (2.0 Nm) or more,
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9007
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
return pump to Honeywell International Inc, Distribution Center, 1944 E. Sky Harbor Circle,
Phoenix, AZ 85034-3440.
(k) Install fuel pump assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-21-06-4000).
(l) Perform initial leak check of fuel pump using the aircraft boost pump system.
NOTE: Prior to performing leak check, make sure that HP relief valve assembly is
installed. Refer to the next procedure to install HP relief valve assembly.
(m) Perform normal engine start. Observe fuel pump during starting procedure for any evidence
of leakage.
(n) Upon completion of fuel pump leak check, check and make sure of proper engine operation.
Refer to AFM.
(2) Install HP relief valve assembly in fuel pump assembly as follows:
(a) Assemble relief valve.
1 Install packing (60, Figure 9006) on relief valve body (65).
2 Assemble ball (55), valve guide (50), spring (45), and washer(s) (30).
3 Install cap (25) in PN 285802-1-1, adapter holder and torque relief valve body to 25
to 30 in-lb (2.8 to 3.4 Nm).
(b) Install packings (70, 75) on relief valve body (65).
(c) Install relief valve assembly (25 through 75) in fuel pump assembly and torque to 40 to 45
in-lb (4.5 to 5.1 Nm).
(d) Install packing (10) on plug (5). Install plug and packing in fuel pump assembly. Torque
plug (5) to 25 to 30 in-lb (2.8 to 3.4 Nm).
(e) Install fuel pump assembly. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-21-06-4000).
(f) Perform initial leak check of fuel pump using the aircraft boost pump system.
(g) Perform normal engine start and observe fuel pump during starting procedure for any
evidence of leakage.
(h) Upon completion of fuel pump leak check, make sure of proper engine operation. Refer to
AFM.
Figure 9003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Orientation of Bearings (GRAPHIC 73-21-06-99B-003-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9008
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9004. (Sheet 1 of 1) Fuel Pump Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 73-21-06-99B-004-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9009
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 60. PACKING

15. BOLT 70. SPRING TENSION WASHER
20. WASHER 75.
1 WASHER

40. PACKING 85. SPRING TENSION WASHER
45. PACKING 90.
1 WASHER
50. PACKING 95. BOOST PUMP ASSEMBLY

55. PACKING 100. HP PUMP ASSEMBLY
NOTES:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9010
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9005. (Sheet 1 of 1) Lubrication of Fuel Pump Assembly Shafts (GRAPHIC 73-21-06-99B-005-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9011
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

40. PACKING
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9012
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9006. (Sheet 1 of 1) HP Relief Valve Assembly (GRAPHIC 73-21-06-99B-006-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9013
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. PLUG 55. BALL

25. CAP 65. RELIEF VALVE BODY
45. SPRING 75. PACKING
50. VALVE GUIDE 80. PUMP ASSEMBLY
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9014
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test fuel pump assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-21-06-700-802-A01)
(1) Perform fuel control testing. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 72-00-00-13000).
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
73-21-06 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TORQUE/TEMPERATURE LIMITING – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Torque/Temperature Limiting (Subtask 73-22-00-870-001-A01)
(1) Torque/Temperature Limiting is an automatic limiting system which has the ability to limit a
portion of the fuel flow to the engine when prescribed temperature limits have been reached.
(2) The following components are used in temperature limiting system:
• TT2 Sensor
• EGT System
• SRL Controller
• Temperature Limiter Controller
• Torque Limiter By-pass Valve
• Delta P/P Transducer
(3) The SRL controller is adjusted to provide an output signal to the temperature limiter controller,
when the SRL, EGT is above a prescribed EGT level. When the temperature limiter controller
receives this signal, it transmits a voltage to the torque limiter by-pass valve, which opens the
valve causing a reduction in fuel flow to the engine of approximately 60 PPH. This reduction in
fuel flow will reduce the temperature to its prescribed limit. This will return the SRL controller to
its original state and close the torque limiter by-pass valve.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
73-22-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TORQUE LIMITER BY-PASS VALVE – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the torque limiter by-pass valve.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-22-01-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Torque Limiter By-Pass Valve (Subtask 73-22-01-020-004-A01)
(1) Remove electrical connector from torque limiter by-pass valve (60, Figure 3001).
(2) Remove torque limiter by-pass valve plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 73-10-01-3000).
(3) (Pre SB TPE331-73-0209) Remove bolt (5).
(4) (Pre SB TPE331-73-0209) Remove nut (25), washer (30), and torque limiter by-pass valve (60)
with bracket (45).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) (Post SB TPE331-73-0209) Remove nut (25) and torque limiter by-pass valve (60) with bracket
(47).
(6) (Pre SB TPE331-73-0209) Remove bolts (35), washers (36, 40), and torque limiter by-pass
valve (60) from bracket (45).
(7) (Post SB TPE331-73-0209) Remove bolts (35), washers (36, 40), and torque limiter by-pass
valve (60) from bracket (47).
(8) Remove reducer (50) and filter (85).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Limiter By-Pass Valve Removal (GRAPHIC 73-22-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 45. BRACKET

25. NUT 50. REDUCER
35. BOLT 60. TORQUE LIMITER BY-PASS VALVE
36. WASHER 85. FILTER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TORQUE LIMITER BY-PASS VALVE – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the torque limiter by-pass valve.



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

compound
2. Procedure (TASK 73-22-01-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Torque Limiter By-Pass Valve (Subtask 73-22-01-420-004-A01)
(1) Assemble torque limiter by-pass valve.
(a) Install reducer (50, Figure 4001) with new packing (55) in torque limiter by-pass valve (60)
outlet port. Torque reducer to 20 to 25 in-lb (2.3 to 2.8 Nm).
(b) Install filter (85) with new packing (90) in torque limiter by-pass valve (60) inlet port. Torque
filter (85) to 20 to 25 in-lb (2.3 to 2.8 Nm).
(c) (Pre SB TPE331-73-0209) Install torque limiter by-pass valve (60) on bracket (45) as
follows:
1 (Pre SB TPE331-73-0197) Install torque limiter by-pass valve (60) on bracket (45).
Secure with bolts (35) and washers (40). Torque bolts to 15 in-lb (1.7 Nm).
2 (Post SB TPE331-73-0197) Install torque limiter by-pass valve (60) on bracket (45).
Secure with bolts (35) and washers (36, 40). Torque bolts to 15 in-lb (1.7 Nm).
(d) (Post SB TPE331-73-0209) Install torque limiter by-pass valve (60) on bracket (47) as
follows:
1 (Pre SB TPE331-73-0197) Install torque limiter by-pass valve (60) on bracket (47).
Secure with bolts (35) and washers (40). Torque bolts to 15 in-lb (1.7 Nm).
2 (Post SB TPE331-73-0197) Install torque limiter by-pass valve (60) on bracket (47).
Secure with bolts (35) and washers (36, 40). Torque bolts to 15 in-lb (1.7 Nm).
(e) (Pre SB TPE331-73-0209) Install bracket (45) with torque limiter by-pass valve (60). Secure
with washers (30) and nuts (25). Torque nuts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(f) (Post SB TPE331-73-0209) Install bracket (47) with torque limiter by-pass valve (60).
Secure with nuts (25). Torque nuts to 80 in-lb (9.0 Nm).
(g) (Pre SB TPE331-73-0209) Install bolt (5). Torque bolts to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm).
(2) Install torque limiter by-pass valve plumbing. Refer to INSTALLATION (PGBLK 73-10-01-4000).
(3) Connect electrical connector to torque limiter by-pass valve.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Limiter By-Pass Valve Installation (GRAPHIC 73-22-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 45. BRACKET

25. NUT 50. REDUCER
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4004
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TORQUE LIMITER BY-PASS VALVE – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the torque limiter by-pass valve.



APPLICABLE.
PN K-8864-10 ultrasonic cleaner (5.2 gallons) Cole-Parmer Instrument Co, 7425

N. Oak Park Ave, Chicago, IL 60648
2. Procedure (TASK 73-22-01-100-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 6001
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Method 1 or 2.
(3) Clean torque limiter by-pass valve (60, Figure 6001). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Limiter By-Pass Valve Test Setup (GRAPHIC 73-22-01-99B-001-A01)
5. BOLT 45. BRACKET

UP495246
ALL Page 6003
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

25. NUT 50. REDUCER
C. Perform Special Cleaning (Subtask 73-22-01-100-005-A01)
(1) Clean filter using sonic method as follows:

FIRE HAZARD.
(a) Place filter in beaker and fill beaker with MIL-PRF-680, solvent to submerge filter.
NOTE: A beaker is used in Model HT 1.9, heated tank ultrasonic cleaner or Model S-2,
Sonac ultrasonic cleaner to conserve cleaning agent. Water is used in ultrasonic
cleaner tank as transmitting fluid.
(b) Place beaker containing filter in ultrasonic cleaner tank and fill ultrasonic cleaner tank to
within 0.375 inch (9.52 mm) of top with water.
(c) Operate PN K-8864-10, ultrasonic cleaner for 5 minutes.
FIRE HAZARD.
(d) Discard contaminated MIL-PRF-680, solvent and rinse filter and beaker with clean
MIL-PRF-680, solvent using plastic squeeze bottle.
FIRE HAZARD.
(e) Refill beaker with clean MIL-PRF-680, solvent and operate PN K-8864-10, ultrasonic
cleaner for an additional 5 minutes.
FIRE HAZARD.
(f) Repeat the above two steps until MIL-PRF-680, solvent remains clean after a 5-minute
operation period.
UP495246
ALL Page 6004
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(g) Remove the filter from the beaker and blow dry using clean, low pressure air supply.
(h) Install new packing on filter.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6005
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TORQUE LIMITER BY-PASS VALVE – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the torque limiter by-pass valve.
by-pass valve (throttling type) commercially available
filter (70 micron) commercially available
flowmeter (capable of measuring 0 commercially available

to 500 PPH with +/-2 percent
accuracy)
fluid pump (general purpose, 0 to commercially available

400 PSIG (0 to 2,758 kPa) capacity)


regulating pressure at 0 to 500
PSIG (0 to 3,447 kPa))
reservoir (capacity 10 gallons (38 commercially available

L))
shutoff valve (manual type with 500 commercially available

PSIG (3,447 kPa) rating)
thermocouple (40 to 120°F (4.4 to commercially available

48.9°C))
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)


APPLICABLE.
test fluid mineral spirits commercially available
Chevron thinner 325 test fluid commercially available
2. Procedure (TASK 73-22-01-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Torque Limiter By-Pass Valve and Mounting Bracket (Subtask 73-22-01-200-004-A01)
(1) Inspect threaded parts for damaged and stripped threads.

(2) Inspect torque limiter by-pass valve mounting bracket for cracks and security.
(3) Inspect filter in torque limiter assembly for contamination and clogging.
(a) The filter should be removed for servicing or replacement when inability to control engine
temperature indicates a clogged condition, or at interval specified in SB TPE331-72-0476.
FIRE HAZARD.
(b) If a clogged condition is indicated, the filter fitting should be replaced but sonic cleaning or
backflushing with solvent is allowed. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 73-22-01-6000), for
cleaning procedure. The filter must be replaced at next engine inspection period.
(4) Inspect electrical connector of torque limiter by-pass valve for bent and broken pins.
(5) Perform leak check as follows:
NOTE: The torque limiter by-pass valve is filled with a lubricant which acts as a damping
fluid.
(a) Construct test setup similar to that illustrated in Figure 8001 using the following components:
• A by-pass valve
• A filter
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
• A flowmeter
• A pressure gage, 0 to 500 PSIG (0 to 3,447 kPa)
• A pressure regulator
• A fluid pump
• A reservoir
• A thermocouple
• shutoff valve
(b) Provide Type II, test fluid or Chevron thinner 325, test fluid, or test fluid mineral spirits at
a temperature of 70 to 90° F (21 to 33°C).
(c) Install torque limiter assembly in test setup using standard plumbing as necessary.
(d) Open shutoff valve (10). Adjust pressure regulator (5) to obtain an inlet pressure of 390 to
410 PSIG (2,689 to 2,827 kPa) as indicated on pressure gage, 0 to 500 PSIG (0 to 3,447
kPa) (4).
(e) Leakage must not exceed 5 PPH as indicated in flowmeter (2).
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Torque Limiter By-Pass Valve Test Setup (GRAPHIC 73-22-01-99B-001-A01)
1. TORQUE LIMITER 6. FUEL FILTER

2. FLOWMETER 7. PUMP
3. THERMOCOUPLE 8. BY-PASS VALVE
4. PRESSURE GAGE 9. RESERVOIR
5. PRESSURE REGULATOR 10. SHUTOFF VALVE
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8004
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TORQUE LIMITER BY-PASS VALVE – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test torque limiter by-pass valve.
digital multimeter (4 1/2 digital commercially available

readout; accuracy of 0.5 percent or
greater; minimum impedance of 1
megohm)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 73-22-01-700-802-A01)
B. Check Continuity of Torque Limiter By-Pass Valve (Subtask 73-22-01-700-004-A01)
(1) Set digital multimeter on the R X 10 ohm scale and check for shorts between all terminals and
the case of the torque limiter. No observable deflection allowed.
(2) Check for continuity between terminals A and C. The *****digital multimeter must read 180 to
200 ohms.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13002
73-22-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
List of Effective Pages IGNITION

LEP-1 31 Jan 2012 UNIT – INSPECTION/
LEP-2 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
TC-1 31 Jan 2012 8002 31 Jan 2012
TC-2 31 Jan 2012 IGNITION
74-00-00 UNIT – TESTING
GENERAL – SYSTEM 13001 31 Jan 2012
1 31 Jan 2012 74-20-00
2 31 Jan 2012 DISTRIBUTION – SYSTEM
74-10-00 DESCRIPTION
ELECTRICAL POWER 1 31 Jan 2012
SUPPLY – SYSTEM 2 31 Jan 2012
DESCRIPTION 74-20-01
1 31 Jan 2012 IGNITION LEADS AND
2 31 Jan 2012 IGNITER
74-10-01 PLUGS – REMOVAL
IGNITION 3001 31 Jan 2012
UNIT – REMOVAL 3002 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 3003 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012 3004 31 Jan 2012
3004 31 Jan 2012 IGNITER
IGNITION PLUGS – INSTALLATION
UNIT – INSTALLATION 4001 31 Jan 2012
4001 31 Jan 2012 4002 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012 4003 31 Jan 2012
4003 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012
IGNITION IGNITER
UNIT – CLEANING PLUGS – CLEANING
6001 31 Jan 2012 6001 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
6003 31 Jan 2012 6003 31 Jan 2012
6004 31 Jan 2012 6004 31 Jan 2012
IGNITION LEADS AND
IGNITER

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-1
74-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
PLUGS – INSPECTION/ AUTO-IGNITION

CHECK SWITCH – CLEANING
8001 31 Jan 2012 6001 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
8003 31 Jan 2012 AUTO-IGNITION
8004 31 Jan 2012 SWITCH – INSPECTION/
IGNITION LEADS AND CHECK
IGNITER 8001 31 Jan 2012
PLUGS – REPAIR 8002 31 Jan 2012
9001 31 Jan 2012 AUTO-IGNITION
9002 31 Jan 2012 SWITCH – TESTING
9003 31 Jan 2012 13001 31 Jan 2012
9004 31 Jan 2012 13002 31 Jan 2012
IGNITION LEADS AND
IGNITER
PLUGS – TESTING
13001 31 Jan 2012
13002 31 Jan 2012
13003 31 Jan 2012
13004 31 Jan 2012
74-30-00
SWITCHING – SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
1 31 Jan 2012
2 31 Jan 2012
74-30-01
AUTO-IGNITION
SWITCH – REMOVAL
3001 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012
3003 31 Jan 2012
3004 31 Jan 2012
AUTO-IGNITION
SWITCH – INSTALLATION
4001 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012
4003 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-2
74-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER – 74
Title Page
CHAPTER 74 – IGNITION
Section 74-00 – 74-00-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 74-00-00 – GENERAL....................................................................................... 1
Section 74-10 – 74-10-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 74-10-00 – ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY.................................................... 1
ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION............................... 1
Subject 74-10-01 – IGNITION UNIT............................................................................... 3001
IGNITION UNIT – REMOVAL................................................................................ 3001
IGNITION UNIT – INSTALLATION........................................................................ 4001
IGNITION UNIT – CLEANING............................................................................... 6001
IGNITION UNIT – INSPECTION/CHECK.............................................................. 8001
IGNITION UNIT – TESTING.................................................................................. 13001
Section 74-20 – 74-20-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 74-20-00 – DISTRIBUTION............................................................................... 1
DISTRIBUTION – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION......................................................... 1
Subject 74-20-01 – IGNITION LEADS AND IGNITER PLUGS...................................... 3001
IGNITION LEADS AND IGNITER PLUGS – REMOVAL....................................... 3001
IGNITION LEADS AND IGNITER PLUGS – INSTALLATION............................... 4001
IGNITION LEADS AND IGNITER PLUGS – CLEANING...................................... 6001
IGNITION LEADS AND IGNITER PLUGS – INSPECTION/CHECK..................... 8001
IGNITION LEADS AND IGNITER PLUGS – REPAIR........................................... 9001
IGNITION LEADS AND IGNITER PLUGS – TESTING......................................... 13001
Section 74-30 – 74-30-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 74-30-00 – SWITCHING.................................................................................... 1
SWITCHING – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................. 1
Subject 74-30-01 – AUTO-IGNITION SWITCH.............................................................. 3001
AUTO-IGNITION SWITCH – REMOVAL............................................................... 3001
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-1
74-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Title Page
AUTO-IGNITION SWITCH – INSTALLATION....................................................... 4001

AUTO-IGNITION SWITCH – CLEANING.............................................................. 6001
AUTO-IGNITION SWITCH – INSPECTION/CHECK............................................. 8001
AUTO-IGNITION SWITCH – TESTING................................................................. 13001
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-2
74-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
A. Ignition System (Subtask 74-00-00-870-001-A01)
(1) The ignition system is designed to operate on 24 VDC power. The system consists of an ignition
unit, ignition leads, and igniter plugs.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
74-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Ignition Unit (Subtask 74-10-00-870-001-A01)
(1) The ignition unit, mounted on the upper right side of the input housing assembly, is a radio noise
suppressed, high voltage, capacitor discharge, intermittent sparking type unit. The ignition unit
utilizes 10 to 30 VDC (40 VDC for short periods) input to provide approximately 18,000 to 24,000
volts output to the igniter plugs. The system is capable of continuous operation when required
and is selected by a manually operated switch. The unit provides voltage to produce sparks at
the approximate rate of two per second to each igniter lead.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
74-10-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
IGNITION UNIT – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the ignition unit.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 74-10-01-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Ignition Unit (Subtask 74-10-01-020-004-A01)
(1) Shut off electrical supply to engine.

(2) Disconnect wiring harness assembly from ignition unit.
(3) Disconnect ignition leads from ignition unit.
(4) (Pre SB TPE331-75-0010) Remove bolts (5, 15, Figure 3001), washers (10), brackets (20),
clamp (25), spacer (30), and ignition unit (55) from accessory drive gearbox housing assembly.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
74-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) (Post SB TPE331-75-0010) Remove bolts (5, 15), washers (10), brackets (20, 21), clamp (25),
spacer (30), and ignition unit (55) from accessory drive gearbox housing assembly.
(6) Remove bolts (35, 45) and ignition unit brackets (40, 50).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
74-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Ignition Unit Removal (GRAPHIC 74-10-01-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
74-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 30. SPACER

10. WASHER 35. BOLT
15. BOLT 40. IGNITION UNIT BRACKET
20. BRACKET 45. BOLT
21. BRACKET 50. IGNITION UNIT BRACKET
25. CLAMP 55. IGNITION UNIT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
74-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
IGNITION UNIT – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the ignition unit.



APPLICABLE.

compound

(MIL-PRF-907)
2. Procedure (TASK 74-10-01-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
74-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Ignition Unit (Subtask 74-10-01-420-004-A01)
NOTE: Apply Liqui-Moly brand NV thread compound, anti-seize lubricant to thread of bolts or
screws located forward of the fireshield.
NOTE: Apply Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound to bolt and screw threads of
(1) Apply coat of Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound under bolt heads, ignition unit
flanges, brackets, and on mounting bosses.
(2) Install ignition unit brackets (40, 50, Figure 4001) on accessory drive gearbox housing and secure
with bolts (35, 45). Torque bolts to 25 in-lb (2.8 Nm).
(3) (Pre SB TPE331-75-0010) Install ignition unit (55) on brackets and secure with bolts (5, 15),
washers (10), spacer (30), clamp (25), and brackets (20). Torque bolts to 25 in-lb (2.8 Nm).
(4) (Post SB TPE331-75-0010) Install ignition unit (55) on brackets and secure with bolts (5, 15),
washers (10), spacer (30), clamp (25), and brackets (20, 21). Torque bolts to 25 in-lb (2.8 Nm).
(5) Connect ignition leads and wiring harness to ignition unit.
(6) Connect wiring harness assembly to ignition unit.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
74-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Ignition Unit Installation (GRAPHIC 74-10-01-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
74-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 30. SPACER

10. WASHER 35. BOLT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4004
74-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
IGNITION UNIT – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the ignition unit.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 74-10-01-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean external surfaces of ignition unit (55, Figure 6001). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK
(3) Clean electrical connectors on ignition unit (55). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000),
Cleaning Method 11.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
74-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Ignition Unit Cleaning (GRAPHIC 74-10-01-99B-001-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
74-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 30. SPACER

10. WASHER 35. BOLT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6003
74-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
IGNITION UNIT – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the ignition unit.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 74-10-01-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Ignition Unit (Subtask 74-10-01-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect for cracks, burns, broken, bent, or burned pins, and other damage.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8001
74-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
IGNITION UNIT – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test ignition unit.
variable VDC power source commercially available

(adjustable 0 to 30 VDC)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 74-10-01-700-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
74-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Test Ignition Unit (Subtask 74-10-01-700-004-A01)
WARNING: SPARKS AT IGNITER PLUGS ARE DANGEROUS. DO NOT COME INTO CONTACT
WITH IGNITER PLUGS WHEN IGNITER PLUGS ARE CONNECTED TO IGNITION
UNIT WITHOUT FIRST REMOVING POWER TO IGNITION UNIT AND SHORTING
ACROSS SPARK GAPS OF IGNITER PLUGS TO REMOVE STATIC CHARGE FROM
IGNITION UNIT. USE SCREWDRIVER OR OTHER TOOL HAVING A
WELL-INSULATED HANDLE WHEN SHORTING ACROSS SPARK GAPS. PERFORM
THE FOLLOWING STEPS IN A WELL-VENTILATED AREA.
(1) Connect two serviceable igniter plugs with serviceable ignition leads to ignition unit.
NOTE: This is a bench check of complete ignition system. Components of system (ignition
unit, igniter plugs, and igniter leads) of known serviceability may be used with a
component suspected of being defective to determine if serviceable, or serviceability
of complete system may be verified.
(2) Connect variable VDC power source (adjustable 0 to 30 VDC) across ignition unit electrical
connector (J3), Pins A (-) and B (+).
(3) Turn on variable VDC power source and adjust for 28 to 30 VDC. Each igniter plug must fire at
a rate not exceeding 360 sparks per minute for a minimum of 30 seconds.
(4) Reduce output of variable VDC power source to 10 VDC. Each igniter plug must fire at a rate
of at least 60 sparks per minute for a minimum of 30 seconds. If requirements are met, ignition
system is serviceable. Shut off power supply and terminate test.
(5) Replace ignition unit that does not produce proper spark rate.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13002
74-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
DISTRIBUTION – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Ignition Leads (Subtask 74-20-00-870-001-A01)
(1) The ignition leads are shielded high tension flexible leads connecting the ignition unit and igniter
plugs.
B. Igniter Plugs (Subtask 74-20-00-870-002-A01)
(1) The igniter plugs, mounted in the plenum assembly, are the air gap-type with center electrode
and ground electrode.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
74-20-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
IGNITION LEADS AND IGNITER PLUGS – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the ignition leads and igniter plugs.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 74-20-01-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Ignition Leads and Igniter Plugs (Subtask 74-20-01-020-004-A01)
(1) Shut off electrical supply to engine.

(2) Disconnect wiring harness assembly from ignition unit (70, Figure 3001).
(3) Remove nut (5), bolt (10), and clamps (15) securing ignition leads.
(4) Disconnect ignition leads (20, 40) from igniter plugs (25, 45) and ignition unit (70). Remove
ignition leads.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) Remove igniter plugs (25, 45) and gaskets (30, 50).
(6) Remove dummy igniter plug (60) and gasket (65).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Ignition Leads and Igniter Plugs Removal (GRAPHIC 74-20-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. NUT 40. IGNITION LEAD

10. BOLT 45. IGNITER PLUG
15. CLAMP 50. GASKET
20. IGNITION LEAD 60. DUMMY IGNITER PLUG
25. IGNITER PLUG 65. GASKET
30. GASKET 70. IGNITION UNIT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
IGNITION LEADS AND IGNITER PLUGS – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the ignition leads and igniter plugs.



APPLICABLE.
graphite-free grease commercially available
light machine oil commercially available
CRC 3-36 penetrating oil CAGE: 023V4

compound
Milk of Magnesia anti-seize compound commercially available

(MIL-PRF-907)
Turbinade TA-A penetrating oil (alternate for Roly International, P.O. Box 5103,
penetrating oil (CRC 3-36)) 4474 Market St #501, Ventura, CA
93003-8023
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
2. Procedure (TASK 74-20-01-420-802-A01)
B. Install Ignition Leads and Igniter Plugs (Subtask 74-20-01-420-004-A01)
screws located forward of the aft compressor case flange.
NOTE: Apply Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound to threads of bolts or screws
CAUTION: DO NOT USE SCREWDRIVER TO FREE GROMMET. POSSIBLE BREAKAGE OR
DAMAGE OF GROMMET RETENTION TANGS COULD RESULT.
(1) Prior to installation of igniter plugs, check the floating grommet on combustion chamber assembly
to make sure that it is free. If necessary, free grommet by using CRC 3-36, penetrating oil or
Turbinade TA-A, penetrating oil or light machine oil and carefully move grommet sideways to
achieve floating action. Align grommet by using small amount of any graphite-free grease.
NOTE: The Milk of Magnesia, anti-seize compound may be used as an alternate thread
lubricant on igniter plugs.
NOTE: Thoroughly mix Milk of Magnesia, anti-seize compound prior to application.
(2) Apply light coat of Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound to threads (electrode end)
of igniter plugs (25, 45, Figure 4001). Install igniter plugs with new gaskets (30, 50). Torque
igniter plugs to 200 to 250 in-lb (22.6 to 28.2 Nm).
(3) Apply light coat of Never-Seez NG-165, pure nickel thread compound to threads of dummy
igniter plug (60). Install dummy igniter plug with new gasket (65). Torque dummy igniter plug to
200 to 250 in-lb (22.6 to 28.2 Nm).
(4) Install ignition leads (20, 40) on igniter plugs (25, 45) and ignition unit (70). Torque ignition lead
connectors to 70 in-lb (7.9 Nm).
(5) Install clamps (15) and secure with bolt (10) and nut (5). Torque bolt to 20 to 25 in-lb (2.2 to 2.8
Nm).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Ignition Leads and Igniter Plugs Installation (GRAPHIC 74-20-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4004
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
IGNITION LEADS AND IGNITER PLUGS – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the ignition leads and igniter plugs.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 74-20-01-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean igniter plugs (25, 45, Figure 6001). Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 74-20-01-8000).
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Ignition Leads and Igniter Plugs Cleaning (GRAPHIC 74-20-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6003
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
IGNITION LEADS AND IGNITER PLUGS – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the ignition leads and igniter plugs.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 74-20-01-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Igniter Plugs (Subtask 74-20-01-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect for broken or missing parts. Shake plug and listen for rattling noise. If igniter
plug is broken, parts missing, or noise is present, replace igniter plug.
(2) Visually inspect center electrode and outer shell for erosion. If electrode is eroded below 0.090
inch (2.29 mm) of the ceramic insulator, replace igniter plug. Uniform erosion on electrode and
outer shell is allowed. Refer to Figure 8001.
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Visually inspect inner diameter of outer shell for erosion. Replace igniter plug if inner diameter
exceeds 0.330 inch (8.38 mm). Refer to Figure 8001, Diameter A.
(4) Visually inspect ceramic insulator for cracks or chipped area. Replace igniter plug if ceramic
insulator is damaged.
(5) Visually inspect outer shell for burned or flowed metal. Replace igniter plug if metal is burned
or flowed.
(6) Visually inspect grommet mating flange of igniter plug for grooving. If grooved on one side 0.030
inch (0.76 mm) deep or more, replace igniter plug.
(7) Visually inspect for clogged annular passage between insulator and outer shell. If clogged,
abrasive blast. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method 4.
(8) Visually inspect for cracks or broken ceramic, and bent or broken pin in the igniter plug connector.
Replace damaged igniter plug.
UP495246
ALL Page 8002
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 8001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Igniter Plug Inspection (GRAPHIC 74-20-01-99B-001-A01)
Limit Limit
DIA A 0.330 (8.38) MAXIMUM
C. Inspect Ignition Leads (Subtask 74-20-01-200-005-A01)
(1) Visually inspect ignition leads for cracks, burned and frayed covering, and other damage.
(a) Crushed shielding is not allowed if damage to internal conductor is suspected.
(b) Damage to internal conductor due to excessive bending or twisting is not allowed. Such
damage may be observed at either end of braided section and may be identified as unusual
bulging.
UP495246
ALL Page 8003
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) Worn (flat spots), broken, or frayed shielding may be repaired, if ignition lead is functional
and the following limits are not exceeded.
1 No more than one broken cord (or five individual wire strands) allowed in any one
damaged area.
2 No more than four area repairs allowed. Repair ignition lead covering. Refer to REPAIR
(PGBLK 74-20-01-9000).
(2) Replace ignition lead if inspection requirements are not met or damage is beyond repair. Refer
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8004
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
IGNITION LEADS AND IGNITER PLUGS – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the ignition leads and igniter plugs.
portable hot air gun commercially available
Model S30Y high potential tester (DC) Peschel Instruments Inc., Cape
Coral Industrial Park, 1411 SE 10th
St., Cape Coral, FL 33904


APPLICABLE.
PN 722-022-9105 tape CAGE: 06848
PN S9352-010-9-XXX insulation sleeving (XXX = length of CAGE: 06848

sleeving in inches and sixteenths of
inches)
2. Procedure (TASK 74-20-01-300-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Repair Damaged Ignition Lead Covering (Subtask 74-20-01-300-004-A01)
(1) Trim damaged area on shielding to make sure that all frayed material is removed and cannot
penetrate insulation and contact internal conductor. Refer to Figure 9001.
(2) Repair of more than four damaged areas is not allowed.
(3) Double wrap trimmed area with PN 722-022-9105, tape to approximately 0.50 inch (12.7 mm)
on both sides of damaged area.
(4) Install length of PN S9352-010-9-XXX, insulation sleeving required to extend 0.50 inch (12.7
mm) beyond each end of tape wrap. Refer to Figure 9001, Dimension A.
(5) Shrink PN S9352-010-9-XXX, insulation sleeving to a tight fit using portable hot air gun.
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Ignition Lead Covering Repair (GRAPHIC 74-20-01-99B-001-A01)
Limit Limit
DIM. A 0.5 (13)
C. Rework Ignition Lead Using Repair Kit (Subtask 74-20-01-300-005-A01)
(1) Replace wire in ignition lead as follows:

NOTE: Components (45 through 65, Figure 9002) are preassembled.
(a) Replace retaining ring (15) from contact (40) at igniter plug end of old ignition lead.
(b) Remove grommet (20) from contact (40), cut contact (40) from wire (60).
(c) Remove old wire from ignition lead covering and install new wire (60).
NOTE: New wire may be installed by either attaching old wire to new wire and pulling
old wire out and new wire into ignition lead covering or attaching a
five-foot-length of lockwire to new wire and pulling new wire into place.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(d) To make sure that igniter plug end of wire is properly seated, install an igniter plug on
ignition lead.
(e) Lightly pull wire at ignition unit end of ignition lead to make sure that wire is fully extended.
(f) Cut off excess wire to 1.12 inch (28.4 mm) nominal from face ferrule of ignition lead at
ignition unit end of wire.
(g) Strip 0.27 inch (6.8 mm) nominal of insulation off end of wire.
(h) Install contact (40) on exposed wire (60) and crimp contact (40) to wire (60).
(i) Install springs (35), grommet (20), grommet seal (30), and spring ferrule (25) over contact.
Compress assembled components, insert and seat retaining ring in first ring of contact.
(j) Perform insulation check at 18,000 volts, using a Model S30Y, high potential tester, prior
to installing lead.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Rework Ignition Lead (GRAPHIC 74-20-01-99B-002-A01)
15. RETAINING RING 45. RETAINING RING

20. GROMMET 50. GROMMET
25. SPRING FERRULE 55. GROMMET SEAL
30. GROMMET SEAL 60. WIRE
35. SPRING 65. CONTACT
40. CONTACT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9004
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
IGNITION LEADS AND IGNITER PLUGS – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test ignition leads and igniter plugs.
variable VDC power source commercially available

(adjustable 0 to 30 VDC)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 74-20-01-700-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Test Igniter Plugs (Subtask 74-20-01-700-004-A01)
(1) Connect igniter plugs to serviceable ignition unit with serviceable ignition leads to serviceable
ignition unit.
(2) Connect variable VDC power source (adjustable 0 to 30 VDC) across ignition unit electrical unit
connector (J3), Pins A (-) and B (+).
(3) Turn on variable VDC power source and adjust for 28 to 30 VDC. Each igniter plug must fire at
a rate not exceeding 360 sparks per minute for a minimum of 30 seconds.
(4) Reduce output of variable VDC power source to 10 VDC. Each igniter plug must fire at a rate
(5) Replace igniter plug that does not spark properly.
C. Test Ignition Leads (Subtask 74-20-01-700-005-A01)
(1) Connect two serviceable igniter plugs with ignition leads to serviceable ignition unit.
(2) Connect igniter plugs to serviceable ignition unit with serviceable ignition leads to serviceable
ignition unit.
(3) Connect variable VDC power source across ignition unit electrical unit connector (J3), Pins A
(-) and B (+).
(4) Turn on variable VDC power source and adjust for 28 to 30 VDC. Each igniter plugs must fire
at a rate not exceeding 360 spark per minute for a minimum of 30 seconds.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13002
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(5) Reduce output of variable VDC power source to 10 VDC. Each igniter plugs must fire at a rate
(6) Replace ignition leads if igniter plug does not spark properly.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13003
74-20-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
SWITCHING – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Auto-ignition Switch (Subtask 74-30-00-870-001-A01)
(1) During a negative torque condition, the NTS valve is closed and NTS oil pressure rises. This
increase in oil pressure is sensed by the auto-ignition switch. When the oil pressure rises to 30
PSIG (206.8 kPa), the auto-ignition switch closes providing a voltage path to the ignition unit.
This will automatically provide ignition during an inadvertent engine shutdown.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
74-30-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
AUTO-IGNITION SWITCH – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the auto-ignition switch.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 74-30-01-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Components for Access to Auto-ignition Switch (Subtask 74-30-01-020-004-A01)
(1) Remove required airframe components. Refer to AMM.

(2) Disconnect wiring harness from auto-ignition switch (40, Figure 3001).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
74-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Auto-ignition Switch Removal (GRAPHIC 74-30-01-99B-001-A01)

10. ELBOW 30. CLAMP
20. NUT 40. AUTO-IGNITION SWITCH
C. Remove Auto-ignition Switch (Subtask 74-30-01-020-005-A01)
(1) Remove tube assembly (5, Figure 3002).

(2) Remove bolt (25), washer (35), clamp (30), and auto-ignition switch (40).
(3) Remove elbow (10), packing (15), and nut (20).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
74-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Auto-ignition Switch Removal (GRAPHIC 74-30-01-99B-002-A01)

10. ELBOW 30. CLAMP
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
74-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
AUTO-IGNITION SWITCH – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the auto-ignition switch.



APPLICABLE.

compound
2. Procedure (TASK 74-30-01-420-802-A01)
B. Install Auto-ignition Switch (Subtask 74-30-01-420-004-A01)
NOTE: Refer to ASSEMBLY (PGBLK 70-00-00-10000), for recommended torque values. Add
NOTE: Apply Liqui-Moly brand NV thread compound, anti-seize lubricant to threads of bolts.
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
74-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Assemble auto-ignition switch (40, Figure 4001) to clamp (30) and secure assembly to torque
load assembly with washer (35) and bolt (25). Torque bolt to 50 in-lb (5.6 Nm).
(2) Install packing (15) and nut (20) on elbow (10).
(3) Install assembled elbow in NTS valve. Torque nut to 50 to 55 in-lb (5.6 to 6.2 Nm).
(4) Install tube assembly (5) between auto-ignition switch and NTS valve.
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Auto-ignition Switch Installation (GRAPHIC 74-30-01-99B-001-A01)

10. ELBOW 30. CLAMP
C. Install Components Removed for Access to Auto-ignition Switch (Subtask 74-30-01-420-005-A01)
(1) Connect wiring harness to auto-ignition switch (40, Figure 4002).

(2) Install aircraft components (removed for access). Refer to AMM.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
74-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Auto-ignition Switch Installation (GRAPHIC 74-30-01-99B-002-A01)

10. ELBOW 30. CLAMP
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
74-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
AUTO-IGNITION SWITCH – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the auto-ignition switch.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 74-30-01-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean auto-ignition switch (40, Figure 6001). Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000),
Cleaning Method 11.
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
74-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Auto-ignition Switch Cleaning (GRAPHIC 74-30-01-99B-001-A01)

10. ELBOW 30. CLAMP
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6002
74-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
AUTO-IGNITION SWITCH – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the auto-ignition switch.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 74-30-01-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Auto-ignition Switch (Subtask 74-30-01-200-004-A01)
(1) Inspect electrical connector for burned, broken or bent pins. No burned, broken, or bent pins
are allowed.
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8001
74-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
AUTO-IGNITION SWITCH – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test auto-ignition switch.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 74-30-01-700-802-A01)
B. Test Auto-ignition Switch (Subtask 74-30-01-700-004-A01)
(1) Connect variable oil pressure source to auto-ignition switch (40, Figure 13001).
(2) Slowly apply pressure to auto-ignition switch until switch closes as indicated by continuity across
Pins B and C of electrical connector. Record oil pressure applied. Switch must activate by 30
PSIG (206.8 kPa) on increasing pressure.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
74-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(3) Decrease pressure to auto-ignition switch until switch opens as indicated by continuity across
Pins A and B of electrical connector. Record oil pressure. Switch must open by 20 PSIG (137.9
kPa) on decreasing pressure.
NOTE: The auto-ignition switch contains a built-in delay action. This will cause a noticeable
delay between the time test pressure is released and the opening of the switch. The
delay time increases with decreasing oil temperature.
(4) Replace auto-ignition switch if it does not meet testing requirements.
Figure 13001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Auto-ignition Switch Testing (GRAPHIC 74-30-01-99B-001-A01)

10. ELBOW 30. CLAMP
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13002
74-30-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
List of Effective Pages ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF

LEP-1 31 Jan 2012 VALVE ASSEMBLY AND
LEP-2 31 Jan 2012 PLUMBING – CLEANING
TC-1 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
TC-2 31 Jan 2012 6003 31 Jan 2012
75-00-00 6004 31 Jan 2012
GENERAL – SYSTEM ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF
DESCRIPTION VALVE ASSEMBLY AND
1 31 Jan 2012 PLUMBING – INSPECTION/
2 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
75-10-00 8001 31 Jan 2012
ENGINE ANTI-ICE 8002 31 Jan 2012
(AIR) – SYSTEM ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF
DESCRIPTION VALVE ASSEMBLY AND
1 31 Jan 2012 PLUMBING – REPAIR
2 31 Jan 2012 9001 31 Jan 2012
75-10-01 9002 31 Jan 2012
ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF 9003 31 Jan 2012
VALVE ASSEMBLY AND 9004 31 Jan 2012
PLUMBING – REMOVAL 9005 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 9006 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012 9007 31 Jan 2012
3003 31 Jan 2012 9008 31 Jan 2012
3004 31 Jan 2012 9009 31 Jan 2012
3005 31 Jan 2012 9010 31 Jan 2012
3006 31 Jan 2012 9011 31 Jan 2012
ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF 9012 31 Jan 2012
VALVE ASSEMBLY AND 9013 31 Jan 2012
PLUMBING–INSTALLATION 9014 31 Jan 2012
4001 31 Jan 2012 ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF
4002 31 Jan 2012 VALVE ASSEMBLY AND
4003 31 Jan 2012 PLUMBING – TESTING
4004 31 Jan 2012 13001 31 Jan 2012
4005 31 Jan 2012 13002 31 Jan 2012
4006 31 Jan 2012 13003 31 Jan 2012
13004 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-1
75-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
75-10-02
ANTI-ICING SHIELD
ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
3001 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012
ANTI-ICING SHIELD
ASSEMBLY–INSTALLATION
4001 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012
4003 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012
ANTI-ICING SHIELD
ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
6001 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012
6003 31 Jan 2012
6004 31 Jan 2012
ANTI-ICING SHIELD
ASSEMBLY– INSPECTION/
CHECK
8001 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012
ANTI-ICING SHIELD
ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
9001 31 Jan 2012
9002 31 Jan 2012
9003 31 Jan 2012
9004 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-2
75-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER – 75
Title Page
CHAPTER 75 – AIR
Section 75-00 – 75-00-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 75-00-00 – GENERAL....................................................................................... 1
Section 75-10 – 75-10-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 75-10-00 – ENGINE ANTI-ICE (AIR)................................................................. 1
ENGINE ANTI-ICE (AIR) – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION........................................... 1
Subject 75-10-01 – ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY AND PLUMBING......... 3001
ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY AND PLUMBING – REMOVAL........... 3001
ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY AND PLUMBING – INSTALLATION..... 4001
ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY AND PLUMBING – CLEANING.......... 6001
ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY AND 8001
PLUMBING – INSPECTION/CHECK.....................................................................
ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY AND PLUMBING – REPAIR............... 9001
ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY AND PLUMBING – TESTING............. 13001
Subject 75-10-02 – ANTI-ICING SHIELD ASSEMBLY.................................................. 3001
ANTI-ICING SHIELD ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL.................................................... 3001
ANTI-ICING SHIELD ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION............................................ 4001
ANTI-ICING SHIELD ASSEMBLY – CLEANING................................................... 6001
ANTI-ICING SHIELD ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK.................................. 8001
ANTI-ICING SHIELD ASSEMBLY – REPAIR........................................................ 9001
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-1
75-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
A. Anti-Ice System (Subtask 75-00-00-870-001-A01)
(1) The anti-ice system consists of an inlet anti-ice shutoff valve assembly and inlet anti-icing shield
assembly. High temperature air is bled through a boss on the turbine plenum assembly and is
routed forward to a normally closed anti-ice shutoff valve assembly. The anti-ice shutoff valve
assembly is opened by manual actuation of a switch in the cockpit. When opened, air from the
valve is routed to the anti-icing shield assembly, and to a port where the customer may obtain
air for anti-icing other forward areas of the engine nacelle.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
75-00-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ENGINE ANTI-ICE (AIR) – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Anti-Ice Shutoff Valve Assembly (Subtask 75-10-00-870-001-A01)
(1) The anti-ice shutoff valve assembly, mounted on the upper right side of the compressor housing
is a normally closed poppet-type valve actuated by a separate switch in the aircraft cockpit.
Plumbing lines connect the valve to the compressor air discharge tap on the combustion chamber
case and to the inlet air anti-icing shield assembly. When the valve is open it permits flow of hot
compressed air into the anti-icing shield to prevent formation of ice.
B. Anti-Ice Shield (Subtask 75-10-00-870-002-A01)
(1) The anti-icing shield assembly is contoured around the upper portion of the inlet air duct. An
airspace passage between the shield and the upper outer surface of the air inlet provides the
annulus for bleed airflow which is discharged to atmosphere at the rear end of the shield. Ports
in the inlet housing casting also provide for bleed air entry into the compressor cavity located
between the aft portion of the compressor inlet housing and the forward portion of the compressor
for further anti-icing of the engine air inlet. Bleed air admitted through the anti-ice shutoff valve
assembly into the air passage between the compressor air inlet and the shield raises the
temperature of the engine air inlet casting surface and provides the required anti-icing. The
entire lower portion of the compressor air inlet is integral with the input housing assembly and
is kept free of ice formation by heat transfer from engine oil to the inlet surface.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
75-10-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY AND PLUMBING – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the anti-ice shutoff valve assembly and plumbing.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 75-10-01-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Anti-Ice Shutoff Valve Assembly and Plumbing (Subtask 75-10-01-020-004-A01)
(1) Disconnect electrical connector. Refer to AMM.

(2) Remove anti-ice shutoff valve assembly plumbing and attaching parts.
(a) Remove nut (25, Figure 3001), bolt (30), and clamp (35).
(b) (Post SB TPE331-75-0010) Remove nut (40), bolt (45), and clamp (50).
(c) (Post SB TPE331-75-0010) Remove nut (85), bolt (90), and clamp (95).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(d) Remove plain nut (70), tube assembly (80), and gasket (75).
(e) Remove union (60), washer (65), and cap (55), as required.
(f) Remove tube assembly (5) and metal tube (20).
(g) Remove caps (10, 15), as required.
(3) (Pre SB TPE331-75-0010) Remove anti-ice shutoff valve assembly.
(a) Remove bolts (5, Figure 3002), washers (10), supports (15, 20), and solenoid shutoff valve
(25).
(b) Remove nuts (30), bolts (35), and brackets (45, 50, 55), as required.
(4) (Post SB TPE331-75-0010) Remove anti-ice shutoff valve assembly.
(a) Remove nut (5, Figure 3003), bolt (10), clamp (15), and solenoid shutoff valve (20).
(b) Remove nut (25), bolt (30), washer (35), and bracket (40).
(c) Remove nut (50), bolt (60), and loop clamp (70).
(d) Remove nut (80), bolt (90), and bracket (100).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Anti-Icing Shutoff Valve Assembly Plumbing Removal (GRAPHIC
75-10-01-99B-001-A01)
5. TUBE ASSEMBLY 55. CAP

10. CAP 60. UNION
15. CAP 65. WASHER
20. METAL TUBE 70. PLAIN NUT
25. NUT 75. GASKET
30. BOLT 80. TUBE ASSEMBLY
35. CLAMP 85. NUT
40. NUT 90. BOLT
45. BOLT 95. CLAMP
50. CLAMP 100. ANTI-ICING VALVE ASSEMBLY
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3002. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-75-0010) Anti-Ice Shutoff Valve Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC
75-10-01-99B-002-A01)
5. BOLT 30. NUT

10. WASHER 35. BOLT
15. SUPPORT 45. BRACKET
25. SOLENOID SHUTOFF VALVE 55. BRACKET
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3003. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-75-0010) Anti-Ice Shutoff Valve Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC
75-10-01-99B-003-A01)
5. NUT 40. BRACKET

10. BOLT 50. NUT
15. CLAMP 60. BOLT
20. SOLENOID SHUTOFF VALVE 70. LOOP CLAMP
25. NUT 80. NUT
30. BOLT 90. BOLT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3005
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY AND PLUMBING – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the anti-ice shutoff valve assembly and plumbing.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 75-10-01-420-802-A01)
B. Install Anti-Ice Shutoff Valve Assembly and Plumbing (Subtask 75-10-01-420-004-A01)
(1) (Pre SB TPE331-75-0010) Install anti-ice shutoff valve assembly.
(a) Install solenoid shutoff valve (25, Figure 4001) on brackets (45, 50). Secure loosely with
supports (15, 20), washers (10), and bolts (5).
(b) Install solenoid shutoff valve with brackets. Secure loosely with bolts (35) and nuts (30).
UP495246
ALL Page 4001
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) (Post SB TPE331-75-0010) Install anti-ice shutoff valve assembly.

(a) Install bracket (100, Figure 4002). Secure loosely with bolt (90) and nut (80).
(b) Install loop clamp (70). Secure loosely with bolt (60) and nut (50).
(c) Install bracket (40). Secure loosely with washer (35), bolt (30), and nut (25).
(d) Install solenoid shutoff valve (20). Secure loosely with clamp (15), bolt (10), and nut (5).
(3) (Pre SB TPE331-75-0010) Install anti-ice valve plumbing as follows:
CAUTION: DO NOT OVER TORQUE TUBE NUTS. OVER TORQUE MAY DAMAGE
ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY MOUNTING BRACKETS.
CAUTION: BOLT TIGHTENING SEQUENCE MUST NOT PRELOAD THE ANTI-ICE

SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY.
(a) (Pre SB TPE331-72-2000) Install tube assembly (80, Figure 4003) with new port gasket
(75) and secure with plain nuts (70). Torque plain nuts (70) to 20 in-lb (2.2 Nm). Torque
B-nut on tube assembly (80) to 325 in-lb (36.7 Nm).
(b) (Post SB TPE331-72-2000) Install tube assembly (80) with new port gasket (75) and secure
with plain nuts (70). Torque plain nuts (70), in a “criss-cross” pattern, to 35 in-lb (3.4 Nm)
and lockwire. Torque B-nut on tube assembly (80) to 325 in-lb (36.7 Nm).
(c) Install washer (65) and union (60). Torque union (60) to 35 to 40 in-lb (4.0 to 4.5 Nm).
(d) Install cap (55) on union (60). Torque cap (55) to 100 to 120 in-lb (11.3 to 13.6 Nm) and
lockwire.
(e) Install metal tube (20) and secure to input housing assembly with clamp (35), bolt (30),
and nut (25). Torque bolt (30) to 50 to 60 in-lb (5.6 to 6.8 Nm). Torque B-nut on tube
assembly (20) to 325 in-lb (36.7 Nm).
(f) Install caps (10, 15) on metal tube (20). Torque caps (10, 15) to 190 to 220 in-lb (21.4 to
24.8 Nm).
(g) Install tube assembly (5). Torque both B-nuts on tube assembly (5) to 190 to 220 in-lb
(21.4 to 24.8 Nm).
(4) (Post SB TPE331-75-0010) Install anti-ice valve plumbing as follows:
(a) Loosely secure metal tube (20, Figure 4003) with nuts (25, 40), bolts (30, 45) and clamps
(35, 50).
(b) Loosely secure tube assembly (80) with nut (85), bolt (90), and clamp (95).
CAUTION: DO NOT OVER TORQUE TUBE NUTS. OVER TORQUE MAY DAMAGE
ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY MOUNTING BRACKETS.
CAUTION: BOLT TIGHTENING SEQUENCE MUST NOT PRELOAD THE ANTI-ICE

SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY.
(c) (Pre SB TPE331-72-2000) Install tube assembly (80) with new port gasket (75) and secure
with plain nuts (70). Torque plain nuts (70) to 20 in-lb (2.2 Nm). Torque B-nut on tube
assembly (80) to 325 in-lb (36.7 Nm).
(d) (Post SB TPE331-72-2000) Install tube assembly (80) with new port gasket (75) and secure
with plain nuts (70). Torque plain nuts (70), in a “criss-cross” pattern, to 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm)
and lockwire. Torque B-nut on tube assembly (80) to 325 in-lb (36.7 Nm).
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(e) Torque bolt (90) to 50 to 60 in-lb (5.6 to 6.8 Nm).

(f) Torque B-nut on metal tube (20) to 325 in-lb (36.7 Nm).
(g) Install caps (10) on metal tube (20). Torque caps (10) to 190 to 220 in-lb (21.4 to 24.8 Nm).
(h) Install tube assembly (5). Torque both B-nuts on tube assembly (5) to 190 to 220 in-lb
(21.5 to 24.8 Nm).
(i) Torque bolts (30, 45) to 50 to 60 in-lb (5.6 to 6.8 Nm). Torque bolt securing anti-ice valve
(100) clamp (bolt head inboard) to 50 to 60 in-lb (5.6 to 6.8 Nm).
Figure 4001. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Pre SB TPE331-75-0010) Anti-Ice Shutoff Valve Assembly Installation (GRAPHIC
75-10-01-99B-001-A01)
5. BOLT 30. NUT

10. WASHER 35. BOLT
25. SOLENOID SHUTOFF VALVE 55. BRACKET
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4002. (Sheet 1 of 1) (Post SB TPE331-75-0010) Anti-Ice Shutoff Valve Assembly Installation
(GRAPHIC 75-10-01-99B-002-A01)
5. NUT 40. BRACKET

10. BOLT 50. NUT
15. CLAMP 60. BOLT
20. SOLENOID SHUTOFF VALVE 70. LOOP CLAMP
25. NUT 80. NUT
30. BOLT 90. BOLT
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 4003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Anti-Icing Shutoff Valve Assembly Plumbing Installation (GRAPHIC
75-10-01-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
ALL Page 4005
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

10. CAP 60. UNION
15. CAP 65. WASHER
25. NUT 75. GASKET
35. CLAMP 85. NUT
40. NUT 90. BOLT
45. BOLT 95. CLAMP
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4006
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY AND PLUMBING – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the anti-ice shutoff valve assembly and plumbing.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 75-10-01-100-802-A01)
Method 1 or 2.
(2) Clean all plumbing and fittings. Refer to CLEANING (PGBLK 72-00-00-6000), Cleaning Method
12.
(3) Clean anti-ice shutoff valve assembly (100, Figure 6001). Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK
75-10-01-9000).
UP495246
ALL Page 6001
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 6001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Anti-Icing Shutoff Valve Assembly Plumbing Cleaning (GRAPHIC
75-10-01-99B-001-A01)

10. CAP 60. UNION
15. CAP 65. WASHER
25. NUT 75. GASKET
35. CLAMP 85. NUT
40. NUT 90. BOLT
45. BOLT 95. CLAMP
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6003
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY AND PLUMBING – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the anti-ice shutoff valve assembly and plumbing.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 75-10-01-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Anti-Ice Shutoff Valve Assembly (Subtask 75-10-01-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect valve body for dents, cracks, or damage. No dents, cracks, or damage allowed.
(2) Visually inspect electrical connector for bent, broken, or burned pins. No bent, broken, or burned
pins allowed.
(3) Visually inspect threaded parts for stripped, galled, or peened threads. No stripped, galled, or
(4) Inspect tube assemblies. Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK (PGBLK 70-00-00-8000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY AND PLUMBING – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the anti-ice shutoff valve assembly and plumbing.
clutch-type drafting pencil commercially available
pin vise commercially available

regulating air or oil pressure at 0 to
150 PSIG (0 to 1,034 kPa))
PN AN804-4 bulkhead fitting commercially available


APPLICABLE.
NOTE: Equivalent alternatives cannot be used for Epoxylite 6203, epoxy resin.

and engine fuels.
1,200 grit lapping compound commercially available

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
BL-A solid film lubricant (MIL-L-23398, Roly International, P.O. Box 5103,
Type II, alternate for Miracle Power 4474 Market St #501, Ventura, CA
DGF124) 93003-8023
Epoxylite 6203 epoxy resin CAGE: 1M9V0
Miracle Power DGF124 dry-film lubricant CAGE: 16837
Strip-Sol paint and carbon remover (alternate Griggs Paint Inc., 3635 S. 16th St.,
for Turco Transpo) Phoenix, AZ 85040-1305
Turco-Transpo paint and carbon remover CAGE: 61102
2. Procedure (TASK 75-10-01-300-802-A01)
B. Remove Anti-Ice Shutoff Valve Assembly (Subtask 75-10-01-300-004-A01)
(1) Remove anti-ice shutoff valve assembly and plumbing. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK
75-10-01-3000).
(2) Prior to disassembly, perform anti-ice shutoff valve assembly leak check as follows:
(a) Install anti-ice shutoff valve assembly in test setup. Refer to Figure 9001.
(b) Connect test setup to a source of clean, compressed air capable of maintaining a pressure
of 60 PSIG (413.7 kPa).
(c) Supply air to pressure regulator and adjust regulator to 60 PSIG (413.6 kPa) on gage
upstream of orifice. Tap inlet fitting lightly until a steady downstream pressure reading is
obtained.
(d) If pressure indication on pressure gage downstream of orifice is less than 38 PSIG (262.0
kPa), valve is leaking excessively. Repair valve. Refer to next step for valve seat lapping
procedures.
(3) Repair anti-ice shutoff valve assembly with excessive leakage as follows:
(a) Remove spring retainer (5, Figure 9002) and spring from valve body assembly (25).
CAUTION: DO NOT INSTALL PN AN804-4, BULKHEAD FITTING IN PORT WITH
EXCESSIVE FORCE TO AVOID OPERATING ROD DAMAGE.
(b) Carefully thread PN AN804-4, bulkhead fitting in retainer and spring port to hold valve
poppet open.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(c) Mix clean, approved engine oil with 1,200 grit, lapping compound to form a slurry. Working
through inlet port of valve body, apply lapping compound to both valve seats. Remove PN
AN804-4, bulkhead fitting previously installed.
(d) Insert pin vise or clutch-type drafting pencil of proper size through port from which spring
retainer and spring were removed and secure to end of valve poppet. Lap valve seats by
rotating pin vise or clutch-type drafting pencil back and forth while advancing. Refer to
Figure 9003.
FIRE HAZARD.
(e) Install PN AN804-4, bulkhead fitting in spring retainer and spring port to hold valve open.
Thoroughly flush valve body interior with MIL-PRF-680, solvent, through inlet port, until all
lapping compound and grit are removed.
FIRE HAZARD.

(f) Direct clean, dry compressed air through inlet port until valve body is free of solvent.
(g) Remove PN AN804-4, bulkhead fitting previously installed. Install spring retainer assembly
(5, Figure 9002) and spring in valve body assembly (25).
(h) Perform leak test on repaired anti-ice shutoff valve assembly as follows:
1 Install anti-ice shutoff valve assembly in test setup. Refer to Figure 9001.
2 Connect test setup to a source of clean, compressed air capable of maintaining a

pressure of 60 PSIG (413.7 kPa).
3 Supply air to pressure regulator and adjust regulator to 60 PSIG (413.6 kPa) on gage
upstream of orifice. Tap inlet fitting lightly until a steady downstream pressure reading
is obtained.
4 If pressure indication on pressure gage downstream of orifice is less than 38 PSIG
(262.0 kPa), valve is leaking excessively. Repair valve.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Anti-Ice Shutoff Valve Assembly Test Setup (GRAPHIC 75-10-01-99B-001-A01)
1. AIR PRESSURE REGULATOR 4. PRESSURE GAGE

2. SHUTOFF VALVE 5. ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY
3. FLOW RESTRICTOR (0.055-INCH
(1.40 MM) DIAMETER)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9004
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Anti-Ice Shutoff Valve Assembly (GRAPHIC 75-10-01-99B-002-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9005
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. SPRING RETAINER ASSEMBLY 25. VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY

10. PACKING 30. FLANGE ADAPTER
15. SCREW 35. ELECTROMAGNET AND RECEPTACLE
ASSEMBLY
20. WASHER
Figure 9003. (Sheet 1 of 1) Cutaway View of Anti-Ice Shutoff Valve Assembly Showing Valve Seats, Inlet
Port and Valve Poppet (GRAPHIC 75-10-01-99B-003-A01)
C. Disassemble Anti-Icing Shutoff Valve Assembly (Subtask 75-10-01-300-005-A01)
CAUTION: THE VALVE ASSEMBLY, SOLENOID ASSEMBLY, AND ARMATURE ASSEMBLY ARE
MATCHED ASSEMBLIES. DURING DISASSEMBLY, TAG THESE PARTS AS A MATCHED
ASSEMBLY TO MAKE SURE THAT PARTS ARE NOT MIXED WITH OTHER PARTS.
NOTE: Do not disassemble any staked, swaged, soldered, or press-fit assemblies, plates, markers,
studs, passage hole plugs, inserts, or sleeves unless otherwise instructed in the text or
necessitated by replacement of a part.
NOTE: Count and note the number and aggregate thickness of all shims or washers used for
shimming that are removed during disassembly for reference at reassembly.
(1) Scribe a mark on the valve body assembly (25, Figure 9004) flange, flange adapter (30), and
electromagnet assembly (35) to aid in assembly.
(2) Remove lockwire, loosen screws (15) (do not remove) securing valve body assembly (25) to
electromagnet assembly (35). While holding electromagnet assembly, separate electromagnet
assembly and flange adapter (30) from valve body assembly by striking valve body assembly
with soft-face plastic hammer.
(3) Remove screws (15) and washers (20), separate electromagnet assembly (35) from valve body
assembly (25) and flange adapter (30).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9006
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(4) Remove armature assembly, armature arm, washers (washer nearest electromagnet assembly
(35) may not be present), and spring as an assembly.
NOTE: If armature assembly cannot be removed, strike with plastic hammer to loosen. If
unable to remove armature by striking, using shallow container, soak electromagnetic
assembly in MIL-PRF-680, solvent (connector end up) so barrel is submerged about
0.75 inch (19.0 mm).
(5) Remove spring and washers from armature arm.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9007
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9008
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
20. WASHER
D. Clean Anti-ice Shutoff Valve Assembly (Subtask 75-10-01-300-006-A01)

(1) Wipe surfaces of all parts except electrical connector on electromagnet assembly with clean,
lint-free cloth dipped in MIL-PRF-680, solvent.
CAUTION: DO NOT IMMERSE PARTS TO REMOVE PAINT.
(2) Remove paint, varnish, adhesive, etc, from flange adapter (30, Figure 9005), mating surface of
valve body (25) and electromagnet assembly (35) using razor blade scraper. Apply Strip-Sol,
paint and carbon remover or Turco-Transpo, paint and carbon remover to scraped area.
Thoroughly clean parts following above process.
(3) Soak armature assembly in Strip-Sol, paint and carbon remover or Turco-Transpo, paint and
carbon remover. Wipe spring and armature arm with solvent. Remove any oily substances and/or
varnishes from the inside cavity of exposed electromagnet assembly with cotton swab dipped
in solvent. Dry parts with clean, dry, low pressure compressed air.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9009
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9010
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
20. WASHER
E. Assemble Anti-Ice Shutoff Valve Assembly (Subtask 75-10-01-300-007-A01)
(1) Spray a small amount of Miracle Power DGF124, dry-film lubricant or BL-A, solid film lubricant
directly into inlet ports of valve body. Wipe off excess lubricant. Refer to Figure 9006.
(2) Apply Miracle Power DGF124, dry-film lubricant or BL-A, solid film lubricant to armature assembly,
armature arm and spring. Wipe off excess lubricant.
(3) Install armature assembly, armature arm, same quantity and thickness of washers (if present)
as noted in disassembly and spring.
(4) Check armature assembly for freedom of movement by depressing armature, rod and spring
assembly. Determine that position switch is actuated, by using ohmmeter check for continuity
between Pins C and E before armature assembly bottoms. If switch is not actuated by depressing
armature assembly, return to manufacturer for repair.
CAUTION: USE EXTREME CARE TO PREVENT ANY EPOXYLITE 6203, EPOXY RESIN FROM
ENTERING ARMATURE CAVITY OF ELECTROMAGNET ASSEMBLY OR ANY
EPOXYLITE 6203, EPOXY RESIN COMING IN CONTACT WITH ANY OF THE
ARMATURE PARTS THAT WOULD INTERFERE WITH FREE MOVEMENT OF
ARMATURE.
(5) Prepare Epoxylite 6203, epoxy resin in accordance with instructions on kit (two parts liquid to
one part powder, by weight or three parts powder to one part liquid, by volume).
NOTE: Epoxylite 6203, epoxy resin components have shelf-life of 1 year.

(6) Wipe area to be sealed with MIL-PRF-680, solvent and dry with clean cloth. Apply Epoxylite
6203, epoxy resin to form continuous fillet in area illustrated in Figure 9006.
(7) Install electromagnet assembly (35), flange adapter (30) on valve body assembly (25), align
scribe marks made at disassembly. Using an arbor press, press assembly together, secure with
screws and washers. Torque screws to 15 in-lb (1.7 Nm), lockwire.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9011
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

(8) Place assembled valve in oven in upright position with connector end up and valve end down.
Cure Epoxylite 6203, epoxy resin at one of the following times and temperatures. Time begins
after oven and assembly are up to temperature.
NOTE: Epoxylite 6203, epoxy resin will not cure at room temperature. Cure by baking in
oven.
(a) 350°F (177°C) for 1 hr minimum.

(b) 250°F (121°C) for 4 hours minimum.
(c) 200°F (93°C) for 16 hours minimum.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9012
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9013
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

ASSEMBLY
20. WASHER
F. Test Anti-Ice Shutoff Valve Assembly (Subtask 75-10-01-300-008-A01)
NOTE: Valve is not installed on engine for following test.

(1) Electrically test anti-ice shutoff valve. Refer to TESTING (PGBLK 75-10-01-13000), observing
valve poppet stroking through valve port. Refer to Figure 9007.
(2) Connect air source to confirm that valve properly controls flow and shutoff of air.

3. FLOW RESTRICTOR (0.055-INCH (1.40
MM) DIAMETER)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9014
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ANTI-ICE SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY AND PLUMBING – TESTING
(1) Use these procedures to test anti-ice shutoff valve assembly and plumbing.

414 kPa) (+/-2 percent accuracy)
Simpson Model 260 volt-ohmmeter (capable of indicating CAGE: 55026

continuity and 0 to 300 ohms
resistance with accuracy of +/-2
percent)


APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 75-10-01-700-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13001
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Test Anti-Ice Shutoff Valve Assembly for Proper Operation (Subtask 75-10-01-700-004-A01)
(1) Using Simpson Model 260, volt-ohmmeter, check for continuity across Pins C and D of electrical
connector. Continuity must be indicated. Check that there is no continuity from Pin E to any
other pin of electrical connector.
(2) Apply 24 VDC across Pins A and B of electrical connector to energize electromagnet assembly
and activate switch. There must be continuity from Pin E to Pin C. There must be no continuity
from Pin D to any other pin of electrical connector.
(3) Perform leakage test of anti-ice shutoff valve assembly as follows:
(a) Connect anti-ice valve assembly to test set-up as illustrated in Figure 13001.
(b) Connect a source of clean, compressed air, capable of maintaining a pressure of 60 PSIG
(413.7 kPa) to test set-up.
(c) Adjust pressure regulator to read 60 PSIG (413.7 kPa) on pressure gage, 0 to 60 PSIG (0
to 414 kPa) upstream of orifice.
(d) If pressure indication on pressure gage, 0 to 60 PSIG (0 to 414 kPa) downstream of orifice
is less than 38 PSIG (262.0 kPa), valve is leaking excessively and must be repaired. Refer
(4) Install anti-ice shutoff valve assembly on engine and perform functional test with engine operating.

3. FLOW RESTRICTOR (0.055-INCH (1.40
MM) DIAMETER)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13002
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY TESTING
ALL Page 13003
75-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ANTI-ICING SHIELD ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the anti-icing shield assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 75-10-02-020-802-A01)
B. Remove Anti-Icing Shield Assembly (Subtask 75-10-02-020-004-A01)
(1) Disconnect electrical connector to anti-ice shutoff valve assembly.

(2) Disconnect anti-ice valve plumbing from anti-icing shield assembly (25, Figure 3001). Refer to
(3) Remove bolts (5, 15), washers (10, 20), and anti-icing shield assembly (25).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
75-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Anti-Icing Shield Assembly (GRAPHIC 75-10-02-99B-001-A01)
5. BOLT 20. WASHER

10. WASHER 25. ANTI-ICING SHIELD ASSEMBLY
15. BOLT
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
75-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ANTI-ICING SHIELD ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the anti-icing shield assembly.



APPLICABLE.
and engine fuels.

compound
2. Procedure (TASK 75-10-02-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
75-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Anti-Ice Shield Assembly (Subtask 75-10-02-420-004-A01)
NOTE: Apply Liqui-Moly brand NV thread compound, anti-seize lubricant to threads of bolts, and
clean, approved engine oil to threads (except first two threads) of male plumbing fittings
unless otherwise specified.
(1) Install anti-icing shield assembly (25, Figure 4001) with bolts (5, 15) and washers (10, 20).
(2) Connect anti-ice valve plumbing to anti-icing shield assembly (25). Refer to INSTALLATION
(PGBLK 75-10-01-4000).
(3) Connect electrical connector to anti-ice shutoff valve.
5. BOLT 20. WASHER

15. BOLT
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
75-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 4003
75-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ANTI-ICING SHIELD ASSEMBLY – CLEANING
(1) Use these procedures to clean the anti-icing shield assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 75-10-02-100-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 6001
75-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Clean Anti-Ice Shield Assembly (Subtask 75-10-02-100-004-A01)

CAUTION: TO PREVENT DETERIORATION OF SILICONE RUBBER BASE SEALS AND GASKETS,
DO NOT ALLOW SEALS OR GASKETS TO COME IN CONTACT WITH SOLVENT. MAKE
SURE THAT SURFACES WHICH CONTACT SEALS AND GASKETS ARE FREE OF
RESIDUE WHEN SOLVENT IS USED.
Method No. 1 or 2.
(2) Clean anti-icing shield assembly (25, Figure 6001). Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 75-10-02-9000).
5. BOLT 20. WASHER

15. BOLT
UP495246
ALL Page 6002
75-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 6003
75-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ANTI-ICING SHIELD ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK
(1) Use these procedures to inspect the anti-icing shield assembly.



APPLICABLE.

2. Procedure (TASK 75-10-02-200-802-A01)
B. Inspect Anti-Ice Shield Assembly (Subtask 75-10-02-200-004-A01)
(1) Visually inspect for cracks, distortion, and other damage. Replace damaged anti-icing shield
assembly.
(2) Visually inspect for peeling of insulation material. Anti-icing shield assembly may be repaired if
insulation material is peeling. Refer to REPAIR (PGBLK 75-10-02-9000).
UP495246
ALL Page 8001
75-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
ALL Page 8002
75-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
ANTI-ICING SHIELD ASSEMBLY – REPAIR
(1) Use these procedures to repair the anti-icing shield assembly.



APPLICABLE.
Silastic 732 RTV adhesive sealant (MIL-A-46106, CAGE: 71984

Group III)
2. Procedure (TASK 75-10-02-300-802-A01)
B. Disassemble Anti-Icing Shield Assembly for Repair (Subtask 75-10-02-300-004-A01)
(1) Remove nut (45, Figure 9001) and fitting (50).

(2) Strip off gaskets (5, 10) and seals (15, 20, 25, 30, 35), as required.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9001
75-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9001. (Sheet 1 of 1) Anti-Icing Shield Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 75-10-02-99B-001-A01)
5. GASKET 35. SEAL

15. SEAL 45. NUT
20. SEAL 50. FITTING
25. SEAL 55. SHIELD
30. SEAL
C. Clean Parts (Subtask 75-10-02-300-005-A01)

(1) Clean anti-icing shield assembly with MIL-PRF-680, solvent making sure that all gaskets and
seal material has been removed.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9002
75-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(2) Dry parts with clean, low pressure compressed air.
D. Assemble Anti-Icing Shield Assembly (Subtask 75-10-02-300-007-A01)
(1) Thoroughly clean interfacing surfaces seals and shield assembly using MIL-PRF-680, solvent.
Do not get solution on seals (15, 20, 25, 30, 35, Figure 9002) or gaskets (5, 10) not being
replaced.
(2) Apply a uniform layer of Silastic 732 RTV, adhesive sealant to cleaned surfaces.
(3) Position gaskets (5, 10) and seals (15, 20, 25, 30, 35). Use sufficient pressure to displace air
between gasket and shield assembly.
(4) Allow bonded joints to cure at room temperature for 24 hours. Do not apply heat.
CAUTION: SUPPORT FITTING WHILE TIGHTENING NUT.
(5) Install fitting (50) and secure with nut (45). Torque nut to 70 to 90 in-lb (7.9 to 10.2 Nm).
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9003
75-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 9002. (Sheet 1 of 1) Anti-Icing Shield Assembly Repair (GRAPHIC 75-10-02-99B-002-A01)
5. GASKET 35. SEAL

15. SEAL 45. NUT
20. SEAL 50. FITTING
25. SEAL 55. SHIELD
30. SEAL
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REPAIR
ALL Page 9004
75-10-02 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

LEP-1 31 Jan 2012 4007 31 Jan 2012
LEP-2 31 Jan 2012 4008 31 Jan 2012
LEP-3 31 Jan 2012 4009 31 Jan 2012
LEP-4 31 Jan 2012 4010 31 Jan 2012
TC-1 31 Jan 2012 4012 31 Jan 2012
TC-2 31 Jan 2012 4013 31 Jan 2012
76-10-00 4014 31 Jan 2012
POWER CONTROL 4015 31 Jan 2012
(ENGINE 4016 31 Jan 2012
CONTROLS) – SYSTEM 4017 31 Jan 2012
1 31 Jan 2012 4019 31 Jan 2012
2 31 Jan 2012 4020 31 Jan 2012
76-10-01 4021 31 Jan 2012
CONTROLS LINKAGE 4022 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 4024 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012 4025 31 Jan 2012
3003 31 Jan 2012 4026 31 Jan 2012
3004 31 Jan 2012 4027 31 Jan 2012
3005 31 Jan 2012 4028 31 Jan 2012
3006 31 Jan 2012 4029 31 Jan 2012
3007 31 Jan 2012 4030 31 Jan 2012
3008 31 Jan 2012 4031 31 Jan 2012
3009 31 Jan 2012 4032 31 Jan 2012
3010 31 Jan 2012 4033 31 Jan 2012
3011 31 Jan 2012 4034 31 Jan 2012
3012 31 Jan 2012 4035 31 Jan 2012
3013 31 Jan 2012 4036 31 Jan 2012
3014 31 Jan 2012 4037 31 Jan 2012
4001 31 Jan 2012 4040 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012 4041 31 Jan 2012
4003 31 Jan 2012 4042 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012 4043 31 Jan 2012
4005 31 Jan 2012 4044 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-1
76-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CONTROLS LINKAGE 76-10-02

ASSEMBLY – CLEANING INPUT
6001 31 Jan 2012 LEVER – REMOVAL
6002 31 Jan 2012 3001 31 Jan 2012
CHECK 3004 31 Jan 2012
8001 31 Jan 2012 INPUT
8002 31 Jan 2012 LEVER – INSTALLATION
8003 31 Jan 2012 4001 31 Jan 2012
8004 31 Jan 2012 4002 31 Jan 2012
8005 31 Jan 2012 4003 31 Jan 2012
8006 31 Jan 2012 4004 31 Jan 2012
8007 31 Jan 2012 4005 31 Jan 2012
8008 31 Jan 2012 4006 31 Jan 2012
8009 31 Jan 2012 INPUT
8010 31 Jan 2012 LEVER – CLEANING
8011 31 Jan 2012 6001 31 Jan 2012
8012 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
CONTROLS LINKAGE INPUT
ASSEMBLY – TESTING LEVER – INSPECTION/
13001 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
13002 31 Jan 2012 8001 31 Jan 2012
13003 31 Jan 2012 8002 31 Jan 2012
13004 31 Jan 2012 76-10-04
13005 31 Jan 2012 PRESSURE RATIO
13006 31 Jan 2012 TRANSDUCER AND
13007 31 Jan 2012 EXHAUST PRESSURE
13008 31 Jan 2012 (PS5)
13009 31 Jan 2012 PLUMBING – REMOVAL
13010 31 Jan 2012 3001 31 Jan 2012
13011 31 Jan 2012 3002 31 Jan 2012
13012 31 Jan 2012 3003 31 Jan 2012
13013 31 Jan 2012 3004 31 Jan 2012
13014 31 Jan 2012 PRESSURE RATIO
13015 31 Jan 2012 TRANSDUCER AND
13016 31 Jan 2012 EXHAUST PRESSURE

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-2
76-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(PS5) SRL AUTO-START

PLUMBING–INSTALLATION CONTROLLER AND SRL
4001 31 Jan 2012 TT2
4002 31 Jan 2012 SENSOR – CLEANING
4003 31 Jan 2012 6001 31 Jan 2012
4004 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
PRESSURE RATIO 6003 31 Jan 2012
TRANSDUCER AND 6004 31 Jan 2012
EXHAUST PRESSURE SRL AUTO-START
(PS5) CONTROLLER AND SRL
PLUMBING – CLEANING TT2
6001 31 Jan 2012 SENSOR – INSPECTION/
6002 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
PRESSURE RATIO 8001 31 Jan 2012
TRANSDUCER AND 8002 31 Jan 2012
EXHAUST PRESSURE 8003 31 Jan 2012
(PS5) 8004 31 Jan 2012
PLUMBING – INSPECTION/ SRL AUTO-START
CHECK CONTROLLER AND SRL
8001 31 Jan 2012 TT2 SENSOR – TESTING
8002 31 Jan 2012 13001 31 Jan 2012
76-10-07 13002 31 Jan 2012
SRL AUTO-START 76-10-08
CONTROLLER AND SRL TORQUE SIGNAL
TT2 CONDITIONER–REMOVAL
SENSOR – REMOVAL 3001 31 Jan 2012
3001 31 Jan 2012 3002 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012 TORQUE SIGNAL
3003 31 Jan 2012 CONDITIONER–INSTALLATION
3004 31 Jan 2012 4001 31 Jan 2012
SRL AUTO-START 4002 31 Jan 2012
CONTROLLER AND SRL TORQUE SIGNAL
TT2 CONDITIONER–CLEANING
SENSOR – INSTALLATION 6001 31 Jan 2012
4001 31 Jan 2012 6002 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012 TORQUE SIGNAL
4003 31 Jan 2012 CONDITIONER–INSPECTION/
4004 31 Jan 2012 CHECK
8001 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-3
76-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
8002 31 Jan 2012 TORQUE AND

TORQUE SIGNAL TEMPERATURE LIMITER
CONDITIONER – TESTING CONTROLLER – TESTING
13001 31 Jan 2012 13001 31 Jan 2012
13002 31 Jan 2012 13002 31 Jan 2012
13003 31 Jan 2012 13003 31 Jan 2012
13004 31 Jan 2012 13004 31 Jan 2012
13005 31 Jan 2012
13006 31 Jan 2012
13007 31 Jan 2012
13008 31 Jan 2012
13009 31 Jan 2012
13010 31 Jan 2012
13011 31 Jan 2012
13012 31 Jan 2012
13013 31 Jan 2012
13014 31 Jan 2012
76-10-09
TORQUE AND
TEMPERATURE LIMITER
CONTROLLER–REMOVAL
3001 31 Jan 2012
3002 31 Jan 2012
TORQUE AND
TEMPERATURE LIMITER
CONTROLLER–INSTALLATION
4001 31 Jan 2012
4002 31 Jan 2012
TORQUE AND
TEMPERATURE LIMITER
CONTROLLER–CLEANING
6001 31 Jan 2012
6002 31 Jan 2012
TORQUE AND
TEMPERATURE LIMITER
CONTROLLER–INSPECTION/
CHECK
8001 31 Jan 2012
8002 31 Jan 2012

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page LEP-4
76-EFF 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER – 76
Title Page
CHAPTER 76 – ENGINE CONTROLS

Section 76-10 – 76-10-00........................................................................................................ 1
Subject 76-10-00 – POWER CONTROL (ENGINE CONTROLS).................................. 1
POWER CONTROL (ENGINE CONTROLS) – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION............ 1
Subject 76-10-01 – CONTROLS LINKAGE ASSEMBLY............................................... 3001
CONTROLS LINKAGE ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL................................................ 3001
CONTROLS LINKAGE ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION........................................ 4001
CONTROLS LINKAGE ASSEMBLY – CLEANING................................................ 6001
CONTROLS LINKAGE ASSEMBLY – INSPECTION/CHECK.............................. 8001
CONTROLS LINKAGE ASSEMBLY – TESTING.................................................. 13001
Subject 76-10-02 – INPUT LEVER................................................................................. 3001
INPUT LEVER – REMOVAL.................................................................................. 3001
INPUT LEVER – INSTALLATION.......................................................................... 4001
INPUT LEVER – CLEANING................................................................................. 6001
INPUT LEVER – INSPECTION/CHECK................................................................ 8001
Subject 76-10-04 – PRESSURE RATIO TRANSDUCER AND EXHAUST PRESSURE 3001
(PS5) PLUMBING...........................................................................................................
PRESSURE RATIO TRANSDUCER AND EXHAUST PRESSURE (PS5) 3001
PLUMBING – REMOVAL.......................................................................................
PLUMBING – INSTALLATION...............................................................................
PLUMBING – CLEANING......................................................................................
PLUMBING – INSPECTION/CHECK.....................................................................
Subject 76-10-07 – SRL AUTO-START CONTROLLER AND SRL TT2 SENSOR....... 3001
SRL AUTO-START CONTROLLER AND SRL TT2 SENSOR – REMOVAL......... 3001
SRL AUTO-START CONTROLLER AND SRL TT2 SENSOR – INSTALLATION..... 4001
SRL AUTO-START CONTROLLER AND SRL TT2 SENSOR – CLEANING........ 6001
SRL AUTO-START CONTROLLER AND SRL TT2 8001
SENSOR – INSPECTION/CHECK........................................................................
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-1
76-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

Title Page
SRL AUTO-START CONTROLLER AND SRL TT2 SENSOR – TESTING........... 13001

Subject 76-10-08 – TORQUE SIGNAL CONDITIONER................................................ 3001
TORQUE SIGNAL CONDITIONER – REMOVAL.................................................. 3001
TORQUE SIGNAL CONDITIONER – INSTALLATION.......................................... 4001
TORQUE SIGNAL CONDITIONER – CLEANING................................................. 6001
TORQUE SIGNAL CONDITIONER – INSPECTION/CHECK................................ 8001
TORQUE SIGNAL CONDITIONER – TESTING.................................................... 13001
Subject 76-10-09 – TORQUE AND TEMPERATURE LIMITER CONTROLLER........... 3001
TORQUE AND TEMPERATURE LIMITER CONTROLLER – REMOVAL............ 3001
TORQUE AND TEMPERATURE LIMITER CONTROLLER – INSTALLATION..... 4001
TORQUE AND TEMPERATURE LIMITER CONTROLLER – CLEANING............ 6001
TORQUE AND TEMPERATURE LIMITER 8001
CONTROLLER – INSPECTION/CHECK...............................................................
TORQUE AND TEMPERATURE LIMITER CONTROLLER – TESTING.............. 13001
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY
All Page TC-2
76-TOC 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
POWER CONTROL (ENGINE CONTROLS) – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Controls Linkage Assembly (Subtask 76-10-00-870-001-A01)
(1) The power control of the engine is accomplished by means of the controls linkage assembly,
and the various control components. The controls linkage assembly on the engine serves to
interconnect the control components and coordinate their function. The MFV shaft which positions
the main metering valve protrudes from the fuel control unit. Mechanical linkage connects the
MFV shaft to the PPC cam shaft, and coordinated into a single cockpit control, provides for pilot
control of the propeller blade pitch-angle during beta-mode and power in the propeller-governing
mode. Mechanical linkage connects the speed lever shaft to the PG speed control shaft and,
coordinated into a single cockpit control, provides for pilot control of the USFG speed setting
during beta-mode and pilot control of the PG speed-governing point during PG mode. The USFG
is set slightly below the PG setting to prevent governor interference between the two speed
control governors.
B. SRL Auto-Start Controller (Subtask 76-10-00-870-002-A01)
(1) The SRL auto-start controller is remotely located from the engine and receives input signals in
the form of speed signal, compressor inlet temperature, EGT, airspeed and altitude. From these
inputs, controller output signals are generated which permit control of automatic starting,
acceleration fuel schedule, EGT correction, EGT calculation monitor, and speed switching
outputs.
C. Pressure Ratio Transducer (Subtask 76-10-00-870-003-A01)
(1) The air speed and ambient absolute pressure ratio (delta P/P) is sensed by an engine-supplied
airframe-mounted transducer which receives signals of total and static pressures from the
airframe pitot-static system. The transducer output is a DC voltage directly proportional to the
following relationship:
V out = (Ptotal − Pstatic) ÷ Pstatic
D. Torque and Temperature Limiter Controller (Subtask 76-10-00-870-004-A01)
(1) The electronic controller utilizes 28 VDC power and receives inputs from the torque signal
conditioner and the EGT section of the SRL controller. The electrical output of the controller is
provided to the torque/temperature limiter by-pass valve.
UP495246

ALL Page 1
76-10-00 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CONTROLS LINKAGE ASSEMBLY – REMOVAL
(1) Use these procedures to remove the controls linkage assembly.



APPLICABLE.
for silver pencil)
pencil)
2. Procedure (TASK 76-10-01-020-802-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3001
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Remove Controls Linkage Assembly (Subtask 76-10-01-020-004-A01)
NOTE: Procedures are provided for complete disassembly and reassembly. However, the linkage
should be disassembled only to the extent required for the component being replaced. Do
not remove rod end bearings and associated nuts unless replacement is required.
NOTE: If rigging check only is required, refer to TESTING (PGBLK 76-10-01-13000).
(1) Remove USFG speed setting lever and rod.
(a) Remove USFG input lever. Refer to REMOVAL (PGBLK 76-10-02-3000).
NOTE: Make index marks using Verithin No. 753, silver pencil or Violet, No. 127 1/2,
industrial marking ink, or Yellow No. 170T, China marker to show relationship
of USFG input lever to shaft for re-assembly.
(b) Remove serrated arm (135, Figure 3001) and spacers (140, 145, 150).
(c) Remove pins (5, 40), nuts (10, 45), washers (15, 20, 35, 50, 55, 60), serrated plate (30),
and bolts (25, 65). Remove assembled USFG rod.
(d) Loosen nuts (85, 105). Disassemble rod end bearings (70, 90), washers (75, 80, 95, 100),
nuts, and plain stud (110).
NOTE: Do not disassemble USFG rod unless damage is indicated by inspection.
(e) Loosen screw (155). Remove serrated lever assembly (175) and spacer (180).
(f) Remove screw (155) and washer (160), as required.
(2) Remove PG adjustment screw and rod.
(a) Remove bolt (5, Figure 3002), washer (10), and spacers (15).
(b) Remove nut (20) and screw (30).
(c) Remove pin (40), nut (45), washers (50, 55, 65), and bolt (60).
(d) Remove assembled PG rod.
(e) Loosen nuts (85, 105). Disassemble rod end bearings (70, 90), washers (75, 80, 95, 100),
NOTE: Do not disassemble PG rod unless damage is indicated by inspection.
(3) Remove MFV arm assembly and rod.

(a) Remove pins (5, 25, Figure 3003), nuts (10, 30), washers (15, 20, 35, 45, 50), and bolt
(40).
(b) Remove assembled MFV rod.
(c) Loosen nuts (70, 90). Disassemble rod end bearings (55, 75), washers (60, 65, 80, 85),
NOTE: Do not disassemble MFV rod unless damage is indicated by inspection.
(d) Remove screw (110), washer (115), and spacer (120) from MFV shaft.
(e) Loosen screw (105). Remove arm assembly (125) from MFV shaft.
(f) Remove arm (140) from MFV shaft.
(4) Remove PPC rigging plate, quadrant plate, lever, and rod.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3002
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(a) Remove pins (5, 35, Figure 3004), nuts (10, 40), washers (15, 20, 25, 45, 50, 55), and
bolts (30, 60).
(b) Remove assembled PPC rod.
NOTE: Do not disassemble PPC rod unless damage is indicated by inspection.
(c) Loosen nuts (80, 100). Disassemble rod end bearings (65, 85), washers (70, 75, 90, 95),
(d) Remove screw (110), washer (115), lever (130), and washer (147) from PPC shaft.
(e) Remove screws (135), washers (140), quadrant plate (145), sleeve spacer (150), and
rigging plate (155) from PPC.
(5) Remove and disassemble concentric shaft assembly.
NOTE: Do not disassemble concentric shaft assembly unless performing a major CAM
inspection or damage is evident. Complete only if further disassembly is required.
(a) Remove screws and washers securing shaft assembly to fuel control assembly. Separate
concentric shaft assembly from fuel control assembly.
(b) Remove screw (5, Figure 3005) and washer (10), Lever D (35), and washers (40, 45, 50)
from inner shaft assembly (90).
(c) Remove Screw W (15) if damaged.
(d) Remove inner shaft assembly (90) from outer shaft (155). Refer to INSPECTION/CHECK
(PGBLK 76-10-01-8000) for inspection of inner shaft assembly (90).
(e) Remove Lever C (110) and washers (115, 120) from outer shaft (155).
(f) Remove Screws V and X (95) if damaged.
(g) Remove spring retainer (55) and spring assembly (60) from outer shaft (155).
(h) Remove screw (65) and washer (70), and remove Lever B (85) from outer shaft (155).
(i) Remove outer shaft (155) and Lever A (135) from fuel pump assembly brackets.
(j) Loosen bolt (130). Remove Lever A (135) from outer shaft (155).
(k) Remove bolt (130) and nut (125) if damaged.
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3003
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3001. (Sheet 1 of 1) USFG Speed Setting Lever and Rod Removal (GRAPHIC 76-10-01-99B-001-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3004
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. PIN 90. ROD END BEARING

10. NUT 95.
1 WASHER
1 WASHER 1 WASHER
15. 100.
20. WASHER 105. NUT
25. BOLT 110. PLAIN STUD
30. SERRATED PLATE 125. SCREW
40. PIN 135. SERRATED ARM
45. NUT 140. SPACER
1 WASHER 145. SPACER
50.
60. WASHER 155. SCREW
65. BOLT 160.
1 WASHER
70. ROD END BEARING 170. INSERT

1 WASHER 175. SERRATED LEVER ASSEMBLY
75.
1 WASHER 180. SPACER
80.
85. NUT
NOTES:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3005
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3002. (Sheet 1 of 1) PG Adjustment Screw and Rod Removal (GRAPHIC 76-10-01-99B-002-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3006
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. BOLT 65. WASHER

1 WASHER 70. ROD END BEARING
10.
15. SPACER 75.
1 WASHER
20. NUT 80.

1 WASHER
30. SCREW 85. NUT

35. INSERT 90. ROD END BEARING
40. PIN 95.
1 WASHER
45. NUT 100.

1 WASHER
1 WASHER 105. NUT
50.
55. WASHER 110. PLAIN STUD
60. BOLT
NOTES:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3007
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3003. (Sheet 1 of 1) MFV Arm Assembly and Rod Removal (GRAPHIC 76-10-01-99B-003-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3008
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

10. NUT 80.
1 WASHER
1 WASHER 1 WASHER
15. 85.
1 WASHER 90. NUT
20.
25. PIN 95. PLAIN STUD
30. NUT 100. NUT
1 WASHER 105. SCREW
35.
40. BOLT 110. SCREW
55. ROD END BEARING 125. ARM ASSEMBLY
1 WASHER 135. INSERT
60.
1 WASHER 140. ARM
65.
70. NUT
NOTES:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3009
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3004. (Sheet 1 of 1) PPC Arm and Rod Removal (GRAPHIC 76-10-01-99B-004-A01)
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3010
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)

10. NUT 90.
1 WASHER
1 WASHER 1 WASHER
15. 95.
20. WASHER 100. NUT
25. WASHER 105. PLAIN STUD
30. BOLT 110. SCREW
35. PIN 115. WASHER
40. NUT 125. INSERT
1 WASHER 130. LEVER
45.
50. WASHER 135. SCREW
60. BOLT 145. QUADRANT PLATE
65. ROD END BEARING 147. WASHER
1 WASHER 150. SLEEVE SPACER
70.
1 WASHER 155. RIGGING PLATE
75.
80. NUT
NOTES:
UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3011
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
Figure 3005. (Sheet 1 of 1) Concentric Shaft Assembly Removal (GRAPHIC 76-10-01-99B-005-A01)

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3012
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
5. SCREW 80. INSERT

10. WASHER 85. LEVER B (UPPER OUTER SHAFT)
15. SPECIAL SCREW W 90. INNER SHAFT ASSEMBLY
25. INSERT 95. SPECIAL SCREW V AND X
30. INSERT 105. INSERT
35. LEVER D (UPPER INNER SHAFT) 110. LEVER C (LOWER OUTER SHAFT)
1 WASHER 1 WASHER
40. 115.
1 WASHER 1 WASHER
45. 120.
1 WASHER 125. NUT
50.
55. UPPER OUTER SHAFT SERRATED ARM 130. BOLT
(SPRING RETAINER)
60. SPRING ASSEMBLY 135. LEVER A (LOWER OUTER SHAFT)
65. SCREW 145. BUSHING (BRONZE)
70. WASHER 150. BUSHING
155. OUTER SHAFT
NOTES:
(1) Not applicable.

UP495246
EFFECTIVITY REMOVAL
ALL Page 3013
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
CONTROLS LINKAGE ASSEMBLY – INSTALLATION
(1) Use these procedures to install the controls linkage assembly.



APPLICABLE.
Scotch Seal 1252 compound (tamper proof seal) 3M Abrasive Systems Div, 3M
Center, Building 223-6N-01, St
Paul, MN 55144-1000
2. Procedure (TASK 76-10-01-420-802-A01)

UP495246
ALL Page 4001
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
B. Install Control Linkage Assembly (Subtask 76-10-01-420-004-A01)
Add friction drag (run-down) torque of self-locking devices to recommended values.
NOTE: Assembly and subsequent rigging of engine controls is a preliminary function to establish
the position of stops, travel and travel rates for initial engine operational checks and testing
as outlined in TESTING (PGBLK 76-10-01-13000).
NOTE: After performing required tests and operational checks, additional rigging adjustments may
be required to satisfy AFM operational requirements.
(1) Assemble and install concentric shaft assembly.
(a) Install Lever A (135, Figure 4001) on bronze bushing end of outer shaft (155). Splines of
outer shaft must extend 0.010 to 0.020 inch (0.25 to 0.51 mm) through Lever A. Refer to
Figure 4002. Install bolt (130, Figure 4001) and nut (125). Torque nut to 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm).
(b) Install assembled outer shaft and Lever A in fuel pump assembly brackets.
(c) Install Lever B (85) on outer shaft (155) splines. Lever B bolt hole must be aligned 0 to 10
degrees CW of Lever A bolt hole, as viewed from outer shaft bronze bushing end. Refer
to Figure 4003, View A-A.
NOTE: Lever B alignment is critical to assembling concentric shaft. Improper alignment
will causing binding.
(d) Adjust position of Lever B to provide 0.006- to 0.014-inch (0.15 to 0.36 mm) clearance
between Lever B and the fuel pump assembly upper bracket. Install screw (65, Figure
4001), and washer (70). Torque screw to 20 to 27 in-lb (2.2 to 3.0 Nm).
(e) Install washers (115, 120) and Lever C (110) over bronze bushing (145). Bronze bushing
must extend 0.005 to 0.015 inch (0.13 to 0.38 mm) through Lever C. Refer to Figure 4004,
Section A-A. Add or remove washers, as necessary, to get the correct measurement. Refer
to IPC, 72-01-34 for details on available washer thickness.
(f) Install spring assembly (60, Figure 4001) on spring retainer (55) with face of spring tab
held against retainer stop. Refer to Figure 4004. Install spring assembly and spring retainer
on splines of outer shaft with spring tab face aligned zero to 1 spline CW of binding screw
slot.
(g) Rotate spring assembly so the opposite (free) end is engaged in Lever B retaining groove.
Refer to Figure 4004, Section C-C.
(h) Check spring tab face for correct alignment. If incorrect, repeat the following procedure:
1 Install spring assembly (60, Figure 4001) on spring retainer (55) with face of spring
tab held against retainer stop. Refer to Figure 4004. Install spring assembly and
spring retainer on splines of outer shaft with spring tab face aligned zero to 1 spline
CW of binding screw slot.
2 Rotate spring assembly so the opposite (free) end is engaged in Lever B retaining
groove. Refer to Figure 4004, Section C-C.
(i) Insert inner shaft assembly (90, Figure 4001) in assembled outer shaft (155) from bronze
bushing (145) end.
NOTE: Inner shaft flange will ride on end of bronze bushing.
UP495246
ALL Page 4002
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(j) Install washers (40, 45, 50) (approximately 0.146 inch (3.71 mm)) on inner shaft assembly
splined end.
NOTE: Make sure that inner shaft assembly (90) flange touches the outer shaft (155)
bronze bushing (145).
(k) Install Lever D (35) on end of inner shaft assembly so shaft extends through Lever D and
the retaining screw hole aligns with shaft groove. Refer to Figure 4005, Section B-B. Install
washer (10, Figure 4001) and screw (5) in Lever D. Torque screw to 33 in-lb (3.7 Nm).
NOTE: Before reinstalling Lever D, make sure that Levers A and C and inner shaft
screw stop tab are properly aligned as shown in Figure 4006.
(l) Measure the clearance between the top of bronze bushing and the of inner shaft flange.
The clearance must be 0.006 to 0.014 inch (0.15 to 0.36 mm). Refer to Figure 4005, Section
A-A. Add or remove washers (40, 45, 50, Figure 4001), as necessary, to get the correct
clearance. Refer to IPC, 72-01-34 for details on available washer thickness.
(m) Remove and reinstall Lever D at an angle of 58 to 68 degrees, when measured between
centerline of Lever D and stop tab of inner shaft assembly. Refer to Figure 4005, Section
C-C.
(n) Check for correct alignment of Lever D screw hole and inner shaft groove assembly. Install
washer (10, Figure 4001) and screw (5). Torque screw to 33 in-lb (3.7 Nm). Recheck the
clearance. If incorrect, repeat the following procedure:
1 Remove and reinstall Lever D at an angle of 58 to 68 degrees, when measured
between centerline of Lever D and stop tab of inner shaft assembly. Refer to Figure
4005, Section C-C.
(o) Install Special Screw W (15) in Lever D (35) and Special Screws V and X (95) in Lever C
(110) until approximately five threads extend through levers.
(p) Make sure that all clearances and angles are correct. When all steps in the rigging
procedures have been accomplished, refer to Paragraph 2.C. Install Pins, Lockwire, and
Apply Compound Stripes (Subtask 76-10-01-420-005-A01).
(2) Install PPC rigging plate, quadrant plate, lever, and rod.
(a) Install rigging plate (155, Figure 4007), quadrant plate (145), and sleeve spacer (150) on
PPC shaft. Install washers (140) and screws (135) to hold plates, but do not tighten screw
at this time. Turn rigging plate and protractor CW until they touch the screws.
(b) Install washer (147) on PPC shaft.
(c) Install PPC lever (130) on PPC shaft so pointer is aligned to as near zero degrees as
possible. Install screw (110) and washer (115). Torque screw to 28 to 33 in-lb (3.2 to 3.7
Nm).
NOTE: Make sure that PPC shaft is in the full reverse (CW) position.
UP495246
ALL Page 4003
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

TPE331-12 (72-01-36)
(d) With PPC shaft held in full reverse (CW), adjust rigging plate and protractor so a 1/8-inch
rigging pin can be inserted through rigging pin hole and rigging plate full reverse slot. Refer
to Figure 4008.
(e) Adjust quadrant plate and rigging plate, as necessary, for ease of rigging pin installation
at both the zero and 40-degree positions. Align zero degrees on quadrant plate with tip of
pointer on PPC arm and align 40 degrees in center of flight idle rigging pin slot. Torque
screws (135, Figure 4007) to 28 to 33 in-lb (3.2 to 3.7 Nm).
(f) Remove rigging pin and make sure that PPC shaft turns freely. PPC lever must have a
minimum protractor movement of zero (full reverse) to 97 degrees.
(g) Measure the distance from center of PPC shaft to 1-inch (25.4 mm) diameter machined
surface of fuel pump assembly bracket. Record measurement as Dimension A. Refer to
Figure 4008, Section B-B.
(h) If PPC rod is disassembled, assemble nuts (80, 100, Figure 4007), washers (15, 20, 25,
45, 50, 55), rod ends bearings (65, 85), and plain stud (105).
(i) Adjust length of PPC rod (measured from centerline to centerline of bolt holes in rod end
bearings) to Dimension A + 0.48 to 0.52 inch (12.2 to 13.2 mm).
(j) Make sure that length of exposed threads of stud are within dimensions shown in Figure
4008, View A-A. If dimensions are not met, remove rod end bearing and add or remove
washers, as required, or select different length stud. Make sure that a 0.050-inch wire will
not pass through witness hole in rod ends.
(k) Torque nuts (80, 100, Figure 4007) to 20 to 25 in-lb (2.2 to 2.8 Nm). Check for correct rod
end alignment and equal number of exposed threads on plain stud.
(l) Measure the length of PPC rod to make sure that rod length has not changed (Dimension
A + 0.48 to 0.52 inch (12.2 to 13.2 mm)). If PPC rod length has changed, loosen nuts (80,
100), then repeat the following procedure:
1 Adjust length of PPC rod (measured from centerline to centerline of bolt holes in rod
end bearings) to Dimension A + 0.48 to 0.52 inch (12.2 to 13.2 mm).
2 Make sure that length of exposed threads of stud are within dimensions shown in
Figure 4008, View A-A. If dimensions are not met, remove rod end bearing and add
or remove washers, as required, or select different length stud. Make sure that a
0.050-inch wire will not pass through witness hole in rod ends.
3 Torque nuts (80, 100, Figure 4007) to 20 to 25 in-lb (2.2 to 2.8 Nm). Check for correct
rod end alignment and equal number of exposed threads on plain stud.
(m) Install bolt (60) through concentric shaft assembly Lever B. Install washer (55), PPC rod,
washers (45, 50), and nut (40) on bolt. Torque nut to 12 to 15 in-lb (1.4 to 1.7 Nm).
(n) Install bolt (30) through PPC lever (130, Figure 4007). Install washer (25), PPC rod, washers
(15, 20), and nut (10) on bolt. Torque nut to 12 to 15 in-lb (1.4 to 1.7 Nm).
(o) Make sure that the PPC shaft turns freely. PPC lever must have a minimum protractor
movement of zero (full reverse) to 97 degrees.
(p) Turn PPC lever CW to the zero degrees (full reverse) position and install rigging pin.
UP495246
ALL Page 4004
76-10-01 31 Jan 2012

Engine Maintenance Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engine Maintenance Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engine Maintenance Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RELEASED FOR THE EXCLUSIVE USE BY: AIRCRAFT TECHNICAL PUBLISHERS

Honeywell International Inc.

Engine Maintenance Manual

Turboprop Aircraft Engine

Publication Number 72-01-36, Revision 6 Initial 31 Jan 1990

ENGINE MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Honeywell Materials License Agreement

ENGINE MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Copyright 1990, 2012 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.

ENGINE MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Table TI-1. Applicable Engines

Engine PN Engine Model No. Aircraft Application

Table TI-2 shows the revision history of this EMM.

Table TI-2. Revision History

Revision No. Revision Date

ENGINE MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Task/Page Description of Change Effectivity

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Added metric conversions to all U.S. All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Converted AA to microinches. All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Updated special tools, fixtures, and equipment to All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed terminology, corrected typographical All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed all brackets [ ] to parentheses ( ). All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed all instances of the word “ensure”, All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed all instances of “trouble shooting”, All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed “…in accordance with…” to “. Refer to…”. All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed “…as follows.” to “…as follows:”. All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed “Manufacturers’” to “Manufacturer’s”. All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed “MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS” All

ENGINE MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Table of Highlights (Cont)

Task/Page Description of Change Effectivity

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Changed all Special Tools, Fixtures, and All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Deleted DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION section. All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Deleted TROUBLESHOOTING section. Information All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Deleted REMOVAL/INSTALLATION section. All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Deleted ADJUSTMENT/TEST section. Information All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Deleted CLEANING/PAINTING section. Information All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Deleted APPROVED REPAIRS section. All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Hyperlinks have been added in place of references. All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Added hot parts Warning where needed. All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Added standard Warnings, Cautions and Notes to All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Updated callouts, footnotes, and item All

ENGINE MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Table of Highlights (Cont)

Task/Page Description of Change Effectivity

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Figures have been duplicated in new or split All

TRANSMITTAL INFORMATION Temporary Revisions 72-190 thru 72-193, 72-199 All

SERVICE BULLETIN LIST Revised Service Bulletin list to include: All

INTRODUCTION Added JEMTOSS information. All

INTRODUCTION Added paragraph 1.C. Observance of Manual All

INTRODUCTION Added paragraph 1.D. Units of Measure. All

INTRODUCTION Changed title of paragraph 1.E. All

INTRODUCTION Added paragraph 1.F. Page Number Block All

INTRODUCTION Added paragraph 1.G. Application of Jet Engine All

INTRODUCTION Added paragraph 2. Customer Support Center All

INTRODUCTION Added paragraph 3. References. All

Subtask 70-00-00-200-006-A01 Redefined FPI requirements. All

Subtask 70-00-00-430-004-A01 Updated Table 10005: Standard Torque Values All

ENGINE MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Table of Highlights (Cont)